SP21

1
SUMltiARIES OF
INDIAN STANDARDS
FOR
BUILDING MATERIALS
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
SUMMARIES OF
INDIAN STANDARDS
FOR
BUILDING MATERIALS
1 INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION

? MANAK BHAVAN,, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARC
NEW DELHI 110002
SP : 21 (S&T)-1983
FIRST PUBLISHED MARCH 1985

@ INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION
UDC 691: 006*3/4
PRICE Rs%XAKI 53 A-
PRINTED IN 1NDlA
AT MANIPAL POWER PRESS, MANIPAL
AND PUBLISHED BY
INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION, NEW DELHI 110002
SPECIAL COMMITTEE FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF SCIENCE AND
TECHNOLOGY PROJECTS (SCIP)
Chairman
DRH. C. VISVESVARAYA
Cement Research Institute of India, New Delhi
Members Representing
Shri A. K. Banerjee Metallurgical and Engineering Consultants India Limited, Ranchi
Shri J. D. Chaturvedi Planning Commission, Ministry of Planning, New Delhi
Director Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee

Shri Gurnam Singh Ministry of Food & Civil Supplies (Finance Division), New Delhi
Shri U. R. Kurlekar Ministry of Food and Civil Supplies, New Delhi

Dr M. Ramaiah Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Madras
Shri G. S. Rao Central Public Works Department, CDO, New Delhi
Shri.A. Chakraborty (Alternate)
Shri T. S. Ratnam Ministry of Finance, Bureau of Public Enterprises, New Delhi
Shri V. Rao Aiyagari Department of Science and Technology, New Delhi

Shri Cl. Raman (Member Secretary) Indian Standards Institution, New Delhi
FOREWORD
Users of various civil engineering codes have been feeling the need for explanatory handbooks and other
compilations based on Indian Standards. The need has been further emphasized in view of the publication
of the National Building Code of India in 1970 and its implementation. The Expert Group set up in 1972 by
the Department of Science and Technology, Government of India carried out in-depth studies in various
areas of civil engineering and construction practices. During the preparation of the Fifth Five Year Plan in
1975, the Group was assigned the task of producing a Science and Technology plan for research,
development and extension work in the sector of housing and construction technology. One of the items of
this plan was the production of design handbooks, explanatory handbooks and design aids based on the
National Building Code and various Indian Standards and other activities in the promotion of the National
Building Code. The Expert Group gave high priority to this item and on the recommendation of the
Department of Science and Technology, the Planning Commission approved the following two projects
which were assigned to the Indian Standards Institution:
a) Development programme on Code implementation for building and civil engineering
construction; and
b) Typification for industrial buildings.
A Special Committee for Implementation of Science and Technology Projects (SCIP) consisting of
experts connected with different aspects. was set up in 1974 to advise the IS1 Directorate General in
identification and for guiding the development of the work. Under the first programme, the Committee
has so far identified subjects for several explanatory handbooks/compilations covering appropriate Indian
Standards/Codes/Specifications which include the following:
Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS : 456-1978 (SP : 16-1980)*
Explanatory Handbook on Masonry Code (SP : 20-1981)*
Explanatory Handbook on Codes of Earthquake Engineering (IS : 18931975 and IS : 4326-1976)
(SP : 22-1982)*
Explanatory Handbook on Indian Standard Codes of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete
(IS : 456-1978) (SP : 24-1983)*
Handbook on Concrete Mixes (SP : 23-1982)*
Handbook on Causes and Prevention of Cracks in Buildings (SP : 25-1984)*
Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials (SP : 21-1983)*
Concrete Reinforcement and Detailing?
Water Supply and Drainage with Special Emphasis on Plumbing?
Functional Requirements of Industrial Buildings (Lighting and Ventilation)t
Timber Engineering-t
Functional Requirements of Industrial Buildings
Foundation of Buildings
Steel Code (IS : 800)
Building Construction Practices
Bulk Storage Structures in Steel
Formwork
Fire Safety
Construction Safety Practices
Tall Buildings
Inspection of Different Items of Building Work
Loading Code
Prefabrication
*Printed.
tUnder print.
vii
One of the compilations suggested is the Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials referred
in the National Building Code of India 1970. The list of specifications referred to in Part V of the code was
carefully examined and after scrutiny by a Panel it was decided to summarise all of them except standards
relating to Paints and other specifications not of direct concern to buildings. Also any specifications
revised and new specifications prepared till December 1982 have been taken into account in this summary.
The objective of the summary is to help the practising engineer/architect/contractor or other
professionals to have guidance regarding availability of Indian Standards on various materials/products
and to give a brief summary of the contents to indicate such aspects as quality requirements, dimensions,
range of properties, limitations on use, etc. This, it is hoped, would assist the professional
engineer/architect, etc to choose the material for the purpose of their design and estimation. For actual
purchase of the material/product, latest version of the Indian Standard has to be consulted and this
summary shall not be used for such purposes.
The general format of the summaries is, scope; range of sizes; important requirements regarding
physical, mechanical and other properties; reference to. appropriate methods of testing and other related
material specifications.
The summary shall be considered informative and shall not form part of contract or agreement.
The summary is arranged as per groups of materials/products listed in Part V Building Materials of the
National Building Code of India 1983.
The summary is based dn the draft prepared by Shri 0. Muthachen, Retired Engineer-in-Chief, Central
Public Works Department (Government of India).
Some of the products covered by the summaries bear the IS1 Certification Mark, the details of which can
be obtained from the IS1 Headquarters and its regional/branch offices.
...
Vlll
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1 CEMENT AND CONCRETE 1-39
SECTION 2 POZZOLANAS 41-44
SECTION 3 BUILDING LIMES 45-54
SECTION 4 STONES 55-62
SECTION 5 CL,AY PRODUCTS FOR BUILDINGS 63-77
SECTION 6 GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS 79-86
SECTION 7 TIMBER 87-98
SECTION 8 BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS 997105
SECTION 9 FLOOR COVERINGS AND OTHER FINISHES 107-124
SECTION 10 WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING MATERIALS 125-133
SECTION 11 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS 135-238
SECTION 12 BUILDER’S HARDWARE 239-267
SECTION 13 WOOD PRODUCTS 269-288
SECTION 14 DOORS AND WINDOWS 289-309
SECTION 15 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 31 l-323
SECTION 16 STEEL. 325-345
SECTION 17 LIGHT METALS AND THEIR 4LLOYS 347-352
SECTION 18 STRUCTURAL SHAPES 353-380
SECTION 19 WELDING ELECTRODES AND WIRES 381-389
SECTION 20 THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS 391-426
SECTION 21 WIRE ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS 427-430
SECTION 22 GLASS 431-435
SECTION 23 FILLERS, STOPPERS AND PUTTIES 437-442
SECTION 24 THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS 443-452
SECTION 25 PLASTICS 453-459
SECTION 26 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 46 l-468
SECTION 27 WIRING ACCESSORIES 469-491
SECTION 28 GENERAL 493-496
ix
SECTION 1
CEMENT AND CONCRETE

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
AGGREGATES
IS : 383-1970 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete (second 3
revision)
IS : 650-1966 Standard sand for testing‘of cement (first revision) 5
CEMENT
IS : 269-1976 Ordinary and low heat Portland cement (third revision) 6
IS : 455-1976 Portland slag cement (third revision) 7
IS : 1489-1976 Portland-pozzolana cement (second revision) 8
IS : 3466-1967 Masonry cement yirst revision) 9
IS: 6452-1972 High alumina cement for structural use 10
IS : 6909-1973 Supersulphated cement 10
IS: 8041-1978 Rapid hardening Portland cement (first revision) 11
IS : 8042-1978 White Portland cement (first revision) 12
IS : 8043-1978 Hydrophobic Portland cement @rst revision) 12
IS : 8112-1976 High strength ordinary Portland cement 13
BLOCKS, PRECAST CONCRETE

IS : 2185 (Part I)-1979 Concrete masonry units: Part I Hollow and solid concrete blocks 14
(second revision)
IS: 3590-1966 Load bearing lightweight concrete blocks 15
IS : 4996-1968 Reinforced concrete fence posts 16
IS: 5482-1969 Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks 17
IS: 5751-1969 Precast concrete coping blocks 18
IS: 5758-1970 Precast concrete kerbs 18
IS: 5820-1970 Precast concrete cable covers. 20
IS: 6072-1971 Autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs 21
IS: 6073-1971 Autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor and roof slabs 22
IS : 6523-1972 Precast reinforced concrete door and window frames 23
ASBESTOS CEMENT PRODUCTS

IS:459-1970 Unreinforced corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets 24
(second revision)
IS : 1592-1980 Asbestos cement pressure pipes (second revision) 25
IS: 1626 Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and
gutter fittings and roofing fittings:
(Part I) - 1980 Part I Pipes and pipe fittings (first revision) 26
(Part II) - 1980 Part II Gutters and gutter fittings (first revision) 28
(Part III) - 198 1 Part 111Roofing fittings (first revision) 29
IS: 2096-1966 Asbestos cement flat sheets 30
IS : 2098-1964 Asbestos cement building boards 30
IS: 6908-1975 Non-pressure asbestos cement pipes and fittings for 31
sewerage and drainage
CONCRETE’PIPES
IS : 458-1971 Concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) (second revision) 32
IS : 784-1978 Prestressed concrete pipes (including fittings) (first revision) 34
IS : 1916-1963 Steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes 35
IS : 4350-1967 Concrete porous pipes for under drainage 36
IS : 7319-1974 Perforated concrete pipes 37
IS : 7322-1974 Specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes 38
2
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 383-1970 COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATES FROM NATURAL

SOURCES FOR CONCRETE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for aggregates, crushed percent for concrete for wearing surfaces (such as
or uncrushed, derived from natural sources for use in runways and roads) and 45 percent for other concrete.
the production of structural concrete including mass
concrete works. 2.4 Aggregate impact value (alternative to 2.3) shall
not exceed 30 percent by weight for concrete for
2. Requirements wearing surface and 45 percent by weight for other
concrete.
2.1 Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring
stones, gravel and sand, and shall be hard, strong, 2.5 Aggregate abrasion value shall not exceed 30
dense, durable, clear and free from veins, adherent percent for concrete for wearing surfaces and 50
coating and injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces percent for other concrete.
and deleterious substances.
2.6 Soundness (,fbr Concrete Liable to be E.~posed ta
2.2 Deleterious Muterials - Aggregates shall not
Frost Action) - Coarse and fine aggregates shall pass
contain in excess of the limits given in Table 1 of the)
the prescribed test.
standurd, harmful materials, such as pyrites, lami-
nated material, alkali, seashells, and organic im- 3. Size and Grading
purities and.those which may attack the reinforcement.
Aggregates shall not be chemically reactive with
3.1 Single-Sized and Graded CoLlrse
alkalis of cement,
Aggregates - shall be supplied in nominal sizes
2.3 Aggregate crushing value shall not exceed 30 given in the following tdble:
IS Sieve Percentage Passing for Single-Sized Aggregate of Nominal Size

Designation h
/ 7
63 mm 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm
80 mm 100 - - - - -
63 mm 85-100 100 - - - -
40 mm o- 30 85-100 - -
20 mm o-5 O-20 S:?OO -
100 - -
16 mm - - -- 85-100 IO0
12.5 mm - - - - 85-100 I%
10 mm o-5 o-5 O-20 O-30 o-45 85-100
4.75 mm - - o-5 o-5 O-IO O-20
2.36 mm - - - - - o-5
IS Sieve
Designation Percemage Passing for Graded Aggregate of Nominal Size
Hk
( \
40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm
80 mm 100 - - -
63 mm - - - -
40 mm 95-100 100 - -
20 mm 30-70 95-100 100 100
16 mm - - 90-100 -
12.5 mm - - - 90-100
10 mm IO-35 25 -55 30-70 40-85
4.75 mm o-5 O-10 O-IO O-10
2.36 mm - - - -
3
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Coarse Aggregates ,for Mass Concrete - shall 3.4 All-in-Aggregates - When available, grading
be in sizes specified in the following table: shall be according to the following table:
Class and Size IS Sieve Percentage IS Sieve Percentage Passing ,for All-in-
Designation Passing Designation Aggregate of Nominal Size
Very large, 160 -80 mm 160 mm 90-100 r
80 mm O-10 40 mm -?zL-
Large, 80-40 mm 80 mm 90- 100 80 mm 100 -

40 mm O-10 40 mm 95-100 100
Medium, 40-20 mm 40 mm 90-100 20 mm 45-75 95-100
20 mm O-10
4.75 mm 25-45 30-50
Small, 20-4.75 mm 20 mm 90- 100 I
600 micron 8-30 IO-35
4.75 mm O-IO
2.36 mm o-2 150 micron O-6 O-6
3.3 Fine Aggregates - Grading in Zones I to IV

shall be within the following limits:
IS Sieve Percentage Passing for
Designation rp-p,
Grading Grading Grading Grading
Zone I Zone II Zone Ill Zone IV
IO mm 100 100 1oq 100
4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100
2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
300 micron 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
150 micron O-IO O-IO O-10 O-15
- - -.-- -. __-
Note 1 - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 2386 (Part I)-1963 to IS : 2386 (Part VIII)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates for
concrete:
Part 1 Particle size and shape
Part II Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities
Part 111 Specific gravity, density, voids, absorption and bulking
Part IV Mechanical properties
Part V Soundness
Part VI Measuring mortar making properties of fine aggregate
Part VII Alkali aggregate reactivity
Part VIII Petrographic examination
Note 2 - Description and physical characteristics of aggregates for concrete are given in Appendix C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 383-1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from naturaC
sources for concrete (second revision).
4
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 650-1966 STANDARD SAND FOR TESTING OF CEMENT

(First Revision)
With Amendment No. 1)
1. Scope - Requirements for Indian Standard sand Retained on 90-micron 100 percent
used in testing of cement. IS Sieve .
Particle size greater than 33.33 percent
2. Requirements 1 mm
2.1 Sand shall be of quartz, light grey or whitish Particle size smaller than 33.33 percent
variety. 1 mm and greater than
500 microns
2.2 Sand shall be free from silt.
Particle size below 500 33.33 percent
2.3 Sand grains shall be angular, the shape of grains
microns
approximating to spherical form, and elongated and
flattened g&ins being present only in negligible quan- 2.5 Shall be free from organic impurities. Loss of
tities. weight on extraction with hot hydrochloric acid
(specific gravity 1.16) shall not exceed 0.25 percent.
2.4 Grading
Passing through 2-mm 100 percent 3. Delivery - Shall be delivered in 50 kg sealed
IS Sieve metal containers.
Note - The standard sand shall be obtained from Ennore, Tamil Nadu; particle size greater than 1 mm of the standard sand may
also be obtained from Mudaliarkuppam, Tamil Nadu. Supplies may be procured from Concrete and Soil Research Laboratory,
Chepauk, Madras who shall furnish a certificate that the sand conforms to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 650-1966 Specification for standard sandfor testing of cement (first
revision).
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 269-1976 ORDINARY AND LOW HEAT PORTLAND CEMENT

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Manufacture, and chemical and physi- 3.2 Soundr~ss - Expansion (unaerated) shall be
cal requirements of: not more than 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method; if it
fails, expansion of aerdted sample shall be not more
a) ordinary Portland cement for general use,
than 5 mm. Expansion by autoclave test shall be not
b) low heat Portland cement (where low heat of more than 0.8 tiercent.
hydration is required as in mass concrete for
3.3 Setrir1!: TiUW
dams).
a) Ordinary cement - Initial, not less than 30
2. Chemical Requirements minutes. and final, not more than 10 hours.
b) Low heat cement - Initial, not less than 60
2.1 Or,$tlu,;~ Portlud Cement -SW Table I . minutes, and final. not more than 10 hours.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQWREMENI
No.
i) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of sihca, alumina Not greater than I .02 and not less than 0.66
and iron oxide
ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Not less than 0.66
iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass Not more than 2 percent
iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6 percent
v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO,), Not more than 2.75 and 3.0 when tticalcium aluminate
percent by mass percent by mass is 7 or less and greater than 7 resp-
ectively
vi) Total loss on ignition Not more than 5 percent
2.2 Low heat Portland cement shall comply with the 3.4 Cornprrssivr Strength - Of mortar cubes
requirements specified at Sl No. (ii) to.(vi) of Table 1 (1 cement : 3 standard sand) shall not be less than:
and the following:
Curing Time Or&ilwr\ LOWHeat
The percentage of lime, after deduction of that
(hours) (kgficm;) (kgf/cm’)
necessary to combine with the sulphuric anhyd-
ride percent, shall be: a)72 +I 160 100
Not more than 2.4 (SiO*) + 1.2 bj 168 f 2 220 160
(Al,O,J) +0.65 (Fe,O,), and c) 672 + 4 - 350
Not less than 1.9 (SiO,) + 1.2
3.5 Heat @Hydrurion - for low heat cement, shall
(Al,O,) + 0.65 (Fe,O,).
not be more than 65 Cal/g for 7 days, and 75 Cal/g for
28 days.
3. Physical Requirements
3.1 Fineness 4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. To-
lerance + 2.5 percent per bag and ?I 0.5 percent per
a) Specific surface for ordinary cement, not less
wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
than 2 250 cm2/g; and
b) Specific surface for low heat cement, not less
than 3 200 cm2!g.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS : 4032-1968 Method of
chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
_--
For detailed infgrmation, refer to IS : 269-1976 Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement
(third revision).
6
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 455-1976 PORTLAND SLAG CEMENT

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Manufacture and chemical and physical 2 2.50 cm%

requirements for Portland slag cement. 4.2 Soundness - Expansion (unaerated) by ‘Le
Chatelier’ method shall be not more than 10 mm; if it
2. Termindogy -Par-tltrtul Slag Cettwttt - An fails, expansion of aerated sample shall be not more
intimately inter ground mixture of Portland cement than 5 mm. Expansion by autoclave test shall be not
clinker and granulated slag with addition of gypsum more than 0.8 percent.
and permissible additives or a blend of Portland cement
and finely ground granulated slag. 4.3 Setting Titrtr - Initial, not less than 30 min, and
final ) not more than 600 mm.
3. Chemical Requirements 4.4 Catnpressive Strength - Of mortar cube (1 ce-
Pawnt, hkix ment : 3 standard sand). shall not be less than:
Magnesium oxide (MgO) 8.0 a) 15.69MN/m~(160kgf/cm2)at 72 ‘t I hours;
Sulphur trioxide (SOS) 3.0 and
1.5 b) 2 1.57 MN/m’ (220 kgf/cm?)at 168 + 2 hours.
Sulphide sulphur (S)
Loss on ignition 4.0 5. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. TOlemIlCe
insoluble residue 2.5 + 2.5 percent per bag and -t 0.5 percent per wagon load
of 20 to 25 tonnes.
4.1 Fitzetw.~s - Specific surface, not less than
Nole-For methods of tests, refel to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS : 4032-1968 Method of
--
For detailed inforkhion, refer to IS : 4.55-1976 Specification for Portland slag cement (third revision).
7
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1489- 1976 PORTLAND-POZZOLANA CEMENT

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Manufacture and physical and chemical 4. Physical Requirements

requirements of Portland-pozzolana cement.
4.1 Firzowss - Specific surface shall not be less than
3 000 cm’/g.
2. Raw Material
4.2 S~~urzcl~~=~ - Expansion (unaerdted) shall be not
2.1 Pozzolana for blendmg with Portland cement, shall more than 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method; if it faiis, ,
conform to the following: expansion of aerated sample shall be not more than 5 mm.
Expansion by autoclave test shall be not more than 0.8
a) Firwrress - Speclfc surface not less than
percent.
3 200 cm’ig, and
b) Lirnc> ~crcti~~ity - Compressive strength of 4.3 Setting Tim - Initial, not less than 30 minutes
mortar cubes shall be not less than 50 kgf/cm?. and final, not more than 10 hours.
Note - For method5 of tests, refer to IS : 1727-1967*. 4.4 Cornpwssi\~r Strength - Of mortar cube
(1 cement : 3 standard sand), shall not be less than:
2.2 Pozzolana, to be interground with cement clinker, a) 220 kgf/cm2 at 168 IL 2 hours; and
shall satisfy lime reactivity requirements of 2.1(b). b) 310 kgf/cmZ at 672 f 4 hours.
2.3 Par-tlmd Cemrrlt Clirlkc~rlPostlarId Cement -
4.5 Drying Shrinkqr - Not more than 0.15 percent.
Shall conform to IS : 269-1976t.
5. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tole-
3. Chemical Requirements - Shall comply with rance +2.5 percent per bag and +0.5 percent per
pozzolanicity test of IS : 4032-1968$ as also Table 1. wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PORTLAND-POZZOLANA CEMENT
SL CHARACTERISI IC REQUIREMENT
No
O LOSS on ignition, percent, MUX 5.0

Ii). Magnesia CMgO), percent by mass, Max 6.0
iii) Insoluble ma&a\, percent, MUX 2.0 (loo- .I)
X+
100
Where x is the declared percentage of pozzolana in the given
Portland-pozzolana cement
iv) Sulphuwz anhydride (SO,), percent by mass Not more than 2.75 and 3.0 when tricalcium aluminate,
percent by mass is 7 or less and greater than 7 respectively
*Methods of test for pozzolanic materials Cfirsr revision).

iSpecification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement (third revision).
$Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1489-1976 Specification for Portland-pozzolana cement (second
revision).
8
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3466-1967 MASONRY CEMENT

(First Revision )
1. Scope -Requirements for masonry cement [a 3. Non-staining to Limestone (if Desired by

product obtained by intergrinding a mixture of Portland Purchaser) - Shall contain not more than 0.03 per-
cement clinker with inert materials (non-pozzolanic), cent of water soluble alkali.
such as limestone, conglomerates and dolomite; and
gypsum and an air entrai&g plasticizer] used in mortars
4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Toler-
for masonry for general purposes. Not for use in structural
ante k2.5 percent per bag and +_O.S percent per
concrete, for flooring and foundation work or for
wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
reinforced and prestressed concrete works.
2. Physical Reqluirements -See Table 1.
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
No
i) Fineness: Residue on 45-micron IS Sieve, MUX, percent (by wet sieving) 15
ii) Setting time (by Vicat apparatus)
a) Initial, Mitt 90 min
b) Final, Mux 24 hours
iii) Soundness:
a) Le Chatelier expansion, Max 10 mm
b) Autoclave expansion, Max 1 percent
iv) Compressive strength: average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortat cubes of 50 mm size,
composed of 1 part masonry cement and 3 parts standard sand by volume, Min
7 days 25 kgflcml
28 days 50 kgf/cm*
Air content: air content of mortar composed of 1 part masonry cement and 3 parts standard sand by 12 percent
volume (determined gravimettically), Min
vi) Water retention: flow after suction of mortar composed of 1 part of masonry cement and 3 parts 70 percent of
standard sand by volume, Min original how
-
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3466-1967 Specification for masonry cement (first revision).
9
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6452-1972 HIGH ALUMINA CEMENT FOR STRUCTURAL USE

(With Amendment No. 1)
1. Scope - Manufacture of high alumina cement 2.2 Fineness - Specific surface not less than 2 250
(HAC) and specific requirements for its use as a cm?/g.
SttWtUrdl building material in the colder regions of our
country (continuously 18°C and below). Its use as a 2.3 Snundness - Expansion not more than 5 mm.
refractory cement is not covered.
2.4 Setting Time - Initial not less than 30 minutes
Note -- HAC mainly a refractory cement, but in some cold and final not more than 10 hours.
regions it may find use as a structural materiai due to high early
strength development. Fo!iowing restrictions shal! be followed for
its use in concrete: 2.5 Cornpressi\*eStrength qj’Cetnent Mortar Cubes
1.3 (1 celnent : 3 StcrntkrrdSand) by Weight:
a) Shall not be uied in locat:ons where ambient temperature
exceeds 18°C a) At 24 hours + 30 minutes, not less than 300
b) Accelerators lihe calcrum chloride shall not be used.
c) Steam curing or elevated temperature of curing shall be
kg /cm2
avoided. b) At 72 +_ 1 hours, not less than 350 kg/cm2
d) Shall not be mixed with other type’s of cement.
2. Requirements
3. Delivery - Packed in new bags, 50 kg per bag
2.1 Total alumina content (A1,0,) - Not less than net. Tolerance IL2.5 percent per bag and + 0.5 percent
32 percent. per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
-_-- -
~___ -_ ______-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6452-1972 Specification for high alumina cement for structural use.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6909-1973 SUPERSULPHATED CEMENT
1. Scope - Requirements for composition, manu- 2. Chemical Requirements

facture and testing of supersulphated cement (abbrevi-
ation ‘SSC’).
Insoluble residue 4 percent, MU
Magnesium oxide 10 percent, MUX
Note - SSC compares favourably with ordinary Portland Sulphuric anhydride 6 percent, Min
cement in strength and other physical properties, but its heat of Sulphide sulphur 1.5 percent, MU
hydration will be lower (about 60 Cal/g at 7 days and 70 Cal/g at 28
days). Chemically resistant to aggressive conditions encountered
in constructlon industry, and to attack of sulphates. Useful for
marine v+orks, mass concrete jobs to resist attack by aggressive
waters, reinforced concrete pipes in ground waters, concrete 3.1 Finenrss - Specific surface not less than
construction in sulphate bearing soils, chemical works exposed to 4 000 cm*/g.
high concentration of sulphates or weak solutions of mineral
acids, underslde of bridges over railways and concrete sewers 3.2 Soundness - Expansion not more than 5 mm.
carrying industrial eftluents. Recommended for use in tropical
conditions where prevailing temperature is below 40°C. 3.3 Setting Time - Initial, not less than 30 minutes,
10
SP : 21-1983
and tinal not more than 10 hours. d) Cement shall show at 168 hours and 672
hours a progressive increase in strength from
3.4 Compressive Strength of Cement Mortar Cubes
the strength at 71 hours.
I:3 (I SSC : 3 Stundard Sund) 17~ Weight:
a) 72 + 1 hours, not less than 150 kgf/cm2

b) 168 I!I 2hnurs. not less than 220 kgficm’ 4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Toler-
ance +2.5 percent per bag and +0.5 percent per
c) 672 t 4 hours, not less than 300 kgficm’ wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
--______ ----__ _-- __-_

Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS : 4032-1968 Mefhod oi
___- _____ _____~_.____ _--__--___...-. _.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6909-1973 Specification for supersulphated cement.
-
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8041-1978 RAPID HARDENING PORTLAND CEMENT

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Manufacture and chemical and physical 3.3 Compressive Strengflt oj’ Cerwnt Mortar- Cubes
requirements of rapid hardening Portland cement. 1:3 (I Cement : 3 Srattdard Sand) h) Weight:
Note - The term ‘rapid-hardening’ should not be confused

with ‘quick-setting’. Cement marketed as superfine Portland a) 24 hours
cement is also covered by f/lc slctr~tktrtl. + 30 minutes Not less than IS.69 N/mm’
2. Chemical Requirements - shall be as laid b) 72 + I hours Not less than 26.97 N/mm2
down in IS : 269- 1976* for ordinary Portland cement.
c) Cement shall show a progressive increase in
strength from the strength at 24 hours.
3.1 Fineness -Specified surface shall be not less
than 3 250 cm’/g.
4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Toler-
3.2 The Requirements, Such as Soundness and Set- ance k2.5 percent per bag and A10.5 percent per
ring Time - shall be laid down in IS : 269-1976* for wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
ordinary Portland cement.
*Specificationfor ordinary and low heat Portland cement (rhi~tl

rfvisim ).
chemtcal analysis of hydraulic cement.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8041-1978 Specification for rapid hardening Portland cement (first
revision).
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS ‘: 8042-1978 WHITE PORTLAND CEMENT

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Manufacture and chemical and physical 3. Physical Requirements
requirements of white Portland cement. 3.1 Shall be as laid down for ordinary Portland
Note - White Portland cement is generally used for architec- cement in IS : 269-1976*, except that compressive
tural and decorative purposes and is generally meant for non- and transverse strength shall not be less than 90 percent
structural use. It is made from raw materials containing very little
iron oxide and magnesium oxide.
of those specified for ordinary Portland cement. The
cement shall show a progressive increase in strength
2. Chemical Requirements - Shall be as laid from the strength at 72 hours.
down for ordinary Portland cement in IS : 269-1976*,
3.2 D~~Iw of Whiteness - The reflectance of neat
except that iron oxide (Fe,O:c) shall not be more than 1
cement ring prepared and tested shall not be less than
percent. and that the requirement of total 10% on
70 percent.
ignition is not applicable.
____.--~- 4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Toler-
*Specificationfor ordinary and low heat Portland cement Vhirtl ante rt2.5 percent per bag and 10.5 percent per
r-Wisio,I) wagon, load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
____ -_--__- -- ___ __--.________
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydrauliccement, and IS :,4032-1968 Method of
chemical analysis of hydraulic cement and Appendix A of rhe standard.
_______
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8042-1978 Specification for white Portland cement (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8043-1978 HYDROPHOBIC PORTLAND CEMENT

(First Revision )
1. Scope - Manufacture and physical and chemical 3.3 Compwssivc Strength of‘Cement Mortar Cuhcs
requirements of hydrophobic Portland cement. 1.3 (1 Cement : 3 Standard Sand) by Muss:
Note - Hydrophobic cement deteriorates very little during a) 72+1 hours Not less than 15.69 N/mm*
prolonged storage under unfavourable conditions. This cement is
b) 168+2 hours Not less than 21.57 N/mm2
obtained by intergrinding ordinary Portland cement clinker with
c) 672+4 hours Not less than 30.40 N/mm*
certain hydrophobic agents which will impart to the cement a
water repelling property, due to formation of a water repellent film The cement shall show a progressive increase in
around each particle of cement. The film is broken during mixing
of concrete by wet attrition such as in a concrete mixer.
strength from the strength at 72 hours.
2. Chemical Requirements - Shall be as laid
3.4 Hydrq~hohicit)
downinls : 269-1976* for ordinary Portland cement.
3. Physical Requirements a) Cement shall not show loss on ignition more
than 30 percent of the value for the ordinary
3.1 Fineness - Specific surface shall not be less Portland cement.
than 3 500 cmlig.
3.2 The Requirements, Such as Soundness and Ser- b) Cement shall float on the water for a period of
ting Time - shall be as laid down in IS : 269-1976* not less than 24 hours.
for ordinary Portland cement.
4. Deliverv - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Toler-
*Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement (thirtl ante + 2.5 percent per bag and + 0.5 percent per
revisim ). wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to LS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and 1S : 4032-1968 Method of
chemical analysis of hydraulic cement and Appendix A of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8043-1978 Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement (first
revision).
12
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8 112- 1976 HIGH STRENGTH ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT
1. Scope - Manufacture, and chemical and physi- 3. Physical Requirements

cal requirements of high strength ordinary Portland 3.1 Fimwss -- Specific surface not less than
cement. 3 500 cm2/g.
Note - High strength ordinary Portland cement meets the 3.2 So~1r1r1c.s.s
need of certain specialised works, such as prestressed concrete,
and certain items of precast concrete, where cement having com-
pressive strength much higher than the minimum specified in 3.2.1 Expansion (unaerated) shall be not more
IS : 269-1976*. High strength ordinary Portland cement is used than 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method; if it fails,
by Indian Railways for the manufacture of prestreased concrete expansion of aerated sample shall be not more than 5
sleepers and relevant requlrementa which are also covered in this
mm.
standard.
3.2.2 Unaerated cement having magnesia content
2. Chemical Requirements - See Table 1. not more than 3 percent shall be tested by autoclave test
._____ ___- and shall not have expansion more than 0.8 percent.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH
STRENGTH PORTLAND CEMENT 3.3 Scttirtg Time - Initial not less than 30 minutes,
and final not more than 10 hours.
No. 3.4 Corntwc~ssi~~i~
Strrrigtli of’Cctnwt Mortar Cuiws
i) Ratio of percentage of lime Not greater than 1.02 I .3 (I Cement : 3 Standard Sand) by Mass:
to percentages of silica, and not less than 0.66
alumina ahd inn oxide, when
a) 72+ 1 hours Not less than 230 kgf/cm2
calculated by the formula b) 168+2 hours Not less than 330 kgf/cm*
CaO - 0.7 SO1
c) 672+4 hours Not less than 430 kgf/cml
228 SiOl+ 1.2 A1,0,+0.65 FeZOX
ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina Not less than 0.66 d) Cement shall show progressive increase in
to that of iron oxide strength at 72 hours.
iii) Insoluble residue, percent by Not more than 2
mass 4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. To-
iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6 lerance f 2.5 percent per bag and Ifr 0.5 percent per
v) Total sulphur content calculated Not more than 2.75 wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
as sulphuric anhydride (SOJ), and 3.0 when tri-
percent by mass calcium aluminate
(percent by mass) 1s
7 or less, and greater
than 7 respectively
vi) Total loss on ignition Not more than 4 percent
*Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement (third

revision ).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8112-1976 Specification for high strength ordinary Portland
cement.
13
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2185 (PART I)-1979 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

PART I HOLLOW AND SOLID CONCRETE BLOCKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope --- Requirements for the following con- notlessthan the value given in Table 1, as appro-
crete masonry building units which are used in priate.
construction of loadbearing and partition walls:
aj Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing
concrete blocks, TABLE 1 MINIMUM FACE SHELL AND WEB
THICKNESSES
b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load
bearing concrete blocks, and
All dimensions in millimetres.
c) Solid load-hearing concrete blocks.
Note -- Concrete masomy units are used for both load-hearing

NOMINAL BLOCK FACE SHELL THICKNESS TOTAL WEB
and non-load bearing walls, for partitions and panel walls. as
WIDTH THICKNESS. OF THICKNESS I’EK
backing for other type% of facing material, for piers, pllasters and
columna. for retainmg walls, garden walls, chimneys and tie
Mh WEB, Milt COURSE IN ANY
200 mm ~NGTH ot:
places, as fillers m concrete joist floor construction and as
WALLING, Min
shuttering for beam,. columns and lintels.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2. ‘Terminology
100 or less 25 25 25
2.1 Hollow (Open or C/n.wd Cavity) Block - A Over 100 to 1.50 25 25 30

block having one or more large holes or cavities which Over 150 to 200 30 25 30
either pass through the block (open cavity) or do not
Over 200 35 30 38
effectively pass through the block (closed cavity) and
having the solid material between 50 and 75 percent of
the total volume of the block calculated from the
overall dimensions.
4. Classification
2.2 Solid Block - A block which has solid material
not less than 75 percent of the total volume of the block 4.1 Hollow (Open und Closed Ctr\vity) Concrete
calculated from the overall dimensions. Blocks:
a) Grade A
3. Dimensions b) Grade B &Sec~
Table 2)
3.1 Xomrnal Dimer~sions : c) Grade C

I
Length 400, 500 or 600 mm 4.2 Solid Concrete Blocks -Grade D (see
Table 2).
Height 200 or 100 mm
Width 50, 75, 100, 150,
200, 250, or 300 mm 5.1 General - All units shall be sound and free of
cracks or other defects.
Note 1 - Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of not&al
dimensions or 6 mm short in special cases where finer jointing is 5.2 Block Density and Compressive Strength -
specified. Shall be as given in Table 2.
Note 2 - Rlock shall also be manufactured in half lengths of
200, 250 or 3rx) mm.
5.3 Water Absorption - Average value of three
units shall be not more than IO percent by mass.
3.2 Tolerances -. Not more than IL 5 mm in length
5.4 Drying Shrinkage - Average value of three
and It 3 mm in height and width of unit.
units shall not exceed 0.1 percent.
3.3 Face shells and webs shall increase in thickness 5.5 Moisture Movement - Average value of three
from the bottom to the top of unit; the thickness shall be units shall not exceed 0.09 percent.
14
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 2 BLOCK DENSITY AND COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
TYPE GRADE DENSITY OF BLOCK MINIMUM AVERAGE MINIMUM STRENGTH OF

kg/m3 COMPRESSIVESTRENGTHOF INDIVIDUAL
UNITS AT 28 DAYS UNITS AT 2XDAYS
N/mm2 N/mm2
Hollow (open and closed A (3.5) Not less than 1 500 3.5 2.8
cavity) load bearing unit A (4.5) 4.5 3.6
A (5.5) 5.5 4.4
A (7.0) 7.0 5.6
B (2.0) Less than 1 500 but not less 2.0 1.6
B (3.0) than 1000 3.0 2.4
B (5.0) 5.0 4.0
Hollow (open and closed c (1.5) Less than 1 500 but not less 1.5 1.2
cavity) non-load bearing than 1 000
units
Solid load bearing units D (5.0) Not less than 1 800 5.0 4.0
D (4.0) 4.0 3.2
Note 1 -For requirements regarding materials, manufacture, surface texture, texture and finish, refer to the sfandurd.
Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2185 (Part I)-1979 Specification for concrete masonry units: Part I
H&low and solid concrete blocks (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3590-1966 LOAD BEARING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE

BLOCKS
1. Scope - Requirements for load bearing light- 3. Materials
weight concrete blocks (solid and hollow) made from
3.1 Aggregates - One of the following aggregates
Portland cement and lightweight aggregates for use in shall be used:
the construction of concrete masonry walls. Aerated
concrete blocks are not covered. a) Granulated blast furnace slag under 1 250
kg/m3 bulk density and containing not less
2. Dimensions - Shall be in one of the following than 50 percent of lime.
nominal sizes; other sizes by mutual agreement. Actual b) Foamed slag.
size 1 cm less in length and height: c ) Cinder aggregates.
Size Length Breudth Height d) Lightweight aggregates by expansion or
(cm) (cm) (cm) bloating of slates, shales or clays; or by
A 40 30 20 sintering of fly ash.
B 40 20 20
10 e) Any suitable mixture of aggregates given
C 40 20
above.
2.1 Tolerance - k 3 mm for length and + 1.5 mm 3.2 Natural sand or crushed stone may be added to
for breadth and height. any of the above. All aggregates shall pass through
2.2 In case of hollow blocks total width of cavities, 12.5 mm IS Sieve; not more than 10 percent shall pass
not to exceed 66 percent of total breadth. Net horizon- through 300 micron IS Sieve. At least 15 percent shall
tal cross sectional area, not less than 50 percent of be retained on 10 mm IS Sieve and 40 percent on 4.75
gross area. Shell thickness not less than 50 mm for size mm IS Sieve. Fineness modulus 1.6 to 2.6 for fine and
A and B and 30 mm for Size C. 4.4 to 5.15 for coarse aggregates.
15
SP : 21-1983
4. Mix -Not richer than 1 cement:6 combined 5.3 Drying Shrinkage - Not to exceed 0.06 per-
aggregates (by volume). cent.
5.4 Moisture Movement - Not to exceed 0.05 per-
5. Physical Requirements cent.
5.1 Compressive Strength - Not less than 28 kgfl 5.5 Water Ahsorl>tion - Not to exceed 250 kg/m3.
cm2 of gross area at 28 days.
5.6 Moisture Content - Not to exceed 40 percent of
5.2 Density - Not to exceed 1 600 kg/m3. total water absorption.
Note-For methods of test, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard.

For &tailed information, refer to IS : 3590-1966 Specification for load bearing lightweight concrete
blocks.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4996-1968 REINFORCED CONCRETE FENCE POSTS
1. Scope - Requirements for reinforced concrete tapering on ail four sides. The cross-sectional dimen-
fence posts for genera1 purposes. Recommendations sions and the reinforcement shall be adequate to
for the provisions of wire holes and their spacing, as conform to strength requirements given in 4.
well as the erection of post-and-wire fence have also
Note - Some of the common sizes and shapes for reinforced
been included. Reinforced lightweight concrete fence concrete fence posts with other details such as reinforcement,
posts and prcstrcssed concrete fence posts are not fencing wire spacing from ground level, spacing of line post and
covered. strainer post and suitability of particular size of fence post for use
are given in Appendix B of rltc, standard for general guidance.
‘Ihese may be used provided the strength requirements are
2. Classification
fulfilled.
4 Line Posts - Line posts are intermediate

3.2 Tolerances - +15 mm on overall length,
posts forming the majority in a post-and-wire
f3 mm on cross-sectional dimensions and 0.5 percent
system and are intended to carry the fencing
on straightness of fence post.
wire between the strainer posts.
b) Strainer Posts - Posts notched on three 4. Strength Test

sides and used with struts or braces as
4.1 Impacr Test - When tested, specimen shall
strainers at the comers or ends, or at inter-
show no visible permanent cracking.
mediate positions in a line of fence.
4.2 Static-Load Test - The static load required to
c) Strut or Brace - Member used in inclined
produce first visible crack in post shall be as given
position for supporting the strainer post.
below:
3. Shape and Dimensions Line post 70 kgf, Min
3.1 Shall be rectangular or circular in section. May Strainer post 250 kgf, Min
be of uniform section or tapering on two sides or Strut or angle post 45 kgf, Min
Note l-For typical details and dimensions of line post, strainer post and brace for fencing intended for various uses, for
recommendations for manufacture of reinforced concrete under field conditions and for recommendations for erection of fence
posts, refer to the standard.
Note 2 - For method of tests, refer to Appendix C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4996-1968 Specification for reinforced concrete fence posts.
16
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5482-1969 AUTOCLAVED CELLULAR CONCRETE BLOCKS

(With Amendments No. 1 and 2)
1. Scope - Requirements for autoclaved cellular 5.1 Compressive Strength and Thermal Con-
concrete blocks having density up to 1 000 kg/m3. ducti\qiry
Density in Compressive Strength Thermal
2. Dimensions (Nominal)
Oven Dq Min Conducriviv
Length Breadth Height Condirion
(cm) (cm) (cm) (kg/m’) ~kGradPZ;kca~$$?!lm2)
(kgf/cm2) (kgf/cm2)
50 or 60 10 20, 25 or 30
50 or 60 15 20, 25 or 30
50 or 60 20 20, 25 or 30 45 l-550 20 15 0.18
50 or 60 25 20, 25 or 30 55 I-650 40 30 0.21
Note - Actual dimension shall be 1 cm less than nominal 65 l-750 50 40 0.26
dimension. 75 I-850 60 50 0.32
2.1 Tolerances - f 2 mm for height and breadth, 851-i 000 70 60 0.36
and + 3 mm for length. 5.2 Dry Shrinkage - Not more than 0.05 percent
for Grade 1 and 0.1 percent for Grade 2.
Note - Formode of measurement,sce Fig. 1ofthcstundrrd.
5.3 Fire Resistance - Walls made by the blocks
3. Classification - Grade 1 and Grade 2. shall have the following tire grading:
4. Finish - Faces shall be rectangular, opposite 12 cm thick wall 2 hours fire resistance
faces parallel and all arrises shall be square and 15 cm thick wall 3 hours tire resistance
straight. Blocks shall be free from all defects.
19 cm thick wall 4 hours lire resistance
5. Physical Properties 25 cm thick wall 5 hours tire resistance
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 6441 (Part I)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part I
Determination of unit weight or bulk density and moisture content, IS : 6441 (Part II)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular
concrete products: Part II Determination of dry shrinkage, IS : 6441(Part V)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete
products: Part V Determination of compressive strength, IS : 3346-1980 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of
thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision) and IS : 3809-1966 Fire resistance test of structures.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5482-1969 Specification for autoclaved cellular concrete blocks.
17
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 575 1-1969 PRECAST CONCRETE COPING BLOCKS
1. Scope - Requirements for precast concrete cop- 2.2 Length - 1 m or as agreed.

ing blocks, giving details of material for manufacture,
workmanship, functional requirements and essential 2.3 Tolerkzces - + 3 mm for cross-sectional
dimensions to meet them. profile and + 6 mm for length.
Note - The blocks serve as &fence against entry of

moisture 3. Shape - Coping blocks shall slope to the rear so
into hollow concrete block walls. Functional requirements are: as to reduce wash of water and accumulated dirt over
a) should prevent downward penetration of water.
face of wall. The slope shall be as steep as possible for
b) should direct water clear of walls below. rapid shedding of water.
c) should resist lateral displacement, either by its weight or by
mechanical means such as clip type coping or by use of Note - Foi examples of concrete copings such as splayed and
saddle back copings, set Fig. 3 of the srandurd.
cramps and dowels.
d) should allow for thermal and moisture movements.
4. Weight - Not less than 35 kg/h for flat bot-
e) should be durable.
tomed coping without cramps.
2. Dimensions and Tolerances
5; Fixing and Jointing -Ends of coping blocks
2.1 Dimension of Cross Section -The form of shall be jointed by means of dowels, cramps or joggled
cross section shall be as agreed to mutually. Overall mortar joints. Flashing of non-corrodible material is
width shall be determined by referring to thickness of adopted at joints in coping blocks to prevent leakage.
wall to which coping is to be applied.
6. Fittings - Stopped ends, hipped stopped ends,
Note - For minimum dimensions of the cross section for clip
type tid for tlat bottomed copings, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the
stooled ends and right-angled returns, shall be availa-
standard. ble to match the coping blocks.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5751-1969 Specification for precast concrete coping blocks.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5758-1970 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
1. Scope - Requirements of precast concrete units c) Half-batter kerbs 150 x 300,

for kerbs, channels, edgings quadrants and kerbs and I25 X 250 mm
gutters in range of sections, for use in carriageways and d) Half-section kerbs 150 x 125 mm
footways.
3.2 Straight Channels
2. Designation -Dimensions of horizontal face
shall be given first and the dimensions of vertical face a) Rectangular kerbs 300 x 150,
be second. 250 x 125,
250 X 100 mm
3. Dimensiqns
.3.1 Straight K&s b) Channels 250 x 125 mm
a) Rectangular kerbs 150 x 300, 3.3 Edgings - 50 X 250, 50 X 200, 50 X 150

125 x 250, mm.
100 x 250 mm 3.4 Quadrant - Depths 125, 250 or 300 mm and
b) Splayed kerbs 150 x 300, radius 300 or 450 mm with faces to match the sections
125 x 250 mm of straight kerbs.
18
SP : 21-1983
3.5 GutterAprons - Width shall range from 150 to Type of Product Dimensions Load to be
2 500 or 3 000 but usual width shall range from 300 to (mm) Supported
900 mm. Usual range of height 125 to 200 mm. The (kg0
thickness of precast kerb shall be 75 to 150; minimum
a) Rectangular kerbs 150x 300 2 275
thickness of channel 125 or 100 mm.
125x250 1 360
100x 250 910
3.6 Lengths - Uniform length of 1 m for straight
kerbs, straight channels, edgings and 1 m maximum b) Splayed kerbs 150x300 2 275
normally for straight kerbs and gutters. 125x250 1 360
Note - For standard sections of concrete kerbs, channel, c) Half-batter kerbs 150x300 2 275
standard sections of concrete edgings, standard cohcrete quar- 125x250 1 360
drants and typical sections of kerb and gutter, see Fig. 1 to 5 of the
standard. d) Half-section kerbs 150x 125 820
4. Tolerances - +3 mm on length and height; e) Channels 250x 125 1 360
+ 1.5 and -3 mm on width.
f) Edgings 50x 250 318
50 x 200 272
5. Moulding - When made under hydraulic pres- 50x 150 204
sure, the pressure employed shall not be less than 7
MN/m*. 6.1.1 If tests are carried out after a longer period,
the load to be supported shall be increased by the
ageing factor given ‘below:
6. Tests
Age of sample (months) 2 3 4 5 6
6.1 Transverse Strength - When tested 28 days Ageing factor 1.1 1.15 1.2 1.25 1.3
after they are manufactured, the unit shall support
without injury, at least for one minute, the loads given 6.2 WaterAbsorption - Shall not exceed 3 percent
in the following table. in the first 10 minutes and 8 percent after 24 hours.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 5758-1970 Specification for precast concrete kerbs.
19
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5820-1970 PRECAST CONCRETE CABLE COVERS
1. Scope - Requirements for reinforced and un- 4. Tests

reinforced.precast concrete covers for covering cables.
4.1 Impact Strength for Reinforced Covers - Not
2. Classification more than one transverse crack.
Cl& Description Conditions Where Normally Used
EHV Reinforced, with peak 22 kV and 33 kV underground power cables

HVP Unreinforced, with peak 1.1 kV to below 22 kV underground power cables
HV
For power cables 1.1 kV and below
LV
2.1 Arch type covers are also sometimes used. 4.2 Transverse Strength for Unreinforced Covers
- Average breaking load shall not be lower than the
3. Dimensions value specified in 3.
Class Type No. Shape Dimensigns (mm) Average Breaking Load

‘L W T T# ’ for Unreinforced Covers, Min
(kg)
EHV 1 With peak 450 230 50 75 450
2 do 600 230 50 75 750
HVP 1 do 300 180 40 65 300
2 do 450 180 40 65 350
HV 1 Flat 300 180 40 - 300
2 do 450 180 40 - 350
LV 1 do 250 150 40 - 200
2 do 300 180 40 - 200
3 do 450 180 40 - 200
Note 1 --L, W = Length, Width.

T = Total thickness in case of flat type and thickness of flat portion excluding peak in case of cover with peak.
T’ = Total thickness including peak in case of cover with peak.
Note 2-For typical concrete cable cover, flat type and with peak, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard.
3.1 Tolerance - On length and width + 3 mm, and

on thickness + 2 mm.
%te 1 -For manufacturing details with regard to the aspects such as mixing, moulding, protection from frost and reinforcement
details, refer to 5 of the standard.
Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5820-1970 Specification for precast concrete cable covers.
20
SP : 21-1983
IS : 6072- 197 1 AUTOCLAVED REINFORCED CELLULAR CONCRETE

WALL SLABS
1. Scope - Requirements for autoclaved rein- 5.2 Tolerances - For 500 mm and below, + 2 mm;
forced cellular concrete wall slabs, having density over 500 mm, * 5 mm.
above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3.
Note - For form tolerances for wall slabs, refer to Table 1of
the standard.
2. Terminology - The cellular concrete consists of
an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in
6. Finish - Tongue at one side and groove on the
combination with finely ground material containing
other side. Alternatively groove on both sides for
silicic acid (such as sand), gas generating material
filling with cement Fortar. Longitudinal edges shall be
(such as aluminium powder), water, and harmless
chamfered.
additives (optional); and steam cured under high
pressure in autoclaves.
7. Physical Properties
3. Classification - Shall be classified on basis of 7.1 Density - Range as specified in 3.
oven-dry density (without reinforcement) and com-
7.2 Dry Shrinkage - Not more than 0.09 percent.
pressive strength:
7.3 Residual. water content at the time of delivery
Class Gross Density (kg/m3)
shall be declared by the manufacturer.
A Over 850 and up to 1 000
7.4 Fire Resistance - Not less than 2 hours.
B Over 750 and up to 850
c Over 650 and up to 750 7.5 Compressive Strength and Thermal Con-
D Over 550 and up to 650 ductivity:
E Over 450 and up to 550
4. Designation - By indicating compressive ClflSS Compressive Strength, Thermal Conductivity,
strength (in kgf/cm*), horizontal load bearing capac- Min (kgf/cm*) MUX(kcaVm/h/“C)
ity, that is, design load (in kkf/cm*), length (in m),
A 70 0.36
breadth (in mm) and thickness (in mm).
B 60 0.32
5. Size’s C 50 0.26
5.1 Preferred Dimensions - Length 1 to 6 m; width D 35 0.21
600 mm; thickness 150 to 250 mm with increments of E 20 0.18
25 mm.
Note l-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3809-1966 Specification for fire resistance test for structures, and IS : 6441 (Part I to IX)
Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products as appropriate.
Note 2 - For details of manufacture with regard to aspects such as reinforcement, formation of cells of cellular concrete (method of
autoclavation) and finish, refer to 6 of the standard.
Note 3 - For structural requirements, refer to 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6072-1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete
wall slabs.
21
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6073-1971 AUTOCLAVED REINFORCED CELLULAR CONCRETE

FLOOR AND ROOF SLABS
1. Scope - Requirements for autoclaved rein- 5.2 Tolerances - For 500 mm and below, + 2 mm;
forced cellular concrete floor and roof having density over 500 mm, + 5 mm.
above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3.
Note - For form tolerancesfor tloor and roof slabs, refer to
Table 1 of rhc srrmdcrrd.
2. Terminology - The cellular concrete consists of
an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in 6. Finish - Tongue at one side and groove on other
combination with finely ground material containing side. Alternatively, groove on both sides for filling
silicon dioxide (such as sand), gas generating material with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be
(such as aluminium powder), water and additives
chamfered.
(optional); and steam cured under high pressure in’
autoclaves.
3. Classification - Shall be classified on basis of
7.1 Density - Range as specified in 3.
over-dry density (without reinforcement) and com-
pressive strength: 7.2 Dry Shrinkage - Not more than 0.09 percent.
Class 7.3 Residual water content at the time of delivery

Gross Density (kg/m3)
shall be declared by the manufacturer.
A Over 850 and up to 1 000
B Over 750 and up to 850 7.4 Fire Resistance - Not less than 2 hours.
‘C Over 650 and up to 750 7.5 Compressive Strength and Thermal Conductivity:
D Over 550 and up to 650
E Over 450 and up to 550
Class Compressive Thermal
4. Designation - By indicating compressive Strength, Conductivity,
strength , (kgf/cm*), load bearing capacity, that is, Min (kgf/cm2) Max (kcal/m/h/“C)
design load (kgf/m2), length (m), breath’ (mm) and A 70 0.36
thickness (mm).
B 60 0.32
5. Sizes C 50 0.26
5.1 Preferred Dimensions - Length 1 to 6 m; width D 35 0.21
600 mm; thickness 75 to 250 mm with increments of 25
mm. E 20 0.18
Note l-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3809-1966Specification for fire resistance test of structures, IS : 6441 (Part I)-1972
Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part I Determination of unit-weight or bulk density and moisture content,
and IS : 6441 (Part II)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part 11Determination of dry shrinkage, and
IS : 6441 (Part V)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part V Determination of compressive strength.
Note 2-For details of manufacture with regard to aspects such as reinforcement, formation of cells of cellular concrete (method of
autoclavation) and finish, refer to 6 of the standard.
Note 3-For structural requirements, refer to 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6073-1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete
floor and roof slabs.
22
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6523-1972 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE DOOR

AND WINDOW FRAMES
1. Scope - Requirements for precast reinforced 3. Requirements

concrete door and window frames. Use of such frames
is recommended to be restricted to a maximum open- 3.1 Materials
ing width of 2.25 m.
3.1.1 Cement - Ordinary or rapid hardening
2. Shape and Dimensions - Cross section Portland cement, or blast furnace slag cement or
60 X 100 mm or 70 X 75 mm for single shutter door pozzolana cement.
and 60 X 120 mm for double shutter door. Overall
3.1.2 Aggregates -Well graded mixture of
sizes (width and height) of frames shall conform to
coarse and fine aggregates. Maximum size of coarse
IS : 4021-1975*.
aggregate shall be 10 mm.
Note 1 - Suitable adjustments in cross-sectional shape may
be made by agreement between the purchaser and the supplier to 3.1.3 Concrete -Not weaker than M 20 (see
provide suitable groove for wall plaster, etc, provided the overall IS : 456- 1978*).
dimensional requirements given above are not affected.
Note 2 -For overall dimensions of the frame, the width of 3.1.4 Reinforcement shall be clean and free from
the frame shall be the total length of the horizontal piece measured loose mill scale, loose rust, mud, oil, grease or any
out-to-out; the height of the frame shall be the total height other coating which may reduce the bond between the
measured from the lowestendof the vertical piece (in case of three
concrete and the steel. A slight film of rust may not be
member frame or the outer edge of the lower horizontal member in
case of four member frame) to the outer edge of the toe horizontal regarded as harmful but the steel shall not be visibly
piece. pitted by rust.
*Specification for timber door, window and ventilator frames *Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (rhird
(first revision). revision).
Note-For requirements in regard to manufacture (construction and finish, positioning of reinforcement, casting, curing, etc),
arrangements for fixing of hinges to frames, arrangements for door and window fixtures and erection along with illustrations, refer to
the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6523-1912 Specification for precast reinforced concrete door and
window frames.
23
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 459-1970 UNREINFORCED CORRUGATED AND

SEMI-CORRUGATED ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEETS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of unreinforced corru- 3.3 Impermeability - Shall not show during 24
gated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets hours of test any formation of drops of water except
designed for roof coverings and walls of different types traces of moisture on lower surface.
of buildings and for decorative and other purposes.
3.4 Acid Resistance - Amount of acetic acid shall
2. Dimensions and Tolerances - See Table 1. not exceed 1150 g/m2.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF CORRUGATED AND SEMI-CORRUGATED SHEETS

SL TYPEOF DEPTHOF h~cti 0F OVERALL EFFECTIVE NOMINAL LENGTHOF

No. SHEET CORRUGATION CORRUGATION WIDTH WIDTH THICKNESS SHEET
9 Corrugated 48 146 1 050 1 010 6 1 750,

Sheets 20@&
25000r
3ooo
ii) Semi- 45 338 1 loo 1 014 6 1 750,

corrugated 2tw
Sheets
;5gor
Tolerances on +3 +6 +10 +10 + Free +5

Dimensions -5 -2 -5 -5 -0.5 -10
Note - For shapes of cormgated and semi-cormgated sheets, 3.5 Frost Cracking Test (Optional) - Shall not
see Fig. 1 and 2 of /he standard. show signs of cracking or surface alterations.
4. Finish - Shall have rectangular shape; corruga-

3. Physical and Mechanical Characteristics
tion true and regular; edges straight and clean; smooth
3.1 Load Bearing Capacity -Not less than 5 surface on exposed side; free fr;m visible defects.
N/mm width of specimen.
3.2 Water Absorption - Not to exceed 28 percent
of dry weight.
Note l-For method of measurements of different dimensions of the sheets, refer to 4 of rhe StUndUrd.
Note 2-Fcr methods of tests, refer to IS : 5913-1970 Methods of test for asbestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 459-1970 Specification for unreinforced corrugated and semi-
corrugated asbestos sheets (second revision).
24
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1592-1980 ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, clas- Table 1. Nominal thicknesses of different classes and
sification, dimensions, tests and acceptance criteria for diameters of pipes at finished ends (measured at 25 mm
asbestos cement pressure pipes of Class 5, Class 10, beyond bevelled ends) shall be as given in Table 1.
Class 15, Class 20 and Class.25.
1
3.2 Length - Nominal length for pipes of all
2. Classification diameter shall be 3 m, 4 m or 5 m.
2.1 Shall be classified with respect to hydraulic test
4. Tolerances
pressure as given below:
Class Hydraulic Test Pressure
4.1 On External Diameter at 100 nun frcRn Ends:
N/mm*
5 0.5 Ncwzinal Dimneter Tolerance
10 1.0 mm
15 1.5 SOEn +0.6
20 2.0 350 to 500 kO.8
25 2.5 600 +1.0
2.2 Relationship between bursting pressure (BP), 4.2 On Internul Diameter - Checked by means of
hydraulic test pressure (TP) and normal hydraulic a sphere or a disc of diameter less than nominal internal
working pressure (WP) shall not be lesser than values diameter (d) of pipe by (2.5+0.01d).
given below:
Nominal Diameter BP 4.3 On Thickness of Wall (at Finished Ends)
mm Tp & Nominal Zkkness Tolerance
80 and 100 2 4 mm mm
125 to 200 1.75 3.5 Up to and including 10 -1.5
250 to 600 1.5 3.0 Over 10 up to and including 20 -2.0
Over 20 up to and including 30 -2.5
3. Dimensions
Over 30 -3.0
3.1 Nominal diameters of pipes shall be as given in Note - Plus tolerance shall be free.
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES
SL NOM CLASS 5 CLASS 10 CLASS 15 CLASS 20 CLASS 25

No. DIA h h h A A
, \r ,
Thickness External’ ‘Thickness External Thickness External Thickness External “Thickness External
Dia Dia Dia Dia Dia
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
0 80 9.5 99.5 9.5 99.5 9.5 99.5 11.0 101.5 13.5 106.5
ii) 100 9.5 120.0 9.5 120.0 10.0 121.0 13.5 126.5 16.5 132.5
iii) 125 9.5 145.0 9.5 145.0 11.0 147.0 14.0 152.5 17.5 159.5
iv) 150 9.5 171.0 9.5 171.0 13.0 176.5 16.5 183.0 21.0 191.0
v) 200 9.5 221.0 11.5 225.0 16.5 233.5 22.0 242.5 27.5 253.5
vi) 250 9.5 271.0 12.0 276.5 17.0 284.5 23.0 294.5 28.5 305.5
vii) 300 9.5 322.5 14.0 328.5 20.0 340.5 27.0 352.5 34.5 366.5
viii) 350 14.5 379.5 14.5 379.5 21.0 392.0 27.5 405.0 35.0 419.0
ix) 400 16.0 432.0 16.0 432.0 24.0 448.0 32.0 463.0 39.5 478.0
x) 450 17.5 482.0 17.5 482.0 26.5 498.0 35.5 515.0 44.0 532.0
xi) 500 19.5 536.5 19.5 536.5 29.0 554.5 39.0 572.5 48.5 591.5
xii) 600 23.5 643.5 23.5 643.5 35.0 665.5 46.0 686.5 58.0 710.5
NOTE - External diameters at finished ends of the pipes specified in the table are already in practicai use and are specified for the
purpose of interchangeability. Due to inherent characteristics of the manufacturing process and common moulds for’all classes,
external diameter may not be equal to internal diameter plus twice the thickness in all cases.
25
SP : 21-1983
4.4 On Nawinal Length 6.2 Hydraulic Bursting Test - Unit bursting stress
+ 50 mm Except for pipes from which bursting shall not be less than 20 N/mm2 for sizes up to and
-20 mm test pieces have been cut. including 300 mm diameter and 22 N/mm* for sizes
1
350 mm diameter and above.
4.5 On Straightness
6.3 Transverse Crushing Test - Unit transverse
Nominal Diameter Maximwn Deviation crushing stress shall not be less than 44 N/mm*.
so~om200 4.5 1 Where 1 is 6.4 Longitudinal Bending Test - (Only on pipes of

250 to 450 3.5 1 length of pipe 150 mm, diameter and less). Unit longitudinal bend-
500 to 600 2.5 11 in m ing stress shall not be less than 24.5 N/mm*.
,
5. Finish - Internal surfaces should be regular and 7. Joints - Two types of joints normally provided
smooth. Finished ends should be to suit type of joint are:
used.
a) Asbestos cement couplings with rubber sealing
rings, and
6. Tests
b) Cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing
rings and bolts and nuts.
6.1 Hydraulic Pressure Tighbtess Test - To be
performed on all pipes. Pipe shall not indicate any loss 7.1 The assembled joints shall be flexible and capa-
or visible sweating on outside surface for test pressure ble of withstanding hydraulic pressure specified
as given in 2.1 maintained for 30 seconds. Test time in 2.1, when pipes are set at permissible angular
may be reduced to 10 seconds for pipes of diameter 350 1 170
mm or less, provided pressure is increased by 10 per- deviation which is not less than
External dia in mm
cent. but need not exceed 8”.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 5913-1970 Methods of test for asbestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1592-1980 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (second
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1626 (PART I)-1980 ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING PIPES

AND PIPE FITTINGS, GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS AND
ROOFING FITTINGS
PART I PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of socketed asbestos ce- f-l Single and double equal junctions,
ment building and sanitary pipes and pipe fittings of g) Single and double unequal junctions,
diameter 50 to 150 mm for use as rain-water pipes, h) Single and double equal inverted junctions
soil, waste and ventilating pipes. with spigot branch,
3 Hexagonal rain-water head,
1.1 The following pipes and pipe fittings are co- k> Shoe,
vered: ml Cone cap cowl,
a) Single socketed pipe, n) Slotted vent cowl, and
b) Loose socket, P) W. C. connectors.
c) Plain bend,
d) Swan neck, 2. Workmanship - Interior surface of pipes and
e) Sanitary bend, pipe fittings should be regular and smooth.
26
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensional Requirements 1.05 for all diameters of pipes and pipe fittings.
3.1 Nminal Diameter and Thickness - Nominal 3.3.2 On thickness - Shall be + 1.0 mm for
diameter of pipes and pipe fittings shall correspond to pipes and pipe fittings of nominal diameter 50, 60, 80
internal diameter (bore), tolerances not being taken and 100 mm and + 1.5 mm for 150 mm diameter of
into account. Nominal diameters for pipes and pipe pipes and pipe fittings.
fittings except for items given in 1.1(e), 1.1(g) and
1.1(p) and corresponding thicknesses for all pipes and 3.3.3 On nominal length - Shall be AI10 mm
pipe fittings shall be as follows: and +5 mm for pipes and pipe fittings respectively.
3.3.4 On overall length - Shall be f 10 mm.
Nwninal Diameter of Thickness of Pipe
Pipe or Pipe Fitting or Pipe Fitting 3.3.5 On depth of sockets - Shall be +5 mm.
mm mm
50 6.5
60 6.5 4.1 Deviation in straightness of pipes shall not
80 8.0 exceed the following:
100 8.0 Nuninal Dimneter Maximum Deviation
150 9.5 mm mm
50 to 60 5.5 1
3.1.1 Nominal size or bore diameter of sanitary
80 to 150 4.5 1
bend and W. C. connectors shall be 100 mm. Thick-
ness 8.0 mm. where 1 is nominal length of pipe in m.
3.1.2 Nominal size or bore diameter of single and 4.2 Hydraulic Pressure Test - To be carried out on
double unequal junctions shall be [(a/b)mml 60/50, all pipes and pipe fittings except on items given in
80/50, 100/50, 80/60, 100/60, 100/80, 150/80 and 1.1 (m) and 1.1(n) and pipe fittings provided with
150/100 where ‘a’ is bore diameter for main pipe and access doors: Pipes and pipe fittings shall show no
‘b’ for branch pipe. Thickness shall be as given in 3.1 fissure or visible sweating on outside surface when
for corresponding diameter. subjected to internal hydraulic pressure of 0.1 MN/m2
maintained for 30 seconds.
3.2 Length 4.3 Hydraulic Bursting Test (for Pipes Only) -

Pipe shall indicate a minimum bursting stress of 5
3.2.1 Nominal length - Nominal length shall MN/m2 .
correspond to useful lengths of socketed pipes exclu-
sive of internal depth of socket, not taking tolerances 4.4 Transverse Crushing Test (for Pipes Only) -
into account, and shall be 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 m. Unit transverse crushing stress at failure shall not be
less than 14 MN/m2.
3.2.2 Overall length - Shall be sum of nominal
length in accordance with 3.2.1 and length of socket. 4.5 Longitudinal Bending Test (for Pipes
Only) - Unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be
Note - For other dimensions of pipes and pipe fittings, referto
less than 12.5 MN/m2.
Tables 3 to 16 of dze standard, read with appropriate figures.
4.6 Water Absorption Test - Mean water absorp-

3.3 Tolerances tion shall not be more than 28 percent of dry mass of
material.
3.3.1 On internal diameter of plain ends and
sockets - Ratio of actual diameter and nominal 4.7 Acid Resistance Test - Mean amount of acetic
diameter over a section should lie between 0.95 and acid used in testing shall not exceed 1 150 g/m2.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1626 (Part I)-1980 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes
and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part I Pipes and pipe fittings (first
revision).
27
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1626 (PART II)-1980 ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING PIPES

ROOFING FITTINGS
PART II GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of asbestos cement gut- f) Stop End and Union Clip for Gutters -
ters and gutter fittings used in buildings. Nominal size for half round gutters 150, 250
and 300 mm. Nominal size (mmX mmX mm)
2. Workmanship - Interior surface of gu,tter and 500x 150x 250, 450x 150x 300, 300x
their fittings should be regular and smooth. 150x225 and 275x125~175 for boundary
‘. wall gutters; 905x200X225,600X 150x225,
3. Dimensional Requirements: 450x 125x 150 and 400x 125x250 for valley
gutters.
a) Valley Gutter - Nominal size (mmx
mmxmm) 900~200~225, 600~ 150X g) Angle for Gutters - Refer to the standard.
225, 450x 125x 150 and 400x 125~250.
Thickness 12.5 mm. Note - For detailed dimensions for various hems of gutters
and their fittings, refer to Tables 2 to 7 and appropriate figures of
dze standard.
b) Boundary Wall Gutter - Nominal size
(mmxmmxmm) 500~ 150~250, 450~ 3.1 Tolerances
150~300,300~ 150x225 with thickness 12.5
mm. Nominal size 2’75~125~175 mm with 3.1.1 On’kngth - Shall be +lO mm.
thickness 10.0 mm.
3.1.2 OnproJile - Shall be +3 mm.
cl Half Round Gutter - Nominal size 150, 250 3.1.3 On thickness - Shall be f 1.5 mm.
and 305 mm. Thickness 9.5 mm.
d) Drop End and Nozzle fir Boundary Wall and
Valley Gutters - Nominal diameter 100 and
4.1 WaterAbsorption Test - Mean water absorp-
150 mm.
tion shall not exceed 28 percent of dry mass of
End and Nozzle for Half Round material.
4 Drop
Gutters - Nominal size 150, 250 and 4.2 Acid Resistance Test - Mean amount of acetic
300 mm. acid used in testing shall not exceed 1 150 g/m*.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 5913-1970 Methods of test for absestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1626 (Part II)-1980 Specification for asbestos cement pipes andpipe
fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part II Gutters and gutter fittings (first revision).
28
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1626 (PART III)-1981 ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING PIPES

ROOFING FITTINGS
PART III ROOFING FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of unreinforced asbestos 2. Classification - Roofing fittings shall be clas-
cement roofing fittings to be used in conjunction with sified as below:
corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement a) According to type of roofing sheets-they are to
sheets conforming to IS : 459-1970*. be used with, and
b) According to shape and size of fitting.
1.1 The following roofing fittings are covered:
3. Shapes, Dimensions and Tderances - Shapes,
dimensions and tolerances of various fittings shall be
a>Ridges: as given in the standard, read with appropriate
1) Serrated adjustable ridges,
2) Plain wing adjustable ridges, figures.
3) One piece plain angular ridges, 4. Physical Requirements
4) Unserrated adjustable ridges for hips, and
5) Close-fitting adjustable ridges. 4.1 Free& frcwz Defects - All finished products
b) Eaves filler pieces, shall be free from visual defects that impair appearance
Ridge finials,
z$ Apron pieces,
Barge boards or corner piece,
or serviceability. Surface of fitting shall be of uniform
texture and shall have neatly trimmed edges.
e)
0 Rooflights, 4.2 Water Absorption - Mean water absorption
!a Northlight curves or ventilator curves, shall not be more than 28 percent of dry mass of
h) Cowl type ventilators, material.
3 Expansion joints for semi-corrugated sheets
and fittings like ridges and northlight curve, and 4.3 Impermeability - Specimen shall not show dur-
W Louvres, ‘S’ type. ing 24 hours of test any formation of drop of water
except traces of moisture on lower surface.
*Specification for unreinforced cormgated and semi-conugated 4.4 Acid Resistance Test - Average quantity of
asbestos cemknt sheets (second revision). acetic acid used in testing shall not exceed 1 150 g/m’.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1626 (Part III)-1981 Specification for asbestos cement building
pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part III Roofing fittings (first
revision).
29
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2096-1966 ASBESTOS CEMENT FLAT SHEETS

1. Scope - Requirements regarding composition, 4.1 Compulsory Tests

dimensions and tests of asbestos cement flat sheets
41.1 Transverse strength - Shall conform to 2.
(compressed and uncompressed) intended for interior
and exterior use. 4.1.2 Thickness - Average at 4 points approxi..
mately, 3 cm from edge shall conform to 3.1.
2. Classification
a) Compressed Sheets - Having a minimum 4.1.3 Density - Shall conform to 2.
unit bending stress of 225 kgf/cm* and 4.2 Optional Tests
density exceeding 1.6 kg/dm3.
b) Uncompressed Sheets - Having a minimum 4.2.1 Water absorption - Shall not exceed 28
unit bending stress of 160 kgf/cm* and percent of dry weight.
density exceeding 1.2 kg/dm3. 4.2.2 ImpermeabiCity - Specimen shall not
3. Dimensions and Tolerances show during 24 hours of test, formation of drops of
water, except traces of moisture on lower surface.
3.1 Thickness (Npminal) - Shall be 5,6,8, 10 and
15 mm. Tolerance + 5 percent. 4.2.3 Frost cracking - Specimen shall not show
3.2 Length and Width - Nominal length shall be signs of cracking or surface alteration.
2 400,l 800 or 1 200 mm and nominal width shall be 4.2.4 Resistance to acidified waters - Amount
1 200 mm. Tolerance + 5 mm. of acetic acid used in testing shall not exceed
4. Tests 0.115 g/cm’.
Note-For methodsof test. refer to ApnendicesA to F of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 20961966 Specification for asbestos cement flat sheets.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2098-1964 ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING BOARDS

1. Scope - Requirements regarding composition, Tolerances - Length and width f5 mm

dimensions and tests of asbestos cement building Thickness f 0.5 mm
boards.
2. Dimensions and Tolerances 3. Tests
Class A - Length 2 400,180O or 1200 mm 3.1 Transverse Strength - Average breaking load
Width I 200 mm of two specimens taken from same board, tested in
Thickness 6.5 mm perpendicular directions, shall be not less than 20 kgf
Class B - L.ength2400,1800or1200mm for Class A; and 15 kgf for Class B and Class C.
Width 1 200 mm Breaking load of either specimen shall be not less than
Thickness 5 mm 15 kgf for Class A and 10 kgf for Class B and Class C.
Class C -Length2400,1800or1200mm
Width 1 200 mm 3.2 Water Absorption - Shall not exceed 40 per-
Thickness 4 mm cent of dry weight.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendix A of the standardand Appendix D of IS : 459-1970 Specification for unreinforced
corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets (second revtsion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2098-1964 Specification for asbestos cement building boards.
30
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6908-1975 NON-PRESSURE ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND

FITTINGS FOR SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
1. Scope - Requirements for asbestos cement 4. Dimensions and Geometrical Characteristics

pipes and fittings suitable for use with gravity flow at 4.1 Pipes
atmospheric pressure, intended for sewerage and
drainage applications. 4.1.1 Standard lengths - 3 m or 4 m for 100 to
250 mm nominal bore pipes and 4 m or 5 m for 300 to
2. General Appearance and Finish L- Shall be 1 050 mm nominal bore pipes. (Length measured
seamless, compact and homogeneous with regular and between extremities for pipes with plain ends and
smooth internal surface. May be given suitable internal effective length for socketed pipes.)
and external coating‘if required. Shall be capable of 4.1.2 Thickness shall be stated by the manufac-
being easily cut or drilled. turer.
3. Classification 4.1.3 Tolerances - On nominal length, +50 and

-20 mm. On outside dia at turned ends, + 1 mm. On
3.1 Pipes - Classified according to crushing
thickness at turned ends: f 1.5 mm on thickness up to
strength as given below:
11 mm, +2 mm on thickness over 11 up to 15 mm,
+2.5 mm on thickness over 15 up to 20 mm, f3 mm
Nominal Bore Minimum Ultimate Crushing Load on thickness over 20 up to 30 mm, rfr3.5 mm on
I h 3 thickness over 30 up to 40 mm, and +_4 mm on thick-
Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 ness over 40 up to 60 mm.
(1) (2) (3) (4) 4.1.4 Ovality -No obstruction to passage of
mm sphere or disc.
kgf/m kgf/m kgflm
- - 4.1.5 Struightness - Deviation in millimetres
100 3 870
from straightness shall not exceed the following limit:
125 3 870 - -
150 3 870 - ‘- a) For 100 to 200 mm bore pipes 51
175 3 870 - - b) For 225 to 525 mm bore pipes 41
200 3 870 - -
c) For 600 to 1 050 mm bore pipes 31
225 3 870 - -
- - where 1 - nominal length of pipe in m.
250 3 870
300 4 760 3 570 - 4.2 Fittings
375 5 360 3 940 - 4.2.1 Bends
450 5 950 4 460 3 570
a) Moulded bends - Nominal bore 100, 125,
525 6700 4 840 3 870 150, 175, 200 and 225 mm.
600 7 900 5800 4300
b) Lobster back bends - Nominal bore 225,
675 8 780 6 550 4900 250,300,375,450,525,600,675,750,825
750 9 370 7000 5 200 and 900 mm.
825 10 270 7600 5 650
900 11000 8 930 5 950 4.2.2 Junctions - Nominal bore of pipe 100,
975 11 900 9 670 6400 125,150,175,200,225,250,300,375,450,525 and
600 mm.
1 050 12 650 10 120 6700
4.2.3 Saddle branches - Nominal bore of pipe
3.2 Fittings 150 to 1 050 mm.
3.2.1 Bends - Moulded or fabricated in poly- 4.2.4 Thickness and tolerances - Thickness
gonal shape. Angles shall be 11?4’, 22’h”, 45” or 90”. shall be as for corresponding size and class of pipes.
Tolerances same as specified in 4.1.3.
3.2.2 Junctions - 45” or 90”.
Note - For detailed dimensions of fittings, refer to Tables 3 to
3.2.3 Saddles - 45” or 90”. 6 of the standard.
31
SP : 21-1983
5. Physical and Chemical Characteristics of Pipes 6.2 Trunmerse Crushing Strength - Junctions
shall not fracture below the loads for pipes of corres-
5.1 Internul Hydrostatic Pressure Test - Pipes
ponding bore and class given in 3 above.
shall not show leakage or swearing on their outside
surface at a pressure of 2.55 kgf/cm2. 6.3 Chemicul Churucteristics - As for pipes.
5.2 Trunsvrrse Crushing Strength - Pipes shall not
7. Joints
show fracture below the loads for the diameter and
class given in3 above. They also shall have a minimum 7.1 Joints shall be made of material similarto that of
transverse crushing stress of 367 kgf/cm2. the pipe.
5.3 Longitudinal Bending Strength - Class 1 pipes 7.2 Rubber sealing rings complying with
of 100, 125 and 150 mm nominal bore shall not IS : 5382-1%9*, shall be used. ’
fracture below 385, 525 and 800 kgf respectively.
7.2.1 Assembled joint shall withstand internal ,
5.4 Chrmicul Charucteristics (Soluhility in Acid hydrostatic pressure of 2.55 kgf/cm*.
Test) - Acetic acid neutralised shall not exceed 0.1
7.3 Total angular deviation in degree from straight
g/cm2.
line shall be not less than 1 150 outside dia in mm at
ends or 6” whichever is smaller.
6. Physical and Chemical Characteristics of
Fittings The axial draw at each end of the joint shall be not
less than 25 mm.
6.1 Internal Hydrostutic Pressure Test - For bends
and junctions up to 225 mm bore only. Shall show no *Specification for rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains
leakage or sweating at pressure of 2.55 kgf/cm*. and sewers.
Note-For methods of tests for reauirements given in 5 and 6 refer to IS : 5913-1970 Methods of test for asbestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6908-1975 Specification for non-pressure asbestos cement pipes and
fittinis for sewerage and drainage.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 458-I 97 1 CONCRETE PIPES

(WITH AND WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT)
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements a;ld test for reinforced NP3 - Reinforced con- For drainage and irriga-
and unreinforced cement concrete pipes, pressure and Crete, heavy duty, non- tion, culverts carrying
non-pressure types, used for water mains, sewers, pressure pipes heavy traffic
culverts, and irrigation. Prestressed and non-circular
pipes are not covered.
NP4 - Reinforced con- For drainage and irriga-
2. Classification
crete, heavy duty, non- tion, culverts carrying
pressure pipes very heavy traftic, such
NP 1-Unreinforced con- For drainage and
as railway loadings
crete, non-pressure irrigation, above ground
pipes or in shallow trenches
Pl -Reinforced con- For gravity mains, design
NP2 - Reinforced con- For drainage and irriga- Crete pressure pipes pressure not exceeding
crete, light-duty, non- tion, culverts carrying tested to hydrostatic 2/3 of test pressure
pressure pipes light traffic pressunz of 2 kg/cm2
32
SP : 21-1983
P2 - Reinforced con- For use on pumping Note 2 - For dimensions of spigot and socket ends in case of
crete pressure pipes mains, design pressure NPI class pipe. refer to Table 8 of hr smndurd.
tested to hydrostatic not exceeding l/2 test
3.2 Tolertrnces
pressure of 4 kgf/cm* pressure
a) Length + 1 percent
P3 - Reinforced con- For use on pumping b) Internal diameter of pipes
crete pressure pipes mains, design pressure or socket
tested to hydrostatic not exceeding l/2 test Up to 300 mm +3 mm
pressure of 6 kgf/cm2 pressure - 1.5
400 mm +6
Unreinforced and reinforced non-pressure pipes shall
-3 mm
withstand test pressure of 0.7 kgf/cm2. Over 400 mm +_ k.;5 percent
3. Dimensions
4. Workmanship and Finish
3.1 Pipes
4.1 Ends of the pipe shall be square with longitudinal
axis. Tolerance 3 mm for pipes up to 600 mm diameter
ChS Internal Diameter of Pipes (in mm)
and 6 mm for pipes over 600 mm diameter. Free from
NPl 80,100,150,200,225,250,300,350,400 and cracks and visible defects.
450 .
4.2 Deviution fiorn Struight - shall not exceed 3
NP2 80, 100, 150,200, 225, 250, 300, 350,400, mm for every metre run.
450,500,600,700,800,900,1000,1 100,
5. Tests
1200,1400,1600and1800 b
5.1 Every pressure pipe shall be tested for hydrosta-
NP3 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900,
tic pressure.
1000,1100and1200’
NP4 400,500,600,700,800,900, 1000,l 100, Note -The pipe joints shall withstand the same pressure as
the pipe.
1200,1400,1600and1800
Pl 80, 100, 150, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350,400, 5.2 Selected specimen shall be tested for the
450,!%0,600,700,800,900, 1000, 1 100 following.
and 1 200
L- 5.2.1 Hydrostatic test
P2 80, 100, 150, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350,400,
5.2.2 Three edge hearing test or sand bearing test
450, 500 and 600
5.2.3 Absorption test -
shall not exceed 2.5 per-
P3 80,100,150,200,225,250,300,350and400
cent of the dry weight in first 10 minutes and 6.5
percent at the end of 24 hours.
Note 1 - For wall thickness. length of barrel and collar of
pipes, the minimum reinforcements and strength test requirements 5.2.4 Bursting test - Ultimate tensile strength of
of seven types of pipes, refer to Tables 1 to 7 of the sumkwd. concrete not less than 21 kgf/cm2.
Note 1 -For requirements of material, design and manufacture, refer to the stundurd.
Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to 1S : 3597-1966Methods of test for concrete pipes and 456-1978 Code of practice for plain and
reinforced concrete (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 458-1971 Specification for concrete pipes (with and without
reinforcement) (second revision).
33
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 784-1978 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PIPES

(INCLUDING FITTINGS)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of ptestressed concrete b) For pipes of length 4 m and above:

cylinder and non-cylinder pipes (including fittings)
Internal Diameter Tolerance
with nominal internal diameter in the range of 80 mm A
( \
to 1 800 mm, in which permanent internal stresses are In areas within Over test
deliberately introduced by tensioned steel counteract 600 mm of an end of the pipe
the stresses caused in the pipe under service to the of the pipe
desired’ degree.
mm mm
2. Termindogy Up to 90 mm +6 +9
Over 900 mm, +9 + 12
2.1 Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe - A upto 1 600mm
welded sheet steel cylinder with steel socket and spigot Over 1 600 mm z!I 12 f 12
rings welded to its ends, lined with concrete suitably
compacted and circumferentially prestmssed to with-
stand internal pressure and external design loads and 3.2.3 Thickness - Shall be as below:
subsequently coated with cement mortar to protect the Wall Thickness Tolerance
steel cylinder and ptestressing wires. mm
2.2 Prestressed Concrete Non-cylinder Pipe - A Up to 25 mm Iii 1.5
suitably compacted concrete core longitudinally pm- Over 25 mm, up to + 2.0
stressed with pm-tensioned high tensile steel wire 35 mm
embedded in the concrete, circumferentially prestres- Over 35 mm, up to f 3.0
sed to withstand internal pressure and external design 50 mm
loads and subsequently coated with cement mortar/ Over 50 mm It(3mm+ lmmfor
concrete to protect the circumferential prestressing every 15 mm or part
wire. ‘thereof over 50 mm,
limited to maximum
3. Dimensions and Tderances of 5 mm)
3.1 Dimensions - The internal diameter and the 4. Workmanship and Finish
length of pipes shall be as specified in Table 1.
4.1 The maximum permissible deviation from the
TABLE 1 INTERNAL DIAMETER AND LENGTH OF
straight on internal surfaces of any pipe throughout its
PIPES length shall not exceed 3 mm for every metre length for
IIWXNALDIAMETEROF PIPE bNGTHOFhiI all pipe diameters.
mm m
4.2 Pipes shall be free from local depressions or
80, 100, 125, 150,250,300,350 and 2, 2.5, 4, 5 or 6 bulges greaterthan 5 mm in depth and extending overa
400 length, in any direction, greater than twice the thick-
450,500,600,700,800,900,1000, 2.5, 4, 5 or 6
ness of barrel.
1100,1200,1400,1600and1800
5. Tests
3.2 Tolerances
5.1 Visual Inspection
3.2.1 Length - Shall not vary by more than + 1
percent. 5.2 Dimensional Characteristics
3.2.2 internal diameter 5.3 Hydrostatic Proof Test - The hydrostatic proof
test pressure shall be one and a half times the working
a) For pipes of length less than 4’m: pressure except where the strength has to be increased
to take care of surge or water hammer. In such cases,
_+5mm For dia up to 300 mm the pressure shall be the working pressure, plus
* 10mm For dia exceeding 300 mm allowance for surge, or one and a half times the
and up to 800 mm working pressure, whichever is the greater.
34
SP : 21-1983
5.4 Permeability Test - The drop of water level in 5.5 Three-Edge Bearing Test (for Non-cylinder
the stand pipe shall not exceed 1 cm3 in half an hour Pipes). I
taken over a period of 2 hours.
Note l--For requirements regarding materials, design criteria, manufacture, fittings and joints, refer to the standard.
Note 2-For methods of tests and other test details, refer to the stundurd and IS : 3597-1966 Methods of test for concrete pipes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 784-1978 Specification for prestressed concrete pipes (including
fittings) (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1916-1963 STEEL CYLINDER REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of tests for 4. Dimensions

steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes of nominal
internal dia 200 mm to 1 800 mm for use in water 4.1 Dicaneter - Internal 200, 250, 300, 350,400,
mains, sewers, irrigation works, etc, having (a) spigot 450,500,600,700,900, 1 100, 1 200, 1 400, 1 600
and socket ends, .and (b) plain ends on slip-in type ends and 1 800 mm. Tolerance +3 mm for pipes up to 300
suitable for field welding. Requirements for specials mm diameter and lesser, of f 6 mm or + 1l/i percent for
are not covered. larger pipes.
2. Classification 4.2 Barrel Thickness

Class Test Pressure Working Pressure
Diameter Thickness Inner Outer
(kgf/cm*)
5 50 percent for (mm) (mm) Face to Face to
1
2 10 pumping mains, and Centre of Centre of
67 percent for Steel Steel
3 15
4 20 gravity mains (mm) (mm)
5 25
200t0300 40 15 25
Special class Above 25
350 and 400 45 20 25
3. Materials
3.1 Steel plates for cylinder shall conform to 450 to 1 100 50 25 25
IS : 226-1975* or IS : 2062-1962t. When plate
1 200 to 1 800 70 30 40
thickness exceeds 20 mm, it shall conform to
IS : 2062-1962t.
5. Tests - Each steel cylinder shall undergo hyd-
3.2 Aggregates - Maximum size 10 mm or one- raulic test for test pressure given in 2.
third the thickness of concrete covering.
3.3 Concrete andMortar - Minimum cement con- 6. Workmanship and Finish - Pipes shall be
tent 380 kg/m3 of concrete and minimum cube strength straight and free from cracks. The ends of pipes shall
3.50 kgf/cm* . be square with their longitudinal axis. No opening
.between ends in contact shall exceed 3 mm in pipes up
“Specilicationforstructuralsteel(standardquality)(fifih revision). to 600 mm dia and 6 mm in pipes larger than 600 mm
Wpecification for stmctural steel (fusion welding quality) (Frsr dia. The surface of pipes shall be smooth, dense and
revision). hard.
Note-For detailed requirements of material, design and manufacture, and method of test, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1916-1963 Specification for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes.
35
SP : 21-1983
/
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4350-1967 CONCRETE POROUS PIPES FOR UNDER DRAINAGE

1. Scope - Requirements for porous pipes made of
concrete for use in under drainage, ranging from 80 TABLE 2 COLLAR DIMENSIONS
mm to 900 mm nominal internal diameter with three
NOMINAL INTERNAL COLI.AR DIME~SIOXS MINIMUM
types of joints. GAMETES 0F RPE ,-A-7 LENGTH
2. Materials Minimum Caulking Minimum
Space Thickness
Cement - Ordinary and low heat Portland cement
(1) (2) (3) (4)
and Portland slag cement. Use of high alumina cement mm‘ mm mm mm
or sulphate resisting cement is optional.
.
Aggregate - All aggregates shall pass through 20 801
mm IS Sieve and retained on 4.75 mm IS Sieve.
150
3. Shape and Dimensions 250)
3.1 Pipes may have butt ends; or rebated or ogee 300
ends. 350 16 30 150
4oG>
3.2 Dhensions of Pipes -- See Table 1.
450
19 35 200
500 >
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR CONCRETE POROUS PIPFS
600
19 40 200
NOMINAL. EFFECI IVE MINIMUM WALL JOINTS 700 >
lNTFRNAL LENGTH THICKNESS
800
DIAMETER 19 45 200
wo>
(1) (2) (31 (4)
mm m mm
3.4.1 Deviation frm straightness - Not to ex-
80‘1
ceed 3 mm per metre run.
;g 2.0 25 Butt, rebated or ogee
i
4. Tests - Selected specimens shall be subjected to
the following tests.
30 Butt, rebated or ogee
4.1 Load Test - Specimens shall support a
minimum load of 2 000 kg uniformly distributed per
;; 2.5 or 3 35 Butt, rebated or ogee metre length of pipe without showing any signs of
failure.
6001 2.5 or 3 .o 40 Butt, rebated or ogee
700) 4.2 Infiltration Test - Rate of infiltration shall not
800 2.5 or 3.0 45 Butt, rebated or ogee be less than the following:
WO’ 2.5 or 3.0 50 Butt, rebated or ogee Nuninal Internal Dia Rate of tnfltration
(mm) per Metre Length
3.3 Dhensions for Collar (for Butt End Pipes) - of Pipe
See Table 2. (litre/min)
80- 100 60
3.4 Tolerance - Lengths + 1 percent. 150 120
lntemal diameter 250 180
Up to 300 mm +3 mm 300-900 300
-1.5 mm
300 to 400 mm +6 mm
-3 mm
Over 400 mm + 1.5 percent
-0.75 percent
Note- For detailed requirements of materials, manufacture and finish, methods of tests and typical sketch, refer to Ihe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4350-1967 Specification for concrete porous pipes for under
drainage.
36
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 73 19- 1974 PERFORATED CONCRETE PIPES
1. Scope - Requirements of perforated non- 4.1 The minimum laying length shall be 1 m.
reinforced concrete pipes for use in underdrainage
4.2 Tolerances
work.
a) Overall length +l percent
Note 1 - Reinforced concrete pipes may be supplied by b) Internal diameter of pipe
mutual agreement.
and socket
Note 2 - These pipes anz used in infiltration galleries, re-
Up to 300 mm +3
claiming water logged areas, etc. - 1.5 mm
2. Classification Over 300 up to 400 mm
a) Circular Perforations Pipes - 5 to 8 mm Over 400 mm +1.5

_. 75 percent
dia, perforations arranged in rows parallel to
axis, and spaced about 75 mm centre to centre c) Barrel wall thickness
along rows. Rows shall be spaced over not up to 25 mm 11.5 mm
more than 165” of circumference. over 25 mm to 30 mm +2 mm
over 30 mm to 50 mm 13 mm
b) Slotted Perforations Pipes - Slots shall be
circumferential in.direction, width 3 to 5 mm 4 Deviation from straight shall not exceed
and length and spacing as in table in 4 below. 3 mm/m
Two rows of slots spaced 165”. Note - For detailed physical test and dimensional require-
ments for standard strength of bell and spigot, perforated non-
3. Materials - Size of aggregate shall not exceed minforced conctete underdrainage pipe, refer to Table 1 with
one-third the thickness of pipe or 20 mm. In case of Fig. 1 of rhe srundard.
concrete other than controlled concrete, mix shall have
minimum cement content of 360 kg/m3 and a minimum 5. Workmanship and Finish
compressive strength of 185 kgf/cm2at 28 days in work 5.1 Shall be substantially free from fractures, cracks
tests. If mortaris used, it shall have a minimum cement and blisters, laminations and surface roughness.
content of 450 kg/m3 and a compressive strength of not
less than 185 kgf/cm* at 28 days in work tests. 5.2 Joints - Spigot and socket type (tongue and
groove joint, collar joint, etc, permissible by mutual
4. Sizes and Mmensions agreement).
Internal Minimum Rows of Perforation Length Spacing Minimum Strength

Dia Thickness Perforation per Row of Slot of Slot (Three-Edge
of Barrel Bearing Method)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) c/J

mm ‘mm mm mm kg/m
80 25 9 25 50 -
100 25 9 25 75 1 560
150 25 9 37.5 75 1 560
200 25 10 50 100 1 560
225 25 10 50 100 1 670
250 25 10 50 100 1 670
300 30 10 75 150 1690
350 32 10 . 75 150 I 880
400 32 10 75 150 2 020
450 35 10 75 150 2 230
37
SP : 21-1983
5.3 Specials - Shall have spigot and socket ends. 6. Tests

Curves shall be at 90”, 45” and 22%“. 6.1 Three-Edge Bearing Test or Sand Bearing Test
5.4 Water Curing - Two weeks for ordinary ce-
ment and 1 week for rapid hardening cement. Steam 6.2 Absorption Test - Total absorption at the end
curing is also permissible. of 24 hours shall not exceed 8 percent of dry weight.
Note-For tat details, refer to IS : 3597-1966 Methods of tests for concrete pipes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7319-1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7322-1974 SPECIALS FOR STEEL CYLINDER REINFORCED

CONCRETE PIPES
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of tests for 4. Dimensions

steel cylinder reinforced concrete specials for steel
4.1 The nominal internal diameter for bends, tees,
cylinder reinforced concrete pipes conforming to
and scour tees and flanges shall be 200,250,300,350,
IS : 1916-1963* having internal diameter from 200 to
400,450,500,600,700,900, 1 100, 1 200, 1400,
1 800 mm. Covers specials having:
1 600 and 1 800 mm.
a) spigot and socket ends,
Note - Fordetailed dimensions for bends, tees, scour tees and
b) plain ends or slip-in type ends suitable for flange details, see Fig. 1 to 4 of the standard.
field welding, or
5. Tolerances I
cl flanged ends for connection with valves and
accessories. a) Arm length f40 mm
2. Classification - Specials have the same classi- b) Arm length (specified) + 10 mm

fication as for pipes given in 2.10 of IS : 1916- c) Internal dia
1963*, but shall have test pressure as below: up to 300 mm +3 mm
kgf/cm* over 300 mm +6 mm or 11%
Class 1, 2 and 3 15 percent,
Class 4 and 5 25 whichever is less
Special class Above 25, as specified d) Angular deviation + 1”
by the purchaser
6. Workmanship and Finish
Note - As a general guide the corresponding working pres-
sures for these specials may be taken as 50 percent and 67 perLent 6.1 Specials shall be free from cracks when placed in
of the above values for pumping mains and gravity mains site trench, no opening between ends in contact shall
respectively. exceed 3 mm in specials up to 600 mm dia and 6 mm in
3. Materials - Aggregate size shall not exceed specials larger than 600 mm dia.
one-third the wall thickness or 10 mm. Concrete mix
6.2 Specials shall be free from local dents or bulges
shall have minimum cement content of 450 kg/m3 and
greater than 3.0 mm in depth and extending over a
a minimum compressive strength of 200 kg/cm* at 28
length in any direction greater than twice the thickness
days works test. If mortar is used minimum cement
of barrcl.
content shall be 600 kg/m3 and compressive strength of
200 kg/cm* at 28 days works test.
7. Tests
*Specification for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes. 7.1 Specimens shall be hydrostatically tested at
38
..
SP : 21-1983
works before lining with concrete. Where this is not 7.3 Penetration Oil Test - A hot paraffin oil (at
practicable, unlined special may be tested by applica- temperature generally 20°C below its flash point) when
tion of a penetration oil or other approved means, by poured over the weld from the inside surface, should
mutual agreement. not show any sign of leakage of its vapour on the
7.2 Hydrostatic Test - According to 7.1 of outside of the welded joints.
IS : 1916-1%3* and IS : 3597-1966t.
*Specification for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes.

tMethods of test for concrete pipes.
I
Note-For requirements regarding design and manufacture, refer to 4 and 7 of the s~undard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7322-1974 Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced
concrete pipes.
39
SECTION 2
POZZOLANAS
..
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS: 1344-1981 Calcined clay pozzolana (second revision) 43

IS : 3812-1981 Fly ash for use as pozzolana and admixture (first revision) 44
42
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1344-1981 CALCINED CLAY POZZOLANA

(Second Revision)
1. Scope-Requirements of calcined clay poz- Magnesium oxide (MgO) Not more than 3 percent
zolana for part replacement of unblended Sulphuric anhydride (SO,) Not more than 3 percent
cements, for use with lime, for use as an admix- Soda and Potash Not more than 3 percent
ture and for manufacture of Portland pozzolana (NazO + KzO)
cement conforming to IS : 1489-1976*,‘ and gives Water-soluble alkali Not more than 0.1
guidelines for manufacture of calcined clay percent
pozzolana. Water-soluble material Not more than 1 percent
Loss on ignition Not more than 10 per-
2. Designation- Shall be supplied in the follow- cent
ing grades:
Grade General Use
Designation 4. Physical Requirements -see Table 1.
Grade I For incorporation in unblended
cement mortar and concrete
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
and in lime-pozzolana mixture,
and for manufacture of Port- SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
No. A
land pozzolana cement. =
-Chade I Grade II-
Grade II For incorporation in unblended
cement mortar and concrete (1) (2) (3) (4)
and in lime-pozzolana mixture. i) Fineness - Specific surface in 320 250
Also for manufacture of Port- m2/kg by Blaine’s permeability
method, Min
land pozzolana cement by in- ii) Lime reactivity - Average corn- 4.0 3.b
tergrinding method subject to pressive strength in N/mm2, Min
requirements of IS : 1489- iii) Compressive strength* at Not less than 80
1976*. 28 days, Min percent of the
strength of corre-
3. Raw Materials-Clay for manufacture of sponding plain
pozzolana shall conform generally to the follow- c e m e n t mortar
ing chemical requirements on an oven dry basis (at cubes
105°C): iv) Drying shrinkage, Mux 0.15 0.10
Constituents Contents *Applicable in case of pozzolana to be used for manufacture

of Portland-pozzolana cement only.
Silica+altmnna +iron oxide Not less than 70 per-
(SiOz + Al,O, + FezOJ) cent
Silica (SiOs) Not less than 40 per-
cent 5. Delivery-Packed in bags of 50 kg net.
Calcium oxide (CaO) Not more than 10 per- Tolerance + 2.5 percent per bag and f 0.5 percent
cent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
*Specification for Portland-pozzolana cement (second revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1727-1%7 Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision) and for other details of
testing, refer to the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1344-1981 Specification for calcined clay pozzolana (second
revision).
43
SP :.21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS :, 3812-1981 FLY ASH FOR USE AS POZZOLANA

AND ADMIXTURE
(First Revision)
1. ,SCope- Extraction and physical and chemical
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
requirements of fly ash for use as a pozzolana for
part replacement of cement, for use with lime, for SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
No.
use as an admixture and for manufacture of
Portland-pozzolana cement conforming to (1) (2) (3)
IS : 1489-1976*. 9 Silicon dioxide (SKI,) plus aluminium 70.0
oxide (Alz03) plus iron oxide (FezOl),
Note-Fly ash with loss on ignition value up to I2 pcrccnt percent by mass, Min
may be used for replacement of cement. ii) Silicon dioxide (SiOz), percent by mass, 35.0
Min
2. Designation-Shall be supplied in following iii) Magnesium oxide (MgO), percent by mas, 5.0
. Max
grades: iv) Total sulphur as sulphur trioxide (SO& 2.75
percent by mass, MUX
Grade General Use v) Available alkalis as sodium oxide (NazO), 1.5
Designation percent by mass, Max (see Note I)
vi) Loss on ignition, percent by mass, Max 12.0
Grade I For incorporation in cement Note I - Applicable only when reactive aggregates are used
mortar and concrete and in in concrete and especially requested by the purchaser.
lime pozzolana mixture, and Note 2 - For determination of available alkalis,
for manufacture of Portland- IS : 4032-l968* shall be referred to.
pozzolana cement. *Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
Grade II For incorporation in cement

mortar hnd concrete and in
lime pOZZOlaila mixture. TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIHEMEN r
Also for manufacture of Port- No. A
land-pozzolana cement subject ’ Grade Grade ’
p requirements of IS : 1489- I
1976*. (1) (2) (3) (:
i) Fineness - Specific surface in 320 250
3. Extraction-From flue gases of ground or m2/kg by Blaine’s permeability
method, Min
pulverized coal, or lignite fired boilers by any ii) Lime reacfivily - Average com- 40 3.0
suitable process, such as cyclone separation or pressive strength in N/mmz, Min
electrostatic precipitation. iii) Compressive strength at Not less than 80
28 days, Mh percent of the
4. Chemical Requirements-See Table 1. strength of cor-
responding plain ce-
ment mortar cubes
5. Physical Requirements--See Table 2. iv) Drying shrinkage, percent, Max 0.15 0.10
v) Soundness by autoclave test, ex- 0.8 0.8
pansion of specimens, percent,
*Specification for Portland-porzolana cement (second Max
revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1727-1967Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision) and for other details of
testing, refer to the stun&&.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3812-1981 Specification for fly ash for we as pozzolana and
admixture (first revision).
44
SECTION 3
BUILDING LIMES
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS: 712-1973 Building limes (second revision) 47

IS : 2686-1977 Cinder aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision) 50
IS : 3068-1975 Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete 51
yirst revision)
IS : 3115-1978 Lime based blocks yirst revision)
IS : 3182-1975 Broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar (first ::
revision)
IS : 4098-1967 Lime-pozzolana mixture 53
IS : 4139-1976 Sandlime bricks (first revision) 54
46
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF *
IS : 712-1973 BUILDING LIMES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for building limes used with addition of pozzolanic material
for construction purposes. for masonry mortar.
Class D - Magnesium lime used for finishing
2. Classification: coat in plastering, whitewashing,
etc.
Class A- Eminently hydraulic lime used for Class E - Kankar lime used for masonry mor-
structural purposes. tars.
Class B- Semi-hydraulic lime used for
masonry mortars. 3. Chemical Requirements -See Table 1.
Class C- Fat lime used for finishing coat in
plastering, whitewashing, etc, and 4. Physical Requirements - See Table 2.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL BEQUIBEMENTS
SL TYPE OF TEST , REQUIREMENTS

No. h
/ \
Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E
---
Hydrated _Quick Hydrated ’ . Quick Hydrated Quick Hydrated Hydrated
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
9 Calcium and magnesium oxides, 60 70 70 85 85 85 85 25

percent, Min
ii) Magnesium oxide, percent:

Max 5 5 5 5 5 - - 5
Min - - - - - 5 5 -
iii) Silica, alumina and ferric oxide, 25 I5 I5 - - - - -

percent, Min
iv) Unhydrated oxides, percent, Max - - - - - 8 8 -
v) Insoluble residue in hydrochloric 2 3 2 -- - - -

acid less the silica, percent, Max
vi) Insoluble matter in sodium carbo- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

nate solution, percent, Max
vii) Loss on ignition, percent, Max - 5 for large - 5 for large - 5 for large - 5
lump, 7 for lump, 7 for lump, 7 for
lime other lime other lime other
than large than large than large
lump lump lump
viii) Carbon dioxide, percent, Max 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 -
ix) Cementation value:

Min 0.6 0.3 0.3 - - - - -
MUX - 0.6 0.6 - - L - -
47
TABLEt 2 PHYSICAL REQUREMENTS 6
..
REQlJIRF.MEm E
SL TYPB OF TEST 8
No. ‘CkX%A Class B Chss c Class D Class E \ t;
A A Hydrated E
\
Hydrated vQuick Quick Hydrated v Quick Hydrated
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
i) Fineness Shall leave no resi- - Shall leave no resi- - Shall leave no resi- - Shall leave no resi- Shall leave no re-
due on 2.36mm due on 2.36~mm due on 850-micron due on 850 micron sidue on 2.36
IS Sieve, not IS Sieve, not more IS Sieve, not more IS Sieve,not more mm IS Sieve,
more than 5 per- than 5 percent on than 5 percent on than 5 percent on not more than 5
cent on MO- 850 - micron IS 300 - micron IS 300 - micron IS percent on 850-
micron IS Sieve Sieve and the frac- Sieve and the frac- Sieve and the frac- micron IS Sieve
and the fraction tion passing throu- tion passing throu- tion passing throu- and the fraction
passing through gh 850-micron IS gh 300-micron IS gh 300-micron IS passing through
850 - micron IS Sieve shall leave Sieve shall leave Sieve shall leave 850 - micron IS
Sieve shall leave not more than 10 not more than 10 not more than 10 Sieve shall leave
not more than percent (of this percent (of this percent (of this not more than
10 percent (of fraction) on 300- fraction) on 212- fraction) on 212- 10 percent (of
this fraction) on micron IS Sieve micron IS Sieve micron IS Sieve this fraction) on
300 - micron IS 300 - micron IS
Sieve Sieve
ii) Residueon slak- - 10 on WO-micron 5 on 850-micron - 5 on 850-micron - -

ing (on the basis IS Sieve IS Sieve, the IS Sieve, the
of quick lime fraction passing fraction passing
taken), Max, through this through this
txxent, by Sieve when fur- Sieve when fur-
ther passed thr- ther passed thr-
ough 3Ofbicron ough 3O@micron
IS Sieve shall IS Sieve shall
leave residue 5 leave residue 5
iii) Setting time In the putty of - - - - In the putty of

standard consi- standard cons1
stency, initial stency. initial
set shall take set shall take
place in not less place in not less
than 2 hours than 2 hours
and final set and final set
within 48 hours within 48 hours
iv) Compressive 17.5 kgf/cm2 after - 12.5 kgf/cmz after 14 - - - - 10.5 kgf/crG after
strength, Min 14 days and 28 days and 17.5 kgf/ 14 days and
kgf/cm2 after 28 cm2 at 28 days 17.5 kgf/cm2
days shall, how- shall, however, after 28 days
ever, show an show an increase shall,. however;
increase over over that at 14 show an incre-
that at 14 days days ase over that at
14 days
v) Transverse Modulus of rup- - Modulus of rupture - -. - - Modulus of rup-

strength ture not less than not less than 7.0 ture not less
7.0 kgf/cm2 at kgf/cmz at 28 days than 7.0 kgf/cm2
28 days at 28 days
vi) Workability - - - Shall require Shall require not Shall require Shall require not -
not less than less than 10 not less than less than 10
12 bumps to bumps to attain 12 bumps to bumps to attain
attain an ave- an average spre- attain an ave- an average spre-
rage spread of ad of 19 cm rage spread of ad of 19 cm
19 cm from an from an initial 19 cm from an from an initial
initial spread spreadofllcm initial spread spread of 1 I cm
of 11 cm on on the flow table of 1 I cm on on the flow table
the flow table the flow table
t2
vii) Volume yield - - - 1.7mlpergor - 1.4 ml per g or -
as agreed to as agreed to
between the between the
purchaser and purchaser and
the supplier the supplier
viii) Soundness The Le. Chatelier - The Le Chateliar - - - - The Le Chatelier

moulds shall not moulds shall not moulds shall not
exhibit more exhibit more than exhibit more
than 10 mm ex- 10 mm expansion than 10 mm
pansion expansion
ix) Popping and - - - - Shall not exhibit Shall not exhibit -

pitting any disintegra- any disintegra-
tion popping or tion popping or
pitting on the pitting on the
surface surface
SP : 21-1983
5. Packing - Hydrated lime in jute bags lined with lime in metal or other suitable containers of
polythene or craft paper bags containing 50 kg. Quick 50 kg.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 6932 (Parts I to X)-l973 Methods of test for building limes and IS : 4031-1968 Methods of
physical tests for hydraulic cement.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 712-1973 Specification for building limes (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2686- 1977 CINDER AGGREGATES FOR USE IN LIME CONCRETE

(First Revision)
1. scope - Requirements for cinder for use as 4. Grading - Average grading is as under:
aggregates in lime concrete. Percentage Passing
IS Sieve
2. General - Cinder aggregates shall be well-burnt IO-mm 100
furnace’ residue obtained from furnaces using coal as 4.75~mm 80
fuel. It shall be clean and free from clay, dirt, wood ash 2.36-mm 60
or other deleterious matter. 1.18~mm 40
600-micron 30
3. Classes 300~micron 25
150micron 16
Class A - for general purposes,
Class B - for interior work not exposed to 5. Characteristics
damp conditions, and
5.1 Sulphate Content - Shall not exceed 1 percent
Class C - for precast blocks.
when expressed as sulphur trioxide.
5.2 Loss on ignition - Shall not exceed 10 percent
for Class A, 20 percent for Class B and 25 percent for
Class C.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of thesrundard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 2686-1977 Specification for cinder aggregates for use in lime
concrete (first revision).
50
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3068-1975 BROKEN BRICK (BURNT CLAY) COARSE

AGGREGATES FOR USE IN LIME CONCRETE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for coarse aggregate pre- 3.2 Water soluble matter shall not exceed 1 percent.
pared from broken bricks for use in lime concrete.
3.3 Aggregate impact value not to exceed 50 per-
cent.
2. Quality - Shall be prepared from well burnt or
over burnt broken bricks conforming to IS : 1077-
4. Size - Grading shall be as specified below:
1976*. Shall IX free from under burnt particles, soil
and silt. Dust shall be removed by screening over 4.75 IS Sieve Percentage Passing,
mm IS Sieve. by Weight
80-mm 100
40-mm 95-100
3.11 Water absorption after 24 hours on immersion in 20-mm 45-75
water shall not exceed 25 percent. 4.75-mm -
*Specification for common burnt clay building fjhird revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standurd and IS : X40-1970 Method of test for determining
aggregates impact value of soft coarse aggregates.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3048-1975 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) coarse
aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 31151978 LIME BASED BLOCKS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Dimension, quality and strength re- plastering or rendering on either

quirement of lime based blocks (both hollow and solid) side.
used for walls, internal partitions and filler
c) Type C - Blocks with one face keyed and
walls.
one face smooth.
2. Generd Requirements - All blocks shall be 4. Dimensions
sound, faze from cracks, broken edges, distortion and
other defects. Bedding surface shall be at right angles 4.1 Actual Sizes
to face of blocks. The ends of blocks may be plain,
Length 39 cm
tongued and grooved or double grooved.
Width 10, 20, 30 cm
Height 9, 19cm
3. Types
4.2 Tolerances - +5 mm in length and f 1.5 mm
a) Type A - Block with both faces keyed for in width and height.
plastering.
4.3 Hollow block shall be made with one or more
b) Type B - Block with both faces smooth cavities and wall thickness at any point shall not be less
and suitable for use without than 40 mm.
51
SP : 21-1983
5. Physical Requirements not fall below minimum average value by more than
20 percent.
5.1 Bloc4 lkrzsir~ - Shall not be less than I 000
kg/n+. 5.3 Drying Shrinkage - Shall not exceed 0.1 per-
cent.
5.2 Compressive Strength - Average strength shall
not be less than 3.5 N/mm” (35 kgf/cmz), on gross area 5.4 Moisture M~~~ement- Shall not exceed 0.05
and compressive strength of any individual block shall percent.
Note-For methods of measuring dimensions of blocks and methods of tests, refer to IS : 2185 (Part I)-1979 Specification for
concrete masonry units: Part I Solid and hollow concrete blocks (second revision).
For detailed informution, refer to IS : 3115-1978 Specification for lime based blocks (first revision).
-i
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3182-1975 BROKEN BRICK (BURNT CLAY) FINE AGGREGATE

FOR USE IN LIME MORTAR
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirement for broken brick (burnt 4. Grading - Particle size grading (for use in lime
clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar. mortars for masonry work) shall be as follows:
IS Sieve Percentage Passing (by mass)
2. General Quality - Shall be prepared from
broken/solid bricks conforming to class 50 of 4.75mm 100
IS : 1077-1976*. Shall be free from underburnt parti-
2.36-mm 90 to 100
cles, pyrites, soil and silt.
1.18-mm 70 to 100
600 pm 40 to 100
3.1 Impurity - Quantity of clay, fine silt and fine 300 flrn 5 to 70
dust shall not exceed 5 percent by weight. 150 pm oto 15
*Specification for common burnt clay building bricks (third

revision).
Note-For method of test, refer to IS : 2386 (Part II)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part II Estimation of
deleterious materials and organic impurities.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3182-1975 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate
.for use in lime mortar (first revision).
52
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4098-1967 LIME-POZZOLANA MIXTURE

1. Scope - Requirements for lime-pozzolana mix- 3. Requirements - See Table 1.

ture for use in construction works.
3.2 Soundnc~ - Shall remain firm and hard with-
2. Types out signs of distortion, cracking, etc, after being
subjected to 55f2.5”C for 7 days.
a) LP40 - For masonrv mortars and plasters
r
of grade 30 to 50 kgf/cm2 -and for

4. Delivery - In bags containing 50 kg net.
foundation concrete.
Tolerance: +2.5 percent per bag and kO.5 percent
b) LP20 - For masonry mortars and plasters per wagon load.
of grade 15 to 30 kgf/cm2 and for
foundation concrete.
c) LP7 - For masonry mortars and plasters
of grade 7 to 15 kgf/cm2.
TABLE 1 REQUIRJDIENTS OF LIME-POZZOLANA MIXTURES

(Clause 3)
SL C%ARACWRISTIC REQUIREMENTS
No.
/
LP40 LP20 LP7
i)Free moisture, percent, Max 5 5 5

ii)Loss on ignition, percent, Max 20 20 20
iii)Fineness, percent, retained on 150-micron IS Sieve 10 10 -
iv) Setting time (by Vicat apparatus), hours:
a) Initial, Min 2 2 2
b) Final, MUX 24 36 48
v) Compressive strength:
Average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortar cubes of size 50 mm com-
posed of one part of lime-pozzolana mixture and 3 parts of standard sand
by volume, kgf/cm?
a) 7 days, Min 20 10 3
b) 28 days, Min 40 20 7
vi) Water retention-flow after suction of mortar composed of one part of lime- 70 70 70
pozzolana mixture and 3 parts of standard sand by volume, percent of original flow,
Min
-
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the sfondard, IS : 1727-1967Methods of test for pozzolanic materials .,.
(first revision), and IS : 2250-1980 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4098-1967 Specification for lime-pozzolana mixture.
53
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4139-1976 SANDLIME BRICKS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, 5. Physical Characteristics

compressive strength, classes and drying shrinkage of
sandlime bricks. 5.1 Minimum average wet compressive strength
shall not be less than what is specified for each
2. General Requirements - Bricks shall be class in 4. Compressive strength of any individual I
sound, compact and uniform in shape and free from block shall not fall below this minimum average by
visible cracks, warpage and organic matter. more than 20 percent.
3. Dimensions - Shall be 190~ 90X 90 mm and 5.2 Drying Shrinkage - Shall not exceed the
190~90~40 mm. Tolerance of length +3 mm and of figures given below:
breadth and height +2 mm.
Class Drying Shrinkage
4. Classes - Shall be of the following 4 classes (Percent of Wet Length)
depending on average compressive strength:
75 0.025
Class Average Compressive Strength 100 0.025
kgf/cm2 (N/mm2) 150 0.035
/
A \ 200 -
Not less than Less than
75 75 (7.5) loo (10)
100 100 (10) 150 (15)
150 150 (15) 200 (20)
200 200 (20) -
Note- For methods of tests, refer to Appendix A of thesfandurdand IS : 3495 (Part I)-1976 Method of test for burnt clay building
bricks: Part I Determination of compressive strength (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4139-1976 Specification for sandlime bricks (first revision).
54
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 1127-1970 Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural 57

building stones for masonry work yirst revision)
IS: 1128-1974 Limestone (slab and tiles) (first revision) 58
IS: 1130-1969 Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles) 59
IS: 3316-1974 Structural granite (first revision) 60
IS : 3620-1979 Laterite stone block for masonry first revision) 60
IS : 3622-1977 Sandstone (slabs and tiles) (first revision) 61
IS : 6250-1981 Roofing slate tiles yirst revision) 62
56
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1127-1970 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DIMENSIONS

AND WORKMANSHIP OF NATURAL BUILDING STONES
FOR MASONRY WORK
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Recommendations for dimensions and 2. Dimensions - See Table 1 (based on thickness
workmanship of natural building stones used for of joints 3 mm for ashlar; 6 mm for block in course and
various types of masonry. 10 mm for square rubble).
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF NATURAL BUILDING STONES
SL No. TYPE OP MASCINRY LENGTH BREADTH HEIGHT
(1) w (3) (4) (5)

mm mm mm
i) Stones for ashlar 597 297 297

697 347 347
797 397 397
ii) Stones for block in course 394 194 194

494 244 244
iii) Stones for square rubble 90 90 90

140 90,140 90,140
190 90,140,190 90,140,190
240 90,140,190 90,140,190
290 90,14$190,240 90,140,190,240,290
390 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290
440 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290
490 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290
590 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290
iv) Stones for random rubble May be of any sire and shape but not less than 150 mm in any
direction
v) Stones for sills and lintels a) 890, 90,190,290,390,490 90,140,190

99%
lOOR
1 190,
1290
b) 1390, 190,290,390,490,590 140,190,240,290

1490,
159%
1690,
1190
vi) Stones for arches, domes and circular moulded The dimensions depend on the particulars of the curve
work
vii) Coping stones 190,290,390 200,300,400,500 100,150,200
490,590,690, 600
790
viii) Kerb stones 390,490,590, 100,200,300 300,400,500

690,790
57
SP : 21-1983
3. Tolerance - For ashlar _+5 mm in length and 4. Workmanship - Stratified rocks shall be so
breadth and f3 mm in height. For other types of quarried and dressed that the stones, when set in
masonry + 5, - 10 mm in length and breadth and building, are laid along plane of’ stratification.
+5 mm in height.
Note-For details of dressing of stones, refer t0 4.3 of the .HUndW’d.

For &tailed information, refer to IS : 1127-1970 Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of
natural building stones for masonry work (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 112% 1974 LIMESTONE (SLAB AND TILES)

(First Revision)
1. Scope-Requirements for dimensions and 4. Tolerance in Thickness - + 5 mm up to 25 mm

physical properties of limestone slabs and tiles for and +5 mm for thickness above 25 mm.
use in flooring and face work.
5. Physical Properties - See Table 1.
2. General Requirements - Stone shall be with-
out any soft veins, cracks or flaws and have a uniform
texture. Curvature shall not exceed 5 mm in any
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTlES OF
direction. LIMESTONE SLABS
3. Dimensions - Shall be as follows:

SL CHARACTERLWCS
’ REQUIREMENTS
Length Breadth Thickness No.
15 to 60 cm 15 to 60 cm 15 to 95 mm (1) (2) (3)

in stages of in stages of in stages of i) Water absorption 0.15 percent by weight
5 cm 5 cm 10 mm ii) Transverse strength 70 kgf/cm*
60 to 100 cm 30to 1OOcm do
in stages of in stages of iii) Durability Shall not develop signs of
10 cm 10 cm spalling, disintegration of
100 to 150 cm cracks
do 25 to 95 nun
in stages of in stages of
10 cm 10 cm
Note- For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1121(Part II)-1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties ofnatural
building stones: Part II Transverse strength (first revision), IS : 1124-1974Method of test for determination of water absorption,
apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS : 1126-1974Method of test for determination
of durability of natural building stones (first revirion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1128-1974 Specification for limestone (slab and tiles) first
revision).
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1130-1969 MARBLE (BLOCKS, SLABS AND TILES)
1. Scope - Reqtiirements for sizes, physical prop- 5.2 Slnhs - +2 percent for length and width;
erties, quality and workmanship of marble (blocks, +3 percent for thickness.
slabs and tiles).
5.3 Tiles - +4 percent for linear dimensions; for
thickness, see 4.2.
2. Classification - (a) white, and (b) coloured.
6. Physical Properties -See Table 1.
3. General Requirements - The marble, as far as
possible, shall be free from foreign inclusions and TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MARBLE
prominent cracks. SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
No.
4. Sizes (1) (2) (3)
4.1 Blocks and slabs shall be supplied in following i) Moisture absorption after 0.4 percent by weight, MUX
sizes: 24 hours immersion in
cold water
Length Width Thickness ii) Hardness (Mhos Scale) 3 Min
Blocks 30 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm 30 to 100 ctn iii) Specific gravity 2.5 Min
Slabs 70 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm 20 to 150 mm
7. Workmanship - Edges of slabs and tiles shall
Note - All the sizes given above are in stage of 10. be true. Finish may be one of the following:
a) Sand and/or abrasive finish - A flat non-
4.2 Size @Tiles .- 60x60 cm, 50x50 cm, 40x40
reflective surface.
cm, 30x30 cm, 20x20 cm, and 10x 10 cm. Thick-
ness - 18 to 24 mm in the same piece. b) Hone finish - A velvety finish with little or
no gloss.
5. Tolerance
c) Polished finish - Highly polished glossy
5.1 Blocks - +2 percent for all dimensions. surface.
Note 1 -A short note on grouping of marble in the two categories mentioned above in 2 is given in Appendix A of rhe standard.
Note 2-For method of tests, refer to IS : 1122-1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building
stones (first revision) and IS : 1124-1974Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and Porosity
of natural building stones (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1130-1969 Specification for marble (blocks, slabs and tiles).
59
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 33 16- 1974 STRUCTURAL GRANITE

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements in regard to selection, 3.2 Specijic Gravity ‘- Shall not be less than 2.6.
grading and strength of structural granite for the
3.3 Water Absorption - Shall not be more than 0.5
various constructional uses.
percent.
Note - Granite is a structural andomamental stone because of
its high compressive strength, durability and resistance to wear 4. Dimensions
and abrasion. Fine grained variety takes and preserves high polish 1
and is suitable for ornamental and monumental work. Available 4.1 Slabs -Dimensions of slabs, as specified.
in different colours such as grey, mottled grey, red, pink, dark Tolerance f 2 mm in length and breadth and + 1 mm in
blue, white or green, depending on component minerals. Granite thickness. Bottom face may be rough, but top face
containing injurious minerals such as pyrites and marcasite shall
shall be fine dressed and joint faces shall-b dressed
be excluded.
back square with top surface for at least 50 mm without
2. General Requiredents - Shall be free from hollowness’ or spalling off.
. flaws, injurious veins, cavities and similar imperfec- 4.2 Blocks for Masonry - Dimensions of blocks, as
tions. specified. Tolerance +5 mm for facing blocks. Edges
of blocks shall be dressed according to IS : 1129-
3. Strength Requirements ,* 1972*.
3.1 Compressive Strength - Shall not be less than
1 000 kgf/cm*. *Recommendations for dressing of stones yirst revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1121 (Part I)-1974 Method of test for determination of strength properties of natural
building stones: Part I Compressive strength (first revision), IS : 1122-1974Method of test for determination of true specific gravity
of natural building stones (first revision), and IS : 11241974 Method of test for determination of water absorption and apparent
specific gravity of natural building stones (first revkion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 33161974 Specification for structural granite.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3620-1979 LATERITE STONE BLOCK FOR MASONRY

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, physical 3. Dimensions - Shall be supplied in the foRowing
properties and workmanship for rectangular blocks of standard sizes (other sizes by mutual agreement):
latetite stone for use in construction of walls and parti-
tions . Length Bieadth Thickness
/
mm mm mm -’
2. General Requirements - Shall be without any
soft veins, cracks, cavities, flaws and similar imperfec- 390 190 190
tions. Shall be exposed for three months before using 490 190
but exposure to rains be avoided. 590 290
60
SP : 21-1983
3.1 Tolerance - +5 mm on all dimensions. 4.3 Compressive Strength - Not less than 3.5
N/mm* (for satumted dry samples).
5. Workmanship - Blocks shall be of uniform
4.1 Water Ahsorption - Not more than 12 percent
shape with straight edges at right angle and edges be
by mass.
rough and chisel dressed.
4.2 Specific Gravity - Not less than 2.5.
Note - For methods of tests, refer to IS’: 1121 (Part I)-1974 Method of test for determination of strength properties of natural
building stones: Part I Compressive strength (first revision) and IS : 1124-1974Method of test for determination of water absorption,
apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3620-1979 Specification for laterite stone block for masonry (first
revision).
SUMMARY OF
i IS : 3622-1977 SANDSTONE (SLABS AND TILES)

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions and physi- 3.1.1 Tolerances - +3 mm for thickness.
cal properties of sandstone slabs and tiles for use in
3.2 Machine Cut Slabs - Sizes shall be same as
flooring, roofing and face work.
mentioned in 3.1 with true and square edges.
2. General Requirements 3.2.1 Tolerances - f 1 mm for length and
breadth and f 3 mm for thickness.
2.1 The stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks
and flaws and shall have a uniform texture and colour.
4. Physical Properties -See Table 1.
2.2 The deviation of surface from straightness shall
not exceed 5 mm for slabs and 1 mm for tiles.
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF
3. Dimensions SANDSTONE SLABS
SL CMARACT~~RISTIC REQUIREMENT
3.1 Rough Cut - Sandstone slabs and tiles of rough
cut edges shall be of sizes as specified Mow: E. (2) (3)
i) Water absorption Not more than 2.5 percent by mass
Length Breadth Thickness
ii) Transverse strength Not less than 7 N/mm* (70 kgf/cm*)
15 to 360 cm 15to90cm 15 to 100 mm iii) Resistance to wear Not greater than 2 mm on the average
in stages of in stages of in stages of and 2.5 mm for any individual
5cm _ 5 cm 5mm specimen
Note - ‘Ibe size in between (of length and breadth) shall be iv) Durability Shall not develop sign of spalling, dis-
reckoned as next lower size. This aspect will also cover tolerance integration of cracks
in length and breadth.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1121 (Part II)-1974 Method of test for determination of strength properties of natural
building stones: Part II Transverse strength (first revision), IS : 1124-1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption
apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision), IS : 1126-1974Method of test for determination of
durability of natural building stones (first revision) and IS : 1706-1972Method for determination of resistance to wear by abrasion of
natural building stones (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3622-1977 S’cification for sandstone (slabs and tiles) (first
revision).
61
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6250-1981 ROOFING SLATE TILES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of dimensions, physical Note - Other sizes as mutually agreed to.
properties and workmanship of slate tiles used for
sloped roof covering. Requirements in regard to 3.1.1 Tolemnceof f5mmonlengthandbreadth.
method of laying and fixing of tiles are covered in
IS : 5119 (Part I)-1968*. 4. Physical Properties - See Table 1.
2. General Requirements - Slate shall be free 5. Workmanship - Unless specified otherwise,

from veins, cracks, or other similar source of weak- the slates shall be of uniform thickness and rectangular
ness. Shall be of uniform colour and texture and shall shape with reasonably full corners and edges shall be
not contain white patches and deleterious minerals. true. The exposed surfaces shall be finished as
Slate shall be of reasonably straight cleavage and specified.
grains shall be longitudinal.

3.1 Standard sizes of tiles shall be as follows:

mm mm mm
600 300 15 Min
500 250 15Min
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SLATE TILES
No.
(1) (2) (3)
i) Water absorption a) Maximum average: 2 percent by mass

b) Variation should not exceed 20 percent between individual sample
ii) Modulus of rupture 60 N/mm2 (dry), Min
40 N/mm* (wet), Min
iii) Depth of softening O.OSmm,MUX
iv) Permeability No water shall ooze from the bottom
v) Sulphuric acid immersion (see Note) Shall show no sign of delamination along the edge of swelling, softening,
flaking of the surface and shall not exhibit gaseous evolution during
immersion
vi) Wetting and drying Shall show no sign of delamination or splitting along the edge
nor flaking of the surface
Note - This requirement is related to the conditions of atmospheric pollution and the slate tiles shall be subjected to this require-
ment only if required by the purchaser.
*Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof covering: Part I Slating.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the sfandard and IS : 4122-1967 Method of test for surface softening of
natural building stones.
For detailedinformation, refer to IS : 6250-1981

Specificationfor roofing slate tiles (first revision).
62
SECTION 5
CLAY PRODUCTS FOR BUILDING

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
BLOCKS
IS: 3952-1978 Burnt clay hollow blocks for walls and partitions first revision) 65
BRICKS
IS : 1077-1976 Common burnt clay building bricks (third revision) 66
IS: 2180-1970 Heavy duty burnt clay building bricks yirst revision) 67
IS : 2222-1979 Burnt clay perforated building bricks (second revision) 67
iS : 2691-1972 Burnt clay facing bricks (first revision) 68
IS : 3583-1975 Burnt clay paving bricks first revision) 69
IS : 4885-1968 Burnt clay sewer bricks 69
IS : 5779-1970 Burnt clay soling bricks 70
IS: 6165-1971 Dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks 70
BURNT CLAY JALLIES

IS : 7556-1975 Burnt clay jallies 71
TILES
IS’: 654-1972 Clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern (second revision) 72
IS : 1464-1973 Clay ridge and ceiling tiles (first revision) 73,
IS : 1478-1969 Clay flooring tiles first revision) 74
IS : 2690 (Part I) - 1975 Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part I Machine-made @-St revision) 75.
IS : 2690 (Part II)-1975 Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part II Hand-made Qirst revision) 75
IS : 3367-1975 Burnt clay tiles for use in lining irrigation and drainage works yirst 76
revision)
IS : 3951 (Part I)-1975 Hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part I Filler type yirst revision) 76
IS : 3951 (Part II)-1975 Hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part II Structural type (first revision) 77
64
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3952-1978 BURNT CLAY HOLLOW BLOCKS

FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, quality Type C - Blocks with one face keyed and one
and strength of hollow blocks made from burnt clay face smooth.
and having perforations through and at right angles to
the bearing surface. 4. Dimensions
Note - These blocks are tight in weight for masomy constmc- Length Breadth Height
tion and also being hollow, impart thermal insulation to the cm cm cm
building.
19 19 9
2. General Requirements 29 9 9
2.1 Blocks shall be free from cracks, flaws and 29 14 9
nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform colour. Sha’ll Thickness of shell and web shall be not less than 11
have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides, sharp and 8 mm respectively.
straight edges at right angle; and a fine compact and
uniform texture. 5. Tolerances
2.2 Blocks shall be free from excessive winding or Dimensions Tolerance
bowing. Winding or bowing in length dimension, cm mm
concavity or convexity in external face of blocks, and
9 +4
angles between sides and joining edges shall be not
more than 5 mm. 14 +‘5
19 +7
Note - For testing details regarding trueness of shape, refer
to 3.2 of the standard. 29 +10
6. Crushing Strength - Minimum average value
3. Types
shall be 3.5 N/mm2 (35 kgf/cm2). The strength of
Type A - Blocks with both faces keyed for individual block shall not fall below the average value
plastering or rendering. by more than 20 percent.
Type B - Blocks with both faces smooth for
use without plastering or rendering 7. Water Absorption - Not more than 20 percent
on either side. by mass.
Note-For methods of tests. refer to ADDendices A and B of the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3952-1978 Specification for burnt clay hollow blocks for walls and
partitions (first revision).
65
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1077-1976 COMMON BURNT CLAY BUILDING BRICKS

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for classification, general 4. Dimensions - 19~9x9 cm and 19~9x4 cm.
quality, dimensions and physical requirements of com-
mon burnt clay building bricks used in buildings.
5. Tolerances - Dimensions of bricks shall be
Note - For burnt clay bricks having compressive strength within the following limits per 20 bricks:
more than 400 kgf/cm’, sre IS : 2180-1970*.
Sub-class A Sub-class B ,
2. Classification cm cm
Class Average a) Length 380+ 12 380+30
Designation Compressive
Strength, Not b) Width 180f6 180+ 15
Less Than, ksflcm2 c) Height:
350 350
(For 9-cm 18O_t6 180+ 15
300 300
high bricks)
250 250
200 200
175 175 (For 4cm 80+3 80+6
150 150 high bricks)
125 125
100 100 Note - For measurement of tolerances of burnt clay building
bricks, refer to 52.1 and Fig. 2 of the standard.
75 75
50 50
35 35 6. Physical Requirements
2.1 Each class of bricks shall be further divided into 6.1 Compressive Strength - Shall conform to 2.
sub-classes A and B based on tolerances and shape. Compressive strength of any individual brick shall not
fall below this minimum requirement by more than
3. General Quality - Shall be hand or machine 20 percent.
moulded and free from cracks and flaws and nodules of 6.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than 20
free lime. Frog of 1 to 2 cm deep shall be provided for percent up to Class 125 and not more than 15 percent
9 cm high bricks. No frog is required for 4 cm high for higher classes.
bricks and extruded bricks.
6.3 Efflorescence - Shall be not more than ‘moder-
Note - Shape and size of the frog shall conform to either ate’ up to Class 125 and not more than ‘slight’ for
Fig. 1A or Fig. 1B of rhe srmdard. higher classes.
3.1 Sub-class Abricks shall have smooth rectangular
faces with sharp comers and uniform colour. Sub-
class B may have slightly distorted and rounded edges.
*Specification for heavy-duty burnt clay bricks vrst revision ).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Part Q-1976, IS : 3495 (Part II)-1976 and IS : 3495 (Part III)-1976 Method of test of
burnt clay building bricks:
Part I Determination of compressive strength (second revision).
Part II Determination of water absorption (second revision).
Part III Determination of efflorescence (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1077-1976 Specification for common burnt clay building bricks
(third revision).
66
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2180-1970 HEAVY DUTY BURNT CLAY BUILDING BRICKS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regardi.ng dimensions, slightly distorted and rounded edges.

general quality and physical properties of heavy-duty
burnt clay building bricks. 4. Dimensions’- 19~9x9 cm and 19X9X4 cm.
2. Classification - Classified in accordance with 5. Tolerances

compressive strength: Dimensions Tolerances
Class 400 - Bricks of compressive strength not cm mm -
/\
less than 400 kgf/cm* but less than / \
Sub-class A Sub-class B
450 kgf/cm*
Class 450 - Bricks of compressive strength not 9 +3 +7
less than 450 kgf/cmz 19 +6 +15
Sub-class A and B - Based on tolerance and 6. Physical Properties
shape.
6.1 Compressive Strength - As given in 2.
3. General Quality - Shall be made either by 6.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than 10
pressing or by extrusion process. Shall be free from percent by weight after immersion for 24 hours.
cracks and other flaws and lime nodules. Sub-class A
6.3 Ej’jlorescence - Shall be nil.
bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp
corners and emit ringing sound. Sub-class B may have 6.4 Bulk Density - Not less than 2.5 g/cm3.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2180-1970 Specification for heavy duty burnt clay building bricks
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2222-1979 BURNT CLAY PERFORATED BUILDING BRICKS

( Second Revision)
1. Sc*bpe - Requirements in regard to dimensions, 4. Tolerances

quality and physical requirements of perforated burnt
Dimension Tolerance
clay building bricks for use in walls and partitions.
cm ’ mm
9 +4
2. General Quality - Shall be free from cracks,
19 +7
flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall have rectangular
29 +10
faces, uniform colour, and texture.
5. Perforations - Area shall not exceed 30 to
3. Dimensions - 19x 19x 9 cm and 29X 9X 9 cm. 45 percent of area of face. In case of rectangular
67
SP : 21-1983
perforations, larger dimension shall be parallel to longer 6.1 Compressive Strength - Shall be not less than
side of the brick. Dimensions parallel to short side shall 7 N/mm* on net area.
be not more than 20 mm for rectangular perforations
(25 mm for circular). Area of each perforation shall not 6.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than
exceed 500 mm*. Thickness of any shell shall not be 15 percent by mass.
less than 15 mm and that of any web not less than 6.3 EfJlorescence - Shall be not more than
10 mm. ‘slight’.
6. Physical Requirements 6.4 Warpage - Shall not exceed 3 percent.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision). ,
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2222-1979 Specification for burnt clay perforated building bricks
(second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2691-1972 BURNT CLAY FACING BRICKS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, 5. Tolerances_

quality and strength of burnt clay facing bricks used in
Dimension Tolerance
buildings and other structures.
cm mm
0X
2. Classification ’ Class i Class 11’
Class I - Compressive strength not less than 19 f3 +5
9 +2 +3
100 kgf/cm*
Class II - Compressive strength not less than 4 +1.5 +2
75 kgf/cm* 6. Physical Requirements
6.1 Compressive Strength - As given in 2.
3. General Quality - Shall be of uniform colour
and free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime 6.2 Water Absorption - Shall not exceed 15 per-
and of even text;ure. Shall have rectangular faces and cent after immersion for 24 hours.
sharp strength right angles edges.
6.3 Ejjlorescence - Shall be nil.
4. Dimensions - 19~9x9 cm and 19X9x4 cm. 6.4 Warpage - Shall not exceed 2.5 mm.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of test of burnt clay building bricks (second revkion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2691-1972 Specification for burnt clay facing bricks (first revision).
68
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3583-1975 BURNT CLAY PAVING BRICKS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, 4. Tolerances

quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test Tolerance
Dimension
for burnt clay paving bricks for use in construction of
pavements. ;r”6”
175
4 f 1.5
9.5 and 9 +3
2. General - Shall be mechanically shaped and not
hand moulded. Shall have smooth rectangular faces 5. Physical Properties
and sharp comers.
5.1 Compressive Strength - Shall be not less
than 400 kgf/cm2.
3. Dimensions - 19.5X9.5X9 cm and 5.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than
19.5X 9.5X4 cm. 5 percent by weight after immersion for 24 hours.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495(Parts I to IV)-1976Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3583-1975 Specification for burnt clay paving bricks (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4885-1968 BURNT CLAY SEWER BRICKS

1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, edges fmm plane surface and straight line shall be
quality, strength and methods of sampling and testing 2.5 mm.
of sewer bricks used for sewers of sanitary (domestic)
sewage.
3. General Quality - Shall be free from cracks,
flaws and nodules of lime. Shall have plane rectangula;
faces with sharp edges and comers.
2.1 Dimensions - 19~9x9 cm and 19X9X4 cm.
(For oval and other special shaped sewers, bricks may
4. Compressive Strength - Average shall be not
be tapered suitably.)
less than 175 kg/cm2 and for individual brick, shall be
2.2 Tolerances not less than 160 kg/cm2.
Dimension Tolerance
mm 5. Water Absorption - Average shall he not more
1’9” +5 than 10 percent and for individual brick, shall be not
9 +2 more than 12 percent.
4 f1.5
2.3 Warpage - Tolerance for warpage of face or 6. EMtorescence - Shall be not more than ‘slight’.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4885-1968 Specification for burnt clay sewer bricks.
69
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5779-1970 BURNT CLAY SOLING BRICKS

1. Scope - Requirements in regard to dimensions, 4. General Quality - Shall be free from cracks
general quality and physical properties of burnt clay and other flaws and lime nodules. Shall have, as far as
bricks for soling of roads. possible, plane rectangular faces and straight right
angle edges.
2. Dimensions - 19~9x4 cm and 19x9X9 cm.
3. Tderances - Overall dimension of 20 bricks,
selected at random and arranged in a straight line and in 5.1 Compressive Strengrh - Shall be not less than
contact with each, on a level surface shall be within the 50 kgf/cm*.
following limits:
5.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than
Length 350 to 410 cm 20 percent by weight after 24 hours immersion in cold
Width 165 to 195 cm water.
Height
For 9-cm high brick 165 to 195 cm 5.3 Effirescence - Rating shall be not more than
For 4-cm high brick 74 to 86 cm ‘slight.’
Nate- For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (secondrevision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5779-1970 Specification for burnt clay soling bricks.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 61651971 DIMENSIONS FOR SPECIAL SHAPES

OF CLAY BRICKS
1. Scope - Dimensions for special shapes of clay

bricks used in building and other civil engineering Shape Major Overall
construction. It does not lay down the specification of Dimensions
the special shapes for clay bricks and the same shall cm
b) Copings
conform to the relevant Indian Standards (see
i) Half round coping 29x4
IS : 1077-1976* and IS : 2180-1970t).
ii) Saddle back coping 29x9x 14.5 ‘-
2. Dimensions c) Bullnose bricks
i) Single bullnose or 19X9X9
Shape Major Overall
Dimensions bullnose header
ii) Double bullnose 19X9X9
cm
a) Ciosers iii) Bullnose stretcher 19X9X9
i) Snapheader closer 9X9X9 iv) Bullnose mitre 19X9X9
ii) King closer 19X9X9 v) Bullnose double 19X9X9
iii) Queen closer 19X4X9 vi) Bullnose on end 19X9X9
d) Corner bricks
*Specification for common burnt clay building bricks (ahid
revision ) .
i) Squint 30” 19X9X9
TSpecification for heavy duty burnt clay building bricks yirsr ii) Birdsmouth 30” 19x 9x9
revision). iii) Header splay 19X9X9
70
SP : 21-1983
Shape Major Overall Shape Major Overall

Dimensions Dimensions
cm cm
iv) Single cant or plinth header 19X9X9 t) Culvert bricks

v) Double cant 19X9X9 i) Culvert 10 cm 19X9X9
ii) Culvert 20 cm 19X9X9
e) Plinth bricks
i) Plinth stop .19X9X9 g) Chimney or well type bricks
ii) Plinth stretcher 19X9X9 i) Chimney or well header 19X9X9
iii) Plinth internal return 19X9X9 ii) Chimney or well stretcher 19X9X9
iv) Plinth header 19X9X9
v) Plinth internal return 19X9X9
vi) Plinth external return 19x 9x9
Note-For exact shape of clay bricks and detailed dimensions, refer to Fig. 1 to 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6165-1971 Dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7556-1975 BURNT CLAY JALLIES
1. Scope - Dimension, quality and strength wide and 3 mm deep.

requirements of burnt clay jallies having perforations
of ornamental designs. 3. General Quality - Shall be made from suitable
Note - Burntclay jallies are suiiable for providing a screen on clay. They are often hand moulded, but superior
verandah, construction of parapet or boundary walls, etc. quality jallies are machine made by wire-cut process.
Shall be free from webor shell cracks, flaws or nodules
2. Dimensions and Tolerances of free lime. Shall be uniform in colour and texture. In
case ofwire-cut jallies, cut faces shall be at right angles
2.1 Srandurd Sizes (in cm) and parallel to each other. Warpage shall not exceed
19x 19x 10 14x 14x 10 3 percent when placed between two parallel straight
19x 19x 5 14x 14x 5 edges.
19x 14x 10 14X9X5
19x 14x 5 9X9X5 4. Physical Requirements L.
4.1 Breaking Load - Average value shall be not
2.2 Thickness of shell shall be not less than 10 mm
less than 12kgf/cm width.
and that of web not less than 8 mm.
4.2 Water Absorption - Average value shall not
2.2.1 Total void area shall not exceed 40 percent.
exceed 15 percent.
2.3 Tolerance +3 percent.
4.3 EfJlorescence - Rating shall be not more than
2.4 Keys for bonding with mortar shall be 10 mm ‘slight ‘.
Note- For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 7556-1975 Specificationfor burnt clay jallies.
71
i
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 654-1972 CLAY ROOFING TILES, MANGALORE PATTERN

(Second Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 3)
1. Scope - Requirements for machine-pressed clay Minimum overlap shall be 60 mm lengthwise

interlocking rooting tiles of the ‘Mangalore Pattern’. and 25 mm widthwise.
2. Classilication - Class AA and Class A with

5. Weight -Average of 6 tiles shall be not less
characteristics given in Table 1.
than 2 kg and not more than 3 kg.
3. General Quality
6. Strength Requirements
a) Shap - Placed on plane surface, gap at
corners shall be not more than 6 mm. 6.1 Water Ahsorptior~ - Shall conform to Table 1.
b) Lugs - At least 2 batten lugs and 2 eave lugs 6.2 Permeability Test - Water shall not drip at
of thickness not less than 15 mm at bottom bottom.
and 10 mm at top shall be provided. Projec- 6.2 Breaking Load Test - Shall conform to
tion shall be 7 to 12 mm for batten lugs and Table 1.
not less than 10 mm for eave lugs.
c) Tie down ha/e - 1.6 to 2 mm diameter.
4. Dimensions
Overall Length Overall Width
mm mm
410 235
420 250
425 260
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF ROOFING TILES

(Clauses 2, 6.1 and 6.2)
SL CHARACTERISTIC RBXJIRMENTS
NO. --~~ ~ \
Class AA Class A
(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) Water absorption, percent, Max 19 24
ii) Breaking load. kgf, &fin:
a) Average 100 (for 410 x 235 mm) 80 (for 410 x235 mm)
110 (for 420 x 250 mm 90 (for420x250 mm
and 425 x 260 mm) and 425 x 260 mm)
L..
b) Individual 90 (for 410 x235 mm) 68 (for 410 x 235 mm)
100 (for 420x250 mm 78 (for 420,x 250 mm
and425x26Omm) and 425 x 260 mm)
-
Note 1-For typical details of Mangalore tile, see Fig. 1 of the standard.
Note 2-For tolerances, refer to 5.2 of the standard.
Note 3-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 654-1972 Specification for clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern
(second revision).
72
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1464-1973 CLAY RIDGE AND CEILING TILES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for machine-pressed clay 4. Dimensions of Ridge Tile

ridge and ceiling tiles. Does not cover tiles of irregular
a) Length - 375, 400 and 435 mm; tolerance
sizes, shapes and colour and those made to meet
f5 mm.
special requirements.
b) Width nnd Height - Base 265’ mm, height
100 mm; tolerance 215 mm.
2. Classilication - Class AA and Class A with
c) Thickwss - Shall be not less than 10 mm.
characteristics given in Table 1.
5. Dimensions of Ceiling Tile - Thickness not
3. Shape - The gap at corners of ceiling tiles,
less than 10 mm. Length of lug not more than 20 mm.
when placed on plane surface shall be not more than
6 mm. Ceiling tiles are of two types, namely, double
lug and single lug.
TABLE I CLASSIFICATION OF RIDGE AND CEILING TILICS
(Clause 2)
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENTS
No. / A
Class AA Class A ’
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Water absorption, percent, Max 19 24
ii) Breaking strength, kgf, Min (for ridge tiles only):

a) Average 1.50 1.10
b) individual 1.25 0.95
Note 1 -Common patterns of ridge and ceiling tiles are shown in Fig. 1 and 2 of the sfundard.
Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1464-1973 Specification for clay ridge and ceiling tiles (first
revision).
73
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
,IS : 1478-1969 CLAY FLOORING TILES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, quality 3. General Quality - Shall be uniform in size,
and strength for clay flooring tiles. shape and free from irregularities. Faces shall be plain,
grooved, fluted or figured as specified and edges shall
2. Classification - Class 1, Class 2 and Class 3 be square.
with characteristics given in Table 1.
4. Dimensions
150 X 150 X 15 mm
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF FLOORING TILES 150 X 150 X 20 mm
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENTS 200 X 200 X 20 mm
200 x 200 x 25 mm
No. /
250 x 250 X 30 mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Depth of grooves or frogging underside of tiles
i) Water absorption, 10 19 24 not to exceed 3 mm.
percent, Max
ii) Flexural strength 5. Tolerances
kgficm width,
a) Length and breadth - Average f5 mm, indi-
$firz :
a) Average 6 3.5 2.5 vidual -t2 mm.
b) Individual 5 3.0 2.0 b) Thickness - Average +2 mm, individual
+l mm.
iii) Impact, maximum
height in mm of
6. Warpage - Shall not exceed 2 percent along
drop of (35 mm
diameter,
edges and 1.5 percent along diagonals.
mass
170 g ) steel ball:
a) IS mm thick 25 20 I5
b) 20 mm thick 60 50 40
c) 25 mm thick 75 65 50
d) 30 mm thick 80 70 60
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 1478-1969 Specification for clay flooring tiles (first revision).
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2690 (PART I)-1975 BURNT CLAY FLAT TERRACING TILES

PART I MACHINE-MADE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for machine-made burnt c) Thickness - 20 and 15 mm.

clay flat terracing tiles.
d) Tolerunce - +2 percent.
2. General Quality. - Shall be uniform in shape,
4. Warpage - Shall not exceed 1 percent in any
sizes and free from irregularities.
direction.
5. Water Absorption -Shall not exceed 15 per-
cent.
a) Length - 250 to 150 mm in stages of
25 mm. 6. Flexural Strength - Shall be not less than
b) Widrh - 200 to 100 mm in stages of 25 mm. 15 kgf/cm2.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the sfandard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 2690 (Part I)-1975 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles:
Part I Machine-made (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2690 (PART II)-1975 BURNT CLAY FLAT TERRACING TILES

PART II HAND-MADE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for hand-made burnt clay 3. Warpage - Shall not exceed 2 percent of the
flat terracing tiles. dimensions in any direction.
2. Dimensions and Tolerances 4. Water Absorption - Shall not exceed 20 per- .-

cent by weight.
a) Length - 250 to 150 mm in stages of
25 mm.
5. Compressive Strength - Shall be not less than
b) Width - 200 to 75 mm in stages of 25 mm. 75 kgflcm2. i
c) Thickness - 25 to 50 mm in stages of 5 mm.
d) Tolerances - +3 percent.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second reVisi’%.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2690 (Part II)-1975 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles:
Part II Hand-made (first revision).
75
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3367- 1975 BURNT CLAY TILES FOR USE IN LINING IRRIGATION

AND DRAINAGE WORKS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for machine-pressed, 5. Physical Properties -See Table 1.
wire-cut, or hand-made rectangular burnt clay tiles
used for lining irrigation canals and for drainage
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
channels (other than sewage works).
SL CHARACTERISTIC &QUlREMENTS
2. General - Shall be uniform in size, shape and No. / \
free from irregularities and impurities. Tile shall be Class 105 Ciass 75
(1) (2) (3) (4)
without frog.
i) Compressive strength, k&m’, JO5 75
Min
3. Dimensions - 300 X 150 X 50 mm.
ii) Water absorption, percent, 15 20
3.1 Tolerances - f 1Omm in length, +5 mm in Max
iii) Transverse strength, kgth?, 15 12
width, + 1.5 mm in thickness.
Min
iv) Warp, mm, Max 3 3
4. Classification - Class 105 and Class 75 (see 5).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision),
and Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3367-1975 Specification for burnt clay tiles for use in lining
irrigation and drainage works (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3951 (PART I)-1975 HOLLOW CLAY TILES

FOR FLOORS AND ROOFS
PART I FILLER TYPE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, quality 2.1 Winding or Bowing - Shall be not more than
and strength requirements of hollow clay filler tiles 5 mm per 30 cm length or width.
having perforatibns parallel to their length and in- 2 2
. Concavity or Convexity - Shall be not more
tended for use in floors and roofs.
than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point on either
diagonal. -
2. General Requirements - Shall be free from 2.3 Angles Between Sides and Joining Edges -
cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run.
uniform colour and shall have plane rectangular
faces with parallel sides and straight right angled Note - Tests for tNeneSS of shape arc illustrated in Fig. 1 to 3
of the standard.
IX@.%.
76
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.3 Thickness - Shall be not less than 11 mm for
shell and not less than 8 mm for web.
3.1 Dimensions
Length Width Height 4. Breaking Strength - Shall be not less than
lOkgf/c& length.
340,391;.m440,490 35EOO So”“sO
540, 590, 640, 690 250: 200 100: 110
740 5. Water Absorption - Shall be not more than
20 percent.
3.2 Tolerance - +5 percent.
Note ,l -Typical shapes of hollow clay filler tiles are shown in Fig. 4 of the stundurd.
Note 2-For methods of tests, reter to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3951 (Part I)-1975 Specification for hollow clay tilesforfloors and
roofs: Part I Filler type (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3951 (PART II)-1975 HOLLOW CLAY TILES

FOR FLOORS AND ROOFS
PART II STRUCTURAL TYPE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for quality, dimensions, 3. Dimensions and Tolerances
bulk density, water absorption and strength require-
3.1 Dimensions
ments of structural hollow clay tiles suitable for
floor/roof. Length - 290 and 390 mm
Width - 90 to 190 mm in stages of 50 mm
2. General Requirements - Shall be free from Height - 125 to 200 mm in stages of 25 mm
cracks, flaws or inclusion ofany deleterious materials.
3.2 Thickness - Shall be not less than 12 mm for
2.1 Shall have at least one plane of symmetry in cross shell and not less than 10 mm for web.
section.
3.3 Tolerances - +5 percent on length and width.
2.2 Shall have serrations (not deeper than 3 mm and +5 percent on height.
not wider than 6 mm) on all faces designed to be
concreted or mortared or plastered. Note - Hollow tiles may be either with small perforations or
large holes or a combination of the two.
2.3 Winding or Bowing - Shall be not more than
5 mm per 30 cm length or width. 4. Bulk Density - Shall be not below 0.9 g/cm3
and not more than 1.2 g/cm3.
2.4 Concavity or Convexity - Shall be not more
than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point on either 5. Compressive Strength - Average not less than
diagonal. 200 kgf/cm2. Individual not less than 150 kgflcm*.
2.5 Angle Between Sides and Joining Edges - Shil
be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run. 6. Water Absorption - Shall not exceed 10 per-
cent by weight.
Note - Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig. 1 to 3
of the standard.
Note 1 -Typical shapes of structural clay units for flooring and roofing are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard.
Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to 5.1.1 and Appendices A and B of the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3951 (Part II)-1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and
roofs: Part ZZStructural type (first revision).
77
SECTION 6
GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS

SY : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS 2095-1982 Gypsum plaster boards (first revision) 81

IS 2547 (Part I) - 1976 Gypsum building plasters: Part I Excluding premixed light-weight plasters 82
(first revision)
IS 2547 (Part II) - 1976 Gypsum building plasters: Part II Premixed light-weight plasters (/ifirstrevision) 83
IS 2849-1964 Non-load bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid and hollow types) 84
IS 8272-1976 Gypsum plaster for use in the manufacture of fibrous plaster boards 85
IS 8273-1976 Fibrous gypsum plaster boards 86
80
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2095-1982 GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for gypsum plaster board of the two longitudinals of the boards shall not differ
intended to be usedas a vertical or horizontal lining in more than +3 mm per metre length of the diagonal.
buildings, excluding that which has been subjected to
3.1.1 Tolerance - The tolerance on dimensions
secondary manufacturing operations. It includes
shall be as given below:
boards manufactured to receive either direct surface
decoration or gypsum plaster finishes. Type Tolerance in mm on
w--7
2. Types - Shall be classified according to their Width Length Thickness
USe. Gypsum wall-board 0 0 f0.6
2.1 Gypsum Wall-boards - Gypsum wall-board -5 -6
has a face to which decoration may be applied. Gypsum baseboard :
i) Non-perforated 0 0
2.2 Gypsum Wall-board with Reduced Water Ab- ZlZO.6
-8 -6
sorption Rate - These boards have additives in the
ii) Perforated
core and/or the paper liners to reduce water absorption
mte and may be suitable for special applications in
buildings where the reduced absorption properties are 3.2 Transverse Strength - Breaking load for gyp-
required to improve the performance of the board. sum plaster boards shall be in accordance with Table 2.
2.3 Gypsum Wall-board with Improved Core Cohe-
sion at High Temperatures - These boards have min- TABLE 2 BREAKING LOAD OF GYPSUM PLASTER
BOARDS
eral fibres and/or other additives in the gypsum core to
improve core cohesion at-high temperatures and would TYPE OF BOARD THICKNESS BREAKING LOAD, Min
have a face suitable for direct decoration. mm h
’ Transverse Longitudinal ’
2.4 Gy&m Plaster Baseboard - These boards Direction Direction
have a face suitable to receive gypsum plaster and may N N
be perforated during primary manufacture. (4)
(1) (2) (3)
2.5 Gypsum Plaster Baseboard with Improved Core Plasterboard 9.5 140 360
Cohesion at High Temperatures - It is a combination 12.5 180 500
of 2.3 and 2.4. 15.0 220 650
3. Requirements Baseboard 9.5 125 180

12.5 165 235
3.1 Dimensions - The width, length and thickness
of the boards shall be as given in Table 1. The lengths
3.3 WaterAbsorption - The limitsofwaterabsorp-
tion shall be specified by the purchaser as required.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS 4. Finish - The surfaces of the boards shall be true
Typo OF BZIARD WIDTH LENGTH ‘I~ICKNESS and free from imperfections that would render the
(1) (2) (3) (4) board unfit for use with or without decoration.
mm mm mm
Wall-board 600, 900 and 1 800 to 3 600 9.5, 12.5
1200 in steps of and 15
1OOmm
Baseboard 400 and 900 1200, 1500 9.5 and 12.5
. _and 1 800
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 2542 (Part II/Set 1 to 8)-1981 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and
products: Part II Gypsum products (first revision).
. .
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2095-1982 SpecifiTtion for gypsum plaster boards (first revision).
81 ’
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
Is : 2547 (PART I)-1976 GYPSUM BUILDING PLASTERS

PART 1 EXCLUDING PREMIXED LIGHT-WEIGHT PLASTERS
(First Revision)
1. Scope-Requirements regarding classifica- 2) Metal lathing plaster.
tion, chemical and physical requirements for gyp-
sum building plasters which possess a definite set Type II Final coat plaster:
due to hydration of calcium sulphate, anhydrous 1) Finish plaster,
or hemihydrate to form gypsum and are used in 2) Board finish plaster,
the manufacture of gypsum building products. Pre-
mixed light-weight building plaster not included. C) Anhydrous gypsum plasters (for finishing
only), and
2. Classification
a) Plaster of park, d) Keene’s plaster (for finishing only).
b) Retarded hemihydrate gypsum plaster:
3. Chemical Requirements -see Table 1.
Type I Under-coat:
1) Browning plaster, and 4. Physical Requirements - See Table 2.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSlTION
SL PARTICULARS RETARDED &HYDROUS KEFNE’S

No. of HEMEMXWE GYPSUM PLASTER
PARIS GYPSUM PLASTER
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

i) SOa, percentby mass,Min 35 35 40 47
ii) CaO, percent by mass,Min 213 of SO3 213 of SO3 213 of SO3 213 of SO3
iii) Soluble magnesium salts expressed as percentage of MgO, 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
MCZA
iv) Soluble sodium salts, expressed as percentage of Na20, 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Max
v) Loss of ignition, percent by mass Not greater Not greater 3.0 Max 2.0 Max
than 9 and than 9 and
less than 4 less than 4
vi) Free lime, Min, percent - 3* - -
*Applicableto metal lathingplaster.
TABLE 2 PIWSICAL RJXQURFMENTS

SL PARTICULARS REQUIREMENTS
No. h
/
Plaster of Retarded Anbydrous Keen&
Paris Hemibydrate Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum Plaster Plaster
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Settingtime,minutes:
a) Plastersand mixture. 120-900 120-900 - -
b) Neatplaster 20-40 60-180 20-360 20-360
ii) Transverse strength, kgf/f/cmz, 5 14* - -
Min
(Continued)
82
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS - Contd

SL PARTICULARS REQUIREMENTS
No. h
I
Plaster of Retarded Anhydrous Keene’s \
Paris Hemihydrate Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum Plaster Plaster
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
iii) Soundness Set plaster pats shall Set plaster pats shall Set plaster pats shall Set plaster pats shall
not show any sign not show any sign not show any sign not show any sign
of disintegration, of disintegration, of disintegration, of disintegration,
popping or pitting popping or pitting popping or pitting popping or pitting
,
iv) Mechanical resistance of set TDiameter of the in- Diameter of the Diamerer of the
neat plaster dentation shall not indentation shall indentation shall
be less than 3 mm not be more than not be more than
and not more than 4mm 3.5 mm
4.5 mm
v) Residue on 1.18 mm IS Sieve 5.0 1.07 1.0 1.0
percentage, Max
vi) Expansion on setting percen- - 0.20 at 24 h$ - 0.5 at 96 h
tage, Max
*Applicable to undercoat plasters only.
TApplicable to final coat plasters.
SApplicable to board finish plasters only.
Note-For methods, of tests, refer to IS : 1288-1973 Method of test for mineral gypsum and gypsum products (first revision),
IS : 2542 (Part I/Set. 1 to 12)-1978 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products: Part I Plaster and concrete (first
revision) and Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed info&nation, refer to IS : 2547 (Part I)-1976 Specification for gypsum building plasters: Part I
Excluding premixed light-weight plasters (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2547 (PART II)-1976 GYPSUM BUILDING PLASTERS ..

PART II PREMIXED LIGHT-WEIGHT PLASTERS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for premixed light- b) Metal lathing plaster

weight plaster consisting of gypsum plaster and light-
weight aggregate used in general building operations. c) Bonding plaster
2. Classification Type B Final coat plaster - Finish plaster.

Type A Under-coat plasters:
3. Physical and Chemical Requirements -See
a) Browning plaster Table 1.
83
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PROPERTIES OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF PLASTERS
St PARTICULARS UNDERCOAT
PLASTERS FINAL COAT PLASTER
No. (TYPE A) (TYPE B).
PLASTER
FINISH
Browning Metal Bonding
Plaster Lathing Plaster
Plaster
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Sum of soluble sodium and magnesium salt contents 0.25 0.25 No upper 0.25
expressed as percentages of sodium oxide (Na20) limit
and magnesium oxide (MgO) by mass, Max
ii) Dry bulk density, MUX,kg/m3 640 770 770 -
iii) Dry set density, MUX, kg/m3 850 1040 l& -
iv) Compressive strength, Mfn, N/mm2 0.93 1.0 1.0 -
v) Free lime content, percent,by mass, Min - 2.5 - -
vi) Mechanical resistance - - Diameter of the inden-

tation shall not be
lesstban4mmand
not more than 5.5
mm
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 2542 (Part I/Set 1 to 12)-1978 Method of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products:
Part I Plaster and concrete (first revision) and Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2547 (Part II)-1976Specificationfor gypsum building plasters: Part II
Premixed light-weight plasters (first revision).
SUMMARY OF ..
IS : 2849-1964 NON-LOAD BEARING GYPSUM PARTITION BLOCKS

(SOLID AND HOLLOW TYPES)
1. Scope - Requirements for gypsum partition gular in shape with straight and square edges and true
blocks for use in non-load bearing construction in surfaces.
inteior of buildings and for protection of columns,
elevated shafts, etc, against tire. 3. Scoring - Scoring shall ‘not reduce materially
thickness of shell when surfaces of block are
2. Type and Shape i Solid or hollow type, rectan- scored.
84
SP : 21-1983
4. Size holes and not less than 70 mm for blocks having
Length Height Breadth Hollow Blocks Side

mm mm mm and Edge Thickness
mm , Min
/Circular Ellrpttcal
Holes or Rectangular
Holes
700 Mar 300 Max 75 15 20
in multiples in multiples 100 20 20
of 100 of 100 125 25 30
150 15 20
5. Tolerances - Shall be 43.0 mm on length; and elliptical or rectangular holes.

f 1.5 mm on height and breadth. 6. Compressive Strength - Shall be not less than
5 kgf/cm2 on gross area.
5.1 Sum of thickness of two side shells plus thick-
ness of central vertical web of 150 mm wide blocks 7. Visual Inspection - Shall be sound, free from
shall not be less than 50 mm for blocks having circular cracks, broken edges and other imperfections.
Note-For method of test, refer to IS : 2542 (Part II)-1964 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products: Part II
Gypsum products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2849-1964 Specification for non-load bearing gypsum partition
blocks (solid and hollow types).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8272- 1976 GYPSUM PLASTER FOR USE IN THE MANUFACTURE

OF FIBROUS PLASTER BOARDS
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling shall contain not less than 42 percent sulphur trioxide
and tests for calcined gypsum plaster used in manufac- (SO3).
turing fibrous plaster boards covered in IS : 8273-
1976*. 3. Properties
Note - Gypsum building plasters are extensively used for 3.1 Fineness - Residue retained on 600-micron IS
general building operations and for the manufacture of preformed Sieve shall not be mote than 1 percent by mass. ..
building products which have the specific advantages of lightness
and high tire resistance. Generally used as covering for walls, 3.2 Compressive Strength - Shall be not less than
ceilings and partitions in normal dry environments. 76 kgf/cm2.
2. Chemical Composition - Consist essentially of 3.3 Initial Setting Time - Shall be 25 + 5 minutes
calcium sulphate hemihydrate (CaS04. YzH20) and (unless otherwise agreed mutually).
*Specificationfor fibrous gypsum plaster boards.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1288-1973 Method of test for mineral gypsum and gypsum products (first revision) and
Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8272-1976 Specification for gypsum plaster for use in the
manufacture of fibrous plaster boards.
a5
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8273-1976 FIBROUS GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS

1. Scope - Method of manufacture, tests and 2.5 Tolerances - Length +6 mm. Width +3 mm.
sampling of fibrous gypsum plaster boards for use as a Thickness + 1 mm.
lining material for ceiling, dry surfacing material for
3. Tests
walls or for light weight partitions.
3.1 Thickness
Note -Fibrous gypsum plaster board is a composition of
gypsum plaster and sisal, coconut or other tibre forming body of 3.2 Transverse Bending Test - Dellection shall not
regular dimensions. The boards are used as covering for walls, exceed 19 mm when subjected to appropriate proof
ceilings andpartitions in normal dry environments in buildings. load of 34 kgf. If deflection under proof load is less
They are comparatively light and have high fire resisting
than 6 mm, load shall be increased until failure occurs.
properties.
Specimen shall then dellect not less than 6 mm before
2. Dimensions and Tolerances failure occurs.
2.1 Shape - Square or rectangular in shape. 3.3 Test for Determining Fihre Contents - Test as
2.2 Dimensions - Length: 1 200 and 1 500 mm. specified in IS : 2542 @‘art I/Set 1 to 12)-1978*
Width: 400, 600, 800 and 1 200 mm. Nominal for wood fibre content in wood fibre gypsum plaster
thickness: 12 mm. shall be used.
2.3 Wright @Plaster - 10 kg/m2 of board.

*Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products: Part I
2.4 Weight of Fibre - 250 g/m2 of board. Plaster and concrete f&r revision).
Note I.-For method of tests, given in 3.1 and 3.2 refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.
Note Z-For method of manufacture, refer to 4 of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8273-1976 Specification for fibrous gypsum phster boar&.
86
SECTION 7
TIMBER
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Page
TIMBER CLASSIFICATION
IS : 399-1963 Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution 89
(revised)
CONVERSION AND GRADING

IS: 190-1974 Coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) (third revision) 90
IS : 1326-1976 Non-conifer&s sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) yirst revision) 92
IS : 1331-1971 Cut sizes of timber (second revision) 95
IS : 2372-1963 Timber for cooling towers 97
88
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 399-1963 CLASSIFICATION OF COMMERCIAL TIMBERS AND

THEIR ZONAL DISTRIBUTION
(Revised)
1. Scope - Details of the zonal distribution of 4. Classification - Tables I, II, III, IV and V of the
common commercial timbers of India, classified ac- standard list respectively important timbers commer-
cording to their various uses, and information on the cially available in the five zones described under 3 and
availability of these timbers and on some of their classified according to their uses given under 2. Against
important properties. each species of timber, the availability in that zone,
average weight and the range of weight of air-seasoned
2. Uses - The uses are classified under the follow- timber in kg/m3 and lb/ft3, durability, treatability,
ing categories: refractoriness to air seasoning and strength coefficient
a) Constructional purposes, including building are given.
construction, houseposts, beams, rafters, 4.1 Availability - The availability of timbers is
cart-building, bridges, piles, poles and rail- categorized under three classes indicated below:
way sleepers;
X : Most common, 1 415 m3 (I 000 tonnes) and
b) Furniture and cabinet making; more per year
c) Light packing cases; Y : Common, 355m3 (250 tonnes) to 1 415 m3
d) Heavy packing cases (for machinery and (1 000 tonnes) per year
similar stores); Z : Less common, below 355 m3 (250 tonnes) per
year
e) Agricultuial implements and tool handles;
4.2 Weight - The figures for average weight and
f ) Tumery articles and toys; and range of weights per cubic metre (or ft3) at 12 percent
g) Veneers and plywood. moisture content for all the timbers have been given.
The range of weights is given below the average weight
3. Zones - The territories comprising India, Sik- in parentheses.
kim* and Bhutan have been divided into live zones as
4.3 Durability - The timbers are classified for dura-
indicated on the Map (see page 85 of the standard),
bility according to the average life of these test speci-
which comprise roughly the following areas:
mens as follows:
I North Zone Jammu and Kashmir, Punjab, High : Timbers having average life of 120
Himachal Pradesh, Delhi, months and over
Uttar Pradesh and Rajasthan Moderate : Ti’mbers having average life of less
II East Zone Assam, Manipur, Tripura, than 120 months but of 60 months
West Bengal, Bihar, Orissa, or over
Sikkim, Bhutan, Andamans, Low : Timbers having average life of less
North East Frontier Agencyt than 60 months
and Nagaland
4.4 Treatability - The classification is based to rep-
III Centre Zone Madhya Pradesh, Vidharbha resent approximately the degree of resistance offered by ._
areas of Maharashtra State and the heartwood of a species to the penetration of the
the north east part of Andhra preservative fluid under working pressure of 10.5
Pradesh (Godavari delta area) kgf/cm2. ?he treatability of timbers has been classified
IV West Zone Maharashtra State (except as follows:
Vidharbha areas), Gujarat and a) Heartwood easily treatable
north west part of MysoreS
b) Heartwood treatable, but complete penetration
V South Zone Madras, Andhra Pradesh (ex- of pnxervative not always obtained
cept the Godavari delta area),
Kerala and MysoreS (except c) Heartwood only partially treatable
north west part) d) Heartwood refractory to treatment
e) Heartwood veIy refractory to treatment, penet-
*Now, Sikkim is a part of India.
tNow, known as Anmachal and Meghalaya. ration of preservative being practically nil from
SNOW, known as Karnataka. side or end
89
SP : 21-1983
4.5 RfJractoriness to Air Seasoning - The timbers Low refractoriness (indicated ‘Low’ in the
are classified, as stated below, under three categories, tables).
depending upon their behaviour with respect to cracking
and splitting during normal air-seasoning practice suit- 4.6 Comparative Strength Coejjicients - The figures
able for the species concerned:
for comparative strength coefficients for various uses for
High refractoriness (indicated ‘High’ in the all the timbers have been arrived at by suitably grouping
tables), the various important mechanical properties that come
Moderate refractoriness (indicated ‘Moderate’ in into play for any particular use, and giving due
the tables), and weightage to the relative importance ofthese properties.
--
Note 1 -For classification of timbers according to their uses for various zones, refer to Tables 1 to V of the s&ndurd.
Note 2-For key for field identification of commercial timbers (softwoods and hardwoods) based on their general properties, refer to ,
IS : 4970-1973 Key for identification of commercial timbers (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 399-1963 Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal
distribution (revised).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 190-1974 CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBER

(BAULKS .AND SCANTLINGS)
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of coniferous sawn Width and thickness - to nearest centimetre

timber (baulks and scantlings). Volu,ne - correct to 3 places of decimal when
computed in m3.
2. Species
5. Requirements - Shall be air-seasoned to a
Trade Botanical Name Abbreviated
moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a
Name Symbol
depth of 15 mm from surface, excluding 30 cm from
Chir Pinus ro.xburghii Sargent CHR each end.
cypress Cupressus torulosa D. Don. CYP
Deodar Cedrus deodara D . Don. DE0
6. Grading - Special Grade; Grade 1 and Grade 2,
Fir Abies spp. FIR
depending on prohibited and permissible defects. ‘h..
Kail Pinus wallichiana A.B. Jacks KAL
Khasi Pine Pinus insularis Endl. KPI
Spruce Picea smithiana Boiss SPR 7. Prohibited and Permissible Defects
7.1 Prohibited Defecrs - Sawn timber of all three

3. Dimensions - Generally available in following grades shall be free from spiral or twisted grain, warp,
L
sizes: any kind of decay or live insect attack. Special Grade
Length - 2, 2.5, 3 and 3.5 m. sawn timber shall be free from centre heart, wane, cup
Cross section - 20 X 10 cm, 25 X 12.5 cm, 20 X shakes, borer holes (dead infestation) or sap stain (blue
12.5 cm, 25 x 15 cm, 20~ 15 cm, 30X 15 cm. stain) also. Grade 1 shall be free from cup shakes also
@ee also Table 1).
4. Measuremeuts, Rounding OtT
7.2 Permissible Dejects - Defects tc, the extent
Length - to nearest lower 0.01 m. specified in Table 1 shall be permissible.
90
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR DIFFERENT GRADES OF

CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBERS
(C1m.se7.1 and 7.2)
SL No. DEFECr SPECIAL(hADE GRADE 1 GR4Dn2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Cross grain MUXdeviation of 1 in 16 MUXdeviation of 1 in 10 MUXdeviation of 1 in 8
I ii) End splits Total length of all longest

end splits at each end
shall not exceed 6 cm per
Total length of all longest
end’ splits at each end
shall not exceed 38 cm
Total length of all longest
end splits at each end
shall not exceed 10 cm
metre run of piece per metre run of piece per metre run of piece
I
iii) Knots a) Nil a) Live knots up to 25 mm in a) Live knots up to 35 mm in
dia; and live knots from dia; and live knots from
25 to 35 mm in dia to the 35 to 50 mm in dia to the
extent of 3 knots per extent of 3 knots per
metre length of piece shall metre length of piece shall
be permissible provided be permissible provided
these are not grouped or these are not grouped or
located in such a manner located in such a manner
as to affect unduly the as to affect unduly the
yield and strength of yield and strength of
converted timber. Live converted timber. Live
knots from 35 to 50 mm knots from 50 to 75 mm
in dia to the extent of one in dia to the extent of one
knot per me:re length of knot per metre length of
piece piece
b) Dead knots up to 15 mm b)Dead knots up to 15 mm b)Dead knots, even more
in dia to the extent of one in dia to the extent of not than two, up to 15 mm
knot per metre length of more than two knots per in dia provided they are
piece metre length of piece and not numerous and not
dead knots from 15 to grouped or located in
25 mm in dia to the extent such a manner as to
of one knot per metre affect unduly the yield on
length of piece. Knots conversion and useful-
more than 25 mm not ness of the timber. Dead
permitted knots from 15 to 25 mm
in dia to the extent of
three knots per metre of
length of piece. More
than 25 and up to 35 mm
two knots per metre
length. Knots more than
35 mm in dia not
permitted
iv) Sap wood Permissible Permissible Permissible
v) Surface cracks Not exceeding 7.5 mm in Not exceeding 15 mm in Not exceeding 25 mm in
depth on any face. In case depth on any face. In case depth on any face. In case
one of faces is entirely one of faces is entirely one of faces is entirely
free from cracks, the free from cracks, the free from cracks, the
opposite face may have a opposite face may have a opposite face may have a
few individual cracks up few individual cracks up few individual cracks up
to 10 mm in depth to 25 mm in depth to 40 mm in depth
vi) Sap stain Not permissible Permissible Permissible
vii) Wane Not permissible Up to one-fifth of width on Up to one-fourth of width
a broad face subject to on a broad face subject
amaxof70mmandup to a max of 80 mm and
to one-third of width on up to one-third of width
(Continued)
91
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR DIFFERENT GRADES OF

CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBERS - Contd
SL No. DEFECT SPECIALGRADE GRADE] GRADE2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
narrow face subject to a on narrow face subject to
max of 50 mm provided a max of 60 mm provided
that one broad face is that one broad face is
completely free from that completely free from this
defect. Wane shall be defect. Wane shall be
measured at the deepest measured at its deepest
Part Part
viii) Borer holes Not permissible Permissible on one face only Permissible on two faces
(dead infestation) provided such holes are only provided such holes
not deeper than 10 mm are not deeper than 10 mm
and are well scattered and are scattered,
on a single face only
provided they are not
deeper than 20 mm and
are well scattered
ix) Centre heart Not permissible Permissible when it is not Permissible when it is not
farther than 35 mm from farther than 50 mm from
the nearest edge the nearest edge
x) Cup shake Not permissible Not permissible Permissible to a total length
(MUX)of 150 mm. When
measured along arc and
up to a max depth of
150 mm provided they
appear only on one end
8. End Coating - Up to a distance of 25 mm more end cracking, splitting, etc.

than length of split to prevent and to minimize
Note-For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS : 3364 (Part IQ-1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation
of defects in timber: Part II Converted timber (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 190-1974 Specification for Coniferous sawn timber (baulks and
scantlings) (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
..
IS : 1326-1976 NON-CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBER
(BAULK AND SCANTLINGS)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of non-coniferous sawn Length = 2, 2.5 and 3.5 mm

timber in the form of baulks and scantlings. Cross-section = 20xlOcm
20X 12.5 cm
2. Dimensions and Measurements 20X 15 cm
20X 20 cm
2.1 Dimensions - Dimensions shall be as ordered. 25x 12.5 cm
However, sawn timberis generally available in follow- 25x 15 cm
ing lengths and cross-sections: 30X 15 cm
92
SP : 21-1983
2.2 Measurements, Rounding Off depth of 13 mm from surface, excluding 30 cm from

Length -to the nearest lower 0.01 m. each end. Plugging of defects shall not be permissible.
Width and thickness - to the nearest 1 cm.
Volume - correct to 3 places of decimal when 4. Grading - Special Grade, Grade 1 and Grade 2,
computed in m3. depending on prohibited and permissible defects.
3. Requirements - Shall be air-seasoned to a
moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a 5. Prohibited Defects
SI Special Grade Grade 1 Grade 2

No.
i) Bow Bow Bow
ii) Decay Decay Decay
iii) Live insect attack Live insect attack Live insect attack
iv) Spiral or twisted grain Spiral or twisted grain Spiral or twisted grain
v) Split across the grain Split across the grain Split across the grain
vi) Spring Spring Spring
vii) Warp Warp Warp
viii) Cup Cup -
ix) Cup shake Cup shake -
x) Centre heart - -
xi) Wane
6. Permissible Defects - Defects to the extent specified in Table 1 shall be permissible.
TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR DIFFERENT GRADES

OF NON-CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBER
SL No. DEFECT SPECIALGRADE GRADE 1 GRADE 2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Borer hole Not permissible Permissible on one face only Permissible on two faces only
( dead infestation ) provided such holes are not provided such holes are not
deeper than 10 mm and are deeper than IO mm and are
well scattered scattered, on a single
face only provided they
are not deeper than 20 mm
and are well scattered
ii) Centre heart Not permissible Permissible provided it is not Permissible provided it is not
farther than 25 mm from farther than 50 mm from
the nearest edge and is the nearest edge and is
sound and boxed sound and boxed
iii) Gross grain MUX deviation of 1 to IS MUX deviation of I to 10 Max deviation of 1 to 5

..
iv) Cup Not permissible Not permissible Max of 5 mm for any width
v) Cup-shake got permissible Not permissible Up to a total length of 150 mm

when measured along the
arc and up to a maximum
of 150 mm in depth provi-
ded they appear only on
one end
vi) End-splits Total length of all longest Total length of all longest Total length of all longest
end splits at each end shall end splits at each end shall end splits at each end shall
not exceed 4 cm per metre not exceed 6 cm per metre not exceed 8 cm per metre
of the length of the length of the length
(Conrinuedj
93
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR DIFFERENT GRADES

OF NON-CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBER - Cod
SL No. DEFECT SPECIAL GRADE GRADE 1 GRADE 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
vii) Knots Live knots up to 20 mm in dia Live knots from 20 to 35 mm Live knots from 35 to 50 mm
and dead knots up to in dia and dead knots up in dia and dead knots up
10 mm in dia provided to 15 mm in dia prbvided to 30 mm in dia provided
they are not so numerous they aie not so numerous they are not so numerous
or so grouped or located or so grouped or located or so grouped or located
as to affect unduly the as to affect unduly the as to affect unduly the
strength of the piece strength of the piece strength of the piece
viii) Sap stain ( blue stain ) Permissible Permissible Permissible
ix) Sap wood a) For haldu, kanju, mango, a) For haldu, kanju, mango, Permissible
salai, semul, jhingan, garu- salai, semul, jhingan, garu-
ga-permissible up to 100 ga-permissible up to 100
percent percent
b) For species of timber other b) For species of timber other

than (a) permissible up to than (a) permissible up to
25 percent of the cross 25 percent of the cross
sectional area of any piece sectional area of any piece
x) Surface cracks Not exceeding 7.5 mm in Not exceeding 10mm in Not exceeding 12.5 mm in
depth in any face. In case depth in any face. In case depth in any face. In case.
one of the faces is free from one of the faces is free from one of the faces is free from
cracks the oppgsite face cracks the opposite face cracks the opposite face
may have a few ‘individual may have a few individual may have a few individual
cracks up to 10mm in cracks up to 12.5 mm in cracks up to 15.0 mm in
depth depth depth
xi) Wane Not permissible Up to one-fifth of the width Up to one-fourth of the width
on a broad face, subject to a on a broad face, subject to
maximum of 60 mm and the maximum of 80 mm
up to one third of the width and one-third of the width
on the narrow face provided on the narrow face provided
the one broad face and one that one broad face and
narrow face is completely one narrow face is comple-
free from this defect. Wane tely free from this defect.
shall not be present in more Wane shall not be present
than 30 percent the total in more than 30 percent
number of pieces accepted of the total number of
at any one time pieces accepted at any one
time
. b.
7. End Coating - Up to a distance of 15 cm or at minimize and cracking, splitting, etc.
least 25 mm more than length of split to prevent and to
Note 1 -For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS : 3364 (Part II)-1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation
of defects in timber: Part II Converted timber (first revkion).
Note 2-For species of timber covered by this specification, refer to Appendix A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1326-1976 Specification for non-coniferous sawn timber (baulks
and scantlings) (first revision).
94
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1331-1971 CUT SIZES OF TIMBER

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding specification Note - In a given lot, the negative variation shall not exceed
of converted timber normally stocked in timber depot by more than 10 percent of the lot.
both for structural and non-structural purposes. It 4. Grading - Shall be graded after seasoning at a
refers to cut sizes of timber as stocked and does not take moisture content not less than 12 percent.
into consideration any reduction or allowance relating
to subsequent use. 4.1 Structural USC>- Based on permissible and
prohibited defects, timber for structural use shall be of
2. Dimensions - Preferred length shall be 50 cm three grades, namely, Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade 3.
and upwards in steps of 10 cm. Nominal sizes of width The estimated effects in reduction of basic strength of
and thickness shall be as given in Table 1. timber of Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade 3 are not more
than 12.5, 25 and 37.5 percent respectively.
Note - The size of cut timber specified in Table 1 are at a
moisture content of 20 percent. A method for adjustment of
4.2 Non-structurul Use - Based on permissible
dimensionsat different moisture content is given in Appendix A of and prohibited defects, timber for non-structural use
f/l<’ slnIr&l~t/. shall be of two glades, namely, Grade 1 and Grade 2.
3. Tolerances 5. Defects
a) For width and thickness 5.1 Structural Use
1) 100 mm and below -t3 5.1.1 Dejects prohibited - Loose grains, splits,
-0- compressive wood in coniferous timber, heart wood
2) Above 100 mm + %nm rot, sap rot, warp, worm holes made by powder post
- 3 beetles and pitch pockets shall not be permitted.
b) For length 51.2 Permissible dejkcts - Defects to the extent
+ 25mm
-0 specified in Table 2 shall be permissible.
TABLE 1 SIZES OF CUT TIMBER FOR STOCKING PURPOSES

(Clause 2)
THICKNESS (cm) WIDTH (cm)
/\
/ \
I .o 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 - - - - - - - - -
1.5 X X X X X X. 14.0 16.0 18.0 - - _ _ _ _
2 X X X X X X X X X 20.0 22.0 24.0 - - -
2.5 X X X X X X X X X X X X 26.0 28.0 30.0 .
3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6 - - - X X X X X X X X X X X X
8 - - - X X X X X X X X X X X X
10 -- - - X x X X X X X X X X X
12 - - - - _ X X X X X X X X X X
14 X X X X X X X X
16 x , X X X X X X X
18 -- - - - ___ X X X X X X X
20 -- - - - _ _ _ x -
" x = preferred size of the width.
195
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CUT SIZES OF TIMBER

FOR STRUCTURAL USE
(Clause 5.1.3)
SL DEFECT GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3

No.
i) Wane Permissible at its deepest Permissible at its deepest Permissible at its deepest
portion up to a limit of l/8 portion up lo a limit of l/6 portion up to a limit of I/4
of the width of the surface of the width of the surface of the width of the surface
on which it occurs on which it occurs on which it occurs
ii) Worm holes Other than those due to Other than those due to Other than those due to
powder post beetles, are powder post beetles, are powder post beetles, are
permissible permissible permissihle
iii) Slope of grain Not more than 1 in 20 Not more than 1 in 15 Not more than 1 in I2
iv) Live’knots Permissible maximum size of live knot on faces corresponding to different width (Max)
of wide faces of cut sizes of timber ( ranging from 75 to 600 mm ) shall vary from 10 mm
to 159 mm. For detailed requirements for each grade, refer to Table 2 of the stun&d
4 Checks and shakes Permissible depth ( Max ) corresponding to different width of the face of the timber ( ranging
from 75 to 600 mm ) shall vary from 12 mm to 300 mm. For detailed requirements for
each grade refer to Table 2 of tile standard.
5.2 Non-structural Use permitted.

5.2.1 Defects prohibited - Heartwood rot, sap 5.2.2 Permissible dejects - Defects to the extent
rot, brashness, shakes, insect attack shall not be specified in Table 3 shall be permissible.
TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CONVERTED TIMBER FOR

NON-STRUCTURAL USE
SL DHECI GRADE 1 GRADE 2

No.
i) Slope of grain 1 in15 1 in 12
ii) a) Live knots:

Size, Max 13 mm 25. mm
Number per metre 1 2
b) Decayed knots, dead knots, and Not permitted Permitted provided these shall be
knot holes completely bored or cut out and
tightly plugged with a cross-grained
seasoned timber being of the same
species of timber and properly
glued, so that its grain run in the
direction of the main piece
.
iii) Checks 3 mm depth, MUX One-fourth of the total thickness of
piece or 6 mm whichever is less
iv) End split (largest at end and added 3 percent of length 5 percent of length
together )
v) Pitch pockets Permitted except on the exposed

edges, provided they are clear and
filled up with the putty or filler.
When these are located on the
exposed edges of the core, they
shall be cut out and fitted and glue
in with plug of similar species of
timber with grains running in the
same direction as that of the pieces
(Continued)
96
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CONVERTED TIMBER

FOR NON-STRUCTURAL USE - Contd
St Dm GRAOE1 GRADE 2
No.
vi) Bow 2mmper3OOmm 4mmper3oOmm
vii) Warp Deviation of 1 percent Deviation of 2 percent
viii) Spring lmmper3m 2mmper2m
ix) Cracks 1 mm up to 5 cm thickness 2 mm up to 5 cm thickness

2 mm for 5-10 cm thickness 3 mm for 5-10 cm thickness
4 mm for more than 10 cm 6 mm for more than 10 cm
thickness
x) Twist 4.mm per 3 m of length 6mmper3moflength
xi) Centre heart Permitted in pieces over Permitted

250 sq cm of cross section
provided it is sound and
well boxed
xii) C&p 4mmper3moflength 8mmper3moflength
xiii) Wane Not more than.4 percent on the Not more than 8 percent on the surface
surface on which it appears on which it appears
Note-For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS : 3364 (Part II)-1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation
of defects in timber: Part II Converted timber (firs2 revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1331-1971 Specification for cut sizes of timber (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2372-1963 TIMBER FOR COOLING TOWERS

1. Scope - Species, grades, requirements and net retention of 128 kg/m3 or pentachlorophenol5 per-
treatments for timber used in the construction of cent concentration to a net retention of 8.8 kg/m2.
cooling towers. 3.2 Fill - To be treated under pressure with a
2. Species - Suitable for cooling towers arc: minimum average retention of 16 kg/m3 of timber with
Trade Name arsenic-copper-chromate of acid-cupricchromate or
Rotanical Name
with 160 kg/m3 of creosote/fuel oil mixture or
Cedrus deodara Loudon deodar
12 kg/m3 with pentachlorophenol (95 percent
Pinus wallichiana A. B. Jacks kail
chlorinated phenols), in 5 percent concentration.
Pinus roxburghii chir
Tectona grandis Linn. f teak 3.3 Penetration of Preservative - Depth 100 per-
cent in sapwood of all species and minimum of 1 cm in
3. Treatment deodar, kail and teak and 2 cm in chir for heanwood.
3.1 Structural and Shell Members - With copper-
arsenic-chromate or acid-cupric-chromate to a net Note - For detailed requirement of treatment, refer to
retention of 12 kg/m3 or cr~osote/fuel oil mixture to a AppendixA of the standard,
97
SP : 21-1983
4. Grading - Select grade, standard grade. and ments of permissible defects refer to 4.3 of the
common grade depending on permitted defects. standard.
5. Prohibited Defects (for All Grades) - Loose 7. Dimensions - Nominal sizes, rough finished
gmin, splits, compression wood, heartwood rot, warp, dimensions and dressed dimensions for various
warmholes which are likely to affect strength, pitch thicknesses shall be as given in Table 1.
pockets, centre-heart (pith). shakes, twisted grain and
wane. 8. Tolerance
Length f 5 mm
6. Permissible Defects - For detailed require- Other dimensions + 1.5 mm
TABLE 1 NOMINAL AND DRESSED DIMENSIONS

(Clause 7)
Nominal rough thickness or width, mm 25 32 38 50 75 Over I 00
Minimum rough sawn thickness or width, mm 23 30 35 47.5 72.5 otf 5
Dressed thickness or width, mm 21 27 32 45 70 off 10
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2372-1963 Specification for timber for cooling towers.
98
SECTION 8
BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 73-1941 Paving bitumen (revised) 101

IS : 214-1961 Coal tar pitch (revised) 102
IS : 218-1961 Creosote and anthracene oil for use as wood preservatives (revised) 103
IS : 702-1961 Industrial bitumen (revised) 104
100
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 73-1961 PAVING BITUMEN

(Revised)
1. Scope - Physical and chemical requirements of classified into five grades according to their penetration
paving bitumen for use in roadways, airfields and and shall be designated as S35, S45, S65, S!IO and
allied construction. s200.
2; Types and Grades Note - For example, A25 means that paving bitumen corres-
ponding to this grade is from Assam Petroleum and has approxi-
2.1 Types mately a penetration value of 25.
a) Paving bitumen from Assam Petroleum (A), 2.2.3 Intermediate grades shall be subject to
and mutual agreement.
b) Paving bitumen from other sources (S).
3. Requirements
2.2 Grades
3.1 The material shall be homogeneous and shall not
2.2.1 Paving bitumen from Assam Petroleum
foam when heated to 175°C.
shall be classified into six grades according to their
penetration and shall be designated as A25, A35, A45, 3.2 Ash - No mineral matter other than naturally
A65, A90 and A200. contained in the material, shall be present.
2.2.2 Paving bitumen from other sources shall be 3.3 Shall satisfy the requirements given in Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BITUMEN

SL C~ARAC~ERI~~C REQUIREMENT FOR GRADES
No.
’ A25 A35 A45 A65 A200 ’
s35 s45 S65 S90 s200
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Specific gravity at 27OC, Miw 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97
ii) Water, percent by weight, Max 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
iii) Flash point, Pensky Martens 175 175 175 175 175 175
ClosedType,“C, Min
iv) Softening point, ‘C 55 to 70

_ 55 to 70 4s to 60 -45 to 60 35 to 50 30 to 45
V) Penetration, at 25 ‘C 20 to 30 30 to 40 40 to 50 60 to 70 80 to 100 175 to225 -
100 g, 5 seconds in l/100 cm
vi) Ductility, at 27°C in cm, Min 5 15

(Z) ,::, b:, (::, (No value
given)
vii) a) Loss on heating, percent by 1 1 1 1 1 2
weight, Max
b) Penetration of residue [ex- 60 60 60 60 60 60
pressed as percentage of item
(~11,&fin
viii) Matter soluble in carbon di- 99 99 99 99 99 99
sulphide, percent by weight,
Min
Note- Wherever two values are given, the values given in bracket shall be applicable to Type S bitumen and other applicable to
Type A bitumen. All other values are applicable to both Types A and S bitumen.
101
SP : 21-1983
Note-For methods of .tests, refer to IS : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of specific
gravity Cfirsf revision),IS : 1203-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of penetration (firs!
revision), IS : 1205-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of softening point (Jir\/ ~~,itio~),
IS : 1208-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of ductility Cfirsf revision), IS : 1209-1978 Methods
for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of flash point and fire point Cfirsf revision),IS : 121 l-1978 Methods for
testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) Cfirsr revision),IS : 1212-3978
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of loss on heating Cfirst revision), and IS : 1216-1978 Methods for
testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide or rrichlorocthylcnc cfir.s/ revisions).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 73-1961 Specification for paving bitumen (revised.)
SUMMARY OF
IS : 216-1961 COAL TAR PITCH

(Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements for the .range of four b) Soft medium pitch

grades of coal tar pitch from soft to hard consistehcies
c) Hard medium pitch
-with softening points varying from 45 to 92°C intended
for the production of waterproofing, protective and d) Hard pitch
binding compounds employed in masonry, steel,
timber and concrete structures and also for the prepara- 3. Requirements
tion of roofing felts.
3.1 Cornpositiorl - The material shall be:
Note - Coal tar pitch is also used for caulking of decks, as a
binder for carbon electrodes and coal briquettes, for damp-proof
a) either the residue of the direct distillation of
courses, flooring mastics and as a base for coal tar paints. This is crude tar produced by the high temperature
not suitable for formulation of quick drying black enamels nqr for carbonization of coal in coke ovens or retorts.
road construction, for which purposes reference toIS : 215.1961* or
may be made.
b) obtained by fluxing back such pitch residues
2. Grades - Shall be classified into the following with high boiling coal tar distillates to give
four grades: products of the desired softening point.
a) Soft pitch
3.2 The materra shall also comply with the require-
*Specification tor mad tar (reprised).
ments, according to grade, given in Table 1.
102
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR COAL TAR PITCH

(Clause 3.2)
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENTFOR GRADES
No. A
/ \
Soft Pitch Soft Medium Hard Medium Hard Pitch
Pitch Pitch
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Specific gravity at 27’C 1.20 to I.-30 1.22t01.32 1.22to 1.32 1.28 to 1.38
ii) Softening point 45 to 5s0c 58 to 68’C 70 to 80°C 82 1092°C
iii) Distillate:
Percent by weight below 27O”C,Max 4 4 3 No Test
Percent by weight below 300°C, MUX 8 8 4 No Test

i
iv) Matter insoluble in toluene (free carbon), percent 25 28 30 35
by weight, Max
vj Ash, percent by weight, Max 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.8

..
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous
materials: Determination of specific
gravity
First
revision),
IS : 12051978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of softening point First
revision), IS : 1213-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of distillation test (first revision),
1s : 1215-1978Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of matter insoluble in toluene (.‘irsf revision),
and IS : 1217-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of mineral matter (ash) Cfir.srrevkim).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 216-1961 Specification for coal tar pitch (revised).
SUMMARY OF
1
IS : 218-1961 CREOSOTE AND ANTHRACENE OIL FOR USE AS

WOOD PRESERVATIVES \
(Revised)
I
1. Scope - Requirements of materials commer- 2.2 Anthracene Oil - Shall be of one type only.
cially known as coal tar creosote (or creosote oil) and
anthracene oil for use as wood preservatives mainly in 3. Requirements
the treatment of railway sleepers, telegraph and tele-
3.1 Shall be homogeneous and free from any admix-
phone poles, and timber for general use.
ture of petroleum or similar oils. Shall consist of pure
distillates of high temperature coal tar.
2. Types
3.2 Liquidity - Shall liquefy completely on being
2.1 Creosote
warmed to 38”C, with stirring; and shall remain liquid
a) Type I - suitable for use in admixture with on cooling to 32°C and on standing at temperature for
fuel oil, and 2 hours.
b) Tyl>e/f - suitable 1or use alone, or in admix- 3.3 Shall also comply with the requirements given in
ture with fuel oil. Table 1.
103
SP : 21-1983
-~~ ~ ~~-~
TABLE 1 REQ UDREMENTSFOR CREOSOTE AND ANTHRACENE OII
(Clause 3.3)
SL CkAFlAClXRBTIC REQUIREMENTS
No. A
1 \
Creosote Type I Creosote Type. II Anthracene Oil
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
0 Specific gravity, 38/38 ‘C 1.03 to 1.10 1.03 to 1.10 1.09 to 1.15
ii) Water content, percent by volume, Max 2.0 2.0 2.0
iii) Matter insoluble in benzene, percent by weight, Max 0.50 0.50 0.50
iv) Distillation fractions, percent by weight (per 100 g),

distilling up to:
a) 210°C, Max 5 2 -
b) 235’C, Max 30 10 2
c) 315“C, Max 75 55 40
d) 355 “C, Min - - 45
4 Specific gravity of distillation fractions, 38/3PC, Min:
a) Fraction between 235 and 315°C 1.025 1.025 1.025
b) Fraction between 315 and 355°C - - 1 .os5
Note-1For methods of tests, refer to 1s : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of specific
gravity First mMw@,IS : 121 i-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of water Content (Dean and
Stark method) (first revision), IS : 1213-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Distillation test (first revision), and
IS : 1214-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of matter insoluble in benzene (firstreViSiO@.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 218-1961 Specification for creosote and anthracene oil for use as
wood preservatives (revised).
-
SUMMARY OF
IS : 702-1961 INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN

(Revised)
1. Scope - Physical and chemical requirements of l’he grade 135/10 is used in the manufacture of battery
containers and the grade 155/6 in the rubber industry.
industrial bitumen for use in buildings and for other
industrial purposes. Note 2 -These grades are essentially suitable for industrial
purposes. But some of the grades can be used for paving purposes
Note 1 - Any single grade or blend of two or more grades also.
could be used for the following:
2. Grades - Industrial bitumen either fully blown
a) Manufacture and fixing of roofing and dampproofing or semiblown shall be of the following ten grades:
felts;
75115 90115
b) Manufacture ?f plastic bitumen for leak stops; 65 I25 105 120
3 Fixing of heat insulation materials for buildings, re- 75130 115/15
frigeration and cold storage equipment; . 85 I25 135110
d) Manufacture of waterproof packing paper; 85 I40 155 I6
e) Manufacture of pipe asphalts; Note - The two figures given in the grades denote approxi-
mate values of softening point and penetration in that order; for
0 Manufacture of joint fillers; and
example, 85 /25 means that industrial bitumen corresponding to
g) Manufacture of bituminous filling compounds for this grade has approximately a softening point of 85°C and a
cable boxes for sealing accumulators and batteries. penetration of 25.
104
SP : 21-1983
3. Requirements -See Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN
SL CHARACTERISTIC LIMIT FOR GRADE

A
NO. I \
75/15 65125 75130 85125 85140 90/15 105/20 115/15 135/10 155/6
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
i) Specific gravity at 27°C 1.00 to 1.00 to 1.doto 1.00 to 1.00 to 1.01 to 1.01 to 1.01 to 1.02 to 1.02 to
1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.07 1.07
ii) Flash point, Pensky Martens 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Closed Type, “C, Mire
iii) Softening point, OC 65 to 55 to 70 to 80 to 80 to 85 to 95 to 110 to 130 to 150 to

80 70 80 90 90 100 115 120 140 160
iv) Penetration, at 25%, 100 g, 10 to 20 to 25 to 20 to 35 to 10 to 15 to 8 to 7 to 2 to

5 seconds in l/100 cm 20 30 35 30 45 20 25 20 12 10
v) Ductility, at 27%, in cm, Mk 2.5 10 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 0
vi) Loss on heating, percent by 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
weight, Max
vii) Matter soluble in carbon di- 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99

sulphide, pepcent by weight,
Min
--
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminousmaterials: Determination of specific
gravity Cfirsr revision), IS : 1203-1978 Methods for testing. tar and bituminous materials: Determination of penetration (first
revision), IS : 1205-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of softening point (first revision),
IS : 1208-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of ductility (first revision), IS : 1209-1978Methods
for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of flash point and fire point (first revision), IS : 1212-1978 Methods for
testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of loss on heating (first revision), and IS : 1216-1978Methods for testing tar and
bituminous materials: Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide or trichloroethylenc (firs/ revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 702-1961 Specification for industrial bitumen (revised).
105
SECTION 9
FLOOR COVERINGS AND OTHER FINISHES
.
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
GENERAL
IS : 777-1970 Glazed earthenware tiles first revision) 109
IS : ~1237-1980 Cement concrete flooring tiles Qirst revision) 110
IS : 1542-1977 Sand for plaster first revision) 111
IS : 3461-1980 PVC asbestos floor tiles (first revisio;z) 112
IS : 3462-1979 Flexible PVC flooring first revision) ,113
IS : 3463-1966 Polystyrene wall tiles 114
IS : 4457-1982 Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles (firsr revision) 116
IS : 4832 (Part I)-1969 Chemical resistant mortars: Part I Silicate type 116
IS : 4832 (Part II)-1969 Chemical resistant mortars: Part II Resin type 117
IS : 4832 (Part lII)-1968 Chemical resistant mortars: Part III Sulphur type 118
IS : 4860-1968 Acid-resistant bricks 119
LINOLEUM
IS : 653-1980 Linoleum sheets and tiles (second revision) 120
RUBBER FLOORING
IS : 809-1970 Rubber flooring materials for general purposes first revision) 121
.
BITUMINOUS FLOORING
IS :’ 1195-1978 Bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision) 122
IS : 8374-1977 Bitumen mastic, anti-static and electrically conducting grade 124
. ..
108
I
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 777-1970 GLAZED EARTHENWARE TILES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for glazed earthenware 4.2 Warpage

tiles and associated fittings generally used for finishing
+0.5
the surfaces of walls and floors of water-closets, bath- 99X 99 mm tiles:
-0.3 mm
rooms, kitchens, hospitals and similar places where +0.7
cleanliness is an import&t factor. 149X 149 mm tiles: _. 4 mm
Note - For methodof test for watpage, refer to Appendix A of
2. Dimensions - 149 x 149 mm and 99 x 99 mm. thestandard.
Thickness 5, 6 and 7 mm (for tiles and fittings). For
5. Performance Requirements
dimensions of fittings, see Table 1.
5.1 Water Absorption - Shall not exceed 18 per-
cent.
3. Tolerances
Lengths - Average kO.8 mm, individual kO.5 mm. 5.2 Crazing - Shall not show any sign of crazing
Thickness - + 0.5 mm. after two cycles of test in an autoclave.
5.3 Impact Strength - Not less than 0.02 kgf.m/
4. Trueness of Shape cm.
4.1 Squareness - Variation from right angle shall 5.4 Chemical Resistance - Glazed surface (white
be not more than ,0.5 mm per 100 mm run. or cream colour) shall show no deterioration.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF FITTINGS FOR GLAZED EARTHENWARE TILES
SL FITTING LENGTH HEIGHT WIDTH RADIUS OF ROUNDING

No. mm mm mm .4T GIRNERS
mm
i) Cove base, straight top Same as for corres- Same as for corres- - 25
ponding tiles ponding tiles
ii) Round edge tile do do - 10 to 20
iii) Corner cups 25, 31, 37 - - -

!
iv) Angles, glazed Same as for corres- - 25, 31, 37 -
I ponding tiles
i v) Ridges do - 50 -
. .
,
vi) Legs - 25, 31, 31 25, 31, 37 -
vii) Cornice 150 23 50 -
viii) Capping beads 150 - 12 -
Note-Fittings associated with glazed tiles as given in this Table are shown in Fig. 1 of the standard.
Note-For methods of test, refer to 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 777-1970 Specification for glazed earthenware tiles (first revision).
109
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1237-1980 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING TILES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for cement concrete 5.2 Thickness of Wearing Layer - The minimum
flooring tiles of plain cement, plain coloured and ter- thickness for various classes of tiles shall be as
razo types. Chequered tiles are not covered. specified in Table 1.
2. Terminology
TABLE 1 THICKNESS qF WEARING LAYER
2.1 Plain Cement Tiles - Tiles having a wearing SL CLASS OF TILE MINIMUM
surface wherein no pigments and stone chips are used. No. THICKNESS
OF WEARING
LAYER
2.2 Plain Coloured Tiles - Tiles having a plain mm
wearing surface wherein pigments are used but no
stone chips. i) Plain cement and plain coloured tiles 5
for general purpose
ii) Terrazo tiles with chips of size varying 5
2.3 Terrazo Tiles - Tiles at least 25 percent of from the smallest up to 6 mm, for
whose wearing surface is composed of stone chips in a general purpose
matrix of ordinary or coloured Portland cement mixed iii) Terrazo tiles with chips of size varying 5
with or without pigments and mechanically ground and from the smallest up to 12 mm, for
general purpose
filled.
iv) Terrazo tiles with chips of size varying 6
from the smaller up to 20 mm, for
3. Classification general purpose
v) Plain cement and plain coloured tiles, 6
for heavy duty
a) General Purnose Tiles - Used for flooring of
normally lightly loaded, such as in office build-
ings, schools, colleges, hospitals and residen- 6. General Quality - Wearing layer of tiles shall be
tial buildings. free from projections, depressions, cracks, holes,
cavities and other blemishes. Edges of wearing layer
b) Heavy Duty Floor Tiles - Used for heavy
conditions, foot paths, entrances and staircases may be rounded.
of public buildings, passages of auditoriums
and storage godowns. 7. Finish - Colour and texture of wearing layer
shall be uniform throughout its thickness. No appreci-
able difference in appearance of tiles from point of
4. Dimensions
view of colour of aggregate, its type and its distribution
4.B Size shall be as follows: on surface of wearing layer shall be present.
mm mm mm 8. Physical Requirements - All tests shall be
carried out not earlier than 28 days from the date of
200 200 20
manufacture.
250 250 22 I
300 300 - 25 8.1 Flatness of Tile Surface - The amount of con-
cavity and convexity shall not exceed 1 mm.
4.1.1 Half tiles rectangular in shape shall also be
available. 8.2 Perpendicularity - The longest gap between
the arm of the ‘square’ and the edge of tile shall not
4.1.2 Other shapes and sizes of tiles may be exceed 2 percent of length of edge.
manufactured when agreed to mutually provided all
other requirements are met. 8.3 Straightness - The gap between the thread and
the plane of tile shall not exceed 1 percent of length of
5. Tolerances edge.
5.1 On length or breadth, it shall be + 1 mm and on 8.4 Water Absorption - Average value shall not
thickness +5 mm. exceed 10 percent.
110
SP : 21-1983
8.5 Wet Transverse Strength - Average value shall 2) Wear on individual specimen 4 mm
not be less than 3 N/mm2.
b) For heavy duty floor tiles:
8.6 Resistance to Wear - The wear shall not ex- 2mm
1) Average wear
teed the following values: 2) Wear on individual specimen 2.5 mm
a) For general purpose tiles:
1) Average wear 3.5 mm
Note-For reauirements in regard to materials. manufactuie and for methods of tests refer to the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1237-1980 Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles (first
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1542-1977 SAND FOR PLASTER

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of naturally occurring standard solution specified in 6.2.2 of IS : 2386

sands and crushed stone sands (or crushed grave (Part II)-1963*
sands) used in mortars for internal wall and ceiling 2.3 Compressive strength of mortar cubes 1 cement:
plastering, and external plastering using mixes of lime 6 sand shall not be less than 30 kgf/cm2 at 28 days.
cement, composite lime - cement or gypsum (with
or without admixtures) and sand. 2.4 Amount of water for gauging shall be that
required to give a How between 110 to 115 with 25
2. Quality drops in 15 seconds.
2.1 General - It shall be hard, durable, clean and 3. Grading
free from adherent coatings and organic matter.
IS Sieve Percentage Passing
2.2 Deleterious Material - Shall not contain im- 9.50-mm 100
purities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica, 4.75-mm 95-100
shale, sea shells, organic impurities, etc, in such 2.36-mm 95-100
quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength 1.18-mm 90-100
or durability of plaster, etc. 600 -micron 80- 100
2.2.1 Cluy, jine silt and jne dust - Shall not 300 -micron 20-65
exceed 5 percent by weight. 150 -micron o-15
2.2.2 Organic impurities - Colour of liquid *Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 11Estima-
shall be below that indicated by comparison on with the tion of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
Note l-Tolerance of 5 percent is allowed except on 600-micron and finer sieves.

Note 2-For crushed stone sands, permissible limit on 150-micron sieve is increased to 20 percent.
Note J-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1727-1967Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision), IS : 2250-1980Code
of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars (first revision), IS : 2386 (Part I)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates for
concrete: Part I Particle size and shape, and IS : 2386 (Part II)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part II Estimation
of deleterious materials and organic-impurities.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1542-1977 Specification for sand for plaster (first revision).
111
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3461-1980 PVC ASBESTOS FLOOR TILES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for smooth surfaced shape as agreed to mutually. Tolerance, + 0.4 mm on
homogeneous PVC asbestos floor tiles. Laminated 200 mm size and +OS mm on 250 mm size. For larger
floor tiles and floor tiles having embossed surface are size tolerance shall be rfrO.2 percent.
not covered in this standard.
3.2 Thickness - 1 S, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 mm. Toler-
ante, f0.15 mm.
2. Materials - Blended composition of thermo-
plastic binder (vinyl chloride polymer and/or vinyl
4. Colour and Finish - Tiles shall be plain or mot-
chloride copolymers), asbestos fibre, tillers and pig-
tied. Plain tiles shall have colour uniformly distributed
ments.
through tiles. Mottled tiles shall have colours distri-
buted at random throughout thickness of tile.
3.1 Sizr - 200 and 250 mm square. Other size and 5. Physical Requirements - See Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Ok‘ PVC ASBESTOS FLOOR TILES
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT

No. No.
(1) (74 (3) (1) (2) (3)
i) Squareness Gap between the sides of and no individuil read-
the tile and the arms of ing shall deviate from
the metal jig shall not be the average by more than
greater than 0.15 mm for 0.05 mm
last 50 mm towards the b) At 46 f 2°C Average indentation shall
farther end from the not exceed 0.82 mm and
junction of the arms no individual reading
ii) Dimensional stability Change in any linear dimen- shall deviate from the
sion shall not exceed average by more than
0.25 percent 0.05 mm
iii) Colour fastness to Shall not be inferior to that vii) Residual indentation Shall not exceed 0.15 mm
daylight of No. 5 of the 8 standard viii) Resistance to various After immersion in various
patterns of blue dyed substances substances and when
woolen fabric specified tested the width of the
in IS : 686-l957* scratch on the surface
iv) Volatile matter Loss in weight shall not ex- shall not exceed 3 mm.
ceed I percent The colour of the treated
V) Curling Shall not exceed 0.75 mm test piece shall show
vi) Indentation no significant change
a) At 21+2”C Average indentation at the when compared with the
end of one minute shall untreated test piece
not exceed 0.38 mm and ix) Deflection Shall deflect at least 25 mm
no individual reading without breaking
shall deviate from the x) Impace Shall not suffer a fracture
average by more than xi) Abrasion resistance To be agreed between the I
0.05 mm. In relation to purchaser and the sup-
the one minute indenta- plier
tion figures, the average
indentation at the end of *Method for determination of colour fastness of textile
10 minutes shall not ex- materials to daylight.
ceed the value specified? tFor detailed requirements of indentation limits at 27 + 2”C,
refer to Table 2 of the standard.
Note 1 - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3464-1980 Methods of test for plastic floor covering and wall tiles cfirs! revision).
Note 2-For categories of tests, refer to 6 of the sfandurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3461-1980 Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles (first revision).
112
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3462-1979 FLEXIBLE PVC FLOORING

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for unbacked 3.2 Thickness - Standard thickness of floor cover-
homogeneous flexible PVC flooring including lami- ing shall be 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3 mm.
nated PVC flooring in which the composition of each
3.2.1 Laminate type coverings shall have a top
of the laminate is substantially the same.
wearing layer of 0.5 mm up to 2 mm thick flooring and
1.1 The flooring may be supplied in continuous 1 mm for flooring of thickness between 2 and 3 mm.
lengths or in tile form. 3.3 Tolerances - As specified in Table 1.
2. Materials - Blended composition of thermo- 3.4 Non-standardSizes - Other sizes and thicknes-
plastic binder {vinyl chloride polymer and/or vinyl ses as agreed to mutually provided requirements on
chloride copolymer), fillers and pigments. tolerances as given in Table 1 are met.
3. Dimensions and Tolerances 4. Colour and Surface Characteristics - Flooring

shall have a uniform wearing surface. The colour and the
3.1 Linear Dimensions pattern shall extend through full thickness of flooring for
flooring not laminated and it shall extend to full thick-
Sheets or Rolls - Width 1 000, 1 500 and
ness of top layer in case of laminated flooring.
20QOmm
Tiles - 250, 300, 600 and 900 mm
square 5. Requirements - See Table 1:
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PVC ASBESTOS FLOOR TILES
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT

No. No.
(1) (2) (3) il) (2) (3)
9 Thickness The mean thickness shall percent for tiles. After

not differ by more than the test the specimen shall
0.13 mm from that speci- show no signs of curling
fied. The variation bet- vi) Colour fastness to Shall not be inferior to that
ween any two measure- daylight of No. 5 of the 8 standard
ments shall not exceed patterns of blue dyed
0.20 mm woollen fabric specified
ii) Width of sheet or roll Width shall be not less than in IS : 686-1957*
that specified and not vii) Curling Shall not exceed 0.75 mm
more than 6 mm than viii) Residual indentation Shall not exceed d. 10 mm
the specified ix) Flexibility Shall not break, crack or
iii) Tile size The dimensions shall not show any other signs of
vary from the specified failure
dimensions by more than x) Resistance to various The average scratch width
0.10 percent substances obtained after immersion
iv) Squareness (for tiles Gap between the sides of shall not exceed 2 mm.
only) the tiles and the arms of The colour of the treated
the metal jig shall not be test pieces shall show no
greater than 0.15 mm significant change when
towards the farther end compared with untreated
from the junction of the material
arms xi) Ply adhesion Adhesion between plies iq
v) Dimensional stability Charge in any linear dimen- any test piece shall be
sion shall not exceed 0.4 not less than 1.05 kN/m
percent for sheet and 0.25 (Continued)
113
SP : 21-1983
TARLE I REQUIREMENTS OF FLEXIBLF PVC FLOORING - Comd
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENI

No. No.
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
xii) Moisture movement Change in any linear dimen- xiv) Elastic product ‘The mean product of tensile
, sions shall not exceed strength and elongation
0.4 percent shall be not less than
xiii) Heat ageing and exuda- No exudation of plasticizer 2 MJ/m3
tion shall be apparent nor
shall there be any change
in appearance. The mandrel *Method of determination of colour fastness of textile
test shall not produce materials to daylight.
surface cracking
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3462-1979 Specification for flexible PVC flooring (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3463-1966 POLYSTYRENE WALL TILES
1. Scope - Requirements for polystyrene tiles to be Size, mm 99x99 148.5X 148.5

used on interior surface of walls, partitions and
ceilings. Tolerance in length, rf:1 f1.5
mm
2. Workmanship - Shall be free from flow marks, Thickness, Min , mm 1.25 1.75, 2.00
sinks, warpage, blemishes.and other defects. Cavity depth, Min , 0.625kO.125 0.625&O. 125
3. Dimensions and Tolerances 1.05 1.35
114
SP : 21-1983
4. Requirements -See Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF POLYSTYRENE WALL TILES
SL ChRACTERIsTIC REQUIREMENT SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT

No. No.
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
i) Squareness Gap between sides of tile and iii) Colour fastness to No difference in colour shall be
arms of metal jig shall not daylight or arti- observed between exposed and
exceed 0.003 mm for each ficial light non-exposed part of tiles
1 mm run, with a maximum
gap of 0.30 mm iv) Opacity No contrast shall be observed
when tiles, including mottled
ii) Flatness The base surface of each tile and white, are placed on
shall be Bat. The maximum black and white surface
height of any gap between
lip and flat surface detectable v) Cracks and crazing No cracking or crazing shall be
by a feeler gauge shall not detectable to naked eye
exceed 0.25 mm
vi) Resistance to heat The appearance of face surface
The face surface of each un- deformation of tile shall be unchanged
embossed tile excluding edges, and edges of tiles shall not
shall be flat such that the deviate from a straight line
maximum gap between sur- in any direction by more than
face and straight edge detect- 0.75 mm
able at any point on face
surface with a feeler gauge vii) Water absorption The limit to be agreed between
shall not exceed 0.75 mm the purchaser and the supplier.
Maximum value shall not ex-
ceed 5 percent
viii) Non-inllamability To be agreed between the

purchaser and the supplier
Note l-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3464-1980 Methods of tests of plastic floor covering and wall tiles Cfirst revbion).
Note Z-For categories of tests, refer to 6 of Hzestundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3463-1966 Specification for polystyrene wall tiles.
115
.
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4457-1982 CERAMIC UNGLAZED VITREOUS

ACID RESISTING TILES
(First Revision j
1. Scope - Requirements for ceramic unglazed vit-

TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF CERAMIC UNGLAZED
reous acid resisting tiles.
VITREOUS ACID RESISTING TILES
2. Finish - The finished tile, when fractured shall No.
appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogene-
8 Squareness The gap between the inner edge
ous. Tile shall be sound, true to shape, flat and free of the square and the adjace-
from flaws and other manufacturing defects. nt side of the tile shall not
exceed 1 mm per 100 mm
run
3. Dimensions and Tolerance ii) Warpage:
3.1 Dimensions - Size-(i) 100X 100 mm for size (i) k1.5 mni
for size (ii) k2.0 mm
or 98.5X98.5 mm, (ii) 150X150 mm or tor size (iii) 2 2.5 mm
148.5X148.5 mm, and (iii) 200X200 mm or iii) Water absorption 2 percent, MUX
198.5~ 198.5 mm. Thickness - 25, 20, 12 and 10 iv) Compressive strength 70 N/mm* (700 kgf/cm*), Min
mm. Depth of grooves on underside shall not exceed VI Flexural strength 20 N/mm* (200 kgf/cm*), Min
vi) Resistance to acid Loss in mass shall not exceed
3 mm.
1.5 percent
3.2 Tolerance - f 2.5 percent. vii) Abrasion resistance i) Average wear 2 mm, MUX
ii) Wear on individual
specimen 2.5 mm, Max
4. Requirements - See Table 1.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to G of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 4457-1982 Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting
tiles (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4832 (PART I)-1969 CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

PART I SILICATE TYPE
1. Scope - Requirements for chemically setting concentrated orthophosphoric acids. They are not
silicate type of chemical resistant mortars for bonding resistant to alkalis or to boiling water and steam. They
chemical resistant masonry units. Such mortars are deteriorate by continued exposure to water.
resistant to most type of acids except hydrofluoric and
116
SP : 21-1983
2. Materials
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SILICATE
TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS
2.1 Binder - Solution of sodium silicate or potas-
sium silicate with silica/sodium oxide or silica/ potas- SL PROPERTY REQUIREMENT
sium oxide molecular ratio of 3 to 3.7. Specific gravity No.

1.4. I Silicate Silicate
Type Type
2.2 Fillers - Silica, quartz, ganister, andesite, etc.
(1) 0) (3) (4)
2.3 Setting Agent - Fluoride or acid .compound. 0 Working time at 27 f 2”C, Min 15 20
minutes
ii) Flexural strength at 7 days, 35 40
3. Physical Requirements - See Table 1. Min. kgf/cmz
iii) Compressive strength at 7 days, 100 150
Min , kgf/cmz
iv) Bond strength Min , kgf/cmz 5 5
4. Chemical Requirements - Limits of chemical Absorption of toluene, Max, 18 18
v)
resistance may be settled between the purchaser and percent by weight
the supplier.
Note 1 - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4456 (Part I)-1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part I Silicate type and
resin type.
Note 2 - For general guide for chemical resistance of silicate type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1 of IS : 4441-1980
Code of practice for use of silicate type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4832 (Part I)-1969 Specificqtion for chemical resistant mortars:
Part I Silicate type.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4832 (PART II)-1969 CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

PART II RESIN TYPE
1. Scope - Requirements for resin type chemical 3. Physical Requirements -See Table 1.
resistant mortars for bonding chemical-resistant
masonry units. Such mortars have good resistant to 4. General Requirements - Resin, shall have vis-
non-oxidizing mineral acids and poor resistance to cosity. Filler material shall have properly graded
oxidizing mineral acids.. Fairly resistant to inorganic particles that will permit preparation of a minimum
alkalis. Resistant to water; hence give impermeable joint thickness of 1.5 mm.
joints. Used for joining acid-proof bricks and tiles.
5. Chemical Resistance Requirement -The
2. Materials
limits may be settled between the purchaser and the
2.1 Resins - Phenolic, furane, epoxy, polyester. supplier.
2.2 Fillers - Siliceous or other inert fillers. Shall
6. Shelf Life - For phenolic and polyester resins is
be graded so as to permit 1.5 mm joints.
about 3 months and for furane and epoxy resins about
2.3 Catalyst - May be incorporated in fillers. 12 months from date of manufacture.
117
.
SP : 21-1983
TABLE I PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF RESIN TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

SL PARTICULARS REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPEOFMoa~~a
No. /\
/ \
Phenolic Furane Epoxy Polyester
Type Type Type Type
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Working time at 27 +2”C, Min, minutes 20 20 20 20
ii) Flexural strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm* 75 75 150 150
iii) Compressive strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm* 350 350 500 500
iv) Bond strength,Min, kgf/cm2 10 10 12 12
v) Absorption, MUX, percent by weight 1 1 I 1
Note - In the test for bond strength the joint shall not fail at or below the value specified.
Note l-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4456 (Part I)-1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part I Silicate type and
resin type.
Note 2-For general guide for chemical resistance of resin type mortars to various substances, refer to Table I of IS : 4443-1980Code
of practice for use of resin type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4832 (Part II)-1969 Specification for chemical resistant mortars:
Part II Resin type.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4832 (PART III)-1968 CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

PART III SULPHUR TYPE
1. Scope - Requirements of sulphur type chemical 3. Physical Requirements -See Table 1.

resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant
masonry units. Such mortars have good resistance TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SULPHUR
TYPE CHEMICAL R-FSISTANT MORTARS
against most of the acids except concentrated oxidizing
acids, but have poor resistance to alkalis. Used for SL PROPERTY REQUIREMENT
No.
jointing acid resistant bricks or tiles.
(1) (2) (3)
i) Compressive strength at 48 hours, Min. kgf/ 280
2. Composition cm2
ii) Tensile strength at 48 hours, Min , kgf/cm2 30
a) Sulphur - 55 to 70 percent ’ iii) Flexural strength at 48 hours, Min , kgf/cm2 70
b) Inert tiller - 30 to 45 percent iv) Bond strength at 48 hours, Min. kgf/cm* IO
v) Proportion of original strength retained after 20.0
c) Sieve analysis of silica filler thermal shock test, Min, percent
vi) Moisture absorption, Max, percent I.0
425 micron 1s Sieve - material retained 5
vii) Tendency of aggregate to settle,Mar, variation 0.6
percent, Max from unity I
150 micron IS Sieve - material retained 10
percent, Min 4. Chemical Resistance Requirements - The
75 micron IS Sieve - material retained 35 limits may be settled between the purchaser and the
percent, Min supplier.
Note- For otherfillers, requirements given at SI No. (vii) of 5. Storage Life - Shall not be less than 2 years.
Table 1 shall apply. Shall be placed in a dry place away from fire.
Note l-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4456 (Part II)-1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part 11Sulphur type.
Note 2-For general guide for chemical resistance of sulphur type mortars of various substances, refer to Table l of IS : 4442-1980
Code of practice for use of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4832 (Part III)-1968 Specification for chemical resistant mortars:
Part III Sulphur type.
118
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4860-1968 ACID-RESISTANT BRICKS
1. Scope - Requirements of acid-resistant bricks. 4. Warpage - Not more than2.5 mm at any point.
Such bricks are designed primarily, for use in chemical
and allied industries and are used in masonry, flooring, Note - For measurement of warp, refer to 2.4.1 of the
stundard.
etc, subject to acid attack, lining of sewers carrying
industrial effluents, etc. Made out of suitable clay or 5. Classification
shale with low lime and iron content, felspar, Hint or
sand and vitrified at high temperatures. 5.1 Class I - Recommended ‘for severe type of
corrosive environments as obtained in storage tanks,
2. Dimensions - 230 X 114 X 64 mm. pickling tanks, etc.
5.2 Class II - Recommended for areas subject to
3. Tolerances
occasional spillage of acids, fumes, and contact with
dry chemicals as in fertilizer silos.
Dimensions Tolerances
(mm) (mm) 6. Performance Requirements - Sc>e Table 1.
230 k3.5
114 k2.0
64 k1.0
TABLE 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF ACID-RESISTANT BRICKS
SL cIMMXERlSTIC REOUlRpMwrS
No. I
A
\
Class I Bricks Class II Bricks
(I) (2) (3) (4)
i) Water absorption, percent. MUX 2 4
ii) Flexural strength, kgf/cm* , Min 100 70
iii) Compressive strength. kgf/cm z, Min 700 50
iv) Resistance to acid Loss in weight shall not Loss in weight shall not
exceed I.5 percent exceed 4.0 percent
v) Resistance to wear ( optional ) Average wear shall not -

exceed 2 mm
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to D of thestundardand Appendix A of IS : 1237-1980 Specification for cement
concrete flooring tiles (first revision).
For detailed-information, refer to IS : 4860-1968 Specification for acid-resistant bricks.
119
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 653-1980 LINOLEUM SHEETS AND TILES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of linoleum manufac- 3.2 Moire, Jaspe and Marble Linoleum -
tured as sheets or tiles on a hessian backing and used as Composition shall be of different colours extending
floor covering. It does not include jute canvas as back- from wearing surface to backing at random to form a
ing material. variegated surface.
2. Materials Note - For illustrations of plain, moire, jaspe and marble

linoleum, see Fig. 1 to 4 of he standard.
2.1 Wearing surface of linoleum shall be made from

oxidized or polymerized linseed oil or suitable drying 4. Dimensions and Tolerances
oil, with necessary driers; rosin or resin or their combi-
nation; cork flour or wood flour or both; mineral fillers; 4.1 Linear Dimensions
and colouring material or pigments. 4.1.1 Sheets - Shall be supplied in rolls of
lengths not less than 5.5 m. Standard width shall be 2 .O
2.2 The paint, if used, for painting the hessian back- m.
ing shall conform to the following requirements:
4.1.2 Tiles - Size shall be 228,305 and 457 mm
Characteristic Requirement, Percent square.
Red Oxide 4 4.2 Thickness - Standard overall thickness shall

Whiting 77 be 4.5, 3.2, 2.0 and 1.6 mm.
Linseed oil 14 4.3 Tolerances -See Table I.
White spirit 5
4.4 Cork Tiles - Shall be of sizes and thickness as
specified in 4.1.2 and 4.2 respectively.
2.2.1 Permissible variation shall be +0, - 1 per-
cent. 5. Finish - Wearing surface shall be smooth,
uniform and be free from indentations, cracks and prot-
3. Type
ruding particles. Hessian backing shall not be painted
3.1 Plain Linoleum - Composition shall be of un- uniess otherwise specified.
iform colour extending throughout full thickness from
wearing surface to hessian backing. 6. Physical Requirements -SEC Table I.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF LINOLEUM SHEETS, LINOLEUM TILES AND CORK TILES
No.
(1) (2) (3)
i) Width of sheet Average value shall not vary by morel than + 3mm
ii) Tile size (see Note) 228kO.4 mm
305 f 0.45 mm
457 f 0.60 mm
iii) Thickness Average value shall not vary by more than + 0.15 m
:v) Squareness (for tiles only) Gap between the sides of the tile and the arms of metal jig, shall not be
greater than 0.25 mm at any point along the sides
v) Seasoning (for plain linoleum only) The cut surface shall show no difference in colour or grain, between the edges
and the centre, 24 hours after the cut has been made
vi) Residual indentation Shall not exceed 10 percent of the original overall thickness
vii) Flexibility Shall not crack or break
(Conrirtued)
120
SP : 21-1983
TAHLX 1 HEQUIKEMENTS OF LINOLkXJM SHIXTS, l,INOLt%M TILE5 AND COHK TILES - Corzrtl
No.
(1) (2) (3)
viii) Water absorption For Thickness. mm Water Absorption, Percent, Max
4.5 5.5
3.2 6.5
2.0 10
1.6 11.5
ix) Ageing After ageing the sheets shall show no sign of discolourarion. Shall
also satisfy the requirements of residual indentation, flexibility, colour
fastness, water absorption after ageing
x) Colour fastness to artificial light Shall not be inferior to that of No. 5 of the 8 standard patterns of the blue
dyed wool cloth as spccificd in IS : 2424-1967
Note - The tolerances on sizes are applicable at the time of ac:ual cutting of the tiles.
*Method of determination of colour fastness of textile material to artificial light (xenon lamp).
--
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 9704-1980 Methods of test for linoleum sheets and tiles.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6.53-1980 Specification for linoleum sheets and tiles (second
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 809-1970 RUBBER FLOORING MATERIALS FOR

GENERAL PURPOSES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements, composition, work- 3. Requirements
manshidand tests ibr rubber flooring material suitable
3.1 Appeurutzce - Shall be of first class workman-
for covering floors of domestic and public buildings,
ship, satisfactorily vulcanized, free from sulphur
cinemas, hospitals, large stores, ships, transport vehi-
bloom and objectionable odour and blisters, cracks and
cles, etc. It does not cover speciai types of rubber
embedded foreign matter. The edges and ends shall be
floorings used for electrical insulating purposes. con-
cut true and square.
ductive or anti-static flooring having chemical and
oil-resistant properties. 3.2 Colou~~ - Shall not be affected by cleaning with
water and a washing soap or floor polish.
2. Types
3.3 Diriwr~simr~.s
2.1 With regard to topping:
3.3.1 SlrEct.s
Type A - plain or marbled
Type B - ribbed or fluted Thickness Mi~~irn~r~u Width
mm Length mm
2.2 With regard to backing:
Type C - with fabric backing or fabric insen 2.5 5?O 900
Type D - with sponge rubber backing Over 3 and up to 5 3.5 900
Type E -- with plain rubber backing Over 5 and up to 6.5 2.5 900
121
SP : 21-1983
3.3.2 Tiles - 200x200 mm, 300x300 mm and 4. Performance Requirements

500x 500 mm. Any thickness as specified for sheets.
4.1 Hardness - Shall not be less than 65 IRHD.
3.3.3 Tolerance - +f.: mm on thickness.
4.2 Wuter Absorption - Not more than 0.5 percent
--v.L -
by weight.
Minimum thickness of wearing surface shall be 1
mm for multiple stratum backed type and 3 mm 4.3 Compression Set - Shall not exceed 15
for Type D flooring. percent.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3400 (Part II)-1980 Methods of test for vulcanized rubbers: Part 11 Hardness Cfirsr
revision). IS : 3400 (Part X)-l977 Methods of test for vulcanized rubbers: Part X Compression set at constant strain (first revision),
and Appendix B of ;he srandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 809-1970 Specification for rubber flooring materials for general
purposes (first-revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1195-1978 BITUMEN MASTIC FOR FLOORING

(Second Revision)
1. Scope 1.2.1 Grades I and II may be used as a polished

flooring for light traffic or as an underlay to other floor
1.1 Requirements for four grades of bitumen mastic coverings.
for flooring, composed of ground limestone, coarse 1.3 This does not cover special grades of bitumen
._ .
aggregate and pigment, if required, incorporated with mastic flooring, such as chemical resistant, oil resistant
asphaltic cements. or spark free flooring; for these purposes special
bitumen mastics are available.
1.2 Bitumen mastic floorings are graded according to
usage as follows: Note - A guide to the selection of the appropriate grade is
given in Appendix A of the standard.
Grade I Special flooring

2. Material
Grade II Light duty flooring
Grade III Medium duty flooring 2.1 Bitumen - The physical properties of bitumen
Grade IV Industrial factory flooring used shall conform to those specified in Table 1.
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN

SL CHARACTERLWIC REQUIREMENT
FOR
No. 1 A \
I
Grade I Grades II, III and IV ’
A /\
\/ \
’ Mastic asphalt Coloured mastic Mastic asphalt Coloured mastic ’
for flooring asphalt for for flooring asphalt for
flooring flooring
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6,
i) Penetration at 25 ‘C - - 5to15 5 to 15
ii) Softening point ( ring and ball ), Max 105°C 105°C 100°C Ioo°C
iii) Solubi!ity in CS2, percent, Min 60 60 99.5 60
iv) Ash content ( mineral matter ), Max, percent 30 30 0.5 30

by mass
v) Loss on heating for 5 h at 163“C. percent by mass 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
122
SP : 21-1983
Note - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*, 3. Composition - Excluding proportions of coarse
IS : 1205-1978t, IS : 1208-1978$, IS :1212-19789, and aggregate retained on a 600micron IS Sieve as given
IS : 1217-1978/l. in 2.2.2, the bitumen mastic shall have composition
given in Table 2.
2.2 Aggregate
TABLE 2 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC
2.2.1 Fine aggregate - Naturally occuring lime- REQUIREMENT PERCENTAGE

BY MASS
stone rock ground to a grading as given below and B

aggregate shall bve a calcium carbonate content of not , (1) (2) (3)
less than 80 percent by weight: Soluble bitumen 12.0 18.0
Grading Percentage by Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 40.0 56.0

Weighty Passing 2 1Zmicron IS Sieve and 8.0 25.0
/N
/ \ retained on 7%micron IS Sieve
Min Max
Passing 600-micron IS Sieve and 8.0 32.0
Passing 75micron IS Sieve 45 55 retained on 212-micron IS Sieve
Passing 212-micron IS Sieve and 10 30
retained on 75-micron IS Sieve
4. Hardness Number
Passing 600-micron IS Sieve and 10 30
retained on 212-micron IS Sieve a) At the time oj’manufacture:
Passing 2.36-mm IS Sieve and 5 20 Grade I Not more than 15* at 45°C
retained on 600-micron IS Sieve Grade II and III Not more than 12* at 35°C
Retained on 2.36-mm IS Sieve - Nil Grade IV Not more than 40$ at 35°C
b) At the time of laying:
2.2.2 Coarse aggregate - Clean igneous or cal-
Grade 1 Not less than 2 nor more
careous rock or siliceous material obtained from
than 12 at 45°C
natural deposits. If limestone chippings are used for
Grade II and 111 Not less than 2 nor more
flooring, its aggregate crushing value shall not be
than 12 at 35°C
greater than 28. The percentage and size of coarse
aggregate (depending upon the thickness of finished Note - lie temperature of 45°C is intended for Grade 1
work) for bitumen mastic as well as for coloured bitumen mastic only because of its high degree of hardness at
bitumen mastic shall be as follows: lower temperatures.
Grade Size and Type of Coarse Aggregate Perrentage Thickness

mm
I and II Retained on 600~micron IS Sieve 85 percent
Min passing 4.75-mm IS Sieve 100 percent 15-25 15-20
III Retained on 600~micron IS Sieve 85 percent
IV Retained on 600-micron IS Sieve 95 percent
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials:

*Determination of penetration fjrst revision).
TDetermination of softening point (/irs? revision)
*Determination of ductility @rsr revision).
EjDetermination of loss on heating Qkst revision).
/iDetermihation of mineral matter (ash) yirst revision). *After addition of specified coarse aggregates.
VDetermined by the wet sieving method. before addition of specified coarse aggregate.
Note l-For method for determination of binder content and fine aggregates in bitumen mastic, refer to Appendix C and for method
for determining hardness number, refer to Appendix D of the standard.
Note 2-For manufacturing details, refer to 5 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring (second
revision).
123
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8374-1977 BITUMEN MASTIC, ANTI-STATIC AND

ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING GRADE
1. Scope - Requirements of bitumen mastic for 3.2 Aggregates and Fillers -The aggregates and
anti-static and electrically conducting grade. fillers used in preparing bitumen mastic should be of
inert nature and should have the gradings as given
Note - In locations where it is necessary to take brecautionary below:
measures against the accumulation of static electricity, Roaring
should have uniform electrical conductance to a degree which will Sieve lksignalion Percentage
always ensure that under the fastest rate of generation of any by Mass
/x x
charge that can possibly occur in practice, a dangerous potential
can not exist.
’ Passing Retained on
IS Sieve IS Sieve
2. Terminology 75-micron - 45 to 55
2.1 Electrically Conducting - Having an upper (filler)
2 12-micron 75-micron 10 to 30
limit of resistance of 5 X IO4 ohms.
600-micron 212~micron 10 to 30
2.2 Anti-sratic - Having a resistance of 2.36-mm 600-micron 5 to 20
over 5 X 104 ohms and less than lo8 ohms. 2.36 mm Nil
3. Materials 4. composition
3.1 Bitumen - Requirements shall conform to as 4.1 Bitumen mastic composition for electrical con-
specified in Table 1. ducting and anti-static grade are made by incorporating
bitumen in conjunction with other suitable materials
Note - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*,
like carbon black of the conductive grade like graphite.
IS : 1205-1978t, IS : 1208-1978$, IS : 1212-19785, and
IS : 1216-1978 I/. 4.1.1 The bitumen content shall be between 13 to
18 percent by mass of the total mastic.
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN
Note - For method of preparation of bitumen mastic, refer to
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT clause 4.2 of the standwd.
No.
(1) (2) (3) 5. Properties
i) Softening point (ring and ball method) 65 to 100°C
5.1 Hardness number of bitumen mastic as laid shall
ii) Penetration at 25°C in 11100 cm 5 to 20
iii) Ductility at 27”C, M&in cm 2 be 4 to 12 at 35°C unless otherwise agreed to mutually.
iv) Loss on heating, percent, Max 0.3
5.2 Resistance of products after being manufactured
v) Solubility in CSz, percent, Min 99
shall have electrical conductance between 5 X lo4
Note - Industrial bitumen of the grades 90/15 and 75/15 conform- ohms and 2 X IO6 ohms.
ing to IS : 702-1961 ‘Specification for industrial bitumen (revised)’
are two typical examples of binder which will satisfy the require-
ments of this table.

*Determination of penetration yirst revision).
TDetermination of softening point yirsr revision).
*Determination of duaility (first revision).
5Determination of loss on heating yirst revision).
//Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide yirsr revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to clause 6 and Appendix A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8374-1977 Specification for bitumen mastic, anti-static and
electrically conducting grade.
124
SECTION 10
WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING MATERIALS

sl’ : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS 1322-1970 Bitumen felts for waterproofing and damp-proofing (second-revision) 127

IS 1580-1969 Bituminous compounds for waterproofing and caulking purposes 129
(first revision)
IS 2645-1975 Integral cement waterproofing compounds Cjrst revision) 130
IS 3037-1975 Bitumen mastic for use in waterproofing of roofs 130
IS 3384-1965 Bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and damp-proofing 131
IS 5871-1970’. Bitumen mastic for tanking and damp-proofing 132
IS 7193-1974 Glass fibre base coal tar pitch and bitumen felts 133
..
126
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1322- 1970 BITUMEN FELTS FOR. WATERPROOFING

AND DAMP-PROOFING
. (Second Revision)
1. scope - Requirements for saturated bitumen 3. Weight - The weight of ingredients of bitumen
1
felts (underlay) and selEfinished bitumen felts used for felts for 10 m2 shall be not less than those specified in
waterproofing and damp-proofing. Table 1.
2. Classification 4. Finish - Finished material shall be free from

visible external defects, such as holes, oil patches,
a) Fibre base
ragged or untrue edges, breaks, cracks, tears, pro-
i) Type 1 - Saturated felt for underlay tuberances and indentations.
ii) Type 2 - Self-finished felt (for 5. Dimensions - Width 90 and 100 cm and lengths
waterproofing) - Grade 1. 10 m and 20 m.
Self-finished felt (for
waterproofing) - Grade 2.
6. Other Requirements - See Table 2.
b) Hessian base
Type 3 - Self-finished felt (for water-
proofmg) - Grade 1.
Self-finished felt (for damp-
proofing) - Grade 2.
TABLE 1 MINIMUM WBIGHT OF BITUMEW FELTS

(Clause 3)
SL TYPE OF FELT WEIGHTFOR 10 m2
No. A
/ \
Untreated Saturant Coatant Bitumen Total Weight of the Finished
Base Content Bitumen Felt in Dry Condi-
(See Note 1) tion with Mica Dusting
Powder, A4in (See Note 2)
(1) (2) Q) (4) (5) (6) CI)
Fibre Base
i) Type 1, Underlay 4.0 4.5 - 4.5 8.5
ii) Type 2, Self-finished felt, Grade 1 5.0 5.7 10.7 11.9 21.9
iii) Type 2, Self-finished felt, Grade 2 4.0 4.5 21.8 17.1 30.8 ..
Hessian Base
_ iv) Type 3, Self-finished felt, Grade 1 2.3 1.8 17.7 12. I 22.3
v) Type 3, Self-finished felt, Grade 2 2.3 1.8 31.8 20.2 36.4
Note l-The weight of the untreated base shall be taken as in the dry condition.
Note 2-Includes allowance of 0.5 kg minimum mica dusting powder in dry condition, except for Type 1.
127
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 2’ REQUIREMENTS OF BITUMEN FELTS

(Clause 6)
SL TYPE.OF BREAKING PLIABILKYTEST STORAGE HEAT PRESSURE WATEii
No. FELT STRENGTH,Min %KKING RESJSTANCE HEAD TEST ABSORPTION
A TEST TEST TEST, Max
/ \
Warpway Weftway
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
kgf ksf
72 24 i) The roll shall not - - - -
i)Spel
show cracks on
unrolling
ii)Consider any -
surface rupture
exceeding 5 mm
in length as
failure
ii) Type 2 95 60 i) The roll shall not The test pieces The test pieces The test pieces 5.0 percent
(all grades ) show cracks on shall be exa- shall show no shall show
unrolling mined after sign of melting no sign of
cooling of the bitu- leakage
men compound
ii) Consider any After release of - - -
surface rupture the load, the
exceeding 5 mm layers of felt
in length as shall be capa-
failure ble of being
separated with-
out damaging
the coatant in
any way
iii) Type 3 135 90 i) The roll shall not The test pieces-_T4e test pieces The test pieces 2.0 percent
( all grades ) show cracks on, shall be exa- &-ill show no shall show no
unrolling mined after sign of melt- sign of leaka-
cooling , ingofthe bitu- ge
men compound
ii) Consider any After release of -
sepala& with-
out damaging
the coatant in
any way
Note - For methods of tests. refer to Annendex A of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1322-1970 Specification for bitumen felts for yvaterproofing and
damp-proofing (second revision).
128
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1580-1969 BITUMINOUS COMPOUNDS FOR WATERPROOFING .

AND CAULKING PURPOSES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of tests for

TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS
bituminous compounds applied cold and used for CAULKING COMPOUNDS
stopping leaks and waterproofing of porous masonry,
concrete floors, walls and roofs and also as caulking SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
agent for crevices and vertical joints between steel No.
plates, folded sections, wood joints, precast concrete (1) (2) (3)
cladclings, blocks, etc. i) Water content, percent by 0.5

weight, MUX
ii) Ash content, percent by Not greater than 40
2. Requirements weight
iii) Flow Shall satisfy the require-
2.1 Form - Shall be semi-stiff and smooth suitable ment given in
for application with hand, trowel or gun at 27°C and Appendix A of fhe
above. standard
iv) Flash point, “C, Mb1 35
2.2 Composition -Bitumen and flux oils with or v) Flexibility and adhesion Shall satisfy the require-
without addition of vegetable or resinous oils cutback ment given in
Appendix B of the
with volatile thinners and mixed with non-g&y ab’sor-
standard
bent fillers. iv) Consistency:
a) Before setting (test Not less than 100
2.3 Keeping Quality - Not less than 6 months in after 1 h)
original sealed containers. b) After setting (test Not less than 80
after 24 h)
2.4 Physical Requirements -See Table 1.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS : 1209-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous
materials: Determination of flash point and fire point (first revision), IS : 1211-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous
materials: Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) (first revision), and IS : 1217-1978 Methods for testing tar and
bituminous materials: Determination of mineral matter (ash) (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1580-1969 Specification for bituminous compounds for
waterproofing and caulking purposes (first revision).
. ..
129
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2645-1975 INTEGRAL CEMENT WATERPROOFING

COMPOUNDS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for integral cement 2.2 Setting time of cement mixed with water-
waterproofing compounds, which shall be assessed by: proofing: Initial - not less than 30 minutes; tinal -
not more than 600 minutes.
4 Permeability to water, and
2.3 ComDressive Strennth -Of mortar cubes us-
b) Physical tests of setting time and compressive ing the recommended pioportion of waterproof- ,
strengths of cement mixed with the waler- ing compound shall be as follows:
proofing compounds.
At 3 days-Not less than’ 160 kgf/cmz, nor less
Note - Proportions as recommended by manufacturers, but than 80 percent of the 3 days com-
not exceeding 3 percent by weight of cement. pressive strength of cubes made
2. Requirements without the compound.
At 7 days-Not less than 220 kgf/cmz. nor less
2.1 Permeability to water of specimens prepared than 80 percent of the 7 clays com-
with the recommended proportion of the compound pressive strength of cubes made
shall be less than half the permeability of similar without the compound.
specimens prepared without the addition of the 2.4 The chloride content and sulphatecontent in the
compound. product shall be declared by the manufacturer.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, IS : 69251973 Methods of test
for determination of water soluble chlorides in concrete admixtures, and Appendix A of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2645-1975 Specification for integral cement waterproofing
compounds (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3037-1965 BITUMEN MASTIC FOR USE IN WATERPROOFING

OF ROOFS
1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen mastic suita- b) Penetration 10 to 30
ble for waterproofing of roofs. Not intended to be used c) Ductility 3 to 30
as a paving material or to withstand exceptional condi- d) Loss on heating 2 percent, Max
tions, such as acid or alkali actions. e) Solubility in CS2 99 percent, Min
2. General Characteristics - It shall consist of a
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*,
mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in IS : 1205-1978t. IS : 1208-1978$, IS : 1212-19785, and
such suitable proportions as to give it a semi-fluid IS : 1216-197811.
consistency when heated to about 180°C. The mastic at
this temperature shall be easily compressible by
trowels into a compact and uniform layer not less than
*Determination of penetration yirsf revision).
10 mm in thickness. tDetermination of softening point yirsr revision).
$Detennination of ductility yirst revision).
3. Materials $Detennination of loss on heating yirsr revision).
//Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide or
3.1 Bitumen - Physical properties: trichloroethylene (first revision).
a) Softening point, Ring 55 to 90°C

and Ball
130
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Aggregate - Crushed rock or gravel (Silicious, 4. Composition of Mastic -See Table 1.
granite or limestone) and mineral fillers (cement or
limestone dust) - Grading: TABLE 1 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC BY
ANALYSIS
Percent h) SL REQUIREMENT PERCENTAGEBY

weight No. WEIGHTOF
TOTAL MASTIC
(1) (2) (3
Passing 75micron IS Sieve (filler) 40 to 45
i) Bitumen 15 to 20
Retained on 75-micron and passing 15 to 20 Aggregate passing

425micron IS Sieve ii) 4.7%mm IS Sieve and retained on 18 to 20
2.00~mm IS Sieve
iii) 2.00~mm IS Sieve and retained on 12 to 18
Retained on 425-micron and passing 15 to20 425-micron IS Sieve
2-mm IS Sieve iv) 425-micron IS Sieve and retained on 12 to 18
75-micron IS Sieve
Retained on 2 mm and passi,ng 20 to 30 V) 75-micron IS Sieve (mineral filler) 35 to 40
4.75-mm IS Sieve
5. Hardness Number - 2 to 8 at 25°C and 10 to 65
Retained on 4.75-mm IS Sieve Nil at 45°C.
Note l-For methods of determination of binder content and fine aggregates in bitumen mastic, and for determination of hardness
number, refer tq Appendices C and D of IS : 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision).
Note 2-For method of preparation of bitumen mastic, refer to 4 of the slandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3037-1965 Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water-
proofing of roofs.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3384-1965 BITUMEN PRIMER FOR USE IN WATERPROOFING

AND DAMP-PROOFING
1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen primer for 2. Requirements - Primer shall be free from water
application to concrete and masonry surfaces and to be and shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1
used with bitumen in damp-proofing and water- and shall preferably be made from the same grade of
proofing below or above ground level. bitumen as used in bonding.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PRIMER

SL CHARACTERISTIC R&uIREMENT
No. ..
(1) (2) (3)
i) Viscosity by standard tar viscometer, 4-mm orifice, in set, at 25°C 4to24
ii) Distillation fractions, percent by volume of the primer:
a) Up to 22X, hh 35
b) Up to 36o”C,MUX 65
iii) Tests on residue from distillation up to 36@‘c
a) Penetration at 25°C. 100 g, 5 set in l/100 cm 20 to 50
b) Mattersoluble in carbon disulphide, percent by weight, Min 99.0
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of penetration
(first revision), IS : 1206-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of viscosity (first revision),
IS : 1213-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Distillation test (first revision), and IS : 1216-1978 Methods for
testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of solubility in carbon disulpbide or trichloroethylene (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3384-1965 Specification for bitumen primer for use in water-
proofing and damp-proofing.
4
131
\
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5871-1970 BITUMEN MASTIC FOR TANKING AND

DAMP-PROOFING
1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen mastic used calcium carbonate content not less than 80 percent by
as covering material for damp-proofing of under- weight.
ground tanks, basements of buildings, water reser- 3.3 Aggregates -Shall be fine aggregate consist-
voirs, swimming pools, irrigation canals, etc. ing of natural sand, or crushed limestone or crushed
hard rock. Grading is given below for guidance:
2. General Characteristics - The mastic shall
consist of a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and Percent,
mineral filler in such suitable proportions as to give a by Weight
semi-fluid consistency when heated to about 180°C. At
Passing 75micron IS Sieve Oto 10
this temperature, the mastic shall be easily compressi-
Passing 212micron and retained on 10 to 18
ble by trowels into a compact and uniform layer not
75micron IS Sieve
less than 10 mm thick.
Passing 600-micron and retained on 40 to 54
2 12-micron IS Sieve
3. Materials Passing 2.36~mm Sieve and retained on 24 to 40
600-micron IS Sieve
3.1 Bitumen - Physical properties. Retained on 2.36-mm IS Sieve Nil
a) Softening point (ring and ball method) 50” to 90°C 4. Composition of Mastic - See Table 1.
b) Penetration at 25”C, in l/100 cm 20 to 40 TABLE I COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC BY

ANALYSIS
c) Ductility at 27”C, Min , in cm 10
SL &QUlREMEhT PERCENTAGEBY
d) Loss on heating, percent, MUX 1
No. WEIGHT,
e) Solubility in CSZ, percent, Min 99 TOTALMASTIC
(1) (2) (3)
Note - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*, i) Soluble bitumen 15 to 17
IS 1205-1978t, IS : 1208-1978$, IS : 1212-19789 and ii) Aggregate passing 75-micron IS Sieve 42 to 52
IS :1216-197811. iii) Aggregate passing 212-micron IS Sieve 3 to 10
and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve
3.2 Filler - Limestone or other suitable mineral iv) Aggregate passing 600-micron IS Sieve 15 to 25
powder passing 75micron IS Sieve, and having and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve
v) Aggregate passing 2.36-mm IS Sieve 7 to 20
and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Nil
vi) Aggregate retained on 2.36-mm IS
*Dete&nination of penetration yirst revision). Sieve
tlktermination of softening point Cjirst revision ).
$Determination of ductility fJ?sr revision ).
&Determination of loss on heating yirst revision ). 5. Hardness Number - Shall be between 20 and
/&terminatiod of solubility in carbon disulphide (firs? revision) 50 at 25°C.
..
Note 1 -For methods of determination of contents of bitumen mastic composition and for determination of hardness number, refer
to Appendices C and D of IS : 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision).
Note 2-For method of manufacturing bitumen mastic, refer to 5 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5871-1970 Specification for bitumen mastic for tanking and damp-
proofing.
132
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7193-1974 GLASS FIBRE BASE COAL TAR PITCH

AND BITUMEN FELTS
1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen or coal tar b)Twe 2 -Grade I - Talcum, mica or sand
pitch treated felts (for pipe-wraps known as outerwrap) surfaced glass fibre base bitumen felts for
and self-finished bitumen felts used for waterproofing waterproo ting .
and damp-proofing. c) Type 2 -Grade I1 - Talcum, mica or sand
surfaced glass fibre base bitumen felts for
Note - Glass fibre base bitumen felts are suitable for water- damp-proofing.
proofing and damp-proofing in buildings and other situations
where penetration of moisture is to be stopped. Glass fibre has the
advantage that it does not rot by continuedexposure to moisture. 3. Dimensions -Bitumen felts in width of one
metre and generally in lengths of 1, 10 and 20 m. Glass
fibre felts generally in length of 100 mm.
2. Classification
a) Type 1 - Bitumen or coal tar pitch treated 4. Weight - The weight of ingredients used in
felts or pipe wrapping (outerwrap) glass fibre manufacture of glass fibre felts for 10 m* shall be not
base, talcum, mica or sand surfaced. less than those specified in Table 1.
TABLE 1 MINIMUM WRIGHT OF BITUMEN GLASS FIBRE

BASE FELTS FOR 10 rn2
SL TYPE OF FELT hTREATED TREATED COATANT TOTAL b%IGHT. IN

No. BASE BASE DRY CONDITION
INCLUDINGSURFACING
MATERIALS
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
ks kg kg kg
0.4 4.5 - 5.5

8 Type 1
ii) Type 2 Grade I 0.4 - 15.3 18.0
iii) Type 2 Grade I1 0.4 - 22.0 25.0
133
SP : 21-1983
5. Other Requirements -See Table 2.
TABLE 2 BEQU’IBEMENTS OF GLASS FIBBE FELTS
SL TYPE OF MINIMUM PLIABILITY STORAGE HEAT PRESSURE wATF.R

No. FELT BREAKING TEST STICKINGTps~ RE.VUTANCE HUD ABSORPTION
STRENGTH TEST TEST lb-r, Max
h
/ \
Waipway Weftway
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
kgf kgf
i) Type 1 30 15 a) The roll shall - - - -
not show cracks
on unrolling
b) Consider any
’ surface rupture
exceeding 5 mm
in length as
failure
ii) Type 2 50 30 a) The roll shall The test pieces The test pieces The test pieces 2 percent
(all grades) not show cracks shall be exa- shall show no shall show no
on unrolling mined after sign of melting sign of leak-
cooling of bitumen age
compound
b) Consider any After release of
separated with-
out damaging
the coats in
any way
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendix B of rhe stundurd.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 7193-1974 Specification for glass fibre base coal tar pitch and
bitumen felts.
134
SECTION 11
SANITARY APPLIANCES AND

WATER FITTINGS
..
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
GENERAL
IS : 771 Glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances:
(Part I)-1979 Part I General requirements (second revision) 139
(Part II)- 1979 Part II Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks 140
(second revision)
(Part III/Set l)- 1979 Part III Specific requirements of urinals, Section 1 Slab urinals 140
(second revision)
(Part III/Set 2)- 1979 Part III Specific requirements of urinals, Section 2 Stall urinals 141
(second revision)
(Part V)-1979 Part V Specific requirements of shower trays (second revision) 141
IS ‘: 772-,1973 General requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances 142
(second revision)
IS : 773-,1964 Enamelled cast iron water-closets, railway coaching stock type 142
(second revision)
IS : 774-1971 Flushing cisterns for water-closets and urinals (valveless siphonic 143
type) (third revision)
IS : 77%1970 Cast iron brackets and supports for wash-basins and sinks (second 144
revision)
IS : 781-1977 Cast copper alloy screw-down bib taps and stop valves for water 145
services (second revision)
IS : 782-1978 Caulking lead (third revision) 146
IS : 1711-1970 Self-closing taps (first revision) 146
IS : 1726 Cast iron manhole covers and frames:
(Part II)-1974 Part II Specific requirements of HD circular type (second 148 .
revision)
(Part III)-1974 Part III Specific requirements of HD double triangular type 149
(second revision)
(Part IV)- 1974 Part IV Specific requirements for MD circular type (second 151
revision)
(Part V)- 1974 Part V Specific requirements for MD rectangular type (second 152
revision)
(Part VI/Set I)-1974 Part VI Specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 1 153
Single seal (second revision)
(Part VI/Set 2)-1974 Part VI Specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 2 155
Double seal (second revision)
(Part VII/Set l)- 1974 Part VII Specific requirements for LD square type, Section 1 156
Single seal (second revision) ._
(Part VII/Set 2)-1974 Part VII Specific requirements of LD square type, Section 2 157
Double seal (second revision)
IS : 17951982 Pillar taps for water supply purposes (second revision) 159
IS : 2326-1970 Automatic flushing cisterns for urinals (first revision) 159
IS : 2548-1980 Plastic water-closet seats and covers (third revision) 160
IS : 2556 Vitreous sanitary appliance (vitreous china):
(Part II)-1973 Part II Specific requirements of wash-down water-closets (third 161
revision)
(Part III)-1981 Part III Specific requirements of squatting pans (third 163
revision)
(Part IV)-1972 * Part IV Specific requirements of wash-basins (second revision) 165
(Part V)-1979 Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (second 168 j
revision)
136
SP : 21-1983
Title Page
GENERAL - Contd
IS : 2556-Contd
(Part VI) Part VI Specific requirements of urinals
(Part VI/Set l)-1979 Section 1 Bowl type (third revision) 168
(Part VI/Set 2)-1974 Section 2 Half stall urinals (second revision) 170
(Part VI/Set 3)-1974 Section 3 Squatting plates (second revision) 171
(Part VI/Set 4)-1974 Section 4 Partition slabs (second revision) 172
(Part VI/Set 5)-1974 Section 5 Waste fittings (second revision) 172
(Part VI/Set 6)- 1974 Section 6 Water spreaders for half stall urinals (second 173
revision)
(Part VII)-1973 Part VII Specific ‘requirements of half round channel (second 174
revision)
(Part VIII)-1973 Part VIII Specific requirements of siphonic wash-down ‘water- 175
closets (second revision)
(Part IX)- 1979 Part IX Specific requirements of bidets (third revision) 176
(Part X)- 1974 Part X Specific requirements of foot rests (second revision) 177
(Part XI)- 1979 . Part XI Specific requirements for shower rose Cfirst revision) 177
(Part XII)-1973 Part XII Specific requirements for floor traps 178
(Part XIII)-1973 Part XIII Specific requirements of traps for squatting pans 178
(Part XIV)- 1974 Part XIV Specific requirements for integrated squatting pans 180
(Part XV)-1974 Part XV Specific requirements of universal water-closets 181
IS : 2692-1978 Ferrules for water services (first revision) 182
IS : 2963-1979 Copper alloy waste fittings for wash-basins and sinks (first 182
revision)
IS : 3004-1979 Plug cocks for water supply purposes (first revision) 183
IS : 3311-1979 Waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash-basins (first 183
revision)
IS : 5961-1970 Cast iron gratings for drainage purposes 184
JS : 6411-1972 Gel-coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath tubs 184
IS : 7231-1974 Plastic flushing cisterns (valveless siphonic type) for water-closets 186
and urinals
IS : 8718-1978 Vitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks 187
IS : 8727-1978 Vitreous enamelled steel wash-basins 188
WATER METERS
IS : 779-1978 Water meters (domestic type) (fifth revision) 189
IS : 2104-1981 Water meter boxes (domestic type) (first revision) 190
IS : 2373-1981 Water meters (bulk type) (third revision) 190
PIPES AND FITTINGS

IS : 404 (Part I)-1977 Lead pipes: Part I For other than chemical purposes (second 191
revision)
IS : 407-1981 Brass tubes for general purposes (third revision) 192
IS : 651-1980 Salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (fourth revision) 194
IS : 1230-1979 Cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings (second revision) 195
IS : 1536-1976 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and 196
sewage (second revision)
IS : 1537-1976 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first 197
revision)
IS : 1538 (Parts I Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage 198
to XXIII)-1976 (second revision)
IS : 1729-1979 Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, 200
fittings and accessories (first revision)
IS : 1879 Malleable cast iron pipe fittings (first revision) 202
(Parts I to X)-1975
137 .
SP : 21-1983
Title Page
PIPES AND FITTINGS - Contd

IS : 3006-1979 Chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first 206
revision)
IS : 3076-1968 Low density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies (first 207
revision)
IS : 3486-1966 Cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes 208
IS : 3589-1981 Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (150 to 209
2 000 mm nominal size) (first revision)
IS : 3989-1970 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and 210
ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision)
IS : 4984-1978 High density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage 212
and industrial effluents (second revision)
IS : 49851981 Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (first .212
revision)
IS : 5504-1969 Spiral welded pipes 214
IS : 5531 Cast iron specials for asbestos cement pressure pipes for water, gas 216
(Parts I to III)-1977 and sewage Cfirstrevision)
IS : 6163-1978 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes for water, gas and 218
sewage (first revision)
IS : 6418-,l 971 Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering 219
purposes
IS : 7181- 1974 Horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and 221
sewage
IS : 7834 Injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for
water supplies:
(Part I)-1975 Part I General requirements 222
(Part II)-1975 Part II Specific requirements for 45” elbows 223
(Part III)-1975 Part III Specific requirements for 90” elbows 223
(Part IV)- 1975 Part IV Specific requirements for 90” tees 224
(Part V)- 1975 Part V Specific requirements for 45” tees 225
(Part VI)- 1975 Part VI Specific requirements for sockets 226
(Part VII)-1975 Part VII Specific requirements for unions 227
(Part VIII)-1975 Part VIII Specific requirements for caps 228
IS : 8008 Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for
potable water supplies:
(Part I)-1976 Part I General requirements 228
(Part II)-1976 Part II Specific requirements for 90” bends 229
(Part III)- 1976 Part III Specific requirements for 90” tees 230
(Part IV)-1976 Part IV. Specific requirements ^_.
for reducers . 230
(Part V)-1976 Part V Specific requirements for terrule reducers 231
(Part VI)-1976 Part VI Specific requirements for pipe ends 232
(Part VII)-1976 Part VII Specific requirements for sandwich flanges 233 b.
IS : 8329-1977 Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water, gas 234
and sewage
IS : 8360 Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable
water supplies:
(Part I)- 1977 Part I General requirements 235
(Part II)-1977 Part II Specific requirements for 90” tees 236
(Part III)-1977 Part III Specific requirements for 90” bends 236
IS : 8794-1978 Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure 237
pipes
138
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 77 1 (PART I)- 1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY SANITARY APPLIANCES

PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - General requirements for materials, shall possess an impervious surface. It shall have a
manufacture. finish. methods of test. sampling and high gloss and shall normally be white.
inspection of all glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances.
5. Finish - It shall not show to the unaided eye
blemishes or defects hi’excess of those specified in
2. Material and Manufacture - Fire clay bodies Table 1 of rhe srandard.
are moderately fine. porous. off-white bodies using
natural fire clays. ball clays or stoneware clays and clay 6. Performance - The appliance shall statisfy the
grogs covered by a glaze properly matured and fitted to following performance requirements:
the body. a) Warpage
b) Crazing
c) Wafer absorption - Shall not be more than
3. Minimum Thickness - At any place shall not 15 percent.
be less than 8 mm. d) Thermal shock - Shall not show any sign of
injury.
4. Glazing - All visible surfaces of the body shall e) Chemical resistance - Shall have no loss
be glazed surfaces coming in contact with floor or wall of reflectivity of the glaze.
and the underside, of sinks. etc. may be unglazed. f) Modulus ofrupture - Shall not be less than
20 MPa.
4.1 The glazed shall be uniform, free from craze and g) Resistance to staining and .burning
Note - For test procedures refer to 8 of the srandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part J-1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary
appliances: Part I General requirements (second revision).
139
SP : 21-19817
SUMMARY OF
IS : 77 1 (PART II)-1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY SANITARY APPLIANCES

PARTII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF KITCHEN AND LABORATORY SINKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirement for the pattern, sizes, b) Laboratory sinks 600~400~ 200 mm
construction, dimensions and tolerances of kitchen and 5*x350x 150 mm
laboratory sinks made of fire clay. 450X300X 150 mm
400x250~ 150 mm
2. Requirements
Note - The sinks shall have a circular waste intowhich the
2.1 The general requirements for material, manufac- interior of the sinks shall drain.
ture, methods of test, etc, shall conform to IS : 771 2.3 Tolerances
(Part I)-1979*.
2.2 Sizes On dimensions of 50 mm and over +4 percent
On dimensions less than 50 mm _+2 mm
a) Kitchen sinks 750X450x250 mm
600 X450 X250 mm
500x400x200 mm
*Specification for glazed tire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I

General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part II)-1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary
appliances: Part II Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 771 (PART III/Set l)-1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY SANITARY

APPLIANCES
PART Ill SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS
Section 1 Slab Urinals
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirement for the patterns, sizes, 2.2 Sizes
construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of slab
urinals made of fire-clay. a) Batter slab 1oOOx6Oomm .
1 000 X 450 mm
2. Requirements b) End slab 1OOO’X 360mm
2.1 The general requirements for materials, manu- Note - Shall be manufactured either as a single or two urinals.
The inside surface shall be regular and smooth.
facture, methods of test, sampling and inspection shall
conform to IS : 771 (Part I)-1979*. 2.3 Tolerances
‘Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I On dimensions of 50 mm and over f 4 percent
General requirements (second revision). On dimensions less than 50 mm +2 mm
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part IIUSec I)-1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary
appliances: Part III Specific requirements of urinals, Section 1 Slab urinals (second revision).
140
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
-IS : 771 (PART III/Set 2)-1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY SANITARY

APPLIANCES
PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS
Section 2 Stall Urinals
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for the sizes, construc- Note - The stall urinals may be made in other shapes and
tion, dimensions, iolerances and finish of stall urinals sizes.
made of fire-clay.
2.3 Tolerances
2. Requirements
2.1 For general requirements of materials, manufac- On dimensions of 50 mm and over +4 percent
ture, methods of test, sampling and inspection, refer to On dimensions less than 50 mm k-2 mm
IS : 771 (Part I)-1979*.
2.4 Construction - Shall be manufactured either as
2.2 Size
a single urinal or as a range of two or more urinals. The
1 140X460x400 mm
inside surface shall be regular and smooth throughouk
*Specification for glazed tire-clay sanitary appliances: Part 1 The bottom shall have sufficient slope from the front
General requirements (secotzd rerision ). towards the outlet.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part III/See 2)-1979 Specificatidn for glazed fire-clay sanitary
appliances: Part III Specific requirements sf urinals, Section 2 Stall prinals (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 771 (PART V)-1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY SANITARY

APPLIANCES
PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SHOWER TRAYS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for the pattern, size, con- Note - Shower trays may be made in other shapes and sizes.
struction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of shower
trays made of fire-clay. 2.3 Tolerances
2. Requirements On dimensions of 50 mm and over k4 percent

On dimensions less than 50 mm +2 mm
2.1 The general requirements for material, manufac-
ture, methods of test, sampling and inspection shall
2.4 Construction - The inside surface shall be uni-
conform to IS : 771 (Part I)-1979*.
form and smooth except for grooves provided for skid
resistance. Shower trays shall have a circular waste
2.2 Size
hold into which the interior of tray shall drain.
600~600 (excluding skirting all around)
X 100 mm
-
“Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I
General requirements (second revision )
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part V)-1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary
appliances: Part V Specific requirements of shower trays (second revision).
141
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 772-1973 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ENAMELLED

CAST IRON SANITARY APPLIANCES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - General requirements of material, d) Pinholes - not more than two for coloured
thickness, warpage, enameliing, acid and alkali resis- wares and not more than four for white wares;
tance, inspection rules and marking, for enamelled cast e) Specks - Less than 1 mm and not exceeding 5
iron sanitary appliances like water-closets and com- in number. Specks less than 0.25 mm in size
modes. shall not be treated as defects unless in
2. Requirements - Thickness of cast iron base not sufficient number to form discoIouration; and
less than 6.5 mm. Tolerance +3 percent on specified D Flaw - The number shall not exceed
dimensions. War-page shall not exceed 5 mm per metre Small - 2, MUX
for edges set against wall or floor and 7.5 mm per metre Medium - 22, Max
for other edges. Finishing in vitreous enamel fused to Large - None.
cast iron base; enamel thickness not less than 0.5 mm.
2.1 Defects - Not more than one of the following 3. Tests for Enamel
when examined through inspection window is
permitted: a) Enamel shall be of acid and alkali resisting
a) Crazing; quality.
d) Dimples, rundown, sagging; b) Abrasion test - Shall withstand test for resis-
c) Blisters - not more than on interior tance to scratching by Powder No.5 (on Moh’s
surface; Scale).
Nobe-For test procedures refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast
iroh sanitary appliances (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
..
IS : 773-1964 ENAMELLED CAST IRON WATER-CLOSETS,
RAILWAY COACHING STOCK TYPE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for material, workman- 20 mm diameter threaded nipple fixed to threaded hole
ship, manufacture, dimensions and finish of enamelled cast in the body of the water-closet and secured by a
cast iron railway type water-closets generally used in check nut. Inlet shall protrude out at least by 25 mm
the coaching stock of the Indian Railways. (see also Fig. 1).
2. Requirements - Shall be of one piece construc- 3. Finish - Inside and outside surfaces of each
tion. Bottom flange shall not be less than 10 mm thick, fixture shall be coated with vitreous enamel thoroughly
and shall be provided with not less than 6 holes of fixed to the cast iron base. Shall be uniform, non-
6.5 mm diameter. Inlet or supply horn shall consist of crazing, free from discolouration and impervious.
142
SP : 21-1983
OVERALL
HEIGHf=475 mm
HEIGHT ABOVE
FLOOR = 350 mm
l- 9 6*5,6 HOLES
Note-Tolerance + 3 percent on specified dimensions limited to 5 mm.
All dimensions m millimetres
Fig. I Enameled Cast Iron Water-Closet
Note l-For general requirements refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary
appliances (second revision).
Note 2 -For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 773-1964 Specificat& for enameled c@t iron water-closets, railway
coaching stock type (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 774-1971 FLUSHING CISTERNS FOR WATER-CLOSETS

AND URINALS (VALVELESS SIPHONIC TYPE)
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, con- respectively. The body of pressed steel cistern
struction, operation and testing of manually operated shall be of seamless or welded construction.
high-level and low-level, valveless siphonic action The thickness of body and cover shall not be
type sanitary flushing cisterns for water-closets and less than 1.6 mm and 1.3 mm respectively
urinals. before coating, and shall be porcelain enamel-
led or otherwise protected against corrosion.
2. Terminology The outlet of each siphon or stand pipe shall be
securely connected to the cistern by means of
2.1 High Level Cistern - Minimum height between lock nut made of copper base alloys, hot-dipped
top of pan and underside of cistern, 125 cm. galvanized steel or hot-dipped galvanized mal-
leable iron.
2.2 Law Level Cistern - Maximum height between b) Cover - Shall be of the same material as the
top of pan and underside of cistern, 30 cm.
body.
2.3 Coupled Cistern - Cisterns intended to operate c) Flush Pipe - Steel tube, lead pipe, copper
sitting on flat surface provided at the back portion of alloy pipe, polyethylene pipe, unplasticized
siphonic wash down w ater-ciosets , PVC pipe, or smooth bore cast iron pipe.
Diameter 32 + 1 mm for high-level and
3. Material and Construction 38 + 1 mm for lowllevel cistern. Minimum
thickness 1 mm for steel and 3.5 mm for lead
a) Cistern - Thickness of the body including
pipe.
cover shall be not less than .5,6 and 13 mm for
cast iron, vitreous china and fire-clay cisterns Note - No flush pipe will be required for a coupled cistern.
143
SP : 21-1983
d) Bolts, Nuts, Chain -Galvanized steel, non- b) Discharge rate - 5 lines with
ferrous metal or other corrosion resisting mate- a tolerance of
rial. Chain shall sustain dead load of 50 kg +0.5 litre in
without deformation of links. 3 seconds
e) Ball Valve - Diameter 15 mm.
f) Lever - Shall not project greater than 35 cm ci Working water -Min 6.5 cm
measured from the centre of the cistern to the level below effective
end of the lever. top edge
g) OverJlow Pipe - Not less than20mm bore for of cistern
high-level and low-level cistern and 15 mm for
coupled cistern. Shall incorporate mosquito- d) Discharge shall operate when cistern is filled
1 cm below working water level.
proof device.
4. Operation e) Endurance - Components
test shall not show
a) Discharge - 5, 10 and 12.5 damage or
capacity litres; Tolerance defects after
+ 0.5 litre 3 000 operations
Note-For method of test refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 774-1971 Specification for flushing cisterns for water-closets and
urinals (valveless siphonic type) (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 775- 1970 CAST IRON BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

FOR WASH-BASINS AND SINKS
(Second Revisiorz)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, con- j) Built-in single rail type brac- 2.0
struction, workmanship, dimensions, weights and ket for wash basin
finish of cast iron brackets and supports
-_ for wash basins k) Built-in cantilever type 1.5
and sinks. bracket for wash basin
m) Wall fixing single rail type 1.2
2. Types and Weights
bracket for wash basin
Weight n) Wall fixing cantilever type 1.0
kg bracket for wash basin
a>Cantilever support for sink 1.8 P) Strap and leg support with
1.8 front towel rail for wash As mutually . ..
b) Recessed cantilever support
for sink basin agreed
cl Wall fixing bracket for sink 2.7

4 Wall fixing bracket with 27 3. Construction and Workmanship
recess for sink
Brackets for building into wall shall include a
e) Strap and leg support for sink lugged portion, and a flange at bottom to indi-
0 Strap and leg support with 1.8 cate wall line. Lugged portion shall be slotted.
recess for sink b) Brackets for screwing to wall shall have back
g) Bracket and leg support for 1.8 fixing plate.
sink c) Supports with horizontal strap and supporting
h) Bracket and leg support with 2.0 leg, or cast iron brackets with supporting leg
recess for sink shall be arranged for wall fixing. Leg support
144
SP : 21-1983
shall be 15 mm bore steel tube or casting and 4. Finish - Painted. galvanized or porcelain
shall terminate in a flahge for fixing to floor. enamelled. For hospital use, chromium plated or
porcelain enamelled.
d) Strap or bracket and supporting leg shall be
made separately.
Note-For dimensions and figures refer to the standard.
For detailed information, rej2r to IS : 77.5-1970 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash-
basins and sinks (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 781- 1977 CAST COPPER ALLOY SCREW-DOWN BIB TAPS

AND STOP VALVES FOR WATER SERVICES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, 4. Dimensions - Overall length of stop valves is as

dimensions, construction, workmanship, finish and given below:
testing of cast copper alloy screw-down bib taps and
Nominal Size Overall Length
stop valves for water services. mm , n \
2. Nominal Sizes Internally Externally
a) Bip taps - 8, 10, 15, 20 and 25 mm. Threaded Threaded
b) Stopvalves - 8,10,15,20,25,32,40and mm mm
50 mm. 8 45 65
3. Materials 10 50 75
15 60 85
a) Body, body Cast brass, leaded 20 70 100
components and tin bronze 25 85 125
washer plate 32 100 135
I 40 110 145
b) Spindle, glands, Brass rod (extruded 50 135 175
handles, washer or rolled)
plates, nuts, etc. Tolerance - + 3 mm.
_-
Note - For detailed dimensions of bib taps, stop valves and
c) Washers Fibre, leather, rubber components refer to the standard.
asbestos composition
5. Tests - Shall withstand minimum internal
d) Gland packing Asbestos or similar hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa for at least 2 minutes
material without leakage or sweating.
-
For detailed information, refer to .IS : 781-1977 Specification for cast copper alloy screw-down bib taps
and stop valves fur water services (second revision).
145
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 782- 1978 CAULKING LEAD

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for different types of capable of being easily caulked.
caulking lead suitable for use in water supply and b) Lead Wool - Free from sulphur. Shall consist
sanitary installations. of fine strands or plaited ribbons. Section not
lessthan0.13mmandnotmorethan0.9mm.
2. Types
,
a) Pig Lead - Used in caulking joints in gas, c>Lead Yarn - Free from sulphur. Shall consist
of tine strands of plaited ribbons. Cross section
water and sewer lines, where it is possible to
of individual strand shall be triangular. Section
use cast lead caulking.
not less than 0.13 mm and not more than
b) Lead Wool and Lead Yarn - Used in caulking 0.9 mm.
joints in gas, water and sewer lines where it is
impracticable to use cast lead (such as inverted 4. Packing
joints, under water joints, etc). Such joints will
withstand greater displacement than cast lead a) Pig lead in pigs of 35 kg + 10 percent, each or
joints. linked ingots.
b) Lead wool and lead yarn, in the form of ropes
packed in wax paper or polythene sheets and
3. Material and Quality finally put in polythene lined hessian bags to
a) Pig Lead - Shall be of uniform softness and prevent oxidation of lead.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 782-1978 Specification for caulking lead (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1711- 1970 SELF-CLOSING TAPS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding nominal sixes, c) Force required for operation shall not exceed
material, manufacture and workmanship, design, con- 7 kgf.
struction, finish, testing and marking of self-closing d) Device which closes tap without release of
taps with or without stuffing box. handle after discharge of a fixed quantity may
be incorporated.
2. Nominal Sizes - 15 mm and 20 mm.
4. Material
3. Design a) Body, cover, lever Cast iron, malleable

or push button iron castings, cast
a) Concussive push-button type for heads not brass, leaded tin
exceeding 2 m. bronze
b) Non-concussive type. b) Spindle Mild steel, gun metal
146
SP : 21-1983
c) Spindle spring Phosphor bronze wire, 5. Tests

copperized spring
steel wire, or any 5.1 Shall withstand internal hydraulic pressure of
corrosion resisting 20 kgf/cm2, for a minimum period of 2 minutes without
alloy having tensile leakage or sweating.
strength not less than
that of phosphor 5.2 Endurance Test - Shall not show leakage or
bronze wire failure of spring or other parts after 50 000 operations.
d) Cage and valve Leaded tin bronze
e) Seat washers Synthetic rubber
f) Other washers and Vulcanized fibre, brass
gaskets or any other equally
suitable material
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1711-1970 Specification for self-closing taps (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART I)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES
. (Second Revision)
1. Scope -General requirements for cast iron and warping.
manhole covers and frames intended for use in drain- c) Shall have raised chequered design to provide
age and water works. non-slip grip. Rise of chequer not less than
4 mm.
2. Grades and Types d) Lifting key and key holes shall be provided.
Heavy Duty (HO) - for use in heavy vehicular e) Shall be coated with a material having base
with a black bituminous composition. Coating
traffic conditions.
shall not flow when exposed to 63°C and shall
Medium Duty (MD) - for use under light traffic
not be so brittle as to chip of at 0°C.
conditions, such as footpaths and cycle tracks.
f) Shall withstand without fracture following
Light Duty (LO) - for use in domestic premises
loads for minimum period of 30 seconds, when
or places not subjected to wheeled traffic loads.
subjected to the prescribed test:
HD - Double triangular or circular
3. Requirements - 35 tonnes
a) Shall be of grey cast iron. MD - Circular or rectangular - 5 tonnes
b) Shah befreefrom air and sand holes, cold shuts LD - Rectangular or square - 1 tonne
Note-For method of test refer to the sfandwd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron hanhole covers and
frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
147
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART II)- 1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF HD CIRCULAR TYPE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimen- 3. Minimum Weights

sions and tolerances, weights and marking of heavy
Clear Weight of Weight of
duty circular type manhole covers and frames.
Opening Cover Frame
2. Dimensions and Tolerances - For dimensions mm kg kg
and tolerances see Fig. 1.
500 85 85
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to rhe standard. 560 108 100
._
* E 4
PLAN (WITH HALF COVER REMOVED)
A c E
Lz .E YZ
560 660 8 10
Tolerances +5 +3 f3
Fig. 1 Heavy Duty Circular Cover and Frame
148
SP : 21-1983
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-ho!es and key, refer to
IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part II)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and
frames: Part II Specific requirements of HD circular type (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART III)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES
PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF HD DOUBLE TRIANGULAR TYPE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimen- 3. Minimum Weights

sions and tolerances, weights and marking of heavy
duty double triangular type manhole covers and Clear Weight of Weight of
frames. Opening Cover Frame
mm kg kg
2. Dimensions and Tolerances - For dimensions
and tolerances see Fig. 1. 500 118 111
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to the srandard. 560 140 115
149
SP : 21-1983
DEPTH OF FRAME = 150 l 2 mm

RECESSES FOR DIRT BUCKET 22mm DIA CORED HOLES
RETAINING BAR IN EACH SEATING IN COVERS
T
. E
A C E
mm mm mm
500 530 780

560 580 810
Tolerances +5 +4 +3
Fig. I Heavy Duty Double Triangular Solid Type Cover and Frame
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to
IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requkements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part III,)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and
frames: Part III Specific requirements of HD double triangular type (second revision).
150
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART IV) - 1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES
PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR MD CIRCULAR TVPE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, di- 3. Minimum Weights

mensions , tolerances, weights and marking’of medium
duty (MD) circular type manhole covers and frames. Clear Weight of Weight of
Opening Cover Frame
mm kg kg
and tolerances see Fig. 1.
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to the 500 58 58
standard. 560 64 64
REGlSt ER PRIZING DEPTH OF
SLOT FRAME= 100+2 mm
--/
I
E I
PLAN CWITH HALF COVER REMOVED>
A c E
mm mm mm
500 580 710
560 630 760
Tolerances +5 +3 f3
Fig. 1 Medium Duty Circular Cover and Frame
151
SP : 21-1983
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship. sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to
IS : 1726 (Part I)-1971 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part 1 General requirements (second wvision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part IV)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and
frames: Part IV Specific requirements for MD circular type (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART V)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES
PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS .FOR MD RECTANGULAR TYPE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, di- 2. Dimensions and Tolerances - For dimensions
mensions, tolerances, weights and marking of medium and tolerances see Fig. 1.
duty (MD) rectangular type manhole covers and
frames. Note - For detailed dimtnsbns refer to the standard.
OPENING FOR COVER ‘C’
CLEAR OPENING ‘A’
, E --
DEPTH OF FRAME = 160 mm
PLAN
ABCDEF
mm mm mm mm mm mm
610 455 685 530 840 685
Tolerances +5 +5 $3 +3 +3 +3
Fii. I Medium Duty Rectangular Cover and Frame
152
SP : 21-1983
3.. Wnimum Weight - Cover 80 kg. and Frame 64 kg.
%ote-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing. key-holes and key, refer to
IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole colers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part V)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and
frames: Part V Specific requirements for MD rectangular type (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART VI/SEC l)- 1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LD RECTANGULAR TYPE
Section 1 Single Seal
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimen- and frames.

sions, tolerances, -weights and marking of light duty
2. Patterns - Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 (see Fig. 1
(LD) rectangular type with single seal manhole covers
and 2).
c PLAN
OPENING
(WITH
FOR
HALF
COVER
COVER
‘c’
REMOVED)
.
Fig. 1 Light L3ut.y Single Seal Rectangular Cover and Frame (Pattern 1)
I53
SP : 21-1983
OPENING FOR COVER ‘C’
CLEAR OPENING ‘A’
-1
* CLEAR OPENING ‘8’ -
DEPTH OF FRAME =30*2 mm

Fig. 2 Light Duty Single Seal Rectangular Cover and Frame (Pattern 2)
3. Dimensions and Tolerances - For dimensions 4. Minimum Weights

and tolerances see Fig. 1 and 2.
We ABCDEF Type Weight Weight
mm mm mm mm mm mm of Cover of Frame
Pattern 1 455 610 685 530 710 560 kg kg
Pattern 2 455 610 675 525 695 545 Pattern 1 23 15
Tolerances +5 +5 +3 +3 f3 +3 Pattern 2 15 10 . ..
Note - For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer
to IS .: 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part 1 General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part VI/Set 11-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole
covers and frames: Part VI For specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 1 Single seal (second
revision).
154
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF \
IS : 1726 (PART VI/SEC 2)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES
PART W SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LD RECTANGULAR TYPE
Section 2 Double Seal
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of materials, dimen- 2. Dimensions and Tolerances - For dimensions

sions, tolerances, weights and marking of light duty and tolerances see Fig. 1.
(LD) rectangular type with double seal manhole covers
and frames. Note-For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.
EAR OPENING ‘A’
HEAD OF SCREW 3mh FIXING PARS 13mm

BELOW SURFACE OF THICK ON BOTTOM
COVER OF INSIDE OF FRAME
DEPTH OF FRAME =40+2mm

Thickness of frame = 40 + 2 mm
‘A B C D E F
mm mm mm mm mm mm
455 610 145 590 775 620
Tolerances +5 +5 +3 +3 f3 -+3
Fig. I Light Duty Double Seal Rectangular Cover and Frame
155
SP : 21-1983
3. Minimum Weight - Cover 29 kg, and Frame 23 kg.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling. testing, key-holes and key. refer to
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part VI/Set 2)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole
covers and frames: Part VI Specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 2 Double seal (second
revision).
. SUMMARY OF
1s : 1726(PART VII/SEC i)-1974

CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS
ANDFRAMES
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS F&I LD SQUARE TYPE .
Section 1. Single Seal
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements OF materials, dimen- 3. Minimum Weights

sions, tolerances, weights’and marking of light duty
square type with single seal manhole covers and Clear Weight of Weight of
frames. Opening Cover Frame
mm kg kg
2. -b&ensions and Tolerances (in mm) - For
dimensions and tolerances see Fig: 1. 455 13 7
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to the standard. 610 25 13
156
SP : 21-1983
ABCDEF
mm mm mm mm mm mm
455 455 495 495 530 530
610 610 680 680 715 715
Tolerances +5 +5 +3 f3 +3 +3
Fig. I Light Duty Single Seul Cover and Frame (Square Type)
.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part VII/Set I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole
covers and frames: Part VII Specific requirements for LD square type, Section I Single seal (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART VII/SEC 2)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE COVERS

AND FRAMES . ..
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LD SQUARE TYPE
Section 2 Double Seal
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of materials,. dimen- 3. Minimum Weights
sions, tolerances, weights and marking of light duty
Clear Weight of Weight of
square type with double seal manhole covers and
Opening Cover Frame
frames.
mm kg kg
and tolerances see Fig. 1. 455 23 15
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to the srandard. 610 37 18
157
SP : 21-1983
WLEAR OPENING
*FRAME OPENING
DEPTH OF FRAME=40+2 mm
A BCDEF
mm mm mm mm mm mm
455 455 565 565 600 600
610 610 700 700 740 740
Tolerances ’ +5 +5 +3 +3 f3 +3
Fig. I Light Duty Double Seal Cover and Frame
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part VII/Set 2)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole
covers and frames: Part VII Specific requirements for LD square type, Section 2 Double seal (second
revision).
158
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1795- 1982 PILLAR TAPS FOR WATER SUPPLY PURPOSES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, 4. Construction
manufacture and workmanship, construction, finish
and testing of pillar taps (draw-off top). 4.1 For detailed dimensions of body, backnut,
2. Nominal Sizes - 15 mm and 20 mm. bonnet and gland, capstan head, spindle and
washerplate, and screw threads, refer to the standard.
3. Materials
a) Body, body Cast brass or leaded tin 4.2 Anti-splash device shall be fitted, if required.
components, bronze
capstan head 5. Finished Mass - Minimum .finished mass of
and washer plate 15 mm and 20 mm size pillar taps shall be 650 g and
b) Spindle, gland, Brass rod (extruded or
1175 g respectively.
washer plate rolled) or brass
and nut
c) Washer Synthetic or natural 6. Finish - Shall be nickel-chromium plated. Shall
vulcanized rubber, be capable of taking high polish.
vegetable tanned
hydraulic leather, 7. Testing - Shall withstand internally applied
high density poly- hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20 kgf/cm*) for 2 minutes
ethylene, vulcanized without leaking or sweating.
fibre.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1795-1974 Specification for pillar taps for water supply purposes
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2326- 1970 AUTOMATIC FLUSHING CISTERNS FOR URINALS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, b) Depth - Minimum clearance above- highest
nominal sizes, construction and performance require- water level -25 mm.
ments for automatic flushing cisterns of the type used c) Siphonic Apparatus
for flushing urinals. 1) Material - Copper, or other non-ferrous
metal, or cast iron protected against corro-
2. Nominal Size - 5, 10 and 15 litres. Tolerance sion.
20.5 litre. Minimum capacity = 2.5 litres per urinal 2) Minimum thickness of copper siphon -
served. Spun or pressed domes, 0.9 mni; Fabricated
domes, 0.56 mm; Internal parts, 0.45 mm;
3. Materials - Cast iron; glazed earthenware; and Copper bottom, 0.9 mm (1.25 mm for
brass bottom).
vitreous china or pressed steel or other approved
impervious material. 3) Outlet connection - 25 mm.
d) Lid - Shall be mosquito-proof.
4. Construe tion 5. Performance Requirements for Siphons

a) Body thi<knessnotlessthan5,6and 13mmfor a) Shall deliver not more than 2.5 litres per urinal
cast iron, vitreous china and earthenware at intervals of 10 to 20 minutes.
respectively. Minimum thickness 1.6 mm for b) Shall discharge at rateof not less than 5 litres in
pressed steel which shall be porcelain enamel- 7 seconds when fitted with straight open ended
led or otherwise protected against corrosion. flush pipe 20 mm bore and 90 cm long.
159
SP : 21-1983
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2326-1970 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals.
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2548- 1980 PLASTIC WATER-CLOSET SEATS AND COVERS

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, e) Seats shall have smooth finish and shall be
manufacture, dimensions, finish and testing of plastic non-absorptive and free from cracks or
seats and covers for use with water closets. crevices.
80 TO 100 mm WIDTH OF
2. Materials - Made of phenolic plastics, poly- OPENING FOR OPEN FRONT SEAT_
styrene; ureaformaldehyde or polypropylene. RUBBER OR PLASTIC POSITION

BUFFER7 OF COVER
/ /
3. Manufacture
a) Underside of seat may be flat or recessed. Seat
may be closed or open front mattem (see
Fig. 1).
b) Material for Hinging Device
Type A - Copper alloys with nickel chromium
plating (bronze or brass); stainless steel;
aluminium alloy (with anodic coating); zinc
base alloy (with nickel chromium plating);
and suitable plastic (with reinforcement).
Type B - Mild steel (with nickel chromium Note-Minimum thickness of cover/seat shall be 3 mm.
plating); aluminium alloy (with anodic coat-
ing); and suitable plastic (with reinforcement). All dimensions in millimetres
c) Boltsfor Hinging Device - 65 mm, minimum Fig. I Plastic Cover and Seat
shank length. L
d) Buffers - Plastic or rubber; not less than 3 of 4. Strength - Shall withstand load of 1 150 N at
size 25 X 40 X 10 mm for full-round seats ’ specified locations for 30 minutes without any damage
and not less than 4 for open-front seats. or permanent distortion.
Note l-For detailed dimensions refer to 4 of the stundard.
Note 2-For procedure for load test for strength refer to 5.2 of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2548-1980 Specification for plastic water-closet seats and covers
(third revision).
160
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART I)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
(Second Revision)
1. Scope -General requirements for materials, maximum specified warpage (see Tables 1 to 3 of the
manufacture, methods of test, inspection and marking standard) shall not slide under the appliance without
of all vitreous sanitary appliances. force.
2. MininmumThickness - Not less than 6 mm at 4.3 Crazing - None of test pieces shall show
any place in an appliance. crazing.
4.4 Water Absorption - Not exceeding 0.5 percent
3. Glazing - All surfaces of the body visible after
(average) and 0.75 percent (individual).
installation shall be glazed. Glazing shall be uniform,
free from craze and impervious. Lead content shall not 4.5 Chemical Resistance - No loss of reflectivity
exceed 5 percent of soluble lead in case of glazes of glaze when compared with the control sample.
containing lead.
4.6 Modulus of Rupture - Not less than 350 kgfl
4. Performance Requirements cm2 (averageof lOsamples). Individual testvalue shall
not vary more than IfI20 percent of mean value.
4.1 Permissible Blemishes and Defects - Refer to
4.7 Resistance to Staining and Burning - No stain
Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.
shall remain on eitherof test pieces when tested accord-
4.2 Warpage - Feeler gauge of thickness equal to ing to prescribed method.
Note-For test procedures see 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART II)- 1981 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASH-DOWN WATER-CLOSETS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, patterns, a) Pattern I- Height 390 mm, front and rear
sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances, finish (see Fig. 1);
and marking for vitreous wash-down water-closets. b) Pattern 2 - Height 390. mm, front and rear
(see Fig. 2).
2. Requirements
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to the
2.1 Patterns and Sizes standurd.
161
SP : 21-1983
WEION =3SO
Fig. 1 Water-Closet (Pattern I)
Fig. 2 Water-Closet (Pattern 2)
I
2.2 Each water-closet shall have atleast 2 floor fixing 2.5 Anti-siphonage vent horn (50 mmkfin dia) set at
holes of 6.5 mm minimum diameter. an angle of 45”, where required by local sanitation
authority.
2.3 Flushing rim may be boxed or open type. Flush-
ing rim and inlet shall be self-draining type. 2.6 Test - For flushing testkequirementssee 2.6 of
the standard.
2.4 Integral trap P or S type. For P-trap, slope of
outlet shall be 14” below the horizontal.
Note-For general requirements refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part II)-1981 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part II Specific requirements of wash-down water-closets (third revision).
162
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART III)-1981 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SQUATTING PANS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, patterns 2.3 Pan of 630 mm should be of box rim type. Flush-
and sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances, ing rim and inlet shall be of self-draining type.
finish and marking for squatting pans. 2.4 Trap with P or S outlet (with or without an
inspection vent) for long and Orissa pattern when
2. Requirements specified. The trap shall conform to IS : 2556
2.1 Patterns and Sizes (Part XII)- 1973*.
2.5 Inside of bottom of pans shall have sufficient
a) Long - 580 and 630 mm (see Fig. 1). slope from front towards outlet to enable quick dis-
b) Orissa - 580 x 440 mm and 630 x 450 mm
posal while flushing.
(see Fig. 2).
c) Rural - 425 mm (see Fig. 3). 2.6 Test - For flushing testjrequirementssee 2.6 of
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to the the standard.
standard.
*Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
2.2 Each pan except rural pattern shall have an integ- china): Part XIII Specific requirements of traps for squatting
ral flushing rim of suitable type. pans.
I- 610 / 660 -~_170+5
TO 320
TO 340
580/ 630
Fig. 1 Long Pattern Squatting Pan
163
SP : 21-1983
HEIGHT
Fig. 2 Orissa Pattern Squatting Pan
HEIGHT = 275
Fig. 3 Rural Pattern Squatting Pan
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part III)-1981 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part ZZI Specific requirements of squatting pans (third revision).
164
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART IV) - 1972 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASH-BASINS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for material, patterns and Note-For detailed dimensions and tolermces refer to he
sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances for vit- smndard.
reous wash basins. 2.2 One piece construction including combined
overflow and soap holder. Those installed in surgeon’s
2. Requirements room and operation theatre shall not be provided with
2.1 Patterns and Sizes soap holder recess and combined overflow.
a) Flat back - 660 X 460 mm (Surgeon’s basin) 2.3 Waste hole of minimum 65 mm diameter (over-
(see Fig. 1) all) and 10 mm depth.
2.4 Slot type overflow area not less than 5 cm2 and
4::: modem (seeFig.2 and 3)
area of overhow channel 4 cm2, minimum.
4
450~ 300 mm (see Fig. 4)
2.5 Glazed pedestal, if specified, shall be so de-
b) Angle back - 600 X 480 mm (see Fig. 5) signed that height from floor to top of basin rim is 75 to
400 X 400 mm (see Fig. 6) 80 cm.
PO0 min.-/ ~28 So OR 35e
HEIGHT s 200min.
+CENTRE 0F BRACKET OF srum+

(6101
660
Fig. I Fiat Back Wash Basin (Surgeon’s Basin)
165
SP : 21-1983
I HEIGHT = 290 max.
I
I / I \ L I-
I
0
z
L
I-- CENTRE OF BRACKET STUDS 40x15 mm x DEPTH

SUFFICIENT TO
580/500 TAKE 5mm STUD
k= 6301550 -------I
All dimensions in mlilimetrer.
Fig. 2 Flat Back Wash Basin with Two Tap Holes

35 mm + OR 29 mm SO TAP HOLE
(ALTERNATIVELY TWO TAP HOLES
AT A DISTANCE OF 200 TO 225mm
C/C MAY BE PROVIDED)
HEIGHT = 290 max
-40 x 15mm x.DEPTH SUFFICIENT

CENTRE OF BRACKET
5801500
STUDS
--I_
All dimensions in millimerres.
TO TAKE 5mm STUD
Fig. 3 Flat Back Wash Basin with Single Tap Hole
ALTERNATIVF
7 POSITION5
7 300
Fig. 4
All dimensions in millimetrec.
Flat Back Wash Basrn with Single Tap Hole (Size 450 x 300 mm)
1 HEIGHT = 225 max.
166
SP : 21-1983
LBOmm
I
HEIGHT = 290 mm max.
1
--600mm~
Fig. 5 Angle Back WaFhBasin (Pattern I)
SOAP RECESS
HEIGHT = 200 mm max.
+ 4OOmm ____I 1
Fig. 6 Angle Back Wash Basin (Pattern 2)
General requirements (.wcond revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part IV)-1972 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part IV Specific requirements of wash basins (second revision).
167
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART V)-1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF LABORATORY SINKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns and On dimensions less than 50 mm I!I 2 mm
sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances of On diameter of waste hole +3mm
laboratory sinks.
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to dte standard
2. Requirements
2.2 With or without overflow arrangements.
2.1 Patterns and Sizes
2.3 Waste hole 65 mm diameter minimum and
400 x 250 x 150 mm (LX B x H) 10 mm depth.
450 X 300 X 150mm
500 x 350 x 150 mm 2.4 Shall be provided with rim, when specified.
600
600 xx 400
450 xx 200
200 mm
mm 2.5 Waste fitting of glazed vitreous ware shall be
provided, when specified.
2.1.1 Tolerances
On dimensions 50 mm and over f4 percent
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part V)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART VI/SEC l)- 1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS
Section 1 Bowl Type
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, On dimensions less than +2 mm .
sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish 50 mm
of bowl type urinals made of vitreous china. On all angles f3”
2. Requirements
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to rhe standard.
a) Flat back - 430 mm, Min X260 mm, Min 2.2 One piece construction with integral flushing
X350 mm, Min (see Fig. 1); and box rim with minimum of 12 holes.
b) Angle back - 340 mmX410 mm, Min
x 265 mm, Min (see Fig.2). 2.3 Not less than 2 fixing holes on each side of
minimum diameter of 6.5 mm.
2.1.1 Tolerances:
On dimensions 50 mm +4 percent 2.4 When installed there shall be no liquid left over
and over in the bottom of the pan of the urinal after flushing.
168
SP : 21-1983
2, 63mm (p min. HOLES

ON EACH SIDE
PROJECTION = 260mm min.
Fig. I Bowl Pattern Urinal (Flat Back)
HEIGHT = 340 mm
Fig. 2 Bowl Pattern Urinal (Angle Back)
Note-For general requirements refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china):
Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI/See l)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary
appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals,Section 1 Bowl type (third revision).
169
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART VI/SEC 2)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS .
Section 2 Half Stall Urinals
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, 2.1.1 Tolerance
sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish On dimensions 50 mm and over f4 percent.
of half stall urinals made of vitreous china.
Note - Fir detailed dimensions refer to rhe s&zndard.
2. Requirements
a) Flat back - 580~ 380% 350 mm, Min
450 x 350x 300 mm, Min (see Fig. 1)
b) Angle back - 580X400X500 mm, Min
450x 375 x 350 mm, Min (see Fig. 2) * 500/350
PROJECTION
t--- 380135d
.----Dj

PROJECTION 8 350/300
Fig. 2 Half Stall Angle Back Urinal
2.2 One piece construction with or without integral

flushing box rim. Those without such rim shall have
ridges in sides of interior of bowl to divert water
towards front Iip. Where specified, the waste fittings
All dimensions in millimetres. shall be glazed vitreous ware.
Fig. 1 Half Stall Flat Back Urinal 2.3 Shall satisfy test for cleanability.
Note 1-For test procedure see 2.5 of the standard. . .
Note 2-For general requirements refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china):
Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VUSec 2)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary
appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 2 Half stall urinals (second
revision).
170
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF

(VITREOUS CHINA)
Section 3 Squatting Plates
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, On dimensions 50 mm +4 percent

sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish and over
of squatting plates made of vitreous china.
b

2. Requirements
.
2.1 Patterns and Sizes 2.2 One piece construction.
600 x 350 mm 2.3 Integral longitudinal flushing pipe, to be con-

(see Fig. 1)
450 X 350.mm nected to flush pipe.
3
2.1.1 Tolerances
On dimensions less than f2 mm 2.4 Integral flushing pipe connected to sump by three
50 mm 13 mm dia holes.
Fig. 1 Squatting Plate Urinal
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI/See 3)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary
appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 3 Squatting plates (second
revision).
171
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF

(VITREOUS CHINA)
Section 4 Partition Slabs
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requiements regarding sizes, con- 2.1.1 Tolerance

stmction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of parti-
tion slabs made of vitreous china for urinals. On dimensions 50 mm and over 3-4 percent.
.
2. Requirements
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to tie srundurd.
2.1 Sizes and Dimensions (mm) 2.2 Shall be one piece construction and with fixing
Size Height Width (Min) arrangement at the flatback top. Shall alsobeprovided
mm X mm X mm mm with countersunk hole at the bottom end.
825 x 450 x 100 825 z-z
675 x 325 x 85 675 Min 325
appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals,Section 4 Partition slabs (second
revision).
SUMMARY OF

(VITREOUS CHINA)
Section 5 Waste Fittings
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, sizes, 2.1.1 Tolerances
construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of On dimensions less than +2 mm
waste fittings made of vitreous china for urinals. 50 mm .
On dimensions 50 mm +4 percent
2. Requirements and over
2.1 Patterns and Sizes 2.2 One piece construction. Adequate number of
Overall length =95mm holes (each 8 mm dia) for efficient drainage.
Outside dia of cylindrical = 40mm
portion 2.3 Finish - Holes of domical portion visible after
Dia of domical portion = 62 mm,Mau installation shall be glazed externally.
For detailed information, refer to Is : 2556 (Part VI/See 5)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitaty appliances
(vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 5 Waste fittings (second revision).
172
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF

(VITREOUS CHINA)
Section 6 Water Spreaders for Half Stall Urinals
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, 2.1.1 Tolerances

manufacture and wokmanship, nominal sizes and di-
mensions and finish of vitreous china spreader for use On dimentions less than +2 mm
in conjunction with half stall urinals complying witi 50 mm
IS : 2556 (Part VI/Set 2)-1974’. On dimensions 50 mm -+4 percent
and over
2. Requirements
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to the smndard.
2.1 Shape, Size and Dimensions
Overall size =95 X 95 X 67 mm

(width x height x depth) 2.2 One piece construction with integial flush inlet.
Not less than 2 fixing holes, each minimum 6.5 mm
diameter. Interior of flush inlet horn shall not be
china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 2 Half glazed. Bottom of spreader shall have sufficient slope
stall urinals (second revision). with adequate number of holes for efficient flushing.
appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 6 Water spreaders for half
stall urinals (second revision).
173
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART VII)-1973 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

. (VITREOUS CHINA)
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF HALF ROUND CHANNEL
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, shape and Depth - 85 mm for type A and 60 mm for type B.
sizes, dimensions and tolerances for half-round chan-
Note - Other shapes and sizes by mutual agreement.
nel made of vitreous china.
2.2 Tolerances
2. Requirements On dimensions 50 mm and over f 4 percent
2.1 Shapes, Sizes and Dimensions - Shall be plain, On dimensions less than 50 mm f 2 mm.
with socket, or with stop end, and shall have 50 mm
internal radius: Note - For detailed dimensions refer to pclestundard.
Length - 300 or 600 mm 2.3 Finish - Shall have uniform smooth glazed and
Width - 150 mm impervious surface.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI&1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part VII Specific requirements of harf round channel (second revision).
..
174
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART VIII)-1973 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART VIII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SIPHONIC WASH-DOWN
WATER-CLOSETS
(Second Revision)
,
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material,
patterns, flushing cistern, dimensions, test method,
tolerances and finish of siphonic wash-down water-
closets of vitreous china.
WIDTH OF CLOSET [min.) = 340
2. Requirements
2.1 Patterns
a) Double trap pattern with ‘S’ or ‘P’ trap (see
Fig. 1).
b) Single trap pattern with ‘S’ or ‘P’ trap (see
Fig. 1).
Other agreed patterns permissible. Depth of each
seal for trap, n,ot less than 50 mm.
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to tie

standard.
2.2 Low level type flushing cistern; discharge capa-

city not less than 10 litres. Discharge rate test shall not
be applicable.
2.3 For flushing test/requirements see 2.4 of the

standard. * \ Fig. 1 Siphonic Wash-Down Water-Closet
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VIII)-1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part VIII Specific requirements of siphonic wash-down water-closets (second revision).
175
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART IX)-1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART IX SPECIFIC REQUlREMEilTS OF BIDETS
( fhird Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, permissible; but tolerances, distance between tap
shape and size, construction of vitreous bidets. holes, dimensions of spray hole and waste hole shall be
,
as soecified in rhe standard.
2. Requirements
2.1 Shape and Size - Made in 3 sizes as large,
medium and small (see Fig. 1). Other agreed sizes 2.2 Shall be provided with flushing rims.
150 min.-
Size A B Height G
Win)
Large 600 f 10 350 f 15 380 f 10 375
Medium 530 f 10 350 f 15 380 + 10 360
Small 490 + 10 350 f 15 370 f 10 335

..
\ Fig. I Bidet
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part IX)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part IX Specific requirements of bidets (third revision).
176
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART X)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART X SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF FOOT RESTS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, shape, size Design of face should be such as to permit easy flow
and dimensions for foot rests made of vitreous china. of water towards rim or bowl of squatting pan. Under-
side grooved.
2. Requirements
Note- Other agreed shapes and sizes permissible.
2.1 Shapes and Sizes
Rectangular shape: 2.2 Finish - Surface shall be uniform and smooth
Minimum size = 250 X 125 mm; except for serrations. Edges shall be rounded or cham-
Thickness = 15 mm, Min. fered .
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part X)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part X Specific requirements of foot rests (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART XI)- 1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART XI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOWER ROSE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture and 2.4 Diameter of each hole 1.2 mm f 10 percent.
construction, performance, dimensions and toler-
ances, finish and marking for shower rose made of 3. Tolerances
vitreous china. On dimensions less than 50 mm +2 mm
On dimensions 50 mm and over f4 percent
2. Requirements
2.1 May be round, octagonal or of other shape. 4. Performance Test - When fitted at a height of ..
2.2 Size of shower rose shall be 100 mm when mea- 2 100 mm above floor level, shall wet an area of the
sured across the diameter and the inlet connection shall floor, having 450 mm as its minimum dimension,
be of 15 mm size. under a minimum head of 3 m.
Note - Other sizes by mutual agreement
5. Finish - Inside of the shower rose shall be
2.3 Number of hol.es 145 + 10. uniform and smooth.
Note l-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and methods of test refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification
for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
Note 2-For dimensions and tolerances see 2.4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XI)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Par{ XI Specific requirements for shower rose (first revision).
177
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART XII)- 1973 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART XII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FLOOR TRAPS
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, shape, 2.4 Depth of water seal shall be 50 mm, Min.
size, dimensions and finish of floor traps made of
vitreous china. ,
3. DimensIons and Tolerances
2. Requirements Overall length = 310 mm
Gverall height = 150 mm
2.1 Shall be manufactured without vent. Diameter of grating (.I&) = 95 mm
2.2 Grating shall be removable. 3.1 Tolerance
2.3 Inside surface of trap and socket and the grating On dimensions 50 mm and over +4 percent
(all over) shall be glazed. On dimensions less than 50 mm rt2 mm
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of the sfundurd.
Note 2-For general requirements regarding materials, manufacture, finish and methods of test refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XII)-1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part XII Specific requirements for floor traps.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART XIII)- 1973 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART XIII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF TRAPS
FOR SQUATTING PANS
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, patterns, 2.3 Minimum water seal JO mm (20 mm for rural
constructions, dimensions, tolerances and finish for pattern).
traps for use with squatting pans conforming to
IS : 2556 (Part III)-1973*. 2.4 Dimensions -See Fig. 1 and 2.
2. Requirements 2.5 Tolerances I

2.1 Pattern - Traps for long pattern and Orissa On dimensions of 50 mm and over + 4 paent
pattern pans may be with P or S outlet as given in Fig. On dimensions less than 50 mm + 2 mm
1, and for rural pattern pans as shown in Fig. 2. Other On angle of outlet +3”
patterns may be made, but tolerances on dimensions,
minimum dimensions where specitied and flushing test 3. Finish -Inside of trap shall be glazed and
herein specified shall be followed. smooth. Exterior surface of outlet and interior of inlet
2.2 Shall be in onepiececonstruction, and shall have socket shall not be glazed, and shall be rough or scored
anti-siphonagevent horn on outlet side, where required or grooved.
by local authority.
4. Flushing Tests - See 2.6 of the standard.
china): Part III Specific requirements of squatting pans Note - Trap for rural pattern pan may not be subjected to
(second revision). flushing tests.
178
SP : 21-1983
- 990miw
Fig. 1 Traps for Long Pattern and Orissa Pattern Pans
.-Fig. 2 Trap for Rural Pattern Pan
Note-For general requirements regarding materials, manufacture and methods of tests, refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XIII)-1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part XIII Specific requirements of traps for squatting pans. ,
179
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART XIV)-1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES _

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART XIV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED
SQUATTING PANS
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, manufac- 2.2 Dimensions - See Fig. 1.

ture and construction, dimensions and tolerances,
2.3 Tolerances
tests, finish and marking of integrated pans made of
On dimensions of 50 mm and over & 4 percent
vitreous china.
On dimensions less than 50 mm f 2 mm
On all angles f 3”
2. Requirements
Top surface shall not vary from designed plane or
2.1 Rim shall be box or open type. Flushing inlet
contour more than 6 mm.
may be located at narrow end or broad end or both
ends. Anti-siphonage vent horn shall be provided
3. Finish - Inside shall be uniform and smooth.
where required by local authorities. Water seal shall be
50 mm, minimum. 4. Flushing Tests-- See 2.3 of the standard.
All dimensions in millimetres
Fig. 1 Integrated Squatting Pan
Note-For general requirements regarding materials, manufacture. finish and methods of test refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances.(vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XIV)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part XIV Specific requirements of integrated squatting pans.
180
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART XV)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES

(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART XV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIVERSAL
WATER-CLOSETS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture and 2.3 Integral flushing rim shall be of box type.
construction, performance, dimensions and toler- 2.4 Anti-siphonage vent horn shall be provided
antes, finish and marking for universal water closets where required by local authority.
made of vitreous china.
2.5 Water seal shall be 50 mm,Min.
2. Requirements 2.6 Dimensions - See Fig. 1.
2.1 Sizes and Patterns -See Fig. 1.
2.7 Tolerances _
a) 450 mm ‘P’ trap or ‘S’ trap On dimensions of 50 mm and over f4 percent
b) 530 mm ‘P’ trap or ‘S’ trap On dimensions less than 50 mm f2 mm
On all angles rt3”
Other sizes and patterns may be made; however,
they shall conform to tolerances on dimensions and 3. Finish -Inside surface of closet and trap shall
flushing, tests specified in this standard. be uniform and smooth. Serrated part of the outlet of
the closets shall not be glazed externally. Inside of the
2.2 ‘P’ trap closets shall be in one piece. ‘S’ trap
inlet socket and the serrated part of the ‘S’ bend shall
closets may be mad& in one or two pieces. Each closet
not be glazed.
shall have not less than 4 floor fixing holes of 6.5 mm
dia, minimum. 4. Flushing Tests - See 2.6 of the standard.
HEIGHT = 380 max.
..
t-p 570/650 _1
Fig. I Universal Water-Closet
___-
Note-For general requirements regarding materials, manufacture, finish and methods of test, refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XV)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part XV Specific requirements of universal water-closets.
181
SP : 21.1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2692-1978 FERRULES FOR WATER SERVICES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for nominal sizes, mate- plugs and caps. Brass rod for washer plates and nut.
rial, manufacture and workmanship, construction, Washer shall be of leather, vulcanized fibre, rubber or
sampling and testing of copper alloy screw down copper.
ferrules for use on water supply mains.
2.3 Component parts shall be interchangeable.
2. Requirements ,
2.4 Testing -
Shall withstand hydraulic pressure
2.1 Nominal Sizes - 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and of at least 2 MPa for 2 minutes without leakage or
50 mm. sweating.
2.2 Materials - Leaded tin bronze for bodies,
Note-For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2692-1978 Specification for ferrules for water services (first
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2963- 1979 COPPER ALLOY WASTE FITTINGS FOR

WASH-BASINS AND SINKS
(First Revision)
1. Scope- Requirements for materials, manufac- 2. Requirements
ture and workmanship, nominal sizes, dimensions and 2.1 Materials
finish of copper alloy waste fittings used in wash-
basins and sinks complying with IS : 771 (Part II)- Body - Brass or leaded tin bronze
1979*, IS : 2556 (Part IV)-1972tand IS : 2556 Nut - Brass rod
L.
(Part V)-19791:.
2.2 Nominal Sizes - 32 mm for wash basins.
50 mm for sinks.
*Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances:
Part I1 Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory Note - For detailed dimensions refer to the figures in rhe
sinks (second revision). standard.
tSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
china): Part IV Specific requirements of wash-basins (second revi-
sion). 2.3 Finish - Nickle chromium plated.
SSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
china): Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks
(second revision )
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2963-1979 Specification for copper alloy waste-fittings for wash-
basins and sinks (first revision).
182 *
-
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3004-1979 PLUG COCKS FOR WATER SUPPLY PURPOSES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of plug cocks of 15 mm, 2.2 Nominal Size - 15, 20 and 25 mm.
20 mm and 25 mm nominal size with a key head for use
underground for water supply purposes up to 1 MPa Note -For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.
working pressure.
2.3 Materials - Cast brass and leaded tin bronze
2. Requirements for bodies and components. Brass rod for washers,
plug nuts, union nuts and tail pipes.
2.1 TypesofEnd - Plug cocks shall have each body
2.4 Taper of the side of plug and body shall be 1 in 15
end suitable for one of the following types of joints.
(1 in 7/5 included angle).
a) Plain ends for lead (wiped) joint,
b) Socket end for capillary solder joint, 2.5 The larger end of the plug taper shall project
c) Union and tail piece for lead (wiped) joint. 6f 1.5 mm from the body.
d) Union and tail pipe for capillary solder joint, 2.6 Finish of Body Ends - Body ends intended for
and direct plumbing to lead pipe shall be finished by
e) Union for copper tube compression joint. machining and grinding.
2.1.1 Ends for (b), (d) and (c)‘by mutual agree-
ment. When ends are to suit mild steel tubing comply- Note -For details of nut and tail pipe, when the outlet has a
ing with IS : 1239 (Part I)-1973* the purchaser shall union for lead, refer to the standard.
provide the details.
2.7 Hydraulic Test - Shall be tested for body and
*Specification for mild steel tubes and tubulars and other wrought seat tests under internal hydraulic pressure of at least 2
steel fittings: Part I Miid steel tubes (dclird revision). MPa and 1 MPa respectively.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3004-1979 Specification for plug cocks for water suppb Purposes
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3311-1979 WASTE PLUG AND ITS ACCESSORIES

FOR SINKS AND WASH-BASINS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, manufac- 2. Requirements
ture, construction, testing and finish of waste plug,
chain and stay suitable for use in wash-basins and sinks 2.1 Materials, Manufacture and Construction
complying with IS : 771 (Part II)- 1979*, IS : 2556
(Part IV)-1972.t and IS : 2556 (Part V)-1979$. Di- a) Waste plug - Rubber of hard and durable
mensions of the waste plug have been specified so as to quality or any other equally suitable material.
suit waste fittings covered in IS : 2963-1979s. b) Chain - Phosphor bronze or brass wire of
minimum diameter 1.8 mm with brazed oval
links approximately 13 mm long (any other
equally suitable corrosion resistant material al-
*Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances:
Part II Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks (second lowable). Overall length of chain not less tian
revision ) . 300 mm.
tSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china):
Part IV Specific requirements of wash-basins (sea& revision). c) Stay - Chain stay shall be bolt type or screw
SSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): type, made of brass or othercorrosionresistant
Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (second revision). material.
@pacification for copper alloy waste fittings for wash-basins and
sinks (Frst revision). Note - For details refer to Fig. 1 of he standard.
183
SP : 21-1983
2.2 Loud Test - Shall withstand 20 kgf without 2.3 Finish - Chain and stay shall be chromium
deformation plated.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3311-1979 Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks
and wash-basins (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
1
1s : 5961- 1970 CAST IRON GRATINGS FOR DRAINAGE PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements for cast iron gratings for Note - For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of Z/Wstandard.
use in drainage works.
5. Weight - 75 kg minimum.
2. Materials - Frame and cover shall be of grey
cast iron. Hinge pin shall be of mild steel wire.
6. Coating 1 Shall be with a material having tar
3. Manufacture and Workmanship - Frame and base with a black bituminous composition. Coating
cover shall be free from air and sand holes, cold shuts shall be smooth and tenacious which will not flow at a
and warping. temperature of 63”C, and which is not so brittle as to
chip off at 0°C.
Size of frame =6OOx560mm 7. Test - Gratings shall withstand without fracture
(outside dimensions) a load of 35 tonnes for a minimum period of 30 seconds
Height of frame =lOOmm when subjected to loading test described in IS : 1726
(Part I)-1974*.
4.1 Tolerance
On internal dimensions of the f2 mm *Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames intended
top of the frame for use in drainage works (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5961-1970 Specification for cast iron gratings for drainage
purposes.
SUMMARY OF
.
IS : 641 l- 1972 GEL-COATED GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED
POLYESTER RESIN BATH TUBS
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, construc- materials).
tion, workmanship, finish, performance and testing for
2.2 Polyester Resin - Shall be resistant to hot water
gel-coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath
and weathering. Ratio of not less than 1:2 of glass tibre
tubs.
to polyester is recommended.
2. Materials 2.3 Gel-Coat - Shall be provided on working sur-
face. Resin used in gelcoat shall be isophthalic grade
2.1 Glass Fibre Reinforcing Material - Shall be
of polyester or epoxy resin or equivalent.
non-alkaline E Type Grade (A Type Grade made from
indigenous raw materials is also permissible, since E Note - For details regarding chemical composition see 3 of
Type Grade is being made from imported raw the standard.
184
SP : 21-1983
3. Workmanship and Finish 6. Performance Requirements

3.1 Defects Which Cannot he Permitted: 6.1 Impact Resistance - Shall not show cracks in
gel-coat when subjected to impact test.
a) Small pores, wrinkle, craze, bubbles, defec-
tive impregnation, superficial defects, injuries 6.2 Hardness - Minimum reading 40 points on
and aggregate defects on the following parts: barcol impressor.
Upper rim, inner wall, bottom apron and other 6.3 Cracking or Crazing - Shall not show cracking
readily visible faces. or crazing after oven test.
b) Defective impregnation and superficial defects 6.4 Water Absorption - Not more than 0.5 percent
on obscure faces. in 24 hours.
6.5 Gel-Coat - Thickness shall be between 0.25
3.2 Permissible Defects: and 1 mm.
si Defects Upper Inner Apron Bottom Readily Visible

No. Rim Wall Parts
i> Traces of mending 2 2 2 2 Not conspicuous
ii) Impurities 2 3 2 3 Not conspicuous
iii) Pin holes 2 3 2 3 Not conspicuous
iv) Colour bolts Should not be conspicuous
v) Unevenness Should not be conspicuous
vi) Deformity Horizontal section of the upper rim should drain off water readily. Bend
of section in contact with wall should be less than 5 mm. Other
deformities should not be conspicuous.
4. DimenGons 6.6 Resistance to Boiling Water - There shall be no

crazing, bubbles or discolouration.
Overall length at top = 1 680 to 1 700 mm
Overall width at top = 730 to 760 mm 6.7 Resistance to Hydrochloric Acid - There shall
Height above ground = 500 to 570 mm be no crazing, discolouration, or exposure of glass
fibre.
5. Requirement
6.8 Tensile Strength for Laminates - Shall not be
5.1 Each bath tub shall be one piece unit with an less than 635 kgf/cm*.
ooeninz for waste outlet. An overflow shall normally
bk procided. Apron (side panel) may be provided in- 6.9 Lcxzd Test on Rim, Support and Unsupported
tegrally or separately. Areas - Shall withstand the prescribed tests.
5.2 Thickness shall not be less than 2 mm for apron;

3 mm for inner wall and bottom; and 4 mm for bottom
bend.
Note-For test procedures see 8 of fhe standard.
For detailed information., refer to IS : 6411-1972 Specification for gel-coated glass fibre reinforced
polyester resin bath tubs.
185
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7231-1974 PLASTIC FLUSHING CISTERNS (VALVELESS

SIPHONIC TYPE) FOR WATER-CLOSETS AND URINALS
1. Scope - Requirements for manually operated, 5.2 Working Wafer Level - Shall be 6.5 cm (Min)
high-level and low-level valveless siphonic type plas- below effective top edge of cistern and shall beperma-
tic flushing cisterns for water-closets and urinals. nently marked inside.
5.3 Freedom from Selfaiphonage - Siphonic sys-
Note - A high level cistern is intended to operate with a tern shall be capable of being rapidly brought into I
minimum height of 125 cm (between top of pan and underside of
cistern) and a low-level cistern with maximum height of 30 cm.
action when water is at the working water level, but
shall not self-siphon, or leak into flushpipe when water
2. Materials level is upto 1 cm above invert of overtlow pipe.
a) Cistern and Cover - High density 5.4 Reduced Water Level - Discharge shall operate
polyethylene. satisfactorily when cistern is filled to a level 1 cm
b) Flush Pipe - Seamless or welded steel tube, below working water level.
lead pipe; copper alloy pipe; low or high den-
5.5 Discharge Capacity - 5, 10 and 12.5 litres.
sity polyethylene pipe; unplasticised PVC
Tolerance f 0.5 lines.
pipe; or smooth bore cost iron pipe (for low
level flushing cistern). 5.6 Discharge Rate - Average rate shall be 5 litres
c) Ovetflow Pipe - High density polyethylene in 3 secotds.
or unplasticized PVC pipe.
6. Tests
3. Requfrements 6.1 Endurance Test - Cistern and component parts
3.1 Wall thickness shall be 4 mm, Min. shall not show signs of damage or defects after 3 000
operations.
3.2 Cistern shall be mosquito-proof.
6.2 Distortion Resistance - Cistern shall not bulge
3.3 Chain shall be strong enough to sustain 50 kgf
more than 6 mm and the cover shall not be dislodged.
without permanent deformation.
6.3 Dead Loud Test - Shall withstand the pre-
4. Finish - Surface shall be free from blisters and
scribed test.
delaminations.
6.4 Front Thrust Test - (Applicable to cisterns in-
5. Operation and Performance Requirements tended for low-level use) - Shall withstand the pre-
scribed test.
5.1 Siphonic Arrangement - Shall be on valveless
siphon principle. Shall operate on a single operation of 6.5 Impact Test - Shall withstand the prescribed
lever. teat.
Note-For test procedures see 8 and Appendices A to D of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7231-1974 Specification for plastic flushing cisterns (valveless L
siphonic type) for water-closets and urinals.
186
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 871% 1978 VITREOUS ENAMELLED STEEL KITCHEN SINKS

1. Scope 7 Requirements regarding material, ,5.4 Acid Resistance
construction and workmanship, patterns and sizes,
dimensions and tolerances and marking for vitreous 5.4.1 White enamelled sinks - There shall be no
enamelled steel kitchen sinks. loss in weight.
2. Material - Mild steel sheet minimum 1 mm 5.4.2 Coloured enamelled sinks - Shall con-
thick. form to classes AA, A and B.
3. Patterns and Sizes 5.5 Defects - Shall be liable to rejection if finish
Sl Pattern Overall Overall Overall Depth ( in mm)

No. Length Width
mm mm I
mm mm
i) Flat-rim 750 450 150 200
600 450 150 200
500 400 150 200
450 400 150 200
400 400 150 200
ii) Flat-rim ledge 750 500 150 200
600 500 150 200
iii) Flat-rim ledge, 1050 500 150 200

with double 800 500 150 200
compartment
4. Tderances - Overall length and width shall not shows any of the following defects:
vary by more than +2 percent.
a) Crazing
b) Dimples, rundown and sagging
Note- Kitchen sinks may be made in other patterns and sizes c>Blisters - not more than two in number on the
where mutually agreed. interior surface shall be permitted provided
they can not be broken by a pressure of a finger
nail.
5. Surface Coating - Interiors of sinks shall be
adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel of d) Pin holes - maximum 2 for coloured sinks
and 4 for white enamelled sinks. There shall be
quality complying with requirements given 4.1@ 4.5.
nogmuping and they shall not penetrate to the
Atleast one ground or primer coating preferably white,
metal.
or coloured enamel coating shall be applied on the ..
e) Specks - shall be leas than 1 mm in size and
outer surface.
maximum 5 in number and there shall be no
5.1 Finish - Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uni- grouping.
form and visually satisfactory.
5.6 Thickness of Enamel - Minimum 0.2 mm, and
5.2 Abrasion - Shall withstand resistance to Maximum 0.5 mm.
scratching. 5.7 Warpage of edges set against wall and edges of
5.3 Alkali Resistance - There shall be no loss in roll rims shall not exceed 5 mm/m. Warpage of all
weight after the test. other edges shall not exceed 7.5 mm/m.
Note-For test procedures refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances
(second revision), and IS : 3972-1968 Methods of test for vitreous enamelware.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8718-1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks.
187
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8727 - 1978 VITREOUS ENAMELLED STEEL WA&BASINS

1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, con- 5. Surface Coating - Interiors of wash basins
struction and workmanship, patterns and sizes, dimen- shall be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous
sions and tolerances and marking for vitreous enamel- enamel of quality complying with requirements given
led steel wash basins. in 5.1 to 5.5. Atleast one ground or primer coating
preferably white, or coloured enamel coating shall be
2. Material - Mild steel sheet of thickness 1 mm. applied on the outer surface.
Min. 5.1 Finish - Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uni- ,
form and visually satisfactory.
3. Patterns and Sizes
5.2 Abrasion - Shall withstand resistance to
Pattern Nominal Size
scratching.
(Overall Length X Overall
Width) 5.3 Alkali Resistance -There shall be no loss in
weight.
mm mm
i) Flat-back (Type 1) 480 x 430 5.4 Acid Resistance
500 x 450 5.4.1 White enamelled wash basins -There
Flat-back (Type 2) 500 x 450 shall be no loss in weight.
600 x 500 5.4.2 Coloured enamelled wash basins - Shall
ii) Flat-rim 480 x 430 conform to classes AA, A and B.
500 x 400
5.5 Dclfects - Shall be liable to rejection if finish
510 x 450
shows any of the following defects:
530 x 430
iii) Oval 450 x 400 a) Crazing
b) Dimples, rundown and sagging
iv) Round 450 Dia c) Blisters -Not more than two in number on
interior surface shall be permitted provided
3.1 Tolerance they cannot be broken by a pressure of a finger
On overall dimensions +2 percent nail.
d) Pinholes - maximum 2 for coloured wash
Note 1 - Wash basins may be made in other patterns and sizes
where mutually agreed. basins and maximum 4 for white enamelled
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and figures refer to rhe wash basins permissible. There shall be no
standard. grouping of pinholes and they shall not penet-
rate to the metal.
4. Requirements e’l Specks - Shall be less than 1 mm in size and
maximum 5 in number and there shall be no
4.1 Basin shall have an integral soap holder recess or
grouping.
recesses which shall drain into the bowl.
5.6 Thickness @Enamel - Minimum 0.2 mm,arJ
4.2 A slot type of overflow having an area of not less
Maximum 0.5 mm.
than 500 mm2 shall be provided in the front or back of
the bowl and shall be designed to facilitate cleaning of 5.7 Watpage of edges set against wall and edges of
the overflow. The cross-sectional area of passageway roll rims shall not exceed 5 mm/m . Warpage of all
of overflow shall be 400 mm2, minimum. other edges shall not exceed 7.5 mm/m.,
Note-For test procedures refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances
(second revision), and IS : 3972-1968 Methods of test for vitreous enamelware.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8727-1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel wash-basins.
188
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 779-1978 WATER METERS (DOMESTIC TYPE)

(Fifth Revision)
1. Scope - Inferential (horizontal- flow) and Nominal Size Discharge per Hour
semipositive types of water meters with threaded end of Meters l-A-<
connections and of nominal sizes up to and including Semi-positive Type Inferential Type
50 mm. The specification applies to both wet-dial and mm litres litres
,
dry dial (including magnetic type) water meters. 15 2 000 2500
20 3 400 3 500
25 5 500 5 500
2. Ndnal Sizes - 15, 20, 25, 40 and 50 mm. 40 10 ooo 16 000
50 15 000 23 000
3. Material and Manufacture - Body made from
Type A or B materials. 5.4 ContinuousRunning Capacity - Shall becapa-
ble of giving discharges not less than as given below
a) TypeA- Bronze or brass. without the headloss exceeding 3 mm.
b) TypeB- Ferrous metals (with suitable pro- Nominal Size Discharge per Hour
tection) or suitable plastics. of Meters YAP,
Semi-positive Type Inferential Type
mm litres litres
4. Overall Dimensions 15 1000 1500
20 2000 2 500
Size Length Including Width, Height, 25 3000 3500
Nipples Ma.X MaX 40 6000 8 000
mm mm mm mm 50 9 000 14 000
15 250 130 180
20 i90 130 18(, 5.5 Minimum Starting Flows
25 380 i40 LOi Nominal Size Minimum Starting Flow
40 430 230 250 of Meters per Hour
/\
50 470 250 300 / \
Semi-positive Type Inferential Type
mm 1itres 1itres
15 10 40
Tolerance on overall length = + 5 mm
20 15 60
25 20 75
40 25 100
50 35 175
5.1 Temperature - Suitable for use with water up
to 45°C. ..
5.6 Life Test - Shall withstand the specified test.
5.2 Hydrostatic Test - Both Type A and Type B
5.7 Metering Accuracy - +2 percent.
shall withstand pressure of 2 MPa.
5.3 Nominal Capacity Rating - Shall be capable of 6. Frost Protection Devices - Meters liable to
giving discharges not less than as given below without damages by frost shall be protected with suitable frost
the head-loss exceeding 10 m. protection devices.
Note-For test procedures and for the method for determination of head loss in water meters refer to the sfondard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 779-1978 Specification for water meters (domestic type) (fifth
revision).
- -___
189
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2104-1981 WATER METER BOXES (DOMESTIC TYPE)

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimen- 4. Manufacture
sions and contstruction of boxes for water meters of 4.1 Construction:
nominal size conforming to IS : 779-1978*.
a) Cast iron boxes - Minimum thickness of
box shall be 8 mm for Size 1 and 10 mm for
2. Sizes and Shape
Size 2.
2.1 Shall be of two sizes and suitable for the water b) Mild steel boxes - Minimum thickness
meters of following sizes: shall be 3 mm.
Size. 1 - for 15, 20 and 25 mm water meters, c) Precast reinforced concrete boxes -
and Thickness of wall shall not be less than
Size 2 - for 40 and 50 mm water meters. 40 mm.
2.2 Shape - Oval or rectangular. d) Sloth for pipe - Height of slot shall be half
the clear inside height of box and width shall
be 40 mm for Size 1 and 75 mm for Size 2
3. Dimensions - Minimum inside clear dimen-
with a tolerance of +3 mm.
sions:
Size Length Width Height Note - For typical illustration of water meter boxes of diffe-
rent materials, refer to Fig. 1 to 5 of rhe standard.
mm mm mm
1 600 600 500 4.2 Fabrication and Fittings - Locking arrange-
2 900 600 600 ment may be provided either with a dog-and-clamp
armngement or alternatively, by means of a padlock.
Suitable anchorage for fixing box to concrete or
*Specification for water meters (domestic type) @_@Irevision) masonry bed plate shall be provided.
Fordetailed information, refer to IS : 2104-1981 Specification for water meter boxes (domestic type) (first
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2373- 1981 WATER METERS (BULK TYPE)

(Third Revision)
.
1. Scope - Requirements of bulk type water meters water impinges on the runner over a part or the whole
of the following types: of its circumference.
a) Vane-wheel (impeller) type water meters
from 50 to 300 mm; and 2.2 Helical Type Meter - Axial flowmeter whose
b) Helical type water meters from 50 to runner is provided with a number of vanes forming a
500 mm. multi-threaded helix.
Note - For typical illustration of the above two types of water
3. Nominal Sizes (Bore of Inlet) - 50, 80, 100,
meters, refer to Fig’. 1 and 2 of fhe Smm’ard.
150, 200, 250, 300, 350,400 and 500 mm.
2. Terminology
2.1 Vane-Wheel Type Meter - Meter whose runner
or impeller is mounted on a vertical spindle, which has 4.1 Temperature - Suitable for use with water up
several vanes symmetrically spaced round its axis. The to 45°C.
190
SP : 21-1983
4.2 Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand a pressure 4.4 Minimum Starting Flow
of 1.6 Mp a (16 kgf/cm*). Nominal Minimum Starting Flows in
Size Litres per Hour
4.3 Capacity Ratings / h \
Vane-Wheel Type Helical Type
Nominal Capacity Ratings of Water Meters
Size in Litres per Hour 50 250 500
80 500 1000
I \
Vane-Wheel Type Helical Type 100 700 1500

(At Headloss (At Headloss 150 1000 3500
of lOm,Mar) of 3m,Mar) 200 2400 5 500
250 3 200 9000
50 30 000 50 000 300 6 400 14 000
80 50 000 125 000 350 - 20 000
100 70 000 200 000 400 - 25 000
150 150 000 500 000 500 - 3s 000
200 250 000 800 000 4.5 Metering Accuracy - The accmacy at lower
250 400 000 1 100000 limit of flow shall be calculated at one-thirtieth of
300 500 000 1500000 nominal capacities of meters as given in 4.3 and shall
350 - 2000000 be f2 percent for both types of meters.
400 - 3000000
500 - 5000000 5. Frost Protection Devices - Meters liable to be
Note - For reccxnrnended capacities for intermediate flows, damaged by frost shall be protected with suitable frost
refer to 5.3.2 of the standard. protection devices.
Note - For materials and manufacture details, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2373-1981 Specification for water meters (bulk type) (third
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 404 (PART I)-1977 LEAD PIPES

PART I FOR OTHER THAN CHEMICAL PURPOSES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Minimum requirements for lead pipes 3. chemical Composition

_ for other than chemical purposes.
a) Composition No. 1 - LeadMin 99.8 percent
2. Freedom from Defects - Shall be free from Antimony, Max 0.06 percent
laminations, flaws, pronounced extrusion marks and Tin, Max 0.075 percent
shall as far as possible, be smooth and of uniform wall Tellurium, Max 0.005 percent
thickness throughout. Total impurities, Max 0.2 percent
191
SP : 21-1983
b) Composition No. 2 - Lead, Min 99.25-99.8 4. Dimensions

percent Nominal Internal Wall Thickness
Antimony, Max 0.1 percent Diameter
Zinc, Max 0.005 percent mm
Copper, Max 0.07 percent 10 2,3,4y 8
Tin, Max 0.50 percent 13 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10
Total of other elements, MUX 0.075 percent 16 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10
20 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10
cl Chemical composition to be used for various 25 2,3,4,6,8,10
applications shall be as given below: 30 3,4, 6, 8, 10
40 3,4, 6, 8, 10
50 4, 6, 8, 10
Application Composition
60 4, 6, 8, 10
No.
80 6, 8, 10
1) Service and distribution pipes 1 100 6, 8, 10
to be laid underground 125 6, 8, 10
2) Service pipes to be fixed or 1 Note - Forcalculating the weights, the density of lead shall be
taken as 11.37 kg/cm-‘. For details regarding weights of pipes of
laid above ground
different thicknesses see Table 1 of the sfurzdar-d.
3) Cold water distribution pipes 1
to be fixed or laid above 5. Tolerances
ground
a) Internal diameter
4) Hot water distribution pipes to 1 L’, percent
be fixed or laid above ground
5) Soil, waste and soil-and- 2 b) Wall thickness f 7.5 percent except for any
waste ventilating pipes local increase to receive the
6) Flushing and warning pipes 2 marking
7) Heavy weight gas pipes 1
8) Light weight gas pipes 2 6. Flare Test - Shall withstand the prescribed test.
Note- For details regarding test, see 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 404 (Part I)-1977 Specification for lead pipes (second revision).
SUMMARY OF ..
IS : 407- 1981 BRASS TUBES FOR GENERAL PURPOSES

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of solid drawn brass 3. Condition - May be supplied in one of the
tubes for general purposes. Specifies the preferred following conditions:
method of designating tubes by their outside diameter
and lays down the permitted tolerances on outside a) As drawn and stress relieved - hard
diameter, thickness and length of tubes. temper (HD),
b) Temper annealed (TA) (tubes heat treated
2. Freedom from Defects - Shall be reasonably over their full length to an intermediate
round, straight, clean, smooth, uniform in diameter temper), and
and free from cracks, seams, slivers,scaIe, etc. c) Annealed (0).
192
SP : 21-1983
4. Sizes and Tolerances 5. Pressure Tests - (If required by purchaser.)

4.1 Sizes
5.1 Hydraulic Test - When tested, tubes shall
Outside Dia In Wall Thickness show no sign of weeping, leaking or permanent in-
Preferred No. Series (mm) crease in diameter at any point.
2 0.5
2.5 0.5, 0.6 Note - For details of test, refer to 9 of rhe standard.
4 0.5 to 1.0 5.2 Pneumatic Test - Tubes shall show no sign of

5 0.5 to 1.2 leaking when tested to an air pressure of 0.42 MPa
8 0.6 to 1.5 while immersed in water.
10 0.6 to 1.5 6. Physical Test
12 0.6 to 1.5
14 1 6.1 Tensile Strength and Hardness Requirements
16 0.6 to 1.5
Grade Temper Tensile Hardness
18 1
Strength Vickers I
20 0.8 to 2
MPa HV
22 1 to 1.5
25 1 to 2.5
28 1 to 1.5 CuZn30As Annealed (0) 285 Min 75 Mar
32 1.2 to 3 Temper annealed (TA) 300 Min 80-l 10
35.5 1.2, 1.5 Hard (HD) 400 Min 135 Min
40 1.5 to 4
50 1.5 to 5 CuZn37 Annealed (0) 285 Min 80 Max
63 1.5 to 6 Temper annealed (TA) 320 Min 80-l 10
80 1.5 to 8 Hard (HD) 400 Min 130 Min
100 1.5 to 8
125 2to 12
160 2.5 to 12 6.2 DrijXng Test - Tubes up to 100 mm nominal
200 8 to 12 outside diameter shall not show crack or flaw, until the
250 8 to 12 diameter of the drifted end measures at least 30 percent
315 8 to 20 more than the original diameter.
Note - Wall thicknesses shall be 0.5,0.6,0.8, 1, 1.2, 1S, 2, 6.3 Flattening (for Tubes not Exceeding 100 nvn
2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16 and 20 mm. Outside Diameter) - Test piece shall not crack.
4.1.1 Length - Up to 6 m. 6.4 Double Bend Test (for Round Tubes Over 100
mm Outside Diameter) - Test piece shall not crack
4.2 Tolerances - For tolerances, refer to 4 of on the outside of either bend.
IS : 5493-1983*.
6.5 Mercurous Nitrate Test - As drawn and stress
*Dimensions for wrought copper and copper alloy tubes yirsf relieved (after the final draw) tubes shall withstand the
revision). prescribed test without showing any sign of cracking.
Note - For test procedures refer to IS : 2866-1965 Method for Vickers hardness test for copper and copper alloys, IS : 2655-1965
Method for tensile testing of copper and copper alloy tube, IS : 2305-1962 Method for mercurous nitrate test for copper and copper
alloys, and IO of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 407-1981 Specification for brass tubes for general purposes (third
revision).
193
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 651- 1980 SALT-GLAZED STONEWARE PIPES AND FITTINGS

(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope the following:
Thickness of Pipe or Increase in Mass,
1.1 Requirements regarding material and perfor-
Fitting, mm Percent
mance for stoneware pipes (straight pipes) and fittings
Up to and including 20 6
(taper pipes; bends; taper bends; junctions; half-section
Over 20 and up to 25 7
channels, straight and taper; channel junctions; chan-
nel bends; channel interceptors; gully traps and inspec-
tion pipes).
Over 38 10
1.2 Dimensions of salt-glazed stoneware pipes and c) Resistance toAcid (Optzimal) - Soluble mat-
fittings are grouped into two sections, A and B. Section ter shall not exceed 0.25 percent.
A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such d) Resistance to Action of Magnesium Sulphate
fittings which normally form part of a pipe line and (Optional) - There shall be no evidence of
which are subject to same connections, specifications pittings, softening, spalling or cracking.
and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes dimen- e) Crushing Strength - Not less than 16 kn/m in
sions of fittings which are commonly used but do not length.
form a part of the normal pipe line. The fittings in
Section B being hand-moulded articles their confor- 5. Internal Diameter of Pipes - Shall be 100,
mity to dimensional specifications are not required to 150, 200, 230: 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and
he so accurate as for those in Section A. 600 mm. The tolerances shall be 3, 5, 6, 6, 8, 8,
8, 10, 10, 12 and 12 mm respectively.
2. Classifications
6. Length and Straightness of Barrels or Straight
a) Grade A - Pipes which comply with re-
and Taper Pipes (Exclusive of Internal Depth of
quirements of this standard, but of which only
Socket)
5 percent have been subjected to the hydraulic
test and found satisfactory. Fittings are not a) Length - 600,750 or 900 mm.
subjected to hydraulic test. b) Tolerance - + 10 mm for 600 and 750 mm
pipes and f 15 mm for 900 mm pipe.
b) Grade&l - Pipes and fittings which comply cl Deviation from Straightness - Shall not ex-
with requirements of this standaid, and all of ceed 5 mm for 600 mm pipe, 6 mm for 750 mm
which have passed hydraulic test. pipe and 7 mm for 900 mm pipe.
3. Requirements
a) Shall be sound, free from visible defects, and 7. Tapers, Bends and Junctions -Internal
b) Glaring shall be free from crazing. diameters of taper pipes, half-section straight chan-
nels, half-section taper channels, and junctions shall be
4. Tests selected from those given in 5.
Hydraulic Test -Pipes shall withstand test 7.1 Barrels and branches of half-section channel
pressure of 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) on barrels junctions may be any of the diameters given in 5 but the
and 0.075 MPa (0.75 kgf/cm*)on fittings with- diameter of branches shall not exceed that of the barrel
out signs of injury or leakage. diameter. The angle at junction shall be 45 + 3” or
90 + 3”.
b) Absorption Test - Increase in mass of test
piece by absorption of water shall not exceed ‘Non-preferred size.
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions of pipes and fittings refer to the standard.
Note 2-For test procedures refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6.51-1980 Specification for salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
(fourth revision).
194
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1230-1979 CAST IRON RAINWATER PIPES AND FITTINGS

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for cast iron rainwater ’ Length, mm 1800 1800 1800 1800
pipes, half-round gutters, their fittings and accessories. Minimum weight
for 1 800 mm
1.1 The requirements of O.G. gutters and fittings ate 5.9 7.5 9.1
length, kg 5
covered in Appendix A of the standard.
2.2.1 Tolerance
2. Dimensions and Mass
Thickness of gutters -1.0 mm
2.1 Pipes and Fittings and its fittings
Nominal Size, mm 50 75 100 125 150

External dia, mm 53 79 104 130 156
Thickness, mm 3 3 3 3 4
Pipes Projection of spigot bead, mm 1 1 1 1 1
Width of spigot bead, mm 20 20 20 20 20
Width of spigot bead, mm 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800
Internal dia, mm 63 89 114 139 167

Sockets Thickness, Min, mm 4 4 4 4 4
Internal depth, mm 60 65 65 75 75
Thickness of beads, mm 7 7 7 9 9
Nominal mass of 1 800 mm pipe 7.5 11 14 20 26

Mass
without ears, kg
Note - Unless otherwise specified, pipes and fittings shall be Length of gutters +13.0 mm
supplied without ears. For details refer to rhe standard. Length of gutter fittings +3.0 mm
2.1.1 Tolerances Mass -10 percent
External dia of barrel + 3mm for 50 and 75 mm
pipes
+3.5 mm for 100 and
125 mm pipes 3. Freedom from Defects - Pipes and fittings
f4 mm for 150 mm pipes shall be sound and fme from surface and other de-
Internal dia of socket +-3 mm fects .
Depth of socket t-10 mm
Thickness rfil mm
Thickness of fittings -1.0 mm 4. Tests .
Length of pipe 2 13.0 mm
4.1 Brine11 Hardness Test - The hardness of ex-
Length of fittings f3 mm
Mass - 10 percent ternal umnachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB.
2.2 Half-round Gutters and Fittings 4.2 Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand pressure
test without showing any leakage, sweating or other
Nominal size, mm 75 100 125 150
defect of any kind.
Width, mm 75 100 125 150
Radius, mm 40 50 65 75 4.3 Hammer Test - When tested for soundness
Thickness, mm 3 3 3 3 pipe shall emit a clear ringing sound.
Note 1 - For dimensions of bends, shoes, branches, offsets, union sockets, holderbats, rainwater heads, refer to the standard.
Note 2-For test details, refer to the standard and IS : 1789-1961 Methods for Brine11hardness test for grey cast iron.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1230-1979 Specification for cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings
(second revision).
195
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1536-1976 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN)

IRON PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope 4. Sizes
1.1 Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron 4.1 Socket and Spigot Pipes
pipes for pressure main lines for water, gas and sew-
age, manufactured in metal or sand moulds. a) Working length - 3.66, 4, 4.88, 5, 5.5 and
6 m.
1.2 Applicable. to cast iron pipes having spigots,
b) Nominal diameter - 80,100, S25, 150, 200,
sockets or flanges as specified in this standard, and also 250, 300,350,400,450,500,600,700,750,
to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubber 800, 900 and 1 000 mm.
joints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of
socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of 4.2 Flanged Pipes
rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions are a) Working length - 2, 2.8, 3, 4, 4.88, 5, 5.5
maintained for reasons of safety and interchangeabil- and 6 m.
ity. b) Nominal diameter - 80, 100,125, 150,200,
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm.
2. Classification - Class LA, Class A and Class B 4.3 Tolerances
depending on thickness. Class A and Class B pipes
allow respectively 10 percent and 20 percent increase 4.3.1 On diameter
in thickness over Class LA. For special cases Classes External diameter of barrel &-‘/if=+
C, D, E, etc may be derived after allowingcorrespond- (4.5 + 0.001 5 DN)
ing increases of thickness of 30,40 and 50percent, etc, Internal diameter of socket +%f=&
over Class LA. (3 + 0.001 DN)
3. Requirements WhereDN is nominal diameter in mm andf is caulking

space of joint in mm and is equal to 9 + 0.003 DN.
3.1 Hardness - Shall not exceed Brine11 hardness
of 230 HB. 4.3.2 On length
3.2 Ring Test -
Modulus of rupture shall be not less a) Socket and spigot, and plain ended pipes
than 40 kgf/mm* for pipes up to 300 mm dia cast in +25mm
metal moulds. b) Flanged pipes + 10 mm.
3.3 Tensile Test - Minimum strength.
4.3.3 Max deviation from straight line shall not
a) 20 kgf/mm2 for pipes cast in metal moulds (dia
exceed (1.25 L) mm where L = length in
. over 300 up to 600 mm).
metres .
b) 18 kgf/mm2 for pipes cast in metal moulds (dia
over 600 mm). Note - For dimensions of sockets, spigots and flanges, etc,
c) 18 kgf/mm2 for pipes cast in sand moulds (all and for detailed dimension of pipes refer to the standard.
diameters).
3.4 Hydrostatic Test - All pipes shall withstand 5. Mass - Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15
following test pressures: kg/dm3. Tolerance on standard mass f5 percent.
-_.___ __-
1) Class LA: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 12 kgf/cm2 after installation
Cast Socket and Spigot Pipes 2) Class A: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 18 kgf/cm2 after installation
3) Class B: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 24 kgf/cm2 after installation
1) Class A: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 18 kgf/cm2 after installation
Cast Flanged Pipes Up to 600 dia
{ 2) Class B: 35kgf/cm2 at works and 24 kgf/cm2 after installation
__~_~ ~____~
Note- For test procedures refer to the standard.
For detaiied information, refer to IS : 1536-1976 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure
‘pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision).
___-
196
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1537- 1976 VERTICALLY CAST IRON PRESSURE PIPES

FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(First Revision)
1. Scope 3. Sizes
1.1 Requirements for cast iron pipes for pressure a) Working length of socket and spigot pipes -
main lines of water, gas and sewage manufactured by 3.66, 4, 4.88. 5 and 5.5 m.
vertical casing in sand moulds.
b) Working length ofjlangedpipes - 2 to 3 m for
1.2 Applicable to pipes with sockets (for lead joints) 80 mm nominal diameter pipe and 2 to 4 m for
or flanges. Standard may also be made applicable to others.
other types of joints specially rubber joints, where
overall measurements shall be adhered to, to ensure c) Nominal diameter of socket and spigot pipes
interchangeability. andfiangedpipes - 80, 100, 125, 150,200,
250,300, 350,400,450,500, 600,700,750,
2. Requirements 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 500.
2.1 Hardness - Shall not exceed 210 HB.

d) Tolerances
2.2 Tensile Strength - Shall not be lower than 15
kgf/mm*. The test shall be carried out in accor- 1) Length (socket and spigot, and plain ended
dance with IS : 2078-1%2*. pipes) f20 mm.
2.3 Hydrostatic Test - Pipes shall withstand follow-

2) Length (flanged pipes) ?I 10 mm.
ing test pressures (kgf/cm*).
3) Max deviation from straight line shall not
Diameter Socket and Flanged Pipes exceed (1.25 L) mm where L is length in
Spigot Pipes A \ metres .
‘class A Class B ‘Class A Class B
1) Upto 300 mm 20 25 20 25
Note - For dimensions of sockets, spigots, flanges, etc, refer
2) Over 300 and
to the standard.
upto 600 mm 20 25 15 20
3) Over 600 and
upto 1000 mm 15 20 10 15 4. Mass - Density of cast iron is taken as
4) Over 1000 and 7.15 kg/dm3.
upto 1500mm 10 15 10 10
*Method for tensile testing of grey cast iron. 4.1 Tolerance on standard mass + 5 percent.
Note-For test details refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1537-1976 Specification for vertically cast iron pressure pipes for
water, gas and sewage (first revision).
197
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1538 (PARTS I TO XXIII)-1976 CAST IRON FITTINGS FOR

PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Part I covers general requirements for 4. Mass

cast iron fittings for pressure pipes of water, gas and
sewage. It is applicable to all cast iron fittings having 4 Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3.
spigots, sockets or flanges as specified in this standard b) Tolerance on standard mass for bends, fittings
and also to fittings with other type of joints, the general with more than one branch and non-standard
dimensions of which, except those relating to the fittings + 12 percent.
joints, conform to this standard. Parts II to XXIII cover c) Tolerance on standard mass of other fittings
+ 8 percent.
specific requirements and dimensions of sockets and
spigots, sockets of fittings, flanges of pipes and Note - Fittings of a heavier mass than the maximum may be
fittings, raised flanges, standard flange drillings, accepted provided they comply with all other requirements.
flanged sockets; flanged spigots; collars; double socket
bends; tees all sockets; double socket tee with flanged
branch; crosses; all sockets; double socket tapers; caps; 5. Coating - Where coating material has a tar or
plugs; bellmouth pieces; double flanged bends; flanged similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard
tees; flanged crosses; double flanged tapers; body enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of
flanges; and blank flanges respectively. 77°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to
chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife.
2. General Requirements
2.1 Hardness - Shall not exceed 2 1OHB. 6. Dimensions
Note - For Brine11 hardness test, see 5.1 and also IS : 1789- 6.1 Sockets and Spigots of Pipes (Lead Joint)
1961*.
2.2 Tensile Strength - Shall not be lower than 15 Nominal Dia External Dia of Internal Dia of
kgf/mm2.
(DN) Spigot (DE) Socket (DI)
2.3 Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand following
mm mm mm
test pressures (kgf/cm*):
Diameter Fittings Fittings
80 98 116
without with
100 118 137
-Branches Branches
125 144 163
or with Greater
150 170 189
Branches than 112
200 222 241
not Exceed- Principal
250 274 294
ing l/2 Prin- Dia
300 326 346
cipal Dia
350 378 398
a) Up to 300 mm 25 25
400 429 449
b) Over 300 and 20 20
450 480 501
up to 600 mm 500 532 553
c) Over 600 and 15 10
600 635 657
up to 1 500 mm 700 738 760
3. Tolerances on External Diameter of Barrel and 750 790 813
Internal Diameter of Socket 800 842 865
a) External dia of spigot + 1/2f= +(4.5+0.0015 900 945 968
(DE) ON) 1000 1 048 1 072
b) Intemaldiaofsocket +-1/3f=+(3+0.001 UN) 1 100 1 152 1 177
(D0 1 200 1 256 1 281
1 500 1 567 1 594
Where DN is nominal diameter of fitting in mm andf
iscaulking space of the joint in mm and is equal to Note - Internal diameter of socket (LX) given above is
9.0+0.003 DN. applicable to fittings also.
198
,
SP : 21-1983
6.2 Flanges of Pipes and Fittings Nominal Diameter (DN) Naninal Diameter (DN)
of Body of Branch
Nominal Dia Flange Dia Nominal Dia Flange Dia mm mm
mm mm mm mm 150 80
80 200 500 670 200 80
100 220 600 780 250 80
125 250 700 895 300 80
150 285 750 960 300 100
200 340 800 1 015 350 80
250 395 900 1 115 350 100
300 445 1000 1 230 400 80
350 505 1 100 1 340 400 100
400 565 1 200 1 455 450 100
450 615 1 500 1800 500 150
600 150
700 150
6.3 Flange Sockets, Flanged Spigots, Collars and 750 150
Double Socket 114, ll8,1l16, II32 Bends 800 200
900 200
Nominal Dia - 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 1 000 200
350,400,450, 500, 600, 700,750,800,900, 1 000, 1 100 250
1 100, 1 200, and 1 500 mm. 1 200 250
1 500 250
6.4 Tees: All Sockets, All Flanges
6.6 Crosses: All Sockets, All Flanges
Nominal Dia Nominal Dia of Branch
Nominal Diameter - 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,
of body mm
250 and 300 mm
mm
80 80
6.7 Double Socket and Double Flanged Tapers
100 80, 100
125 80, 100, 125 Nominal Nominal Diameter (DN)
150 80, 100, 125, 150 Diameter (DN) (&tall Dia)
200 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, (Large Dia) mm
250 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250
mm
300 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
350 200, 250, 300, 350 100 80
400 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 125 80, 100
450 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 150 80, 100, 125
,500 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 500 200 100, 125, 150
600 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 250 125, 150, 200
700 350,400, 450, 500, 600,700 300 150, 200, 250
750 400,450,500, 600, 700, 750 350 200, 250, 300
800 400,450, 500,600, 700, 750, 8% 400 250, 300, 350
900 450,500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900 450 350, 400 for double socket, and
..
1000 500,600,700, 750, 800, 900, 1 000 300,350,400 for double flanged
1 100 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100 tapers
1200 600,700,750, 800,900, 1 000,l 100, 500 350,400,450
1200 600 400,450, 500
1 500 750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 700 500, 600
1 500 750 600,700
6.5 Double Socket Tee with Flanged Branch 800 600,700,750
900 700, 750, 800 I
Nominal Diameter (ON) Nominal Diameter (DN) 1000 800,900
ofBody of Branch 1 100 900,lOOO
mm mm 1 200 900, 1 000 for double socket, and
80 80 1 000,l 100 for double flanged tapers
100 80 1 500 1 000, 1 200 for double socket, and
125 80 1 100,l 200 for double flanged tapers
199
SP : 21-1983
6.8 Caps and Plugs 6.10 Double Flanged % and % Bends

6.10.1 % and % Bends
Nominal diameter (DN) - 80. 100; 125, 150,200,
250,300,350,400,450,500,600,700,750,800, Nominal Dia - 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250,
900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm. 300,350,400,450,500,600,700,750,800,900,
1 000, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm.
6.9 Bell Mouth Pieces
6.10.2 % Duck Foot Bends
Nominal Dia Big End Dia Nominal Dia Big End Dia Nominal Dia - 80,100,125,150,200,250,300,
mm mm mm mm 350,400, 450, 500 and 600 mm.
80 125 500 750
6.11 Split Puddle or Body Flanges
100 150 600 900
125 , 175 700 1 050 Nominal Dia - 80, 100,125, 150,200,250,300,
150 200 800 1200 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 750, 900, and 1 200
200 285 900 1 350 mm.
250 350 1 000 1 500
6.12 Blank Flanges
300 450 1 100 1 650
350 525 1200 1 800 Nominal Dia - 80, 100, 125, 150,200,250,300,
400 600 1 500 2 250 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900,
450 650 1 000, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm.
Note l-For detailed dimensions and sketches of cast iron fittings refer to the sfandurd.
Note Z-For details of tensile test specimen refer to fhe slandurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1538 (Parts I to XXIII)-1976 Specification for cast iron fittings for
pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1729-1979 SAND CAST IRON SPIGOT AND SOCKET SOIL,

WASTE AND VENTILATING PIPES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for sand cast iron spigot 2.4 Ears shall be provided only if specifically re-
and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes together quired. When provided, they shall have following pro-
with details of fittings and accessories. These pipes and jections:
fittings are suitable for use above ground only. 50 and 75 mm dia 32 mm
100 and 150 mm dia 38 mm
2. Requirements 3. Dimensions (in mm) .

2.1 Shall be free from defects, other than any unav- 3.1 Straight Pipes and Sockets
oidable surface imperfections and shall be such that
Nominal Size 50 75 100 150
they could be cut. Shall emit clear ringing sound when
pipe 85 110 160
struck with light hand hammer.
5 5 5 5
2.2 Shall emit clear ringing sound when struck with Socket 76 101 129 181
light hand hammer. 6 6 6 6
2.3 Hydraulic Z’est - Pipes and fittings shall with- mass

stand a hydrostatic pressure of 0.07 N/n& for minimum of pipe 1 500 mm length 9.56 13.83 18.14 26.70
(kg) 1800 mm length 11.41 16.52 21.67 31.92
15 seconds without showing any signs of leakage.
exclud- 2 000 mm length 12.65 18.37 24.15 35.66
These tests shall be carried out after an internal or
external coating. ing ears
Nominal i
200
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Short Radius Bends With and Without Access 3.12 Straight Inspection Pieces
Doors
Nominal Size 50, 75, 100, 150
Nominal Size 0 (Bend) 3.13 Loose Sockets and Collars
Nominal Size 50, 75, 100, 150
50,75, 100, 150 l;oO,95”l& 100” ’ 11241”’
92l%”
3.14 Cast Iron Holderbats
100 104”
3.3 Large Radius Bends Nominal Size 50, 75, 100? 150
Nominal Size 3.15 Wire Balloons Galvanized Steel or Copper

0
75, 100, 150 92l%” 95” 100” ’ 112%“, Nominal Size 55, 75, 100, 150
l;oO, 1;5” 3.16 Sanitary Connections
3.4 Off-Sets
3.16.1 Socket to Fit WC Outlet
Nominal Size Projection
Dimension Noininal Size = 100
50,75, 100, 150 76, 114, 152, 229 and 305 Pipe - Internal dia, Min 100
3.5 Equal Branches With and Without Oval Access Socket - Internal dia, Min 150
Doors 3.16.2 S and P Branches and Bends
Nominal Size 100
Nominal Size 0
3.16.3 Bends
50,75, 100, 150 92%” 95” 100” ’ 112%” 9 Nominal Size 100
l;oO, 1135”
100 103” 3.16.4 Short Connection Pipe
3.6 Unequal Branches With and Without Oval Length
Nominal Size
Access Doors 100 150, 225, 300, 450, 600
Nominal Size 0 3.17 Bossed Pipes and Connections for One Pipe
Main pipe 75, 100 100.150’ i 92?4”, 95”, loo”, Systems
Branch pipe 50, 50, 75, 100 112?4”, 120”, 135” Nominal size of basin and bath connector (single
and double)= 100 mm.
3.7 Parallel Branches, Singles, Equal and Unequal
Note -For dimensions of rectangular access doors (for
Main Pipe Branch Pipe straight pipes and large radius bends, roof outlet square grating,
circulargrating, ‘D’grating, bent), straight inspection pieces with
100 100 rectangular access door, vent pipe roof connectors, floor trap,
100 50 floor trap (Nahani), 90 and 100 mm WC connectors with anti-
syphon socket, refer to the standard.
3.8 Inverted Branches, Socket and Spigot Type
4. Tolerances
Nominal Size 0 Wall thickness 1.0 mm
External dia of barrel f3 mm for 50 and
75 mm dia
95” ’ 112%” ’ 180” ..
+3.5 mm for 100 mm
Branchpipe
Main pipe 50
50 100
100 501
100 dia
f4 mm for 150 mm
3.9 Trap dia
Nominal Size 50, 75, 100. 150 Internal dia of socket f3 mm for all dia
Depth of socket + 10 mm for all dia
3.10 Oval Access Doors Length +26 mm for pipes and
f 10 mm for fittings
Nominal Size 50, 75, 100, 150
Note - For tolerances on other dimensions, refer to IS : 5519-
3.11 Diminishing Pieces 1979*.
Large diameter 75 100 100 150

*DeviationStor untoleranced dimensions and mass of grey iron
Small diameter 50 50 7.5 100 castings Cjtrstrevision).
201
SP : 21-1983
5. Weight - Density of cast iron taken as 7.15 kg/ similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard
dm3. enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of
Tolerance - 10 percent 77°C but not so brittle at a 0°C as to chip off when
scribed lightly with a penknife.
6. Coating - Where coating material has tar or
Note-For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to fhe sfandurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1729-1979 Specification for sand cast iron spigot and socket soil,
waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1879 (PARTS I TO X)-1975

MALLEABLE CAST IRON PIPE FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Part I covers general requirements for Note - Metric system has been adopted in India and all quan-
tities and dimensions appearing in this standard have been given in
malleable cast iron pipe fittings screwed in accordance
this system. However, it may be noted that the designation is
with IS : 5541%4*. The dimensions specified based on the international practice of including nominal inch sizes
(centre-to-face , face-to-face and centre-to-centre) are of pipe threads at the outlets.
essential for interchangeability. Dimensions which are
not included in the standard are left to the discretion of 2. Designation - Fittings are designated by the
the manufacturer depending on the end use of the following particulars:
fittings. These fittings shall be suitable for working
pressure up to 1.38 MN/m2 in the case of water and up Type of fitting (elbows, tees, bends, etc).
to 1.035 MN/m2 in the case of steam,.air, gas .and oil. Size designation - Nominal inch sizes of the
Parts II to X cover specific requirements regarding pipe thread at the outlets.
dimensions, weights and marking for elbows, tees, Right- and left-hand thread, where applicable.
crosses, bends, sockets, bushing and hexagon nipples, For sockets and hexagon nipples, with right-
backnuts, caps and plugs, and unions respectively. and left-hand thread, the letter ‘R-L’ (right-
left) shall be added after the nominal size of the
*Dimensions for pipe threads for gas list tubes and pressure tight fitting
screwed fittings (revised). 4 Code number (see Table 1 of the srandurd).
202
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions and Weights 3.6 Size Designation of Elbows, Reducing E2 -

%Xl/iX%, 1X%X%, 1X%X%, 1%X%X%,
3.1 Wall thickness of pipe fittings shall be as l%XlX1,11/2X1X1,1%X1%Xl%,2X1%X1%and
follows: 2Xl’/2Xl’/i.
Size % ‘/4 36 ‘h 3h 1 1% 1% 2 2% 3 3% 4 5 6
Wall thickness, mm 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7.5
Reinforcement, 1 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2 2.3 2.5 2.8 3 3.3 4 4.6
projection, mm
Reinforcement, 3 3.6 4 4.6 4.6 5.1 5.1 5.6 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.5 7.1 8.1 8.9
width, mm
Note-Elbows, tees, crosses, pocketsand capsmaybe either plain or reinforced but they are not necessarilyavailablein both tYPes in
all sizes. Bends, pitcher tees, twin elbows and long sweep fittings are supplied only in reinforced type.
3.2 Size Designation of Elbows Al, Male and Female Size Designation
3.7 of Union Elbows, Flat Seat
Elbows A4, and Side Outlet Elbows Zal. UAI; Male and Female Union Elbows, Flat Seat UA2;
Union Elbows, Taper Seat UAII; and Male and
Female Union Elbows, Taper Seat UA12.
a) Elbow Al - 4/e,%, 36, %, %, 1, 1%) 1%) 2,
2%, 3,3%, 4,5 and 6.
Size Designation
/\
b) Male and female elbows A4 - %, Y,, 34, 55, / \
UAl UA2 UAll UA12
3/4, 1, I%, 1’15, 2, 2Y2, 3, 3% and 4.
- - Y4 ‘h
c) Side outlet elbows Zal- %, %, %, 1, l%, % 3/Q J/ 3/s
1% and 2. Y2 ‘h Y2 Y2
J/4 % J/4 3/4
1 1 -1 1
3.3 Size Designation of Elbows, Reducing Al, and 1% 1% 1% 1%
Male and Female Elbows, Reducing A4. 144 1?4 1% lY2
2 2 2 2
a) Elbows, reducing Al - YEX % , l/4 X 3/g, 3.8 Size Designation of Tees BI and Side Outlet
% x 96, % x Y2, 1 x Y2, 1 x %, 1% x 55, Tees, Za2.
1% x %, 1% x ‘h, 1% x %, lY2 x 1,
1% X l%, 2 x ‘/i, 2 x %, 2 x 1, 2 X I%, TeesBl- %,%,%,44,%,1,1%,1%,2,31/2,
2 x 1% and 2% x 2. ‘3, 2’/!z,4, 5 and 6.
Side Outlet Tees, Za2 - %, ‘h; J/4, 1, l%, 1%
b) Male and female elbows, reducing A4 - and 2.
4i x 96, % x $5, 1 x % and lY4 X 1.
3.9 Size Designation of Tees -Reducing or
Increasing on the Branch Bl
3.4 Size Designation of 45” Elbows Al 145” and 45”
Male and Female Elbows A4/45” - Ya, %, %, 1, %X%X% %X%X% 1X%X 1
l%, 1% and 2. %XMX% %X%X% 1X55X 1
95x Y4x ‘h %X44X% 1X%X1
Yzx % x Y2 %X1X% 1X1%X1
3.5 Size Designation of Twin Elbows E2- %, ‘/z, % , Y2x % x ‘$5 %X1%X% 1x 1Yzx 1
1, I%, 1% and 2. ‘h x 1 x Y2 1X%X1 1%X%X 1%
203
SP : 21-1983
l’AX’/zX 1% 1%X2X 1% 2%X2X 2’/2 3.14 Size Designation of Crosses - Reducing Cl

l’AX%X 1% 2XMX2 3X1X3
15/4x 1x1s 2X%X2 3X1%X3 % x %x %x % lj/4X%XIf/4X%
1’Ax 1%X 1% 2X1X2 3x lYzX3 3/4x J/8x % x 3/s 11/4X%X11/4X%
11/qX2Xlvl 2x l’/qX 2 3X2x 3 %x %x %x % 1j/4XlX11/4Xl
1%X ‘/2x 1% 2X11/2X2 3x21/2x3 1x J/x IA’% 11/2X%X 11/4X%
11/2X%X 1% 21/2x 1X2% 4x2x4 IXY2X IX’/2 1?4x 1x IY2X 1
1Yzx 1x 1% 2%X 15/4X2% 4X3X4 1X%X 1X% 1%X l?AX 1%X 1%
1%X 1?Ax 1% 2% x I ‘/Ix 2’/2
2x1x2x1
3.10 Size Designation of Tees - Reducing on the 2x 1Xx2x 1%
Run, Reducing Equal to or Increasing on the Branch 2XlY2X2Xl%
Bl:
‘h x x x 3/s 1X%X% 13/4X1/2X1 IYzxlxl 2x l%Xl’/i

% x $5x % 1X%X% l’AX%X% 1%X 1x 1% 2X2X%
3hx %x 3/s lXYzX% 1’/4X%X 1 l’/iX l?AX% 2X2X1
1x%x% 15/4x lXl/z 1%X 1%X 1 2x 2x 1%
3/4x 3/8x % 1X%X% 11/qx 1X% l%Xl?AIXlvl 2X2X 1!4
3/ x ‘/2 x 3/8 1X%X% l’/IX 1x 1
1%X 11/4x1/2
1x IX% is/4X 11/qx’/z 21/2x ‘/2X2%
1%X1%X%
% x ‘h x % 1X1X% 15/4x lj/qX% 2%X%X21/2
1%X1%X1
3/ x 3hx J/s 1x 1X% 1’Ax 1’/4x1 3X%X3
1%X 1%X 1%
% x %x % 1x l’/AX% 1’Ax 1%X1
%x 1x ‘/!? l%X%Xl’A
2X%X 1?/2
1!4X%X11/4
2x 1x 1%
2x 1’Ax 1%
2x 1’AIAl’/Tz
2Xl%X1’/4
3.11 Size Designation of Pitcher Tees El - J/a, %, 3.15 Size Designation of Bends Dl and Male and
%, 1, 11/4, llh and 2. Female Bends 04 - j/4, 96, %, %, l?A, 1% and 2.
3.12 Size Designation of Pitcher Tees -Reducing 3.16 Size Designation of Long Sweep Bends Gl,
on the Branch, Reducing the Run. and Reducing on Male and Female Long Sweep Bends G4, and Male
Branch and Run El. - Long Sweep Bends GB.
J/4x $5x 95 lYzX%lX 1% a) Long sweep bends G 1, and male and female
3/4 x ‘I2 x 3/4 11/2x 1x 1% longsweepbendsG4-_,‘/4,%,‘/4,%,1,
%X%X % 1%X 1x 1% ll/q, l%, 2, 2%, 3, 3% and 4.
1X1/4X% 1%2x 11/qx 1 b) Male long sweep bend G8 - 3/8, % , % , 1,
1X%X1 i Y2x 1’/4x 1l/4 l%, 1% and 2.
.
1x % x M 11/2x l’/&X 1*/i 3.17 Size Designation of 45” Long Sweep Bends
1X%X% Glk5”, and Male and Female Long Sweep Bends
1X%X1 2x 1x2 G4/45”- 3/4, 968, ‘/i, %, 1, lf/4, l’/i, 2, 2’/4 and 3.
1X1X% 2x 1’Alx 1?4
1Y4x %X 1% 2x 1’/4x2 3.18 Size Designation of Sockets M2; Sockets, Right-
l?AX%Xl .2x IMX 1% and Left-Hand Thread M2R-L; Sockets, Reducing M2;
lj/qX%X 1% 2x 11/4x 1% and Eccentric Sockets, Reducing M3.
1Xx 1X% 2x lYzX2
1Xx 1x 1 a) SocketsM2-1~,f/4,%,%,%,1,1f/4,1~,2,
1’/4XlX 1% 2’h, 3,3%, 4,5 and 6.
lY$Xl?AX 1
b) Sockets, right- and left-hand thread
3.13 Size Designation of Crosses Cl ‘/4, % , % , M2R-L- ‘A, 3/, ‘/i, %, 1, 1X, l%, 2, 21/i
%, 1, 15/4, l%, 2,21/2,3 and4. and 3.
204
SP : 21-1983
c) Sockets,reducingM2 - %X%,%X%, %X%, 3.22 Size Designation of Back Nuts P4 - % , 36, S,

Y2X%, ‘/ix%, %X%, 3/4x%, %X%, IX%, %, 1, 1’/4, I%, 2, 2% and 3.
lXY2,1X%, 1%X%, 1%X%, 1%X%, 1%X1,
lMXY2, lMX%, 1%X1, 144X1%, 2X%, 3.23 Size Designation of Hexagon Caps TI, Round
2X%, 2X1,2X1%, 2X1%, 2YzXY2,2’hX%, Caps 72, Plain Plugs l8, Beaded Plugs T9 and
244x1, 244X1%, 2%X144, 255x2, 3x44, Countersunk Plugs Tl I.
3x%,3X1,3X1%,3X1M,3~2,3~2%,4x2,
4x2% and 4x3.
Size Designation
I h
9
d) Eccentric sockets, reducing M3 - %x 44, Tl T2 T8 T9 Tll
IXM, 1X%, 1%x%, 1%X%, l%Xl,lY2XM,
1%X%, 1%x1, llhXl%, 2X%, 2x 1,2x 1% - % % % -
and 2x1%. % ‘14 % Y4 -
% ?h % % %
1% Y2 44 Y2 44
3.19 Size Designation of Male and Female Sockets xl 3/4 3/4 3/4 J/4
M4, and Male and Female Sockets, Reducing M4. 1 1 1 1 1
1% 1% 1% 1% -
a) Equal Socket size designation M4 - 3/e, 5’2, 144 144 144 1% -
2 2 2 2 -
%, 1 and 1%.
2% - 2% 2% -
3 - 3 3 -
b) Reducing socket size designation M4 - -
- - 3% -
%X%, %X-1/, l/ix%, %XYa, %XM, 1x44,
4 - 4 4 -
1X%, 1%X%, 1%X1, 1%X1, 1%X1%,
2X 1% and 2X 1%.
3.24 Size Designation of Unions, Flat Seat UI; Male
3.20 Size Designation of Bushings N4-%xX, and Femcle Unions, Flat Seat U2; Unions, Taper Seat
%X%,%X%, %X%, vzX%, 1/2X%, %X%, %X%, Ul I; and Male and Female Unions, Raper Seat U12.
%4x%, 1X%. 1X%, lXY2, 1X%, lY4X%, lY4XM,
1%X%, 1%X1, 1%X%, 1%X%, 11/4X%, lYzX1 Size Designation
lYzXl%,2X%, 2X%, 2X1,2X1%,2X1%, 21/2x1, r h \
2%X l%, 2%X1%, 2%X2, 3x 1, 3X1%, 3x lY2, Ul u2 Ull u12
3x2, 3x2%, 3%X3,4X2%, 4X3 and 4X3%.
‘A - % -
Y4 Y4 ‘A Y4
3.21 Size Designation of Hexagon Nipples N8; % %a %a %
Hexagon Nipples, Right- and Left-Hand Thread N8 Y2 M M ?4
R-L; ana’ Hexagon Nipples, Reducing N8. 3/4 3/4 J/4 3/4
1 1 1 1
a) Equal nipple size designation N8 - %, % , 1% 1% 1% 1%
%I, M, %, 1, l%, I%, 2,244,3,3% and 4. 1% 1% 1% 1%
2 2 2 2
b) Equal nipple size designation N8 R-L - %. 254 - 241 2%
M, %, 1, l%, 1% and 2. 3 - 3 3
4 - 4 -
c) Reducing nipple size reducing N8 -

%X% -1%x1/4 2X% - Note - For details regarding dimensionsandweights,see PartsI
1%X% 2X% - to X of the standard.
45X% 1%X 1 2x1

?4X% 2x 1% 4. Pressure Test - Shall show no sign of leakage
144X% 2x1s under either of following:
%X%3 11/4X%
%X44 144x 1 2%X 1% a) Internal hydraulic pressure of 2.068 MNIm2,
11/4x 1% 242x2 or
lXY2
1X% 3x2 b) Internal air pressure of 0.690 MN/m2
3x244 immersed in water or light oil.
205
SP : 21-1983
5. Tolerances
Dimensions, mm up to 30 30-50 50-75 75-100 100-150 150-200 above 200

Tolerance, mm +1.5 *2 + 2.5 +3 +3.5 +4 *5
Note 1 - Centre-to-face dimensions apply to elbows, bends, Note 3 - Centre-to-centre dimensions apply to return bends.
tees, crosses, etc.
Note 2 - Face-to-face dimensions apply to sockets, nipples,
etc. 6. Finish-May be galvanized.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1879 (Parts I to X)-1975 Specification for malleable cast iron pipe
fittings.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3006- 1979 CHEMICALLY RESISTANT GLAZED STONEWARE

PIPES AND FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Material and performance requirements’ 3.2 Waterabsorptionshall notexceed thefollowing:

for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes
Thickness of Pipe or Increase in Mass,
(straight pipes) and fittings (taper pipes; bends, taper
Fitting Percent
bends; junctions; half section channels, straight and
taper; channel junctions; channel bends; channel inter-
Up to 20 mm 3
ceptors; gully traps and inspection pipes). Dimensions
20 to 25 mm 4
of chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and
25 to 32 mm 5
fittings are grouped into two Sections, A and B. Sec-
32 to 38 mm 6
tion A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such
Over 38 mm 8
fittings which normally form a part of a pipe line and
which are subject to the same conditions, specifica- 3.3 Acid Resistance - Loss in mass shall not
tions and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes exceed 1.5 percent.
dimensions of fittings which are commonly used and
which do not from a part of the normal pipe line. The 3.4 Alkali Resistance - Shall not show evidence of
fittings in Section B being hand-moulded, their con- pitting, softening, spalling or cracking.
formity to dimensional specifications is not required to
4. Dimensions
be so accurate as for those in Section A.
4.1 Pipes, Barrels and Sockets
2. Requirements
2.1 Shall be sound and free from visible defects, Internal Mean Thickness Internal
such as, cracks, crazing, etc. Diameter of the Barrel Depth
of Pipe and ofSocket, of Socket
2.2 Shall give sharp clear note when struck with light Min Min
hammer.
a00 12 50
2.3 Interior and exterior surfaces of the pipes and 150 15 57
fittings which remain exposed after jointing, shall be 200 16 63
glazed. 250 20 70
300 25 70
3. Tests
350 30 75
3.1 Pipes shall withstand hydraulic pressure of 400 35 75.
0.3 MPa on the barrels and 0.15 MPa on fittings. The 450 37 76
pressure shall be maintained for not less than 5 seconds 500 40 80
without showing signs of leakage or injury. 600 43 90
206
SP : ‘21-1983
4.2 Length of the barrels of straight and taper pipes, 5. Grooving - The interior of the sockets, and the
junctions and half-section channels, exclusive of the exterior of the spigots shall be grooved cimumferen-
internal depth of the socket, shall be 600,750 or 900 tially and such grooving on the spigot shall be for a
mm. length equal to one and a half times the depth of
the sockets, and the depth of such grooves shall be
4.2.1 Tolerance on length + 10 mm for 600 mm
between 1 mm and 2 mm.
and 750 mm length and + 15 mm for 900 mm length
pipes.
6. Gully Traps
4.2.2 Deviation from straightness shall not exceed
5 mm for 600 mm length of pipes, 6 mm for 750 mm 6.1 Round Mouth Gully Traps
length and 7 mm for pipes of 900 mm length. Type Size
4.3 Sockets - The interior of the sockets shall be mm
conical, having a minimum taper of 1 mm, measured 100x 100, 125x 100 and 150x 100
on the diameter, per 15 mm length. 125x 100
4.4 Tapers, Bends and Junctions P 100X 100, 150X 100 and 150X 150
4.4.1 Internal diameters of taper pipes, half-

6.2 Square-Mouth Gully Traps
section straight channel half-section taper channels,
bends (one quarter, one eight and one sixteenth) and Type Size
junctions shall be selected from 4.1. mm
4.4.2 Barrels and branches of half-section channel P 100X 100,125x 100,150x 100,
junctions may be any of the diameters given in 4.1, but 180x 100 and 180x 150
the diameter of branches shall not exceed the barrel Q 125x 100
diameter. Angle at junction shall be 45 + 3” or 90 f 3”. S 125x 100, 150x 100 and 180~ 150
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to /he s/ondurd.
Note 2-For test procedures, see 6 of the standard. \
For detailed information, refer to IS : 30061979 Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware
pipes and fittings (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3076-1968 LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPES

FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for low density black 5. Dimensions (in mm)

polyethylene pipes of outside diameters up to 140 mm
for use in potable water supplies. Outside Dia Tolerance Outside Dia Tolerance
10 +0.3 50 +0.5
2. Classification - Classified by pressure ratings 12 +0.3 63 +0.6
(working pressures) as 2.5, 4.0,6.0 and 10 kgf/cm*. 16 +0.3 75 + 0.7
20 +0.3 90 +0.8
3. Composition - Extruded from compound con- 25 +0.3 110 +1.0
sisting of polyethylene in which carbon black and a 32 +0.3 125 +1.2
suitable non-toxic antioxidant are evenly dispersed. 40 + 0.4 140 +1.3
4. Lengths - Supplied in coils of nominal lengths Note 1 - For wall thicknesses for different working pressures
of 25, 50, 100, 150 and 200 m. see Table 1 of the standard.
207.
SP : 21-1983
Note 2 - Recommended temperature for above pipes shall pipes shall be as below:
be -40” to +38”C.
Pipe Wall Tensile Strength Elongation
Thickness at Break
6. Tests
a5mm 8.85 MPa 350 percent
6.1 Hydraulic Test
(88.5 kgf/cm2)
6.1.1 General test - Coil of pipe shall with- > 5 mm 8.85 MPa 200 percent
stand not less than twice the working pressure. (88.5 kgf/cm2)
6.1.2 Batch test - Shall not burst nor show signs
6.3 Reversion Test - Sample 15 cm long shall not
of localized swelling, leakage or weeping.
alter in length
” bv, more than 3 oercent
A after immersion
6.2 Tensile Strength -Tensile strength and elonga- in boiling water for one hour and allowed to cool to L
tion at break at 2 + 1°C for different thicknesses of room temperature.
Note-For test procedures, see 7 of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 30761968 Specification for low density polyethylene pipes for
potable water supplies (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3486- 1966 CAST IRON SPIGOT AND SOCKET DRAIN PIPES
1. Scope 3.2 Tolerances

1.1 Requirements for cast iron spigot and socket Internal dia of socket f3 mm
drain pipes subject to low pressures. Internal depth of socket flOmm
Length f20 mm
Note - Cast iron pipes for pressure purposes are covered by Wall thickness - 15 percent
IS : 1.537-1976*.
4. Weight - Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15
1.2 Applicable to pipes with sockets for lead joints.
kg/dm3.
Tolerance = - 5 percent.
2. Requirements - Metal shall satisfy the re-
quirements of tensile test specified for Grade 15 of 5. Hammer Test - Shall emit clear ringing sound
IS : 210-1970t. when struck with a light hand hammer.
3. Dimensions (in mm)

6. Coating-Where coating material has a tar or simi-
3.1 Pipes and Sockets lar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard
Nominal Size 80 100 125 150 200

Pipe I Internal dia 80 100 125 150 200,
Thickness 8 9 9.5 10 11 &..
Socket { Internal dia 112 135 163 189 241

Internal depth 84 88 91 94 100
Nominal weight of pipes including socket { 1 800 mm length 33 45 58 73 105
length, exclusive of internal depth of socket 2 700 mm length 47 65 84 105 152
Note-For detailed dimensions and sketch, see Table 1 of the standard.
*Specification for vertical cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of
and sewage firer revision). 77°C but not so brittle at 0°C as to chip off when
TSpecification for grey iron castings (second revision). scribed lightly with a pen knife.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3486-1966 Specification for cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes.
208
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3589-1981 6LECTRICALLY WELDED STEEL PIPES

FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(150 TO 2 000 am NOMINAL SIZE)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of electric fusion (arc) Nominal Outside Nominal Outside
welded, electric resistance welded and induction Size Dia Size Dia
welded carbon steel pipes for water, gas and sewage of mm mm mm mm
nominal size from 150 to 2 000 mm and having joints 1 150 1 168.4 1600 1 620
with plain or bevelled ends for butt welding or sleeve 1 200 1 220 1 700 1 720
welded joints (swelled and plain end). 1300 1 320 1 800 1 820
It does not cover steel pipes with screwed joints and 1 400 1 420 2 000 2 020
requirements for specials, such as collars, tees and 1 500 1 520
bends, etc.
5. Thickness
2. Designation - Pipes are designated by method
of manufacture followed by number corresponding to Nominal Size Minimum Thickness
the minimum specified tensile strength in MPa. For mm mm
example, ERW 410 indicates electric resistance welded
150 to 300 4
and induction. welded pipes having a minimum tensile
Above 300 to 500 5
strength of 410 MPa. Similarly EFW 410 would indi-
Above 500 to 600 6
cate electric fusion (arc) welded pipe having 410 MPa
Above 600 to 850 7
minimum tensile strength.
Above 850 to 1 200 8
Above 1 200 to 2 000 10
3. Lengths
3.1 Random Lengths - Steel tubes shall be 6. Tolerances
supplied in single random lengths from 4 to 7 m or 6.1 Outside Diameter
double random lengths of 7 to 14 m. In case of orders a) Pipe body - kO.75 percent up to 500 mm
over 200 m, of any size, short random length shall be 2 size and f 1.00 percent for sizes over
to 4 m provided total of such lengths does not exceed 500 mm.
7.5 percent of total lengths.
b) Pipe ends at distance of 100 mmfrom end of
3.2 Where length is specified as ‘exact’ or ‘cut pipe) - + 1.6 and - 0.40 mm for pipes up
length’, permissible variation shall be ‘!i mm for to 250 mm and +2.4 and -0.80 mm for
pipes over 250 mm.
lengths up to 6 m. For every 3 m increase in length
above 6 m, plus toierances shall be increased, by 2 mm 6.2 Thickness - f 10 percent for ERW pipes and
with maximum of 20 mm. + 15 and - 10 percent for EFW pipe.
4. Outside Diameters
6.3 Straightness - Maximum deviation of 0.2 per-
Norninal outside . ..
Nawinal Outside cent of total length.
Size Dia Size Dia
mm mm mm mm
7. Hydraulic Pressure Test - Maximum test
150 168.3 600 609.6
pressure shall not exceed 5 MPa.
175 193.7 650 660.4
200 219.1 700 711.2
225 244.5 750 762.0 8. Condition of Supply - Unless otherwise agreed
250 273.0 800 8 12.8 to mutually, the pipe shall be supplied without any
300 323.9 850 863.6 protective coating.
350 355.6 900 914.4
400 406.4 950 965.2
9. Mechanical Tests
450 457.2 1000 1 016.0
500 508.0 1 050 1 066.8 9.1 Tensile Test - The tensile strength and per-
550 558.8 1100 1 117.6 centage elongation of pipes shall not be less than the.
209
SP : 21-1983
following values: 9.2 Flattening Test (for EI?W Pipes) - No opening

Steel Grade Tensile Strength Percentage shall occur by fracture in the weld and no cracks or
Elongation bmaks on the metal.
MPa on 5.65flo
320 320 20 9.3 Guided Bend Test (for EFW Pipes) - Specimen
410 410 18 shall not fracture completely.
So is original cross-sectional area of specimen.
10. Workmanship - Pipes shall be clearly
Note - Tensile test shall be carried out in accordance with
procedure given in IS : 1894-1972*. finished and be free from defects, such as cracks,
surface flame, laminations, etc. Repair of defects shall
*Methods for tensile testing of steel tubes (firer revision). be permissible in weld seam of EFW pipes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3589-1981 Specification for electrically welded steel pipes for water,
gas and sewage (150 to 2 000 mm nominal size) (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3989-1970 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) IRON SPIGOT

AND SOCKET SOIL, WASTE AND VENTILATING PIPES,
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for centrifugally cast 3.3 Equal and Unequal Branches (SinglelDouble)
(spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilat- With and Without Access Door
ing pipes together with the details of fittings and acces-
Nominal Dia Angles of Bend
sories. These pipes and fittings are suitable for use
above ground only. 50
75
100 92Yz”9 112%” and 135”
2. Requirements
1501
2.1 Pipes and fittings shall be such that they may be
cut, drilled or machined. 3.4 Off-Sets
Nominal Dia Off-set
2.2 Shall emit aclear ringing sound when struck with
a light hand hammer. 50
75 I.
3. Dimensions (in mm) 1001 75, 115 and 150
3.1 Socket and Spigot Pipes 150

3.5 Taper
Nominal dia 50, 75, 100, 150
Barrel dia (external) 57, 83, 109, 161 Nominal Dia
Internal dia 73, 99, 126, 179 / \
Spigot Socket
3.2 Bends With and Without Access Doors 75
Nominal Dia Angles of Bend 100 5”
100 75
150 100
92lh” , 112%” and 135” 3.6 Collars (Double Socket)
15oJ Nominal dia - 50, 75, 100 and 150
210
SP : 21-1983
3.7 Connectors (C.Z. to Stoneware andStoneware to 3.15 Traps with Vent

C.I.)
Nominal Dia Angle of Bend at rhe End
Nominal dia - 100 and 150.
3.8 Connectors -Plug (Stopper) /
Nominal dia - 50, 75, 100 and 150. 100 50 95”, 135” and 180”
3.9 Larger Radius Bends 3.16 Floor Trap (Nahni)
Nominal Dia Angle of Bend
Nominal dia - 50 and 75.
751 3.17 Shoe Bends and Cowls
1001 92?4”, 11244” and 135”
150 Nominal dia - 50, 75, 100 and 150.
3.10 Equal and Unequal Single Parallel Branches Note - For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to the stun-
Nominal Dia dard.
4. Tderances
w
100 100 External dia of barrel f 3 mm for 50 and
100 50 75 mm pipes
3.11 Equal and Unequal Inverted Branches Socket * 3.5 mm for 100 mm
Type pipes
f 4.0 mm for 150 mm
Nominal Dia Angle of Bend pipes
I Internal dia of socket+3 mm.

50 50 Note - For rubber joints minus tolerance shall be zero
95” f 112%” and 180”
100
100 50>
100 5. Weight - Specific weightofcast iron is taken as
3.12 Traps 7.15 kg/dm3.
Tolerance on weight: - 10 percent.
Nomind Dia Angle of Bend at the End
50 6. Test (If Required by Purchaser) - Shall with-
75 stand hydrostatic pressure of 0.7 kgf/cm2 maintained
100 99, 135” and 180’ for 15 seconds without showing signs of leakage,
1501 sweating or other defects.
3.13 Access Door and Straight Inspection Piece
7. Cuating - Where coating material has tar or
Nominal dia - 50,75, 100 and 150. similar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard
3.14 Floor Trap enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of
77°C but not so brittle at 0°C as to chip off when scribed
Nominal dia - 50, 75 and 100. lightly with a pen knife.
-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3989-1970 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and
socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision).
211
- ,
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4984-1978 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPES

FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES, SEWAGE AND
INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENTS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for high density Outside Tolerance Outside Tolerance
polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage Dia on Outside Dia on Outside
and indusirial effluents. Dia Dia
32 + 0.3 200 + 1.8
2. Classification - Classified by pressure ratings 40 + 0.4 225 + 2.1
(working pressures) at 27°C as follows: 50 + 0.5 250 + 2.3
Class of Pipe Working Pressure 63 + 0.6 280 + 2.6
75 + 0.7 315 + 2.9
Class 1 0.2 MPa 90 + 0.8 355 + 3.2
Class 2 0.25 MPa 110 + 1.0 400 + 3.6
Class 3 0.4 MPa 125 + 1.2 450 + 4.1
Class 4 0.6 MPa 140 + 1.3 500 + 4.5
Class 5 1 MPa
Note - For wall thickness of different classification of pipes,
Note - The above pipes are recommended for water tempera- see Table 1 of the standard.
ture ranging from -40 to +4-W. The creep mpNre strength of the
pipe diminishes with the increase in temperature above 27°C and 4. Physical Characteristics - Pipes shall possess
the working pressure should be modified as given in Fig. 1 of the
standard.
smooth internal and external surfaces corresponding to
the manufacturing method.
Outside Tolerance Outside Tolerame 5.1 Intern& Pressure Creep Rupture Test - Shall
Dia on Outside Dia on Oulside show no sign of localized swelling, leakage or weeping
Dia Dia and shall not burst.
20 + 0.3 160 + 1.5 5.2 Reversion Test - Dimension; shall not change
25 + 0.3 180 + 1.7 by more than 3 percent in the longitudinal direction.
Note- For test procedures, refer to rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4984-1978 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for
potable water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents (second revision).
SUMMARY OF ..
IS, : 4985-1981 UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES FOR POTABLE

WATER SUPPLIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for plain end as well as ratings (working pressures) at 27°C as follows:
socket end pipes made of unplasticized polyvinyl Class of Pipe Working Pressure
chloride for potable water supplies. Class 1 0.25 MPa
Class 2 0.4 MPa
Class 3 0.6 MPa
2. Classification - Shall be classified by pressure Class 4 1.0 MPa
212
SP : 21-1983
Note - The above pipes are recommended for water tempera- 4.2 Opacity - Wall of socket portion and plain pipe
ture ranging from 1 to +4YC. The recommended maximum safe shall not transmit more than 0.2 percent of visible light
working stress for these pipes is 10 MPa at 2@‘C. At higher
falling on them.
temperature up to 45% the strength of the pipe reduces and the
working pressure shall be modified in accordance with Fig. 1 of
4.3 Effect on Water - Pipes shall not have any de-
the standard.
trimental effect on composition of water flowing
3. Dimensions through them. When tested, quantities of various toxic
substances extracted from internal walls of pipes shall
3.1 Plain Pipes and Socket End/Bell End Pipes not exceed the following concentrations in test solu-
Nominal Mean Outside Socket tion:
Outside Dia, Max Length, L Lead (first extraction) 1 .O mg/litre
Dia Min Lead (third extraction) 0.3 mg/litre
mm mm mm Dialkyl tin 0 and higher
16 16.3 14 homologues measured as tin
20 20.3 16 (third extraction) 0.02 mg/litre
25 25.3 19 Other toxic substances (third ex-
32 32.3 22 traction 0.01 mg/litre
40 40.3 26
Note - 1.Omg/litre would mean 1 .O part per million by mass.
50 50.3 31
63 63.3 38 4.4 Reversion Test - A length of pipe of approxi-
75 15.3 44 mately 300 mm shall not alter in length by more than 5
90 90.3 51 percent.
110 110.4 61
125 125.4 69 4.5 Stress Relief Test - To be carried out for bell
140 140.5 76 end pipes only. Test specimen shall not show blisters,
160 160.5 86 excessive delamination or cracking or signs of weld
180 180.6 % line splitting.
200 200.6 106 4.6 Resistance to Sulphuric Acid - Mass of speci-
225 225.7 119 men shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g nor
250 250.8 131 decrease by more than 0.013 g.
280 280.9 146
315 316.0 164 5. Mechanical Properties
3.2 Plain End Pipes for Plumbing Work - These 5.1 Hydrostatic Characteristics - When subjected
shall be available in mean outside dia of 20,25,32,40 to internal hydrostatic pressure test, the pipes shall not
and 50 mm. burst during the prescribed test duration.
Note - For detailed dimensions including wall thickness of all 5.2 Impact Strength at 0°C - Pipe samples should
types of pipes and tolerances, refer to 5 of rhe standard. meet the requirements given in Appendix K of the
standard.
4. Physcial and Chemical Characteristics
4.1 Visual Appearance - Internal and external sur- 6. Supply of Pipes - Pipes shall be supplied in
faces of pipe shall be smooth and clean, free from straight lengths of 4,5 and 6 m with a tolerance of + 10
groovings and other defects. End shall be cleanly cut and - 0 mm. It may be in other lengths as mutually
and be square with axis of pipe. agreed to. ..
Note - For method of measurements of outside dia and wall thickness of pipes and for methods of various tests, refer to Appendices
A to J of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4985-1981 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable
water supplies (first revision).
213
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5504-1969 SPIRAL WELDED PIPES
1. Scope - Requirements for spiral welded pipes is intended should be stated in the order.
suitable for use for conveying gas, water and oil. The
suitability of pipe for various purposes is somewhat 2. Grades - YSt 21, YSt 25, YSt 30, YSt 32 and
dependent upon its dimensions, properties and condi- YSt 37.
tions of service, so that the purpose for which the pipe 3. Dimensions
1
Outside Wall Standard Test Pressure, kgf/cm*, Min
Dia, mm Thickness, A
/ \
mm YSt 21 Yst 25 Yst 30 YSt 32 YSt 37
114.3 3.18 70 84 99 10s 122

to to to to
17.12 176 176 271 211 2:1
141.3 3.% 70 84 100 109 123
to to to
15.88 I?6 176 211 271 2:1
168.3 3.18 49 56 84 92 104
to
15.88 176 176 2:1 2?1 2:1
219.1 4.78 56 63 97 106 120
to
l&8 176 176 2L 2PI 2?1
273.0 4.78 46 53 88 96 109
to to
20.62 176 1?6 2:1 211 2:1
323 4.78 39 42 75 82 92
to to
19.05 1:8 176 271 2L 271
355.6 5.56 39 46 79 86 98
to to to
1955 134 155 2?l 211 2?1
406.4 5.56 35 42 76 69 86
to to
l&5 1’2”O 141 2?1 211 2:1
457.2 5.56 32 35 61 67 75
to
19.05 ltG 1;7 2& 2:1 2E L.
508.0 5.56 28 32 58 64 72
to to to to to
19.05 98 112 1:3 193 193
609.6 6.35 28 32 56 61 69
to to to to to
19.05 77 91 162 162 1:2
711.2 6.35 23 26 48 52 59
to to to to to
15.88 56 65 119 130 l?l
812.8 6.35 19 23 42 46 52
to to to to to
15.88 49 58 104 114 1;9
214
SP : 21-1983
Outside Wall Standard Test Pressure, kgflcm2, Min

Dia, mm Thickness, h &
/
mm YSt 21 Yst 25 YSt 30 YSt 32 Yst 37
914.4 6.35 18 21 37 41 46
to to to to to
15.88 44 51 93 El 115
1016,O 9.52 25 28 50 55 62
12.70 32 37 67 73 82
15.88 40 46 84 91 103
Noti - For details regarding weight and alternative test pres- making a jointer shall be less than 1.50 m. Skelp end
sure see Table 1 of the standard. welds shall be at least 0.3 m from the jointer weld.
4. Tolerances Note - Forrequirements of welded jointerssee Appendix B of

the standard.
a) Outside diameter + 1 percent
b) Wall thickness 7. Physical Tests
For pipe sizes 457.2 mm +15 percent
and smaller - 12.5 7.1 Tensile Properties
For pipe sizes 508.0 mm +15 percent Tensile Elongation
Grade of Pipe Yield
and larger -10 3 Strength in 50.80 mm
Strength
c) Length: on Wall
Min
Length Shortest Minimum kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2 Zhickness
Length Average 7.92 mm and
Length in Larger
Shipment Percent
Single random 2.75 m 5.50 m Yst 21 21.1 33.7 35
lengths YSt 25 24.6 42.2 30
Double random 4.30 m 11.0 m Yst 30 29.5 42.2 25
lengths YSt 32 32.3 44.3 23.
As agreed to 40 percent - 46.4* 22
Yst 37 36.6
lengths -in of average
excess of agreed to Note - For details regarding elongation for other wall
thicknesses see Table 3 of the standard.
6.1 m
7.2 Flattening Test - Shall withstand the pre-
5. Workmanship - Pipe ends shall be bevelled to
scribed test.
an angle of 30” (+ 5” and -0”) from a line drawn
perpendicular to axis of pipe and with a root face of 7.3 Submerged -Arc Weld Tests - Shall with-
1.60 + 0.8 mm. Both ends of submerged arc welded stand the prescribed test.
pipes shall have the inside weld reinforcement re- 7.4 Hydrostatic Tests - For test pressuressee 3 of
moved for a distance of approximately 100 mm from this summary.
the end of the pipe.
*For grade YSt 37 pipe in sizes 508 mm larger, with wall thicknes-
6. Jainters - Jointers may be furnished to a ses 9.52 and smaller, the minimum tensile strength shall be 50.61
maximum of 5 percent of order, but no lengths used in kgf/mm2.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1960 Method-of tensile testing of steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube
and 9 of the standard.
~__ ~_____
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5504-1969 Specification for spiral welded pipes.
~__ --___ ____
215
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5531 (PARTS I TO III)-1977 CAST IRON SPECIALS

FOR ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER,
GAS AND SEWAGE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - General requirements for cast iron spe- of engagement end of a fitting shall match outside
cials to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes for diameter of asbestos-cement pressure pipe conforming
water, gas and sewage. This standard (Part I) is appli- to IS : 1592 - 1970*. Engagement length shall not be
cable to cast iron specials for use with asbestos cement less than 75 mm.
pressure pipes suitable for connection with cast iron
detachable joints or asbestos cement couplings. 5. Tolerances on Dimensions
Note - Metric system has been adopted in India and all quan- Machined outside dia + 1.5
tities and dimensions appearing in this standard have heen given in - 1.0 mm
this system. However, it may be noted that the designation is
based on the international practice of including nominal inch sizes
Length and height +15
of pipe threads at the outlets. -1Omm
Wall thickness - (2.00 mm + 0.05 e)
Flange thickness f (3.00 mm + 0.05 b)
2. Mechanical Tests
where, e = standard thickness of wall in mm,
2.1 Tensile Test - Minimum tensile strength 150
and
Nlmrr&( 15 kgf/mm2). Refer Appendix A of the stun-
b = standard thickness of flange in mm.
durd for method of test.
6. Mass - Density is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3. Toler-
2.2 Brine11 Hardness Test - Hardness of external
ance on mass f 8 percent (In case of bends, fittings
unmachincd surface shall not exceed 215 HB. with more than one branch and non-standard fittings it
3. Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand (without shall be f 12 percent). Fittings of heavier mass may be
showing leakage, sweating or other defects) the test accepted if they comply with all other requirements.
pressure (maintained for at least 15 seconds) specified
in Table 1 of IS : 1592- 1970* for the class of 7. Coating - Where coating material has a tar or
asbestos-cement pressure pipes with which they are to similar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard
be used. enough not to flow at temperature upto 77°C and not so
brittle as to chip off (when scribed lightly with a
4. Dimensions -As specified in Parts II and III. pen knife) at temperature of 0°C. When fittings are used
The nominal diameter of a special corresponds to the for conveying potable water, coating shall not contain
internal diameter or bore of the pipe. Outside diameter any constituent soluble in such water or any ingredient
which will impart any taste or odour to potable water
*Specification for asbestos-cement pressure pipes yirsr revision). after sterilisation and washing of the mains.
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CAST IRON*PLAIN-END BENDS, PLUGS,

REDUCERS AND CROSSES
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions and mass 2.2 Dimensions (in mm)
of the cast iron plain-end bends, plugs, reducers and
crosses for use with asbestos-cement pressure pipes. 2.2.1 Cast iron plain-end bends
2. Requirements Nominal 80 100 125 150 200 250 300

Dia
2.1 General requirements for material, mechanical
Thickness 8.6 9 9.5 10 11 12 13
tests, hydrostatic test, tolerances, coating and marking
shall be as given in Part I. Bend Angles 90”, 45” and 22”30
216
,
SP : 21-1983
2.2.2 Cast iron plain-end plugs 2.2.4 Cast iron plain-end crosses
Nominal 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 Nominal 80 100 125 150 200 250 300
Dia Dia
Overall 125 130 135 140 150 155 160 Overall 180 200 225 250 300 350 400
Length Length
Thickness 8.6 9 9.5 10 11 12 13
2.2.3 Cast iron plain-end reducers
Nominal Inside Dia
Dia at Small End
100 80
125 80, 100
150 80, 100
200 00, 125, 150
250 25, 150, 200
300 50, 200, 250
Overall length of reducer = 400 mm
Note-For details regarding mass of cast iron specials for class 5, 10 and 15 see Tables 1 to 4 of Part II of the standard.
-
PART Ill SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CAST IRON PLAIN-END FLANGED SPIGOTS,
TEESITs) AND WYES(Ysl
1. Scope -Requirements for dimensions and mass 2.2.2 Cast iron plain-end tees
of the cast iron plain-end flanged spigots, tees and
wyes for, use with asbestos-cement pressure pipes. Nominal Inside Dia at Reducer End, Length of
Dia in Branch Line Tee
2. Requirements 80 80 360
2.1 General requirements for material, mechanical 100 80, 100 400
tests, hydrostatic test, tolerances, coating and marking 125 80, 100, 125 450
shall be as given in Part I. 150 80, 100, 125, 150 500
200 80, 100, 125, 150, 200 600
2.2 Dimensions (in mm) 250 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250 700
2.2.1 Cast iron plain-end flanged spigots 300 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300 800
Nominal Dia of Flange H&s Overall 2.2.3 Cast iron plain-end wyes
Dia Flange Thick- ,------*-. Length
ness Number Dia. Nominal Dia Inside Dia at Branch End
80 200 21 4 19 200 80 80
100 220 22 8 19 200 100 80, 100
125 250 22.5 8 19 200 125 80, 100, 125
150 285 23 8 23 200 150 80, 100, 125, 150
200 340 24.5 8 23 200 200 80, 100, 125, 150, 200
250 395 26 12 23 300 250 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250
300 445 27.5 12 23 300 300 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
Note-For details regarding mass ofcast iron specials for class 5, lO#and 15, see Tables 1 to 3 of Part 111of the standard.
- ..~
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5531 (Parts I io III)-I977 SpecificatioFfor cast iron specials for
asbestos-cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision).
I_._______-
217
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6163-1978 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) IRON

LOW PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(First Revision)
1. Scope Nominal External Socket
Dia Dia , /r
1.1 Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron of Barrel Internal Depth’
low pressure pipes, known as LP pipes, for con- Dia
veyance of water, gas and sewage, manufactured in 80 98 116 84
metal or sand moulds. 100 118 137 88
125 144 163 91
I.2 This standard is applicable to cast iron pipes
having spigots and sockets as specified in this standard, 150 170 189 94
and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly 200 222 241 100
rubber joints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile 250 274 294 103
of the socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type 300 326 346 105
of rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions
350 378 398 107
are maintained for reasons of safety and interchange-
ability. 400 429 449 110
450 480 501 112
2. Mechanical Tests 500 532 553 115
600 635 657 120
2.1 Ring Test (for Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds)
700 738 760 122
Up to and including Modulus of Rupture 750 790 813 123
300 mm nominal dia 40 kgf/mn? , Min 5.2 Socket andSpigotLow Pressure Pipes - Class Lp
Nominal Barrel Mass Approx
2.2 Tensile Test Dia /\ \ kglm
/
2.2.1 Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds
External Thickness
Dia
Nominal Dia Tensile Strength, 80 98 4.9 10.25
Min 100 118 5.1 12.94
Over 300 mm and 20 kgf/mm2
125 144 5.4 16.82
up to 600 mm
Over 600 mm 18 kgf/mm2 150 170 5.7 21.04
200 222 6.5 31.48
2.2.2 Pipes Cast in Sand Moulds 250 274 7.0 42.00
Tensile strength 18 kgf/mm2, Min 300 329 7.6 54.27
(all diameters) 350 378 8.8 72.20
400 429 9.4 87.70 . ..
3. Brine11 Hardness Test - Hardness of external 450 480 10.0 105.70
unmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB. 132.20
500 532 11.4
175.80
600 635 12.6 226.60
4. Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand test pres- 700 738 14.0 253.40
sure of 17.5 kgf/cm2 without showing leakage, sweat-
750 790 14.6
ing or other defects, when kept under pressure for 15
seconds. All pipes shall withstand a test pressure of Working length : 3.66, 4, 4.88 and 5.5 m.
6 kgf/cm* after installation.
6. Tolerances
a) External diameter of barrel: + ‘/2f =
5. Sizes (in mm)
+(4.5+0.0015 DN) mm
5.1 Sockets and Spigots of Low Pressure Pipes (Lead b) Internal diameter of socket: + %f=
Joint) + (3+0.001 DN) mm
218
SP : 21-1983
c>Depth of socket 7. Mass - Density of cast iron is taken as

Nominal dia up to 600 mm : f 5 mm 7.15 kg/dm3.
Nominal dia over 600 mm : + 10 mm Tolerance f 5 percent.
4 Length : * 25 mm
4 Wall thickness : -(l + 0.05 e) mm 8. Coating -Where coating material has tar or
similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard
f) Maximum deviation from straight line (in mm) enough not to flow at temperature of 77°C and not so
shall not be greater than 1.25 times the length of
brittle as to chip off at 0°C when scribed lightly with a
pipe in metres.
penknife. When pipes are used for conveying potable
where ‘f ’ is caulking space of joint in mm - 9 + water, inside coating shall not contain any constituent
0.003 DN soluble in such water or any ingredient which could
DN = Nominal dia in mm impart any taste or odour to the potable water after
e = Wall thickness in mm sterilization and washing of the mains.
Note-For methods of test, refer to IS : 1789-1961 Method for Brine11hardness test for grey cast iron and Apbendix A of rhe
standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6163-1978 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low
pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6418-1971 CAST IRON AND MALLEABLE CAST IRON FLANGES

FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
1. Scope - Covers grey cast iron and malleable 1.1 Type of gasket and gasket materials are not co-
cast iron flanges for general engineering purposes, vered in thestandard and shall be subject to agreement
which shall be applicable from 0 to 300°C for oil, between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
water, steam, compressed air, gases and other non-
corrosive fluids. 2. Pressure and Temperature Rating
Nominal Type of Material Design Pressure (Nlmm2) at Temperature “C fl

Pressure ‘Cast Iron Mall&able% ‘- 10 150 180 200 220 250 260 3m
N/mm2 IS : 210 Gr Cast Iron to
120
0.25 15 - 0.25 _ _ _ _ _ _ _
20 - 0.25 0.23 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.18 0.17 0.15
0.60 15 - 0.60 - _ - _ - _ _ . ..
20 - 0.60 0.56 0.52 0.50 0.50 0.45 0.43 0.36
- IS : 2107GrB 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.50
- IS : 2108GrC 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.50
1.0 15 - 1.0 _ - - - - - -
20 - 1.0 0.92 0.85 0.80 0.80 0.70 0.68 0.60
1.6 20 - 1.60 1.48 1.39 1.30 1.30 1.10 1.08 1.00
- IS : 2107GrB 1.60 1.56 1.52 1.50 1.40 1.40 1.38 1.30
- IS : 2108GrC 1.60 1.56 1.52 1.50 1.49 1.40 1.38 1.30
2.5 25 - 2.50 2.30 2.12 2.00 1.80 1.80 1.75 1.60
- IS : 2107GrB 2.50 2.42 2.35 2.36 2.20 2.10 2.08 2.00
- IS : 2108GrC 2.50 2.42 2.35 2.30 2.20 2.10 2.08 2.00
219
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - For grey cast iron flanges, the pressure and tempera- Table 10 2.5/l Integral grey cast iron flanges
ture rating shall be reduced by 25 Percent, where moderate shock Nominal pressure : 2.5 N/mm*
(as may occur in efficient boiler feed main) is likely to be present. Nominal size : 10 to 500 mm
Note 2 - Intermediate values may be obtained by linear
interpolation. 1 N/mmz= 0.012 kg/mm*. Table 11 2.5/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges
Nominal pressure : 2.5 N/mm*
3. Designation - By nominal size and flange table Nominal size : 10 to 150 mm
reference. First part of the table reference is nominal
pressure and the second part indicates the material and Table 12 2.513 Malleable cast iron screwed boss
type of flange as follows: flanges
a) Grey cast iron - integral (1) Nominal size : 6 to 150 mm
b) Malleable c&t iron - integral (2)
c) Malleable cast iron - screwed boss (3) Note 1 - Nominal sizes are 6,8, 10, 15,20,25,32,40,50,
65,80, 100, 125, 150,200,250, 300,350,400,500,600,700,
Table 2 0.25/l Integral grey cast iron flanges 800,900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800,2000,2200,
2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3600, 3 800 and
Nominal pressure : 0.25 N/mm* 4000mm.
Nominal size: 10to40OOmm
Note 2 - For typical illustration of ‘Integral Flange’ and
Table 3 0.6/l Integral grey cast iron flanges ‘Screwed Boss Flange’ see Figures 1 and 2 of the standard.
Nominal pressure : 0.6 N/mm* Note 3 - For detailed dimensions see Tables 2 to 12 of the
Nominal, size : 10 to 3 600 mm standard.
Table 4 0.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges

Nominal pressure : 0.6 N/mm* 4. Thread of Screwed Flanges - Flanges up to
Nominal size : 10 to 150 mm _ 600 mm shall be threaded in accordance with IS : 3333
(Part I)-1967*.
Table 5, 0.613 Malleable cast iron screwed boss
flanges 5. Flange Facing
6 to 150mm a) Smooth - With no visible tool marks, or
Nominal size :
1.0/l Integral grey cast iron flanges b) Serrated - With a continuous spiral groove
Table 6
Nominal pressure : 1 .O N/mm* of 1.5 mm pitch and approximately 0.25 mm
Nominal size: 200 to 3 000 mm deep.
6. General
Table 7 1.6/l Integral grey cast iron flanges 6.1 Flange surfaces shall befreefromcasting surface
defects and segregations.
Nominal size : 10to10OOmm
6.2 It is recommended to use stud bolts with nuts on
Table 8 1.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges both sides for nominal pressures above 15 kgf/cm*.
Nominal pressure : 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm*
Nominal size : 10 to 150 mm 7. Hydraulic Test - Test pressure applied to the
joint shall not exceed 1.5 times the nominal pressure
Table 9 1.6/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss for flanges.
flanges --
Nominal pressure : 1 .O and 1.6 N/mm* *Dimensions for petrolium industry pipe threads: Part I Line pipe
Nominal size : 6 to 150 mm threads.
____ __. _ ._.~ .~~.._ -_._... -.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6418-1971 Specification for cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges
for general engineering purposes.
220
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7181-1974 HORIZONTALLY CAST IRON DOUBLE FLANGED

PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
1. Scope -Requirements for double flanged cast Flange Dia 200 220 250 285 340 395 445
iron pipes for pressure main lines of water, gas and Flange 21 22 22.5 23 24.5 26 27.5
sewage manufactured by horizontal castings in sand Thickness
moulds .
5.3 Standard Flange Drilling of Flanged Pipes and
2. Manufaiztpre -Metal quality not leas than Fittings
Grade 15. F!$pes shall be such that they could be cut,
Nominal Dia 80100125150200250300
drilled or &adhined. Hardness of external unmachined
surface not greater than 2 10 HB . Number 4 8 8 8 8 12 12
Holes Dia 19 19 19 23 23 23 23
{
3. Mechanical Tests -Tensile strength not less
than 15 kgf/mm2. 6. Tolerances
On external diameter of barrel +3
-4.5 mm
4. Hydraulic Tests - Shall withstand, without
On flange thickness + (2 + 0.05 b) mm
showing leakage or sweating, a test pressure of
25 kgf/cm2, when kept under pressure for 15 seconds where b is thickness of flange in mm.
and struck moderately with a 700 g hammer.
On length + 10 mm.
5. Sizes (in mm) Maximum deviation from straight line, in mm
5.1 Double Flanged Pipes c 1.25 times the length in metres.
Nominal Barrel Dia Weight Per Metre 7. Weight - density of cast iron is 7.15 kg/dm3.
Dia (External) Vpprox) , kgf Tolerance f 5 percent.
r A \
Class A Class B 7.1 Pipes of heavier mass shall be accepted if they
80 98 17.3 19.8 comply other requirements of the standard.
100 118 22.0 25.4 8. Coating

125 144 28.7 33.1
8.1 Where coating material has tar or similar base, it
150 170 35.9 41.6
shall be hard enough not to flow at 77°C but not so
200 222 52.1 60.1
brittle at 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a
250 274 70.6 81.8 pen knife.
300 326 91.4 106.1
8.2 When pipes convey potable water inside coating
Working length = 2 to 3 m shall not contain any constituent soluble in such water
or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour
5.2 Flanges of Pipes ana’ Fittings to potable water after sterilization and suitable washing
Nominal Dia 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 of mains.
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to the standard.

Note 2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1789-1961Method of Brine11hardness test for grey cast iron; and IS : 2078-1962 Method
for tensile testing of grey cast iron.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7181-1974 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged
pipes for water, gas and sewage.
221
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7834 (PART I)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC

SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS
FOR WATER SUPPLIES
1. Scope : General requirements regarding mate- Nominal Socket Mean So&et Internal
rials, manufacture, methods of test, inspection and Size Length Dia at Mid-Point
marking of all types of injection moulded PVC socket Min I-~-,
fittings intended for connection, by using solvent D, Min D, Max
cement, to PVC pipes covered by IS : 4985-1981*.
90 51 90.1 90.3
2. Materials - Polyvinyl chloride, and such addi- 110 61 110.1 110.4
tives as are needed for manufacture of sound pipe with 125 69 125.1 125.4
good finish and without constituting a toxic hazard. 140 76 140.1 140.5
160 86 160.2 160.5
3. Size of Fitting - Designated by diameters of
5.2 out-4 Roundness Tolerances of Socket Inside
their sockets. Inside diameters of the sockets of the
Diameter - Maximum tolerance (maximum dia
fittings shall correspond to outside diameters of pipes
given in IS : 4985-1981*. minus minimum dia) shall be:
a) less than or equal to 0.007 D, or
4. Thickness - Not less than 3 mm. b) equal to 0.2 mm (if 0.007 D is less than 0.2
mm)
5. Socket Length and Diameter At Mid-Point of
Socket Length 6. Tests and Performance Requirements
5.1 Minimum socket length (L) of any fitting shall 6.1 Stress Relief Test - Shall not show blisters, ex-
be = 0.5 D + 6 mm (subject to a minimum of 12 mm) cessive delamination or cracking, or weldline splitting.
where D = nominal inside diameter of fitting.
6.2 Opacity - Wall of fitting shall hot transmit
Socket dimensions shall be as given below: more than 0.2 percent of visible light falling on it.
6.3 Effect on Water - Shall not have any detrimen-
Nominal Socket Mean Socket Internal tal effect on composition of water flowing through
Size Length Dia at Mid-Point them. Toxic substances extracted by water from inter-
Min ,-A-l nal walls of fitting shall not exceed the following:
D, Min D, Max
Lead (first extraction) 1.0 mg/l
16 14 16.1 16.3
Lead (third extraction) 0.3 mg/l
20 16 20.1 20.3 0.02 mg/l
Dialkyl tin Cz and higher
25 19 25.1 25.3 homologues measured as
32 22 32.1 32.3 tin (third extraction)
Other toxic substances 0.01 mg/l ..
40 26 40.1 40.3
50 31 50.1 50.3 (third extraction)
63 38 63.1 63.3
6.4 Short Term Hydraulic Test - Fitting shall
75 44 75.1 75.3 withstand a pressure of 4.2+0.2 times the working
*Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water -0
supplies flrsr revision). pressure for one hour without failure.
Note- For test procedures see Appendices A to D of the sumfurd.
&‘or detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket
fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
222
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7834 (PART II)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET

FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 45O ELBOWS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Laying Length Tolerance

sions, tolerances and marking for 45” elbows made of mm mm mm
injection moulded PVC for water supplies.
63 14 +3.2
-1
2. Requirements
75 16.5 +4
-1
2.1 Laying length and tolerance thereon shall be as
90 19.5 +5
follows :
-1
Size Laying Length Tolerance 110 23.5 +6
mm mm mm -1
16 4.5 -tl 125 27 +6
20 5 +1 -1
+1.2 140 30 +7
-1 -1
32 7.5 +1.6 160 34 +8
-1 -1
Note - For typical illustration of a 45” elbow see Fig. 1 of the
+2
9.5 standard.
-1
+2.5 2.2 Inside diameter of socket and socket length shall
11.5
-1 comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part I)- 1975.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification
for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvenr cement joints for \\ater supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part II)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket
fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part II Specific requirements for 4.5” elbows.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7834 (PART III)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC

SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR
WATER SUPPLIES
PART Ill SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° ELBOWS

sions, tolrances and marking for 90” elbows made of mm mm mm
injection moulded PVC for water supplies. +1.2
25 13.5
-1
2. Requirements +1.6
32 17
2.1 Laying length and tolerance thereon shall be as -1
follows: i-2
40 21
-1
Size Laring Length Tolerance +2.5
mm mm mm 50 26
-1
16 9 fl +3.2
63 32.5
20 11 +1 -1
223
SP : 21-1983
Size Laying Length Tolerance Size Laying Length Tolerance

mm mm mm mm mm mm
+4 +7
-1 -1
i-5 +8
-1 -1
+6 Note - For typical illustration of a 90” elbowsee Fig. 1 of zhe
56 -1 standard.
+6 2.2 Inside diameter of socket and socket length shall
63.5
-1 comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part I)- 1975.
1
for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part III)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC
socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part III Specific requirements for 90” elbows.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7834 (PART IV)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC

WATER SUPPLIES
PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° TEES
1. Scope --. Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Laying Length Tolerance
sions, tolerances and marking for 90” tee made of mm mm mm
injection moulded PVC for water supplies. +3.2
63 32.5
-1
2. Requirements +4
75 38.5
-1
2.1 Laying length and tolerance thereon shall be as +5
90 46
follows: -1
Size Laying Length Tolerance 110 56 +6
-1
mm mm mm
16 9 +1 125 63.5 +6
20 11 fl -1
+7
25 13.5 +1.2 140 71 -1
-1 +8 .
32 17 +1.6 160 81 -1
-1
+2 Note - For typical illustration of a 90” tee see Fig. 1 of rhe
40 21 -1 standard.

50 26
-1 comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part I) - 1975.
___~__ ___-_______-_--- ____-
Note-For general rcqbirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification
for iniection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for waler supplics:.Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part IV)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC
socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part IV Specific requirements for 90” tees.
__-___ ____-- ____--_
224
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7834 (PART VI)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC

WATER SUPPLIES
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SOCKETS

sions, tolerances and marking for sockets made of mm mm mm
injection moulded PVC for water supplies. +2
-1
+2
2. Requirements -1
+3
2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as
-1
follows:
+3
6
Size Laying Length Tolerance -1
mm mm mm +3
8
16 3 +1 -1
20 3 +1 +4
+1.6 -1
25 3
-1 Note - For typical illustration of socket see Fig. 1 of rhe
+1.6 srandarri
-1
+2 2.2 Inside diameter of socket and socket length, and
-1 the tolerance thereon shall comply with those given in
+2 IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975.
50 3
-1
+2
83
-1
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part W-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC
socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part VI Specific requirements for sockets.
-
226
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7834 (PART VII)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC

WATER SUPPLIES
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIONS

sions, tolerances and marking for union made of injec- mm mm mm
tion moulded PVC for water supplies.
+2
40 15
2. Requirements -1
+2.5 -
2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as
-1
follows:
63 +6.2
Size Laying Length Tolerance 21
mm mm mm -1
16 13.5 +1
20 13.5 +1 Note - For typical illustration of union see Fig. 1 of the
f1.2 standard.
25 13.5
-1
32 13.5
-1 comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part 11-1975.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part O-1975
Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part VII)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC
socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part VII Specific requirements for unions.
227
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7834 (PART VIII)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET

FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR
WATER SUPPLIES
PART VIII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CAPS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- follows:

sions, tolerances and marking for caps made of injec- 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125,
tion moulded PVC for water supplies. 140, or 160 mm
Note - For typical illustration of cap see Fig. 1 of dre stan-
2. Diameter of the Socket of Cap - Shall be as dard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part VIII)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC
socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part VIII Specific requirements for caps.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART I)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY

POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE
WATER SUPPLIES
1. Scope - General requirements. for materials, ends for weld shall comply with those given in Table 1
manufacture. methods of test and inspection and mark- of IS : 4984-1978.
ing of all types of injection mouldkd HDPE fittings
4. Weld Length - Weld lengths at free ends of 90”
intended for connection to HDPE pipes covered by
bend and 90” tee shall be as follows:
IS : 4984-1978 for potable water supplies.
Size, mm 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90110
2. Composition - Shall be moulded from a com-
Weld Length, mm 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 15
pound consisting of virgin polyethylene in which car-
Tolerance on weld length +l mm
bon black and a suitable non-toxic anti-oxidant are
evenly dispersed .
3. Sizes and Dimensions of Fittings - Sizes of
5.1 Hydraulic Characteristics - There shall be no
fittings shall be designated by their outsidediameters at
signs of localised swelling, leakage or weeping.
free ends, which shall correspond to outside diameters
of pipes given in IS : 4984-1978.. Outside diameters 5.2 Reversion Test - Dimensions shall not change
and corresponding wall thicknesses of fittings at free by more than 3 percent in longitudinal direction.
Note-For test procedures refer to 7.3.1 and 7.3.2 of IS : 4984-1978 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable
water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents (secondrevision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density
polyethylene .(HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
228
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART II)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° BENDS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Bend Laying Length

sions and tolerances, and marking for injection mm mm
moulded 90” bends made of HDPE for potable water 40 60 & 2
supplies. 50 70 f 2
63 80 + 2
2. Requirements
75 90 + 2
2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as 90 110 + 2
follows: 110 140 f 3
Size Bend Laying Length
Note - For typical illustration of 90” bend see Fig. 1 of the
mm mm standard.
20 35 f 1 2.2 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses at ends
25 40 + 2 for welding shall comply with the requirements given
32 50 f 2 in IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976.
for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part II)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density
polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part II Specific requirements for 90” bends.
229
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART III)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° TEES
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Tee Laying Length

Cons and tolerances, and marking for injection mm mm
moulded 90” tees made of HDPE for potable water 50 50 f 2
supplies.
63 58.5 f 2
2. Requirements 75 84 f 2
2.1 Overall laying lengths and tolerances thereon 90 98.5 + 2
shall be as follows: 110 122.5 + 3
Size Tee Laying Length

mm Note - For typical illustration of 90” tee see Fig. 1 of the
mm
srandcrrd.
20 25 + 1
25 30 zk 1 2.2 Outside diameter and wall thickness at ends
32 37.5 + 1 for welding shall be in accordance with IS : 8008
40 45 + 2 (Part I)-1976.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008(Part I)-1976 Specification
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part III)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high’
density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part III Specific requirements for 90”
tees.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART IV)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR REDUCERS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- shall be as follows:

sions and tolerances, and marking for injection Size Overall Laying Length
moulded reducers made of HDPE for potable water mm mm
supplies.
32 x 63 60+-2
2. Requirements 63 x 75 70 + 2
63 x 90 80 4 2
2.1 Two different diameters at either end shail be 75 x 90 80 + 2
concentric. 90 x 110 100 + 2.5
110 x 160 140 + 3
2.2 Overall laying length and the tolerance thereon 160 x 225 200 f 3.5
230
SP : 21-1983
Note - For typical illustration of reducer see Fig. 1 of rhe welding shall be in accordance with IS : 8008
standard. (Part I)-1976.
2.3 Outside diameter and wall thickness at ends for
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part IV)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high
density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part IV Specific requirements for
reducers.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART V)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FERRULE REDUCERS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Overall Laying Length

sions and tolerances, and marking for injection mm mm
moulded ferrule reducers made of HDPE for potable
water supplies. 110 x 63 89.4 f 2
160 x 63 98.5 + 2
2. Requirements 225 x 63 102.8 + 2.5
2.1 Overall laying lengths and the tolerances thereon
Note - For typical illustration of ferrule reducer see Fig. 1 of
shall be as follows: the standard.
Size Overall Laying Length
mm mm
2.2 Outside diameter and wall thickness of straight
32 x 63 48 + 2 pipe portion at reducer and shall comply with the
90 x 63 74.3 f 2 requirements given in IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008 (Part D-1976 Specification
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part V)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density
polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part V Specific requirements for ferrule reducers.
231
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART VI)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPE ENDS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Length Flange Thickness Dia of Flange
sions and tolerances, and marking for injection mm mm mm mm
moulded pipe ends made of HDPE for potable water
supplies. 90 25k1.5 12 + 1 125 IL 2
110 30 + 1.5 15 + 1 155 f 2
2. Dimensions and Tolerances - Overall dimen- 125 3p+ 1.5 15 f 1 188 f 2
sions and tolerances thereon shall be as follows: 140 3Ok1.5 15 f 1 188 f2
Size Length Flange Thickness Dia of Flange 160 35+1.5 20 f 1.5 215 f 2
lxlm mm mm mm 180 35 f 1.5 20 f 1.5 240 + 2
20 16 f 1.5 5 + 0.5 50 f 1 200 50 + 1.5 30 f 2 240 f 2
25 16 f 1.5 5 + 0.5 56 +- 1 225 .50 +_ 1.5 30 f 2 270 f 2
32 16f1.5 5f 0.5 65 IL 1
Note 1 - For typical illustration of pipe end see Fig. 1 of the
40 16k1.5 5 + 0.5 70 + 1 standard.
50 20 f 1.5 10 + 1 80 f 1.5
Note 2 - Outside diameter and wall thickness of the end to be
63 2Ok1.5 10 + 1 95 f 1.5 welded to pipe shall comply with the requirements given in
75 20 + 1.5 10 + 1 105 + 1.5 IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976.
Note-For genrral requirements regarding material, mamifacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 Specification
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part VI)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high
density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part VI Specific requirements for pipe
ends.
. ..
232
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART VII)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SANDWICH FLANGES
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Flange Dia of Dia of Number of
sions and tolerances, and marking for injection mm Thickness Flange Hole Bolts
moulded sandwich flanges made of HDPE for potable mm mm mm
water supplies. 110 20 216.0 18 8
125 20 255.0 18 8
2. Dimensions and Tolerances - Overall dimen-
sions of sandwich flanges and tolerances thereon shall 140 20 255.0 18 8
be as follows: 160 20 279.5 18 8
Size Flange Dia of Dia of Number oj 180 20 305.0 18 8
mm Thickness Flange Hole Bolts 200 25 305.0 18 8
mm mm mm
225 25 336.0 18 8
20 20 95.5 14 4
25 20 101.5 14 4 2.1 Tolerances
32 20 114.5 14 4 AZ1.5 mm on flange thickness.
+ 1.5 mm on flange diameter for sizes 20 to
40 20 120.5 14 4
110 mm.
50 20 133.5 14 4 f 2 mm on flange diameter for sizes 125 to
63 20 152.5 14 4 225 mm.
75 20 165.0 18 8 Note - For typical illustration of sandwich flange see Fig. 1
90 20 184.5 18 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part VII)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high
density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part VII Specific requirements for
sandwich flanges.
233
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8329-1977 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) DUCTILE IRON

PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
1. Scope - Requirements for centrifugally cast 5. Hydrostatic Test - All pipes shall withstand the
(spun) ductile iron pipes for pressure main lines for following hydrostatic test pressures kept for a
water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal or sand minimum of 15 seconds without showing any leakage,
moulds. This standard is applicable to all cast iron sweating or other defects:
pipes having spigots, sockets or flanges as specified in
Nominal Diu Grade I Grade 2
this standard, and also to pipes with other types of
joints particularly rubberjoints. In case of rubber joints mm N/llUl? N/mm2
the inner profile of socket end of the pipe shall depend up to 300 6.0 3.5
on the type of rubber joint ensuring that the overall 350 to 600 5.0 3.5
dimensions are maintained for reasons of safety and 700 to 1 000 4.0 3.5
interchangeability.
6. Sizes (in mm)
2. Grades - Grade 1 and Grade 2.
6.1 Sockets and Spigots and Pipes (Lead Joint)
3. Manufacture - Pipes having screwed on Nominal External Diu Socket

flanges shall be sealed at threaded joint between pipe Dia of Buriel h
and flange by a sealing compound suitable for use with Internal Depth
‘raw ’ and potable water (up to 100°C) , gas and normal Dia
domestic sewage. 80 98 116 84
to to to
1 000 1 048 1 072 lY0
4. Mechanical Tests
4.1 Tensile Test 6.2 Screwed Flanges of Pipes and Standard Flange
Drilling of Flanged Pipes:
Grade Nominul 0.2 Percent Tensile Percent
Diu Proof Stress, Strength Elongution, -Nominal 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
Min, Nlmm2 N/mm2 Min Dia 500 600
1 All 300 420 10 Dia of 200 220 250 285 340 395 445 505 565 615
2 AlI 300 420 5 Range 670 780
4.2 Flattening Test - Shall attain a minimum verti- Number 4 8 8 8 8 12 12 16 16 20 20 20

cal deformation given below: of Holes
Nominal Verticul Nominul Vertical 6.3 Socket and Spigot Pipes
Diu Deformution Diu Deformation
mm ,-*-* mm ,-*-, Nominal Barrel Mass per Metre
Dia I A ,
Grade 2 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 1
mm mm mm mm External Thickness kg
80 6 8 400 40 67 Dia
100 7 10 500 50 83 80 98 6.0 12.2
125 10 16 600 75 150 to to to ’
1 000 1 048 1:5 309.3
150 13 19 700 88 175
200 17 25 800 100 200 6.4 Flanged Pipes Centrifugally Cast with Screwed
250 21 31 900 113 225 Flunges
300 30 50 1 000 125 250 Nominal Dia 80 100 125 150 200 250 300
350 35 60 External Dia 98 118 144 170 222 274 326
of Barrel
4.3 brine11 Hardness (of Externul Unmuchined Mass per Metre, 14.1 17.7 22.5 28.0 39.7 52.8
Sutjutce) - Shall not exceed 230 HB. kg 67.3
234
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - Nominal diameters are 80, 100,125,150,200,250, 8. Coating - Where coating has a tar or similar
3C!0,350,400,450,500,600,700,750,800,900and1 OOOmm. base it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough
Note 2 - Working lengths for socket and spigot pipes: 3.66, not to flow at 77°C but not so brittle at 0°C as to chip
4, 4.88, 5, 5.5 and 6 m. off when scribed lightly with a penknife. When pipes
are used for conveying potable water, inside coating
6.5 Tolerances - See 10 of the standard. shall not contain any constituent soluble in such water
or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour
7. Mass - Density is taken as 7.15 kg/cm3. Toler- to potable water after sterilization and washing of
ante on mass shall be t 5 percent. mains.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8329-1977 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron
1
pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. \
SUMMARY OF
IS : 836G (PART I)-1977 FABRICATED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
1. Scope - General requirements for material, fittings shall be designated by their outside diameters
sizes, performance requirements, sampling and mark- at the free end, which shall correspond to outside
ing of all types of fabricated HDPE fittings intended for diameters of pipes given in IS : 4984-1978*. Outside
connection to HDPE pipes covered by IS : 4984- diameters and corresponding wall thicknesses of
1978* for potable water supplies. fittings at free ends for weld shall comply with those
given in Table 1 of IS : 4984-1978*.
2. Material -Pipes used for the fabrication of
HDPE fittings for potable water supplies shall conform 4. Performance Requirements
to IS : 4984-1978*.
4.1 Hydraulic Pro@ Test - Fitting duly plugged,
when subjected to a hydraulic proof test of twice the
3. Sizes and Dimensions of Fittings - Sizes of
recommended working pressure at ambient tempera-
-. ____ _-
*Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene ture and for a period of 1 hour shall not show any sign
pipes for potable water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents of localized swelling, leakage or creeping, and shall
(second revision). not burst.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8360 (Part I)-1977 Specification for fabricated high density
polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements. ..
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8360 (PART II)-1977 FABRICATED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90’ TEES
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- Size Overall Laying Size Overall Laying
sions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE mm Length mm Length
90” tees for potable water supplies. mm mm
2. Requirements i80 270 & 6 315 472.5 + 8

2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as 200 300 + 6 355 532.5 f 10
225 337.5 + 8 400 600 k 10
follows:
250 375 -e 8 450 675 t 10
Size Overall La?ing Si:e Overall Lq\ing
mm Length mm Length 280 420 k 8 500 750 rf: 10
mm
Sote - For ypical illustration of 90’ fabricated tee see Fig. 1
20 5:: 2 7.5 112.5 + 4 of the standard.
25 62.5 f 2 90 135 + 4
2.2 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes
32 80 + 2 110 165 f 4
out of which 90” tees are fabricated shall comply with
40 80 5 2 125 181.5 + 4 those given in IS : 8360 (Part I)- 1977. Wall thick-
50 90 k 2 140 210 f 6 ness of a fabricated 90” tee shall not be less than that of
63 94.5 f 4 160 240 i 6 the pipe to which it is to be welded.
Sate-For general requirements regarding material, sizes, method of test and sampling refer lo IS : 8360 (Part I)-1977 Specification
for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8360 (Part IQ-1977 Specification for fabricated high density
polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part II Specific requirements for 90” tees.
SUMMAR\- OF
IS : 8360 (PART III)-1977 FABRICATED HIGH DENSITY

WATER SUPPLIES
PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90’ BENDS
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimen- follo\vs:

sions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE Size O~~erall LciTirlg Si:e O\,ei-cdlLqirig
90’ bends for potable water supplies. mm L eugth mm Length
mm mm
2. Requirements 20 100 5 3 40 100 + 3
25 100 = 3 50 10023
2.1 La>-ing lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as 30 100 2 3 63 108 ? 5
236
SP : 21-1983
Size Overall Laying Size Overall Laying Note - For typical illustration of 90” fabricated bend
mm Length mm Length see Fig. 1 of r/l<standard.
mm mm
2.2 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes
75 128 f 5 225 384 + 10 out ofwhich90” bendsarefabricated shallcomply with
90 154 + 5 250 427 f 10 those given in IS : 8360 (Part I)- 1977. Wall thickness
110 188 + 5 280 478 AZ10 of fabricated be& shall not be less than that of the pipe
125 213 f 5 315 538 +_ 10 to which it is to be welded.
140 239 f 8 355 606 + 12
160 273 f 8 400 683 + 12
180 307 ‘2 8 450 769 f 12
200 341 + 8 500 855 f 12
Note-For general requirements regarding material, sizes, methods of test and sampling refer to IS : 8360 (Part I)-1977 Specification
for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8360 (Part HI))-1977 Specification for fabricated high density
polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part III Specific requirements for 90” bends.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8794-1978 CAST IRON DETACHABLE JOINTS FOR USE WITH

ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES
1. Scope - Requirements for cast iron detachable Nominal Class Width Holes
joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes Dia -7
conforming to IS : 1592-1970”. Dia Number
125 5, 10 29 16 4
2. Manufacture - Joints shall be such that they
125 15 29 16 4
could be cut, drilled or machined. Castings may be
150 5, 10 31 16 4
accepted provided the hardness does not exceed the
150 15 31 16 4
Brine11 hardness of 215 HB .
200 5 35 20 4
200 10 35 20 4
3. Mechanical Tests
200 15 35 20 4
3.1 Tensile Tests - Minimum tensile strength =
150 MPa (15 kgf/mm*). 5.2 Collars
3.2 Brine11 Hardness Tests -See 2. Nominal Class Collar Thickness

Dia Width
4. Hydrostatic Tests - Collar shall withstand the
test pressure specified in Table 1 of IS : 1592-1970” 80 5, 10, 15 38 9.0
for the class of asbestos cement pressure pipes with 100 5, 10, 15 42 9.0
which they are to be used, without showing any leak- 125 5, 10 46 9.0
age or sweating, etc. 125 15 46 9.0
150 5, 10 50 9.5
5. Dimensions
150 15 50 9.5
5.1 Cast Iron Flange 200 5 56 10.0
Nominal Class Width Holes 200 10 56 10.0
Dia / h \ 200 15 56 10.0
Dia Number
80 5,10, 15 27 16 3 5.3 Diameter of engagement end of joints shall
100 5, 10, 15 27 16 3 match the corresponding outside diameter of asbestos
-.- cement pressure pipes of different classes conforming
*Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision). to IS : 1592-1970*.
237
SP : 21-1983
6. Tolerance 7.1 Tolerance - On mass of joints (excluding

rubber rings and bolts) is -5 percent.
Dimensions Tolerances, mm
Wall thickness of collar -(l + 0.05 t) Note - Density of cast iron has been taken as 7.15 kg/M.
(see Note) --
Cored holes and other f2 8. Coating
dimensions
8.1 All cast iron parts shall be coated externally and
Drilled holes f 1.5
internally with the same material unless otherwise
where t= standard thickness of collar. agreed.
Note - No limit for plus toleranceis specified. 8.2 In all instances where the coating material has a
7. Mass tarot similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and
hard enoughnot to flow when exposed to a temperature
Nominal Class Mass of Joint of 77°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to
Dia (Approximate) chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife.
(Excluding Rubber
Ring and Bolts), kg 8.3 When the parts are to be used for conveying
potable water, the inside coating shall not contain any
80 5, 10, 15 3.0 constituent soluble in such water or any ingredient
which could impart any taste or odour whatsoever to
100 5, 10, 15 3.8 the potable water after sterilization and suitably wash-
125 5, 10 4.8 ing out the mains.
125 15 5.0
150 5, 10 6.1
150 15 6.2
200 5 8.8
200 10 9.2
200 15 9.4
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8794-1978 Specification for cast iron detachable joints for use with
asbestos cement pressure pipes.
238
SP :21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 204 Tower bolts:

(Part I)-1978 Part I Ferrous metals (fourth revision) 241
(Part II)- 1978 Part II Non-ferrous metals (jbuth revision) 242
IS : 2051978 Non-ferrous metal butt hinges (third revision) 242
IS : 206-1981 Tee and strap hinges (third revision) 244 J
IS : 208-1979 Door handles (third revision) 245
IS : 281-1973 Mild steel sliding door bolts for use with padlocks (second revision) 246
IS : 362-1982 Parliament hinges (fourth revision) 246
IS : 363-1976 Hasps and staples (third revision) 247
IS : 364-1970 Fanlight catch (second revision) 248
IS : 452-1973 Door spring, rat-tail type (second revision) 248
IS : 453-1973 Double-acting spring hinges (second revision) 249
IS : 1019-1974 Rim latches (second revision) 249
IS : 1341-1981 Steel butt hinges Cfourth revision) 250
IS : 1823-1980 Floor door stoppers (third revision) 251
IS : 1837-1966 Fanlight pivots (jkst revision) 252
IS : 2209-1976 Mortice locks (vertical type) (third revision) 252
IS : 2681-1979 Non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use with padlocks 253
(second revision)
IS : 3564-1975 Door closers (hydraulically regulated) (second revision) 254
IS : 3818-1971 Continuous (piano) hinges (first revision) 254
IS : 3828-1966 Ventilator chains 255
IS : 3843-1966 Steel backflap hinges 255
IS : 3847-1966 Mortice night latches 256
IS : 4621-1975 Indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision) 257
IS : 4948-1974 Welded steel wire fabric for general use (first revision) 257
IS : 4992-1975 Door handles for mortice locks (vertical type) (first revision) 258
IS : 5187-1972 Flush bolts (first revision) 259
IS : 5899-1970 Bathroom latches 259
IS : 5930-1970 Mortice latch (vertical type) 260
IS : 6315-1971 Floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors 260
IS : 6318-1971 Plastic window stays and fasteners 261
IS : 6343-1982 Door closer-s (pneumatically regulated) for light doors weighing up 262
to 40 kg (first revision)
IS : 6602-1972 Ventilator pole 263
IS : 6607-1972 Rebated mortice locks (vertical type) 263
IS : 7196-1974 Hold fast 264
IS : 7197-1974 Double action floor springs (without oil check) for heavy doors 265
IS : 7534-1974 Mild steel locking bolts with holes for padlocks 265
IS : 7540-i974 Mortice dead locks 266
IS : 8756-1978 Ball catches for use in wooden almirahs 266 ,
IS : 8760-1978 Mortice sliding door locks with lever mechanism 267
240
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 204 (PART I)-1978 TOWER BOLTS

PART I FERROUS METALS
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirement for tower bolts made of plated and barrel and socket stove enamelled
ferrous metals. black.
b) Semi-Burrel Tower Bolt - Bolt bright finished
2. Types - (a) Barrel, (b) semi-barrel, (c) riveted and other parts stove enamelled black.
or spot welded, and (d) skeleton.
C) Reveted or Spot Welded Tower Bolt - Bolt
Note - For detailed classification of various types of bolts
reference may be made to fhe standard.
bright finished or plated and plate, straps and
socket stove enamelled black.
3. Dimensions d) Skeleton TowerBolts - Bolt bright finished or
Size (Length of Bolt) Diameter of Bolt Width of Barrel

mm mm mm
Barrel tower bolt 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 10 or 12 32 or 38
200, 225, 250 and 300
Semi-barrel tower 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 10 or 12 38 or 42
bolt 200, 225, 250, 300, 375
and 450
Riveted or spot 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 10 or 12 40 or 45
welded tower bolt 225, 250, 300, 375, 450,
600,750 and 900
Skeleton tower bolt 375, 450, 600, 750 and 10 32
900
Note-For detailed dimensions, tolerances and sketches refer to the standard.

-
4. Finish plated and plate and staples stove enamelled

black.
a) Barrel Tower Bolt - Bolts bright finished or
Note- For requirements of materials refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 204 (Part I)-1978 Specification for tower bolts: Part I Ferrous
metals (fourth revision).
241
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 204 (PART II)-1978 TOWER BOLTS

PART II NON-FERROUS METALS
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for towerbolts made of Note - For detailed dimensions, tolerances and sketches refer
non-ferrous metals. to the standard.
2. Types - (a) Barrel and (b) skeleton.

4. Finish
Note - For detailed classification of various types of bolts
reference may be made to the standard.
a) Brass Tower Bolts - Bolt and barrel polished.
3. Dimensions
b) Aluminium Alloy Tower Bolts - Bolt and bar-
Type Size (Length of Bolt in mm) rel anodized.
Barrel tower bolt 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 c) Zinc Alloy Tower Bolts - Bolt and barrel
225, 250 and 300 oxidized or bronzed.
Skeleton tower bolt 375, 450, 600, 750 and 900 d) Brass Skeleton Tower Bolts - Bolt, plate and
staples bright finished.
Diameter of bolt 10 or 12 mm
Width of barrel 32 mm for 10 mm d Aluminium Alloy Skeleton Tower Bolts -
Bolt, plate and staples anodized.
diameter bolt
38 or 42 mm for 12 mm f) Zinc Alloy Skeleton Tower Bolts - Bolt, plate
diameter bolt and staples oxidized or bronzed.
Note-For requirements of materials refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 204 (Part II)-1978 Specification for tower bolts: Part IINon-ferrous
metals (fourth revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 205-1978 NON-FERROUS METAL BUTT HINGES

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for butt hinges made 3. Material

from non-ferrous metals. Flap i) Extruded aluminium alloy
ii) Extruded brass
2. Types .. iii) Cast brass
iv) Brass sheet
a) Extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges,
Pin i) Aluminium alloy
b) Extruded brass butt hinges,
ii) Phosphor bronze wire or rod
c) Cast brass butt hinges, and iii) Mild steel wire or rod
d) Sheet brass butt hinges. iv) Brass wire
242
SP : 21-1983
4. Dimensions Hinge Length Breadth

Designation mm mm
4.1 Extruded Aluminium Alloy Butt Hinges
75Dll 75 50
Hinge Length Breadth 75Ell 75 40
Designation mm mm
75E12 75 40
15OA22 150 75 75Fll 75 30
125A22 125 75 65Ell 65 40
125B21 12.5 63 65E12 65 40
125B22 125 63
65Fll 65 30
125C22 125 63
50Ell 50 40
lOOA 100 75 5OE12 50 40
lOOB21 100 63 5OFll 50 40
lOOB22 100 63 40Fll 40 40
lOOC22 100 63
9oc22 90 63
75C21 75 63 4.3 Cast Brass Butt Hinges

75C22 75 63
75D22 75 63 Hinge Length Breadth
75E22 75 45 Designation mm mm
75F22 75 40
15OAll 150 85
65E22 65 45 15OA12 150 85
65F22 65 40 125All 125 85
5OE22 50 45 125A12 125 85
5OF22 50 40
125Bll 125 75
125B 12 125 75
4.2 Extruded Brass Butt Hinges 125Cll 125 70
125c 12 125 70
Hinge Length Breadth
mm mm 125C21 125 65
Designation
125C22 125 65
15OAll 150 75 lOOA 1 100 85
15OA12 150 75 lOOA 100 85
125All 125 75
125A12 125 75 1OOB11 100 75
lOOB12 100 75
125Bll 125 65 lOOCl1 100 70
125B12 125 65 lwC12 100 70
125Cll 125 65
125C12 125 65 lOoC21 100 65
looC22 100 65
125C21 125 60 1WC23 100 65
125C22 125 60 lOODl1 100 55
lOOA 1 100 75
lOOA 100 75 90Cll 90 65
90Dll 90 55
lOOBl1 100 65
75Cll 75 65
lOOB12 100 65
75Dll 75 55
lOoCl1 100 65
lOOC12 100 65 75Ell 75 40
75E12 75 40
lOOC22 100 60 75Fll 75 35
lOOC32 100 55 65Ell 65 60
lOODl1 100 50 65E22 65 40
90Cll 90 55 65Ell 35
65
90Dll 90 50 5OEll 50 40
75Cll 75 55 5OE12 50 40
243
SP : 21-1983
Hinge Length Breadth IS : 2525-1982* and IS : 3965-

Designation mm mm 1981t.
5OFll 50 35 Note - Fordetailed dimensions, tolerances and sketches refer

4OFll 40 35 to the standard.
30Fll 30 25
25Fll 25 25
5. Requirements
4.4 Sheet Brass Butt Hinges (For Cabinet) 5.1 Number of knuckles in each hinge specified
in 4.1 to 4.3 shall not be less than 5 except in case of
Hinge Length Breadth cast brass hinges of size less than 40 mm. In this case.
Designation mm mm and also for sheet brass hinges specified in 4.4, the I
25SB 25 15 number of knuckles shall not be less than 3.
30SB 30 15
5.2 Screw Holes - Shall be countersunk,
40SB 40 20
50SB 50 25
6. Finish - Brass hingps shall have bright or satin
finish and shall be suitably protected against discolora-
4.5 Tolerances tion. Aluminium alloy hinges shall be anodized.
Length + 1 mm.
Breadth f 1 For extruded brass butt hinges, cast
*Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, wire
brass butt hinges and sheet brass
(jirsr revision).
butt hinges. For extruded tDimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bar,
aluminium alloy hinges see rod and section (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2051978 Specification for non-ferrous metal butt hinges (third
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 206-1981 TEE AND STRAP HINGES

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel tee and 3. Dimensions and Tolerances
strap hinges, that are commonly used irr geneml build-
ing construction. 3.1 Type 1 - Sizes (length) shall be 75, 100, 125,
150, 200, 250, 300, 350 and 400 mm. Tolerance
2. Types - Tee hinges and strap hinges shall be of +2 mm.
the following types:
3.2 Type 2 - Sizes (length) shall be 75, 100, 125,
Type Designation 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm.
1 Light weight Tolerance +2 mm up to 200 mm size and +3 mm on
2 Medium weight all other sizes in case of Tee hinges; and +-2 mm for all
3 Heavy weight sizes in case of strap hinges.
244
SP : 21-1983
3.3 Type 3 - Sizes (1ength)shall be 150,200,250, 4. Workmanship - Hinges shall be well made,
300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm. Tolerance free from burrs, flaws and defects of any kind. Move-
f2 mm up to 300 mm size and +4 mm on all other ment shall be square, and working shall be free and
sizes in case of tee hinges; and % 2 mm for all sizes in easy, without any play or shake.
case of strap hinges.
Note - For detailed dimensions, tolerances and typical 5. Finish - Shall be either bright or stove
figures, refer to rhe standard. enamelled black.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 206-1981 Specification for tee and strap hinges (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 208-1979 DOOR HANDLES

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, manufac- Type Size -Overall Length, Internal Depth,
ture, dimensions and finish of door handles of the type mm Min Min
that are commonly fixed to doors in buildings. mm mm
3 75 100 20
2. Types and Materials 90 *125 25
Type 1 Cast (cast iron, malleable cast iron, cast 100 150 28
brass, cast aluminium or zinc alloy die 4 15 115 30
casting),
100 140 35
Type 2 Pressed oval (mild steel), 125 175 80
Type 3 Present half oval (mild steel), Note - For detailed dimensions and figures, refer to- the
standard.
Type 4 Fabricated (brass or aluminium alloy).
3.2 Tolerances
3. Dimensions and Tolerances Dimensions up to 100 mm * 1 mm

101 to 200 mm + 1.5 mm
3.1 Sizes
201 and above +2mm
Type Size Overall Length, Internal Depth,
4. Finish
mm Min Min
mm mm Type 1 - Bright satin finish, nickle plated,
1 15 125185 20 copper oxidized, bronze finish for cast brass
100 150/110 25 and zinc die cast handles. Stove enamelled
190/140 25 black or copper oxidized for cast iron and mal-
125
leable cast iron handles. Aluminium anodized
150 215/165 30 to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish or dyed.
2 75 125 20 b) Type 2 and 3 - Stove enamelled black.
cl Type 4 - Bright satin finish, nickle plated,
100 150 25 copper oxidized, bronze finish for brass hand-
115 175 28 les. Aluminium anodized to a bright, finish,
135 200 30 natural, mat or satin finish or dyed.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 208-1979 Specification for door handles (third revision).
245
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 281-1973 MILD STEEL SLIDING DOOR BOLTS FOR USE

WITH PADLOCKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, di- b) Diameter of bolt

mensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel sliding
plate type bolts 12 + 0.5 mm
door bolts commonly used in general building con-
clip type bolts 16 f 0.5 mm
struction, for locking doors, gates, etc, with padlocks.
4. Requirements
2. Types - Shall be of 2 types, plate type and clip
a) Mild steel sheets and plates shall satisfy pre-
or bolt type.
scribed bend test.
b) Mild steel wire shall have a minimum tensile
3. Sizes strength of 40 kgf/mn$ and shall satisfy pre-
Plate type sliding bolts: 150,200,250,300,375 scribed bend test.
and 450 mm. c) All screw holes shall be countersunk.
Clip type sliding bolts: 200, 250, 300, 375 and
450 mm. 5. Finish
(Note - Size represents length of the bolt.)
a) Plate Type - Plates and straps stove enamel-
led black. Hasp and bolt finished bright or
3.1 Tolerances
copper oxidized or plated with nickel or
a) Length of bolt chromium
sizes 300 mm and below f 2 mm b) Clip or Bolt Type - Copper oxidized or
sizes 375 mm and 450 mm f 3 mm plated
Note l-For bend test details see 4 of the standard.
Note 2-For detailed dimensions, tolerances and figure refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 281-1973 Specification for mild steel sliding door bolts for use with
padlocks (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 362-1982 PARLIAMENT HINGES

(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, Type 2 - Pressed (mild steel, aluminium
manufacture, finish, marking and packing of parlia- alloy), and
ment hinges. Type 3 - Fabricated (extruded aluminium
alloy).
2. Types and Materials - Shall be of three types Note - Materials for different types are given above within
according to the material used: brackets. For requirements of materials, refer to Table 1 of he
Type 1 - Cast (cast brass), standard.
246
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions and Tolerances Note - For detailed dimensions of a11types of hinges, refer to
Tables 2 to 4 to be read with Fig. 1 of fhe standard.
Size of Tolerance on Size Width
Hinges * 4. Manufacture - Hinges shall be well made and
(Width ‘For Alumi- For Mild ’ be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Washer
Bet ween nium and Steel Hinges shall be provided between knuckles for Type 1 and
Flanges) Cast Brass Type 3 hinges. Washer shall be made of nylon, plastic
I Hinges or other suitable material. In locations susceptible to
mm mm mm mm corrosion, use of brass or phosphor bronze hinge pins
is recommended in case of brass hinge. All screw holes
50 +l +2 20+1 shall be clean and countersunk.
65 +l +2 20*1
75 *l +2 20+1 5’. Finish - Brass hinges shall have bright or satin
10 *l +3 27+1 finish and be suitably protected against discoloration.
125 *l +3 27kl Aluminiumalloy hinges shall be anodized to a bright,
150 &I +3 27+1 natural, mat or satin finish or dyed. Mild steel hinges
175 +l +3 27&l shall be finished bright or electro galvanized as
200 +l +3 27+1 specified.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 362-1982 Specification for parliament hinges (fourth revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 363-1976 HASPS AND STAPLES

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, di- Width of brass or aluminium 40 40 46 46
mensions, manufacture and finish of hasps and staples. alloy hasps
4.2 Type 2
2. Types
Size 65 75 90 100 125 150 175
Type 1 Mild steel, brass or aluminium alloy hasps
Width of hasp 25 25 25 32 38 45 50
and staples - safety type
Type 2 Mild steel hasps and staples - wire type Tolerance
length of hasp f 2
3. Requirements width of hasp f 1.5
..
a) Hinge pin shall be of mild steel in case of mild Note 1 - Size denotes the length of the hasp.
steel hasps and staples, and of mild steel or
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 4 of tie
brass incase of brass or aluminium alloy hasps standard.
and staples.
b) Screw holes shall be countersunk.
5. Finish
4. Dimensions and Tolerance (in mm) a) Mild Steel Hasps and Staples - Stove
enamelled, black,
4.1 Type 1 b) Brass Hasps and Staples - Oxidized or
Size 90 115 150 175 covered with clear lacquer after polishing; and
Width of mild steel hasps 38 38 45 45 c) Aluminium Allay - Anodized.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 363-1976 Specification for hasps and staples (third revision).
247
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 364-1970 FANLIGHT CATCH

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, di- Dia of plunger 14 mm

mensions, manufacture and finish of fanlight catches Size in plan 45X45 mm
commonly used on ventilators in buildings. Size in elevation 45X50 mm
4.1 Tolerance - Dimensions above 5 mm up to
2. Types (According to Material Used) - 25 mm f0.5 mm, and
a) Mild steel fanlight catches, Dimension above 25 mmfl mm.
b) Aluminium alloy fanlight catches, and
c) Cast brass fanlight catches.
Note - For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of the standard.
3. Requirements -- Screw holes shall be counter- 5. Finish

sunk. Aluminium Alloy - Anodized
Brass - Satin finish
4. Dimensions (For 14 mm catch) - S tee1 - Stove enamelled
Note-For details regarding materials see 3 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 364-1970 Specification for fanlight catch (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 452-1973 DOOR SPRING, RAT-TAIL TYPE

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimen- 5. Performance Tests

sions, manufacture, finish and tests for door springs,
a) Tail rod when pushed to maximum limit and
rat-tail type commonly used in building construction.
released 100 times in quick succession the
2. Types (According to Material Used) - spring shall show no sign of damage or any
a) Mild steel door springs, and permanent set.
b) Brass door springs.
b) Torque required to push open the door through
3. Sizes - 300 mm and 375 mm. 90” shall not exceed 4 kgf/m.
Note - Size denotes distance between centres of spindle and
..
roller.
6. Finish - Mild steel door springs, casing, tail
4. Requirements rod, spindle cap and base plate shall be stove enamel-
a) Tail rod 10 mm dia. led black or copper oxidized. In case of brass, there
b) Roller plate 1.6 mm thick. shall be bright finished or copper oxidized.
c) Base plate 2.5 mm thick (size 80x40 mm Spindle, roller plate and roller shall be bright
centre to centre of screw holes). finished and the spring if made of mild steel wire shall
d) Roller 22 mm dia and 3 mm thick. be copper oxidized or electro-galvanized.
Note 1 -For details regarding materials of door spring rat-tail type see 3 of the stundurd.
Note 2-For detailed dimensions of door springs see Fig. 1 of the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 452-1973 Specification for door spring, rat-tail type (second
revision).
248
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 453-1973 DOUBLE-ACTING SPRING HINGES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for material, dimen- 4. Performance Tests
sions, $nufactu&, finish and tests of double-acting
a) Door when pushed through 90” and released
spring hinges and corresponding blank hinges used
2 000 times on each side in succession, the
generally for swing doors.
hinge and its components shall show no sign of
damage.
2. Types (According to Material Used) -
a) Mild steel double-acting spring hinges, and b) Door shall require force of 220.5 kgf for 100
b) Brass double-acting spring hinges. mm hinges, 3+0.5 kgf for 125 and 150 mm
hinges, at a distance of 45 cm from hinge pin to
3. Sizes move door through 90”.
Size ofSpring Hinge Size of Corresponding 5. finish

Blank Hinge
mm mm a) Mild steel hinges - stove enamelled black or
copper oxidized.
100 70
125 75 b) Brass hinges - satin, bright, nickel-plated, or
150 75 copper oxidized.
Note 1 -For details regarding materials see 3 of the standurd.
Note 2-For detailed dimensions see 5 and Fig. 1 and 2 of the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 453-1973 Specification for double-acting spring hinges (second
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1019-1974 RIM LATCHES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, di- Type 2 - Opens when handle is turned in any
mensions, manufacture and finish of rim latches for direction.
general use. 3.1 Type 1 rim latches shall either be ‘left-hand’ or
‘right-hand’.
2. Hand@ of Rim Latches - Left hand latch if
fitted on left hand door. Right hand latch if fitted on 4. Sizes - 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm denoted by
right hand door. overall length of the body measured from the outside
face of the fore end to the rear end.
3. Types
Type 1 - Opens when handle is turned in one 5. Material - Shall be of mild steel, brass,
direction only. aluminium alloy or zinc base alloy.
249
SP : 21-1983
6. Dimensions (in mm) 7. Finish

Size Length xBreadth XDepth Brass latches Bright or satin finish
75 75 x60x 14 Aluminium latches Anodized finish
100x70~20 Steel late hes Black japanned,stove
100
125 x70 x20 enamelled black or
125
copper oxidized
150 150 X70 x20
Tolerance Z!Y1 mm. 8. Performance Requirement - When knob of
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances see Y of the latch is turned, the catch bolt shall draw smoothly into
standard. the body and shall be flush with the face of the body.
Note-For requirements for materials of rim latches see Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1019-1974 Specification for rim latches (second revision).
.“A
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1341-1981 STEEL BUTT HINGES

(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, di- Type Sizes (Length)
mensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel butt mm
hinges. Medium weight 20,25,40,50,65 75,90, 100,125
and 150
2. Types Broad type 50, 75, 100, 125 and 150
a) Light weight hinges, Square type 50, 65, 75, 90 and 100
Heavy weight 50,65,75,90, 100, 125, 150, 175
b) Medium weight hinges,
and 200
c) Broad type hinges,
d) Square type hinges, and 3.1 Tolerance - On all sizes mentioned above
e) Heavy weight hinges. tolerance shall be 50.5 mm.
Note - Fordetailed dimensions, tolerances and typical figure,

3. Dimensions refer to the standard.
Type Sizes (Length)
4. Finish - Shall be finished bright with smooth
Light weight 15, 25,40, SO::, 75 and 100 surfaces.
kor detaiied information, refer 70 IS : 1341-1981 Spe&fication for steel butt hinges (fourth revision). .
250
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1823-1980 FLOOR DOOR STOPP-ERS

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for floor door stopper b) On thickness of cover plate +0.3 mm and
suitable for use with door shutters of 30, 35, 40 and -0mm.
45 mm thickness.
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to
2. Materials Table 2 to be read with Fig. 1 of the standard.
,
a) For body or housing and cover plate -
Aluminium alloy (pressure die) castings or 5. Manufacture
alwminium alloy sheets or brass sheet or cast
brass or brass gravity die casting. 5.1 The stoppers shall be well made and free from
defects likely to prevent its correct fixing or affect
b) For spring - Phosphor bronze or hard
adversely its reliability in use.
drawn steel wire.
For tongue - Aluminium alloy pressure 5.2 Body or housing shall be cast in one piece and
c)
die casting or cast brass or nylon or plastic. fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel screws.
5.3 There shall be four countersunk holes for fixing
3. Requirements stoppers to the floor.
a) Four countersunk holes for fixing door stop- 5.4 On the extreme end, a rubber piece shall be
per to floor. attached to absorb shocks due to pulling action of door.
b) Body o,r housing shall be cast in one piece The rubber used shall comply with the following re-
and fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel quirements:
screws. a) Relative density, Max 1.3
c) Rubber piece shall be attached to extreme 60_+5
b) Hardness
end to absorb shocks.
c) Ageing for 24 h at, i) Charge in initial
100 +i”c hardness +5, -0
-ii) Shall not develop
Thickness of door shutter 30 35 40 45 brittleness or
Overall length of cover 140 140 150 150 tackiness
plate
Width of cover plate 40 40 40 40 6. Workmanship and Finish - Stoppers shall be
Thickness of cover plate 4.5 for castings free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Aluminium
3 for sheet metal door stoppers shall be anodized and brass stoppers be
finished smooth. Stoppers may also be chromium or
nickel plated, anodized or oxidized. The exterior of
4.1 Tolerances
door stopper shall be in flush with floor and be finished
a) On overall length of cover plate +0.5 mm. bright or satin.
For detailed information, refZ+ to IS : 1823-1980 Specification for floor door stoppers (third revision).
251
SP 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1837-1966 FANLIGHT PIVOTS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for fanlight pivots (also 3.1 Tolerances

known as ventilator hinges). Pivot length and breadth +0.5mm
Pin projection +0.2mm
Pin dia +0.2mm
2. Types
Type 1 Mild steel pivots Note - For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.
Type 2 AIuminium pivots 4. Finish

, Type 3 Brass pivots Type 1 Bright finished with smooth surface
/’ Type 2 Natural or anodized finish
3. Dimensions (in mm) Type 3 Bright or satin finish
No. Thickness oj Pivot Pivot Pin Pin Dia

Ventilator Length Breadth Projec- , A \
Shutter tion Type 1 Type 2 and 3
1 25 20 50 10 10 9.5
2 30 25 50 12.5 12.5 12.5
3 30 25 65 12.5 12 12.5
4 35 25 65 15 16 15
5 35 25 75 15 16 15
.
Note-For requirements for materials see 3.1 of the standard.
For detailed information, ‘refer to IS : 1837-1966 Specification for fanlight pivots (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2209-1976 MORTICE LOCKS (VERTICAL TYPE)

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mortice locks (verti- Note 2 - For typical design of mortice lock see Fig. 1 of the
cal type). standard.
3. Material - Material for different component

2. Sizes - 65,75 and 100 mm. parts shall comply with the requirements given in
Size shall be denoted by length of faceover the body Tables 2 and 3 of the standard.
in mm. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3
mm from the length specified for size. 4. Non-interchangeability - Two lever locks
Note 1 - Morticelocks of other sizes may be made if mutually shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable
agreed. keys in abatchconsistingof aminimum of 24 locks. In
252
SP : 21-1983
case of locks with more than two levers, these shall 6. Finish
have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum
100 locks. a) Brass body - Finished smooth.
5. Manufacture b) Steel body - Protective coating such as paint-
ing.
a) Body - Clear depth 15 mm, MUX.
b) Locking bolt - Section not less than c) Aluminium alloy l&y - Anodized.
8x25 mm. d) Face plate and striking plate - Finished
c) Lever spring - Lever spring fitted into the smooth and polished bright or satin (or may be
lever shall withstand the prescribed tests with- chromium plated, anodized or oxidized).
out showing signs of permanent set.
d) Lock shah becapable of being opened with the 7. Tests - Shall withstand the prescribed tests
key from both inside and outside. given 9.1.1 to 9.1.5 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2209-1976 Specification for mortice locks (vertical typ) (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2681-1979 NON-FERROUS METAL SLIDING DOOR BOLTS

(ALDROPS) FOR USE WITH PADLOCKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for non-ferrous metal 3. JIimensions

sliding door bolts (aldrops) commonly used in general
Type Size (Length of Bolt) Bolt Diameter
building construction for locking doors, gates, etc,
mm mm
with padlocks.
1 and 2 150, 200, 250 and 300 16
375 and 450 18
2. Types 200, 250, 300, 350,
3 16
Type I - Brass sliding door bolts with sand-cast 375 and 450
brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or clips and 3.1 Tolerances
rolled or drawn brass bolts.
On size +2
Type 2 - Brass sliding door bolts with die-cast
Bolt dia +0.5 (Types 1 and 2) . ..
brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or clips and
rolled or drawn brass bolt. Nil (Type 3)
Note- For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 5 of the
Type 3 - Aluminium alloy sliding door bolts standard.
with hasp, staple and fixing clips of sheets, cast-
ings or extruded sections and fixing bolts and 4. Finish
sliding bolts of extruded section or castings of a) Brass bolts - satin, polished or plated; and
aluminium alloy. b) Aluminium alloy bolts - anodized.
Note-For requirements of materials see 4 of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2681-1979 Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts
(aldrops) for use with padlocks (second revision).
253
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3564-1975 DOOR CLOSERS (HYDRAULICALLY REGULATED)

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for exposed, type hyd- 4. Requirements

raul&lly regulated door closers for vertical hinge type
doors opening to one side only and weighing not more a) Closing time shall be adjustable between 5 and
than 80 kg. 20 seconds by means of regulating screw.
b) Hydraulic oil filling shall work satisfactorily
This standard does not cover requirements for con- between 49 and -10°C.
cealed type hydraulic door closers and also the c) Strength and speed of closer shall be capable of
pneumatic or mechanical type door closers. being regulated by extending spring and ad-
justment in control Valve screw respectively.
2. Nominal Sizes (in relation to weight and the width
d) Each closer shall be supplied with one fitting
of door)
key or a suitable spanner far adjusting the
Designation of Weight of Door Width of Door spring valve and regulating screw.
Closer (kg) (mm)
1 up to 35 up to 700 5. Performance Requirements
2 36 to60 701 to 850
3 61 to80 851 to 1 000 5.1 When opened through 9O”, the door shall swing
back to 2Of 5” with normal speed, but thereafter speed
should automatically get retarded and should smoothly
negotiate with the latch (where provided).
3. Materials
Component Part Material 5.2 Endurailce Test - After 50 000 operations
against maximum specified load, closer shall show no
i) Non-porous body Cast iron/aluminium alloy/ failure, leakage of oil 01’ other defects.
and back plate zinc alloy
Note - For test details see A-1.5 of the standard.
ii) Main arm Cast iron/steel/zinc alloy/
aluminium alloy
6. Finish - Painted or lacquered. Aluminium body
Note - For materials of other pans see 5 (Table 2) of he may be anodized. Mild steel parts shall be pickled and
standard. given phosphating treatment.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3564-1975 Specification for door closers (hydraulically regulated)
(second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3818-1971 CONTINUOUS (PIANO) HINGES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for continuous (piano) Pin a) Mild Steel Wire - Shall satisfy
hinges, prescribed wrapping test. Tensile
strength 40 kgf/mm*.
2. Material b) Aluminium Alloy
Flap a) Mild Steel - Shall satisfy prescrib-
3. Requirements
ed bend test
b) Aluminium Alloy a) Hinge pin shall be of mild steel for mild steel
254
SP : 21-1983
hinges and of mild steel (galvanized) or Pin dia : 2 mm

aluminium ahoy for aluminium hinges. The Thickness of flaps: 0.8 mm, Min and 1 mm, MU.
aluminium alloy hinge pins shall be hard
anodized to a minimum thickness of0.025 mm 5. Finish - Mild steel hinges shall be bright
and sealed with oil, wax or lanolin. polished, chromium plated or oxidized. Aluminium
b) All screw holes shall be Countersunk. hinges shall be anodized.
4. Dimensions and Tolerances (in mm)
Nominal Breadth Screw Hole Distance
Size (Centre to Centre)
r A \
Along Length Along Breadth
40 4Ofl 75+2 20f 1
30 30+ 1 75+2 15fl
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3818-1971 Specification for continuous (piano) hinges (first
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3828-1966 VENTILATOR CHAINS

1. Scope - Requirements for ventilator chains. a) Eye - Formed by forging and folding plate of
2.5 mm minimum thickness. Width 25 mm.
2. Materials b) Chain - Made from 1.8 mm minimum dia
wire. Length300+5 mm. Eachlink30+2mm.
a) Staple Mild steel
Aluminium alloy c) Staple - Made of 2.5 mm minimum thick
Mild steel plate size 40x20 mm. Hook 5 mm dia and
b) Eye
Aluminium ahoy 5 mm internal radius of bend.
c) Wire Mild steel
Aluminium alloy 4. LoadTest - Assembly shall be strong enough to
bear 20 kg load without deformat.
3. Manufacture and Dimensions 5. Finish - Shall be protected against corrosion.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3828-1966 Specification for ventilator chains.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3843-1966 STEEL BACKFLAP HINGES

1. Scope - Requirements for backflap hinges made 3. Materials

of steel.
a) Flap - Cold rolled mild steel (shall satisfy the
2. Types - Type I and Type II. prescribed bend test).
255
SP : 21-1983
b) Pin - Mild steel wire (shall satisfy the pre- Note - For detailed dimensions see 4 of he smdard.
scribed wrapping test; tensile strength shall not 5. Reqbirements - All screw holes shall be clean
be less than 40 kgf/mm2). and countersunk.
4. Dimensions (in mm) 6. Finish - Finished with anticorrosive treatment.
Nominal size 20 25 30 40 45 50 65 75
Length (Tolerance + 1) 20 25 30 40 45 50 65 75
Width over flaps:
Min 70 72 80 85 97 105 150 165
Mar 71.15 73.5 81.5 86.5 100 108 153 168
i Thickness 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8
25 40 50 65
Width over flaps):
75 90 105 125
76.5 91.5 108 128
1.6 1.8 1.9 2.4
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3843-1966 Specification for steel backfap hinges.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3847-1966 MORTICE NIGHT LATCHES

1. Scope - Requirements for mortice night latches Note - For materials for other components see 5 and Table 1
for general use. of the standard.
4. Requirements
2. General - Nominal size shall be denoted by
a) Depth of. body shall not exceed 15 mm.
length of face over the body in mm. Termed ‘left hand’
b) Locking bolt section shall be not leas than
if fitted on the left-hand door and ‘right-hand’ if fitted
8x25 mm.
onright hand door. Two lever latches and latches with
c) Number of levers shall be not leas than two.
more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable
keys for a batch of at least 12 and 60 latch& r&pec- 5. Finish
tivelv.,
a) Steel body - Protective coating such as
painting
3. Materials b) Face plate and striking plate - Finished
For body, body cover, i) Mild steel smooth and polished bright or satin (or may be L.
case plate, face plate ii) Aluminium alloy sheet chromium plated).
and striking plate iii) Cast brass (copper c) Aluminium alloy - Anodized.
content shall not be
less than 60 percent) 6. Tests - Shall satisfy the prescribed performance
iv) Brass sheet tests and endurance tests.
Note-For test procedures see 9 of the stundord.
\ For detailed information, refer to IS : 3847-1966 Specification for mortice night latches.
256
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4621-1975 INDICATING BOLTS FOR USE IN PUBLIC BATHS

AND LAVATORIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for indicating bolts for b) Indicating disc Aluminium alloy sheet
use in public baths and lavatories. Brass casting
c) Gears Aluminium alloy casting
2. General - Operation of bolt may be achieved Brass casting
either by gear work or by displacement. Normally
made in two sizes, namely, size 1 and size 2. When the 4. Dimensions and Tolerances -
bolt is drawn, it shall show the word “ENGAGED ” on
red background, and when it is withdrawn, it shall Size 1 Size 2 Tolerance
show the word “VACANT” on green background. (mm) (mm) (mm)
Length of bolt 75 85 fl
3. Material --Breadth of bolt 45 50 fl
a) Body, knob and Aluminium alloy casting Dia of disc 70 70 fl
indicating Extruded aluminiumalloy Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 4 of rhe
spindle Brass casting standard.
Extruded brass
Zinc base alloy dia 5. Finish - Assembled bolt shall be satin finished
casting. or bright polished. Aluminium bolts shah be anodized.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4621-1975 Specification for indicating bolts for use in public baths
and lavatories (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4948-1974 WELDED STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR GENERAL USE

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for welded steel wire Note - For chemical composition and bend test, refer to
fabric for general use, such as fencing, window grill IS : 226-1975* and IS : 280-1972 t respectively.
and crates. Not intended to cover fabric for concrete
reinforcement (see IS : 15661967*). 3. Size
2. Quality of Wire 3.1 Wire Diameters - 12.50, 11.20, 10.00, 9.00,

2.1 Mechanical Properties - Ultimate tensile 8.00,7.10, 6.30, 5.60,5.00,4.50, 4.00, 3.55,3.15,
strength not less than 42 kgf/mm2. Percentage of elon- 2.8.0, 2.50, 2.24, 2.00, 1.80, and 1.60 mm.
gation shall be not less than 7 on gauge length of 8
times the diameter of wire.
- *Specification for structural steel (standardquality) fij% revision).
*Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete tspecification for mild steel wire for general engineering pur-
reinforcement firsr revisbn). pose (second revision).
257
SP : 21-1983
Size Dia of wire

3.2 T.olerance on Diameter (in mm)
b) Oblong 50x25 2.5 to 4.5
For size of wire 1.6 to 5.6 mm + 0.050 mesh 75X25 3.15 to 5.0
For size of wire over 5.6 mm f 0.060 75x50 3.15 to 5.6
c) Tolerance
i) Size of mesh - Not more than 5 percent.
4. Mesh Sizes Commonly Available (in mm)
ii) Size of sheet or roll +25 mm or 1 percent
whichever is greater.
Size Dia of wire
5. Test for Welding - Average strength value of
a) Square 20x20 2.0, 2.5, 3.15 the weld shall not be less than 21 kgf/mm2 and the area
mesh 25x25 2.0, 2.5, 3.15 of the wire to be taken into consideration for calcula-
31x37 2.5, 3.15 tion is the longitudinal wire. Fabric having a diameter 1
50x50 2.5, 3.15, 3.55, 4.0, 4.5 difference between transverse and longitudinal wire
75x75 2.5, 3.15, 3.55, 4.0, 4.5, greater than 2 mm shall not be subjected to weld shear
5.0, 5.6 test.
Note-For method of test, refer to clause 6 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4948-1974 Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4992-1975 DOOR HANDLES FOR MORTICE LOCKS

(VERTICAL TYPE)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for door handles for 5. Performance Requirements - A sample
operation of mortice locks (vertical type) covered picked out at random from a lot of 100, when fitted to a
in IS : 2209-1976*. lock and operated 1000 times shall not show any dam-
age or ineffectiveness in working. When the handle is
2. Type - Handle type and knob type. in its extreme position in the lock and pulled horizon-
tally with a load of 100 kgf, it shall not develop cracks,
3. Material - Brass, mild steel, aluminium alloy, lose shape or get damaged. L.
etc.
6. Workmanship - All sharp edges shall be
4. Dimensions and Tderances removed.
-.
Size of door handle knob housing 7. Finish - Brass handles shall have natural $n jsh
= (150+5)X(40+2)mm or shall be bright chromium electroplated.
Length of handle =90f2 mm. Aluminium alloy handles shall be anodized. Zinc base
alloy die cast handles and mild steel handles shall be
*Specification for mortice locks (vertical type) (third revision). bright chromium plated.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4992-1975 Specification for door handles for mortice locks (vertical
type) (first revision).
258
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5187 - 1972 FLUSH BOLTS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for flush bolts for use in T,pe Size Face Plate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia
cupboards and doors. (mm) Length, (Min) (Min) (mm)
mm (mm)
2. Materials
a) Body and plate - Cast brass, cast aluminium 1 200 200 30 8fl
and extruded aluminium alloy. 2 100 100 15 8fl
b) Bolt - Cast brass, extruded brass and 2 150 150 15 8+1
extruded aluminium alloy.
2 200 200 15 8+1
c) Spring - Phosphor bronze and steel strip.
2 250 250 15 8+1
3. Manufacture - Rod shall be retained in its 2 300 300 15 8+1
maximum bolting position by the spring.
Note - For typical illustration of Type 1 and 2 bolts see Fig. 1
of the standard.
4. Dimensions and Tolerances:
Type Size Face Plate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia
5. Workmanship and Finish - Shall have smooth
(mm) Length, (Min) (Mirt) (mm) and easy working when assembled. Brass bolts shall be
bm (mm) satin or bright polished, or nickel or chromium plated
1 100 100 20 821 or copper oxidized. Aluminium flush bolts shall be
1 150 150 25 8+1 anodized.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5187-1972 Specification for flush bolts (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5899- 1970 BATHROOM LATCHES
1. Scope - Requirements for material, size and alloy, and aluminium extrusions.
finish of bathroom latches. b) Bolts - Brass cast, brass extruded, mild steel
rod, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium
2. Shape and Size extrusions.
c) Knob - Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium
Overall size = 40x50 mm
alloy and aluminium extrusions.
Thickness = 10 mm
Note - For typical illustration see Fig. l’of the standard. 4. Workmanship and Finish - Latch shall be
smoothly finished. Aluminium alloy body may be
3. Material
anodized. Cast brass body shall be given a protective
a) Body - Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium coating such as painting.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5899-1970 Specification for bathroom latches.
259
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
.
IS : 5930-1970 MORTICE LATCH (VERTICAL TYPE)
1. Scope -Requirements for mortice latches fa c) Mechanism - Latch shall operate easily from
use ondoors, such as bath roomdoors, W.C. doors and both sides of the door. Bolt shall turn into
doors to private rooms. locking position when the thumb turn knob is
turned through 90”.
2. Sizes - 65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be de-
d) Lever spring - Lever spring fitted into the
noted by overall length of the body measured from the
lever shall withstand following tests without
outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Measured
showing signs of permanent set.
length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the
length specified for size. i) Lever spring shall be pressed down so as to
Note - For typical illustration of a mortice lock see Fig. 1 of touch top edge of lever and released. Repeat
the standard. six times.
ii) Lever spring shall also stand a transverse
3. Material -Material for different component
load of 15 kgf beforefailureofjointbetween
parts shall comply with the requirements given in levea and spring.
Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.
4. Interchangeability - Component parts of 6. Workmanship and Finish - Brass body shall

latches of the same size andstype shall be completely be finished smooth. Steel body shall be given a protec-
interchangeable. tive coating such as painting. Aluminium alloy body
may be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be
S. Manufacture finished smooth and polished bright or satin, or
chromium plated, anodized or oxidized.
a) Body - Depth of body shall not exceed
15 mm.
b) Locking bolt - Section not less than 18 x 25 7. Tests - The finally assembled latch shall with-
mm. stand tests given in 9.1.1 to 9.1.3 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice latch (vertical type).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6315-1971 FLOOR SPRINGS (HYDRAULICALLY REGULATED)

FOR HEAVY DOORS
1. Scope - Requirements for concealed type floor nut.

springs (hydraulically regulated) for vertical doors Note - For typical details of floor spring see Fig. 1 of the
weighing not more than 125 kg. In case of doors standard.
consisting of more than one leaf the weight of each leaf
shall not exceed 125 kg.
3.1 Floor spring shall not show any change or de-
2. Construction - Oil check shall work satisfac- terioration in working after it has been subjected to
torily between 49°C and - 10°C without requiring any 50 000 operations at a rate of not more than 6 to 8
other change e’cept by the adjustment of the Capstan operations per minute.
260
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Closing time of floor spring shall be easily ad- 4. Finish

justable between 3 and 20 seconds for which a suitable
device to adjust the speed shall be provided. 4.1 Floor spring shall be covered by one brass/
aluminium sheet which shall be flush with the floor.
3.3 Door leaf when opened through 90” plus 5” and
The cover sheet, shoe and top centre shall be polished
released shall stand open till pushed back in the closing
or electroplated as mutually agreed.
position. When opened to an angle less than 90“, the
door shall swing back automatically. 4.2 Mild steel parts shall be given a synthetic stoving
3.4 Force of not more than 2 kgf shall be required, at enamel finish according to prescribed sIrec$ications.
a distance of 1 m from the frame, to open the door leaf Finish shall be smooth, uniform and shall not chip
weighing 125 kg, through 90“. when tapped lightly with a pointed instrument.
Note-For details regarding materials see 4 of the stmdurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6315-1971 Specification for floor springs (hydraulically regulated)
for heavy doors.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6318-1971 PLASTIC WINDOW STAYS AND FASTENERS
1. Scope - Lays down performance and Rtnc tional 3. Size and Shape
requirements of window stays made of polypropylene
Length of window stay = 300mm
and fasteners (handles) made of nylon.
Length of window fastener = 110 mm
2. Materials - Requirements of polypropylene: Note - For typical illustration see Fig. 1 of rhe srandurd.
a) Density, 0.900 to 0.910 g/ml 4. Tests

b) Tensile strength at yield, Min 315 kgf/cm* 4.1 Testfor Stays - Window stay shall be capable
4 Impact strength, Min 3.7 kgf/cm (of notch)
of restraining the shutter in three positions, at angles of
d) Walter absorption, MUX 0.04 percent
30”, 60” and 90” with the frame. Tolerance in position
e) Deflection temperature, Min 54°C of restraint: f5”.
f) Weather resistance - Shall retain at least 50
percent of original alongation 4.2 Test for Fasteners - Fastener shall be able to
iit) Deformation underload, MUX 6.0 percent, hold a force of 40 kgf (applied in increments of 5 kgf at
50°C and 70 kg/cm* one minute intervals).
Note-For test procedures see 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6318-1971 Specification for plastic window stays and fasteners.
261
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6343-1982 DOOR CLOSERS (PNEUMATICALLY REGULATED)

FOR LIGHT DOORS WEIGHING UP TO 40 kg
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for door closers 5.4 The speed of closing the door shall be adjusted by
(pneumatically regulated) for use on light doors weigh- increase or decrease in the tension of helical spring.
ing up to 40 kg.
5.5 The closer shall not show any sign of leakage in
2. Terminology the air pressure.
5.6 Each closer shall be furnished with clear, de-
2.1 Door Closer (Pneumatically Regulated) - A
tailed instructions for installation and regulation Of the
pneumatic door closer (hereinafter called closer) is an
equipment for automatic closing of doors and also for closer.
regulation of closing speed. Note - For typical illustration of the door closer, see Fig. 1 of
the standard.
3. Materials
4 Cylinder - Brass tube mild steel tube/ 6. Performance Requirements
aluminium tube,
b) Piston/Piston Rod - Steel/cast iron/ 6.1 After being fitted in its position, when the door is
aluminium alloy/zinc alloy, opened through 90” and released, it shall swing back to
c) Brackets and Fittings - Mild steel/cast an angle of 20 +5” with normal speed, but themaftcr
iron/aluminium alloy/zinc alloy/cast brass, the speed shall get automatically retarded till a smooth,
4 Spring - Steel, and final close is reached.
d Regulating screws - Brass/bronze/ 6.2 Endurance Test - The closer fitted to the door
ah.uninium alloy/steel/zinc alloy. of maximum permissible weight shall be subjected to
50 000 operations at the rate of a maximum of 6 to 8
4. DimelLsions and Tolerances - Shall be as ag- operations per minute. The number of operations to be
reed upon between the purchaser and the manufac- carried out continuously at any time during the test
turer. shall not be less than 3 000. At the end of the test the
closer shall show no defects, failure, or deterioration in
5. General Requirements its working.
5.1 The surface of closer shall be clean, without
sharpedges, free from cracks, dents, burrs or any other 7. Fildsb - The exposed surface shall be polished
visible surface defects. or pointed as agreed to mutually. In case of aluminium
body, it may be anodized. All components of mild steel
5.2 After fixing, the closer shall operate smoothly
shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease
and quietly without any undue play during opening and
rust, scale or any other foreign element. The finish of
closing operation.
mild steel surface shall be smooth, uniform and free
5.3 The closer shall work satisfactorily at all temper- from all visible defects with hard and tough film of
atures between 40°C and 10°Cwithout requiring any enamel strongly adhering to the surface. All compo-
other change except by adjustment of regulating screw. nents shall be finished in colour as agreed to mutually.
Note - For requirements regarding manufacture and details of finishing, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6343-1982 Specification for door closers (pneumatically regulated)
for right doors weighing up to 40 kg (first revision).
262
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 66O2- 1972 VENTILATOR POLE

1. Scope - Requirements for size, shape and mate- free from fabrication, casting and surface defects. Sur-
rials for ventilator pole. face shall be smooth. Two screw holes on side shall be
counter sunk to suit wood screws No. 8.
2. Dimensions
Length = 450 + 15 mm 5. Finish
Note - For typical illustration of a ventilator polesee Fig. 1 of Steel and cast iron -Bright finished, black
the standard.
painted or oxidized.
3. Materials - Cast iron, mild steel, cast brass, Brass - Oxidized or plated.
aluminium alloy, polypropylene or timber Aluminium - Natural or anodized finish.
Wood -Waxed, french polished, varnished or
4. Manufacture - Ventilator pole hook shall be painted.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6602-1972 Specification for ventilator pole.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6607-1972 REBATED MORTICE LOCKS (VERTICAL TYPE)

1. Scope - Requirements for rebated mortice locks b) Locking bolt - Section shall not be less than
suitable for use on double leaf doors with rebated 12x 16 mm for all sizes of locks
meeting stiles. c) Mechanism - Locking mechanism shall be
lever type with not less than two levers.
2. Sizes - 65,75 and 100 mm. Size shall be de-
noted by length of the body measured from the outside d) Lever spring -
Shall withstand the prescribed
test.
face of the fore end to the rear end over the body in mm.
The measured length shall not vary more than f 3 mm e) Keys - Two for each lock usable from inside
from the length specified for size. and outside.
Note - For typical design of rebated mortice locksee Fig. 1 of f) Latch bolt - Section not less than 12X 16
rhe standatd. mm.
..
3. Non-interchangeability Two-lever - locks 5. Workmanship and Finish - Brass body shall
shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy
minimum of 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers body may be anodized. Rebated face plate and striking
shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a plate may be polished, stained, chromium plated or
minimum of 100 locks. oxidized. Steel body shall be given protectivecoating.
Steel parts shall begiven specified protective treatment
4. Manufacture before painting.
a) Body - Depth of body shall not exceed 15 6. Tests - Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of
mm. the standard.
Note-For requirements for materials for component parts of mortice locks see Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6607-1972 Specification for rebated mortice locks (vertical type).
263
SP : 21-1983
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel hold fasts 3. Manufacture - Shall be made from mild steel
for use with wooden doors and window frames. flats not less than 5 mm thick, and without any burrs or
dents.
2. Size and Dimensions - Shall be as given in 4. Finish - Shall be given a coat of bitumen and
Fig. 1. sanded.
!
100-e 100 c
r
a
A
200
All dimensions in millimetres. ..

Fig. I Mild Steel Hold Fast
For detailed information, refer to IS : 71961974 Specification for hold fast.
264
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7197- 1974 DOUBLE ACTION FLOOR SPRINGS (WITHOUT OIL

CHECK) FOR HEAVY DOORS
1. Scope - Requirements for concealed type floor brass or aluminium sheet which only shall be flush with
springs (without oil check) for vertical doors weighing the floor. Provision shall be made in floor springs for
not more than 125 kg. For doors having more than one adjusting door leaf to final closed position by turning
leaf. the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg. the adjusting screw. 1
2. Type and Shape - For typical details of a floor .

spring see Fig. 1 of rhr standard. 6. Performance Requirements - A sample
mounted to a door leaf weighing 125 kg shall be sub-
3. Materials jected to 50 000 operations (that is movement of door
a) Foundation box, main body and half leaf through 180”) at the rate of not more than 6 to 8
cover - Brass sheet 1.25 mm, Min thick, operations per minute. Floor spring shall not show any
mild steel sheet 1.25 mm, Min thick, cast iron; damage or deterioration at the end of test.
aluminium alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, A force of not more than 2 kgf shall be required at a
Min thick; aluminium alloy sheet 1.25 mm, distance of one metre from the door frame, to open the
Min thick or zinc base alloy pressure die- door leaf weighing 125 kg through 90”.
castings 2 mm, Min thick.
b) Spring rod - Mild steel
7. Finish - Cover sheet, shoe and top centre pivot
Note - For requirements for materials for other parts of floor shall be polished, electroplated or anodized. Mild steel
spring see Table 1 of he standard.
and cast iron parts shall be given a synthetic stoving
4. Di&ensions and Tolerances - As agreed to be- enamel finish according to prescribed specifications.
tween the purchaser and the manufacturer. The finish shall be smooth, uniform and shall not chip
when tapped lightly with a pointed instrument.
5. Construction - Floor spring shall be covered by Aluminium parts shall be anodized.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7197-1974 Specification for double action floor springs (without oil
check) for heavy doors.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7534-1974 MILD STEEL LOCKING BOLTS WITH HOLES

FOR PADLOCKS
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, di- Size Length of Lengdt of Dia of Bolt
mensions, manufacture and finishof mild steel locking Bolt Plate Bolt
door bolts commonly used in general building con- mm mm mm mm
struction for locking doors, gates, etc, withlpadlocks. 200 260f3 200f2 12kO.5
250 310f3 250+2 12f0.5
2. Sizes - 150, 200, 250 and 300 mm. 300 360+3 300+2 12f0.5
3. Dimensions and Tolerances 4. Manufacture - Shall have smooth sliding

action. Shall not have sharp edges and comers.
Size Length of Length of Dia of Bolt 5. Finish - Shall be copper oxidized, electrogal-
Bolt Plate Bolt vanized or stove enamelled black. In case of stove
mm mm mm mm
enamelled locking bolts, the bolts may be finished
150 210+3 150+2 12+0.5 bright.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7534-1974 Specification for mild steel locking bolts with holes for
padlocks.
265
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7540-1974 MORTICE DEAD LOCKS
1. Scope - Requirements for mortice dead locks. minimum of 24 locks. Locks withmore than twolevers
shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a
Note - Mortice dead locks have a single bolt which is shot and
withdrawn by means of key (from either side) providing reasona- minimum of 100 locks.
ble degree of security. Being lock for occasional rather than
frequent use it is well suited for use alone, or as an additional lbck 5. Manufacture
for the doors of store rooms, cellers, warehouses, etc.
a) Body - Depth of body shall not exceed
2. Sizes - 45, 65 and 75mm. Size is denoted by 15 mm.
length of face over the body in mm. Measured length b) Locking bolt - Section shall not be less than
shall not vary by more than + 3 mm from length spec- 10X30 mm.
ified for size. c) Levers - Not less than two.
Note - For typical details of mortice dead locks see Fig. 1 of d) Lever spring - Shall withstand the prescribed
the standard. tests without showing any sign of permanent
set.
3. Material e) Keys - Two for each lock.
3.1 Body, B&y Cover - Mild steel, cast brass, 6. Finish - Brass body shall be finished smooth
brass sheet, aluminium alloy castings and sheets and and polished. Aluminium alloy body be anodized.
zinc base alloy casting. Face plate and striking plate shall be polished, painted,
Note - For requirements for materials for other component plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given suitable
parts see Table 1 of the standard. protective coating.
4. Non-interchangeability - Two-lever locks 7. Tests - Shall withstand the tests specified in 9

shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7540-1974 Specification for mortice dead locks.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8756-1978 BALL CATCHES FOR USE IN WOODEN ALMIRAHS
1. Scope - Requirements for material, sizes and closed position, it shall be retained in that position by
finish of ball catches for use in wooden almirahs. the spring action of the ball catch and working shall be
ensured in continuous usage. Door shall open only
2. Sizes - 6,7.5,9.5 and 12.5 mrn.Size is denoted when it is pulled to open.
by the external diameter of the cylinder.
Note - For detailed dimensions and typical illustration of a 4. Workmanship and Finish - Shall have smooth
ball catch refer to the standard.
and easy working. Body and striking plate shall be
3. Manufacture - When the almirah door is in satin or bright polished.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8756-1978 Specification for ball catches for use in wooden almirahs.
266
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8760- 1978 MORTICE SLIDING DOOR LOCKS WITH

LEVER MECHANISM
1. Scope - Requirements for mortice sliding door shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consist-
locks having lever mechanism. ing of a minimum of 24 locks.
Locks with more than two levers shall have non-

2. Siie - 70 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by
interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a
the overall length of the body in millimetres measured ,
minimum of 100 locks.
from the outside face of the fore end to rear end.
Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm
from the length specified for size. 6. Finish
Note - Locks of other sizes permitted where mutually agreed Brass body - Finished smooth
between the purchaser and the manufacturer. Steel body - Suitable protective coating such as
painting.
3. Shape and Design - Any shape but shall be Aluminiuy allay body - Anodized
capable of being opened with key from both sides. Faceplate and striking plate - Finished smooth
Note - For typical illustration of mortice siding door locksee and polished bright or satin. May be chromium
Fig. 1 of rhe sznndard plated, anodized or oxidized where so desired
4. Dimensions - As agreed to between the purch- by purchaser.
aser and the manufacturer.
7. Tests - Shall withstand the tests specified in10
5. Non-interchangeability - Two lever locks of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8760-1978 Specification for mortice sliding door locks with lever
mechanism.
267
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
PLY WOOD Title Page
IS : 303-1975 Plywood for general purposes (second revision) 271

IS : 13281982 Veneered decorative plywood (second revision) 273
IS : 1659-1979 Block boards (second revision) 274
IS : 4990-1981 Plywood for concrete shuttering work (first revision) 275
IS : 5509-1980 Fire retardant plywood @firstrevision) 276
IS : 5539-1969 Preservative treated plywood 278
IS : 7316-1974 Decorative plywood using plurality of veneers for decorative faces 280
PARTICLE BOARDS AND FIBRE BOARDS

IS : 1658-1977 Fibre hardboards (second revision) 281
IS : 3087-1%5 Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes 282
IS : 3097-1980 Veneered particle boards (jirst revision) 283
IS : 3129-1965 Particle board for insulation purposes 285
IS : 3308-1981 Wood wool building slabs Sfirst revision) 286
IS : -3348-1%5 Fibre insulation boards 287
IS : 3478-1%6 High density wood particle boards 288
270
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 303-1975 PLYWOOD FOR GENERAL PURPOSES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of different grades and AC, AD, BB, BC, BD, CC, CD and DD based on
types of plywood used for general purposes. quality of face and back surface in terms of permissible
.defects. For quality requirements see Table 1.
2. Grades (Depending on type of adhesive used for Maximum number of permissible defects per m3 shall
bonding veneers):
a) Boiling water proof or BWP Grade Species of timber used shall be those given in Class 1 of
b) Boiling water resistant or BWR Grade 1 Appendix A of the standard.
c) Warm water resistant or WWR Grade Species of timber used shall be those given in Class I
d) Cold water resistant or CWR Grade 1 and II of Appendix A of the standard.
3. Types Based on Classification by Appear- be 3, 6, 9 and ‘no limit’ for surface types A, B, C, D
ante - Classified into 10 types, namely, AA, AB, respectively.
TABLE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OF PLYWOOD FOR GENERAL PURPOSES
SL DEFECT TYPE OF SURFACES

No. ,
(1) (2)
i) Blister Nil Nil Nil Occasional
ii) Checks Individual check not Individual check not Individual check not Individual check not
more than 25 mm in more than 50 mm in more than 100 mm in more than 125 mm in
length, and the total length, and the total length, and the total length, and the total
length not more than length not more than length not more than length not more than
300 mm/ma 600 mm/ma 1000 mm/ma 1 200 mm/m2
iii) Discolouration 3 percent of the area 25 percent of the area 50 percent of the area 75 percent of the area
(sound not injurious)
iv) Discolouration Nil Nil Nil 20 percent
(unsound)
v) Dote Nil 5 cm/m2 15 cm/ma 15 cm/m2
vi) Insect hole Nil Scattered up to 12 Scattered up to 24 Scattered up to 50

holes/ma holes/ma holes/ma may be
permitted
vii) Joints None in 250 mm wide Not more than one in No restriction No restriction
face and in wider 250 mm wide face
faces, one joint for and in wider faces
every multiple of one joint for every
200 mm in width multiple of 200 mm
provided no indivi- provided no indivi-
dual piece is less than dual piece is less than
125 mm in width 100 mm in width
viii) Knots (dead) Nil 2 up to 12 mm dia/ma 4 up to 20 mm dialma 8 knots up to 20 mm
in dia/ma including
drop out knot holes
may be permitted
ix) Pin knots (dead) Nil 2/m2 6/m2 lo/ma
x) Pin knots (live) Permitted, provided No restriction No restriction No restriction

they do not mar
the appearance
xi) Knots (tight) 3 up to 25 mm dia/m2 6 up to 25 mm dia/ma No restriction No restriction
(Continued)
271
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OF PLYWOOD FOR GENERAL PURPOSES - Confa’
SL DEFECT TYPE OF SURFACES

h
No. /
(1) (2)
xii) Patches Nil 4 patches/m* provided Any number, provided Any number, provided
they are all tight they are all tight they are all tight
patches and do not patches -and are patches and properly
mar the appearance matched for colour made
xiii) Splits One split, not more 2 splits, not more than 3 splits, not more than 6 splits, not more than
than 1.0 mm wide 6 mm wide and total 10 mm wide and 25 mm wide and
and not longer than length not more than total length not more total length not ex-
50 mm provided it is 200 mm provided than 300 mm provi- ceeding 400 mm
filled with a suitable they are filled with ded they are filled
filler suitable veneer inserts with suitable veneer
inserts. Splits up to
25 mm long and
0.8 mm wide may be
ignored provided they
are suitably filled
xiv) Swirl Up to 4/m* provided Unlimited, provided No restriction No restriction

they do not mar the they do not mar the
appearance appearance
4. Dimensions and Tolerances Above 120 cm +6 mm

-0mm
a) Size (in cm) 300X 150 180X 90 +3 mm
Width 90 cm & below
240x 120 150x 120 -0 mm
240x 90 150x 90 +6 mm
Above 90 cm
210x 120 120x 120 -0 mm
210x90 90x 90
Thickness up to 5 mm 210 percent
180x 120
6to9mm +7 percent
Above 9 mm +5 percent
b) Thickness (in mm)
5. Finish - Edge of the boards shall be trimmed
Board Tlkkness square within 3 mm and sanded to a smooth finish.
3-Plv 3.4. 5, 6
5-Ply 5; 6; 8; 9 6. Tests
7-Ply 9, 12, 15, 16
9-Ply 12, 15, 16, 19 6.1 Glue Adhesion - Shall have the following
1 l-Ply 19, 22, 25 minimum shear strength (kg):
S1No. Grade Dry State Mycological Resistance to Moisture
i) BWP Average 135 100 100

Individual 110 80 80
ii) BWR Average 135 100 100
Individual 110 80 80
iii) WWR Average 100 80 80
Individual 80 65 65
iv) CWR Average 70 35 35
Individual 55 30 30
c) Tolerance 6.2 Moisture Content - Not less than 5 percent and

Length 120 cm & below +3 mm and not more than 15 percent.
-0 mm
272
SP : 21-1983
Note l-For species of timber to be used for faces, cores and cross-bands see Appendix A of the standard. Adhesive for bonding the
veneers in different grades of plywood shall be the corresponding type of adhesive as specified in IS : 848-1974 Specification for
synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision).
Note 2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1734 (Parts I to XX)-1972 Methods of test for plywood (first revision) and Appendix B of
the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 303-1975 Specification for plywood for general purposes (second
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1328-1982 VENEERED DECORATIVE PLYWOOD

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of types of plywood with synthetic resin. Decorative veneer shall be rotary cut or
ornamental veneers on one or both faces used for sliced not more than 1 mm thick.
decorative purposes, such as furniture making, panel- N&e- For species of timber commonly used for decorative
ling of all kinds, including panelling for railway veneers or decorative plywood, see Table 1 of the standard.
coaches, buses and ships.
4. Tolerances
2. Types - Shall be of two types, namely,Type 1 Length
and Type 2. Upto 120mm f3 mm
Above 120 mm f6 mm
Type 1 - Open splits, checks or open joints up to Width
150x0.5 mm permissible, provided these are re- Up to 90 mm +3 mm
ctified with a veneer insert bonded with synthetic Above 90 mm f6 mm
resin adhesive. Shall be free from tom grain, dead
knots, dote, discolouration and sapwood. Veneers Thickness
shall be matched or mismatched to achieve decora- + 10 percent of nominal thickness
tive effect. -5 percent of nominal thickness
Type2 - Same as Type 1 except that the rectified 5. Tests

open splits, checks or open joints may be up to a) Moisture Content - Not less than 5 percent
200x 1 mm. Tight knots and patches not more and not more than 15 percent.
than 25 mm in diameter, and pin knots not more
than 4 mm in diameter shall be permissible. Sap- b) Water Resistance Test - Shall not show de-
wood would be permissible, if it does not affect lamination or blister formation after the spe-
appearance. cified test.
c) Test for Adhesion of Plies - Shall show a
3. Material - Species of timber for decorative face minimum of ‘pass’ standard,
shall be specified by the purchaser. Timber for cores
and backs shall be either of Class I or II specified in Note- For methods of test see 9.1.2.1 of rhe standard.
IS : 3031985*. Adhesive shall be BWR or WWR
6. Finish - Edges of decorative plywood shall be
*Specification for plywood for general purposes (second trimmed square within 3 mm and sanded to a smooth
revision). finish.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1734 (Part I)-1972 Methods of tests for plywood: Part I Determination of density and
moisture content (first revision), IS : 1734 (Part V)-1972 Methods of tests for plywood: Part V Test for adhesion of plies (first
revision), and 9.1.2.1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1328-1982 Specification for veneered decorative plywood (second
revision).
273
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1659-1979 BLOCK BOARDS

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of commercial and de- 4. Dimensions and Tolerances

corative blockboards meant for interior and exterior
uses. Dimensions
a> Length - 300, 270, 240, 210, 180,’ 150
2. Grades and Types and 120 cm;
b) Width - 150, 120 and 90 cm; and
2.1 Grades c) Thickness - 12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 32, 35,
38,40, 45 and 50 mm.
a) Grade I - Exterior grade meant for bus
bodies, railway coaches, prefabricated houses,
Tolerances
where it is likely to be exposed to rain, high
humidity, etc. a) Length +6 mm,
b) Width +6 mm, and
b) Grade 2 - Interior grade meant for furniture, c) Thickness f5 percent up to 35 mm thick-
partition, panelling, ceiling, etc. ness & 2.5 percent above 25 mm
2.2. Types - Each grade shall be of the following thickness.
types:
Note - Length of diagonals shall not differ by more than
a) Type I - Decorative tyype with ornamental 2.5 mm per metre length of diagonal.
veneers on one or both faces for use in high
Class furniture, panelling, interior decorations, 5. Tests
partitions, etc.
5.1 Dimensional Changes Caused by Humidity -
b) Type 2 - Commercial type with faces of Dimensions shall not change by more than + 1 mm at
commercial timber for use for ordinary fumi- relativehumiditiesof 9Opement and40percentcompared
ture, table tops, partitions and panelling, seats to the dimensions of the block board conditioned at 65
of bus bodies, railway carriages, etc. percent relative humidity. There shall be no delamination
and the changes in local planeness shall not be more than
2.3 Representation by symbols
l! 150.
Grade and Type Symbol
5.2 Resistance to Water - Shall satisfy the pre-
.Grade 1, Type 1 XDEC
scribed test.
Grade 1, Type 2 XCGM
Grade 2, Type 1 IDFC 5.3 Adhesion of Plies - Veneers shall offer resis-
Grade 2, Type 2 ICOM tance to separation and the fractured surface shall show
some adherent fibredistributed more or less uniformly.
3. Materials
5.4 Mycological Test - Shall show no appreciable
3.1 Adhesive -
B WP type for Grade 1 and BWR or signs of separation at the edges.
WWR type for Grade 2.
5.5 If required by the purchaser, additional tests,
namely, central loading of plate test, flexural strength
Note - For details regarding timber for core, crossbands and
face veneers of commercial type and decorative type, refer to and deflection under sustained load test may be per-
Appendices A and B of the standard. formed.
Note- For test procedures see Appendices C to H of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 1659-1979 Specification for blockboards (second revision).
274
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4990-1981 PLYWOOD FOR CONCRETE SHUTTERING WORK

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of plywood for concrete 3.3 Face with plastic coating, or with suitable
shuttering work. overlay shall be dense, smooth, without blister
and without patch marks and shah be of uniform
1.1 Recommended method for handling, storing and colour.
use of plywood of concrete shuttering and formwork is
covered in Appendix A of the standard.
4. Tests
, 4.1 Moisture Content - Shall be between 5 and 15
2.1 Size (Length X Width) - 240 X 120, 240 X90., percent.
210 x 120, 210 x 90, 180 x 120, 180 x90,
150 x 120,150 x90, 120x 120, 120 X 90,120 x60 4.2 Glue Adhesion in Dry State
and90 X90cm.
4.2.1 Glue shear strength - Average failing
2.2 Thickness - 4,5,6 mm for 3-ply; 6,8, 10 mm load shall be not less than 1 323.9 N and no individual
for 5-ply; 13, 16 mm for 7-ply; 16, 19 mm for 9-ply; value shall be less than 1 078.7 N.
22, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm for more than 9-ply.
4.2.2 Adhesion ofplies - The veneers shall offer
2.3 Tolerances appreciable resistance to separation and the fractured
Length up to 120 cm and +3 mm samples shall show some adherent fibms distributed
width up to 90 cm mom or less uniformly.
Length above 120 cm and +6 mm
width above 90 cm 4.3 Water Resistance Test
Thickness up to 5 mm * 10 percent
Thickness above 5 mm f 15 percent 4.3.1 Glue shear strength - Average failing
load shall be not less than 980.7 N and no individual
3. Finish value shall be less than 784 N.
3.1 Shall be smooth and the faces and back shall be 4.3.2 Adhesion of plies - Requirements shall be (
free from harmful discolouration, pleates overlaps and same as given in 4.2.2
loose knots. Edges shall be of smooth uniform finish.
4.4 Plywood for concrete shuttering work with plas-
3.2 Gaps and open joints shah be permitted as tic coating or with suitable overlay after being sub-
follows: jected to 72 hours boiling shall not show any softening,
checking, cracking or deterioration of the surface
a) Inface - Provided the gap or opening does
not exceed a width of 0.4 mm, if it-exceeds 0.4 layer.
mm, if it exceed 0.4 mm, this may be rectified
by well fitted veneer inserts of a minimum 4.5 Plywood manufactured from species not natur-
width 4.8 mm provided the gram of the veneer ally durable, shall show more or less uniform absorp-
does not exceed in deviation by more than 10 tion of preservative on the entire surface.
percent from the grain direction of the sur-
rounding veneer. 4.6 Tensile Strength
b) In Core (cross-band) - Width of opening a) Not less than 318 kN/m2, parallel to grain
shall not exceed 0.8 mm in the case of 3-ply or direction of face veneers;
3.2 mm in the case of multi-ply, provided the
openings are not less than 30 cm apart in any
b) Not less than 220 kN/m2 at right angles to
grain direction of face veneers; and
veneer and staggered not less than 15 cm bet-
ween any veneer and the next one with the c) Sum of tensile strengths in both directions not
same grain direction. less than 588 kN/m2.
275
SP : 21-1983
4.7 Mycological Test - Test piece shall show no shall comply with requirements given in 4.3.1
appreciable signs of separation at edges of veneers and and 4.3.2.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1734 Method of test for plywood:

IS : 1734 (Part I)-1972 Part I Determination of density and moisture content (first revision)
IS : 1734 (Part IV)-1972 Part IV Determination of glue shear strength (first revision)
IS : 1734 (Part V)-1972 Part V Test for adhesion of plies (first revision)
IS : 1734 (Part VII)-1972 Part VII Mycological test (first revkion)
IS : 1734 (Part IX)-1972 Part IX Determination of tensile strength (fkt revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4990-1981 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5509-1980 FIRE RETARDANT PLYWOOD

(First Revision)
1. scope- Fireretardant formulations, method of Type 4 Combination of ammonium phosphate

treatment retentions and requirements of fire retardant and boron compounds
plywood. Type 5 Combination of ammonium sulphate and
ammonium phosphate
2. Flame Retard&s
Type 1 Ammonium phosphates 2.1 Where flame retardant and preservative tmat-
Type 2 Boron compounds ment am requited together, types of chemical and their
Type 3 Ammonium sulphate retention shall be as follows:
Tvpe Flame Retardant Preservative Retention of

Preservative
kg/m3, Min
6 Ammonium phosphate c Copper/chrome 6
7 Ammonium phosphate/ammonium sulphate Copper/chrome 6
8 Ammonium phosphate/ammonium sulphate/boron compounds Copper/chrome 6
9 Ammonium phosphate/ammonium sulphate/boron compounds Copper/chrome 8
276
SP : 21-1983
3. Preparation of Plywood for Treatment - 5. Workmanship and Finish - Finished plywood

Plywood for treatment shall conform to BWR type shall be reasonably clean to handle and fme of dirt and
and shall have moisture content not over 16 percent. stain other than any uniform colour of flame retardant
solution.
4. Recommended Treatment for Different
Situations
6. Tests Requirements
a) For interior use against fire Type 1 to 5 with
hazard, namely, interior lin- retention of fire 6.1 Moisture Content - Shall be between 5 and 15
ings, partitions andi fitments retardant percent.
of ship cabins, boiler 20 kglm3, Min
houses, kitchens, ceiling of 6.2 Flammabiliry - Time taken for second igni-
rail coaches, vehicle body tion, not less than 30 minutes.
interiors, exhibition stall,
etc.
6.3 Flame Penetration - Not less than 15 minutes
b) For interior or exterior use Type 6 to 9 with for every 6 mm thickness.
not subject to leaching by retention of fire
rain and water against fire retardant and pre-
hazard and high risk of servative 15 kg/m3, 6.4 Rate cf Burning - Time taken to lose weight
decay or insect attack; Min from 30 percent to 70 percent shall not be less than 20
namely wall and roof lin- minutes.
ings, external roofing, clad-
dings or ceilings of build- 6.5 Retention qf Preservatives - Net value shall
ings, vehicle bodies, etc. not be less than the values specified in 2.1 and 4.
Note l-Dimensions and tolerances of fire retardant plywood shall conform to IS : 303-1975 Specification for plywood for general
purposes (second revision).
Note 2-For test procedures for the tests specified, refer to IS : 1734(Part I)-1972 Method of test for plywood: Part I Determination
of density and moisture content (first revision); IS : 1734 (Part III)-1972 Method of test for plywood: Part III Determination of fire
resistance (first revision); and IS : 2753 (Part I)-1964 Methods of estimation of preservatives in treated timber and in treating
solution: Part I Determination of copper, arsenic, chromium, zinc, boron, creosote and fuel oil.
Note 3-Plywood when tested for glue shear strength in dry state, mycological test, water resistance test and for any other
mechanical property as agreed to shall meet requirements of BWR grade general purpose plywood conforming to IS : 303-1975
Specification for plywood for general purposes (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5509-1980 Specification for fire retardant plywood (first revision).
..
277
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5539-1969 PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWOOD

1. Scope -Treatment of plywood for protection ture content not exceeding 16 percent and shall have
against fungi, termites and other insects and marine been bonded with water resistant glue of BWR type.
borers and requirements of preservative treated
plywood. 4. Choice of Treatment - This is governed by the
timber species in the plywood, sapwood content and
2. Types of Preservatives use after treatment. Recommended practice on choice
of preservative and amount of absorption and service
a) Type 1 (Oil Type) - Coal tar creosote with or
conditions is given in Table 1.
without admixture with various grades of
petroleum and other oils having high boiling Note - For information regarding natural durability and de-
point. gree of treatability of different species of timbersee Appendix B of
the standard.
b) Type 2 (Organic Solvent Type) - Copper/
zinc naphthenate, pentachlorophenol, benzene 5. Modes of Treatment
hexachloride and DDT .
a) By pressure impregnation after manufacture.
cl Type .J (Water Soluble Non-jking Type) -
Zinc chloride, boric acid, borax, sodium b) By soaking or surface application after
fluoride and sodium pentachlorophenate. manufacture.
cl By treatment of dry or wet veneers before
4 Type 4 (Water Soluble ‘Fixed’ Type) - assembly.
Copper-chrome arsenic composition, acid-
,copper-chrome composition, chromated zinc 6. Conditioning - Plywood after treatment shall
chloride and copper chrome boric composi- be conditioned to a moisture content of not more than
tion. 14 percent for interior use and 18 percent for exterior
uses. If the plywood is to be painted subsequently,
3. Preparation of Plywood for Treatment - the moisture content shall be between 6 and
Plywood for preservative treatment shall have mois- 14 percent.
TABLE 1 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

OF PLYWOOD FOR VARIOUS SERVICE CONDITIONS
SL SERVICECONDITIONS FOR TIMBER USED IN PLYWOOD TYPE OF MODE OF MINIMUM

No. TREATED PLYWOOD ACCORDING TO THE PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT RETENTION
RELEVANT INDIAN STANDARD RECOMMENDED RECOM-
ON PLYWOOD REQUIRED TOBE MENDED
TREATED
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
kg/m3
i) Plywood in direct contact with All Type 4 (Copper-chrome- Pressure 12.0
water or ground and required arsenic composition or process
to be painted as for pontoons, acid-copper-chrome com- Veneer 12.0
boats. rafts, tugs, fence posts, position) treatment
box, columns, etc L,.
(IS : 710-1976*)
ii) Plywood in direct contact with All a) Type 4 (Copper-chrome- Pressure 12.0
water or ground and required arsenic composition or process
to be painted as for pontoons, acid-copper-chrome com-
boats, rafts, tugs, fence posts, position)
box, columns, etc (IS : 710- b) Type, 1 [Creosote or Pressure 100.0
1976’) but plywood not re- creosote fuel oil mixture process
quiring light painting or only (50 : SO)]
back coal tar base
(IS : 710-1976*)
iii) Marine structures exposed to All Type 1 [Creosote or creo- Pressure 200.0
marine borer danger sote fuel oil mixture process
(IS : 710-1976*) (50 : 5O)j
(Continued)
278
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

OF PLYWOOD FOR VARIOUS SERVICE CONDITIONS - Contd
SL SERVICECONDITIONS
FOR TIMBERUSEDIN PLYWOOD TYPEOF MODEOF MINIMUM
No. TREATEDPLYWOOD ACCORIXNG TOTHE PRESERVATIVE TREATMENTRETENTION
RELEVANTINDIANSTANDARD RECOMMENDED REcotvf-
ONPLYWOOD REQUIRED TOBE MENDED
TREATED
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
iv) Concrete shuttering plywood All Type 4 (Copper-chrome- Pressure 12.0

(IS : 4990-19697) arsenic composition or process
acid-copper-chrome com- Veneer 12.0
position) treatment
v) Plywood for outer cladding of All Type 4 (Copper-chrome- Veneer 12.0
houses, roofing, bunkers and arsenic composition or treatment
shelters, and in other condi- acid-copper-chrome com-
tions exposed to rain, sun and position)
outer weather but requiring
painting (IS : 303-1875$ BWR
Grade)
vi) Plywood f6r outer cladding of All Type 1 [Creosote or creo- Pressure 100.0
houses, roofing, bunkers and sote fuel oil mixture process
shelters, and in other condi- (50 : 5O)l
tions exposed to rain, sun and
outer weather but requiring
painting, but paint and colour
not important (IS : 303-1975$
BWR Grade)
vii) Plywood for bus fiooring or rail All Type 4 (Copper-chrome- Pressure 75.0
coach flooring (IS : 303-1975$ arsenic composition or process
BWR Grade) acid-copper-chrome com-
position) or Type 1
[Creosote or creosote fuel
oil mixture (50 : SO)] 75.0
viii) Plywood not in direct contact All timbers except when Type 4 (Copper-chrome- Pressure 5.5
with ground or water but ex- only heartwood of dura- arsenic composition or or soaking
posed and given paint or ble timber is used acid-copper-chrome com-
varnish regularly as in ply- position) or Type 2 4.5
wood for rail coach ceilings,
partitioning and other interior
use, bus interior, ammunition
boxes, exterior doors, etc
(IS : 303-1975$ BWR Grade)
ix) Decorative panelling on rail do Type 2 or Type 3 not colour Pressure 4.0
coaches and ship building imparting process
(IS : 303-l975$ BWR Grade) or soaking
x) Plywood for internal uses in dry do Type 2 or Type 3 or Type 4 Pressure 4.0
localities, such as inner parti- process
tions, panelling, wall board- or soaking I.
ing, ceiling and furniture
(IS : 303-1975$ and IS : 1328-
19705)
*Specification for marine plywood @st revision).

tSpecification for plywood for concrete shuttering work.
SSpecification for plywood for general purposes (second revision).
OSpecification for veneered decorative plywood Cfirst revision).
Note- For information regarding natural durability and degree of treatability of different species of timber see Appendix B of the
standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5539-1969 Specification for preservative treated plywood.
279
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7316-1974 DECORATIVE PLYWOOD USING PLURALITY

OF VENEERS FOR DECORATIVE FACES
1. scope- Covers decorative plywood with oma- 5. Tolerances

mental faces produced by use of plurality of veneers
meant for decorative use, such as interior panelling of Length up to 120 cm +3 mm
buildings, buses, ships, etc, and for decorative fumi- -0 mm
ture of all types. Length above 120 cm +6mm
-0mm
2. Material Width up to 90 cm +3mm
-0 mm
Width above 90 cm +6 mm
2.1 Timber - Class I, II or III specified in
-0mm
IS : 303 - 1975*. Non-durable timbers and sapwood of
all other timbers shall be given a preservative treat- Thickness +0.2 mm + 5 percent of nominal
thickness
ment .
-0.1 mm + 2.5 percent of nominal
2.2 Adhesive - Synthetic resin adhesive BWR or thickness
WWR. Rectangular panels shall have their diagonal
lengths not varying beyond 9 mm.
2.3 Plywood, when used, shall be BWR or WWR
synthetic resin bonded type.
6. Finish - Trimmed square and sanded to a
3. Permissible Defects - Open splits, checks or smooth finish.
open joints not more than 150 mm long and 0.5 mm
wide, provided the same are rectified with a matching
veneer insert bonded with BWR or WWR adhesive. 7. Tests
Decorative veneered surface shall be free from tom
grain, dote, worm hole, discolouration or other visual
defects. 7.1 Moisture Content - Not less than 5 percent and
not more than 15 percent when tested in accordance
4. Standard Dimensions with IS : 1734 (Part U-1972*.
Length 240, 210, 180, 150, 120, and
90 cm 7.2 Water Resistance Test - Shall not show de-
Width 120 and 90 cm lamination or blister formation.
Thickness 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 19 and 25 mm
*Methods of test for plywood : Part I Determination of density

*Specification for plywoodfor general purposes (secondrevision ). and moisture content (/h-s? revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 73161974 Specification for decorative plywood using plurality of
veneers for decorative faces.
280
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1658-1977 FIBRE HARDBOARDS

(Second Revision)
.
1. Scope - Requirements of fibre hardboards for ii) Standard
general purposes. This standard does not cover re- hardboard
quirements of insulation boards, wood particle boards iii) Tempered 3 4 5 6 9
(chip boards), and similar boards. hardboard
Tolerance (mm)+;.4 f0.4 +0.4 +0.5 +0.7
2. Types - Classified according to their method of
manufacture, density, mechanical and physical b) Width - 1.2 m; tolerance +‘3 mm
properties.
c) Length - 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.6, 4.8 and
a) Medium hardboard - Density between 5 5 m; tolerance +5 mm
0.35 g/cm3 and 0.8 g/cm3
d) Boards shall be rectangular and shall have
b) Standard hardboard - Density more than square edges. Difference between lengths of
0.80 g/cm3 two diagonals shall not exceed +-3 mm per
c) Tempered hardboard - Hardboard further metre length of diagonal.
treated during manufacture to modify their
properties. 4. Requirements :
Thickness Bending Strength (Modulus Water Absorption After

of Rupture Average) 24 h Immersion, Percent
mm MPa MaX
a) Medium hardboard all thicknesses 6 40
b) Standard hardboard 3
30 40‘
4
5
6I 30 30
9
c) Tempered hardboard all thicknesses 50 20
3, Dimensions and Tolerances 5. Workability and Finish

a) Hardboards shall not crack, split or chip when
a) Thickness (mm) drilled, sawed or nailed perpendicularly to the

surface.
i) Medium 6 8 10 12 b) Shah be free from warp.
hardboard Note - For test procedures for determinationof density, bend-
ing strength and water absorption see Appendices A, B and C of
Tolerance(mm)+O.S +0.7 +0.7 f0.9 he standard.
-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1658-1977 Specification for fibre hardboards (second revision)
281
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3087-1965 WOOD PARTICLE BOARDS (MEDIUM DENSITY)

FOR GENERAL PURPOSES
1. Scope - Material, methods of manufacture, c) Sizing material (introduced primarily to in-

grades, types, sizes, construction and finish of crease water resistance) - Paraffin wax.
medium-density wood particle boards for general
purposes. It does not cover high-density particle 4. Dime&ions and Tolerances
boards of specific gravity exceeding 0.9, veneered a) Length - 485 (480), 365 (360), 300, 270,
particle board and also specially treated boards like 240, 210, 180, 150, 120, 100 and 90 cm.
moulded particle boards, compregnated boards or
Tolerance +6 mm up to 150 cm and +9 mm
particle boards faced by impregnated paper surface. above 150cm. _
2. Types and Designation b) Width - 180, 150, 120, 100, 90, 60 and
Designation 45 cm.
Type
a) Flat pressed, single-layer board FPSI Tolerance + 6 mm up to 150 cm and f 9 mm
b) Flat pressed, three-layer board FPTH above 150 cm.
c) Extrusion pressed, solid board XPSO
d) Extrusion pressed, tubular core XPTU
cl Thickness - 6,9,12,16,19,20,22,22,25,
27, 30, 35, 40, 45 aIld 50 mm.
board
Tolerance f5 percent up to 25 mm and f2.5
3. Materials percent above 25 mm.
a) Wood particles shall be produced by cutting 4 Lengths of two diagonals of a wood particle
wood into shavings, flakes, splinters or slivers board, rectangular panel, shall not differ by
on a chipping machine. more than 2.5 mm.
b) Adhesive shall be BWR, WWR or unextended 4 Edges of the board shall be straight with a
CWR type. tolerance of 3 mm.
TABLE 1 STRENGTH AND OTHER CHARACTERISTICS OF VARIOUS

TYPES OF WOOD PARTICLE BOARDS
TYPE OF BULK VARIATION WATER ABSORPTION, SWELLINGPERCENT, SWELLING MINIMUM MINIMUM THERMAL
FMARD DENSITY DENSITY, MUX MUX DUE TO MODULUS TENSILE CONDUC-
PERCENT ,_A_. ._b-, SURFACE OF RUPTURE STRENGTH TIVITY
’ 2-h 24-h “Thick- Length Width ’ ABSORPTION ,_.-, PERPENDI- Max
Soaking Soaking ness IN THICKNESS Length- Width- CULARTO
MUX wise wise SURFACE
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (‘3) (9) (IO) (II) (12) (13)
kg/m3 Percent Percent Percent Percent kgf/cm* kgf/cm* kgf/cm* kcal cm/ ,_
m2 h”C
FPSI 500 f 10 30 70 12 0.5 0.5 9 90 90 8 0.12 ’
to
900
FPTH 500 + 10 40 80 12 5 5 9 110 110 3 0.12
to
900
XPSO 500 f 10 40 80 5 12 5 4 3 20 12 0.12
to
900
XPTU 500 *10 45 80 5 12 5 4 - 10 4 0.06
to
900
Note-The values for minimum modulus of rupture should be multiplied by 0.8, when the thickness of the board exceeds 20 mm.
282
SP : 21-1983
5. Physical Characteristics 5.6 Modrclus of Rupture (see Table 1)
5.1 Density - Shall be between 500 to 900 kg/m3. 5.7 Tensile Strength Perpendicular to Surface (see
Variation in density shall not exceed 10 percent. Table 1)
5.2 Moisture Content - Shall be between 7 and 16 5.8 Thermal Conductivity (see Table 1)
percent. Variation of individual from mean shall
5.9 Workability - Shall not crack or split when
not exceed f3 percent.
drilled, sawed and nailed perpendicular’to lbe surface.
5.3 Water Absorption (see Table 1)
6. Finish - Shall be of uniform thickness and
5.4 Swelling in Water (see Table 1)
density throughout thelength and width. These shall be
5.5 Swelling Due to Surface Absorption (see Table 1) flat and sanded to a smooth finish on both the -faces.
Note-For test procedures, see IS : 2380-1963 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic
materials and IS : 3129-1965 Specification for particle board for insulation purposes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3087-1965 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density)
for general purposes.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3097-1980 VENEERED PARTICLE BOARDS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements such as grades and types, b) Type 2 - Solid core, decorative (boards
material, manufacture, dimensions and tests for with solid core but faced with ornamental
veneered particle boards. veneers on one or both sides).
c) Type 3 - Tubular co=, general purpose

2. Grades and Types - Shall be of two grades, (boards with tubular core and faced with
namely, exterior (Grade I) or interior (Grade II). veneer of general purpose type).
2.1 Each gxade of veneered particle board shall be of d) Type 4 - Tubular core, decorative (boards
with tubular core faced with decorative
the following four types:
veneers on one or both sides).
a) Type 2 - Solid core, general purpose
(boards with faces of veneer of general 2.2 Designation - The grades and types shall be
purpose type). designated as follows:
Sl Grade Tvpe mignation

No.
1. Exterior (Grade I) Solid core, general purpose EX SO GP
2. Exterior (Grade I) Solid core, decorative EX SO D
3. Exterior (Grade I) Tubular core, general purpose EX TU GP
4. Exterior (Grade I) Tubular core, decorative EXTUD
5. Interior (Grade II) Solid core, general purpose IN SO GP
6. Interior (Grade II) Solid core, decorative IN SO D
7. Interior (Grade II) Tubular core, general purpose IN TU GP
8. Interior (Grade II) Tubular core, decorative INTUD
283
SP : 21-1983
3. Material 6. Tests
a) Particle boards shall be of medium density. 6.1 Density - Density of each specimen shall not
vary from mean density by mo= than f 10 percent.
b) Veneers for cross-band and faces shall be
either sawn or rotary cut or sliced and shall be 6.2 Moisture Content - Average value shall be
smooth. between 7 to 16 percent.
c) Adhesive used for bonding veneers shall be
BWP or BWR for exterior grade (Grade I) 6.3 Wafer Absorption - Value shall not exceed 25
percent for 2 h soaking and 50percent for 20 h soaking.
boards and WWR or CWR for interior grade
(Grade II) boards. 6.4 Water Resistance Test - Boards shall not show 1
signs of disintegration and/or shall not delaminate.
4. Finish - All boards shall be flat and squarely
cut. Both faces shall be sanded to a smooth even 6.5 Swelling in Water - Swelling in thickness in
surface. percentage of original thickness shall not be more than
7 percent due to general absorption and this shall be 5
5. Dimensions and Tderances percent in case of swelling due to surface absorption.
a>Length - 480, 365, 300, 270, 240, 210,
6.6 Adhesion of Plies - Adhesion of face veneers
180,150,120,100and90cm. Tolerance f 5 to the board core shall offer appreciable resistance and
mm up to 150 cm and + 10 mm above 150 the exposed surface of veneer shall show sizes of some
cm. adherent fibres distributed more or less uniformly.
b) Width - 180,150,120,100,90and45 cm.
6.7 Static Bending Strength (Maximum Transverse
Tolerance same as for length.
Strength or Modulus of Rupatre in Bending) -
kc)Thickness - 6, 10, 12,20,25,30,35,40, Average value of modulus of rupture shall not be less
45 and 50 mm. Tolerance + 1 mm. than 300 kg/cm*.
4 Length of two diagonals shall not differ by 6.8 DeJection Under Sustained Load (Long Time
more than 2.5 mm. Loading Test) - The deflection under load and re-
e) Edges shall be straight with a maximum sidual deflection after removal of load shall be as
deviation of 3 mm. agreed to mutually.
Note-For test procedures, refer to the standard and IS : 2380 Method of test for wood particle boards and boards from other
lignocellulosic materials:
IS : 2380 (Part I)-1977 Part I Preparation and conditioning of test specimens (first revision)
IS : 2380 (Part II)-1977 Part II Accuracy of dimensions of boards (first revision)
IS : 2380 (Part III)-1977 Part III Determination of moisture content and density Cfirst revision)
IS : 2380 (Part IV)-1977 Part IV Determination of static bending strength (modulus of ruputre and modulus of elasticity in
bending) (firsf revision)
IS : 2380 (Part XVI)-1977 Part XVI Determination of water absorption Cfirsf revision)
IS : 2380 (Part XVII)-1977 Part XVII Determination of swelling in water Cfirst revision)
IS : 2380 (Part XXI)-1977 Part XXI Planeness rest under uniform moisture content (first revSon)
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3057-1980 Specification for veneeredparticle boards (first revision).
284
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3129-1965 PARTICLE BOARD FOR INSULATION PURPOSES

1. Scope - Requirements of insulation type of par- b) Width - 180, 150, 120, 100, 90,60, 45 and
ticle boards. 30 cm.
c) Thickness - 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 27, 25, 22,
2. Materials 20, 16 and 12 mm.
a) Timber or other lignoceilulosic material like d) Tolerance

bagasse and solapith and jute sticks of density Length and width +9 mm up to 150 cm and
not exceeding 400 kgPm3. +15 mm above 150 cm.
Thickness +0.8 mm up to 25 mm and f 1 mm
b) Adhesive - BWR or WWR (unextended) above 25 mm.
type.
c) Following materials may be added to the 4. Physical Requirements
particle mix: 4.1 Density - Shall not exceed 400 kgim3. Varia-
1) A preservative such as sodium pen- tion shall not be more than f10 percent.
tachlorophenate or pentachlorophenol to 4.2 Moisture’Content -Shall not exceed 16 per-
the extent of 0.2 percent. cent.
2) Sizing material like paraffin wax emulsion 4.3 Thermal Conductivity - K value shall not ex-
(to increase water resistance), not exceed- ceed 7 kcal.cm/m2h”C thickness (or 0.81 mW/
ing 1.5 ‘percent. cm.“(Z).
3) Flame retardant chemical like ammonium
4.4 Transverse Strength - Modulus of rupture not
phosphate and borax.
less than 15 kgf/cm2.
4.5 Sound Absorption
3. Dimensions and Tolerances 125 250 500 1 000 2 000
Frequency, c/s
a) Length - 365,300,270,240,210,180,150, Absorption 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5
120, 100, 90, 60,45 and 30 cm. coefficient, Min
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 2380 (Parts I to XXI)-1977 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other
lignocellulosic materials Cfirst revision), IS : 3308-1969 Methods of wood wool building slabs and Appendix A of the standufd.
@or detailed information, refer to IS : 3129-1965 Specification for particle board for insulation purposes.
-
285
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3308-1981 WOOD WOOL BUILDING SLABS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, 4.1 Tolerances
*eight and strength for wood wool building slabs. f6 mm in length, *4 mm in width and f2 mm
in thickness.
2. Types Deviation from rectangular shape, not more than
5 mm.
a) Type l- Light weight slabs, intended for ,
non-load bearing partitions, ceilings, wall
linings, permanent shuttering and roof insula-
tion. 5. Requirements
b) Type 2 - Heavy duty slabs, intended for

load bearing situations and for use in roof 5.1 Dejection Under Test Load - Shall not exceed
construction. the following:
3. Form and Texture - Slabs shall be of uniform Type Size Thick- Test Test Dejection
thickness with rectangular parallel faces and shall have ness Load Span (Max)
clean reasonably square edges and shall be of uniform mmxmm mm kg cm
texture. 1 2 000x500 25 100 45 6
1 220x610 25 165 27.5 6
4. Dimensions, Weights and Tolerances
2 000x500 40 90 75 6
Length Width Type Thickness Weight of the 1 220x610 50 90 75 6
Slab, Max 75 120 75 5
mm mm mm kg 100 150 75 5
2 000 500 1 12 5 2 2 000x500 40 120 75 6

20 8 1 220x610 50 160 75 6
25 11 75 240 75 5
40 12.5
50 16
22 5.2 Thermal Conductivity - Shall not exceed
75
100 27.5 0.08 W/m.“C.
2000 500 2 40 25.0
50 30.0 5.3 Sound Absorption
75 40.0
Frequency Minimum Sound Absorption
1220 610 1 12 3.5 Hertz CoefSicient for 25 mm
20 6 Thickness with
25 8 Rigid Backing
40 9.5 k.
50 12 125 0.1
75 16 250 0.2
100 20 500 0.2
1000 0.3
1220 610 2 40 18.5
50 22 2 000 0.5
75 30 4 000 0.5
Note-For test procedures, refer to Appendix B of the Standard, IS : 3346-1966 Method for the determination of thermal
conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) and IS : 8225-1976 Method of measurement of
absorption coefficient in a reverberation test.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3308-1981 Specification for wood wool building slabs (first
revision).
286
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3348-1965 FIBRE INSULATION BOARDS

1. Scope - Requirements for insulating boards Type of Board Nominal Mean Water
made of wood or sugar cane fibre. It also covers the Thickness Absorption
following special types of fibre insulation boards: mm at 27+2”C,
a) Bitumen - bonded tibre insulating board, and Max
b) Flame - retardant treated fibre insulating Bitumen- bonded fibre 9 25
board. insulation board 12 25 1
18 20
2. Dimensions aud Tolerances: I 25 20
Type of Board Nominal Tolerance on Length Width

Thickness Thickness
mm
Fibre insulation *%5 365c,m300 18:?50
board, ordinary or 1; +-0.75 270, 240 120: 100
flame retardant type 18 * 1.00 210, 180 90, 60
c 25 k 1.25 150, 120 45 and
Bitumen-bonded 100, 90 30
fibre insulation 60, 45
board and 30
( 25
18
12
9 +
to.75
*
+.0.75
0.50I
Tolerance on length and width: *3 mm up to 120 cm and
+ 6 mm above 120 cm.
3. Requirements 3.4 Thermal Conductivity - Shall not exceed
3.1 Density - Shall not exceed O.4g/cm3. 5.6 kcal.cm/m2h”C.
3.2 Transverse Strength
Type of Board Thickness Mean Breaking Load Approximate Modulus of

mm Min, kg Rupture for Nominal
Thickness, kg/cm2
Fibre insulating board ordinary
or flame retardant type
( 25
18
12
9 :12.8
7.2 ;:16
Bitumen bonded fibre insulating
board
c 25
18
12
9 E
1: 32
:x
-- L..
3.3 Water A bsorption 3.5 Sound Absorption
Type of Board Nominal Mean Water Frequency, c/s 125 250 500 1 000 2 000
Thickness Absorption Absorption
mm at 27&2”C, coefficient, Min 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 :
MaX
Fibre insulation board, 9 30 4.. Special Requirement for Flame-Retardant
ordinary or flame 12 30 Boards - Average maximum area of char, when
retardant type 18 25 tested for surface spread of flame, shall not exceed
I 25 25 75 cm2.
Nate-For test procedures, refer to IS : 3308-1969 Specification for wood wool building slabs and Appendices A to E of the
standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3348-1965 Specification for fibre insulation boards.
287
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3478-1966 HIGH DENSITY WOOD PARTICLE BOARDS
1. Scope - Requirements of high density wood 3.3 Sizing - Paraffin wax up to 1 percent, Max.
particle boards in flat sheet or moulded forms.
4. Dimensions and Tolerances far Flat Sheets

2. Types (Depending on Synthetic Resin Used)
and .Grades (depending on extent of resin content) a) Length - 180, 150, 120, 100, 90, 60 and
45 cm.
Type 1- BWR typeof resin - Grades A and B . b) Width - 150, 120, 100, 90 and 45 cm. 8
Type 2 - WWR or CWR type of resin - Grades
c) Thickness - 50,45,40, 35, 30, 25, 22, 20,
A and B.
16, 12, 9,6 and 4 mm.
Each type and grade may be in flat sheet form or
d) Tolerance
moulded form.
Length and width, + 6 mm.
Thickness +-5 percent up to 25 mm, +2.5
3. Materials percent above 25 mm.
Length of diagonals of a board shall not differ
3.1 Timber - Any suitable species. by more than 2.5 mm/m length of diagonal.
Edges shall be straight with tolerance of 3 mm.
3.2 Adhesive - As in 2. In grade A resin content is 5. Physical Requirements - Shall be as specified

20 to 50 percent and in grade B, 8 to 12 percent. in table given below:
Type Grade Density Moisture Minimum Minimum Water Resistance

Content Modulus Tensile Absorption to Boiling
of Strength Ajter 24 h Water After
Rupture Immersion 3 h Immersion
g/cm* Percent kg/cm* kg/cm2 Percent, Max
Grade A 1.2 3 to 7 450 350 10 Shall not show

Type 1 any sign of
Grade B 0.9 Min 5to 16 400 300 25 delamination
0.9
1.2 Min 55to
to 10
16 250
300 200
225 25
15
Type 2 Not specified
Maximum Permissible Max+ 10 Max+2 - - - -

Variation in Individual percent percent
Specimen from the Mean
. Note-For test procedures, refer to 1s : 2380 (Parts 1 to XXI)-1977 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other
lignocellulosic materials (first revision) and 9.3 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3478-1966 Specification for high density wood particle boards.
288
SECTlON 14
DOORS AND WINDOWS

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
WOODEN DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME AND SHUTTERS
IS : 1003 Timber panelled and glaied shutters:

IS : 1003 (Part I)-1977 Part I Door shutters (second revision) 291
IS : 1003 (Part II)-1966 Part II Window and ventilator shutters (first revision) 292
IS : 1826-l%l Venetian blinds for windows 293
IS : 2191 Wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type):
IS : 2191 (Part I)-1980 Part I Plywood face panels (third revision) 294
IS : 2191 (Part II)-1980 Part II Particle board face panels and hardboard face panels 295
(second revision)
IS : 2202 Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type):
IS : 2202 (Part I)- 1980 Part I Plywood face panels (third revision) 2%
IS : 2202 (Part II)-1980 Part II Particle board and hardboard face panels (second 297
revision)
IS : 4021-1976 Timber door, window and ventilator frames (first revision) 298
IS : 4962-1968 Wooden side sliding doors 300
IS : 6198-1971 Ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters 301
METAL DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND SHUTTERS
IS: 1038-1975 Steel doors, windows and ventilators (second revision) 302
IS : 1361-1978 Steel windows for industrial buildings (first revision) 303
IS : 1948-1961 Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators 304
IS : 1949-1961 Aluminium windows for industrial buildings 306
IS : 4351-1976 Steel door frames (first revision) 307
IS : 6248-1979 Metal rolling shutters and rolling grills (first revision) 308
IS : 7452-1982 Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators first 309
revision)
290
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1003 (PART I)-1977 TIMBER PANELLED AND GLAZED SHUTTERS

PART; I DOOR SHUTTERS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, We Width Height

sizes, construction, workmanship, finish, inspection 9 DS 20 800 1 905(1 945)
and testing of timber door shutters with timber, 9 DS 21 800 2 005(2 045)
plywood, blockboard, veneered particle board, 10 DS 20 900 1 905(1 945)
hardboard and asbestos cement board panels used in 10 DS 21 900 2 005(2 045)
domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. 12 DT 20 1 100* 1 905(1 945)
This standard does not cover timber door shutters for 12 DT 21 1 100* 2 005(2 045)
industrial and other special buildings, such as work-
shops and garages. Note 1 - In arriving at the standard widths and heights for
panel doors, and allowance of 6 cm has been made for door
2. Timber - Moisture content 10 to 16 percent for frames, 4 cm for floor finish and 0.5 cm for clearance all round
thickness 50 mm and above and 8 to 14 percent for between door opening and door frames and 1.5 cm for rebate all
round for the shutter into the frame. In case the modular height is
thickness below 50 mm. All timbers shall be kiln-
taken from the finished floor level, the height shall be as given in
seasoned. Sapwood of durable species and heartwood bracket.
and sapwood of non-durable species shall be treated Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols denoting,
with suitable non-leachable type preservative. in sequence, width (number of modules in width of door opening);
Note - For suitable species of timber see Table 1 of the type (D=door, W=window, S=single shutter,T=double shutter)
standard.
and height (number of modules in height of door opening).
3. Requirements 4.2 Tolerance - Shall be +3 mm on size of door.

3.1 Timber Panelling - No single panel shall ex- 4.3 Dimensions of Components (Finished Dimen-
ceed 0.5 m* in area. sions in mm)
3.2 Plywood Panelling - Shall be of BWP grade Width Thickness
minimum thickness 12 mm for single panel construc- Vertical stile, 100 + 3 40 f 1
tion and 9 mm for 2 or more panel construction. top and freeze rail
3.3 Blockboard Panelling - Thickness not more Lock rail 160+ 3 40 III 1
than 10 mm. Bottom rail 250 f 3 4Orf: 1
Mounting 100 + 3 40 + 1
3.4 Particle Board Panelling - Shall be made of Glazing bar 40 f 1 40 + 1
one piece of veneered particle board. Thickness shall
be 12 mm, Min. 5. Glazing - Glass used for panels shall weigh not
less than 7.5 kg/m*.
3.5 Hardboard Panelling - Tempered quality.
Thickness 12 mm, Min. 6. Finish
3.6 Asbestos Cement Panelling - Minimum thick- 6.1 Defective knots, when permitted on surfaces
ness 12mm incaseof singlepanel shutters and IOmm exposed to view shall be completely bored or cut out
in case of 2 or mere panel construction. and tightly plugged with the same timber species and
properly glued in. Grains of plug shall run in direction
3.7 Lockrail Centre Line - 80 cm from bottom of
of the grains of the piece.
shutter.
6.2 Surfaces of door shutters which are required to be
4. Dimensions, Sizes and Tolerances
painted ultimately shall be covered by brush painting
4.1 Dimensions of Door Shutters (in mm) with a priming coat. Doors to be polished or varnished
Width Height shall be given a priming coat of polish or varnish.
Type
8 DS 20 700 1 905(1 945)
8 DS 21 700 2 005(2 045) *Combinedwidth of two shutters in closed position.
-
For detailed information, refer td IS : 1003 (Part I)-1977 Specification for timber panelled and glazed
shutters: Part I Door shutters (second revision).
291
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1003 (PART II)-1966 TIMBER PANELLED

AND GLAZED SHUTTERS
PART II WINDOW AND VENTILATOR SHUTTERS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, con- c) Components

struction, sizes, workmanship, finish, inspection and
Vertical stiles, : Width 80 mm
testing of timber window and ventilator shutter with
top and freeze rails
timber plywood, particle board, hardboard and asbes-
Bottom rail : Width 80 mm
tos cement panels used in domestic buildings, offices,
Glazing bars : Width 40 mm
schools, hospitals, etc. It does not cover timber
Mounting width : 60 mm
window and ventilator shuttersfor industrial buildings,
for window shutter
workshops and garages.
d) Thickness of shutter:20.25 or 30mm depend-
2. Dimensions ing on size.
Tolerance: + 1 mm.
a) Window Shutters
e) Tolerunces : f 1 mm on dimensions up to
Type width (mm) Height (mm) 40 mm.
6WS 12 500 1 100 f3 mm on dimensions over
10 WT 12 460 1 100 40 mm.
12 WT 12 560 1100 Note 1 - Sizes are derived after allowing for thickness of
6WS 13 500 1 200 frame and a margin of 5 mm all round for fitting into a modular
10 WT 13 460 1 200 opening based on 10 cm module.
12 WT 13 560 1 200
Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols, denoting
b) Ventilator Shutters width (number of modules in width of opening); type W-=win-
dow; V= ventilator; S=single shutter; T=double shutter, and
T-e 6V6 lOV6 12V6 height (number of modules in height of opening).
Width (mm) 500 900 1 100
Height (mm) 500 500 500 f) Tolerances on overall dimensions: f3 mm.
Note-For details regarding materials, finish and glazing refer to IS : 1003 (Part I)-1977 Specification for timber panelled and glazed
shutters: Part I Door shutters (second revisionh
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1003 (Part II)-1966 Specification for timber panelled and glazed
shutters: Part II Window and ventilator shutters (first revision).
..
292
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1826-1961 VENETIAN BLINDS FOR WINDOWS

1. Scope - Covers material, constructional details, 4.6 Cord - Made of cotton yarn, nylon yarn or a
sizes, and requirements of open head custom made combination of cotton and rayon.
Venetian blinds made of either wood or metal slats.
5. Finish
2. Grades
5.1 Aluminium slats shall be given a pretreatment
a) Grade 1
and then suitable coats of primer and upper coats of
i) Shall have aluminium slats,
paint which shall be of high gloss and of a baked
ii) Shall have provision for locking slats or
have dual ladder for each slat (so that slats enamel type.
may not fluttor), and 5.2 Wooden Slats and Rails -For finishing one
iii) Shall be capable of being removed ins- coat of sealer, one coat of primer-surfacer, putty and
taneously . two coats of paint shall be applied. Paint used shall be
b) Grade 2 - Shall have wooden slats. of semi-gloss good quality enamel or cellulose paint.
3. Material 6. Testing
3.1 Timber - Wooden slats and rails shall be made 6.1 Alumini,um Slats
from timbers having durability of class I and II timbers
6.1.1 Physical tests
as given in IS : 399-1963*.
a) Tensile strength, Min: 3 375 kgf/cm2
3.2 Metal - Aluminium alloy used for rolling of b) Yield stress, Mitt: 3 100 kgf/cm*
slats shall conform to NS 4 of IS : 737-1974t. c) Elongation, MUX: 2.5 percent
4. Requirements 6.1.2 Salt water test - Shall not show blistering,

corrosion, chalking, change of colour and loss of gloss
4.1 Grade I - Shall notexceed 500cm inwidth and and adhesion.
10 m* in area.
Grade 2 - Shall not exceed 275 cm in width and 6.1.3 Cold and hot water test for enamel -
7.5 m* in area. Backed enamel finish shall resist soaking in cold water
for 48 hours and for 30 minutes in boiling water. The
4.2 Slat Size enamel shall not blister and shall recover same hard-
Wooden - 48 + 0.5 mm wide and 2.5 f 0.3
ness after being out of water for 2 hours.
mm thick.
&minillm -48 & 0.5mmwidewhenforn~d. 6.1.4 Light test - Shall withstand theprescribed
Thickness of coated aluminium test.
slats shall be 0.254 to 0.375 mm 6.1.5 Rigidity test - Slats shall have sufficient
with tolerance of -+ 0.004 mm. flexibility so as to permit a 180” bend around a 7.5 cm
Note - For number of slats per blind of different heights dia cylinder without harm or permanent deformation or
(drops), see Table 1 of the standard.
injury to finish when released to their original shape.
4.3 Tilt Rail - 50 + lmm wide and 20 k 1 mm
6.2 Ladder Web
thick. 6.2.1 Colour fastness and shrinkage - Face . ..
4.4 Tilting Device - Synchronised worm and gear and cross tapes shall have good colour fastness to light
design. and water, and shall not shrink more than 7 percent.
4.5 Cord Lock -Automatic; shall be so designed 6.2.2 Breaking strength - Face tapes shall have
that the blind can be held at any desired height. breaking strength of 100 kgf, minimum and cross
tapes, a minimum strength of 7 kgf without breaking or
*Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution tearing away from the face tapes.
(revised).
tspecitication for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, 6.3 Breaking Strength of Cords - At least
sheet and strip (for generalengineering pmposes) (second
revision). 80 kgf.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1969-1968 Specification for breaking load and elongation at break of woven textile fabrics
(first revision) and 9 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1826-1961 Specification for Venetian blinds for windows.
293
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2191 (PART I)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS

(CELLULAR AND HOLLOW CORE TYPE)
PART I PLYWOOD FACE PANELS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding types, sizes, 4. Materials
material, construction, workmanship and finish, and
tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door 4.1 Timber - MoisNre content shall not exceed 12
shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and percent.
face veneers.
Note - For species of timbersee Appendix A ofthe standard.
2. Types
411.1 Timber shall be free from decay and insect
a) Cellular decorative type (CD) attack. Knots and knot holes less than half the width .of
b) Cellular non-decorative type (CN) cross section may be permitted. Pitch pockets, pitch
c) Hollow decorative type (HD) streaks and harmless pin-holes shall be permissible
d) Hollow non-decorative type (HN) except in the exposed edgesofthecoremembers where
they shall be cut .out and filled in with carefully fitted
3. Sizes glued pieces of wood of similar species and character
with their grains running in the same direction.
a) Width und height
,Designation Width Height 4.2 Plywood - Commercial plywood shall be of
(mm) (mm) BWP grade, at least type BC. Decorative plywood
shall be of Grade I.
8 DS 20 700 1 905
8 DS 21 700 2 005
4.3 Cross-bands - BWP grade.
9 DS 20 800 1 905
9DS21 800 2 005
4.4 Adhesives - Phenol formaldehyde synthetic
10 DS 20 900 1 905
10 DS 21 900 2 005 resin, BWP type.
12 DT 20 1 100* 1 905
4.5 Particle Board -Flat-platen pressed or extru-
12 DT 21 1 100* 2 005
sion pressed type. Swelling of particle board in thick-
ness and length shall not exceed 5 percent.
Note - If modular height is taken from the finished floor
level, the height of door shall be 40 mm more.
5. Requirements
b) Thickness - 25, 30 or 35 mm, nominal.
5.1 Plywood for Face Panels
cl Tolerances - On nominal width and height
shall be +3 mm; tolerance on nominal Minimum thickness for cellular core shutters-
-0 3 mm, ..,.
thickness shall be + 1.2 mm. Thickness of door
shutter shall be uniform throughout with a Minimum thickness for hollow core shutters for
permissible variation of 0.8 mm maximum. 25 mm thickness - 4 mm,
Minimum thickness for hollow core shutter over

Note 1 - In arriving at standard widths and heights, an allo- 25 mm thickness - 6 mm.
wance of 6 cm has been made for door frames, 4 cm for floor finish
and 0.5 cm for clearance all round and 1.5 cm for rebate all round 5.2 Rebating - One third thickness for double
for the shutter into the frame. leaved shutters.
Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols denoting
5.3 Shutters shall be shop-prepared for taking mor-
width (number of modules in width of door opening); type
(D=door; S=single shutter; T=double shutter) and height tice locks or latches.
(number of modules in height of door opening).
6. Workmanship and Finish - All the four edges
- - shall be square. Shutter shall be free from twist or
*Combined width of two shutters in closed position. warp.
294
SP : 21-1983
7. Tests 7.2 Knife Test
7.1 End Immersion Test - There shall be no

7.3 Adhesion Test
delamination. 7.4 Type Tests
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1659-1979 Specification for blockboards (secondrevision),IS : 4020-1967Methods of tests
for wooden flush doors: Type tests and 9 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2Z91 (Part I)-1980 Specification for wooden frush door shutters
(cellular and hollow core type): Part Z Plywood face panels (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
1s : 2191 (PART II)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS

(CELLULAR AND HOLLOW CORE TYPE)
f’ART11 PARTICLE BOARD FACE PANELS AND HARDBDARD FACE PANELS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, grade, 4. Material
types, sizes, construction, finish and tests of cellular 4.1 Timber - Same as in IS : 2191 (Part I)-1980*.
and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with parti-
cle board face panels of veneered and unveneered types 4.2 Particle Board - Shall be made with phenol-
of practicle board and hardboard face panels. formaldehyde adhesive. Swelling in thickness and
length shall not exceed 5 percent.
2. Types and Designation 4.3 Fibre Hardboard - Tempered.
Core Type Designation 4.4 Adhesive - Phenol formaldehyde synthetic
Cellular Decorative with skins CDPV resin, BWP type.
of decorative veneered
particle boards 5. Requirements
Non-decorative with CNP 5.1 Face Panel - Particle board thickness not less
skins of particle than 6 mm for cellular core and 9 mm for hollow core
boards unveneered shutters. Hardboard thickness.not less than 4 mm for
Non-decorative with CNPV cellular core and 6 mm for hollow core flush doors.
skins of particle
boards veneered with 5.2 Shutters shall be shop prepared for taking mor-
commercial veneers tice locks or latches.
Hollow Decorative with H D PV
skins of decorative 6. Workmanship and Finish -All four edges shall
veneered particle boards be square. Shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its
plane.
Non-decorative with HNP
skins of particle 7. Tests - Requirements laid down in 9 of
boards unveneered IS : 2191 (Part I)-1980* shall be complied with.
Non-decorative with HNPV
skins of particle
boards veneered
with commercial veneers
3. Sizes and Tolerances - Shall be same as given *Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and
in IS : 2191 (Part I)-1980*. hollow) core type: Part I Plywood face panels (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2191 (Part II)-1980 Specification for wooden flush door shutters
(cellular and hollow core type): Part 11 Particle board face panels and hardboard face panels (second
revision).
295
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2202 (PART I)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS

(SOLID CORE TYPE)
PART I PLYWOOD FACE PANELS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding types, sixes, Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols denoting
material, construction, workmanship and finish , and width (number of modules in width of door opening), type
(D=door, S=single shutter, T= double shutter) and height
tests of solid core wooden flush door shutters with face
(number of modules in height of door opening).
panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers.
4. Materials
4.1 Timber - Moisture content shall not exceed 12

4 Blockboard, decorative, BD percent.
b) Blockboard, non-decorative, BN Note - For speciesoftimbersee Appendix A ofthesm&rd.
cl Particle board with or without blockboard, 4.1.1 Knots and knot holes less than half the width
decorative, PD. of cross section of members in which they occur may
be permitted. Pitch pockets, pitch streaks and harmless
4 Particle board with or without blockboard, pin holes shall be permissible except in the exposed
non-decorative, PN,
edges of the core members where they shall be cut
out and filled in with carefully fitted glued pieces of
3. Sizes
wood of similar species and character with their grain
a) Dimensions running in the same direction.
Designation Width Height 4.2 Plywood

(mm) (mm) Commercial; BWP grade, at least type BC
8 DS 20 700 1 905 Decorative; Grade 1.
8 DS 21 700 2 005
9DS20 800 1 905 4.3 Cross Bands - BWP grade.
9DS21 800 2 005
10 DS 20 900 1 905 4.4 Adhesive - Phenol formaldehyde synthetic re-
10 DS 21 900 2 005 sin, BWP type.
12 DT 20 1 100* 1 905
12 DT 21 1 100* 2 005 4.5 Particle Board - Flat platen pressed or extrusion
pressed type. Swelling of particle board in thickness
Note - If Modular height is taken from finished floor level, and length shall not exceed 5 percent.
height of flush door shall be 40 mm more.
5. Requirements
b) Thickness - 25, 30 or 35 mm, nominal.
L..
c) Tolerances - Width and height, f3 mm 5.1 Face Panel - Thickness of cross-band as such
Thickness, + 1.2 mm. or in plywood shah be 1 to 3 mm. Face veneer 0.5 to
Thickness of door shutter shall be uniform through- 1.5 mm thick for commercial and 0.5 to 1 mm for
out with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8 decorative.
mm.
5.2 Rebating - One-third thickness in double
leaved shutters.
Note 1 - In arriving at the standard widths and heights for
flush doors, an allowance of 6 cm has been made for door frames 4
5.3 Locks - Shutters shall be shop-prepared for
cm for floor finish and 0.5 cm for clearance all round between the
door opening and door frame and 1.5 cm for rebate all round for taking mortice locks or latches as may be ordered.
the shutter into the frame.
6. Workmanship and Finish - All four edges of
the door shutter shall be square. Shutter shall be free
*Combined width of two shutters in closed position. from twist or warp in its plane.
296
SP : 21-1983
7. Tests 7.2 Knife Test

7.3 Glue Adhesion Test
7.1 End lrnrnersion Test - There shall be no
delamination. 7.4 Type Tests
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1659-1979 Specification for blockboards (second revision), IS : 4020-1967 Methods of tests
for wooden flush doors: Type test and 9 of the standard.
Fordetailed information, refer to IS : 2202 (Part I..-1980 Specification for wooden flush door shutters
(solid core type): Part I Plywood face panels (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2202 (PART II)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS

(SOLID CORE TYPE)
PART II PARTICLE BOARD AND HARDBOARD FACE PANELS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, 3. Sizes and Tolerances - Same as in IS : 2202
grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and test of (Part 1>1980*.
wooden flush door shutters of solid core type with
particle board face panels of both veneered particle
board and unveneered particle.boards. 4. Material
4.1 Species of timber, moisture content and permis-
2. Types and Designation
sible defects therein and preservative treatment
required for use in core and lipping shall conform to
Core Type Designation
relevant requirements laid down in IS : 2202) Part I) -
Blockboard Decorative with skins of B D PV 1980*.
decorative veneered parti-
cle boards 4.2 Particle Boards - Made with phenol formal-
dehyde adhesive. Swelling in thickness and length not
Non-decorative (paintable) BNP to exceed 5 percent.
with skins of particle
boards unveneered 4.3 Hard Boards - Tempered.
Non-decorative (paintable) B N PV
with skins of particle 4.4 Adhesive - For bonding particle board or hard
boards veneered with board face panels to the core shall be phenol formal-
commercial veneers dehyde synthetic resin (BWP type).
Particle board Decorative with skins of P D PV*
with or without decorative veneered parti-
block board cle boards 5. Requirements
Non-decorative with skins P N P*
of particle boards unve-
5.1 Face Panel - Thickness of each face panel of
neered particle board shall be at least 4 mm and of hardboard
at least 3 mm.
Non-decorative with skins P N PV*
of particle boards veneered 5.2 Shutters shall be shop-prepared for taking
with commercial veneers mortice locks or latches.
*Where particle board headed care is used, the designations *Specification for wooden Aush door shutters (solid core type):
will be PED, PV, PE, NP and PE N PV respectively. Part I Plywood face panels (third rwision).
291
SP : 21-1983
6. Workmanship and Finish - All the four edges 7. Tests - Same as given in IS : 2202 (Part I) -
of door shall be square. Shutter shall be free from twist 1980*.
or warp in its plane.
*Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type):
Part 1 Plywood face panels (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2202 (Part II)-1980 Specification for wooden flush door shutters
(solid core type): Part II Particle board and hardboard face panels (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4021-1976TIMBER DOOR, WINDOW AND VENTILATOR FRAMES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, con- c) Class C - Non-coniferous timbers other than
struction, workmanship, and sizes of timber door, teak (first and second grades)
window and ventilator frames generally used in resi- d) Class D - Coniferous timbers other than
dential buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. This deodar (first and second grades)
standard does not cover timber door, window and suitable for temporary structures
ventilator frames for industrial and other special build- only.
ings, such as workshops and garages.
2.2 Moisture tintent - 10 to 16 percent for 50 mm
and above in thickness and 8 to 14 percent for less than
2. Timber
50 mm thickness. _
2.1 Classijication 2.3 Seasoning and Treatment - All timber shall be

seasoned. Sapwood of durable species and sapwood
a) Class A - Teakwood (superior, first and
and heartwood of non-durable species shall be treated ..
second grades)
with preservative.
b) Class B - Deodar wood (first and second
grades) ’ 2.4 Pemtissible Defects
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR VARIOUS CLASSES OF TIMBER FOR DOOR FRAMES
SL DEFECT SUPERIOR GRADE TEAK FIRST GRADE SECOND GRADE

No.
i) Cross-grain Not steeper than 1 in 20 Not steeper than 1 in 15 Notsteeper than 1 in 12
ii) Sound knots and live Not more than 0.5 per- Not more than 1 per- Not more than 1.5 percent of the
knots cent of the area of cent of the area of piece; 40 mm, Max
the piece; 10 mm, the piece; 25 mm,
Max Max (Continued)
298
SP : 21-1983
.
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR VARIOUS CLASSES OF TIMBER FOR DOOR FRAMES-Confd
SL DEFECT SUPERIOR
GRADETEAK FIRSTGRADE SECONDGRADE
No.
iii) Pitch pockets or streaks None Permissible except on exposed edges,

provided that they are clean and
filled up with suitable putty or
filler. Where pitch pockets or
streaks are located on the exposed
edges of the core, they shall be
cut out and ftied with pieces of wood
of similar species with grain running
in the same direction. The piece
shall be well glued
iv) Sapwood None None Generally free from sapwood, but
traces of sapwood properly treated
with preservative shall be allowed
v) Pin holes None None Permitted provided they are filled
vi) Worm holes None None Permitted provided they are not more
than 10 mm in diameter and not
more than one per member and
provided such worm holes are plug-
ged with similar timber in such a
manner that the plugging merges
with the surrounding area both as
to colour and grain
2.5 Defects Prohibited - Decay, fungal growth, Designation Overall Overall

boxed heart, pitch pocket or streaks on the exposed Height Width
edges, borer holes, splits and cracks. 6WS 13 129 59
10 WT 13 129 99
3. Dimensions, Sizes and Tolerances 12 WT 13 129 119
3.1 Finished Dbnensions fir Frames 3.4 Ventilator Sizes (in rwn)
a) Width for frames carrying 100 mm Designation Overall Overall
one set of shutters Height Width
b) Width for frames carrying 120 or ‘140 mm 6V6 5? 59
two sets of shutters 10 V 6 59 99
c) Thickness 60 mm 12V 6 59 119
3.5 Tolerance - +3 mm.
3.2 Door Sizes (in mm)
-0
Designation Overall Overall Note 1 - External sixes of assembled frames are derived after
allowing a margin of 5 mm all round for fitting into a module
Height Widrh opening based on 10 cm module.
8 DS 20 199 79
9 DS 20 199 89 Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols, denoting
10 DS 20 199 99 width (number of modules in width of opening); type (TIcdoor,
12 DT 20 199 119 W=window, V=ventilator, S=single shutter, T=double shutter)
8 DS 21 209 79 and height (number of modules in height of opening).
9DS21 209 89
10 DS 21 209 99 4. Requirements
12 DT 21 209 119
_
4.1 Holdfasts - 3 on each side for doors and win-
3.3 Window Sizes (in mm)
dows 2 on each side for ventilators and windows less
Designation Overall Overall than 1 m height.
Height Width
6WS 12 119 59 4.2 Joints - Framer shall have dovetail joints.
1oWT 12 119 99 Jamb post shall be through-tenoned into mortises of
12 WT 12 119 119 transom to full width.
299
SP : 21-1983
5. Finish wall and lintel shall be given a coating of coal tar.
5.1 Defective knots, when permitted on surfaces ex- 5.2 All surfaces which are required to be painted
posed to view, shall be completely bored or cut out and ultimately shall be given a priming coat of a white
tightly plugged with same timber species and properly lead-based primer. In case of frames to be polished or
glued in. Grain of the plug shall run in the direction of varnished, a priming coat of polish or varnish shall be
the grain of the piece. Face of the frame abutting the given before delivery.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4021-1976 Specification for timber door, window and ventilator
frames (first revision).
,
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4962-1968 WOODEN SIDE SLIDING DOORS
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, type, 3.4 Guides - Gun metal.

shape, fabrication, assembly and finish of wooden side
3.5 Brackets - Cast iron.
sliding doors (of the straight sliding type), its gear
components and fittings. 3.6 Shutter - Made of wood in accordance with
IS: 1003 (Part 1>1977*, IS: 2191 (Part 1>1973t,
2. Type and Size - Classified in accordance with IS : 2191 (Part 11>1%6$, IS : 2202 (Part I>19739
mode of sliding of panels into the frame unit. Types 1 and IS : 2202 (Part 11>1%6//.
to 5 give clear opening, while Types 6 and 7 need no
space at the sides. Overall size of dear shall be such as 4. Operation - Shall be capable of being operated
to cover modular opening completely. in either direction with force not exceeding 3kg/m of
Note - For typical arrangement of panels of side sliding door
panel width, when panel is in motion.
see Fig. 2 of the standard.
5. Finish - AI1 components machined and finished
3. Materials smooth. Roller guides, fittings for locking arrange-
ment, brackets, etc, may be hot-dip galvanized.
3.1 Rolled steel sections shall be of weldablequality
conforming to IS : 2062- 1969*.
*Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutters: Part I
3.2 Trucks - Made of 2 mm thick structural steel Door shutters (third revision).
sheet, galvanized. t Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellularand hollow
core type): Part I Plywood facepanels (second revisim).
3.3 Roller - Grade 15 of IS : 210-1970t. Prelubri- #‘Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow
cated or self-lubricating type. core type): Part II Particle board face panels and hardboard face
panels (first revision).
9Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core typ):
*Specification for structural steel (fusion welding quality) firsf Part I Plywood face panels (second revision).
revision). //Specificationfor wooden flush door shutters (solid core type):
tSpecification for grey iron castings (second revision). Part II Particle board and hardboard face panels (first revision).
For detailed information, rejer to IS : 4962-1968 Specification for wooden side sliding doors.
300
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6198-1971 LEDGED, BRACED AND BATTENED

TIMBER DOOR SHUTTERS
1. Scope.- Requirements regarding material, Designation Width Height
sizes, construction, workmanship and finishofledged, 9DS 20 800 1 905
braced and battened timber door shutters. 9DS 21 800 2 005
Note- Thisis a simple form of door, and is frequently used 10 DS 20 900 1 905
fortemporarysheds, warehouses, stores, etc, where appearance is 10 DS 21 900 2 005
not the main criterion. It is reIativeIy cheap, but has a tendency to 1 905
12 DT 20 560
twist if timber is not of goodquality, and if thinner ledges are used.
12 DT 21 560 2 005
2. Materials Note 1 - For two shutter doors, only size of one shutter has
been given.
2.1 Timber shall be of four classes, namely,
(a) teakwood, (b) deodarwood, (c) hardwoods other Note 2 - In arriving at standard widths and heights, an allo-
than teak, (d) softwoods other than deodar. wance of 6 cm has been made for timber door frames, 4 cm for
floor finish, 0.5 cm for clearance all round between door opening
Note- For classification of species of timber see Appendix A and door frame and 1.5 cm for rebate all round for the shutter into
of the standard.
the frame.
2.2 Moisture Content, Max - 10 to 16 percent for
timber of 50 mm and above, and 8 to 14 percent for Tolerance on size of door shutter: f3 mm.
timber thinner than 50 mm.
2.3 Defects Prohibited F Shall be free from decay, 5. Dimensions of Components - Finished dimen-
fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or streaks on sions shall be as follows:
the exposed edges, borer holes, slits and cracks. Top and bottom ledges 150x30 mm;
2.4 Grades of Timber and Permissible Defects - Middle ledge 2 200X30 mm:
Shall be graded as Superior Grade, First Grade and Braces 110 to 125x30 mm. 1
Second Grade on the basis of permissible defects in Battens 140 to 160x25 mm.
timber. All battens in a shutter shall be of uniform width.
Note - For permissible defects for various classes of timber 6. Rebating -In case of double leaved shutters,
see Table 1 of the standard.
meeting of the stiles shall be rebated 20 mm (splayed or
3. Designation - By symbols denoting width, square type).
type and height of door in succession. Width --Indi-
cated by the number of modules of 10 cm in the width 7. Fittings - Three tee hinges for each shutter (one
of door opening. Type D= Door; S= Single shutter; at centre and others 20 cm from top and bottom). Each
T= Double shutter. Height - Indicated by the shutter shall also have 2 barrel bolts and one sliding
number of modules of 10 cm in the height of door bolt for locking.
opening.
Ewnple - 8 DS 2 1 would mean a shutter suita- 8. Finish - Well-planed and finished smooth. Sur-
ble for a single shutter door of 8 module width and 21 faces to be painted, polished or varnished shall be
module height. given a suitable priming coat before delivery.
Defective knots, where permitted in surfaces
4. Standard Sizes (in mm):
exposed to view, shall be completely bored or
Designation Width Height cut out and tightly plugged with a cross-gained
8 DS 20 700 1 905 plug (round or dovetailed) of similar species of
8 DS 21 700 2 005 timber and shall be properly glued in.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6198-1971 Specification for ledged, braced and battened timber
door shutters.
301
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1038-1975 STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, fab- 10 HS 12. The overall width and height to the
rication and finish of steel doors, windows and outside of frames after allowing 10 mm
ventilators manufactured from rolled steel sections to clearance on all four sides (see Note 2) shall
standard sizes and designs. This standard does not be 98 cm and 118 cm respectively.
cover steel doors, windows and ventilators for use in b) Two lO-module wide and 1Zmodule high
industrial buildings. horizontally glazed side hung windows
coupled side by side with two fixed glass
2. Standard Sizes, Tolerances and Designations frameventilators attop, each IOmodulewide
and 6 module high, is designated by
a) Doors: 10 HF 6/10 HF 6
6HS20 8HS20 lOHS20 12HS20 10 HS 12/10 HS 12
6HS21 8HS21 lOHS21 12HS21
b) Windows: 3. Materials
5HF12 lOHF12 15HF12
5HF15 lOHF15 15HF15 3.1 Rolled Steel Sections - Shall conform to
5HF12 lOHS12 15HS12 IS : 7452-1974*.
5HS15 lOHS15 15HS15 3.2 Glass Panes - 3 mm Min thick. Shall be
provided on outside of frames.
6HF12 12HF12 18HF12
6HF15 12HF15 18HF15 Note - For sizes of glass pane see Table 1 of rhe standurd.
6HS12 12HS12 18HS12
6HS!5 12HS15 18HS15 4. Fabrication
c) Ventilators: 4.1 Side Hung Shutters - Hinges projecting type

5HF6 10HF6 15HF6 65 to 75 mm wide. Friction hinges or peg stays
5HT6 lOHT6 15HT6 (300 mm long) shall be provided.
5HC6 lOHT6 15HC6
4.1.1 Handle - Hot pressed brass, or cast brass,
6HF6 12HF6 18HF6 aluminium or steel.
6HT6 12HT6 18HT6
6HC6 liHC6 ’ 18HT6
4.2 Centre Hung Windows and Ventilators -
d) Tolerance: k1.5 mm. Window shall be hung on two pairs of brass or
aluminium cup pivots reveted to the inner and outer
Note 1 - Doors, windows and ventilators without glazing bars
frames of the window to permit the window to swing to
shall be designated by ‘N’ in piace of ‘H’ in the range shown. an angle of approximately 85”. The opening portion of
the window shall be so balanced that it remains open at
Note 2 - The external dimensions of width and height are
derived after allowing 10 mm clearance all round for fitting into a
any desired angle under normal weather conditions.
modular opening based on 10 cm module.
Note 3 - Designations are by symbols denoting width 4.3 Weather Bar - Where fixed light occurs over
(number of modules in width of opening). type (C=centre hung external opening shutter, a push fit weather bar shall be
shutter, F=tixed glass panes, H=with horizontal glazing bars, provided.
N= without horizontal glazing bars, S= side hung shutters T=top
hung shutters) and height (number of modules in height of open-
ing) . 4.4 Dams - Hinges for doors shall be of 50 mm
projecting type. Non-projecting type of hinges may
also be used.
a) Window of a width of 10 modules and height
of 12 modules having horizontal glazing bars *Specification for hot tolled steel sections for doors, windows and
and side hung shutters is designated by ventilators.
302
SP : 21-1983
4.4.1 Mortice lock with not less than 4 levers or 4.4.2 In double shutter doors, the tirst closing
pins shall be provided for thedoor. It shall be operable shutter shall have a concealed brass extruded
from outside as well as from inside but in addition a aluminium or steel bolt at top and bottom.
bolt shall beprovided on the inside so that whendoor is
locked from inside and bolted, it cannot be opened 5. FInIsh - Painting, or phosphating and painting
from outside with its key. or hot dip galvanizing.
Note I-Handing and direction of closing of doors shall be designated in accordance with IS : 4043-1969 Recommendations for
symbolic designation of direction of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters.
Note 2-For details regarding position of fixing holes, fixing screws and lugs see 7 of the standurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1038-1975 Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators
(secohd revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1361-1978 STEEL WINDOWS FOR INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Deals with steel windows suitable for a) Window Sizes:

use in industrial buildings and designed to suit open- INlOClO IN22ClO IN16C15
ings based on a module of 10 cm. INlOTlO IN22T 10 IN16T15
INlOBlO IN22B 10 IN16B15
2. Handing - Handing and direction of closing of IN16ClO lNlOC15 IN22C15

sashes shall be according to IS : 4043-1%9*. IN16TlO INlOT IN22T15
IN16BlO INlOB IN22B15
3. Designation - By symbols denoting in sequ-
ence, IN (to indicate industrial window)X Width INlOC20 IN22C20 Inl6FlO
expressed in number of modules XType (F= fixed IN lOT20 IN2jT20 IN16F15
sash, C=centre-hung sash, B= botton hung sash, INlOB IN22B20 IN16F20
T= top hung sash)x Height expressed in number of
IN16C20 INlOFlO IN22FlO
modules.
IN16T20 INlOF15 IN22F15
Examples : IN16B20 IN10F20 IN22F20
a) IN 10 C 15 indicates industrial window for b) Ventilator (openingpartof asash) shall beof
opening 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 onesizeanddesignedto fitintoouterframeof
module high (150 cm) with centre hung INlOClO and with 1.2 mm clearance.
ventilator
c) Tolerance for overall dimensions - + 3 mm.
b) IN 10 C lo/IN 10 Cl0
indicates the com- Note - Overall heights and widths to the outside of frames
IN 10 C 15/‘IN 10 Cl5 shall be derived after allowing 10 mm klearance all round for the
purpose of fitting the sashes into modular openings. Thus, width
bination of four windows, two of the type
and depth of IN 16 C 10 shall be 158 cm and 98 cm.
IN 10 C 10 on top and two of the type
IN 10 C 15 at the bottom, all the four of them 5. Material
coupled both horizontally and vertically.
5.1 Rolled steel sections shall conform to
4. Sizes and Tolerances IS : 7452-1974*.
*Recommendations for symbolic designation of direction of clos- *Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and
ing and faces of doors, windows and shutters. ventilators.
303
SP : 21-1983
5.2 Pivots and Spring Catches - Non ferrous ventilator, and attached with screws.
metal.
7.3 Centre-hung and bottom hung ventilators shall
5.3 Glass - Shall conform to IS : 2835-1977* or have a bronze spring catch in the centm of the top
IS : 5437-1969t. section, suitable for operation by hand or pole (and by
cord in case of centre-hung ventilators). The former
shall be provided with a 30 cm peg stay of steel or a
6. Holes for Fixing, Coupling and Glazing - 30 cm bronze cam opener to hold the ventilator open
Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in three different positions. Bottom-hung ventilators
in the web of the outside frame sections (and shall have folding side arms to limit the opening.
of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at
the perimeter of the sash). Holes for glazing clips shall 8. Composite Windows - Shall be despatched un-
also be provided. assembled, but complete with necessary coupling
components. Each coupling member will increase the
7. Fittings and Fixing Materials overall height or width by 25 mm maximum which
7.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a includes manufacturing tolerances.
pair of brass cup pivots, each pivot consisting of an
inner and an outer cup, permitting the swinging of the 9. Glass - Sizes shall be as given below:
ventilator through at least 85” and so balanced that the Pane Designation abcdef
h ventilator shall be capable of remaining open in any
desired position. Width (mm) 269 304 292 304 304 292
Height (mm) 425 425 460 460 492 492
7.2 Centre-hung ventilators shall be provided with a
pulley with centre of the bottom section of the Note - For number of glass panes for each type of window
see Fig. 4 of the standard.
*Spkcification for flat transparent sheet glass (second revision). 10. Finish - All sashes and coupling members shall
‘/‘Specification for wired and figured glass. be either galvanised or painted.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1361-1978 Specification for steel windows for industrial buildings
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1948-1961 ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS

AND VENTILATORS
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, fab- a) Types and sizes:

rication and dimensions of aluminium doors, windows 6HF6, lOHF6, 12HF6, 15HF6, 18HF6 ’
and ventilators, manufactured from extruded 6HT6, lOHT6, 12HT6, 15HT6, 18HT6
aluminium alloy sections of standard sizes and de- 6HC6, lOHC6, 12HC6, 15HC6, 18HC6
signs, complete with fittings, ready for being fixed into 6HF9, lOHF9, 12HF9, 15HF9, 18HF9
the buildings. This standard does not cover the 6HS9, lOHS9, 12HS9, 15HS9, 18HS9,
requirements for industrial doors, windows and 6 HT9
ventilators.
6HF12, lOHF12, 12HF12, 15HF12, 18HF12
2. Handing - Side-hung opening position of all 6HS12, lOHS12, 12HS12, 15HS12, 18HS12
doors and w indows shall be said to be right hand or left lOHF15, 12HF15, 15HF15, 18HF15
6HF15,
hand according to the side on which they are hinged lOHS15, 12HS15, 15HS15, 18HS15
6HS15,
looking from the inside.
6HF21, 8HS21, 12HS21, 8HF6, 8HT6,
3. Standard Sizes, Tolerances and Designations 8 HC6.
304
SP : 21-1983
b) Tolerances - For frames Z!Z1.5 mm. 5.2 Centre Hung Ventilators - Shall be hung on
two pairs of cup pivots of aluminium alloy (IS
Note 1 - The external dimensions of width and height are Designation NS-4).
derived after allowing 1.25 cm clearance all round for fitting into a
modularopening based on 10 cm module. 5.3 Doors - Outer fixed frame shall be of section
Al - FX 8. Shu-tter frame shall be of either hollow
Note 2 - Designation is by symbols denoting width (number
sections Al - HF x 5 and Al -HF X 6 or of solid
of modules in width of opening); type (C=centre hung shutters;
F=fixed glass panes; H= with horizontal glazing bars; N= without sections Al - F X 5 and Al - F X 6.
horizontal glazing bars; S= side-hung shutters; T=top-hung shut-
ters); and height (number of modules in height of opening).
5.3.1 Hinges - Shall be of 50 mm projecting
type.
Examples:
5.3.2 A suitable lock for the door operable either
a) A window of width 10 modules (97.5 cm) and height 9 from inside or outside shall be provided.
modules (87.5 cm), having horizontal glazing bars and
side-hung shutters is designated by 10 HS 9. 5.3.3 In double shutter doors the first closing
b) Two 10 module wide and 12 module high horizontally shutter shall have a concealed aluminium alloy bolt at
glazed side-hung windows coupled side by side with two top and bottom.
fixed glass pane ventilators at top, each 10 module wide
and 6 module high, is designated by 5.4 Composite Units - Doors shall be coupled to
windows or side 1ights by extruded aluminium sections
10 HF 6110 HF 6 made from aluminium conforming to IS Designation
10 HS 12/ 10 HS 12 HE 9-WP.
Note 3 - Windows without horizontal glazing bars shall be 5.5 Weather Bar - Where a coupling member is
designated by ‘N’ in place of ‘H’ in the range shown above. fitted over an external opening shutter, the coupling
member should incorporate an integrally extruded
Note4 - Doors and side lights shall only be coupled with 12
weather bar.
module (117.5 cm) high windows.
6. Position of Bolts, Fixing Screws and Lugs -

4. Materials Outer frames shail be provided with fixing holes
centrally in the web of the sections.
4.1 Aluminium Alloy -IS Designation HE 9-WP
and HV 9-WP. Note - For details regarding positions of fixing holes and
member of fixing lugs See 7 of the standard.
4.2 Glass Panes - Shall weigh at least 7.5 kg/m*.
Glazing shall be outside of frames. 7. finish
7.1 Matt, scratch-brush or polished. May be
Note - For sizes of glass panes see Table 1 of he standard. anodized additionally.
5. Fabrication 7.2 A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based

on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be applied
5.1 Side-Hung Shutters - Hinges projecting type by suppliers to protect the surface from wet cement
67 mm wide. Friction hinges or peg stays (300 mm during construction. This lacquer coating shall be
long) shall be provided. removed after installation is completed.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1948-1961 Specification for aluminium doors, windows and
ventilators.
305
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1949-1961 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

FOR INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
1. Scope - Deals with aluminium windows suita- 4. Material

ble for use in industrial buildings-and designed to suit
a) Aluminium extruded section: IS Designation
openings based on a module of 10 cm. HE9WP. Hollow sections shall conform to IS
Designation HVPWP.
2. Designation - By symbols IN (to indicate in-
dustrial window) X Width expressed in number of b) Cord-eyes, pulleys, brackets and catch plates
modules X Type (F = fixed sash; C = centre hung shall be of aluminium or galvanized or cad-
sash; B = bottom-hung sash; T = top-hung sash) x mium plated steel.
Height expressed in number of modules.
c) Pivots, peg stays and spring catches shall be of
non-ferrous metal.
Examples
d) Glass panes: Shall weigh 7.5 kg/m2. Sizes of
IN 10 C 15 indicates window for opening 10
glass panes shall be as given below:
module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high
(150 cm) with centre-hung ventilator. Pane Designation abcdef
b) Composite wmdows Width (mm) 265 300 290 300 300 290
IN 10 C lo/IN 10 C 10 Height (mm) 420 420 455 455 490 490
IN 10 C 15/IN 10 C 15
Note - For number of glass panes for each type of window see
Indicates the combination of four windows, Fig. 5 of the standard.
twoofthetypeIN 10ClOontopandtwoofthe
typeIN 10 C 15 at bottom, all the four of them 5. Holes for Fixing, Coupling and Glazing -
coupled both horizontally and vertically. Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided
in the web of the outside frame sections and of outer
3. Sizes and Tolerances ventilator frame sections where these occur at the
perimeter of the sash. Holes for glazing chips shall also
Sizes :
be provided, one hole being located in web of the
INlOClO IN22C 10 IN16C15 section or tee, on each side of each pane.
INlOTlO IN22T 10 IN16T15
INlOBlO IN22B 10 IN16B15 6. Fitting and Fixing Materials
IN16C.10 INlOC15 IN22C 15
IN16TlO INlOT IN22T15 6.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a
IN16BlO INlOB IN22B 15 pairofcup-pivotsmadeoutof aluminium alloy sheetor
chromium plated brass and each pivot consisting of an
INlOC20 IN22C20 INlBFlO inner and outer cup, permitting the swinging of the
IN lOT20 IN22T20 IN16F15 ventilator through at least 85”. The ventilator shall be
INlOB IN22B20 IN16F20 so balanced that it can remain open in any desired
IN16C20 INlOFlO IN22FlO position.
IN16T20 INlOF15 IN22F15
IN16B20 IN lOF20 IN22F20 6.2 Centre-hung and bottom-hung ventilators shall
have cast aluminium or bronze spring catch in the
b) Ventilators (opening part of a sash) shall be of centre of the top section, suitablefor operation by hand
one size and designed to fit into outer frame of or pole (chord in case of centre-hung).
IN10 C 10 and with 1.2 mm clearance.
6.3 Bottom-hung and top-hung ventilators shall be
c) Tolerance for overall dimensions +3 mm.
hung on aluminium alloy hinges. The former shall be
provided with a pair of aluminium alloy folding side
Note - The overall width and height of window is smaller
arms (tolimit theopening) and thelatterwith a300 mm
than dimensions of modular opening by 2.5 cm, allowing a clear-
ance of 1.25 cm all round. Thus, width and height of long peg stay. Alternatively, top-hung ventilator may
INlOC5=97.5 cmx 147.5 cm. be provided with 30 cm cam opener.
‘306
SP : 21-1983
6.4 Two spring glazing clips per pane shall be 8. Finish - Matt, scratch-brush or polished may be
provided. anodized additionally. A thick layer of transparent
lacquer, based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate,
7. Composite Windows - Shall bedespatched un- shah be applied, by the suppliers, toprotect the surface
assembled, but complete with necessary components. from action of wet cement during installation. This
Each coupling member will increase the overall height lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is
or width by 25 mm. completed.
For &tailed it&rrrtation, refer to IS : 1949-1961 Specification for aluminium windows for industrial
buildings.
,
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4351-1976 STEEL DOOR FRAMES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, di- b) Tolerance + 2 mm.
mensions and construction of steel door frames for Note 1- ‘X’ in the designation stands for protile designation,
internal and external use. Aluminium door frames not such as A, B or C.
covered. Profile A=105~60 mm rebated for one set of shutter.
Profile B=125~60 mm rebated for one set of shutter.
2. Material - Shall be manufactured from com- Protile C= 165x60 mm rebated for two sets of shutters.
mercial mild steel sheets of 1.25 mm thickness, Note 2 - Sizes are derived after allowing 5 mm clearance all
conforming to IS : 513-1973* or IS : 1079-1973.1. round for fitting the frame into a modular opening based on 10 cm
module.
3. Sizes, Tolerances and Designation Note 3 - Designation by symbols denoting width (number of
modules in width of opening); type (P=pressed steel frame);
a) Designation Overall Overall profile (A, B or C) and height (number of modules in height of
Width Height opening).
mm mm
8PX20 79 199 4. Base Ties and Angle Thresholds - Base ties of
9PX20 89 199 pressed mild steel 1.25 mm thick adjustable to suit
1OPX20 99 199 floor thickness of 25,30, 35 or 40 mm and removable,
12PX20 119 199 or alternatively, thresholds of mild steel angle
8PX21 79 209 50X 25 mm, Min, shall be provided for external door
9PX2 1 89 209 frames.
lOPX21 99 209
12PX21 119 209 5. Fittings
*Specification for cold-rolled carbon steel sheets (second revi-

5.1 Fixing Lugs - There shall be three adjustable
SiOtl). lugs with split and tail to each jamb without fan light,
%pecification for hot-rolled carbon steel sheet and strip (third and four for jamb with fan light. Head 25 mm wide
revision ). x 1.6 mm thick, Min, and 95,120 or 160 mm long for
307
SP : 21-1983
profiles A, B and C respectively. Tail shall be 200 mm 5.3 Lock-strike plate of steel, complete with mortar
long, 40 mm. Min wide and 1 mm, Min thick. guard, shall be provided.
5.2 Hinges
5.4 Shock Absorbers - Minimum 3 buffers, for
a) Frames fordoors 89 cm wide and above - 3 side-hung door, and 2 buffers for double shutter door.
hinges welded to one jamb.
b) Frames for doors 99 cm wide and above - 6 6. Finish - Door frames shall be hot-dip gal-
hinges, 3 welded to each jamb. vanized or painted.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4351-1976 Specification for steel door frames (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6248-1979 METAL ROLLING SHUTTERS AND ROLLING GRILLS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, fab- 4. Requirements
rication and finish of metal rolling shutters and rolling 4.1 Curtain shall be built up of interlocking lath sec-
grills for normal use. tion formed from cold rolled steel strips. Thickness of
Note - Since the term ‘rolling shutters’ is more commonly sheets not less than 0.9 mm for shutters up to 3.5 m
used, the reference in this standard is mainly to rolling shutters.
width and 1.20 mm for 3.5 m width and above.
However, since rolling shutters and rollinggrills are similar in
design, construction and operation, all references to rolling shut-
4.2 Lock Plate - Made of mild steel sheet not less
ters in this standard shall apply to rolling grills also. Special
features of rolling grills, as different from rolling shutters have than 3.15 mm thick, reinforced with mild steel angle
also been given. section not less than 35 x 35 ~5 mm. Alternatively, it
may be fabricated out of mild steel angles or ‘Tee’
sections not less than 5 mm thick.
2. Sizes - Specified by clear width (W) and clear
height (H) of the opening. Width shall always be 4.3 Guide Channels and Bracket Plates -
mentioned first. Stopper height shall be 1Ocm less than Fabricated out of mild steel sheets of minimum
clear height, unless otherwise specified. 3.15 mm thickness.
4.4 Hood Covers - Made of mild steel sheets not
3. Types and Applicable Sizes
less than 0.9 mm thick.
a) Self-Coiling Type (Push-Pull Type or Manual
4.5 Safety Devices - For width up to 2.5 m, a
type) - For sizes up to a clear areas of 8 m2
properly fabricated and reinforced bottom lock plate
without ball bearings and 12 m2 with ball
shall be provided to give protection. For widths above
bearings.
2.5 m, anchorage rods or central hasp and staple, or
b) Gear-Operated Type (Mechanical Type) -
both may be provided.
Shall be fitted with ball bearings. Used for a
clear area up to 25 m2 if operated by bevel
5. Rolling Grills - Curtains may be built of
gear-box and crank handle, andup to 35 m* if
aluminium alloy or cold rolled steel sheet links of
operated by chain wheel and hand chain,
0.9 mm thickness assembled on tubes or rods, or out
mounted directly on the worm shaft.
of 8 mm dia pild steel or aluminium alloy round bars.
C) Electrically-Operated Type - For use up to
about 50 m2 clear area. Operated by electric 5.1 Rolling ‘Shutter-cum-Grill - In situations
motor on 4001440 V, 3 phase, 50 cycles ac where a certain amount of ventilation combined wi&
supply. Speed of movement of curtain shall not safety is called for the rolling shutter may have a small
exceed about 10 cm/s. rolling grill portion either at top or at bottom or at both
308
SP : 21-1983
places. Height of grill portion shall be 0.5 m coat of a brushing quality ready mixed primer before
maximum. despatch. Portions where there is contact between
aluminium and steel shall be painted with zinc
6. Painting .- All component parts (except springs chromate primer.
and the inside of guide channels) shall be given one
Note-For details regarding types based on position of fixing, materials, fabrication, optional features, operation, etc, refer to the
standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6248-1979 Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7452-1982 HOT ROLLED STEEL SECYi’IONS FOR DOORS,

WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, 3. Designation and Weight
nominal dimensions, tolerances, weights, finishing
Designation Weight Designation Weight
and supply of hot rolled steel sections used for door,
window and ventilator frames and sashes.
(kg/m)
T2 1.036 F4B Yz’
T3 1.14 F7D 1:419
Note - For situations where various sections are normally T6 0.839 FX6 2.52
used, refer to Appendix A of the standard. F2 1.46 FZ5 2.52
F3 2.28 FX8 2.31
F5 1.55 EZ7 1.90
F8 1.92 KllB 1.80
2. Material - Steel shall conform to IS : 2830-
K12B 2.30
1975* or IS : 2831-19751.
4. Dimensions and Tolerances - Shall be as given
in Fig. 2 of the standard.
*Specification for carbon steel billets, blooms and slabs for re-
rolling into structural steel (standard quality) (second revision).
5. Finishing - Rolled steel sections shall be free
tspecification for carbon steel billets, blooms and slabs for re- from rolling defects and shall be suitable for punching
rolling into structural steel (ordinary quality) (second revision). and/or welding.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7452-1982 Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors,
windows and ventilators (first revision).
309
SECTION 15
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 280-1978 Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision) 313
IS : 432 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire
for concrete reinforcement:
IS : 432 (Part I)-1982 Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision) 314
IS : 432 (Part II)-1982 Part II Hard-drawn steel wire (third revision.) 315
IS : 1139-1966 Hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and high yield strength 315
steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement (revised)
IS : 1566-1982 Hard-drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement (second 317
revision)
IS : 1785 Plain hard-drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete:
IS : 1785 (Part I)-1966 Part I Cold-drawn stress-relieved wire (revised) 318
IS : 1785 (Part II)-I%7 Part II As-drawn wire 319
IS : 1786-1979 Cold-worked steel high strength deformed bars for concrete 319
reinforcement (second revision >
IS : 2090-1962 High tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete 320
IS : 6003- 1970 Indented wire for prestressed concrete 321
IS : 6006-1970 Uncoated stress relieved strand for prestressed concrete 321
IS : 7887-1975 Mild steel wire rod for general engineering purposes 323
312
.
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 280-1978 MILD STEEL WIRE FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING

PURPOSES
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel wire of 4. Mechanical Properties

sizes 0.125 mm to 12.5 mm diameter for general
engineering purposes. 4.1 Tensile Test
Cotiition Tensile Strength, MPa
2. Sizes - Diameter in mm *
, 7
0.125 0.315 0.80 2.00 5.00 Finishes other than Galvanized
0.140 0.355 0.90 2.24 5.60 Galvanized
0.160 0.400 1.00 2.50 6.30
0.180 0.450 1.12 2.80 7.10 Annealed 500 Max 300-550
0.200 0.500 1.25 . 3.15 8.00 Soft drawn 55OMax
0.224 0.560 1.40 3.55 9.00 l/4 hard 450-650 -
0.250 0.630 1.60 4.00 10.00 112 hard 600-800
0.280 0.710 1.80 4.50 11.2 Hard 700-950 550-900
12.5 1MPa = lN/mm* = 1MN/m2 = 0.102 0
Note - Other sizes by mutual agreement. kgf/mm*.
3. Tolerances on Diameter - (Applicable to coils

only) 4.2 Wrapping Test (For Wire Smaller than 5 mm
Dia) - Shall withstand without breaking or splitting
a) Galvanized - All sizes f 2.5 percent with a being wrappea 8 times round its own diameter and
minimum of f0.025 mm subsequently straightened.
b) Other finishes
Size of Wire Tolerance 4.3 Bend Test (For Wire Dia 5 mm and Over+
(mm> (mm) Shall withstand being bent through 90” round a former
Up to 0.25 fO.O1 of diameter equal to twice its own dia without breaking
Over 0.25 up to 0.50 kO.015 or splitting.
Over 0.50 up to 1 .OO f0.02
Over 1.00 up to 1.50 f0.03
Over 1.50 up to 2.50 +_0.04 5. Finish - Annealed; annealed cleaned and limed;
Over 2.50 up to 5.00 +0.05 bright drawn; dull grey (dry drawn); galvanized;
Over 5.0 +0.06 coppered, or tinned.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972Method for tensile testing of steel wire first revision), IS : 1755-1961Method
for wrapping test of wire and 8 of the standard.
Note 2-For chemical composition see 5 of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 280-1978 Specification for mild steel wirefor general engineering
purposes (third revision).
313
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 432 (PART I)- 1982 MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL
BARS AND HARD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE
FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART I MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of mild steel and medium 5.2 Coiled Rounds and Squares
tensile steel plain bars in round and square sections for ,
use as reinforcement in concrete. 5.2.1 Size - 310.5 mm for size up to and includ-
2. Types and Grades ing 12 mm.
a) Mild steel bars; Grade I and Grade II, and 5.2.2 Out of shupe - Permissible value at any
b) Medium tensile steel bars. cross section shall not exceed 0.65 mm.
Note - Grade II bars am not recommended for use in ”
structures located in earthquake zones subjected to severe damage Note 1 - Size shall be diameter in case of round bars and side
and for structures subjected to dynamic loading (other than wind width in case of square bars.
loading).
Note 2 - No weight tolerance shall be applicable in case of
3. Freedom from Defects - Finished bars shall be
coiled round and square bars.
sound and free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations
and rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc.
4. Nominal Sizes - Diameter of round bars or
side of square bars shall be 5,6,8, 10, 12,16,20,22, 6.1 Ultimate tensile stress, yield stress and percent-
25, 28, 32, 36, 40, 45 and 50 mm. age elongation shall be as given in Table 1.
5. Tolerance
5.1 Bars in Straight Length TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF BARS
5.1.1 Size
SL TYPE AND NOMINAL ULTIMATE YIELD ELON-
Size Tolerance
No. SIZE OFBAR TENSILE STRESS GATlON*
STRESS PERCENT.
/ Min Min Min
Including
i) Mild Steel Grade I
mm mm mm
- 25 +0.5 For bars up to and includ- 410 250 23
35 +0.6 ing 20 mm
25
35 50 f0.8 For bars over 20 mm, up to 410 240 23
50 80 +1.0 and including 50 mm
80 100 f1.3 ii) Mild Steel Grade II
100 - f 1.6 per- For bars up to and includ- 370 225 23
cent of dia or ing 20 mm
side width For bars over 20 to 370 215 23 L..
mm, up
5.1.2 Ovality and out-of-square - Permissible and including 50 mm
ovality for round bars and out-of-square of square bars iii) Medium Tensile Steel
shall be 75 percent of total tolerance (plus and minus) For bars up to and includ- 540 350 20
specified on size. ing 16 mm
For bars over 16 mm, up to 540 340 20
5.1.3 Weight and including 32 mm
Size Tolerance,
, I\ . Percent For bars over 32 mm, up to 510 330 20
and including 50 mm
Over Up to and
Including_ *Elongation on a gauge length 5.65 * where So is the
mm mm cross-sectional area of the test piece.
- 10 ’ t-7
10 16 +5
16 - +3 6.2 Bend Test - Shall withstand the specified test.
314
.
SP : 21-1983
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974
Method for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube Cfirst revision) (both read in conjunctionwith
IS : 226-1975 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) GJ?h revision) and 9 of the standard.
Note 2-For chemical composition refer to see4 of thestandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 432 (Part I)-1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile
steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement: Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel
bars (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 432 (PART II)-1982 MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL

BARS AND HARD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE
PART II HARD-DRAWN SiEEL WIRE
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of hard-drawn steel wire 5. Physical Requirements
of medium strength used as reinforcement in concrete.
5.1 Tensile Propenies
2. Freedom from .Defects - Finished wire shall be
a) Ultimate tensile stress, @fin) 570N/mm2
sound, free from splits, surface flaw, etc.
3., Nominal Sizes - 2.65,3.0,3.15,3.55,4.0,4.5, b) Proof stress (0.2 percent), @fin) 480 N/mm2
4.75, 5.0, 5.3, 5.6, 6.0, 6.3, 7.1, 7.5, 8.0, 9.0, 9.5, c) Elongation over gauge length of 8 diameter,
and 10 mm diameter. f&fin) 7.5 percent
4. Tolerance - Nominal diameter: -I-2 percent
- 1 percent 5.2 Reverse Bend Test - Test piece shall with-
Length: +6 mm up to 3 m stand, without showing any sign of fracture, one com-
+13 mm over 3 m plete cycle of reverse bend.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire Cfirst revision), IS:1716-1971 Method
for reverse bend testing of steel wire Cfirst revision) and 8 of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 432 (Part II)-1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile
steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement: Part II Hard-drawn steel wire (third
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1139-1966 HOT ROLLED MILD STEEL, MEDIUM TENSILE

STEEL AND HIGH YIELD STRENGTH STEEL DEFORMED BARS
(Revised)
(With Amendments No. 1,2 and 3)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of test for 2. Types

hot rolled mild steel medium tensile steel and high a) Mild steel deformed bars,
yield strength steel deformed bars used as reinforce- b) Medium tensile steel deformed bs?rs, and
ment in concrete. c) High yield strength steel deformed bars.
315
SP : 21-1983
3. Deformations 5. Weight - Basis of calculation: (a) Steel weighs

0.785 kg/cm* of cross sectional area per metre run, (b)
4 Bond strength (at a measured slip of 0.025 mm) nominal size of deformed bar is equal to diameter or
shall exceed that of plain bar of same size by side of plain bar having same weight per metre length.
40 percent or mom. The weight thus calculated shall be checked against
actualweight of bar 1 m long.
b) Angle between deformation and axis of bar:
not less than 45”. When this is less than 7CP, 6. Tolerance
deformation shall reverse in direction altema-
tively . On weight
for nominal size +4 percent (Total
c) Average spacing of deformation on each side margin 8 percent)
up to 8 mm
shall not exceed 7/10 size of bar. dver 8 mm f2.5 percent (Total
d) Gaps between extreme ends of deformations margin 5 percent)
on opposite sides shall not exceed 12.5 percent Cutting tolerance on length
of perimeter. Total width of longitudinal ribs When minimum length is specified +75 mm
shall not exceed 25 percent of perimeter when When maximum length is specified -50 mm
more than 2 such ribs are provided. Specified length is not stated to be -25 mm and
Mau or Min +75 mm
e) Average height of deformation shall not be less
than 4 percent of size for bars below 16 mm and 7. Physical Requirements
5 percent for 16 mm bars and above. 7.1 Tensile Properties
SI Property Nominal Size Mild Medium High Yield Strength

No. of Bars Steel Tensile Steel Bars
Steel Bars
i) Tensile strength (kgf/mm*, Min) All sizes 42 55 15 percent greater than

the measured yield
stress
ii) Yield stress: (kgf/mmz, Min)
a) Mild and high yield strength steel bars 20 and below 26 - 42.5
Over 20 up to 40 24 - 42.5
Over 40 24 - 42.5
b) Medium tensile steel bars 16 and below - 36 -
Over 16 up to 32 - 35 -
Over 32 - 34 -
iii) Elongation (percentage, Min) All sizes 23 20 14.5
4. Freedom from Defects - Finished bars shall be 7.2 Bend Test - Shah withstand the specified test.
sound and free from cracks, harmful surface flaws,
7.3 R&end Test - Shall withstand the specified
laminations, rough and imperfect edges, etc.
test.
.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to 1S : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974
Method for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube and 10 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1139-1966 Specification for hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile
steel and high yield strength steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement (revised).
316
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1566-1982 HARD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE FABRIC

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for hard-drawn steel wire b) Size of sheet 525 mm for dimensions up to
fabric consisting of hard-drawn steel wire with cross 5 m.
wires electrically welded to them for use as concrete f?4 pexent for dimensions
reinforcement. over 5, mm
c) Mass
i) When neither maximum nor +6 percent
2. Types minimum mass specified
a) Oblong mesh, and ii) When maximum mass speci- T y2percent
fied
b) Square mesh. iii) When minimum mass speci- ‘_A* percent
fied
3. Material - Wire used shall be hard-drawn steel 7. Mechanical properties
wire suitable for welding. 7.1 Shall meet the minimum requirements forphysi-
cal properties as prescribed in IS : 432 (Part II)-1982*.
4. Sizes of Sheets or Rolls - Width of fabric shall 7.2 Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand one
be such as to fit in with modular size of 10 cm module. complete cycle of reverse bend around a pin of size
indicated below:
5. Mass - Calculated on the basis that steel Diameter of Diameter of Pin
weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 of nominal cross-sectional area Specimen Wire
per metre run. Actual weight is determined by weigh-
7.5 mm and under Equal to diameter of
ing any convenient size and if possible at least one specimen
square metre . Equal to twice the
Over 7.5 mm
diameter of specimen
6. Tolerances *Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and
hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement: Part II Hard-
a) Pitch: f7% percent drawn steel wire (third revision).
Note l-For mesh sizes, weights and sizes of wires for square and oblong welded wire fabric commonly manufactured see
Appendix A of the standard.
Note 2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire (first revision), IS : 1716-1971
Method
for reverse bend testine of steel wire ~first revision) and 11 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1566-1982 Specification for hard-drawn steel wire fabric for
concrete reinforcement (second revision).
317
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1785 (PART I)-1966 PLAIN HARD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE

FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
PART I COLD-DRAWN STRESS-RELIEVED WIRE
(Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, supply 4.2 Proof Stress - Proof stress (which produces a
and testing of plain, cold-drawn, stress-relieved steel residual strain of 0.2 percent of original gauge length)
wire for use in prestressed concrete. shall not be less than 85 percent of minimum specified
tensile strength.
2. Nominal Sizes - 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 7.0 and 4.3 Ductility - Shall withstand the prescribed re-
8.0 mm (nominal diameter). verse bend test.
4.4 Relaxation Stress - Shall not exceed 5 percent
3. Tolerances of initial stress at the end of 1 000 hours. When it is not
+0.05 mm for nominal sizes 3,4, 5,7 and 8 mm possible to conduct 1 000 hours relaxation test, wire
and f0.02,5 mm for nominal size 2.5 mm. may be accepted on basis of 100 hours test, provided
that relaxation stress at 100 hours is not more than
3.50 percent of the initial stress and provided manufac-
4. Physical Requirements turer furnishes proof establishing a relation between
relaxation test values at 1 000 hours and 100 hours.
4.1 Ultimate tensile strength and elongation after 4,s Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion -
rupture over a gauge length of 200 mm: Manufacturer shall provide proof that wire is not sus-
ceptible to stress corrosion-.
Nominal diameter, mm 2.5 3 4 5 7 8
Ultimate tensile strength, 205 190 175 160 150 140 4.6 There shall be no welds or joints in the finished
kgf/mm2, Min wire as supplied to the purchaser. Any welds or joints
Elongation, percentage, 2.5 2.5 3 4 4 4 made during manufacture to promote continuity of
Min operations shall be removed.
-
Note I---For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire f&t revision), IS : 1716-1971 Method
for reverse bend testing of steel wire ffirst revision) and 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1785 (Part I)-1966 Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wire for
prestressed concrete: Part I Cold-drawn stress-relieved wire (revised).
___ __~
318
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1785 (PART II)-1967 PLAIN HARD DRAWN STEEL WIRE

PART II AS-DRAWN WIRE
1. Scope - Requiremerlts for manufacture, supply 5.1 Tensile Strength

and testing of plain ‘as-drawn’ steel wire for use in
Nominal Diameter Tensile Strength, Min
prestressed concrete pipes (for introducing circum-
(mm) (kgf/mm2)
ferential compression, etc) and similar other purposes.
3.15 180
4.00 175
2. Nominal Sizes - 3.15, 4.0 and 5.0 mm dia.
5.00 160
3. Tolerance - kO.02 mm for 3.15 mm size, and 5.2 ProofStress - 0.2 percentproof stress shall not
+0.03 mm for others. be less than 75 percent of minimum specified tensile
strength.
4. Requirements
5.3 Ductility - Shall withstand the prescribed re-
a) Finished wires shall be sound, free from splits, verse bend test. When uncoiled the wire shall remain
piping, etc; and flat and shall not spring up.
b) There shall be no welds in the finished wire. 5.4 Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion -
Manufacturer shall provide proof that wire is not
5. Mechanical Properties susceptible to stress corrosion.
_--._
Note I -For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire Cfirst revision) and 7 of the stuand~rd.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 1785 (Part II)-1967 Sp&zification for plain hard drawn steel wire for
prestressed concrete: Part II As-drawn wire.
______
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1786-1979 COLD-WORKED STEEL HIGH STRENGTH

DEFORMED BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for cold-worked steel Ncvninal Size Cross Sectional Mass Per Metre
high strength deformed bars for use as reinforcement in (Dimeter) Area Run
concrete, in two strength grades as: Fe 415 (N/mm2) (mm) (mm2) (kg)
and Fe 500(Nlmm2). 18 254.6 1.999
20 314.3 2.467
2. Nominal Sizes (Diameters)
22 380.3 2.985
Nominal Size Cross Sectional Mass Per Metre 25 491.1 3.855
(Diameter) Area Run 28 616.0 4.836
(mm) (mm21 0%) 32 804.6 7.994
6 28.3 0.222 40 1257.2 9.869
8 50.3 0.395 45 1591.1 12.490
10 78.6 0.617 50 1964.3 15.424
.
12 113.1 0.888 Note - The nominalsize (diameter)of a deformedbar is equal
16 201.3 1.579 to thatof a plain roundbar havingthesamemasspermetrelength.
319
SP : 21-1983
3. Tolerances Characteristic Fe 415 Fe 500

/ A ,
On specified lengths +75 mm
-25 mm Tensile strength, Min 15 per cent 10 percent
On minimum lengths +50 mm more than more than
-0 mm the actual the actual
0.2 percent 0.2 percent
4. Nominal Mass - The density shall be taken as
proof stress proof stress
0.007 85 kg/mm2 of cross sectional area per metre run.
6. Chemical Composition
Characteristic Fe 415 Fe 500
0.2 percent proof stress, / .

Min (Nlmm2) Constituent Percentage Max
Elongation, percentage, 14.5 l 12.0 Fe 415 Fe 500
Min (on gauge length
of 5.65 A, where A Carbon ’ 0.25 0.30 ’
is the cross sectional Sulphur 0.055 0.050
area) Phosphorus 0.055 0.050
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974Bend
test for steel oroducts other than sheet, strip. wire and tube (first revision) and 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 17861979 Specification for cold-worked steel high strength
deformed bars for concrete reinforcement (second revision).
-
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2090-1962 HIGH TENSILE STEEL BARS USED

IN PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
1. Scope - Requirements for high tensile steel bars b) Weight f2.5 percent (weight calcu-
.
(alloy steel having tensile strength of not less than lated on the basis that
100 kgf/mm2) used in prestressed concrete. high tensile steel weighs
0.785 kg/cm2 of cross-
2. Freedom from Defects - Finished bars shall be sectional area per metre
sound and free from splits, harmful surface flaws, run)
rough, jagged and imperfect edges, and other defects. 5. Physical Requirements
5.1 Tensile Strength, Min - 100 kgf/mm2.
3. Nominal Sizes - 10, 12, 16, 20,22, 25,28 and
32 mm diameter. 5.2 Proof Stress - Between 80 percent and 90
percent of ultimate strength.
4. Tolerances 5.3 Elongation at Rupture, Min - 10 percent.

5.4 Young’s Modulus - 16 x lo3 to 21 X 103
a) Nominal size f0.25 mm for bars up to
kgflmm2
20 mm
+0.5 mm for bars above 5.5 Relaxation - Relaxation of stress shall not
20 mm exceed 5 kgf/mm2 at the end of 1 000 hours.
Nole I-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (firsf revision) and 9 of the
standard.
__-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 20&l-1962 Specification for high tensile steel bars used in
prestressed concrete.
__--
320
SP : II-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6003-1970 INDENTED WIRE FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, supply 6.1 Ultimate Tensile Strength

and testing of indented hard drawn wire for use in
Nominal diameter, mm 5 4 3
Min tensile strength (kgf/mrn*) 160 175 190
2. Chemical Composition - Shall be cold-drawn 6.2 Proof Stress - Shall not be less than 85 percent
from steel. Steel shall contain not more than 0.05 of the minimum specified tensile strength.
percent each of sulphur and phosphorus.
6.3 Ductility - Shall withstand without showing
3. Nominal Sizes - 5.00, 4.00, and 3.00 mm signs of fracture reverse bend test.
diameter. 6.4 Elongation After Rupture (on Gauge Length of
200 mm)
4. Tolerances (on Nominal Diameter) - f0.5 mm
Nominal diameter, mm 5 4 3
Min elongation (Percent) 4 3 2.5
5. Geomelrical Characteristics - Shape and pat-
6.5 Relaxation - Relaxation stress shall not exceed
tern of indentations shall be as mutually agreed,
5 percent of initial stress at the end of 1 000 hours.
provided the indentations are in two lines diametrically
opposite to each other and are staggered. 6.6 Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion -
Manufacturer shall provide proof that wire supplied is
6. Physical Requirements not susceptible to stress corrosion.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire (first revision), IS : 1716-1971 Method for
reverse bend testing of steel wire Cfirsr revision) and 8 of Ihe sfmdard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6003-1970 Specification for indented wire forprestressed concrete.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6006-1970 UNCOATED STRESS RELIEVED STRAND

1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, supply 3. Material -Element wire shall be cold drawn
and testing of uncoated stress relieved, high tensile from plain carbon steel, containing not more than
steel strands for use in prestressed concrete. The fol- 0.050 percent each of sulphur and phosphorus.
lowing types of strands are coveEd:
a) Two wire strand, 4. Manufacture of Strand - Seven wire strand
shall have a centre wire at least 1.5 percent greater in
b) Three wire strand, and
diameter than surrounding wires enclosed tightly by 6
c) Seven wire strand. helically placed outer wires with a uniform length of
lay of at least 12 times but not more than 16 times the
2. Siie and Designation - Two wire and three wire nominal diameter of the strand. Length of lay for 2 and
strand designated by number and diameter of element 3 wire strands shall be uniform and shall be 24 to 36
wires. Seven wire strand designated by approximate times the diameter of element wire. Wires shall not
overall diameter of the strand and the number of element unravel when strand is cut. After stranding, strands
Wk. shall be subjected to stress relieving.
321
SP : 21-1983
a) Two and three wire strand

Designation Nominal Diameter of Nominal Cross- Nominal Weight
Element Wire Sectional Area of Strand
(mm) of Strand (kg/m)
(mm*)
2-ply 2 mm 2.0 Ik 0.03 6.28 0.049 63
2-ply 3 mm 3.0 f 0.03 14.2 0.116
3-ply 3 mm 3.0 f 0.03 21.3 0.166
b) Seven wire strand
Designation Nominal Diameter of Nominal Cross- Nominal Weight

Strand Sectional Area of Strand
(mm) of Strand (l&m )
(mm*)
6.3 mm 7-ply 6.3 + 0.04 25.1 0.195
7.9 mm 7-ply 7.9 f 0.04 37.4 0.295
9.5 mm 7-ply 9.5 + 0.04 51.6 0.408
11.1 mm 7-ply 11.1 kO.04 70.3 0.555
12.5 mm 7-ply 12.7 f 0.04 92.9 0.735
15.2 mm 7-ply 15.2 f 0.04 138.7 1.101
6. Physical Requirements Class Designation Breaking 0.2 Percent

6.1 Breaking Strength Load, Proof Load
Min 0
Class Designation Breaking 0.2 Percent (kg0
Load, Proof Load
Min 2 9.5 mm 7-ply 10 433 8 868
(kg0
11.1 mm 7-ply 14 061 11 952
(kg0
12.5 mm 7-ply 18 733 15 923
1 2-ply 2 mm 1 300 1 105 15.2 mm 7-ply 26 660 22 100
2-ply 3 mm 2 600 2 210
3-ply 3 mm 3 900 3 310 6.2 Proof Load -- 0.2 percent proof load of the
6.3 mm 7-ply 4 536 3 856 strand shall not be less than that specified in 6.1.
7.9 mm 7-ply 7 031 5 976
6.3 Elongation - Not less than 3.5 percent on a
9.5 mm 7-ply 9 525 8 0%
gauge length of not less than 600 mm.
11.1 mm 7-ply 12 700 10 795
12.5 mm 7-ply 16 783 14 266 6.4 Relaxation - Relaxation stress shall not exceed
15.2 mm 7-ply 23 133 19 663 5 percent of the initial stress at the end.of 1 000 hours.
__
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire Cfirsf revision) and 8 of Gzestandard.
For detailed infot?nation, refer to IS : 6006-1970 Specification for uncoated stress relieved strand for
322
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7887-1975 MILD STEEL WIRE ROD F,OR GENERAL

ENGINEERING PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements of hot-rolled mild steel 3. Tests

wire rods up to a diameter of 30 mm and coil weight of
1 000 kg for general engineering purposes. 3.1 Tensile Tests
Note - Wire rods in coil form are used mostly for further cold Tensile strength, Max 540 N/mm2
drawing, although some material is used for reinforced concrete.
Most of it is used for drawing wire for further conversion to Elongation, Min 23 percent
making annealed wire, galvanized wire, nails, wood screws, Note - 1 N/mm*=0.102 kgf/mmr.
rivets, etc.
3.2 Dump Test - To be carried out only if desired
2. Sizes and Tolerances
by purchaser. Test piece of length twice its diameter,
Diameter Size Tolerance, Out of Shape, Max cut from the wire rod, shall at room temperature
(mm) (mm) (Difference Between withstand without fracture or crack while being com-
Max and Min Dia) pressed to half its length. Dump test shall not be made
(mm) on wire rod below 6 mm diameter.
5.0 ?I 0.3 0.3 3.3 Bend Test - Test piece when cold shah, with-
5.5 f 0.3 0.3 out cracking, be doubled over either by pressure or by
6 to 7 + 0.4 0.3 blows from a hammer until internal diameter of the
8 to 10 z!z0.5 0.6 bend is not greater than twice diameter of the w ire rod.
11 to 20 rt 0.5 0.6 There shall be no bend test for wire rods below 6 mm
21 to 30 ‘f 0.5 0.6 diameter.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products Cfirst revision) and IS : 1599-1974
Method for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube Cfirsf revision).
Note 2-For‘chemical composition see 5 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7887-1975 Specification for mild steel wire rod for general
engineering purposes.
323
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
STRUCTURAL STEEL
IS : 226-1975 Structural steel (standard quality) (fifth revision) 327
1s : 961-1975 Structural steel (high tensile) (second revision) 328
IS : 1977-1975 Structural steel (ordinary quality) (second revision) 329
IS : 2062-1980 Structural steel (fusion welding quality) (second revision) 330
IS : 8500-1977 Weldable structural steel (medium and high strength qualities) 331
SHEET AND STRIP

IS : 277-1977 Galvanized steel sheets (plain and corrugated) (third revision) 332
IS : 412-1975 Expanded metal steel sheets for general purposes (second revision) 333
IS : 1079-1973 Hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip (third revision) 335
IS : 4030-1973 Cold rolled carbon steel strip for general engineering purposes 336
(first revision)
IS : 7226-1974 Cold-rolled medium, high carbon and low alloy steel strip for general 337
engineering purposes
TUBES AND TUBULARS
IS : 1161-1979 Steel tubes for structural purposes (third revision) 338

IS : 1239 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings:
IS : 1239 (Part I)- 1979 Part I Mild steel tubes (fourth revision) 339
IS : 1239 (Part II)- 1982 Part II Mild steel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe fittings (third 340
revision)
IS : 4270-1967 Steel tubes used for water wells 342
IS : 4516-1968 Elliptical mild steel tubes 343
IS : 4923-1968 Hollow steel sections for structural use 344
..
326
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 226-1975 STRUCTURAL STEEL (STANDARD QUALITY)

(Fifth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel (standard 3. Freedom from Defects -Finished material
quality) plate, sections bars, etc, designated as shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations,
Fe 410-S (St 42-S) for use in structural work. Steel may rough, jagged and imperfectedges, etc. Minor surface
also be supplied in copper bearing quality in which defects may be removed by grinding provided the
case it shall be designated as Fe 410 Cu-S (St 42-SC). thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent
Note - Steel specified in this standard is suitable for welding (with a maximum of 3 mm).
provided that the thickness of material does not exceed 20 mm.
When the material conforming to this standard is over 20 mm 4. Mechanical Properties
thick, special precautions may be required in case the material is to
be welded (see IS : 823-1964*). 4.1 Tensile Test
Class Thickness/ Tensile Yield Stress Percentage

Diameter Strength Min Elongation
mm kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2 Min
Plates, flats, angles, tees, beams, channels, etc Be(ow 6 Bend test only shall be required
6 to 20 42-54 26 23
Over 20 42-54 24 23
up to 40
Over 40 42-54 23 23
Bars (round, square and hexagonal) Below 10 Bend test only shall be required
IO to 20 42-54 26 23
Over 20 42-54 24 23
Note 1-I N/mmz= 1 MN/mZ=0.102 kgf/mm2.
Note 2-Provided that the yield stress and elongation requirements are complied with, the upper limit for tensile strength
may be raised by 3 kgf/mm2.
Note 3-If agreed to mutually, the material with thickness below 6 mm may be supplied with tensile property requirements.
2. Chemical Composition 4.2 Bend Test - Shall withstand without cracking

the prescribed test when doubled over until internal
Constituent Percent, Max diameter is not greater than3 times the thickness of test
piece (2 times diameter in case of bars up to 25 mm
Carbon (for thickness/dia- 0.23 diameter).
meter 20 mm and below)
Carbon (for thickness/dia- 0.25
5. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of rol-
meter over 20 mm)
led steel products shall conform to the relevant Indian
Sulphur 0.055
Standards as listed in Table 3 of the standard. Rolling and
Phosphorus 0.055
cutting tolerances shall conform to IS : 1852-1973*.
Note - When steel is required in copper-bearing quality, the 6. Weight - Shall be calculated on the basis that steel
copper content shall be between 0.20 and 0.35 percent.
weighs 7.85 g/cd.
*Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel
*Code of procedure for manual arc welding of mild steel. products (second revision).
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method
for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube (first revision) and 7 and 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 226-1975 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) (fifth
revision).
327
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 961-1975 STRUCTURAL STEEL (HIGH TENSILE)

(Second Revision)
1. !kope - Requirements for high tensile steel of two 3.2 Bend Test - Shall withstand without cracking,
grades designated as Fe 570-HT (St 58-HT) and the prescribed test when doubled over until internal
Fe 54OW-HT (St 55-HTw) for use in structural work. diameter is not greater than 3 times the thickness of test
Fe 57CMT (St 58-HT) is intended for use in structures piece (2 times in case of bars up to 25 mm diameter).
where fabrication is done by methods other than welding.
Fe 54OW-l-IT (St 55-HTw) is intended for use in struc- 3.3 Weldability - Steel is acceptable if at no point
tures where welding is employed for fabrication and the hardness exceeds 35Ow. If this limit is exceeded,
where guaranteed weldability is required. it will be necessary to take special precautions when
Steel may also be supplied in copper bearing quality in welding, the thickness of the plate being taken into
which case the two grades shall be designated as account. Values higher than 350 HV may be accepted
Fe 570Cu-HT (St 58-HTC) and Fe 540 CuW-HT for certain low alloy steels.
(St 55-HT WC).
4. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of
Note - In this standard high tensile structural steel has been rolled ‘steel products shall conform to the relevent
classified into two grades designated as Fe 570-HT (St 58-HT) and
Fe 540 W-HT (St 55-HTw). Steel Fe 540 W-HT (St 55-HTw) is
Indian Standards as listed in Table 4 of the standard.
intended for use in structures where fusion welding is employed. Rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to
IS : 1852-1973*.
2. Freedom from Defects -Finished material 5. Weight - Calculated on the basis that steel
shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, weighs 7.85 g/cm’.
rough, jagged and imperfected edges, etc.
3. Mechanical Properties
3.1 Tensile Test products (second r&&r).
Nominal Thickness Tensile Strength, Min Yield Stress, Min

Diameter A A
/ \ / \.
St 58-m St 55HTw St 58-HT St 55-HTw
&$/mm? (kgf/mm2) (kgf/mm2) &#nm2)
Below 6 Bend test only shall be required

6 to 28 58 - 36 -
Over 28 up to 45 58 - 35 -
Over 45 up to 63 58 - 33 -
6 to 16 - 55 - 36
Over 16 up to 32 - 55 - 3’5
Over 32 up to 63 - 52 34
Over 63 55 50 30 29
Percentage alongation : 20 Percent, Min
Note - lN/mmZ= lMN/m2=0.102 kgfknn-3.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products lfirsr revision), IS : 1599-1974
Method of bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube Cfirsf revision), 7, 8 and Appendix A of fhe sfandard.
Note 2-For chemical composition see 5 of Ihe srandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 961-1975 Specification for structural steel (high tensile) (second
revision).
328
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1977-1975 STRUCTl JRAL STEEL (ORDINARY Qt JALITY)

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for two grades of mild 4. Mechanical Properties

steel (ordinary quality) designated as Fe 310-O
(St 32-O) and Fe 410-O (St 42-O). The former grade is 4.1 Tensile Test
intended for general engineering purposes such as door
and window frames, window bars, grills, gates, hand 4.2 Bend Test - Shall withstand without fracture
railings, builders’ hardware, etc, while latter is in- the prescribed test when doubled over until internal
tended for use on structures not subjected to dynamic diameter is not greater than 3 times the thickness
loading other than wind loads, such as platform roofs, of test piece (2 times in case of bars up to 25 mm
foot over bridges, office buildings, etc. diameter).
2. Chemical Composition 5. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of
Steel Designation rolled steel products shall conform to the relevant
Constituents, Percent, Max
A Indian Standards as listed in Table 2 of the standard.
/
Carbon Sulphur Phosphorus Rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to
Fe 3 10-O (St 32-O) 0.30 0.070 0.070 IS : 1852-1973*.
Fe 410-O (St 42-O) 0.30 0.070 0.070
Note - Copper may be present up to a maximum of 0.35 percent. 6. Weight - Calculated on the basis that steel
weighs 7.85 g/cm3.
3. Freedom frtirn Defects - Finished material
shall be reasonably free from cracks, surface flaws,
laminations, rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc.
Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding
provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more *Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel
than 4 percent (with a maximum of 3 mm). products (second revbion).
Steel Product Thickness/ Tensile Yield Stress Elongation

Designation Diameter Strength Min Percent
(mm) (kgf/mmz) (kgf/mm2) Min
Fe 310-O Plates, angles, flats, tees, beams,etc -
6 and above 32 to 44 26

Bars
10 and above 32 to 44 - 26
Fe 410-O Plates, flats, angles, tees, channels, beams 6 up to 20 42 to 54 26 23
Over 20 up to 40 42 to 54 24 23
Over 40 42 to 54 23 23

Bars 10 up to 20 42 to 54 26 23
Over 20 42 to 54 24 23
Note 1- IN/mm2 = 1 MN/m2 = 0.102 kgf/m2.
Note 2-Provided that the yield stress and elongation requirements are complied with, the upper limit for tensile strength
may be raised by 3 kgf/mm*.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method
of bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube (first revision), 7, 8 and Appendix A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1977-197.5 Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality)
(second revision).
329
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2062-1980 STRUCTURAL STEEL (FUSION WELDING QUALITY)

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel (fusion 3.2 Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand without
welding quality designated as Fe 4 10-W (St 42-W), fracture, being doubled over until internal diameter is
intended for use in structures subjected to dynamic not greater than three times its thickness (two times in
loading where welding is employed for fabrication and case of bars up to 25 mm diameter).
where fatigue and fluctuation and reversal of stresses
3.3 Weldability Test - Shall satisfy the prescribed
are involved, such as crane gantry girders, bridges,
tests(applicable for plates with thicknesses between28
etc. The steel may also be supplied in copper-bearing
and 50 mm)
quality designated as Fe 410 Cu-W (St 42-WC).
3.4 Charpy Impact Test- Shall be carried out at
sub-zero temperature, if required by the purchaser.
2. Freedom from Defects - Finished steel shall be
free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough, 4. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of
jagged and imperfect edges, etc. Minor defects may be rolled steel products shall conform to the relevant
removed by grinding provided the thickness is not Indian Standards as listed in Table 3 ofthe standard.
reduced locally by more than 4 percent (with a Rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to
maximum of 3 mm). IS : 1852-1973*.
5. Weight - Shall be calculated on the basis that

3. Mechanical Properties steel weighs 7.85 g/cm3.
3.1 Tensile Test products (second rwision).
Class of Steel Product Nominal Tensile Yield Percentage

Thickness/ Strength, Stress, Elongation,
Diameter, mm N/mm2 Min N/mm2 Min (Guane
(kgf/mmz) (kgf/mmz) Length)
5.65&-
Plates, sections (for example, angles, tees, Below 6
beams, channels, etc) and flats 6 up to and 410-530 250 23
including 20 (42- 54) (26)
Over 20 410-530 230 23

up to and (42-54) (24)
including 40
Over 40 410-530 220 23

(42-54) (23)
Bars (rounds, square and hexagonal) Below 10 . ..

10 up to and 410-530 250 23
including 20 (42-54) (26)
Over 20 410-530 230 23

(42-54) (24)
Note-Provided the yield stress and elongation requirements are complied with, the upper limit for tensile strength may be
raised by 30 N/mm*.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974
Method of bend test for steel products other than sheets, strip, wire and tube (first revision) and 7 to 10 of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 2062-1980 Specification for structural steel (fusion welding quality)
(second revision).
330
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8500-1977 WELDABLE STRUCTURAL STEEL

(MEDIUM AND HIGH STRENGTH QUALITIES)
1. Scope - Requirements of steels of medium and grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally
high strength qualities, for use in structural work. by more than 4 percent below the minimum specified
Where welding is employed for fabrication and guaran- thickness.
teed weldability is required, welding procedure should
be as specified in ‘Indian Standard Recommendations 3. Mechanical Properties - (See Table 1)
for metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese
4. Dimensions - Unless otherwise agreed, the
steels’ (under preparation).
nominal dimensions of rolled products shall be in
Note 1 - Till such time, this Indian Standaid is published, accordance with the relevant Indian Standards given in
welding procedure should be as agreed between the purchaser and
Table 3 of the standard.
the manufacturer.
Note 2 - These steels are specific class of steels in which 5. Tolerances - Unless otherwise agreed the rol-
enhanced mechanical properties are obtained by the incorporation ling and cutting tolerances shall conform to IS : 1852-
of low proportions of one or more alloying elements, besides 1973*.
carbon.
6. Mass - Shall be calculated on the basis that steel
2. Freedom from Defects - Finished material
weighs 7.85 g/cm’.
shall be free from cracks; surface flaws; laminations:
rough, jagged and imperfect edges; and other such *Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products first
defects. Minor surface defects may be removed by revision).
TABLE i MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF WELDABLE STRUCTURAL STEELS
GRADE TENSILE YIELD STRENGTH,Min ELONGA- BEND CHARPY V-NOTCH

[See IS : 1762 STRENGTH , A (INTERNAL IMPACT TEST
\ TION,
(Part Q-1974*1 <6 6-20 21-40 41-63 >63 PERCENT, DIAMETER), (AVERAGE OF 3
mm mm mm mm mm Min Min VALUES)
-FkF
N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm* N/mm* N/mm2 N/mm2 J J
Fe 440-HT 1 440-560 300 300 290 280 By agreement 20 3u - -
Fe 440-HT 2 440-560 300 300 290 280 -do- 20 3T - -
Fe 490-HT 490-610 350 340 330 320 -do- 20 3T - -
Fe 490-HTA 490-6 10 350 340 330 320 -do- 21 3T 40 30
Fe 490-HTB 490-610 350 340 330 320 -do- 22 2T 45 35
Fe 540-HT 540-660 410 400 390 380 -do- 19 3T -
Fe 540-HTA 540-660 410 400 390 380 -do- 20 3T 35 25
Fe 540-HTB 540-660 410 400 390 380 -do- 21 2T 40 30
Fe 570-HT 570-720 450 440 430 420 -do- 18 3T 30 20
Fe 590-HT 590-740 490 480 - - - 18 3T - -
Fe 640-HT 640-790 540 530 - - - 17 3T - -
Note l- -IN/mm2 = 1 MN/m2 = 0.102 kgf/mm* = 1 MPa.
Note 2-Higher impact values than specified will be subject to mutual agreement.
Note J-The requirements more stringent than those specified above may be agreed between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
*Code for designation of steel Cfirst revision).
t T is the thickness of the test piece.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steei products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974
Method for bend test for steel products other than steel strip, wire and tube (fkst revision) and IS : 1757-1974 Method for beam
impact test (V-notch) on steel (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8500-1977 Specification for weldable structural steel (medium and
high strength qualities).
331
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 277-1977 GALVANISED STEEL SHEETS

(PLAIN AND CORRUGATED)
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for the following 4 clas- Note - For details regarding dimensions and weights see 6 of
ses of plain and corrugated galvanized steel sheets the standard.
produced by hot dip process:
4. Tolerances
Class 1 Extra heavy coating of zinc, nominal
75og/n?. Length - + 10 mm or +0.5 percent of length
Class 2 Heavy coating of zinc, nominal 600 g/m2 whichever is higher.
Class 3 Medium coating of zinc, nominal
450 g/m:, and Overall width after corrugation - + 10 mm.
Class 4 Light coating of zinc, nominal Length of diagonals of sheet shall not differ by
375 g/m2. more than 20 mm.
This standard also covers the requirements for Depth of corrugation - + 1.5 mm.
galvanized steel sheets in coil form.
Pitch of corrugation - 22.0 mm.
2. Freedom from Defects - Galvanized plain Mass of an individual sheet - + 10 percent;

sheets shall be reasonably flat and free from twist. on each bundle of sheets - +5 percent.
Galvanized corrugated sheets shall be free from twist
or buckle and shall have uniform corrugations, true in 5. Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand bending
depth and pitch and parallel to the sides of the sheet. through 180” round a mandrel of specified diameter
without peeling or flaking of zinc coating.
3. Dimensions
Length - 1.8, 2.2, 2.5, 2.8 and 3 m. 6. Zinc Coating - The weight of coating, when
Width - 0.75 or 0.90 m. tested according to prescribed methods, shall be within
Thickness - 1.60, 1.25, 1 .OO, 0.80 and the following limits:
0.63 mm.
Corrugation, Depth - 18 mm (nominal); Pitch Class 1 2 3 4
75 mm (nominal).
Specified coating 750 600 450 375
Number of corrugations per 8 10 11 (nominal), g/m2
sheet Minimum coating by 625 500 350 275
Width beforecorrugation, mm 750 900 1 000
diagonal triple spot
test, g/m2
Overall width, after corruga- 660 800 885
tion, between crowns of Minimum coating by single 550 425 300 250
I
outside corrugations, mm spot test g/m2
Note-For test procedures see 8 and 10 of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 277-1977 Specification for galvanised steel sheets (plain and
corrugated) (third revision).
332
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 412-1975 EXPANDED METAL STEEL SHEETS

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for expanded metal (LWM) of the diamond, and width and thickness of the
steel used for general purposes. strands.
2. Size of Mesh - Based on measurements of
shortway of mesh (SWM) and longway of mesh 3. Dimensions
Ref Size of Mesh Largest Standard Size of Sheet

NO. (Nominal) Size of Sheets Normally Stocked
A A
/ \ / \
SWM LWM- LWM SWM
mm mm ?:7mg 1:: mm
1 100 250
2 100 250 3.75 14.63
3 100 250
4 75 200 3.75 7.30
5 75 200 3.75 7.30
2.50 x 3.75
6 75 200 3.75 14.60
7 40 115 2.50 3.75
8 40 115 2.50 4.85
9 40 75 2.50 4.85
10 40 75 2.50
3.75 7.30 (
21.94
11 40 115 2.50
2.50 x 3.75
12 40 75 3.75
13 40 115 2.50
1.25 : 3.75
14 40 75 3.75
15 25 75 2.50 4.85 2.50 x 3.75
16 25 75 2.50 4.85 2.50 x 3.75
17 25 75 2.50 4.85 &
18 25 75 -2.50 4.85 i! 1.25 x 3.75’
19 20 60 2.50 3.75
2.50 x 3.75
20 20 50 3.75 3.75 >
21 20 60 2.50 3.75
22 20 50 3.75 3.75 2.50 x 3.75
23 20 60 2.50 3.75 &
24 20 50 3.75 3.75 1.25 x 3.75
25 20 60 2.50 4.85 1
26 20 50 3.75 3.75 A
27 12.5 50 2.50 3.00
28 12.5 40 3.75 3.00
29 12.5 50 2.50 3 .oo 2.50 x 2.75
30 12.5 50 2.50 3.00 &
31 12.5 40 3.75 3.00 1.25 x 2.75
32 12.5 50 2.50 3.00
33 12.5 40 3.75 3.00
34 10 40 2.50 2.00
35 10 40 2.50 2.00 2.50 x 1.75
36 10 40 2.50 2.Oc &
37 9.5 28.5 2.50 2.oc 1.25 x 1.75
38 9.5 28.5 2.50 2.oc (Continued)
333
SP : 21-1983
Ref Size of Mesh Largest Standard Size of Sheet

No (Nominal) Size of Sheets Normally Stocked
h
/---A? / \
SWM LWM LWM SWM
mm mm mm mm
39 9.5 E 2.50
6 25 2.50 2.50 ic 1.75
40
6 25 2.50 &
41
6 25 2.50 1.25 x 1.75
42
43 5 20 2.50
44 3 15 2.50 2.50 x 1.25
4. Tolerances 5. Mechanical Properties

5.1 Tensile strength of blank steel sheets shall be
On nominal specified *lOmm
between 280 and 380 MN/m*.
dimension
Note - 1 N/mmz= 1 MN/m*=O. 102 kgf/mm*.
On minimum specified +10
dimension -0 mm 5.2 Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand without
crack, being doubled over when cold, till the internal
On mass + 10 percent (steel radius is not greater than 1.5 times its thickness and
weighs 7 650 kg/m3) until the two sides of test piece are parallel.
Size of mesh: 6. Freedom from Defects - Finished expanded

metal sheets shall be free from flaws, joints, welds,
.On SWM +lmmupto20mm&
broken strands, laminations, etc.
+2 mm over 20 mm
On LWM f2mmupto60mm& 7. Preservative Treatment - Shall be given a
+4 mm over 60 mm suitable protective coating to prevent corrosion.
Note 1 -For test procedures, refer to IS : 1663-1972Method for tensile testing of steel sheet and strip of thickness 0.5 mm to 3 mm
(first revision),and IS : 1692-1974 Method for simple bend testing of steel sheet and strip less than 3 mm thick (first revision).
Note 2-For chemical composition see 3.1 and 3.2 of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 412-1975 Specification for expanded metal steel sheets for general
purposes (second revision).
..
334
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1079-1973 HOT ROLLED CARBON STEEL SHEET AND STRIP

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for hot rolled carbon Coils 25 mm in any 5 000 mm

steel sheet and strip intended for cold forming, drawing length
and other engineering purposes. Out of square tolerance 1 percent of width
2. Grades - Eight grades, designated as o-1079;

D-1079; DD-1079; EDD-1079; St 34-1079; St 42- Note 1 - For tolerances on flatness see 10.4 of the stun&d.
1079; St 50-1079 and St 52-1079.
Note 2 - For tolerances on length, width thickness and weight
of steel sheet and strip refer to IS : 1852-1973*.
3. Dimensions - Shall conform to IS : 1730
(Part II)-1974* and IS : 1730 (Part III)-1974t.
5. Weight - Calculated on basis that steel weighs
4. Tolerances 7.85 g/cm3.
Edge camber
Cut length 0.5 percent of length 6. Tensile Properties
Grade Tensile Strength Yield Stress Percentage

(N/mm*) Min (N/mm*) Elongation, Min
200 mm Gauge Length
o- 1079 - - -
D- 1079 260 (for design - -
purposes)
DD- 1079 260 - 390 - 16
EDD- 1079 260 - 380 - 17
St 34 - 1079 330 - 410 205 18
St 42 - 1079 410- 490 235 15
St 50- 1079 490- 590 295 13
St52- 1079 510- 610 355 13
Note - 1 MN/m*=0.102 kgf/mm*.
*Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and 7. Rend Test - Shall withstand the prescribed test.
general engineering purposes: Part II Sheet (first revision).
tDimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and *Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products
general engineering purposes: Part III Strip (first revision). (secondrevision).
-~
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1663-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel sheet and strip of thickness 0.5 mm to 3 mm
(first revision), IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1692-1974 Method of simple bend
testing of steel sheet and strip less than 3 mm thickness (first revision) and 6 and 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1079-1973 Specification for hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip
(third revision).
335
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4@Kl-1973 COLD ROLLED CARBON STEEL STRIP

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for cold rolled carbon 4. Hardness Test - Grade ‘0 ’ strips, when sub-
steel strip having carbon content up to a maximum of jetted to Rockwell hardness test shall conform to
0.2 percent and of thickness up to 5 mm and width requirements given in table given below. Grade ‘D’
below 600 mm intended for general engineering sheets in annealed and skin-padded conditions
purposes. Carbon steel strip covered by this specifica- shall also conform to hardness values given
tion may be case hardened but their suitability is not therein.
guaranteed.
Temper Tensile Strength Rockwell Hardness B Scale

A
1
A4in Max \\
N/tlld N/mm2
Hard 540 - 85 -
Halfhard 420 540 75 85
Quarter-hard 350 420 60 75
Skin passed - - 53 69
Annealed (dead soft) - - 40 60
2. Tempers - Shall be supplied in any of the 5. Edge Condition - Cold-rolled strips shall be
following tempers: supplied with mill, trimmed or slit edges.
No. 1 Hard Produced by heavy cold rolling
No. 2 Half hard Produced by cold rolling, anneal- 6. Freedom from Defects - Shall be free from
ing and further cold rolling to scale, rust, blisters, laminations, pitting and cracked
give strip of intermediate edges.
No. 3 Quarter hard hardness values.
No. 4 Skin passed Produced by light cold rolling 7. Surface Finish - Bright, plating, mirror, matt,
’ after annealing dark annealed and blue.
No. 5 Annealed Produced by a final annealing
(dead soft) Extra process
hard, three- Produced by varying degrees of
quarter hard, cold rolling
medium hard,
eighth hard
3. Bend Test - Angle of bend shall be 90”, 180”

and 180” for strips of temper No. 3, 4 and 5
respectively. Test piece passes test if outer convex
surface is free from cracks. No bend test is required for
temper No. 1 and 2.
Note 1 -For chemical composition and rolling tolerances see 5 and 12 of the standard.
Note 2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1692-1974 Method for simple bend testing of steel sheet and strip less than 3 mm thick
(first revision), IS : 1586-1968Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C scales) for steel Cfirsf revision) and 6 to 8 of thestandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4030-1973 Specification for cold rolled carbon steel strip for general
engineeringpurposes (first revision).
336
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7226-1974 COLD-ROLLED MEDIUM, HIGH CARBON AND LOW

ALLOY STEEL STRIP FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements for cold-rolled medium, 4. Freedom from Defects - Shall be free from
and high carbon and low alloy steel strips of thickness scales, rust, blisters, laminations, pitting and cracked
up to 3 mm and width up to 330 mm intended for edges.
general engineering purposes.
2. Chemical Analysis - Carbon content (percent) 5. Edge Condition - Shall be supplied with mill,
on ladle analysis shall be as follows: trimmed or slit edges.
Medium Carbon High Carbon High Carbon Low Alloy

/ h \r /x /\
II T
c40 c55 c70 C80 C85 C98 120Cr35 1 lOCr35W2
0.35-0.45 0.50-0.60 0.65-0.75 0.75-0.85 0.‘80-0.90 0.90-1.05 1.10-1.30 1.0-1.20
Note - For manganese, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, 6. Surface Finish - Bright finish.
chromium and tungstencontents, refer to 4 of the srundurd.
Note - For rolling tolerances see 9 of the standard.
3. Hardness Test - When subjected to Rockwell

hardness test in accordance with IS : 1586-1%8* or
IS : 5072-1%9t, shall conform to the requirements
given below:
Designation Annealed Hardness, Max Annealed and Re-rolled Hardness, Max

A
\
HRC Equivalent HV
c40 83.4 160 28 290
c55 85.0 165 35 350
c70 87.9 175 35 350
C80 91.6 190 35 350
C85 91.6 190 35 350
C98 94.8 205 35 350
120 Cr 35 97.5 220 35 350
110 Cr 35W2 97.5 220 35 350
*Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C scales) for steel

(first revision).
tMethod for Rockwell superficial hardness test (N and T scales)
for steel.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7226-1974 Speci$cation for cold-roiled medium, high carbon and
low alloy steel strip for general engineering purposes.
337
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1161-1979 STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for hot finished welded b) Thickness (all sizes):
(HFW), hot finished seamless (HFS), and electric Welded tubes + Not limited
resistance welded (ERW) or induction welded plain - 10 percent
carbon steel tubes for structural purposes. Seamless tubes +Not limited
- 12.5 percent
2. Designation - Designated by their nominal bore
and classified as ‘Light’, ‘Medium’ and ‘Heavy’ 5. Workmanship - Tubes shall be free from scale,
depending on wall thickness. They are further graded cracks, surface flows, laminations, etc.
as YSt 210, YSt 240 and YSt 310 depending on the
yield stress.
6. Test - For mechanical tests (tensile test, flatten-
3. Dimensions (in mm) ing test, retest, etc) , refer to 10 of the standard.
Nominal Outside Thickness

Bore Diameter A
/ \
Light Medium Heavy
15 21.3 2.00 2.65 3.25

20 26.9 2.35 2.65 3.25
25 33.7 2.65 3.25 4.05
32 42.4 2.65 3.25 4.05
40 48.3 2.9 3.25 4.05
50 60.3 2.913.25 3.65 4.50
65 76.1 3.25 3.65 4.50
80 88.9 3.25 4.05 4.85
90 101.6 3.65 4.05 4.85
100 114.3 3.65 4.50 5.40
110 127.0 4.5 4.85 5.40
125 139.7 4.5 4.85 5.40
135 152.4 4.5 4.85 5.40
150 165.1 4.5 4.85 5.40
175 193.7 4.85 5.40 5.90
200 219.1 4.85 5.60 5.90
225 244.5 - - 5.90
250 273.0 - - 5.90
300 323.9 - - 6.30 &.
350 355.6 - - 8.00
Note-For detailed information regarding weight, area of cross section, moment of inertia, modulus of section, radius
gyration, etc. see Table 1 of the standard.
4. Tolerances\
a) Outside diameter:
Up to and including 48.3 mm +0.4 mm
-0.8 mm
Over 48.3 mm f 1.0 percent
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1161-1979 Specification for steel tubes for structuralpurposes (third
revision).
338
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1239 (PART I)-1979MILD STEEL TUBES, TUBULARS

AND OTHER WROUGHT STEEL FITTINGS
PART I MILD STEEL TUBES
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for butt welded and Butt welded medium and + Not limited
seamless, screwed and socketed and plain end mild heavy tubes - 10 percent
steel tubes. ,
Seamless tubes +Not limited
- 12.5 percent
2. Designation - Designated by nominal bore and
further classified as ‘Light’, ‘Medium’ and ‘Heavy’,
depending on wall thickness. All 3 types may be used 5. Hydraulic Test - Shall withstand a test pressure
for conveying gas and water, but only ‘Medium’ and of 5 MPa.
‘Heavy’ tubes are recommended foi- conveying steam.
Mild steel socket shall be designated by the nominal
bore of the tube for which it is intended. 6. Test - For details of tensile strength of length,
bend test, flattening test on tubes and expansion test on
3. Dimensions (in mm) sockets refer to 14 of the standard.
Nominal Light Medium Heavy

Bore / \
Outside dia Thick- Outside dia Thick-
A ness ness A ness
’ Max Min ’ Max Min ’ / Max Min ’
6 10.1 9.7 1.8 10.6 9.8 2.0 10.6 9.8 2.65
8 13.6 13.2 1.8 14.0 13.2 2.35 14.0 13.2 2.9
10 17.1 16.7 1.8 17.5 16.7 2.35 17.5 16.7 2.9
15 21.4 21.0 2.0 21.8 21.0 2.65 21.8 21.0 3.25
20 26.9 26.4 2.35 27.3 26.5 2.65 27.3 26.5 3.25
25 33.8 33.2 2.65 34.2 33.3 3.25 34.2 33.3 4.05
32 42.5 41.9 2.65 42.9 42 .O 3.25 42.9 42.0 4.05
40 48.4 47.8 2.9 48.8 -47.9 3.25 48.8 47.9 4.05
50 60.2 59.6 2.9 60.8 59.7 3.65 60.8 59.7 4.5
65 76.0 75.2 3.25 76.6 75.3 3.65 76.6 75.3 4.5
80 88.7 87.9 3.25 89.5 88.0 4.05 89.5 88.0 4.85
100 113.9 113.0 3.65 115.0 113.1 4.5 115.0 113.1 5.4
125 - - - 140.8 138.5 4.85 140.8 138.5 5.4
150 - - - 166.5 163.9 4.85 166.5 163.9 5.4
Note 1 -For details regarding weight of tubes see 7.1 of /he sfandurd.
Note 2-For dimensions of sockets see 7.1 of the standard.
Note 3-Available in random lengths from 4 to 7 m.
-
4. Tolerances on Thickness 7. Workmanship - Tubes shall be cleanly
finished and reasonably free from scale. Shall be
Butt welded light tubes + Not limited reasonably straight, free from cracks, surface flaws,
- 8 percent laminations, etc.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel tubes (first revision), IS : 1328-1963 Method
of flattening test on steel tubes, IS : 2329-1963 Method for bend test on steel tubes, IS : 2335-1963 Method for drift expanding test on
steel tubes and 14 of the standard.
Note 2-For chemical composition see 6 of the sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : I239 (Part I)-1979 Specification for mild steel tubes, tubulars and
other wrought steel fittings: Part I Mild steel tubes (fourth revision).
339
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1239 (PART II)-1982 MILD STEEL TUBES, TUBULARS

AND OTHER WROUGHT STEEL FITTINGS
PART II MILD STEEL TUBULARS AND OTHER WROUGHT STEEL PIPE FITTINGS
Third Revision)
C
1. Scope - Requirements for butt welded and 3.2 Wrought jttings

seamless, plain ended, screwed and socketed mild 3.2.1
Screwed ends of jittings - Dimensions of
steel tubulars (namely, pieces, nipples, long screws,
nominal bore and minimum outside diameter shall be
bends and springs, return bends and sockets) and other
the same as for sockets given in 3.1.5.
welded and seamless wrought steel pipe fittings. The
requirements of back nuts are covered in IS : 3468- 3.2.2 Elbows, tees and crosses equal
1975*.
Nominal bore 6 8 10 15 20 25 32
2. Designation - Tubulars are designated by their 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
nominal bore. Sockets shall be designated by the Minimum length 16 22 24 32 35 43 51
respective nominal bore the tubes for which they are centre to face 52 64 76 89 115 140 160
intended. Wrought steel fittings by type of fitting and \
size designation (that is nominal size in millimetres of 3.2.3 Elbows, reducing
the pipe thread at the outlets). Nominal sizes of outlet - 8 X 6; 10 x 6; 10 x 8;
3. Dimensions and Tolerances (in mm) 15x8; 15x lo; 20x8; 20x lo; 20x 15; 25x lo;
25x15; 25x20, 32x15; 32x20; 32x25;
3.1 Tubulars - Nominal bore of tubulars - 6, 8, 40x15; 40x20; 40x25; 40x32; 50x15;
10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125 and 50x20; 50x 25; 50x 32; 50x40, 65x40;
150 min. 65x50,80x25; 80x50; 100x50 and 100x80
3.1.1 Pieces and long screws 3.2.4 -Tees, reducing (on the branch)
Nominal Bore Approximate Nominal sizes of outlets - 8 X6; 10x6; 10X8;
Standard Length, mm 15x8; 15>;(lo, 20x8; 20x IO; 20x 15; 25x8;
6,8, lo::, 20, 25 100, 150,200,250 25x 10; 25x 15; 25x20; 32x10; 32x 15;
32, 40, 50, 65 150, 200, 250, 300 32x20; 32x25; 40x lo; 40x15: 40x20;
80, 100 200, 250, 300,400 40x25; 40x 3?; 50x 15; 50x20; 50x25;
125, 150 250, 300,400, 500 50x32; 50x40; 65x25; 65x32; 65x40;
65x50; 80x25; 80x32; 80x40; 80x50;
3.1.2 Nipples 80x65; 100x25; 100x40; 100x50; 100x80;
Nominal bore 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Standard length Running Nipple 13 19 21 27 30 33 38 38 48 51 57 70 78 78
(Min) Close Taper Nipple 19 27 28 37 39 46 51 51 60 69 75 87 96 96
Barrel Nipple 32 38 38 51 54 60 70 70 79 89 102 114 124 127
3.1.3 Bends and springs - Bends and springs 125x80; 125x100; 150x80; and 150x 100.
shall be with 90”, 112.5”, 135” and 157.5” angles. 3.2.5 Tees, reducing (on the run and branch, or L..
Tolerance k1.5”.
on run only)
3.1.4 Return bends Nominal sizes of outlets - 20x 15x 15;
Nominal bore 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

Centre-to-centre distance 44 51 64 89 102 114 127 165 190 305 356 457 762 914
3.1.5 Sockets
Nominal bore 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

Outside dia, Min 15 18.5 22 27 32.5 39.5 49 56 68 84 98 124 157 178
Length, Min 19 27 28 37 39 46 51 51 60 69 75 87 96 96
*Specification for pipe nuts @sr revision).
340
SP : 21-1983
20x 15x20; 25X20X 15; 25x20x20; Size

'Nominal Nominal Size
25X20x25; 32x25~20; 32X25x25; (Bigger End) (Smaller End)
32X25x32; 40X25x40; 40X32x25; 15,20, 25,32,40
50
40X32x32; 40x 32x40; 50X25x50; 65 25, 32, 40, 50
50x 32x 50; 50x40~25; 50~40x40; 80 25, 32, 40, 50, 65
50x40x50; 65X50X50; 65~50x65; 100 40, 50, 65, 80
80x50~50; 80x50~80 and 100~80x80. 125 80, 100
150 80,100
3.2.6 Tees (increasing on the branch)
Nominal sizes of outlets - 6 X 8; 8 X 10; 10 x 15;
15x20; 15x25; 20x25; 25x32; 25x40; 3.2.13 Caps
32x 40; 40x 50; 50x 65; 50x 80; 65x 80; and Nominal size 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80
80x 100. 100 125 150
Minimum length 19 24 27 37 38 44 51 54 60 67
3.2.7 Crosses, reducing
73 86 98 98
Nominal sizes of outletS - 8x6; 10x8; 15x 10;
20x 15; 25x 15; 25x20; 32x 15; 32x25; 40x 15; 3.2.14 Elbows, tees and crosses, male equal
40x25; 50x25; 50x40; 65x50; 80x40; 80x50;
100x50; 100x80; 125x100; 150x80 and Nominal size 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125
150x 100. of outlet 150
Minimum length 90 95 100 110 115 125 140 150
3.2.8 Elbows, tees and crosses, side outlet, equal
centre to face 180 200 230
Nominal size of outlet 15 20 25 32 40 50
Minimum length centre 32 35 43 51 52 64 3.2.15 Y-Pieces and angle tees, male, equal; twin
to face for all outlets elbows and sweep tees, male, equal
3.2.9 Elbows, round, male a&female, equal Nominal size 15, 20,25, 32, 40,50,65, 80, 100,
-of outlets 125, and 150
Nominal size of outlet - 8, 10, 15,20, 25, 32,
40, 50, 65, 80 and 100. 3.2.16 Socket unions and pipe unions
Nominal size 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80
3.2.10 Elbows, equal, 135”
of outlet 100 125 150
Minimum Length:
Nominal size 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65
Socket 38 44 51 57 67 76 85 100 110
of outlet 80 100
Minimum length 16 17 19 22 27 33 38 44 51 60 120 135 160 185 210
center to face Pipe 95 100 110 115 120 125 135 140
73 105
150 165 180 205 215 230
3.2.11 Y-Pieces, female, equal

3.2.17 Union bends
Nominal size 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Nominal size 6,8,10,15,20,25,32,40,50,65and
of outlet
of outlets 80.
Minimum length 27 35 38 44 49 57 71 79 100
centre to face
3.2.18 Nipples, hexagon, equal
Nominal size 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80
3.2.12 Socket, reducing
100 125 150
Minimum 25 31 33 43 48 52 59 61 68 80 89
NoPninal Size Nominal Size
(Smaller End) overall length 102 115 115
(Bigger End)
8 6
10 698 Note - For dimensions of plugsand hexagon bushes see
15 6,8, 10 Tables 20 and 21 of the standard.
20 8, 10, 15
25 8, 10, 15, 20 4. Joints - Tubulars and fittings shall be screwed
32 10, 15, 20, 25 with taper or parallel threads or both. Sockets for
40 15, 20,25, 32 tubulars shall have parallel threads.
341
_-
’ \
SP : 21-1983
5. Pressure Tests - Each fitting after being 6. Workmanship - Tubulars and fittings shall be
screwed shall withstand without any signs of leakage: cleanly finished and reasonably free from scale,
surface flaws, laminations, etc.
a) internal hydraulic pressure of 5 MPa, and
b) internal air pressure of 0.7 MPa while im-
mersed in water or light oil.
Note-For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 7 and 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1239 (Part II)-1982 Specification for mild steel tubes, tubulars and
other wrought steel fittings: Part II Mild steel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe fittings (third
revision).
,
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4270-1967 STEEL TUBES USED FOR WATER WELLS

1. Scope - Requirements for steel tubes used for 2. Woes

water wells, such as casing, drive pipe and housing
a) Hot finished seamless (HFS)
having following types of joints:
b) Hydraulic lap welded (HLW)
a) Screwed and socketed butt joints,
c) Electric automatic fusion welded (EFW)
b) Screwed flush butt joints,
d) Electric arc welded (EAW)
c) Plain bevelled end pipes for butt welded joints,
and e) Electric resistance welded (ERW)
d) Slip socket welded joints. f) High frequency induction welded (HFJW)
Nominal Size Outside Dia Thickness

‘Screwed and Casing for Casing for ’
Socketed Pipe Screwed Flush Plain and
Flush Butt Pipes
Joints I.
100 114.3 6.3 9.5 -
150 168.3 8.0 9.5 -
200 219.1 8.0 11.0 -
250 273.0 9.5 11.0 -
300 323.9 9.5 11.0 9.5
350 355.6 - - 9.5
400 406.4 - 12.7 9.5
450 457.2 - - 9.5
500 508.0 - 12.7 9.5
550 558.8 - - 9.5
Note l-In respect of casing for slip socket welded joints, same particulars as for casing for plain end pipes shall apply.
Note 2-For details regarding sockets and weights-of pipes see 6 of the standard.
342
SP : 21-1983
4. Tolerances 6.2 Flattening Test - Shall withstand the pre

a) Outside dia - + 1 percent (3 mm MUX for scribed test.
socket) 6.3 Alignment Test - Not more than 20 mm in 6 m
b) Thickness, seamless tube - + 15 percent length.
- 12.5
c) Welded tube: 6.4 Hydraulic Pressure Test - Shall withstand test
Up to 406.4 mm outside dia -- + 15 pressure of 2800 t/D kgf/cm* for St 42 and 3500 t/D
- 12 5percent kgf/cm* for St 55 subject to a maximum of 70 kgf/cnG
Over 406.4 mm outside dia - + l5 percent (t = thickness in mm and D = outside dia in mm).
-10
7. Coating of Tubes - Shah be coated with
5. Requirements bituminous solution inside and outside.
5.1 Screwed and socket butt joints shall have right-
handed V-form threads. There shall not be more than 8. Protection of Ends
six incomplete external threads. Threads in the socket
shall be continuous. 8.1 All threads shall becoated with apetroleum jelly
or other suitable rust preventing compound.
5.2 Screwed flush butt joints shall have right-handed
square form threads. 8.2 Tubes withV-form andsquareform threads shall
have the exposed male threads protected with steel
5.3 Plain-end pipes shall be supplied with both ends
rings or sleeves. Female threads shall beprotected with
bevelled or both ends square cut or one end bevelled
steel nipples or bushes.
and one end square cut.
8.3 For slip joint-casing, wooden protectors should
6. Mechanical Properties be provided.
6.1 Tensile Test
Type Grade Tensile YieM Elongation,

Strength, Strengh, Percent,
Min Min Min
(kgf/mm2) (kgf/m&)
HFS St 55 55 31.5 95orrs*
HFS, HLW, St 42 42 25 95orrs *
c EFW,EAW,
ERW and
HFIW
*TS=tensile strength in kgf/m&.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1972Method for tensile testing of steel tubes first revision)and IS : 2328-1963 Method
for flattening test on steeltubes.
For detailed information, iefer to IS : 4270-1967 Specification for steel tubes used for water wells.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 45 16 1968 ELLIPTICAL MILD STEEL TUBES
1. Scope- Requirements for welded and seamless 2. Designation - Tubes are designated by a sym-
elliptical mild steel tubes for structurals and heat ex- bol indicating major axis, minor axis and thickness,
changers. preceded by the word ‘Elliptical’.
343
k
SP : 21-1983
Length (ha) Width (ba) Thickness Length (h,) Width (ba) Thickness
28 21 1.6 40 23 2.0
28 21 2.0 44 19 1.6
30 19 1.6 54 25 2.0
30 19 2.0 56 36.5 2.0
33.5 16.5 1.6 60 30 2.0
33.5 16.5 2.0 71.4 21 1.2
35.5 14 1.6 71.4 21 1.4
35.5 14 2.0 71.4 21\ 1.6
38 25 - 1.6 71.4 21 2.0
38 25 2.0 75 15 1.6
40 23 1.6 75 15 2.0
Note l--For details regarding weight, moment of inertia, Use - Shall be tested to one and a half times the
elastic modulus and radius of gyration see Table 1 of the working pressure specified.
standard.
Note 2 - Area of cross section =A = 0.785 398 (b,h, - bihi)
in cm2 7. Mechanical Properties
Weight = W=O.785 A (kg/metre)
Moment of inertia = Ix = 0.049 087 (b,hi - bib:)
in cm’ 7.1 Tensile Test - Minimum ultimate tensile
Elastic modulus of section = Zx = 0.098 175 (b, strength 34 kgf1mn-G; minimum yield stress 21.5
hi - bjhi2) in cm3 kgfhnm2 and elongation shall not be less than 950
Where hi and bi are internal length and width
divided by ultimate tensile strength in kgflmm2 subject
of cross section, and h, and b, are external
length and width of cross section. to minimum of 20 percent.
4. Tdlerances
7.2 Bend Test
a) Thickness - ?I 10 percent
7.2.1 Finished tube shall not crack when bent cold
b) Outside dimensions - f0.5 mm up to 50
with major axis in the plane of bending through 90”
mm size and t- 1 percent above 50 mm size.
round a former having a radius at the bottom of groove
c) Tolerance on weight
equal to four times the outside length of major axis of
For quantities of less than 150 m - +8 per-
tube.
cent.
For quantities of 150 m and above - +4 per- 7.2.2 Tubes shall not crack when bent at red heat
cent. through 90” round a former of radius two times the
outside length of major axis.
5. Lengths - Tubes shall normally be supplied in
random lengths from 4 to 7 m.
8. Oiling and Painting - All tubes shall be
’ 6. Hydraulic Test for Tubes for Heat Exchanger varnished painted or oiled externally.
Note- For test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1962Method for tensile testing of steel tubes (first revision) and IS : 2329-1963 Method
for bend test on steel tubes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 45161968 Specification for elliptical mild steel tubes.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4923-1968 HOLLOW STEEL SECTIONS FOR STRUCTURAL USE

1. Scope - Requirements for hot and cold formed nated by its outside dimensions, and its thickness in
square and rectangular hollow steel sections for struc- millimetres and shall befurtherclassified in CF RHS or
tural use. HF RHS depending on whether it is cold formed or hot
2. Designation - Hollow section shall be desig- formed.
344
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions (in mm) b) Outside dimensions 2 1 percent of

of sides length of side
3.1 Square Hollow Sections c) Squareness of comers 90”+1”
Desig- Thick- Desig- Thick- d) Exact length +3 mm
nation ness nation ness
(1) (2) (1) (2) 7.2 Tensile Properties
25.4x25.4 x 2.65 2.65 50x50x2.90 2.90
x3.25 3.25 x3.65 3.65 Grade Tensile Strength Yield Stress,
x4.05 4.05 x4.50 4.50 Min Min
32x32 x2.65 2.65 63.5 x63.5x 3.25 3.25 W/mmz) &$/mm?
x3.25 3.25 x3.65 3.65
YSt 22 34 21.5
x4.05 4.05 x4.50 4.50
YSt 25 42 25
38x38 x2.90 2.90 75x75x3.25 3.25 YSt 32 55 31.5
x3.25 3.25 x4.05 4.05
x4.05 4.05 x4.85 4.85 Elongation percent shall be not less than 950 divided
by the tensile strength in kgf/mm2.
45x45x2.9 2.9
x3.65 3.65 8. Specific Requirements for Cold Formed
x4.50 4.5 Sections
3.2 Rectangular Hollow Sections
8.1 Tolerances
Desig- Thick- Desig- Thick- a) Thickness * 10 percent
nation ness nation ness b) Outside dimensions of sides:
(1) (2) (1) (2) Largest outside dimension 20.5 mm
40x25 x2.65 2.65 76.2x50.8x3.25 3.25 across flats up to 63.5 mm
x3.25 3,.25 x3.65 3.65 Over 63.5 mm to 90 mm kO.60 mm
x4.05 4.05 x4.50 4.50 Over 90 mm 1-0.75 mm
50.8x25.4x2.90 2.90 90x38x2.65 2.65 c) Squareness of corners 90” *lo
x3.25 3.25 x3.25 3.25 d) Exact length +3 mm
x4.05 4.05 x4.05 4.05
63.5x38 x2.90 2.90 100x50x3.25 3.25 8.2 Mechanical Properties
x3.65 3.65 x4.05 4.05
.x4.50 4.50 x4.85 4.85 8.2.1 Tensile properties of cold formed section
76.2~38 x3.25 3.25
x3.65 3.65 Grade Tensile Strength, Yield Stress,
‘x4.50 4.50 Min Min
Note - For details regarding weight, moment of inertia, &3f~=+ 1 (kgf/mm2>
radius of gyration, elastic modulus andplastic modulusseeTables
1 and 2 of the standard. Yst 25 42 25
YSt 32 55 31.5
4. Weight - Shall be calculated on the basis that
steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 per metre run. 8.2.1.1 If sections supplied in cold formed con-
ditions without any heat treatment are subjected to
5. Straightness - Shall not deviate by more than 1 stress relieving, annealing, brazing welding or similar
in 600. heating, the mechanical properties may be reduced at
the heated parts as follows.
6. Oiling and Painting - Shall be varnished.
Grade Tensile Strength, Yield Stress,
painted or oiled externally. Min
Min
7. Specific Requirements Hot Formed Sections &m.J.mz 1 (kgf/mm2)
7.1 Tolerances Yst 25 31.5 17.5
, YSt 32 39.5 25
a) Thickness
i) Welded tubes + 10 percent 8.2.2 Elongation percent shall not be less than 950
ii) Seamless tubes * 12.5 percent divided by the ultimate tensile strength in kgf/mmr.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1962 Method for tensile testing of steel tubes (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4923-1968 Specification for hollow steel sections for structural use.
345
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
is : 733-1975 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections (for 349
general engineering purposes) (second revision)
IS : 737-1974 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (for general 350
engineering purposes) (second revision)
IS : 1254-1975 Corrugated aluminium sheet (second revision) 351
IS : 7094-1973 Aluminium and aluminium alloy welded tubes for general engineering 352
purposes
348
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 733-1975 WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOY

BARS, RODS AND SECTIONS (FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING
PURPOSES)
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for wrought aluminium Designation Typical Uses
and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for
general engineering purposes. 43000 Filler wire for welding
46000 Filler wire for brazing
2. Dimensions and Tolerancks - As given in
IS’: 39651969*. 52000 Panelling and structures, sheet metal
work and domestic appliances,
Designation and Typical Uses of Alloys marine applications like sheath-
3.
ing/lining of boat bottom, etc
Designation Typical Uses
53000 Shipbuilding; rivets; pressure
19000 Panelling and moulding, refrigera- vessels and other processing
tion tubing, equipment for chemi- tanks; cryogenics, and welded
cal, food and brewing industries; structures
packaging; cooking utensils. 54300 Welded structures, cryogenic appli-
Sheet metal work, architectural cations, structural marine appli-
and builder’s h&ware, spun/
cations, rail and road tank cars,
‘pressed hollow ware, deep drawn rivets and missile components
parts, cladding, welding wire,
electrical appliances 63400 Architectural uses, such as
window/door-frames, wall fac-
19500 Corrosion resistant cladding on
ings, partitions, hand rails, etc,
stronger alloys; impact extruded
and other similar applications
containers; food, chemical brew-
where surface finish is important
ing and processing equipments;
and medium strength would
tanks and pipes; marine fittings;
suffice
reflectors; pressed and anodized
utility items, jewellery, and cable 64430 Structural applications of all kinds,
sheathing such as road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
24345 Heavy duty forgings, structures trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo con-
where high mechanical proper- tainers, milk containers, deep-
ties are of utmost importance, drawn containers, and flooring
aircraft application of clad 65032 Similar to 64430
sheets, extrusions and arma-
74530 Stressed structural applications re-
ments
quiring welding, such as bridges,
24534 Stressed parts in aircrafts and other chequered plates, dump-truck
structures where high strength is bodies, pressure vessels and rail
of primary consideration. coaches, etc
Note-For chemical composition and mechanical properties (0.2 percent proof stress, tensile strength and elongation) see 5 (Tables 1
and 2) of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 733-1975 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy
bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purposes) (second revision).
349
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 737-1974 WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM

ALLOYS, SHEET AND STRIP (FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING
PURPOSES)
( Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for wrought aluminium Designa- Typical Uses Condition*

and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip for general tion
engineering purposes. 40800 Vehicle panelling, fan blades and O,Hl,H2
other applications same as of H3, H4
alloys 15900 (SIC) and 31000
2. Terminology (NS3) except those for bright
anodizing purposes, detonators,
a) Sheer - Cold rolled product, 0.14 to 6.3 mm utensils/holloware containers
thick, supplied flat with sheared or slit edges. and closures
b) Strip - Cold rolled product, supplied in coil 51000-A Appliances and utensils, archi- 0, HI, H2
tectural trims, consumer dura- H3, H4
with slit edges, 0.14 to 5 mm thick. bles with attractive anodized
finishes
3. Dimensions and Tolerances - As given in
IS : 2676-1981*. 51000-B Architectural applications; high 0, Hl, H2
anodizing quality kitchen ware H3, H4
4. Characteristics and Typical Uses of Alloys and cooking utensils, consumer
durables; bathroom fittings,
auto trim, air-conditioner and
Designa- Typical Uses Condition t TV housing; chemical equip-
tion
ment , marine applications and
19000 Panelling and moulding; refrige- 0, Hl, H2 refrigerator trim
ration tubing equipment for H3, H4
chemical, food and brewing 51300 General purpose alloy which can 0, HI, H2
industries; packaging; cooking be used for most of the appli- H3, H4
utensils. Sheet metal work, cations of alloys 31000 (NS3)
architectural and builder’s and 19000 (SIC)
hardware, spun/pressed hollow-
ware, deep drawn parts, clad- 52000 Panelling and structures, sheet 0, Hl, H2
ding, welding wire and electri- metal work and domestic appli- H3, H4
cal appliances ances
24345 Heavy duty forgings, structures w, WP 53000 Shipbuilding; rivets; pressure 0, Hl, H2
where high mechanical proper- vessels and other processing H3, H4
ties are of utmost importance, tanks; cryogenics and welded
aircraft application of clad structures
sheets, extrusions and orna-
54300 Welded structures, cryogenic 0, HI, H2
ments
applications, structural marine
31000 General purpose alloy for mode- 0, Hl, H2 applications, rail and road tank
rate strength applications, H3, H4 cars, rivets and missile compo-
pressure vessels, irrigation tub- nents
ing, heat exchangers, utensils
and pressure cookers, roofing 55000 Shipbuilding and other applica- 0, Ii1
sheets, pilferproof and detona- tions demanding moderately
tor caps, air-conditioning high strength with good corro-
ducting fan blades and vehicle sion resistance; rivets, zippers,
panelling welding wire, etc
31500 General purpose sheet, roofing 64430 Structural applications of all 0, w, WP

and siding, utensils, sheet metal kinds, such as road and rail
work, vehicle panelling, pressure transport vehicles, bridges,
vessels and lamp caps cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc.
Cargo containers, milk con-
tainers, deep drawn containers
*Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and flooring
and strip (prst revision).
‘Wee 6 of the standard. *See 6 of the standard.
350
SP : 21-1983
Designa- Typical Uses Condition* Designa- Typical Uses Condition*

tion tion
65032 Structural applications of all 0, w, WP 74530 Stressed structural applications w, WP

kinds, such as road and rail requiring welding, such as
transport vehicles, bridges, bridges, chequered plates,
cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. dump-truck bodies, pressure
Cargo containers, milk con- vessels, rail coaches,etc.
tainers, deep drawn containers
and flooring
*See 6 of rhe stmdard. ‘See 6 of the standard.
Note- For chemical composition and mechanical properiies (0.2 percent proof stress,tensile strength, elongation and bend tes$) ,
see 5 (Tables 1 and 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 737-1974 Specifkation for wrought aluminium and aluminium
alloys, sheet and strip (for general engineering purposes) (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1254-1975 CORRUGATED ALUMINIUM SHEET

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Specifies the material, profile, dimen- 3.3 Building Sheet

sions and finish for corrugated aluminium sheet and
Pitch : 19Omm
covers requirements for
Depth: 38 mm
a) general purpose sheet, 4. Dimensions
b) industrial sheet, and
4.1 Thickness - As mutually agreed.
c) building sheet.
4.2 Width
2. Material - Shall be made from sheets in alloy General purpose : 650 and 800 mm overall
and temper conforming to Alloy 31000-H4, 31500- Industrial : 795 mm overall
H4, 40800-H4 or 51300-H4 of IS : 737-1974*. Building : 830 mm overall
4.2.1 Tolerance 1 f 1Omm for sheets 0.45 mm
3. Profile
and above in thickness. less than 0.45 mm
For sheets
thick, tolerance shall be as mutually agreed.
3.1 General Purpose Sheer
Pitch : 75 mm 4.3 Len@ - 1 800, 2 400,3 000 and 3 600 mm.
Depth : 19mm 4.3.1 Tolerance - _+6 mm.
3.2 Industrial Sheet 4.4 Squareness -Diagonal distances of a sheet
Pitch : 125rnm shall notdifferbymorethan20mmfor sheetsO. mm
Depth : 38 mm and above in thickness. For sheets less than 0.45 mm
-- thick, it shall be as mutually agreed.
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys,
sheet and strip (for general engineering purposes) (second revision). 5. Finish - As rolled.
Note-For Woes of orofile see 4 of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 1254-1975 Specification for corrugated aluminium sheet (second
revision).
351
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS :7094-1973 ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOY WELDED

TUBES FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements of longitudinally welded 3. Testing

tube of aluminium and aluminium alloys for general
engineering purposes.
3.1 Tensile Test
2. Material
3.2 Dtifting Expanding Test - Shall be capable of
2.1 Chemical Composition - Alloys SIB(19500), undergoing drifting by means of a taper drift having an
SIC(19000), NS3(31000), NS4(52000), NS5(53000), included angle of 45” without showing crack or flaw
and NSS(55000) specified in IS : 737-1974*. until the outside diameter measures at least 25 percent
more than the original diameter.
2.2 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to
IS : 737-1974*, for the relevant alloys.
3.3 Flattening Test - Shall not show any visible
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, crack in the weld region during flattening until the
sheet and strip (for general engineering purposes) (second revision ). interior surfaces of the tube meet under load.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 2657-1964 Method for tensile testing of aluminium and aluminium alloy tube, IS : 4599-1%8
Method for drift expanding test on aluminium and aluminium alloy tubes, and IS : 4177-1967 Method for flattening test of
aluminium and aluminium alloy tubes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7094-1973 Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloy welded
tubes for general engineering purposes.
352
SECTION 18
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
,
I
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
IS : 811-1965 Cold formed light gauge structural steel sections (revised) 355
IS : 1173-1978 Hot rolled and slit steel tee bars (second revision) 358
,
IS : 1852-1979 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products 359
(third revision)
IS : 2314-1963 Steel sheet piling sections 361
IS : 3443-1980 Crane rail sections (first revision) 361
IS : 3908-1966 AIuminium equal leg angles 362
IS : 3909-1966 Aluminium unequal leg angles 363
IS : 3921-1966 Aluminium channels 364
IS : 3954-1966 Hot-rolled steel channel sections for general engineering purposes 364
IS : 3964-1980 Light rails (first revision) 365
IS : 5384-1969 Aluminium I-beams 365
IS : 6445-1971 Aluminium tee-sections 366
DIMENSIONAL STANDARDS
,IS : 808-1964 Rolled steel beam, channel and angle sections (revised) 367
IS : 808 (Part I)-1973 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beams: Part I MB series (second 368
revrsion)
IS : 808 (Part II)-1978 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part II Columns-SC 369
series (second revision)
IS : 808 (Part III)-1979 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beam, channel and angle sec- 369
tions: Part III Channel-MC and MCP series (second revision)
IS : 808 (Part V)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part V Equal leg angles 371
(second revision)
IS : 808 (Part VI)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part VI Unequal leg 372
angles (second revision)
IS : 1730 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and
general engineering purposes:
IS : 1730 (Part-I)-1974 Part I Plate (first revision) 375
IS : 1730 (Part-II)-1974 Part II Sheet (first revision) 376
IS : 1730 (Part-III)-1974Part III Strip (first revision) 376
IS : 1731-1971 Dimensions for steel flats for structural and general engineering 377
purposes (first revision)
IS : 1732-1971 Dimensions for round and square steel bars for structural and 378
general engineering purposes (first revision) L
IS : 2678-1972 Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, 379
drawn tube (first revision)
IS : 3965-1981 Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bar, 380
rod and section (first revision)
354
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 811-1965 COLD FORMED LIGHT GAUGE STRUCTURAL

STEEL SECTIONS
(Revised)
1. Scope - Lays down nominal dimensions, Size Thickness Area Weight

weight and geometrical properties for cold formed per
light gauge structural steel sections for normal appli- Metre
cations, produced from strip and sheet steel less than (1) (2) (3) (4)
4.5 mm thick. For steel with a minimum yield stress of mmX mm mm cm* kg
23.20 kgf mm*, it is recommended that thickness
60 X 60 2.00 2.317 1.819
should not be less than 1.25 mm.
2.50 2.881 2.262
3.15 3.605 2.830
Note - For mass production, cold rolling is more economical,
while smaller quantities are economically produced on press 4.00 4.537 3.562
brakes. The latter process, with its versatility of shape variation, 50 X 50 1.60 1.541 1.210
makes this type of construction adaptable to special requirements. 1.917 1.505
2.00
Members areconnected by welds, screws, bolts, cold rivets, etc.
2.50 2.381 1.869
1.1 This type of light gauge sections is appropriate 3.15 2.975 2.336
and economical: 4.00 3.737 2.934
40 x 40 1.25 O.%O 0.753
a) where moderate loads and spans make
1.60 1.221 0.959
thicker, hot rolled sections uneconomical;
2.00 1.517 1.191
b) where it is desired that load-carrying mem-
2.50 1.881 1.477
bers should also provide useful surfaces;
c) where sub-assemblies of such members may 3.15 2.345 1.841
be pm-fabricated in the plant, making site 30 X 30 1.25 0.710 0.557
erection simpler. 1.60 0.901 0.708
2.00 1.117 0.877
1.2 Tolerances on profile and ordered lengths, and to 2.50 1.381 1.084
assist designers to evolve other sections, illustrative
20 X 20 1.25 0.460 0.361
procedures are given in the standard.
1.60 0.581 0.456
2.00 0.717 0.563
2. Material - Sheet and strip shall conform to
IS : 1079-1973*. 3.2 Channels without Lips:
Size Thickness Area Weight
3. Dimensions and Properties - The nominal
dimensions, weights and certain geometrical proper- per
Metre
ties of cold light gauge structural steel sections shall be
as given below: _ _ (1) (2) (3) (4)
mmXmm mm cm* kg
3.1 Angles: 100 x 100 3.15 9.101 7.144
Size Thickness Area Weight 4.00 11.474 9.007
per 80 X 80 2.50 5.762 4.524
Metre 3.15 7.211 5.660
(1) (2) (3) (4) 4.00 9.074 7.123
mmXmm mm cm2 kg 60 x 60 2.00 3.434 2.696
2.50 4.262 3.346
100 x 100 3.15 6.125 4.808
3.15 5.321 4.177
4.00 7.737 6.074
4:oo 6.674 5.239
80 x 80 2.50 3.881 3.047 1.792
50 x 50 1.60 2.283
3.15 4.865 3.819 2.225
2.00 2.834
4.00 6.137 4.818 2.757
2.50 3.512
3.15 4.376 3.435
*Specification for hot-rolled carbon steel sheet and strip (third 5.474 4.297
4.00
revision ) (Continued)
355
SP : 21.1983
Site Thickness Area Weight 3.3 Channels with Lips:

per
Size Thickness Lip Area Weight
Metre
(1) (2) (3) (4) per
mm cm* Metre
mmX mm kg
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
mmxmmmm mm Cd kg
40 x 40 1.25 1.419 1.114
1.60 1.803 1.415
100 x 100 2.00 25 6.668 5.235
2.00 2.234 1.754
2.762 2.168 2.50 25 8.275 6.4%
2.50
3.15 30 10.642 8.354 *
3.15 3.431 2.693
4.00 30 13.348 10.478
30 x 30 1.25 1.044 0.820
1.323 80 x 80 1.60 20 4.246 3.333
1.60 1.038
2.00 1.634 1.283 2.00 20 5.268 4.136
2.50 2.012 1.580 2.50 25 6.775 5.318
3.15 25 8.436 6.623
20 x 20 1.25 0.669 0.525 2.463 1.934
60X 60 1.25 15
1.60 0.843 0.662 3.126 2.454
1.60 15
2.00 1.034 0.812
2.00 20 4.068 3.194
200x 50 2.00 5.834 2.50 20 5.025 3.944
4.580
2.50 7.262 5.701 50 x 50 1.25 15 2.088 1.639
3.15 9.101 7.144 1.60 15 2.646 2.077
4.00 11.474 9.007 2.00 15 3.268 2.566
180 x 50 5.434 4.266 40 x 40 1.25 15 1.713 1.345
::: 6.762 5.308 1.60 15 2.166 1.700
3.15 8.471 6.650 2.00 15 2.668 2.095
4.00 10.674 8.379 30 X 30 1.25 10 1.213 0.952
1.60 10 1.526 1.198
160 x 50 2.00 5.034 3.952
2.50 6.262 4.916 200 x 80 1.60 20 6.166 4.840
3.15 7.841 6.155 2.00 20 7.668 6.020
2.50 25 9.775 7.673
140 x 40 1.60 3.403 2.671 3.15 25 12.216 9.590
2.00 4.234 3.324 4.00 25 15.348 12.048
2.50 5.262 4.131
3.15 6.581 5.166 180 x 80 1.60 20 5.846 -4.589
2.00 20 7.268 5.706
120 x 40 1.60 3.083 2.420 2.50 25 9.275 7.281
2.00 3.834 3.010 3.15 25 11.586 9.095
2.50 4.762 3.738 4.00 25 14.548 11.420
100 x 40 I .25 2.169 1.703 160 X 80 1.60 20 5.526 4.338 .._
1.60 2.763 2.169 2.00 20 6.686 5.392
2.00 3.434 2.6% 2.50 25 8.775 6.888
2.50 4.262 3.346 3.15 is 10.956 8.6Oi
4.00 25 13.748 10.792
80 x 30 1.25 1.669 1.310
1.60 2.123 1.666 140 x 70 1.60 20 4.886 3.835
2.00 2.634 2.068 2.00 20 6.068 4.764
2.50 3.262 2.561 2.50 20 7.525 5.907
3.15 25 9,696 7.612
60x 30 1.25 1.419 1.114 4.00 25 12.148 9.536
1.60 1.803 1.415
120 x 60 1.25 15 3.213 2.522
2.00 2.234 1.754
1.60 15 4.086 3.207
50 x 30 1.25 1.294 1.016 2.00 20 5.268 4.136
1.60 1.643 1.290 2.50 20 6.525 5.122
2.00 2.034 1.597 3.15 20 8.122 6.375
(Continued)
356
SP : 21-1983
Size Thickness Lip Area Weight Size Thickness Lip Area Weight
per per
Metre Metre
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
mmXmm mm mm cm2 kg mmXmm mm mm cm* kg
100 x 50 1.25 15 2.713 2.130 60 X 90 2.50 35 6.525 5.122

1.60 15 3.446 2.705 3.15 44 8.688 6.820
2.00 15 4.268 3.351 4.00 45 10.948 8.594
2.50 20 5.525 4.337 50x 75 .2.00 28 4.288 3.366
80x 40 1.25 15 2.213 1.737 2.50 35 5.650 4.435
1.60 15 2.806 2.202 3.15 37.5 7.176 5.634
2 .oo 15 3.468 2.723 40x 60 1.60 22 2.710 2.127
60x 30 1.25 10 1.588 1.247 2.00 28 3.588 2.817
1.60 10 2.006 1.574 2.50 30 4.525 3.552
50x30 1.25 10 1.463 1.149
3.5 Rectangular Box Section:
1.60 10 1.846 1.449
Size Thickness Area Weight
3.4 Hat Sections: per
Metre
(1) (2) (3) (4)
IlNIlXIIXIl mm cm* kg
Size Thickness Lip Area Weight 200x loo 1.60 9.366 7.352
per 2.00 11.668 9.160
Metre
180 x 90 1.60 8.406 6.598
(1) c-4 (3) (4) (5)
2.00 10.468 8.218
mmXmm mm mm cm2 kg
160 x 80 1.60 7.446 5.845
100 X 100 2.50 35 8.775 6.888 2.00 9.268 7.276
3.15 44 11.523 9.046 140 x 70 1.60 6.486 5.091
4.00 50 14.948 11.734 2.00 8 I.168 6.334
80 x 80 2.00 28 5.588 4.387 120 x 60 1.60 5.526 4.338
2.50 3.5 7.275 5.711 2.00 6.868 5.392
3.15 40 9.381 7.364 100 x 50 1.25 3.588 2.817
60X60 1.60 22 3.350 2.629 1.60 4.566 3.584
2.00 28 4.388 3.445 80 x 40 1.25 2.838 2.228
2.50 30 5.525 4.337 1.60 3.306 2.830
50x 50 1.60 22 2.870 2.253 60 x 30 1.25 2.088 1.639
2 .oo 25 3.668 2.880 1.60 2.646 2.077
40x 40 1.25 16 1.738 1.364 50x 30 1.25 1.838 1.443
1.60 20 2.326 1.826 1.60 2.326 1.826
100 x 50 1.60 22 4.470 3.509
3.6 Square Box Section:
2.00 25 5.668 4.450
2.50 25 7.025 5.514 Size Thickness Area Weight
80x 40 1.25 16 2.738 2.150 per
1.60 20 3.606 2.830 Metre
2 .oo 20 4.468 3.508 (1) (2) (3) (4)
60x 30 1.25 15 2.088 1.639 mmXmm mm cm* kg
1.60 15 2.646 2.077 200 X 200 1.60 12.566 9.864
50X 25 1.25 12.5 1.713 1.345 / 2 .oo 15.668 12.300
100 x 150 3.15 44 13.098 10.282 180 x 180 1.60 11.286 8.859
4.00 56 17.428 13.681 2.00 14.098 11.044
80 x 120 3.15 44 10.893 8.551 160 x 160 1.60 10.006 77.854
4.00 56 14.628 11.483 2.00 12.468 9.788
(tintimed)
357
SP : 21-1983
Size Thickness Area Weight Thickness Area Blank Width

per (1) (2) (3)
Metre 2:: 15.71
mm2 7.331
mm
(1) (2) (3) (41
2
mmxmm mm kg 2.50 20.62 7.592
140 x 140 1.60 8:;6 6.850 3.15 27.58 7.932
2 .oo 10.868 8.532 4 .oo 37.70 8.377
120 x 120 1.60 7 446 5.845
2.00 9.268 7.276
4. To lerances
100 X 100 1.25 4.838 3.798
1.60 6.166 4.840 Straightness
,
80 X 80 1.25 3.838 3.013 a) Straightness - Offset shall not exceed 1 in
1.60 4.886 3.835 600.
60 X 60 1.25 2.838 2.228
1.60 3.606 2.830 b) Profile - Deviation from profile dimen-
sions shall not exceed zkO.5 mm. Deviation
50 X 50 1.25 2.338 1.836
from 90” angle shall not exceed f 1”.
1.60 2.966 2.328
c) Thickness -See IS : 1852-1979*.
3.7 90” Comer:
Thickness Area Blank Width d) Length - + 75 mm of the ordered length.
-20 .
(1) (2) (3)
mm mm2 mm
1.25 9.08 6.938 *Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (rhird
1.60 12.06 7.120 revision).
Note-For detailed dimensions and properties, namely, moment of inertia, moduli of section, etc, refer to Tables 1 to 11 of
the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 811-1965 Specification for cold formed right gauge structural steel
sections (revised).
- -
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1173-1978 HOT ROLLED AND SLIT STEEL TEE BARS

(Second. Revisiort)
1. Scope - Lays down nominal dimensions, c) lndian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars
weights and basic geometrical properties. (ISLT)
d) Indian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars
2. Classification GSMT) L.
a) Indian Standard Rolled Normal Tee Bars e) Indian Standard Slit Tee Bars from H-sections
(ISNT) (ISHT)
b) Indian Standard Rolled Deep Legged TeeBars
(PDT) 3. Dimensions and Properties
Designation weight Nominal Size Moment&of Inertia

.
Wm) {Depth X Width) ’ Ixx IYY
mm Xmm lOtim lOklnl4
a) Indian Standard Normal Tee Bars
ISNT 20 1.1 20 x 20 0.005 0.002
ISNT 30 1.8 30 x 30 0.018 0.008
fC%ntinued)
358
SP : 21-1983
Designation Weight Nominal Size Moments*of Inertia

.
(kg/m) (Depth ~Width) c Ixu IYY
mmxmm lo6mm4 ( 10Gm4
ISNT 40 3.5 40 x 40 0.061 0.029
ISNT 50 4.4 50 x 50 0.123 0.057
ISNT 60 5.4 60x 60 0.214 0.097
ISNT 75 10.0 75 x 75 0.620 0.292
ISNT 100 14.9 100 x 100 1.64 0.768
ISNT 150 22.7 150 x 150 5.41 2.50
b) Indian Standard Deep Legged Tee Bars ,
ISDT 100 8.1 100 x 50 0.990 0.0%

ISDT 150 15.7 150 x 75 4.50 0.370
c) Indian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars
ISLT 200 28.4 200 x 165 12.7 3.58

ISLT 250 37.5 250 x 180 27.7 5.32
d) Indian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars

ISMT 50 5.8 50 x 70 0.108 0.177
ISMT62.5 6.7 62.5 x 70’ 0.218 0.192
ISMT 75 7.5 75 x 75 0.412 0.234
ISMT 87.5 9.8 87.5 x 85 0.756 0.384
ISMTIOO 12.7 100 x 100 1.16 0.750
e) Indian Standard Slit Tee Bars from H-Section
IN-IT 75 15.3 75 x 150 0.962 2.30

ISHT 100 20.0 100 x 200 1.94 4.97
ISHT 125 27.4 125 x 250 4.15 10.0
ISHT 150 29.4 150 x 250 5.74 11.0
.-
Note-For detailed dimensions and properties, namely, sectional area, section moduli, etc, see Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : I I73- I978 Specification for hot rolled and slit steel tee bars (second
revision).
SUMMARY OF
L
IS : 1852-1979 ROLLING AND CUTTING TOLERANCES
FOR HOT-ROLLED STEEL PRODUCTS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Lays down rolling and cutting toler- IS : 961-1975*, IS : 1079-19737, IS : 1977-1975$,
antes for hot-rolled structural steel beams, channels,
equal and unequal leg angles, tee bars, bulb angles,
round and square bars (other than bars meant for
*Specification for structural steel (high tensile) (seco& revision).
fasteners), flats, plates, strips and sheets rolled from
structural steels conforming to IS : 226-1975*, ‘fSpeciIicationfor hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip (third
revision).
*Specification for structural steel (standard quality) (fifth SSpfxification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second
revision ) revision).
359
SP : 21-1983
IS : 2062-1966*, IS: 3747-19661- and IS:8500- 3.4 Tee Bars

1977$ and relevant dimensional standards. Depth -Up : + 2.0
to 100mm to 3.0 mm
-1.5 2.0
1.1 It does not cover dimensional tolerances for car- Width ofjlange - Up to 100 mm AZ2 mm
bon and alloy constructional steel products which are. Over 100 mm f 2 percent
covered by IS : 3739-1972s. Weight - On one metre length: +2.5 percent (or
1.2 If for any specific end uses, such as shipbuilding, f4 percent for steel conforming to Fe 310-O of
machine components, pressure vessels, etc, special IS : 1977-1975*).
tolerances finer than those specified in this standard, OK
3.5 Bulb Angtes
unilateral tolerances are required, these shall be as
Deprh (length of longer leg) - Up to 400 mm:
agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.
2. Calculation of Nominal Wdght - Shall be

+2.5
-1.5 to +;:;mm
calculated on the basis that steel weighs 7.85 g/cm3. Width of flange (length of shorter leg) - Up to
100:+_2mm
3. Rolling Tolerances for Structural Steel Weight - On one metre length : k2.5 percent
Sections (+4 percent for steel conforming to Fe 3 10-O of
IS : 1977-1975*).
3.1 Beams and Columns
4. Rolling Tolerances for Round and Square Bar
Depth -Up to 600 mm: Az2.0 to f4.0 mm.
Width of&nge - Up to 250 mm: +2.0 to f4.0 4.1 Bars in Straight Length
mm. Size - Up to 100 mm :+ 0.5 to + 1.3 mm.
Weight - On one metre length: +2.5 percent (or Weight - Up to 16 mm : f7 to +3 percent.
+4 percent for steel conforming to Fe 310-O-of
4.2 Coiled Rounds and Squares
IS : 1977-1975//).
.Size - Up to 12 mm : +0.5 mm.
3.2 Channels Weight - No weight tolerance is applicable.
Depth -Up to 400 mm: k2.5 to k3.0 mm.
Width of flange -Up to 100 mm: f2 mm. 5. Rolling Tolerance for Flats
Weight - +2.5 percent (or f4 percent for steel
Width - Up to 100 mm : f 1 .O to 22.0 mm.
conforming to Fe 310-O of IS : 1977-1975//).
Thickness - Up to 12 mm : kO.5 mm.
3.3 Equal and Unequal Leg Angles Over 12 mm : f4 percent subject to a maximum
of 1.5 mm.
Length -Up to 100: f 1.5 to +2 mm. Weight - On one metre length, 3 mm thickness:
Weight - On one metre length: +5 percent in 4 5 percent.
case of angle 3 mm in thickness and +5 percent Over 3 mm thickness : +5 ~rcent
-3 -5 -
in the case of angles over 3 mm in thickness.
6. Cutting Tolerance - For all lengths of hot-
rolled steel products except strip, plate and sheet shall
*Specification for structural steel (fusion quality)@r revision). be+lOOmm
tspecification for steel for flanging and pressing. -0 -
$Specification for weldable stmctural steel (medium and high 7. For tolerance of rolling and cutting for plate, strip
strength qualities).
gDimensiona1tolerances for carbon and alloy constructional steel and sheet refer to the standard.
products.
//Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second *Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second
reviskwz) . revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1852-1979 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel
products (third revision).
360
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2314-1963 STEEL SHEET PILING SECTIONS
1. Scow - Lays down nominal dimensions and 5. Tolerances

shape of-hot-rolled steel sheet piling sections. Sectional ’
properties of these sections as calculated on nominal a) Weight : + 4 percent.
dimensions are also included. Some important re- - 2.5
quirements for sheet piles are (a) resistance to bending
b) Length : Sections shall be supplied in lengths
forces, (b) ease with which they can be driven and can between 9 and 13.4 m, subject to a tolerance of
be reclaimed for re-use, and (c) efficiency and water +75 and -50 mm.
tightness.
2. Designation - Designated with the letters ISPS

followed by section modulus per metre of wall in
cm3 and letters Z, U or F denoting Z-type, U-type or
flat type sections.
3. Material - Made from steel conforming to

IS : 226-1975*, IS : 961-19751 or IS : 2062-1969$.
4. Dimensions
Designation Weight Weighthn2 Section Manent of Sectional Perimeter Centre to

per Metre of Wall Moa!ulus Inertia Area per per Metre Centre
per Metre per Metre Metre Wall Distance
of Wall of Wall of Joints
(k/m) (kg) (cm3) (cm41 (cm21 (cm) (cm>
ISPS 1021 z 49.25 123.12 1 021 9 448.5 157 283 400.0
ISPS 1625 U 65.37 162.4 1 625 24 563 207 308 402.5
ISPS 2222 u 82.7 195.7 2 222 38 219 249 331 420.5
ISPS 100F 55.2 138 100 428 176 104 400.0
*Specification forstructural steel (standardquality) fifi/~ revision).

?Specification for structural steel (high tensile) (second revision).
SSpecification for strucNra~ steel (fusion welding quality) (first
revision )
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2314-1963 Specification for steel sheet piling sections.
. ..
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3443-1980 CRANE RAIL SECTIONS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Lays down dimensions, shape and where So is the area of cross-section of specimen.
other requirements of crane rail sections.
4. Hardness - Not less than 200 HB.
2. Designation - By letters ISCR followed by
5. Freedom from Defects - Shall be free from
head width of the rail section in millimetms.
twist. Camber shall not exceed 0.2 percent of length.
3. Tensile Properties - Steel shall have a The asymmetry of rail cross section with respect to
minimum tensile strength of 7 10 MPa with a minimum vertical axis shall not exceed 2 mm and 0.6 mm in rail
elongation of 14 percent on a gauge length of 5.65fi flange and head mspectively.
361
SP : 21-1983
6. Dimensions and Properties: 6.1 Tolerances:

Head width +2 mm for other than ISCR 120
Desig- Cross- Weight Head Bottom I I and 140
nation Set- (kg/m) Width Width1 XX
tional (mm) Height (cm4) (~5) yt.rnrn for ISCR 120 and 140
Area (mm)
(cm21 Height + 1 mm for ISCR 50, 60 and 80
ISCR 50 38.0 29.8 50 90 357.5 111.4 +1.5 mm for ISCR 100
ISCR 60 51.0 40.0 60 105 654.6 195.9 + 2 mm for ISCR 120 and 140.
ISCR 80 81.8 64.2 80 130 1524 468.6
ISCR 100 113.0 89.0 100 150 2806 920.0 Length + 100,,
ISCR 120 151.0 118.0 120 170 4794 1672.0 of rail - 0 ’
ISCR 140 187.0 147.0 140 170 5528 2609.0 Weight + 3 percent and - 2 percent
-
Note l-For detailed dimensions, tolerances and sectional properties, see Tables 2 to 4 of the standard.
Note 2-Dimensions of some of the rail sections commonly used in country (non-metric sections) alongwith relevant tolerances and
sectional properties are covered in Appendix A of rhe sfandard.
Note 3-For methods of tests refer to IS : 1500-1968 Method of Brine11 hardness test for steel (firsf revision), and IS : 1608-1972
Methods for tensile testing of steel products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS7 3443-1980

Specification for crane rail sections (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3908-1966 ALUMINIUM EQUAL LEG ANGLES

1. Scope- Lays down dimensions of aluminium 3. Material - Shall be extruded from following
equal leg angles for structural Use. aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-1975*: HE 9,
HE 10, HE 14, HE 15, HE 20, HE 30, NE 4, NE 5,
NE6andNE8.
2. Designation - Indian Standard Aluminium
Equal Leg Angles (ISALE) 4. Dimensions and Sectional Properties
Designation and Size Designation and Size Designation and Size

@IXB x tmm) @IXB x tmm) 64xBxtmm~
ISALE 10 x 10 x 1.5 ISALE 35 x 35 x 4.0 ISALE 80 x 80 x 10.0
I SALE 10 x 10 x 2.0 ISALE 35 x 35 x 5.0 ISALE 100 x 100 x 6.0
ISALE 20 X 20 X 2.0 ISALE 50 x 50 x 3.0 ISALE 120 x 120 x 10.0
ISALE 20 x 20 X 3.0 ISALE 50 x 50 x 4.0 ISALE 120 x 120 x 12.0
ISALE 25 x 25 X 2.0 ISALE 50 x 50 x 5.0 ISALE 120x 120 x 16.0
ISALE 25 x 25 X 3.0 ISALE 50 x 50 x 6.0 ISALE 150 x 150 x 10.0 L..
ISALE 25 x 25 X 4.0 ISALE 60 X 60x4.0 ISALE 150 x 150 x 12.0
ISALE 30 X 30X 3.0 ISALE 60 x 60 x 5.0 ISALE 150 x 150 x 16.0
ISALE 30 X 30 X 4.0 ISALE 60x 60x6.0 ISALE 200 x 200 x 12.0
ISALE 30 X 30 X 5.0 ISALE 80 x 80 x 6.0 ISALE 200 x 200 x 16.0
ISALE 35 X 35 X 3.0 ISALE 80x 80 x 8.0 ISALE 200 x 200 x 20.0
-_
bars, rods and sections (for general engineering pqoses) (second
revision )
Note 1-A B denote lengths of legs and t the thickness of the angle.
Note 2-For detailed dimensions and properties, namely, moment of inertia, radius of gyration, etc, see 5 and Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, Specification for aluminium equal leg angles.

refer to IS : 3908-1966
362
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3909-1966 ALUMINIUM UNEQUAL LEG ANGLES
1. Scope - Lays down dimensions of aluminium 3. Material - Shall be extruded from following
unequal leg angles for structural use. aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-1975*: HE 9,
HE 14,HE 15,HE20,HE30,NE4,NE5indNE8.
2. Designation - Indian Standard Aluminium Un-
equal Leg Angles (ISALU). 4. Dimensions (mm) and Properties
Designation and Size Designation and Size Designation and Size 1
(Longer Leg X (Longer Leg X (Longer Leg X

Shorter Leg xlhickness) ShorterLeg XlMAness) Shorter Leg xlhickness)
ISALU 20 x 10 x 1.5 ISALU 50 x 30 x 3.0 ISALU 100x80~ 8.0

ISALU 20 x 10 x 2.0 ISALU 50 x 30 x 4.0 ISALU 100 x 80 x 10.0
JSALU 30 x 20 x 4.0 ISALU 80 x 40 x 4.0 ISALU 150 x 80 x 10.0
ISALU $I x 20 x 2.0 ISALU 80 x 40 x 6.0 ISALU 150 x 80 x 12.0
ISALU 50 x 25 x 4.0 ISALU 100 x 50 x10.0
ISALU 50 x 25 x 5.0 ISALU 100 x 80 x 6.0
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys.

bars, rods and secdons (for general engineering purposes) (second
revis~n).
Note-For detailed dimensions and properties, such as, sectional area, moment of inertia, radius of gyration and modulus of section,
see 5 and Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3909-1966 Specification for aluminium unequal leg angles.
363
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3921-1966 ALUMINIUM CHANNELS
1. Scope - Lays down dimensions of structural 3. Material - Shall be extruded from following
aluminium channels. aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-1975*: HE 9,
HE 14, HE 15, HE 20, HE 30, NE 4, NE 5 and NE 8.
2. Designation - Indian Standards Aluminium
Channels (ISALC). 4. Dimensions and Sectional Properties
Designation Ue‘signation Designation

ISALC 40X20X2 ISALC 80 x 40 x 5 ISALC 120 x 60 x 8
ISALC 40 x 20 x 3 ISALC 80 x 40 x 6 ISALC 150 x 60 x 6
ISALC 50 x 30 x 4 ISALC 100x40~6 ISALC 150 x 80 x 6
ISALC 60 x 30 x 3 ISALC 100X50X5 ISALC 150 x 80 x 8
ISALC 60X30X5 ISALC 100 x 50 x 8 ISALC 200 x 80 x 8

bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purposes) (second
revision).
Note-For detailed dimensions and properties,such as sectional area, moment of inertia, radius of gyration and modulus of section
see 5 and Table 1 of Ihe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3921-1966 Specification for aluminium channels.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3954- 1966 HOT-ROLLED STEEL CHANNEL SECTIONS

1. Scope - Lays down nominal dimensions, 3. IXmensions and Properties

weights and sectional properties of hot-rolled steel
channel sections for general engineering purposes. Designa- Sectional Depth Flange Thi
This standard is mainly intended to cover channel tion Area Width *Weight
Web Fla
2
sections for general use made from steel conforming to mm mm mm mm kg/m
IS : 226-1975* or IS : 1977-19751_. ISCG 16 0% 16 10 3.2 3.2 0.76
ISCG 20 1.099 20 10 3.2 3.2 0.86
ISCG 40 6.144 40 32 5.0 7.5 4.82
2. Designation - By, letters ISCG followed by Note- For detailed dimensions
and properties, such as
depth of channel in millimetres. sectional area, moment of inertia,radii
of gyration and section
moduli see 5 and Table 1 of the standard.
4. Rolling and Cutting Tolerances - as specified

in IS : 1852-1979*.
*Speciticationforstructural steel (standardquality) @VI revision).
tSpecitication for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second *Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled
revision) steel products (thirdrevision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3954-1966 Specification for hot-rolled steel channel sections for
general engineering purposes. .
364
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3964-1980 LIGHT RAILS

(First Revision)
1. Scope- Requirements of light rail sections. 5. Tolerances
2. Designation - By letters ISLR followed by a Head width +2 mm

figure denoting weight is kg per metre of the rail ’ Web thickness + 1.0
section. -0.5 mm
Height +1 mm
3. Tensile Properties - Steel shall have a Bottoih flange width f2 mm
minimum tensile strength of 7 10 MPa with a minimum Length of rail +50 mm
alongation of 14 percent on a gauge length of 5.656 Weight per metre +3 percent.
where So is area of cross section of specimen.
6. Freedom from Defects - Rails should be
4. Dimensions reasonably free from twist, camber, etc.
Desig- Sectional Weight Height Head Head Web Bottom

nation Area Width Thickness Thickness Flange
Width
cm2 kg/m mm mm mm mm mm
ISLR 10 12.74 10 63.5 34.93 19.45 5.95 63.5
ISLR 12 15.24 12 69.85 35.72 22.23 6.75 60.0
ISLR 15 18.98 14.9 79.38 41.28 25.4 7.54 76.2
ISLR 25 31.68 24.9 104.78 52.39 32.94 9.92 100.01
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions and sectional properties of rail sections, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of rhe standard.
Note Z-For method of test, refer to IS : 1608- 1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3964-1980 Specification for light rails (first revision).
-
..
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5384-1969 ALUMINIUM I-BEAMS
1. Scope - Lays down dimensions of structural 4. Material - Sections shall be extruded from the
aluminium I-beam sections. following ahuninium alloys specified in IS : 733
1975* HE 9, HE 14, HE 15, HE 20, HE 30, NE 4,
2. Designation - Designated ISALB followed by NE5andNE8.
depth of section and width of flange in mm and weight
in kg/m. *Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys,
bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purposes) (second
3. Weight - Calculated on basis of 2.7 g/cm3. revision).
365
SP : 21-1983
5. Dimensions and Properties
Designation Designation Designation
ISALB 40 x 20-0.4 ISALB 80 x 40-3.2 ISALB 150 x 80-6.6

ISALB 50 x 30-0.9 ISALB 100 x 50-3;9 ISALB 150 x 100-7.7
ISALB 60 x 40-2.4 ISALB 120 X 70-5.6 ISALB 200 x 120-16.1
ISALB 80 x 40-2.1 ISALB 120 x 80-6.1
ISALB 80 x 40-2.7 ISALB 120 x 80-7.4
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5384-1969 Specification .for aluminium I-beams.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 64451971 ALUMINIUM TEE-SECTIONS
1. Scope -Dimensions and nominal weight of 4. Dimensional Tolerances - As specified in

structural aluminium tee-sections. IS : 3%5-1969*.
2. Designation - Designated as ISALT, followed 5. Material - Sections shall be extruded from fol-
by depth of section and width of flange in mm, and lowing aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-19753.
weight in kg per metre of section. HE9,HE 14,HE 15,HE200,HE30,NE4,NE5 and
NE 8.
Example :
Alumininm tee-section of depth 25 mm, width *Dimensionsfor wroughtaluminium and aluminiumalloys, bars,
25 mm and weight 0.4 kg/m shall be designated rods and sections (firs?revision).
as ISALT 25X25 - 0.4. tSpecification for wrought aluminium and aluminiuq alloys,
bars, rods and sections (for generalengineering purposes) (second
3. Dimensions and Sectional Properties revision).
ISALT 25 x 25-0.4 ISALT 75 x 100-2.8 ISALT 125 x 100-7.0

ISALT 30 x 30-0.7 ISALT 100 x 75-2.0 ISALT 150 x 75-7.0 L
ISALT 50 x 50-1.2 ISALT 100 x 754.5 ISALT 150 x 100-10.2
I SALT 50 x 50-1.6 ISALT 100 x 75-5.4 ISALT 150 x 150-9.5
ISALT 65 x 65-1.6 ISALT 100 x 100-4.2 I SALT 150 x 150-12.4
I SALT 75 x 75-2.4 ISALT 125 x 75-6.2 ISALT 200 x 200-16.8
ISALT _ 75 x 75-3.1 ISALT 125 x 100-5.9
-._
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6445-1971 Specification for aluminium tee-sections.
366
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808-1964 ROLLED STEEL BEAM, CHANNEL

AND ANGLE SECTIONS
(Revised)
1. Scope - Lays down nominal dimensions, Designation Weight per Sectional

weight and basic geometrical properties of rolled steel Metre Area
beams, channel and angle sections. (1) (2) (3)
kg cm2
2. Classification: ISLB 325 43.1 54.90
ISLB 350 49.5 63.01
a) Beams:
i) Indian Standard Junior Beams (ISJB), ISLB 400 56.9 72.43
ii) Indian Standard Light Beams (ISLB), ISLB 450 65.3 83.14
iii) Indian Standard Wide Plange Beams ISLB 500 75 .o 95.50
(ISWB), and ISLB 550 86.3 109.97
iv) Indian Standard Column Sections - ISLB 600 99.5 126.69
H-Beams (ISHB).
ISWB 150 17.0 21.67
b) Channels:
ISWB 175 22.1 28.11
i) Indian Standard Junior Channels
ISWB 200 28.8 36.71
(ISJC), and
ii) Indian ,Standard Light Channels (ISLC). ISWB 225 33.9 43.24
ISWB 250 40.9 52.05
3. Designation - Beams and channels shall be ISWB 300 48.1 61.33
designated by abbreviation of the same as given in 2
ISWB 350 56.9 72.50
followed by depth of section in millimetres.
ISWB 400 66.7 85.01
4. Dimensions ISWB 450 79.4 101.15
4.1 Beams ISWB 500 95.2 121.22
ISWB 550 112.5 143.34
Designation Weight per Sectional ISWB 600 133.7 170.38
Metre Area ISWB 600 145.1 184.86
(1) (2) (3) ISHB 150 27.1 34.48
kg cm2
ISHB 150* 30.6 38.98
ISJB 150 7.1 9.01 ISHB 150* 34.6 44.08
ISJB 175 8.1 10.2% ISHB 200 37.3 47.54
ISJB 200 9.9 12.64 ISHB 200* 40.0 50.94
ISHB 225 43.1 54.94
ISJB 225 12.8 16.28
7.71 ISHB 225* 46.8 59.66
ISLB 75 6.1
ISHB 250 51.0 64.96
ISLB 100 8.0 10.21 ISHB 250* 54.7 69.71
ISLB (P) 100 8.6 10.97 ISHB 300 58.8 74.85
ISLB 125 11.9 15.12 ISHB 300* 63 .o 80.25
ISLB 150 14.2 18.08 ISHB 350 67.4 85.91
ISLB 175 16.7 21.30 ISHB 350* 72.4 92.21
ISLB (P) 175 16.7 21.32 ISHB 400 77.4 98.66
ISLB .200 19.8 25.27 ISHB 4c0* 82.2 104.66
ISLB (P) 200 21.1 26.85 ISHB 450 87.2 111.14
ISLB 225 23.5 29.92 ISHB 450* 92.5 117.89
ISLB 250 27.9 35.53
ISLB 275 33 .o 42.02 *The heavier sections in each size are to be obtained from the same
set of rolls as the lighter sections by spreading of the rolls and the
ISLB 300 37.7 48.08 width of flanges of these sections will increase by an amount equal to
ISLB (P) 300 41.5 52.89 the difference between the thicknesses of the webs.
367
SP : 21-1983
4.2 Channels:
Designation Weight per Sectional Designation Weight Sectional

Metre Area per Metre Area
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
kg cm2 k cm2
ISJC 100 5.8 7.41 ISLC (P) 150 15.6 19.88
ISJC 125 7.9 10.08 ISLC 175 17.6 22.42
ISJC 150 9.9 12.67 ISLC 200 20.6 26.26
ISJC 175 11.2 14.24 ISLC (P) 200 21.5 27.41
ISJC 200 14.0 17.77 ISLC 225 24.0 30.60 ‘
ISLC 75 5.7 7.26 ISLC 250 28.0 45.72
ISLC 100 7.9 10.02 ISLC 300 33.1 42.19
ISLC 125 10.7 13.67 ISLC (P) 300 33.1 42.20
ISLC (P) 125 11.3 14.35 ISLC 350 38.9 49.54
ISLC 150 14.4 18.39 ISLC 400 45.8 58.34
Note -For detailed dimensions and geometrical properties, namely, moment of inertia, section moduli, etc, refer to Tables I and 2
of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808-1964 Specification for rolled steel beam, channel and angle
sections (revised).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808 (PART I)-1973 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED

STEEL BEAMS
PART I MB SERIES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, weight Designation Weight Sectional Flange
and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel Area Width
medium weight beams. (1) (2) (3) (4)
kg/m, cm2 mm
2. Designation - As an example, a medium weight
MB 175 19.5 24.9 85
beam of depth 250 mm shall be designated as MB 250.
MB 200 25.4 32.3 100
3. Dimensions MB 225 31.2 39.7 110
MB 250 37.3 47.6 125
Designation Weight Sectional Flange MB 300 46.1 58.7 140
Area Width MB 350 52.4 66.7 140
(1) (2) (3) (4) MB 400 61.6 78.5 141)
kg/m cm2 mm MB 450 72.4 92.3 150
MB 100 11.5 14.7 70 MB 500 86.9 111 180
MB 125 13.4 17.0 70 MB 550 104 132 190
MB 150 15 .o 19.1 75 MB 600 123 156 219
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions and sectional properties, namely, moment of inertia, section moduli, radius of gyration, etc, refer
to Table I of the standard.
Note 2-For dimensional and weight tolerances, refer to IS : 1852-1979 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part I)-1973 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beams:Part I
MB series (Second revision).
368
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808 (PART II)-1978 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED

STEEL SECTIONS
PART II COLUMNS - SC SERIES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, mass and Designation Mass Sectional
geometric properties of hot-rolled steel column Area
,
section - SC series. kg/m l@ mm*
SC 140 33.3 4.24
2. Designation - A column of depth 200 shall be SC 160 41.9 5.34
designated by the alphabet ‘SC’ followed by the depth, SC 180 50.5 6.44
for example, SC 200. SC 200 60.3 7.68
SC 220 70.4 8.98
3. Dimensions and Sectional Properties SC 250 85.6 10.9
Designation Mass Sectional
Area
kg/m l(Y mm*
SC 100 20.0 2.55
SC 120 26.2 3.34
Note l-The width’ of flange of column shall be same as depth of column.

Note 2-For detailed dimensions and properties, namely, moment of inertia, section moduli, etc. refer to Table 1 of rhe sfondurd.
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part I&1978 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part II
Columns - SC series (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808 (PART III)-1979 DIMENSIONS IiOR HOT-ROLLED STEEL

BEAM, CHANNEL AND ANGLE SECTIONS
PART III CHANNEL - MC AND MCP SERIES
( Second Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, weight 2. Designation - Medium weight channel
and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel shall be designated MC for sloping.flanges and MCP
medium weight channel sections with sloping and for parallel flanges, followed by depth of
parallel flanges. channel.
369
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions
Designation Mass Sectional Width of Designation Mass Sectional Width of

Area Flange Area Flange
(1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4)
kg/m cm* mm kg/m cm* mm
MC 75 7.14 9.10 40 MCP 75 7.14 9.10 40
MC 100 9.56 12.2 50 MCP 100 9.56 12.2 50
MC 125 13.1 16.7 65 MCP 125 13.1 16.7 65
MC 125* 13.7 17.5 66 MCP 125* 13.7 17.5 66
MC 150 16.8 21.3 75 MCP 150 16.8 21.3 75
MC 150* 17.7 22.6 76 MCP 150* 17.7 22.6 76
MC 175 19.6 24.9 75 MCP 175 19.6 24.9 75
MC 175* 21.7 27.6 77 MCP 175* 21.7 27.6 77
MC 200 22.3 28.5 75 MCP 200 22.3 28.5 75
MC 200* 24.3 31.0 76 MCP 200* 24.3 31.0 76
MC 225 26.1 33.3 80 MCP 225 26.1 33.3 80
MC 225* 30.7 39.0 83 MCP 225* 30.7 39.0 83
MC 250 30.6 39.0 80 MCP 250 30.6 39.0 80
MC 250* 34.2 43.5 82 MCP 250* 34.2 43.5 82
MC 250* 38.1 48.5 84 MCP 250* 38.1 48.5 84
MC 300 36.3 46.3 90 MCP 300 36.3 46.3 90
MC 300* 41.5 52.8 92 MCP 300* 41.5 52.8 92
MC 300* 46.2 58.8 94 MCP 300* 46.2 58.8 94
MC 350 42.7 54.4 100 MCP 350 42.7 54.4 100
MC 400 50.1 63.8 100 MCP 400 50.1 63.8 100
*The heavier sections in each size intended for use in wagon building industry are to be obtained from same set of rolls as the
corresponding lightest section in that size group, by raising the rolls.
Note I-For detailed dimensions and sectional properties, namely, moment of inertia, section moduli, etc. refer to Tables I and 2 of
the standard.
Note Z-For dimensional and weight tolerances, refer to IS : 1852-1979 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products
(third revisionJ.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part III)-1979 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beam, channel
and angle sections: Part III Channel -MC and MCP series (second revision).
L..
370
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808 (PART V)-1976 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED

STEEL SECTIoNS
PART V EQUAL LEG GLES
?
( Second Revision)
1. scope- Covers nominal dimensions, weight Designation Sectional Weight

and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel equal Area per Metre
leg angles. (1) (2) (3)
2
kg
2. Designation - Equal leg angles shall be desig- ISA 6060 x 5 5c.Y5 4.5
nated by the alphabet ‘ISA’ followed by size and x6 6.84 5.4
thickness in millimetres. For example, angles of size x8 8.96 7.0
50 x 50 mm and thickness 6 mm shall be designated as x 10 11.00 8.6
‘ISA 5050x 6’.
ISA 6565 x 5 6.25 4.9
3. Dimensions: x6 7.44 5.8
x8 9.76 7.7
Designation Sectional Weight x 10 12.00 9.4
Area per Metre
ISA 7070 x 5 6.77 5.3
(1) (2) (3) x6 8.06 6.3
cm* kg x8 10.58 8.3
1.12 x 10 13.02 10.2
ISA 2020 x 3 0.9’
x4 1.45 1.1 ISA 7575 x 5 7.27 5.7
x6 8.66 6.8
ISA 2525 x 3 1.41 1.1
x8 11.38 8.9
x4 1.84 1.4
x 10 14.02 11.0
x5 2.25 1.8
ISA 8080 x 6 9.29 7.3
ISA 3030 x 3 1.73 1.4 x8 12.21 9.6
x4 2.26 1.8 x 10 15.05 11.8
x5 2.77 2.2 x 12 17.81 14.0
ISA 3535 x 3 2.03 1.6
ISA 9090 x 6 10.47 8.2
x4 2.66 2.1 10.8
x8 13.79
x5 3.27 2.6 x 10 13.4
17.03
x6 3.86 3.0
x 12 20.19 15.8
ISA 4040 x 3 2.34 1.8 ISA 100100 x 6 11.67 9.2
x4 3.07 2.4 x8 15.39 12.1
x5 3.78 3.0 x 10 19.03 14.9
x6 4.47 3.5 x 12 22.59 17.7
ISA 4545 x 3 2.64 2.1 ISA 110110x 8 17.08 13.4
x4 3.47 2.7 x 10 21.12 16.6
x5 4.28 3.4 x 12 25.08 19.7
x6 5.07 4.0 x 16 32.76 25.7
ISA 5050 x 3 2.95 2.3 ISA 130130 x 8 20.28 15.9
x4 3.88 3.0 x 10 25.12 19.7
x5 4.79 3.8 x 12 29.88 23.5
x6 5.68 4.5 x 16 39.16 30.7
ISA 5555 x 5 5.27 ISA 150150 x 10 29.21 22.9

x6 6.26 t *; x 12 34.77 27.3
x8 8.18 6:4 x 16 45.65 35.8
x 10 10.02 7.9 x 20 56.21 44.1
KCknltinued)
371
SP : 21.1983
Desigrzation Sectional Weight Designation Sectional Weight

Area per Metre (Size xThickness) Area
(1) (2) (3)
2
kg (1) (2) (3)
ISA 200200 x 12 4:?4 36.9 mmXmmxmm cm2 kg/m
x 16 61.82 48.5
x 20 76.38 60 x 60 x 4 4.71 3.70
60.0
x 25 94.13 73.9 70 x 70 x 7 9.40 7.38
3.1 A supplementary list of equal leg angles as given 100x100x6.5 12.7 9.99
below conforming to I!WR 657/I-1968 ‘Structural x 15 27.9 21.9
steel sections: Part I Dimensions and sectional proper-
ties of hot-rolled equal leg angles - Metric series’ 120x 120 x 8 18.7 14.7
have also been adopted as Indian Standard sizes. They x 10 23.2 18.2
may be available by mutual agreement with the x 12 27.5 21.6
supplier. x 15 33.9 26.6
Designation Sectional Weight 150 x 150 x 15 43 .o 33.8
(Size ~Thickness) Area x 18 51.0 40.1
(1) (2) (3) 180 x 180 x 15 52.1 40.9
mmXmmX mm cm2 kg/m x 18 61.9 48.6
50 x 50 x 7 6.56 5.15 x 20 68.3 53.7
x8 7.41 5.82 200 x 200 x 24 90.6 71.1
Note I-For detailed dimensions and sectional properties, namely, moment of inertia, moduli of section, etc, refer to Tables 1 and IA
of the standard.
Note 2 -For dimensional and weight tolerances, refer to IS : 1852-1’179Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part V)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part V
Equal leg angles (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808 (PART VI)-1976 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED

STEEL SECTIONS
PART VI UNEQUAL LEG ANGLES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, weight signated by the alphabet ‘ISA’ followed by size and
and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel thickness in mm. For example, angles of size
unequal leg angles. 100 X 75 mm and thickness 6 mm shall be designated
as ‘ISA 10075 x 6’.
2. De&nation - Unequal leg angles shall be de-
372
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions Designation Sectional Weight

Area per Metre
(1) (2) (3)
Designation Sectional Weight cm* kg
Area per Metre ISA 12595 X 6 12.92 10.1
(1) (2) (3) X8 17.04 13.4
cm2 kg x 10 21.08 16.5
ISA 3020 x 3 1.41 1.1 x 12 25.04 t 19.7
x4 1.84 1.4 ISA 15075 X 8 17.48 13.7
X5 2.25 1.8 x 10 21.62 17.0
x 12 25.68 20.2
ISA 4025 x 3 1.88 1.5
x4 2.46 1.9 ISA 150115 x 8 20.72 16.3
x5 3.02 2.4 x 10 25.66 20.1
x6 3.56 2.8 x 12 30.52 24.0
x 16 40.00 31.4
ISA 4530 x 3 2.18 1.7
x4 2.86 2.2 ISA 200100 x 10 29.21 22.9
x5 3.52 2.8 x 12 34.77 27.3
x6 4.16 3.3 x 16 45.65 35.8
ISA 5030 X 3 2.34 1.8 ISA 200150 x 10 34.29 26.9
x4 3.07 2.4 x 12 40.85 32.1 ’
x5 3.78 3.0 x 16 53.73 42.2
x6 4.47 3.5 x 20 66.29 52.0
ISA 6040 x 5 4.76 3.7
‘x6 5.65 3.1 A supplementary list of unequal leg angles
4.4
sections as given below conforming to ISO/R 657/H-
x8 7.37 5.8
1%8 ‘Dimensions of hot-rolled steel sections: Part 2
ISA 6545 X 5 5.26 4.1 Unequal leg angles (Metric series) - Dimensions and
x6 6.25 4.9 sectional properties’ have also been adopted as Indian
x8 8.17 6.4
standard sizes. They may be available by mutual
ISA 7045 x 5 5.52 4.3 arrangement with the supplier.
x6 6.56 5.2
x8 8.58 6.7 Designation Sectional Weight
x 10 10.52 8.3 (Size X Thickness) Area per Metre
ISA 7550 x 5 6.02 4.7 (1) (2) (3)
x6 7.16 5.6 mmX mmX mm cm* kg
x8 9.38 7.4 40 x 20 x 3 1.73 1.36
x 10 11.52 9.0 x4 2.26 1.77
ISA 8050 x 5 6.27 4.9 x5 2.77 2.17
x6 7.46 5.9 60 x 30 x 5 4.29 3.37
x8 9.78 7.7 x6 5.08 3.99
x 10 12.02 9.4 60 x 40 x 7 6.55 5.14
ISA 9060 X 6 8.65 6.8 65 x 50 x 5 5.54 4.35
x8 11.37 8.9 x6 6.58 5.16
x 10 14.01 11.0 x7 7.60 5.%
x 12 16.57 13.0 x8 8.60 6.75
ISA 10065X6 9.55 7.5 70 x 50 x 5 5.79 4.54
x8 12.57 9.9 x6 6.88 5.40
x 10 15.51 12.2 x7 7.95 6.24
x8 9.00 7.06
ISA 10075 x 6 10.14 8.0
x8 13.36 10.5 75 x 50x 7 8.31 6.53
x 10 16.50 13.0 80 x40x 5 5.80 4.56
x 12 19.56 15.4 x6 6.89 5.41
IS4 12575 x 6 11.66 9.2 x7 7.96 6.25
x8 15.38 12.1 x8 9.01 7.07
x 10 19.02 14.9 (Continued)
373
SP : 21-1983
Designation Sectional Weight Designation Sectional Weight

(Size X Thickness) Area per Metre (Size x Thickness) Area per Metre
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
mmXmmXmm cm* kg mmxmmxmm cm* kg
80x 60x 6 8.11 6.37 125 x 75 x 12 22.7 17.8
x7 9.38 7.36 135 x 65 x 8 15.1 11.8
x8 10.6 8.34 x 10 18.6 14.6
90x65~6 9.01 7.07 x 12 22.1 17.3
x7 10.4 8.19 150 x 75 x 9 19.6 15.4
x8 11.8 9.29 x 15 31.6 24.8
x 10 14.1 11.4 150 x 90 x 10 23.2 18.2
27.5
x5o::!:
loo
x8
8.73
10.1
11.4
6.85
7.93
8.99
x
x
12
15 33.9
21.6
26.6
200 x 100x 15 43 .o 33.7
x 10 14.1 11.1
200 x 150 x 15 50.5 39.6
100 x 65 x 7 11.2 8.77 x 18 60.0 47.1
120 x 80 x 8 15.5 12.2
x 10 19.1 15.0
x 12 22.7 17.8
Note l-For detailed dimensions and sectional properties, namely, moment cf inertia, moduli of section, radii of gyration, etc, refer
to Tables 1 and 1A of the standard.
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part VI)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part VI
Unequal leg angles (second revision).
374
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1730 (PART II-1974 DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL PLATE, SHEET

AND STRIP FOR STRUCTURAL AND GENERAL
PART I PLATE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, are and 3. Dimensions (mm)
weight of steel plates for structural and general
engineering purposes. 3.1 Standard Ncvninal Thickness - 5,6, 7, 8, 10,
12, 14, 16, 18,20,22,25,28,32,36,40,45,50,56
2. Designation- By letters ISPL followed by and 63.
figures denoting length (mm) X width (mm) X thickness
(mm) of the plate. 3.2 Standard Nominal Sizes
1 900 950 1 000 1 100 1 200 1 250 1 400 1 500 1 600 1 800 2 000 2 200 2 500
Maximum Standard Nominal Thickness, mm
2200 63 63 63 63 63 63 63- 63 63 63 63 63 63
2 500 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
2800
3 200 63 63 63 63 %: 2: 2: 2: 63 :: :: 66.: 2,’
3 600 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
4000 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
4500 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
5 000 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
5 600 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56
6 300 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50
7 100 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45
8 000 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 40
9 000 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 56 50 45 40 36
10 000 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 50 45 40 36 32
11000 63 63 63 63 56 56 50 50 45 40 36 32 28
12 500 63 63 63 56 50 50 45 40 40 36 32 28 25
13 500 63 63 56 50 50 45 40 40 36 32 28 25 25
--~ _____ _____..-- .-_-_ __.
4. Weight - Nominal weight cajculated on basis
that density of steel is 7.85 kg/cm3.
Note I--For nominal weights per metre of plates of different widths and thickness, see Table 3 of the sfondard.
Note 2-For tolerance on thickness size and weight of plate, refer to IS : 1852-1979Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel
products (thirdrevision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1730 (Part I)-I974 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for
structural and general engineeringpurposes:Part I Plate (first revision).
375
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1730 (PART II)-1974 DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL PLATE, SHEET

PART II SHEET
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, area and 3.1 Standard Nominal Thickness
6
weight of steel sheets for structural and general
0.40, 0.50, 0.63, 0.80,0.90, 1.00, 1.12, 1.25,
engineering purposes. 1.40, 1.60, 1.80, 1.90, 2.00, 2.24,2.50, 2.80,
3.15, 3.55, 4.00, 4.30 and 4.65.
2. Designation - By letters ISSH followed by 3.2 Standard Nominal Sizes (mm)
tiguresdenotinglength(mm) Xwidth (mm)X thickness
(mm) of the sheet. Lengths - 1800,2 000,2 200,2 500,2 800,
3 200, 3 600,4 000.
Widths - 600, 750, 900, 950, 1 000, 1 100,
3. Dimensions (mm) 1 200, 1 250, 1 400, 1 500.
Note l- For details regarding nominal surface area and weight per sheets see Table 2 of the standard.
Note 2-Weight has been calculated on the basis that density of steel is 7.85 g/ems.
Note 3-Tolerance on dimension and weight of sheets shall be as per IS : 1852-1979Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel
products (third revision).
-
For detailed: information, refer to IS : 1730 (Part II)-1974 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for
structural and general engineering purposes: Part II Sheet (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1730 (PART III)-1974 DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL PLATE, SHEET

PART III STRIP
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions and weight Thickness _ Width (see Note below)
. ..
of steel strips for structural and general engineering
3.15 100 to 1 550
purposes.
3.55 100 to 1 550
2. Designation - ISST followed by figures (in 4.00 100 to 1 550
4.50 100 to 1 550
mm) denoting width X thickness.
5.0 100 to 1 550
3. Dimensions (mm) 6.0 100 to 1 550
8.0 100 to 1 550
Thickness Width (see Note below)
10.0 100 to 1 550
1.60 100 to 800 Note - Standard widths are 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320,
1.80 100 to 950 400, 500, 650, 800, 950, 1 000, 1 050, 1 150, I 250, 1 300,
2.00 100 to 1 050 1 450 and 1 550.
2.24 100 to 1 150
2.50 100 to 1 250 4. Weight - Calculated on basis that density of
2.80 100 to 1 300 steel is 7.85 g/cd.
376
SP : 21-1983
Note l-For weights per metre of strips of different widths and thicknesses see Table 1 of the standard.
Note 2-For tolerances refer to iS : 1852-1979 Rolling andcutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1730 (Part III)-1974 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for
structural and general engineering purposes: Part III Strip (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
,
IS : 173 l-l 97 1 DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL FLATS FOR STRUCTURAL

AND GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Specifies dimensions, weights and sec- IS: 2062-1969*.
tional areas of hot-rolled steel flats for structural and 2. Designation - Flats designated by width (in
general engineering purposes. This standard is mainly mm) followedby the letters ISF and thickness (inmm).
intended to cover flats made from steel conforming to
IS : 226_1975*,IS : 961-1975t,IS : 1977-1975$and 3. Dimensions (imm)
Width Thickness
10 3. 4 5 6
14 3 4 5 6 8
20 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18
25 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18
30 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20
35 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32
40 3 4 5 6 8 10 !2 16 18 20 25 32
45 - 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32
50 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40
55 - 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40
60 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45
65 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45
70 4 5 6 8 10 M 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50
75 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50
80 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50
90 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50 60
100 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50 60
110 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50 60
120 5 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50 60
130 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50 60
140 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50 60
150 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45 50 60
160 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45
180 8 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45
200 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45
250 10 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 45
300 12 16 18 20 25 32 40 ‘45
400 16 18 20 25 32 40 45
*Specification for structural steel (standardquality) (@I revision). *Specilic~tion for structural steel (fusion welding quality) @rst
tSpecification for structural steel (high tensile) (second revision). revision).
$Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second
revision).
377
SP : 21-1983
Note 1-Weight shall be calculated on the basis that steel weights 7.85 g/cm 3. For details regarding weight see Table 1 of the
standard.
Note 2-Flats above 160 mm in width will normally be supplied in round edges.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1731-1971 Dimensions for steel flats for structural and general
engineering purposes (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1732- 197 1 DIMENSIONS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE STEEL BARS

FOR STRUCTURAL AND GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Specifies dimensions, sectional areas Designation Designation Designation

and weights of hot-rolled round and square steel bars
for structural and general engineering purposes. This ISRO 16 ISRO 40 ISRO 100
standard is mainly intended to cover bars made from ISRO 18 ISRO 45 ISRO 110
steel conforming to IS : 226-1975*, IS : 961-1975t, ISRO 20 ISRO 50 ISRO 125
IS : 1977-1975$, and IS : 2062-19754. It does not ISRO 22 ISRO 56 ISRO 140
cover bars for rivets and threaded components. ISRO 25 ISRO 63 ISRO 160
ISRO 28 ISRO 71 ISRO 180
2. Designation - Round and square bars are desig- ISRO 32 ISRO 80 ISRO 200
nated by letters ISRO and ISSQ respectively followed ISRO 36 ISRO 90
by diameter or side width (in mm). Note - Unit weight = 7.85 g/cm’.
3. Dimensions Squhe Steel Bars

3.1 Round Steel Bars Designation Designation
ISSQ 5 ISSQ 32
ISRO 8 ISRO 12 ISSQ 6 ISSQ 40
ISRO 5
ISRO 10 ISSQ 8 ISSQ 45
ISRO 6 ISRO 14
ISSQ 10 ISSQ 50
-.
*Specification for structural steel (standard quality) CJftil ISSQ 12 ISSQ 63
revision ) ISSQ 16 ISSQ 80
fsp=ification for structural steel (high tensile) (second revision). ISSQ 20 ISSQ 100
*Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (sew& ISSQ 25
revision).
$Speciccationfor structural steel (fusion welding quality) (first
revision).
____ -- ~. --
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1732-1971 Dimensions for round and square steel bars for structural
and general engineering purposes (first revision).
378
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2678-1972 DIMENSIONS FOR WROUGHT ALUMINIUM

AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS, DRAWN TUBE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Lays down the dimensions and toler- 3. Tolerances - For tolerancesonwall thicknesses
antes for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys in and on outside or inside diameters of drawn tube, see
the form of drawn tube with parallel bore. Tables 2 and 3 of the standard.
Note - This standard should be read in conjunction with
is : 738-1977*.
2. Dimensions
Nominal Nominal Wall Thickness

Outside (mm>
Dia (mm)
4.0
5.0 0.50 0.63 0.80 1.00
6.3 I
8.0 0.50 0.63 0.80 1.00 1.25 1.60 2.00
10.0 1.00 1.60 2.00 2.50
0.50 0.63 0.80 1.25
12.5 )
16.0
20.0 0.80 1.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15
25.0 ?
31.5 0.W 1.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 5.0
40.0 4.00 5.0 6.3
0.80 1.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15
50.0 >
63.0 3.15
1.60 2.00 2.50 4.00 5.00 6.3 8.00 10.0 12.5
80.0 >
100 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 5.00 6.3 8.0 10.0 12.5
125 >
160 3.15 4.00 5.00 6.3 8.0 10.0 12.5
200 6.3 8.00 10.0 12.5
250 8.0 10.0 12.5 16.0
Note-Sizes other than standard shall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

drawn tube (for general engineering purposes) (second revision).
-- __-..-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2678-1972 Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium
alloys, drawn tube (first revision).
319
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3965-1981 DIMENSIONS FOR WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND

ALUMINIUM ALLOYS, BAR, ROD AND SECTION
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Lays down the dimensions and toler- 2.3 Standard WidthqofSquareBars - 6.4,7,8,9,
ances for wrought aluminium alloys in the form of bar, 10,11,12,14,16,19,20,24,26,32,38,50,55,60,
rod and section. 76 or 90 mm.
2.4 Standard thi~he~ses of nzgular sections and ,
2. Dimensions width of sections:
2.1 Standard Diameters of Rods - 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, a) Thickness of regular sections - 1.2, 1.6, 2,
12,14,16,18,20,22,25,28,32,40,45,50,56,63, 2.5,3.2,4,5,6,8,10,12,16,20,25,32,40,
71,80,90, 100, 110, 125, 140 or 160 mm. 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 or 200 mm.
2.2 Standard Width Across Flats of Regular b) Width of sections -

12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40,
Sections - 6.4,7,8,9, 10, 12,14, 17, 19,22,24, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250 or
27, 30, 32, 36,41,46, 50,55 or 60 nim. 320 mm.
Note-For all tolerances, namely, dimensional tolerances of regular sections and solid bars, tolerances for concavity, convexity,
straightness and twist. and angular tolerance, refer to 4 of thestandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3965-1981 Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium
alloys, bar, rod and section (first revision).
380
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 814 Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel:

IS : 814 (Part U-1974 Part I For welding products other than sheets (fourth revision) 383
IS : 814 (Part II)-1974 Part II For welding sheets (fourth revision) 384
IS : 815-1974 Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal arc welding 385
of structural steels (second revision)
IS : 1278-1972 Filler rods for gas welding (secorul revision) 386
IS : 4972-1%8 Resistance spot-welding electrodes 387
IS : 6419-1971 Welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding of 388
structural steel
IS : 7280-1974 Bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels 389
IS : 8363-1976 Bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of steels 389
382
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 814 (PART I)-1974 COVERED ELECTRODES

FOR METAL ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART I FOR WELDING PRODUCTS OTHER THAN SHEETS
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for the following two b) All weld impact test:
groups of covered electrodes of sizes 3.15 mm and
above for metal arc welding of structural steel products 1) EXXX-411, 412, 413
other than sheets. Up to and including 41J - Requirement
not fulfilled.
Group 1 - Normal penetration and deeppenelra- Including and over 475 - Requirement
tion electrodes (tensile range 410- fultilled.
5 10 N/mm2)
2) EXXX-414, 4 15
Group 2 - Normal penetration hydrogencontrol- Up to and including 23J - Requirement
led electrodes (tensile range 510 - not fulfilled.
610 N/mm2) Including and over 27J - Requirement
fulfilled.
2. Sizes - Designated by diameter of core wire in
mm size shall be 3.15, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5. c) Transverse -4ensile test - Tensile
Length - 350 or 450 mm. strength - 4 lO- 5 10 N/mm2.
d) Transverse bend tesr -There shall be no
3. Tolerance crack or defect greater than 3 mm I\cross test
specimen ard 1.6 mm along the length.
On size,f0.05 mmfor electrodes below 8 mm size
+0.05 and - 0.1 mm for electrodes 8 mm e) Transverse impact test - Three charpy
and over. V-notch impact tests shall be carried out.
Results assessed in accordance with 5.1 (b).
On length, +3 mm. f) Test for determining di$usible hydrogen
content - Shall not exceed 10 ml per 100 gof
4. Requirements deposited metal.
4.1 Contact end shall be bare and clean to a length of 5.2 Tests for Deep Penetration Electrodes
20 to 30 mm.
a) Transverse tensile test - Tensile strength,
410-510 N/mm2.
4.2 Arc-striking end shall permit easy striking of arc.
b) Transverse bend test - There shall be no
4.3 HUX covering shall be uniform in outside dia- crack or defect greater than 3 mm across test
meter and in thickness and shall fuse or burn or both specimen and 1.5 mm along the length.
evenly. c) Transverse impact test - Result shall be as
Note - For penetration requirements for deep penetration specified in 5.1(b).
electrodes, refer to 8 of the standard. d) Butt weld penetration test -- Inter-
5. Tests Requirements penetration and fusion shall be thieved.
5.1 Tests for normal penetrationelectrodes including e) Fillet weld penetration test - Penetration
hydrogencontrolled electrodes for welding mild steel. shall be not less than 4 mm for weld made with
4 mm electrode.
a) All-weld tensile test:
5.3 Tests for Hydrogen Controlled Normal Penetra-
1) For electrodes for welding mild steel tion Electrodes for Welding Medium Tensile Steel
Tensile strength, 41 O-5 10 N/mm2
a) All weld tensile test - Shall comply with
Yield stress, 330 N/mm2, Min
5.1 (a).
2) For electrodes for welding medium tensile b) All weld impact test - Assessment for
steel EXXX-5 11,5 12,5 13 shall be in accordance
Tensile strength, 510-610 N/mm2 with 5.1 (b) (i) and EXXX-514, 515 in
Yield stress, 360 Nlmm2, Min accordance with 5.1 (b) (ii).
383
SP : 21-1983
c) Transverse tensile test - Tensile strength e) Transverse impact test - Assessment shall
510-610 N/mm*. be in accordance with 5.1 (b).
f) Tests for determining d@sible hydrogen
d) Transverse bend test - Shall comply with content - Shall not exceed 10 ml per 100 g
5.1 (d) of deposited metal.
Note I- 1J =0.102 kgf/m. lN/mm*=O.l02 kgf/mmz.

Note 2-For classification of the electrodes, refer to IS : 815-1974 Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal arc
welding of structural steels (second revision).
Note 3 -For mechanical properties of present metal for test pieces, refer to Appendix A of the stmdd.
Note 4-For methods bf tests, refer to Appendices B to E of the standard. b
For detailed information, refer to IS : 814 (Part Z)-1974 Specificationfor covered electrodes formetal arc
welding of structural steeLPart Z For welding products other than sheets (fourth revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 814 (PART II)-1974 COVERED ELECTRODES

FOR METAL ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART II FOR WELDING SHEETS
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of following two groups 4. Requirements

of covered electrodes of sizes 1 to 3.15 mm for metal
4.1 Contact end shall be bare and clean to alength of
arc welding of structural steel sheets:
2oto3omm.
Group 1 - Normal penetration electrodes (ten-
4.2 A=-sk’irting end shall permit easy strikingof arc.
sile range 410-510 N/mm*)
4.3 Flux covering shall be uniform in outside dia-
Group 2 - Normal penetration hydrogen con-
meter and in thickness.
trolled el=trodes (tensile range
510-610 N/mm*)
5. Workability
2. Sizes - Designated by diameter of core wire in 5.1 Electrodes shall produce suitable penetration for
millimetres. welding of sheets in order to obtain good bead
L
appearance and Sound joints.
Size 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3.15 5.2 Both initial and subsequent arcs shall be pro-
Dia of 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3.15 duced easily.
core wire, 5.3 Electrodes shall be free from harmful weld
mm defects, such as porosities, undercuts, overlaps, etc.
Length, 200 200 200 200 250 350
mm 250 250 300 450 6. Test Requirements
300 350 6.1 Parent Metal - Tensile strength 410-510
350
N/mm* for normal penetration electrodes including
hydrogen controlled electrodes for welding mild steel,
3. Tolerance and 510-610 N/mm* for hydrogen controlled normal
On size k0.05 mm, and penetration electrodes for welding medium tensile
On length +_3 mm. steel.
384
SP : 21-1983
6.2 Tensile Test - Tensile strength shall not be less 6.3 Guide Bend Test - Test piece shall develop no
than 410 N/mm* in case of normal penetration elec- crack beyond 1.5 mm.
trcdes including hydrogen controlled electrodes for
welding mild steel (Group 1) and 5 10 N/mm* incase of 6.4 Workability Test - The sectioned surface shall
hydrogen controlled normal penetration electrodes for be inspected for porosities, undercuts and overlaps
welding medium tensile steel sheets. near the starting and finishing ends of the weld run.
Note l--For classification of the electrodes, refer to IS : 815-1974 Classification and coding of cohered electrodes for metal arc
welding of structural steels (second revision).
Note 2-For detailed requirements of tests, refer to 9 of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 814 (Part II)-1974 Specification for covered electrodes for metal arc
welding of structural steel: Part II For welding sheets (fourth revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 815-1974 CLASSIFICATION AND CODING OF COVERED

ELECTRODES FOR METAL ARC WELDING
OF STRUCTURAL STEELS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - A systemofclassificationand coding of 5 Having a high content of iron oxides or

covered electrodes for metal am welding of mild steel silicates or both and producing a heavy
(430 to 510 N/mm*) and medium tensile steel (510 to solid slag.
610 N/mm*) of welding quality. 6 Having a high content of calcium carbo-
nate and fluoride.
2. Basis for Coding - Coding shall consist of: 9 A covering of any other type not classified
above.
4 a prefix letter (indicating method of manufac-
ture of the electrode), b) Second digit indicates welding position(s) in
which the electrode may be used:
b) a code number of six digits indicating per-
0 F, H, V, D, 0
formance characteristics and mechanical
1 F,H,V,O
properties, and
2 F,H
c) in some cases one or more suffix letters (indi- 3 F
cating specific properties). 4 F, H (horizontal fillet)
9 Any other welding position
3. Classification and Coding c) Third digit indicates welding current
3.1 Prefiv Letters conditions:
0 D+ 5 D+,A’10
E - Solid extrusion 6 D_t,A70
1 D+,A90
R- Extruded with reinforcement 7 Df,A50
2 D-,A70
3.2 Code Number of Six Digits 3 D-,A50 9 Any other current
4 D+,A70 condition.
a) Fhst digit indicates type of covering:
1 Having a high cellulose content.
4 Fourth and fifth digit - Digits 4 1 (indicating
tensile strength of 410-510 N/mm2 and
2 Having a high content of titania and
minimum yield stress of 330 N/mm* and 51
producing a fairly viscous slag.
(indicating tensile strengthof 5 10 - 610 N/mm*
3 Containing an appreciable amount of
and minimum yield stress of 360 N/mm*).
titania and producing a fluid slag.
4 Having a high content of oxides or sili- e) Sixth digit indicates percentage elongation in
cates or both of iron and manganese and combination with impact value of deposited
producing an inflated slag. metal.
385
SP : 21-1983
Caie No. Inclu- Minimum Temperature 3.3 St.&x Letters

ding 4th & 5th Elongation, for Minimum
Digit Percent Impact Value H - Hydrogen controlled electrodes
of47 J, “C J - Iron powder covering giving a metal
410 - -
recovery of 1 IO- 130 percent inclusive
411 20 +27
412 22 0 K- Iron powder covering giving a metal
413 24 -20 recovery of 1301-150 percent
4 14 24’ -30
L- Iron powder covering giving a metal
415 24 -40
- recovery of over 150 percent
510 -
511 18 +27 P- Deep penetration
512 18 O
,
5 13 20 -20
514 20 -30
515 20 -40
Note l-For use of the classification and method of marking the coding of electrodes, refer to 6 of the sfundard.
Note 2-For important characteristics of six types of coverings, refer to Appendix A of the sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 815-1974 Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal
arc welding of structural steels (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1278-1972 FILLER RODS FOR GAS WELDING
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of ferrous and non- 2.2 Length - It shall be 500 or 1 000 mm for rods
ferrous filler rods for gas welding made of the less than 2.5 mm dia and 1 000 mm for rods 2.5 mm
following materials supplied in cut lengths: and above. The tolerance on length shall be +5 mm.
a) Structural steels,
b) Austenitic stainless steels, 3. Requirements
c) Cast irons (excluding spheroidal graphite 3.1 Shall be free from surface imperfections, corro-
and malleable iron castings), sion products, grease, excessive oxide, etc.
d) Copper and copper alloys,
e) Nickel and nickel alloys, 3.2 Structural steel filler rods shall have a protective
0 Aluminium and aluminium alloys, and copper coating; copper content not exceeding 0.4 per-
g) Magnesium and magnesium alloys. cent by weight.
.2. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.3 Aluminium, aluminium alloy and magnesium
2.1 Size alloy filler rods shall be supplied in as-manufactured
Diameter Tolerance on Diameter condition.
, h
mm Cast Iron Other Gas Welding 3.4 Incase of austenitic stainless,steel fillerrods, the -
Filler Rods Filler Rods inter-crystalline corrosion test may be conducted. The
mm test piece shall show no sign of cracking.
1, 1.25, 1.6, 2, 2.5 fO.08 go5
3.15, 4, 5, 6.3
8, 10, 12.5 +0.08 +0.05

-0.10
Note l-For chemical composition requirements, refer lo Tables 2 to 8 of the standard.
Note 2-A Guide for selection and use of gas welding rods is given in Appendix A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1278-1972 Specification for filler rods for gas welding (second
revision).
386
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4972- 1968 RESISTANCE SPOT-WELDING ELECTRODES
1. Scope- Code numbers (in metric units), dirnen- 3.1.2 Straight electrodes with tapered
sional requirements, and physical and mechanical shanks - Pointed, dome, flat, offset, truncated cone
properties for a series of spot-welding electrodes, cap and spherical types. Overall length range from 38 to
electrodes and shanks, mainly intended for resistance 102mmfornominalsizes1,2and3and64to125mm,
spot welding of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. This 76 to 12.5 mm and 89 to 125 mm for nominal sizes 4,9
standard covers electrodes with standard IS0 tapers and 10 respectively.
and with Morse tapers.
3.1.3 Electrode nose configurations - Types
2. Materials Recommended sameasgivenin3.1.2,. Availableinallsizes (1 to 10).
Class Material Conductivity Percent Vickers Application

(that for Standard Pyramid
Annealed Copper) Hardness
(HV)
I Cadmium copper con- 85 90 Spot-welding of coated
taining 0.5 to 1 per- steels, aluminium and
cent cadmium its alloys
II Chromium copper con- 80-85 110 Spot-welding of steels
taining 0.5 to 0.8 per- other than covered
cent chromium under class II and III
III Cobalt, beryllium 45-50 180 Spot-welding of stain-
copper less and heat resisting
alloys
3. Specification for Electrodes with Standard IS0 3.1.4 Standard single - bend elecrrodes, cold-
Tapers formed from standard straight electrodes - Pointed,
dome, flat, eccentric and truncated types. Overall
3.1 Sizes and Dimensions length 64,70,83 and 83 for nominal sizes 5,6,7 and 8
respectively.
3.1.1 The size of an electrode with taper engage- 3.1.5 Standard double-bend electrodes, cold-
ment with dimensions of electrode shanks and formed from standard straight electrodes - Types,
electrode holders is given Table 1. overall length and sizes are same as given in 3.1.4.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF ELECTRODE SHANKS AND ELECTRODE HOLDERS

Major Engage Cooling Hole Taper Load
Dia Dia Dia (Inclusive)
(mm) (mm) (mm)
01 13.0 12.7 7.0
02 16.0 15.5 8.5 For straight loading not over
03 20.0 19.0 10.5 1 500 kgf
04 25.0 24.5 13.5
05 13.0 12.7 7.0 l/10
06 16.0 15.5 8.5 l/10
07 20.0 19.0 10.5 l/10 For eccentric loading
08 25.0 24.5 13.5 l/10
09 31.5 31.0 14.0 l/5 For straight loading over
10 40.0 39.0 16.0 l/5 > 1 500 kgf
387
SP : 21-1983
3.1.6 Caps and adapter shanks - Types A to F. 10.0 mm) and (28.5 and 10.0 mm) for nominal sizes 1,
Nominal sizes 1 to 3. 2 atid 3 respectively in case of pointed and dome types.
Note 1 - For dimensions of socket gauges for shanks, refer to 4.1.2 Straight electrode with tapered shanks -
Tables 2 and 3 with Fig. 1 of the standard. Types same as given in 4.1.1. Overall length range 32
Note 2 - For electrode designations and other dimensional to 102 mm for sizes 1 and 2 and 38 to 102 mm for size
details, refer to Tables 1 and 4 to 8 and Fig. 2 of rhe standard. 3.
4.1.3 Single-bend electrodes, cold-formed from
4. Specification for Electrodes with Standard standard straight electrodes - Pointed, dome, Hat,
Morse Tapers eccentric and truncated types. Overall length 64, 70
4.1 Sizes and Dimensions - Nominal size 1, 2 and and 83 mm for nominal sizes 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
3. Major dia 12.24, 15.87 and 22.22 mm for sizes 1,2 4.1.4 Double-bend electrodes; cold-formed from
and 3 respectively. standard straight electrodes - Types, overall
4.1.1 Morse electrode nose conjigurations - lengths and sizes are same as given in 4.1.3.
Pointed, dome, flat, offset, truncated cone and spheri- 4.1.5 Morse caps and adapter shanks - Types A
cal type. Nose lengths (19.0 and 6.5 mm), (22.0 and to F.
Note l-For dimensions of shanks of electrodes, refer to Fig. 3 and for taper ring and plug gauges, refer to Table 9 of thestandard.
Note 2-For electrode designations and other dimensional details, refer to Tables 10 to 14 and Fig. 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4972-1968 Specification for resistance spot-welding electrodes.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6419-1971 WELDING RODS AND BARE ELECTRODES FOR GAS

SHIELDED ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
1. Scope - Requirements of solid filler rods and Dia Tolerance

wires for welding structural steels by inert gas tungsten 0.8 to 1.6 +O.Ol, -0.04 mm
arc welding (TIG), gas metal arc welding (MIG) or 2.0 to 5.0 +O.Ol, -0.07 mm
COZ welding processes. The chemical composition of
filler rods and wires is also specified. 2.2 Length of Rods
Diameter less than 2.5 mm 500 or 1 000 mm
2.1 Diameter Diameter 2.5 mm and larger 1 000 mm.
Form Diameter 2.2.1 Tolerance +5 mm.
Wire (0.5), 0.6, (Oy, 0.9, 1.0. 3. Finish -Filler rods and wires shall have a
Wire and rod (1.2), (1.6), (2.0), 2.4, 2.5, smooth finish and be free from surface imperfections,
(3.2) * corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other
Rod 4.0, 5.0 foreign matter. The copper content of coated rod or
Note - Preferred sizes are given in parentheses. wire expressed as a percentage of rod (or wire plus
coating) shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.
2.1.1 Toierance
4. Classification -S-l, S-2, S-3, S-4 and S-5
Dia Tolerance
based on their chemical composition.
0.5 to 0.6 +O.Ol, -0.03 mm
Note l-For requirements of reels and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.
Note 2-For chemical composition of filler rods and wires, refer to 9 and 10 (Table 4) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6419-1971 Specification for welding rods and bare electrodes for gas
shielded arc welding of structural steel.
388
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7280-1974 BARE WIRE ELECTRODES FOR SUBMERGED

ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEELS
1. Scope - Requirements of solid filler wires for 3. Conditions of Wires - Filler wires shall have
submerged arc welding of structural steels (28-50 I smooth finish and they shall be free from surface
kgf/mm* yield strength and 34-70 kgf/mm* ultimate imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive
tensile strength). oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface
conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted
Note -This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the
manufacture and selection of bare wire electrodes for submerged feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding
arc welding of structural steels. equipment. The copper content of the coated wire
expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating
2. Dimensions and Tolerances shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.
2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 1.6, 2.0, 2.5,
4. Classification - AS-l, AS-l Si, AS-2, AS-2 Si,
3.15, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3 and 8.0 mm.
AS-2 MO, AS-2 Ni, AS-3, AS-3 MO, AS-3 MO Ni,
2.2 Tolerance on the diameters of wires shall be AS-4, AS-4 MO, AS-6 and AS-6 MO based on their
to.05 mm. chemical composition.
Note 1 -For requirements of reels for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.
Note 2-For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7280-1974 Specification for bare wire electrodes for submerged arc
welding of structural steels.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8363-1976 BARE WIRE ELECTRODES FOR ELECTROSLAG

WELDING OF STEELS
1. Scope - Requirements of solid bare wire elec- 3. Conditions of Wires - Filler wires shall have
trodes for electroslag welding of carbon and low alloy smooth finish and they shall be free from surface
steels. imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive
Note - This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface
manufacturer and selection of bare wire electrodes forelectroslag conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted
welding of carbon manganese and low alloy steels. feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding
equipment. The copper content of the coated wire
2. Dimensions and Tolerances expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating
2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 2.0, 3.15, 4.0, shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.
5.0 and 6.3 mm.
2.2 Toleranceon dia on wires shall be +O 4. Classification - ES-2, ES-2 Si, ES-3, ES-3 MO,
-0.05 mm. ES-3 MO Ni, ES-4, ES-4 MO, ELS4, ELS-4 MO.
2.3 Ovality of wire shall not exceed 50 percent’of ELS-2 MO and ELS-2 MO Cr based on their chemical
tolerance on dia. composition.
Note l-For requirements of coils for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.
Note 2-For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8363-1976 Specification for bare wire electrodes for electroslag
welding of steels.
389
SECTION 20
THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 207-1964 Gate and shutter hooks and eyes (revised) 393
IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (second revision) 393
IS : 723-1972 Steel countersunk head wire nails (second revision) 394
IS : 724-1964 Mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes 395
(revised)
IS : 725-1961 Copper wire nails (revised) 3%
IS : 730-1978 Hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing (second revision) 397
IS : 1120-1975 Coach screws (first revision) 398
IS : 1363-1967 Black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (diameter 6 to 39 mm) and 398
black hexagon screws (diameter 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
IS : 1365-1978 Slotted countersunk head screws (third revision) 400
IS : 1366-1968 Slotted cheese head screws (diameter range 1.6 to 20 mm) (first 400
revision)
IS : 1929-1982 Hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm diameter) 402
(first revision)
IS : 2016-1967 Plain washers (first revision) 403
IS : 2155-1982 Cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) 405
(first revision)
IS : 2389-1968 Precision hexagon bolts, screws, nuts and lock nuts (diameter range 405
1.6 to 5 mm) (first revision)
IS :, 2585-1968 Black square bolts and nuts (diameter range 6 to 39 mm) and black 406
square screws) (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
IS : 2687-1975 Cap nuts (first revision) 408
IS : 2907-1964 Non-ferrous rivets (1.6 to 10 mm) 408
IS : 2998-1982 Cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm diameter) 409
(first revision)
IS : 3063-1972 Single coil rectangular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and 410
screws (first revision)
IS : 3121-1981 Rigging screws and stretching screws (first revision) 411
IS : 3468-1975 Pipe nuts first revision) 412
IS : 3757-1972 High tensile friction grip bolts (j?rst revision) 413
IS : 4762-1968 Worm drive hose clips for general purposes 414
IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for plain washers and lock washers ifirst 415
revision)
IS : 5372-1975 Taper washers for channels (ISMC) (first revision) 415
IS : 5373-1969 Square washers for wood fastenings 416
IS : 5374-1975 Taper washers for I-beams (ISMB) (first revision) 416
IS : 5624-1970 Foundation bolts 417
IS : 6113-1970 Aluminium fasteners for building purposes 417
IS : 6610-1972 Heavy washers for steel structures 418 -
IS : 6623-1972 High tensile friction grip nuts 419
IS : 6639-1972 Hexagon bolts for steel structures 420
IS : 6649-1972 High tensile friction grip washers 421
IS : 6733-1972 Wall and roofing nails 422
IS : 6736-1972 Slotted raised countersunk head wood screws 422
IS : 6739-1972 Slotted round head wood screws 423
IS : 6760-1972 Slotted countersunk head wood screws 424
IS : 8633-1976 Round washers with square hole for wood fastenings 424
IS : 8412-1977 Slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures 425
IS : 8869-1978 Washers for corrugated sheet roofing 426
392
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 207-1964 GATE AND SHUTTER HOOKS AND EYES

(Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements for gate and shutter 3.2 Type 2 - 75(4), 100(5), 125(6.5), 150(6.5),
hooks and eyes which are commonly used on doors and 200@).
windows forkeeping them in position when kept open. Note - Figures in brackets indicate diameter (Average diame-
ter in case of cast brass hooks) of unthreaded shank.
2. Types
Type 1 - Mild steel and hard-drawn brass hooks 4. Tolerances
and eyes, and For length up to size 250 +2 mm
Type 2 - Cast brass hooks and plates. For length for size 300 +3 mm
For average diameter of +0.5 mm
3. Sizes and Dimensions (in mm)
cast brass hooks
3.1 Type I - 65 (4.17), 75(4.52), 100(5.23), 125
(5.59), 150(5.59), 200(6.30), 250(6.30), 300(7.01). 5. Finish - The articles shall be finished bright.
Note-For detailed dimensions and shapes, refer to Tables I and II, and Fig. I and 2 of the sfundard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 207-1964 Specification for gate and shutter hooks and eyes
(revised).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 451-1972 TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS

FOR WOOD SCREWS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Technical supply conditions for wood Screw Depth of firead,

screws. Designation Min,
2. Dimensions and Tolerances - Shall conform to 12 0%

those giveb in respective standards. 14 0.86
16 0.96
2.1 Depth of Threads - (Measured at a distance 1.5 18 1.04
to 2 times nominal diameter from the point) - 20 1.14
Screw Depth of Threud, 24 1.35
Designation Min, 28 1.55
32 1.75
0 :; 2.2 Permissible tolerances in nominal. length of
1 0.23 wood screws shall be js17.
2 0.25
3 0.30 3. Finish - Self colour condition.
4 0.33
5 0.41 4. Workmanship
6 0.46
7 0.51 4.1 The screws shall be cleanly finished and the head
8 0.56 shall be true and concentric with the shank. Slots in the
9 0.61 head shall be clear, straight, free from burrs and central
10 0.66 with regard to the head.
393
SP : 21-1983
4.2 The threaded portion of the screw shall be rotated and strong enough to prevent distortion of
formed by progressive reduction of the root diameter to thread.
obtain a uniform taper. The screws shall be gimlet 4.3 Threads shall be clear and well-defined. At the
pointed and the included angle of the gimlet point shall end of the threaded portion nearest to the head, the root
be between 28°C and 44°C. The thread form through- of the thread shall runout to the nominal diameter with
out the length of the screw shall be such that it will give a distance not exceeding one-quarter of the length of
the maximum bite into the wood when the screw is the threaded portion.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (second
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 723-1972 STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD WIRE NAILS

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of steel countersunk 40 +1.5

head wire nails. 50 to 60 +2.1
80 +2.6
2. Dimensions and Tolerances (in mm) 90 +3.1
100 f3.4
2.1 Dimensions
125 to 150 rt3.8
Shank Length Head
200 to 250 f4.4
Diameter Diameter
1.25 20 3.4
2.3 Bend of shank shall not exceed 1 percent of
1.4 20 3.8
length.
1.6 15, 20, 25 4
1.8 25, 30 4.5 2.4 Eccentricity and ovality of centre of nail head
2 25, 30, 40, 50 4 from axis of shank.
2.24
2.5 40
50 4.5
5 a) Maximum 12 percent of shank diameter for
nails with shank diameter 2 mm and above.
2.8
3.15 60
60 5.6
5.7 b) Maximum 14 percent of shank diameter for
nails with shank diameter below 2 mm.
3.55 80 6.4
4 100 7.2 Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to
4.5 90, 100, 125 8.1 Tables 1 to 4 of r/w standard.
5 100, 125, 150 9 I
6.3 150 11.3 3. Designation - As an example, a countersunk
8 200, 225 14.4 head nail of size 4.00 mm and length 100 mm shall be
10 250 18 designated as ‘Nail 4 x 100 IS : 723’.
2.2 Tolerances (in mm) 4. Finish - Shall be supplied plain finished.

a) On shank dia 1.25 to 2.24 +0.04
2.5 +0.05 5. Test (Bend Test) - Test piece shall not break or
2.8 to 10 +0.06 develop crack when doubled over by pressure or
b) On length 15 to 20 fl hammer blows until internal radius equals diameter of
25 to 30 fl.2 test piece and sides are parallel.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 723-1972 Specification for steel countersunk head wire nails (second
revision).
394
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 724-1964 MILD STEEL AND BRASS CUP, RULER AND SQUARE

HOOKS AND SCREW EYES
(Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel and brass 2.1 Screw eyes shall be of one type only.
cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes.
3. Designation - Shall be based on type, length,
and screw designation No. of the fitting. For example,
2. Types shouldered cup hook of length 25 mm and of screw
a) Shouldered cup hooks designation No. 5 shall be designated as “Shouldered
b) Shouldered ruler hooks cup hook 25xNo. 5”.
c) Shouldered square hooks
d) Plain cup hooks
I 4. Dimensions
e) Plain ruler hooks
f) Plain square hooks. 4.1 Shouldered Cup, Ruler and Square Hooks.
Dimension Designation
’ 15 x No. 3 20 x No. 4 25 x No. 5 35 x No. 7 40 x No. 8 50 x No. 10 50 x No. 12 ’

D (mm) 2.39 2.74 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.88 5.59
T(mm) 4.7 6.5 8.0 12.5 14.0 17.5 20.0
4.2 Plain Cup and Ruler Hooks
A
/ \
25 x No. 5 30 x No. 7 40 x No. 8 45 x No. 8 50 x No. 8
D (mm) 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.17 4.17
T (mm) 8.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 18.0
4.3 Plain Square Hooks
/ A
\
20x No. 4 25 x No. 5 30x No. 6 40x No. 7 50x No. 9 60x No. 12 75 x No. 14
D (mm) 2.74 3.10 3.45 3.81 4.52 5.59 6.30
T (mm) 8.0 10.0 14.0 15.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
--
4.4 Screw Eyes
A
’ 16 x No. 0 20 x No. 1 20 x No. 2 25 x No. 3 25 x No. 4 30 x No. 5’
D (-1 1.52 1.78 2.08 2.39 2.74 3.10
T (mm) 5.5 6.5 7.5 9.5 9.0 12.0
Designation
A
I I
30 x No. 6 35 x No. 8 40 x No. 10 45 x No. 12 50 x No. 14
D (mm) 3.45 4.17 4.88 5.59 6.30
T (mm) 11.0 12.0 12.5 15.0 19.0
395
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - D - Nominal diameter of unthreaded shank refer to Tables I to V, and Fig. 1 to 7 of thestandard.
T - Threaded length of shank
5. Finish - Hooks and eyes shall be finished
Note 2 -For detailed dimensions. tolerances and shapes, bright.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 724-1964 Specification for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square
hooks and screw eyes (revised).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 725-1961 COPPER WIRE NAILS

(Revised)
1. Scope - Covers the following types of copper 2.3 Type (c)

wire nails: 40 (2.5), 25 (2.5)
a) Rose-head boat nails, square shank, square
point.
b) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank, 2.4 Type (d)
sharp square point. 30 (2) 25 (2) 20 (2) 20 (1.6)
c) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank,
round point, 2.5 Type (e)
d) Wrought tacks 20 (1.8) 15 (1.8) 10 (1.8) 10 (1.6)
e) Cut-lath nails (Cut tacks)
2. Dimensions (in mm) - Lengths of different 3. Finish - Shall be finished bright and free from
types of copper nails are given in 2.1 to 2.5. Values burrs and sharp edges except at the points. In case of
given in brackets are the sizes of shank across flats tinned copper nails, tin coating shall cover nails com-
‘except in case of Type (e) where it is diameter. pletely and uniformly.
2.1 Type (a)
110 (5) 110 (4) 100 (5) 100 (4) 100 (3.15) 90 (5) 90 (4) 90 (3.15)
80 (4.5) 80 (4) 80 (3.15) 80 (2.5) 70 (4) 70 (3.15) 70 (2.5) 60 (4)
60 (3.15) 60 (2.5) 60 (2) 50 (3.15). 50 (2.5) 50 (2) 45 (3.15) 45 (2.5)
45 (2) ‘40 (3.15) 40 (2.5) 40 (2) 35 (3.15) 35 (2.5) 35 (2) 30 (3.15)
30 (2.5) 30 (2) 25 (5) 25_(2.5) 25 (2) 25 (1.6)
2.2 Type (b)
125 (5) 100 (5) 100 (4) 100 (3.15) 90 (3.55) 80 (5) 80 (3.15) 70 (5)
70 (3.15) 60 (4) 60 (3.15) 50 (3.55) 50 (3.15) 40 (3.15) 30 (3.15) 25 (3.15)
20 (3.15)
Note l-Head diameter of side of square shall be 2.5 times the size of shank in case of types (a), (b) and (c) and shall be 3 times the
size of shank in case of types (d) and (e) copper nails. _
Note 2-For detailed dimensions, approgmate count of copper nails and tolerances refer to 4 (Table 1) with Fig. 1 to 5 of thestundmj.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7251961 Specification for copper wire nails (revised).
396
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 730-1978 HOOK BOLTS FOR CORRUGATED SHEET -ROOFING

\
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for hook bolts for corru- 6. Designation --The hook bolts shall be desig-
gated sheet roofing. nated by the type, size, length, inside width (in case of
L and U-type bolts) and number of the standard. For
2. Types example, U hook bolt of type II with square nut of size
MlO, inside width 80 mm and length 180 mm shall be
a) J-type hook bolts
designated as “U Bolt II MlOX 180N - 801s : 730”.
b) L-tvpe hook bolts
c j U-t+ hook bolts 7. General Requirements
3. Dimensions (in mm) 7.1 Hook bolts and nuts shall be surface protected
Trpe size(ml) Inside Width Preferred Length

J-Type Hook Bolts M6 :42 70 to 150 in steps of 10
(Types I and II) M8 70 to 200 in steps of 10
Ml0 16 70 to 200 in steps of IO
L-Type Hook Bolts M”l”o 50, 60, 70 120 to 200 in steps of 10
80, 95 150 to 200 in steps of 10
110 180,19Q,2OQ, 225
U-Type Hook Bolts M8 50, 60, 80 150 to 200 in steps of 10
(Types I and II) 90 225
Ml0 50,60, 80 150 to 200 in steps of 10
90 225
Note l-All types of hook bolts are with square nuts.

Note 2-For tolerances and detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.
Note 3-The screw threads on the hook bolts shall conform to tolerance class 8g as specified in IS : 4218 (Part IV)-1976*.
4. Grade - Black grade (B) as specified in. with suitable coating. If bolts and nuts are hot-dip
IS : 1367-1%7t. galvanized, the requirement shall be in accordance
w.ith IS : 5358-1969*.
5. Mechanical Properties - Property class 4.6 of 7.2 The square nuts used with bolts shall conform to
IS : 1367-19677. IS : 2585-1968f.
\
*ISO metric screw threads: Part IV Tolerancing systems (first *Specification for hot-dip galvanized coating on fasteners.
revision ) . tspecification for black square bolts and nuts (diameter range 6 to
tTechnica1 supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirsr 39 mm) and black square screws (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) f&t
revision). revision).
Note-In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, refer to IS : 1367-1967 Technical supply conditions for threaded
fasteners uirst revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 730-1978 Specification for hook baits for corrugated sheet roofing
(second revision).
e
397
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1120-1975 COACH SCREWS

* (First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of hexagon head coach 3. Designation - As an example, a hexagon head

screws (hexagon head wood screws). coach screw of screw No. 10, length 30 mm and made
of steel, shall be designated as Csach Screw No.
2. Dimensions (in mm) 10X 30 IS : 1120 Steel.
Size No. Diameter of Unthreaded Shank Range of Preferred

A
Screw Length (see Note 1)
Nominal Max Min ’
Designation
10 4.88 5.00 4.72 20 - 35
14 6.33 6.43 6.05 20-100
7.72 7.85 7.47 25 - 110
: 9.86 9.98 9.00 25-200
28 11.28 11.40 11.02 25-200
32 12.70 12.83 12.45 25-200
Note l-Preferred lengths-20,25, 30,35,40,45, 50, 55,60,65,70,75, 80, 85,90, 100, 110,120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180,
190,200 mm.
Note 2-Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to two-thirds times the total length of the screw.
Note’J-For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the standard
Note 4-For tolerances, refer to 3 (Fig. 1) of the standard.
Note-In regard to the requirements not covered in thestundurd, refer to IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1120-1975 Specification for coach screws (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1363-1967 BLACK HEXAGON BOLTS, NUTS

AND LOCK NUTS (DIAMETER 6 TO 39 mm)
AND BLACK HEXAGON SCREWS (DIAMETER 6T0 24 mm)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of black hexagon bolts, and screws and class 4 for nuts and lock nuts as
nuts and lock nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and specified in IS : 1367-1967*.
black hexagon screws in the diameter range 6 to
24 mm. 2.2 Grade - Black Grade B of IS : 1367-1967*.
2. Requirements
*Technical sup&$)conditions for threaded fasteners yirst
2.1 Mechanical Properties - Class 416 for bolts revision).
398
SP : 21-1983
3. Designation - As shown in rhe following examples:
Fastener Size Length Designation

Bolt with a nut and Ml6 70 HexBoltM16 x 70NL - IS : 1363
a lock nut
Bolt with a nut Ml6 70 Hex Bolt M 16 x 70 N - IS : 1363
Bolt only Ml6 .70 Hex Bolt M 16 x 70 - IS : 1363
Screw Ml6 - Hex Screw M 16 x 70 - IS : 1363
Nut Ml6 - Hex Nut M 16 - IS : 1363
,
Lock nut Ml6 - Hex Lock Nut M 16 - IS : 1363
‘Double chamfered nut Ml6 - - Hex Nut DC M 16 - IS : 1363
4. Dimensions (in mm) - Black hexagon bolts and

screws:
Size Nominal Maximum Minimum Length of Bolts * Length of

Diameter Diameter Diameter Screws?
M6 6 6.48 5.7 z-100 10-40
W7) 7 7.58 6.64 30-100 10-40
M8 8 8.9 7.64 30-120 12-50
Ml0 10 10.9 9.64 35-150 16-60
Ml2 12 13.1 11.57 40-300 20-80
0414) 14 15.1 13.57 45-300 25-80
Ml6 16 17.1 15.57 50-300 25-80
0418) 18 19.1 17.57 55-300 40-80
M20 20 21.3 19.48 60-400 45-80
(M22) 22 23.3 21.48 65-400 50-80
M24 24 25.3 23.48 7 O-400 55-80
(~27) 27 28.3 26.48 80-400 -
M30 30 31.3 29.48 90-400 -
W33) 33 34.6 32.38 95-400 -
M36 36 37.6 35.38 110-400 -
(M39) 39 40.6 38.38 110-400 -
Note l-Preferred lengths for bolts-25, (28), 30, (32), 35, (38), 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, (95), 100, 110, 120,
130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380and400.
Note 2-Preferred lengths for screws-10, (1 l), 12, 14, 16, (18), 20, (22). 25, (28). 30, (32), 35, (38), 40,45, 50, 55,60, 65, 70. 75
and 80.
Note 3-Sizes shown in brackets in 4, Notes 1 and 2 are of second preference.
Note 4-For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 and 3 of the standard.

* Kange of preferred lengths for bolts.
i’ Rangeof preferred lengths for screws.
_---__-_
--- __--- ___.___-
kTdz%formation, refer to IS : 1363-1967 Specification for black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts
(diameter 6 to 39 mm) and black hexagon screws (diameter 6 to 24 mm) (first revision).
._ --.
399
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 13651978 SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK HEAD SCREWS

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for slotted countersunk 4. Dimensions (in mm)
head screws in the diameter range 1 to 20 mm.
Nominal Diameter Lengrh
Size
2. Requirements Nom MaX Min
2.1 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to the Ml 1.9 1.90 1.76 l-10 ,
property class 4.8 as specified in IS : 1367 -1967*. Ml.2 2.3 2.30 2.16 1-12
Where brass or aluminium alloy is used, it shall have (Ml .4) 2.6 2.60 2.46 1-14
minimum tensile strength of 300 MPa. Ml.6 3.0 3.00 2.75 2-16’
(Ml .8) 3.40 3.10 2-18
M2 Z.;: 3.80 3.50 2.5-20
2.2 Grade -Precision Grade (P) of IS : 1367- (M2.2) 4:2 4.20 3.90 2.5-22
1967*. M2.5 4.7 4.70 4.40 3-25
5.6 5.30 4-30
3. Designation - Shall be designated by name, E3.5) 6.5 65.E 6.14 4-35
nominal size, length, the number of this standard and 7.5 7150 7.19 5-40
the property class. For example, a slotted countersunk E4.5) 8.3 8.30 7.94 7-45
head screw of size M4, length 10 mm and of property 9.2 9.20 8.84 7-50
class 4.8 shall be designated as: E 11 11.0 10.57 7-55
M8 14.5 14.5 14.07 9-80
Cotintersunk Screw M4x 10 IS : 1365 -4.8
Ml0 18 18.00 17.57 11-100
Ml2 22 22.00 21.48 14-120
(M14) 25 25.00 24.48 18- 140
Ml6 29 29.00 28.48 22- 160
‘Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirsr (Ml8) 33 33.00 32.38 28- 180
revision). M20 36 36.00 35.38 28-200
Note 1 - Sizes shown in the parentheses are of second
preference.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1365-1978 Specification for slotted countersunk head screws (third
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1366-1968 SLOTTED CHEESE HEAD SCREWS

(DIAMETER RANGE 1.6 to 20 mm)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of slotted cheese head conform to Classes 4.6, 4.8, 6.6 or 8.8 of IS : 1367-
screws in the diameter range 1.6 to 20 mm for both 1967*. When brass or aluminium alloy is used for
coarse and fine pitches of screw threads specified in manufacture, it shall have minimum tensile strength of
IS : 42181967*. 30 kgf/mmZ .
2. Requirements 2.2 Grade - Precision Grade (P) of IS : 1367-

1967*.
2.1 Mechanical properties - Steel screws shall
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners first
*IS0 metric screw threads. revision).
400
SP : 21-1983
3. Types 10 mm, length 30 mm’and of property class 4.8 shall

Type A - Screws that are fully threaded be designated as ‘Slotted Cheese Head Screw
Type B - Screws that are partially threaded, AM 10x30 - IS : 1366-4.8.
thread length being not less than 4.1 When brass or aluminium alloy is used for the
minimum specified. manufacture, the words ‘brass’ or ‘aluminium’ shall
replace the property class designation 4.8 in the
designation given in 4.
4. Designation - As an example, a slotted cheese
head screw of Type A and having nominal diameter 5. Dimensions (in mm)
Size Nominal Maximum Minimum Length Length

Diameter Diameter Diameter (Types A and B)* (Type A)? ,
Ml.6 1.6 1.6 1.46 3- 16 3- 16
F$2.2) 22.2 2.2

2 2.06
1.86 44- - 20
22 4-
4- 16
18
M2.5 2.5 2.5 2.36 5 - 25 5 - 18
M3 3 3 2.87 g6: 30 6 - 20
(M3.5) 3.5 3.5 3.32 35 8 - 22
Z4.5) 44.5 44.5 4.32
3.82 lo-
8 - 45
40 lo-
8 - 25
22
M5 5 5 4.82 lo- 50 lo- 25

M6 6 6 5.82 10 - 80 10 - 30
MS, M8x1 8 8 7.78 12 - 90 12 - 35
MlO, MlOx 1.25 10 10 9.78 16 - 100 16 - 40
M12, M12xM1.25 12 12 11.73 20 - 105 20 - 50
M14, (M14x 1.5) ’ 14 14 13.73 25 - 110 25 - 55
M16, M16x 1.5 16 16 15.73 25 - 110 25 - 60
(M18), (M18X 1.5) 18 18 17.73 40 - 110 40 - 70
M20, M20x 1.5 20 20 19.67 50 - 110 50 - 75
Note I-Preferred lengths-3,4, 5, 6, (7), 8, (9), 10, (ll), 12, 14, 16, (W, 20, (22), 25, (28), 30, (32), 35, (3% 40,45.50,55,
60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, (95). 100, (105), 110.
Note Z-Sizes shown in brackets in 5 and Note 1 are of second preference.
Note J-For detailed dimensions, refer tb Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.

*Range of preferred lengths for Types A and B screws.
tRange of preferred lengths for Type A screws.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1366-1968 Specification for slotted cheese head screws (diameter
range 1.6 to 20 mm) (first revision).
401
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1929-1982 HOT FORGED STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT CLOSING

(12’ TO 36 mm DIAMETER)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of hot forged solid mild Note l-Thenominaldiameters14,18,22,27and33mm
steel and high tensile steel rivets (snap head, flat are of second preference.
countersunk head and flat head rivets) for hot closing in
Note 2 - Referred lengths - 28,30,32,35,38,40,45,50,
the diameter range 12 to 36 mm intended for general 55,60,65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100,105,110,115,120,125,
engineering purposes. 130,135, 140, 145, 150,155,160,165,170,175,180,185,190,
200, 205, 210, 215, 220 and 225 mm.
2. Dimensions
3. Tolerances - On length, + 1.5, 0 mm for
2.1 Range of Preferred Length Diameter Combina- diameter up to 16 mm and +3 .O, 0 mm for diameter
tions and Diameter of Rivet Holes: above 16 mm.
Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of 4. Tests

Lengths (see Note 2) Rivet Hole
4.1 Shear Test - Shear strength shall not be less
mm mm mm
than 260 MPa for mild steel rivets and 280 MPa for
12 28-80 13.5 high tensile rivets.
14 32-95 15.5
16 35-110 17.5 4.2 Head Soundness Test - Rivets shall withstand
40- 120 19.5 the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the
18,
21.5 fillet between head and shank.
20 45-125
22 50-140 23.5
24 55- 160 25.5 5. Designation - As an example, a high tensile
27 65-180 29 steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length
of 70 mm shall be designated as “Snap Head Rivet
3330 70- 200
85-225 :52 16 X 70HTIS : 1929”.Incaseofmildsteelrivet,the
36 95-225 38 symbol ‘I-II’ shall not be included in designation.
Note ~-For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of rhe srundurd.
Note 2-For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks&rivets, tolerances,methods
of tests, refer to IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 19~9-1982 Specification for hot forged steel rivets for hot closing
(12 to 36 mm diarneter) (first revision).
402
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2016-1967 PLAIN WASHERS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for plain washers of the Size External ‘Ihickness For Bolt1
followine tvnes: (Diameter Diameter Screw Size
4 Machined washers, for precision and semi-
precision grade of general purpose bolts and
44 4 M24
screws, in diameter range 1.7 to 155 mm.
50 4 (~27)
b) Punched washers, Type A, for black grade 56 4 M30
general purpose bolts and screws, in diameter 60 5 (M33)
range 1.8 to 52 mm. 66 5 M36
72 6 (M39)
cl Punched washers, Type B, for slotted head
screws, in diameter range 7.8 to 22 mm. 78 7 M42
85 7 (M45)
2. Requirements 92 8 M48
2.1 Shall be of steel, brass, aluminium or any other 98 8 (M52)
specified material. 105 9 M56
110 9 (M60)
2.2 The washers shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits 115 9 M64
and other defects. The holes shall be reasonably 120 10 (M68)
concentric with the outer periphery. 125 10 M72
3. Designation - A washer shall be designated by 135 10 (M76)
name, type, size, number of rhe standard and material. 140 12 M80
For example, a punched washer, Type B of size 14 mm 145 12 (M85)
made of brass shall be designated as ‘Punched Washer 160 12 M90
B 14 IS : 2016 - Brass’. 165 12 (M95)
175 14 Ml00
4. Dimensions (in mm) 14 (M105)
180
4.1 Machined Washers 185 14 Ml10
200 14 (Ml 15)
Size External Thickness For Bolt1
210 16 (M120)
(Diameter Diameter Screw Size
220 16 Ml25
of Hole)
230 16 (M 130)
1.7 4 0.3 Ml.6
240 18 Ml40
(2) 5 0.3 (Ml .8)
250 18 (M150)
5 0.3
(E) 6 0.5 (M?2) 4.2 Punched Washers, Type A, for Hexagonal Bolts
2.7 6.5 0.5 M2.5 and Screws
7 0.5 M3
(33:72) 8 0.8 (M3.5) Size Erternal Thickness For Bolt/
9 0.8 (Diameter Diameter Screw Size
(Z) 10 1 (My5) of Hole)
5.3 10 1 M5 1.8 4 0.4 Ml.6
12.5 1.6 (2.1) 5 0.4 (Ml 8)
$:I) 14 1.6 (E) 5 0.4
17 _ 1.6 M8 (22::) 6 0.5 (M”2T2)
ld.5 21 2 Ml0 2.9 6.5 0.5 M2.5
24 2.5 Ml2 3.4 7 0.5 M3
(::) 28 2.5 (M14) (4) 8 0.8 (M3.5)
30 3 Ml6 4.5 9 0.8
(S) 34 3 (M18) (5) 10 1 $45)
37 3 M20 5.5 10 1 M5
39 3 (M22) 6.6 12.5 1.6 M6
403
SP : 21-1983
External Thickness For Bolt1 Size External Thickness For Bolt1

(Diameter Diameter Screw Size (Diameter Diameter Screw Size
of Hole) of Hole)
(7.6) 14 1.6 (M7) 4.5 8 0.8
9 17 1.6 M8 (5) 9 0.8 (My5)
11 21 2 Ml0 5.5 9.5 1 M5
24 2.5 Ml2 11 1.6
(:d, 28 2.5 (M14) n”:6”, 13 1.6 (E)
30 3.15 Ml6 9 14 1.6
(ii) 34 3.15 (Ml81 11 18 2 I!!!
37 3.15 M20 20 2.5 Ml2
(% 39 3.15 (M22) (E) 24 2.5 (M14)
44 4 M24 18 27 3.15 Ml6
& 50 4 (M27) (20) 30 3.15 (M18)
56 4 M30 22 33 3.15 M20
(3363) 60 5 (M33) Note 1 - Sizes in brackets are of second preference.
66 5 M36
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions of machined washers, refer
($ 72 6 (M39) to Table 1 of the standard.
78 6 M42
(ii) 85 8 Note 3 -For other dimensional requirements for punched
(M45) washers, refer to Tables 2 and 3 of IS : 5369-1975*.
52 92 8 M48
5. Tolerances - For tolerances on diameters,
4.3 Punched Washers, Type B, for Round and
thickness, concentricity, permissible deviations for
Cheese Head Screws
parallelism and flatness for machined and punched
Size
washers, refer to precision and ordinary washers
External Thickness For Bolt1
(Diameter
respectively as specified in IS : 5369-1975*.
Diameter Screw Size
of Hole)
1.8 3.5 0.4 Ml.6 6. Finish - Plain washers shall be supplied in
3.5 0.4
natural finish. At the request of purchasers, washers
(2.1) (Ml .8)
4.5 0.4 may be phosphate coated, nickel plated, tinned,
n’:d, 4.5 0.4 (M2) galvanized, copper plated, cadmium plated, etc.
2.9 5 0.5 M2.5
3.4 6 0.5 *Generalrequirements for plain washers and lock washers (firer
(4) 7 0.5 revision ).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2016-1967 Specification for plain washers (first revision).
404
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2155-1982 COLD FORGED SOLID STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT

CLOSING (6 TO 16 mm DIAMETER)
(First Revision)
1. ‘Scope - Requirements of cold forged solid ‘steel Note 2 - Preferred lengths - 12, 14, 16, l&20,22,24,26,
rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to 16 mm, 28,30,32,35,38,40,42,45,48,50,55,60,65,70,75,80,85,
90, 95, 100, 105, 110 mm.
intended for general engineering purposes.
2. Dimensions 3. Tolerances -On

length, +0.5, 0 mm for ,
diameter up to 10 mm and 1 .O, 0 mm for diameter
2.1 Range of Preferred Length-Diameter Combina-
above 10 mm.
tions and Diameter of Rivet Holes:
Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of 4. Tests

Lengths (see Note 2) Rivet Hole
mm mm mm 4.1 Shear Test - Shear strength shall not be less
6 12-55 6.3 than 260 MPa.
8 14-70 8.4 4.2 Heat Soundness Test - Rivets shall withstand
10 18-85 10.5
the test without exhibiting any sign of marking at the
12 20-100 13
fillet between head and shank.
14 22-110 15
16 24-110 17
5. Designation - As an example, a snap head rivet
Note 1 - The nbminal diameter 14 mm is of second prefer- of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm shall be
ence. designated as ‘Snap Head Rivet 6 X 30 IS : 2155’.
Note ~-For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of thestandard.

Note 2-For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, methods
of tests, refer to IS : 10102-1982Technical supply conditions for rivets.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 215.5-1982 Specification for co/d forged solid steel rivets for hot
closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2389-1968 PRECISION HEXAGON BOLTS, SCREWS

NUTS AND LOCK NUTS
(DIAMETER RANGE 1.6 TO 5 mm)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for precision hexagon 1967” in respect of steel. When copper, brass,
bolts, screws, nuts and lock nuts in the diameter range aluminium, aluminium alloy or phosphor-bronze is
1.6 to 5 mm. used in manufacture, material shall have minimum
tensile strength of 30 kgf/mm*.
2. Requirements 2.2 Grade - Precision grade (P) specified in
IS : 1367-1%7*.
2.1 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to *Technical- supply conditions for threaded fasteners (+st
any of property classes specified in IS : 1367- revision).
405
SP : 21-1983
3. Designation
Fastener Size Length Property Designation

(mm) Class
Bolt M4 20 4.6 Hex Bolt M4~20 - IS : 2389 - 4.6
Screw M4 20 4.6 Hex Screw M4 x 20 - IS : 2389 - 4.6
Nut M4 4 Hex Nut M4 - IS : 2389 - 4
Lock Nut M4 4 Hex Lock Nut M4 - IS : 2389 - 4
-__ ------_
Note - When copper, brass, etc, are used for manufacture, the
material Fhall replace property class designations 4, 4.6, etc.
Size Nominal Maximum Minimum Nominal Length of Length of

Diameter Diameter Diameter Thickness of Bolt* Screw t
Bolt Head
Ml.6 1.6 1.6 1.46 1.1 12-16 3-12
(M1.8) 1.8 1.8 1.66 1.3 12-16 3-14
(M?2) 2.2
2 2.2
2 2.06
1.86 1.4 12-16 3-16
1.5 12,20 3-20
M2.5 2.5 2.5 2.36 1.7 .14-25 3-25
(MM335) 33.5 33.5 3.32
2.86 2 16-28 4-28
2.5 18-40 440
4 4 3.82 2.8 18-70 5-70
(My5) 4.5 4.5 4.32 3 22-75 5-75
M5 5 5 4.82 3.5 22-75 8-75
Note l-Preferred lengths for bolts--12, 14, 16, (18), 20, (22), 25, (28), 30, (32), 35, (38), 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, and 75.
Note Z-Preferred lengths for screws-3,4, 5,6, (7), 8, (9), 10, (1 l), 12, 14, 16, (18). 20, (22), 25, (28), 30, (32), 35, (38), 40,45,
50,55, 60, 65, 70, and 75.
Note 3-Sizes shown in brackets in 4, Note 1 and Note 2 are of second preference.
Note 4-For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 2 of rhe standard.
*Range of preferred lengths for bolts (bolts with lengths less than the minimum preferred lengths are to be treated as screws).
tR&nge of preferred lengths for screws.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2389-1968 Specification for precision hexagon bolts, screws, nuts
and lock nuts (diameter range I.6 to 5 mm) (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2585-1968 BLACK SQUARE BOLTS AND NUTS

(DIAMETER RANGE 6 TO39 mm) AND BLACK SQUARE SCREWS
(DIAMETER RANGE 6T0 24 mm)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for black square bolts Class 4.6 for bolts and screws and Class 4 for nuts of
and nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and black IS : 1367-1967”.
square screws in the diameter range 6 to 24 mm.
2.2 Grade - Black grade B as specified in
iS : 1367-1967*.
2. Requirements
-__--- -_
2.1 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to *Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (first revisiun).
406
SP : 21-1983
3. Designation
Fastener Thread Length Designation

Size (mm)
Square bolt with square nut Ml0 30 Square bolt MlOx30N - IS : 2585
Square bolt only Ml0 30 Square bolt MlOx30 - IS : 2585
Square screw Ml0 30 Square screw MlOx30 - IS : 2585
Square nut Ml0 Square nut Ml0 - IS : 2585
Square bolt with hexagon nut Ml0 30 Square bolt MlOx30HN - IS : 2585
Size Nominal Maximum Minimum Thickness Length of Length of

Diameter Diameter Diameter of Head Bolt* Screw t
wcwzinal)
M6 6 6.48 5.7 4 25-100 16-40
M8 8 8.9 7.64 5.5 30-120 16-50
Ml0 10 10.9 9.64 7 35-150 16-60
Ml2 12 13.1 11.57 8 40-300 2080
(Ml41 14 15.1 13.57 9 45-300 25-80
Ml6 16 17.1 15.57 10 50-300 25-80
(Ml81 18 19.1 17.57 12 55-300 40-80
M20 20 21.5 19.48 13 60-400 45-80
(MW 22 23.3 21.48 14 65-400 50-80
M24 24 25.3 23.48 15 70400 55-80
(~27) 27 28.3 26.48 17 80-400 -
M30 30 31.3 29.48 19 90400 -
(M33) 33 34.6 32.38 21 100400 -
M36 36 37.6 35.38 23 110-400 -
(MW 39 40.6 38.38 25 110-400 -
Note I-Preferred lengths for bolts-S, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 13% 140, 150, 160,
170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, and400.
Note 2-Preferred lengths for screws- 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, and 80.
Note 3-Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.
Note 4-For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 and 3 of the sfandurd.
*Range of preferred lengths for bolts (bolts with lengths less than the minimum preferred lengths are to be treated as screws).
tRange of preferred lengths for screws.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2.5851968 Specification for black square bolts and nuts (diameter
range 6 to 39 mm) and black square screws (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision).
407
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2687-1975 CAP NUTS

(First Revision) r
1. Scape - Requirements for cap nuts in the diame- Size I------- -A- -., e, Min 7hickness,
ter range 6 to 36 mm. Nom MaU Min NGVl
2. Requirements Ml6 24 24 23.67 26.75 20

(M18) 27 27 26.67 30.14 22
2.1 Grade - Precision grade (P) specified in M20 30 30 29.67 33.53 25
IS : 1367-1967*. (M22) 31 32 31.61 35.72 28
M24 36 36 35.38 39.98 30
2.2 Mechanical Properties - Property class 6 for
(M27) 41 41 40.38 45.63 32
steel cap nuts sizes up to M 30 and Class 4 for sizes
M30 46 46 45.38 51.28 34
above M 30 as specified in Table 8 of IS : 1367 -
M36 55 55 54.38 61.31 44
1967*. Brass or aluminium used for manufacture shall
have ultimate tensile strength not less than 300 MPa
(1 MPa=0.102 kgf/mmz). Note 1 - Sizes given in brackets are of second preference.
Note 2 --s =distance between parallel sides of hexagonal
3. Dimensions (in mm) nut, and
e =distance between extreme points of hexagon.
s
Size /_-/L_-, e, Min Thickness, Note 3 - For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
Nom Max Min NOm standard.
M6 10 10 9.78 11.05
4. Designation - Shall be designated by the name,
M8 13 13 12.73 14.38 1;
size and number of the standard. For example, a cap
Mlb 17 17 16.73 18.9 14
nut of size Ml0 shall be designated as ‘Cap Nut Ml0
Ml2 19 19 18.67 21.1 16
IS : 2687’.
Ml4 22 22 21.67 24.49 18
4.1 When brass or aluminium is used for man-
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners @rsf ufacture the word ‘Brass’ or ‘Aluminium’ shall come
revision ). at the end of designation.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2687-1975 Specification for cap nuts (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 29074964 NON-FERROUS RIVETS (1.6 to 10 mm)
1. Scope - Requirements of copper, tinned cop- 3. Dimensions (in mm)

per, brass and aluminium rivets of sizes 10 mm and
3.1 Range of Preferred Lengths - Diameter Corn;
below, intended for general purposes. This does not
bination
cover, rivets for aircraft or ship building purposes.
Nominal Length Nominal Lerlgth
2. Freedom from Defects -The rivets shall be Diameter (see Note) Diameter (see Note)
cleanly finished with heads concentric with the shanks
1.6 5-10 5 IO-50
and shall be free from imperfections. The ends of rivets
2 6-12 6 12-55
shall be square, cleanly sheared and free from rag or
2.5 6-16 8 14-70
burr. The tinning of tinned rivets shall be uniform and
3 6-35 10 18-70
be free from spots, pin holes, cracks, stains and
4 8-45
blisters. The tinning shall adhere firmly and be
non-porous. It shall not peel off. They shall be finished Note - Preferred lengths - 5,6,7,8,9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18,
smooth and bright all over. 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 35,40,45, 50, 55, 60,65, and 70.‘
408
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Rivet Heads On dia 8 and 10 +o. 10

-0.20mm
D H
a) Snap head 1.75 d 0.6 d
4.2 Length - + 1.5 mm
b) Flat countersunk head 120” 2d 0.29 d
c) Flat countersunk head 90” 2d 0.5 d 4.3 The-maximum inclination of the head sh&l not
d) Flat head 2d 0.25 d. exceed 2”.
Note 1 - D=diameter of rivet head,
Note - For tolerances on dimensions of heads of various types
G=height of rivet head, and
of rivets, refer to Tables 2 to 4 of the standard.
D=nominal diameter of rivet.
Note 2 - For shapes of these types of rivet heads,see Fig. 1 to 5. Designation - As an example, a snap head rivet
4 of rhe standard. of 6 mm diameter, having a length of 30 mm and made
of copper, shall be designated as ‘Snap Head Rivet
4. Tolerances
6x30 IS : 2907 Copper’.
4.1 Shank Diameter
On dia 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3 and 4 +0.05 mm 6. Tests
-0.10
Ondia5 and6 +o.os mm 6.1 Flattening Test - Shall not crack on cold Rat-
-0.15 tening to twice diameter.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2907-1964 Specification for non-ferrous rivets (1.6 to 10 mm).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2998-1982 COLD FORGED STEEL RIVETS FOR COLD CLOSING

(1 TO 16 mm DIAMETER)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of cold forged rivets, for Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of
cold closing in the diameter range 1 to 16 mm, intended Lengths (see Note 2) Rivet Hole
for general engineering pUrp0SeS. mm mm
1.4 :-m* 1.45
2. Material 1.6 5- 10 1.65
a) Grade I - Steel Class 1A of IS ; 1875- 2 6- 12 2.1
197g*. 2.5 6- 16 2.6
b) Grade 2 - Steel lOC4 of IS : 1570 (Part II)- 3 6-35 3.1
1979t. 3.5 7-40 3.6
3. Dimensions 4 S-45
5 10-45 ::32
3.1 Range of Preferred Length-Diameter Combina-
6 12-55 6.3
tions and Diameter of Rivet Holes
14-65
Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of 8’ 14-70 s’:4’
Lengths (see Note 2) Rivet Hole II) 18-85 10.5
mm mm mm 12 20- 100 13
1 3-6, 1.05 14 22-110 15
4-7 1.25 16 24-110 17
1.2
Note 1 - The mminal diameters 1.4,3.5,7 and 14 mm are of
*Specification for carbon steel billets, blooms, slabs and bars for second preference.
forgings (fourth revision). Note 2 - Preferred lengths - 3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 10, 12, 14,
tSchedules for wrought steels: Part II Carbon steels (unalloyed 16,1&u), 22,24,26,28,30,32,35,38,40,42,45,48,50,55,
steels) (jut revision). 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, and 110 mm.
409
SP : 21-1983
4. Tolerances - On length, +OS, 0 mm for 56 to 78 HRB (100 to 139 VPN) for Grade 2.
diameter up to 10 mm and + 1 .O, 0 mm for diameter
5.3 Head Soundness Test - Rivets shall withstand
above 10 mm. the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the
fillet between head and shank.
5. Tests
6. Designation - As an example, a countersunk
5.1 Shear Test - Minimum shear strength shall be
230 MPa for Grade 1 and 200 MPa for Grade 2. head rivet, with a countersunk angle of 90”, diameter
4 mm, length 24 mm and made from material Gradz 2
5.2 Hardness Test - Hardness on the head of rivet shall be designated as ‘Countersunk Head (90”) Rivet
shall be 48 to 73 HRB (91 to 127 VPN) for Grade 1 and 4X24 Grade 2 IS : 2998’.
Note l-For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
Note I-For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, refer to
IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions of rivets.
Note 3-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1500-1968Method for Brine11hardness test for steel (first revision) and IS : 10102-1982
Technical supply conditions for rivets.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2998-1982 Specification for cold forged steel rivets for cold closing
(I to 16 mm diameter) (first revision).
SCMMAHY OF
IS : 3063-1972 SINGLE COIL RECTANGULAR SECTION SPRING

WASHERS FOR BOLTS, NUTS AND SCREWS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for single coil rectangu- NoVn internal Tolerance External 7Xckness
lar section spring washers in the size range 2 to Size Diameter on Diameter,
100 mm. Internal Max
Diameter
(+)
2. Types
(14) 14.2 0.8 24.1 3
16 16.2 0.8 27.4 3.5
Type A - Spring washers with bent ends, and
(18) 18.2 0.8 29.4 3.5
Type B - Spring washers with flat ends.
20 20.2 1 33.6 4
3. Dimensions (in mm) (22) 22.5 1 35.9 4
24 24.5 1 40 5
Nom Internal Tolerance External Thickness
(27) 27.5 1 43 5
Size Diameter on Diameter,
30 30.5 1.2 48.2 6
Internal MCU
(33) 33.5 1.2 55.2 6 L_
Diameter
36 36.5 1.2 58.2 6
(+) 61.2 6
(39) 39.5 1.2
2 2.1 0.3 4.4 0.5 42 42.5 1.2 68.2 7
2.2 2.3 0.3 4.9 0.6 (45) 45.5 1.2 71.2 7
2.5 2.6 0.3 5.1 0.6 48 49 1.5 75 7
0.3 6.2 0.8 52 53 1.5 83 8
:3.5) 3.1
3.6 0.3 6.7 0.8 56 57 1.5 87 8
4 4.1 0.3 7.6 0.9 60 61 1.5 91 8
5 5.1 0.3 9.2 1.2 64 65 1.5 95 8
;, 7.1
6.1 0.4 11.8 1.6 72 73 1.5 105 8
0.4 12.8 1.6 76 77 1.5 109
8 8.2 0.4 14.8 2 80 81 1.5 111 :
10 10.2 0.6 18.1 2.2 90 91 1.5 121 8
12 ‘ 12.2 0.8 21.1 2.5 100 101 1.5 131 8
410
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. 6. General Requirements - The surface shall be
Note 2 - Steel weighs 7.85 kg/dm”. free of scale and burrs. The washers shall be coiled
Note 3 - For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the without any kinks except in case of turned up ends. The
standard.
ends of washers shall not abut when washers are
compressed.
4. Finish - Natural. May be phosphate coated,
mixed plated, tinned, galvanized, copper plated,
7. Tests
cadmium plated, etc, if specified.
7.1 Hardness Test - Hardness in the range of 43 to
5. Designation - Shall be designated by the nomi- 50 HRC.
nal size, type, number of the standard and the surface
7.2 Permanent Set Test - Shall satisfy the require-
protection, if any. For example, a single coil spring ,
merits.
washer having a nominal size 10 mm of Type A with
phosphate coating shall be designated as ‘Spring 7.3 Twist Test - The washer shall show no sign of
Washer Al0 - IS : 3063 Phosphate coated’. fracture.
Note-For test details, refer to 10 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3063-1972 Specification for single coil rectangular section spring
washers for bolts, nuts and screws (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 312j-1981 RIGGING SCREWS AND STRETCHING SCREWS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, Nom Size Length Proof
c-
components, dimensions, finishing and tests for rig- /Closed Open‘ Load
ging screws and stretching screws (doubleended and K$ mm mm kN
singleended) of the following nominal sizes: M80 1 360 1 760 500.0
a) Rigging screws - Ml2 to M90 M90 1 440 1 860 624.0
b) Stretching screws - M6 to M52
2.2 Stretching Screws
2. Dimensions Nom Size Body Length Proof Load
2.1 Rigging Screws (With ScrewedEye atBoth Ends) (Dia of Screw) mm kN
Nom Size Length Proof M6 100 2.0
(Dia of A Load M8 125 3.0
“Closed OpZ
Screw) kN Ml0 160 6.0
mm mm
Ml2 200 9.0
Ml2 330 525 10.0 Ml4 225 12.0
Ml6 370 550 18.0 Ml6 250 15.2
M20 400 570 28.0 M20 315 22.4
M24 475 700 36.0 M22 355 32.4
M27 550 825 44.0 M24 400 40.0
M30 550 825 63.0 M30 450 63.0
M33 600 875 75.0 M36 450 90.0
M36 600 875 86.0 M45 450 142.0
M39 660 960 100.0 M52 450 190.0
M45 700 %O 112.0
MS2 750 1000 144.0 Note 1 - Safe working load = ‘A proof load.
M56 775 1 025 194.0 Note 2 - Tolerance + 5 percent on all dimensions.
M60 800 1 050 214.0 Note 3 - For detailed dimensions and shapes of rigging
M64 1 070 1 450 286.0 screws, tubular body, screwed eye, screwed fork, screwed stud
M68 1 120 1 590 342 .O eye and stretching screws (open body, screw eyes and swivel eye),
M75 1 270 1700 400.0 refer to Tables 1 to 6 of the standard.
411
SP : 21-1983
3. Requirements 3.2.3 Each component of the completed rigging

3.1 Galvanizing - All components of assembled screw or stretching screw shall be free from any visible
stretching screw shall be galvanized by ‘hot-dip flaw or defect.
process’ with a coating of $nc of minimum 98.5”
percent purity. All screw threads shall be ‘brush’ or 4. Tests
‘spun ’ galvanized.
4.1 ProofTesting ‘- Each screw shall withstand the
3.2 Workmanship proof load without any sign of defect.
3.2.1 Rigging screw - The tubular body shall be
4.2 Tests for Galvanizing - Shall be tested in
neatly and clearly made and finished. The screwed eye,
accordance with IS : 2633- 1972* and IS : 6745-
screwed fork and screwed stud eye shall be cleanly
1972:, if specified.
forged and finished. The thimble, when in place in the
fork, shall be capable of free movement.
*Methods of testing uniformity of coating on fine,coated articles
3.2.2 Stretching screw -The body, the screw (first revision 1.
eye and the swivel eye shall be solid forging without TMethodsfor determination of weight of zinc coating on zinc
weld, neatly and cleanly made and finished. coated iron and steel articles.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3121-1981 Specification for rigging screws and stretching Screws
(first revision).
SL’MMARI’ OF
IS : 3468-1975 PIPE NUTS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for pipe nuts, hexagonal IS : 1367-1967*.
and octagonal, in the size range & l/8 to % 6 for pipe
threads according to IS : 554-1975* and in the size 2.2 Mechanical Properties - Property class 6 of
range G l/8 to G6 for pipe threads according to IS : 1367-1967*. For brass pipe nuts, the material
IS : 2843-1975t. shall have ultimate tensile strength of not less than
2. Requirements 300 MPa (lMPa=O. 102 kgf/mm2).
2.1 Grade - Semi-precision grade (S) of 3. Dimensions (in mm)
Size
External ‘Ihickness, Distance Between
‘(According to (According to’ Diameter, Nom Parallel Sides,
IS : 554 *) IS : 2643 t) Nom Norn
R,S G4g 18 6 19
R,y, G1/4 20 6 22
R; % G% 25 6 27
% M (Z) 30 8 32
- 30 8 32
R, % (Z) 33 9 36
- 38 9 41
R* 1 Cl 43 10 46
R$l (G
G 1%
1%) 52
47 11
10 55
50
R, 145 G 1?4 56 12 60
%2 G 1% 70
65 13 75
70
R,2H (GG2;
G 2% ) 80
90 16 85
95
Kbntintted)
*Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are

required on the threads (second revision).
tDimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes (first *Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (first
revision ) rmision ).
412
SP : 21-1983
Size External Thickness, Distance Between

‘(According to (According to’ Diameter, Nom Parallel Sides,
IS : 554) IS : 2643) Nom NCTn
%3 100 19 105
(GG3L) 115 19 120
%4 G4 128 22 135
G4M 143 22 150
b-5 158 22 165
(GGs5%) 172 25 180
%6 G6 182 25 190
Note 1 - Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the stundard.
4. Designation - Shall be designated by the name, designated as ‘Hex Pipe Nut %-IS : 3468’.
size and number of the standard. For example, a
4.1 When brass is used for manufacture, the word
hexagonal pipe nut of nominal size & 2 shall be
‘Brass ’ shall come at the end of designation.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3468197.5 Specification for pipe nuts (first revision).
SCMMAR\’ OF
IS : ‘3757-1972 HIGH TENSILE FRICTION GRIP BOLTS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of high tensile friction 2. Requirements
grip bolts size Ml2 to M39. Such bolts used in
2.1 Mechanical Properties - Property class 8.8 or
conjunction with high tensile steel nuts and quenched
and tempered steel washers are tightened to a pre- 10.9 of IS : 1367-1%7*
determined shank tension in order that the clamping 2.2 Grade - Black grade (B) of IS : 1367-1%7*.
force thus provided will transfer loads in connected 2.3 Marking - Marked with 4 grooves (1 mm wide
members by friction between parts and not by x 0.5 or 0.6 mm deep equally spaced) on the head.
shear in or bearing on bolts or piles of connected
members. 3. Dimensions (in mm)
Size Diameter Length of Thickness Distance Befween Range of

ofShark Threaded of Bolt Parallel Faces Preferred
Portion Head, Nom of Hex Head, Nom Lengths (see Note 1)
/ \
Ml2 12 3’0 I 8 22 30-70
Ml6 16 38 44 10 27 40-100
M20 20 46 52 13 32 55-130
@I221 22 50 56 14 36 60-130
M24 24 54 60 15 41 65- 150
0427) 27 60 66 17 46 70-160
M30 30 66 72 19 50 80-180
(M33) 33 72 78 21 55 100-200
M36 36 78 84 23 60 100-200
(M39) 39 84 90 25 65 100-200
‘I’For lengths up to 130 mm.
SFor lengths over 130 mm up to 200 mm.
-
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (firsr

relM.m).
413
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 -Preferred lengths - 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, bolt of size M16, length 100 mm and of property class
65,70,75.80,90,100,110,120,130, 140, 150,160,170,180, 10.9 conforming to the standard shall be designated as
190, and 200 mm.
‘Friction GriD Bolt M16X 100~-IS : 3757 - 10.9’.
Note 2 - Size shown in brackets are of second preference.
5. Tests - Bolts shall be subjected to tests specified
Note 3 - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to in IS : 1367-1%7*.
Table 1 of the standard.
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirsf
4. Designation - As an example, a friction grip revision )
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3757-1972 Specification for high tensile friction grip bolts (first
revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4762-l 968 WORM DRIVE HOSE CLIPS FOR GENERAL PURPOSES

1. Scope -Requirements for worm drive hose Size Suitable for Internal Test
clips of two types, for general purpose. This does not Hose Sizes Diameter Pressure
relate to worm drive hose clips for aircraft use.
WA4in up to ;Max-- Min
2. Types kgf/cm2
Type A - Hose clips with serrated bands. 80 60 80 80 60 4.2
Type B - Hose clips with pierced bands. 90 70 90 90 70 ”
100 80 100 100 80 ”
3. Dimensions (in mm) 115 95 115 115 95 ”
130 110 130 130 110 ”
Size Suitable for Internal Test
145 125 145 145 125 ”
Hose Sizes Diameter Pressure
160 140 160 160 140 ”
-xG?Z+
Min Up t0 Min Note - For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
kgf/cmk standard.
12 9 12 12 9 14.1
16 12 16 16 12 ” 4. Designation - Shall be designated by the size,
20 14 20 20 14 ” type and number of the standard. For example, a hose -
22 16 22 22 16 ” clip of nominal size 25 mm and with serrated band shall
25 18 25 25 18 ” be designated as ‘Hose Clip 25 A - IS : 4762’ .
30 22 30 30 22 ”
5. Finish - Various parts of the hose clip shall be
35 25 35 35 25 8.4
smooth and shall be fEe from burrs and sharp edges.
40 30 40 40 30 ”
The parts shall be zinc plated or cadmium plated.
45 32 45 45 32 ”
50 38 50 50 38 ” 6. Tests - Shall satisfy the prescribed (a) torque
60 45 60 60 45 ” test, (b) fatigue torque loading test, and (c) hydraulic
70 50 70 70 50 ” pressure test.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4762-1968 Specification for worm drive hose clips for general
purposes.
-
414
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAKY OF
IS : 5369-1975 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLAIN WASHERS

AND LOCK WASHERS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - General requirements and permissible 3.1 Finish - Natural. May be phosphate-coated,
deviation for plain washers, lock washers and similar nickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper-plated or
parts. cadmium-coated.
2. Grades - Precision and ordinary.

3.2 Shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits and other
3. Requirements defects. All sharp edges shall be removed.
Note-For permissible deviation on main dimensions and concentricity of the hole with respect to outside diameter of precision grade
washers as well as of ordinary grade washers, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5369-197.5 General requirements for plain washers and lock washers
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5372-1975 TAPER WASHERS FOR CHANNELS (ISMC)

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for taper washers for Note 1 - LX B are dimensions for taper washers in plan.
use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Channels Note 2 - Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.
@MC) with bolts in diameter range of 10 to 39 mm.
Note 3 - For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
standard.
Nominal L xB Tbzkness For Bolt

Size (see Note 1) e Size 3. Grade - ‘Ordinary’ grade of IS : 5369-1975*.
(Diameter fiin Thick
End End
22 x 22 2 4.3 Ml0 4. Designation - Shall be designated by the name,
26 x 30 2.5 5.7 Ml2 size and number of the standard. For eitample , a taper
32 x 36 3 6.8 Ml6 washer of nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as
40 x 44 3.5 8.1 M20 ‘Taper Washer 18 - IS : 5372’.
44 x 50 4 9.2 Wl22)
56 x 56 4 9.9 M24
56 x 56 4 9.9 (~27)
62 x 62 4 10.5 M30
68x68 4 11.2 (M33)
75 x 75 4 11.9 M36 *General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first
80 x 80 4 12.4 @439) rev&n).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5372-1975 Specification for taper washers for channels (ISMC)
(first revision).
415
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAHY OF
IS : 5373-1969 SQUARE WASHERS FOR WOOD FASTENINGS

I. Scope - Requirements for square washers in- Naninal Size Sides Thickness For Bolt
tended for use in wood fastenings with bolts in (Dia of Hole) Size
diameter range 10 to 52 mm.
(36) 100 6 %:)
(i29) 125
110 8 0439)
Nominal Size Sides Thickness For Bolt 45 135 8 M42
(Dia sf Hole) Size 48 140 8 M45
11.5 30 Ml0 52 150 10 M48
14 40 Ml2 56 160 10 M52
18 50 Ml6
Note - Sizes in brackets are of second preference.
23 60 M20
24 70 M22
80 M24 3. Designation - As an example, a square washer
(ii) 90 (~27) for wood fastenings having a nominal size of 18 mm
33 95 M30 shall be designated as ‘Square Washer 18 IS : 5373’.
Note-Other requirements not covered in the standard shali conform to IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for plain washers and
lock washers cfirst revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5373-1969 Specification foi square washers for wood fastenings.
SUMMAKY OF
IS : 5374-1975 TAPER WASHERS FOR I-BEAMS (ISMB)

(First Revision)
I. Scope - Requirements for taper washers for Nominal LxB Thickness For Bolt
use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Beams Size (see Note I),--, .Size
(ISMB) with bolts of 10 mm to 39 mm diameter: (Diameter l&in Thick
of Hole) End End
68 x 68 3 12.6 (M33)
%’ 75 x 75 3 13.6 M36
Nominal L x.B Thickness For Bolt (42) 80 x 80 3 14.2 (M39)
Size (see Note 1) ,A- Size Note 1 - L X B are dimensions of taper washers in plan.
(Diameter Thin Thick
Note 2 - Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.
of Hole) , End End
Note 3 - For detailed dimensions, refer to table given in 2 of
11 22 x 22 1.5 4.6 Ml0
the standard.
14 26 x 30 2 6.2 Ml2
3. Grade - ‘Ordinary’ grade of IS : 5369-1975*.
18 32 x 36 2.5 7.6 Ml6
(Z) 44
40 x 44
50 3 10
9.2 (M22)
M20 4. Designation - As an example, a taper washer of
nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as ‘Taper
\ 26 56 x 56 3 10.8 M24 Washer 18 IS : 5374’.
(30) 56 x 56 3 10.8
33 62 x 62 3 11.7 ‘General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first
revision).
For detailed dimension, refer to IS : 5374-1975 Specification for taper washers for I-Beams (ISIWB) (first
rfkision).
416
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5624-1970 FOUNDATION BOLTS
1. Scope - Requirements of foundation bolts in the Size Nom Dia Length of Bolts
diameter range 8 to 72 mm. (see Note 1)
M36 36 400-2 500
2. Requirements M42 42 500-2 500
2.1 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to M48 48 630-3 200
property class 4.6 of IS : 1367-1%7*. M56 56 800-3 200
M64 64 1 000-3 200
2.2 Grade - Shall conform to Black Grade (B) M72x6 72 1600-3 200
specified in IS : 1367-1%7*.
2.3 Shank Forms - At the discretion of manufac-
Note 1 - Range of preferred lengths.
turer. Some typical forms are given in Appendix A of
the standard. Note 2 - Preferred lengths - 80, 100. 125, 160, 200, 250,
300,400,500,630,800,1000,1 250,1600,2 000,2 500 and
Note - For other requirements of bolts refer to IS : 1367-1%7*. 3 200.
Note 3 -Foundation bolts shall have coarse pitch screw

3. Dimensions (in mm) thread in the dia range 8 to 64 mm and 6 mm pitch screw threads
for dia 72 mm, conforming to IS : 4218..
Size Nom Dia Length of Bolts
(see Note 1)
MS 8 W-200 4. Designation - As an example, a foundation bolt
Ml0 10 lOcL250 of nominal dia 20 mm, length 200 mm and with a
Ml2 12 125-300 hexagon nut and conforming to the standard shall be
Ml6 16 16&500 deslgnated as ‘Foundation Bolt M20x200 N
M20 20 200-800 IS : 5624’. \\
M24 24 250-I 250 4.1 If foundation bolt given in 4 is without nut, it
M30 30 30&2 000 shall be designated as ‘Foundation Bolt M20~200
IS : 5624.’
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirst
WViSbl). *ISO metric screw threads. ,
Note-For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5624-1970 Specification for foundation bolts.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6113-1970 ALUMINIUM FASTENERS

FOR BUILDING PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements for J-type hook bolts and 2.2 Grade - Black Grade B of IS : 1367-1967*.
nuts, mushroom head seam bolts and nuts, and washers Note - For other requirements in regard to manufacture, te
of aluminium for roofing sheets. lerance, tests, etc. of bolts and nuts, refer to IS : 1367 -1%7* and
for requirements of washers, refer to IS : 5369-1975t.
2. Requirements
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners @rsl
revision).
2.1 Material - Aluminium and aluminium alloys, tGenera1 requiremmts for plain washers and lock washers (firsr
as specified in the standard. revision).
417
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions (in mm) 4. Designation -- As an example, seam bolt size

M8, length 20 mm and material HG 19 of IS : 739-
3.1 J-Type Hook Bolts
Size Nominal Dia Thread Length, Size of Nut Preferred Lengths

Min
M6 6 25 M6 70,80, 90, 100, 110 120, 130, 140 and 150
MS 8 25 M8 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,
170, 180, 190 and 200
Ml0 10 25 Ml0 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,
170, 180, 190 and 200
1
3.2 Mushroom Head Seam Bolts and Nuts
Size Nominal Dia Thickness Q Size of Nut Preferred Lengths

Head (Nopn)
M5 5 3 M5 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50

M6 6 4 M6 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,
70, 80, 90 and 100
M8 8 5 M8 12,14,16,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55,60,70,
80, 90 and 100
Ml0 10 6 Ml0 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50
3.3 Washers - Types A, B, C and D. Hole diame- 1966* shall be designated as ‘Seam Bolts M8 X 80
ter 5.8, 7, 10 and 12 for size 5, 6, 8 and 10 IS : 6113 HG 19’.
respectively.
Note - For detailed dimensions of bolts, nuts and washers, *Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, wire
refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. (for general engineering purposes) (revised).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6113-1970 Specification for aluminium fasteners for building
purposes.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6610-1972 HEAVY WASHERS FOR STEEL STRUCTURES

1. Scope - Requirements for heavy washers for 42 mm.
use in steel structures in the diameter range 14 to 2. Dimensions (in mm)
Nominal Tolerance on Outer Dia Tolerance Thickness Suitable for

Size Size on Outer Bolt Size
{Diameter) Dia
14 +0.43 24 -1.30 8 Ml2
18 + 0.43 30 - 1.30 8 Ml6
22 +0.52 37 -1.60 a M20
24 +0.52 39 -1.60 8 M22
26 +0.52 44 - 1.60 8 M24
30 +0.52 50 - 1.60 8 M27
33 + 0.62 56 -1.90 8 M30
36 +0.62 60 -1.90 8 M33
39 +0.62 66 - 1.90 8 M36
42 +0.62 72 -1.90 8 M39
418
SP : 21-1983
3. Material - Shall be made from steel. of this standard. Example: Washer 14 IS : 6610.
4. Designation - By nominal size and the number
Note-Other requirements of washers shall be as specified in IS : 5369-1975 ‘General requirements for plain washers and lock
washers (first revkion)‘, for ordinary washers.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6610-1972 Specification for heavy washers for steel structures.
SUMMARY OF
I$ : 6623-1972 HIGH TENSILE FRICTION GRIP NUTS
Note - Property class 10 is not covered in IS : 1367-1967”.

1. Scope - Requirements for high tensile friction
For details of this class refer to Appendix A of the srandard.
grip nuts in the size range Ml2 to M39.
3.2 Grade - Black grade (B) according to
2. Dimensions (in mm) IS : 1367-1%7*.
Size Ml2 Ml6 M20 M22 M24 (M27) M30 (M33) M36 (M39)
Dia offfok 12 16 20 22 24 27 30 33 36 39
s, Nom (see Note 1) 22 27 32 36 41 46 50 55 60 65
Thickness 10 13 16 18 19 22 24 26 29 31
@Head, Nom
Note l-Distance between paralIe1 sides.
Note 2-Sizes within brackets are of second preference.
Note 3-For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 and for tolerances, refer to Fig. 1 of the standard.
Note - Other requirements shall be as specified in

3. Requirements IS : 1367-1967’ for Black (B) grade.
3.1 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to the 4. Designation - By the name, size, the number of
property class 8, 10 or 12 according to IS : 1367- the standard and’ symbol for mechanical properties.
1967*. Example: Friction Grip Nut M20 IS : 6623 - 12.
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (firit *Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirst
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6623-1972 Specification for high tensile friction grip nuts.
419
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6639-1972 HEXAGON BOLTS FOR STEEL STRUCTURES

1. scope - Requirements for hexagon bolts in the Note 1 - For other requirements of bolts, refer to IS : 1367-
size range 12 to 39 mm for steel structures. 1967’ and for requirements of hexagon nuts used with bolts, refer
to IS : 1363-1%7t.
Size Diameter Distance Between Length of Bolts,

A Parallel Side, Nom Nom (see Note 1)
/ \
Nom MaX Min
Ml2 12 13.10 11.57 19 30-120
Ml6 16 17.10 15.57 24 35-150
M20 20 21.30 19.48 30 40-175
(M22) 22 23.30 21.48 32 40-200
M24 2A 25.30 23.48 36 45-200
(M27) 27 28.30 26.48 41 60-200
M30 30 31.30 29.48 46 80-200
0433) 33 34.60 32.38 50 ’ 100-200
M36 36 37.60 35.38 55 100-200
(M39) 39 40.60 38.38 60 110-200
Note 1- Kange of preferred lengths.
Note Z-Preferred lengths-30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 135,
140, 145, 150, 155, 160, 165, 170, 175, 180, 185, 190, 195 and 200.
Note 3-Siies shown in brackets are of second preference.
Note 4-For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 and for tolerance, refer to Fig. 1 of the standard.
Note S-For clamping lengths for bolts, refer to Table 2 of the standurd.
3. Requirements Note 2 -For approximate weight of bolts with nuts, refer to

Appendix A of ahe smndard for guidance.
3.1 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to
propertyclass4.6orB.BofIS : 1367_1%7*.Thebolts 4. Designation - By size, length, number of the
shall withstand a minimum shear stress of 260 MPa standard and property class. Example: Hex Bolt
(for bolt testing purposes and is not related to actual M12x30 IS : 6639 - 4.6.
design stresses).
3.2 Grade - Black (B) grade according to

IS : 1367-1%7*. *Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (jirsr
revision).
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners @rsr tBlack hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (diameter 6 to 39 mm)
revision). and black hexagon screws (diameter 6 to 24 mm) Cfirst revision).
For derailed information, refer to IS : 6639-1972 Specification for hexagon bolts for steel structures.
420
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6649-1972 HIGH TENSILE FRICTION GRIP WASHERS

1. Scope - Requirements for high-tensile friction 4.2 Material - C-45 steel according to IS : 1570-
grip plain circular and square taper washers for use 1961*. Phosphorus and sulphur content shall not
with high-tensile friction grip bolts and nuts in the exceed 0.04 and 0.05 percent respectively on ladle
diameter range 12 to 3 9 mm. analysis, and 0.05 and 0.06 percent respectively on
check analysis.
2. Types”
4.3 Heat Treatment -Washers shall be through
Type A - Plain circular washers.
quenched and tempered to have a hardness between 38
Type B - Square taper washers for use with
to 45 HRC (see IS : 1586-1968t).
I -beams.
Type C - Square taper washers Ibr use with Note - Other requirements shall be as for ordinary washers
channels. according to IS : 5369-19756.
5. Designation - By the type, size and number of
3.1 Plain Circular Washers the standard. Example: Washer ‘A’ 21 - IS : 6649.
Size (dia), nom 13 17 21 (23) 25 (28) 31 (34) 37 (40)
For bolt size Ml2 Ml6 M20 M22 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
External dia, nom 24 30 37 39 44 50 56 60 66 72
* Thickness, nom 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5
3.2 Square Taper Washers
Size (dia), nom 13 17 21 (23) 25 (28) 31 (34) 37 (40)

For bolt size MI2 Ml6 M20 M22 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
Onesidedimension, nom (see 30 36 44 50 56 59 62 68 75 80

Note 1)
Other side dime&ion, nom (see 26 32 40 44 56 59 62 68 75 80

Note 1)
Note l-a and b are dimensions of taper washers in plan.
Note 2-Sizes shown within brackets are of second preference.
Note 3-For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.
4. Requirements
4.1 Grade - As specified for ordinary washers in _
IS : 5369-1975*. *Schedules for wrought steels for general engineering purposes.
tMethods for Rockwell hardness test (I3 and C scales) for steel
(firstrevision).
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first *General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first
-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6649-1972 Specification for high tensilefriction grip washers.
421
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6733-1972 WALL AND ROOFING NAILS

1. Scope - Requirements of wall and rooting nails. 3. Designation - Shall be designated by size,
length and the number of the standard.
Examples: Wall nail 4x30 IS : 6733
Type of Size Dia of Length Approx No. Roofing nail 5.6X50 IS ; 6733
Nail (Dia of Head of Nails/ 4. General Requirements - Nails shall be
Shank)
kg machine made and may have die marks and feeding
Wall nail 4.00 8.0 30 260 knife marks on shank. They shall be uniformly circular
4.50 9.0 40 190 in section, straight, free from wastes. Wall nails shall
Roofing nail 5.60 13.4 50 have sharp points and roofing nails, a chiesel point.
95
The heads shall be properly formed and concentric
60 80
6.30 15.1 with shanks.
70 60
80 50
5. Finish - Plain finished.
2.1 Maximum eccentricity and ovality of the centre
of the nail head from axis of shank shall be 14 percent 6. Test
of shank diameter, Max.
6.1 Bend Test - Nails whe:i cold shall not break or
Note 1 - For tolerances, refer to Table 1 of dze srundard.
crack when doubled over either by pressure or by
Note 2 - Length of tapered portion minted at bottom) of the blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal
nail shall be 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of shank. to the diameter of the test piece and sides are parallel.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6733-1972 Specification for wall and roofing nails.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6736-1972 SLOTTED RAISED COUNTERSUNK HEAD

WOOD SCREWS
1. Scope - Requirements for slotted raised coun- Screw No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of
tersunk head wood screws. (Screw , \ , Preferred
Designation) Nom Max Min Lengths
2. Dimensions (in mm) (se& Note 1) -
8 4.17 4.29 4.04 12-75
Screw No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of
(Screw ,-A-, Preferred 9 4.52 4.65 4.39 15-75
Designation) Nom Max Min’ Lengths 10 4.88 5.00 4.72 15-75
(see Note 1) 12 5.59 5.72 5.38 20-75
1.52 1.55 1.47 8-12 14 6.30 6.43 6.05 25-75
1.78 1.85 1.70 8-12 16 7.01 7.14 6.76 30 -75
2.08 2.16 1.98 8-12 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 30-75
2.39 2.46 2.29 8-12 20 8.43 8.56 8.18 30-75
2.74 2.87 2.64 12 -25 24 9.86 9.98 9.60 30-75
3.10 3.23 2.97 12-30
3.45 3.58 3.33 12- 40 Note 1 - Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15,2O,i.5,30,35,
3.81 3.94 3.68 12-40 40,45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 and 75 mm.
422
SP : 21-1983
Note 2 - Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal Note 5 - For tolerances, see Fig. 1 of the standard.
to 2B times the total length of the screw.
Note 3 - Dia of head CJ4u.x)shall be 2 times the diameter of 3. Designation - As an example, a slotted raised
unthreaded shank (Nom). countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm
Note 4 -For detailed dimensions, refer to Table I of the ar.d made of steel shall be designated as ‘Wood Screw
skmlard. No. 8x20 IS : 6736 Steel’.
Note-In regard to the requirements not covered in thestandard, refer to IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6736-1972 Specification for slotted raised countersunk head wood
screws.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6739-1972 SLOTTED ROUND HEAD WOOD SCREWS

1. Scope - Requirements for slotted round head Size No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of
wood screws. (Screw r------F Preferred
Designation) Nom Min Lengths
2. Dimensions (in mm) I_ (see Note 1)
14 6.30 6.43 6.05 25 -75
Size No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of 16 7.01 7.14 6.76 30-75
(Screw b ;$e;;sd 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 30-75
Designation) Nom Max Min
(see Note 1) 20 8.43 8.56 8.18 30-75
24 9.86 9.98 9.60 30-75
0 1.52 1.55 1.47 8-12 Note 1 - Preferred len& - 8, 10, 12, 15,20,25,30,35,
1 1.78 1.85 1.70 8 -12 40,45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, and 75 mm.
2 2.08 2.16 1.98 8 -12 Note 2 - ‘Rreaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal
to 2/3 times the total length of the screw.
3 2.39 2.46 2.29 8 -12
Note 3 - Dia of head @far) shall be 2 times the diameter of
4 2.74 2.87 2.64 12-25 unthreaded shank QVCWZ).
5 3.10 3.23 2.97 12-30 Note 4 - For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
6 3.45 3.58 3.33 12 -40 standard.
7 3.81 3.94 3.68 12 -40 Note 5 - For tolerances, see Fig. 1 of he standard.
8 4.17 4.29 4:04 12-75
3. Designation - As an example, a slotted round
9 4.52 4.65 4.39 15-75 head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of
10 4.88 5.00 4.72 15-75 steel shall be designated as ‘Wood Screw No. 8 X 20
12 5.59 5.72 5.38 20-75 IS : 6739 Steel’.
Note---In regard to the requirements not covered in thestandard, refer to IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6739-1972 Specification for slotted round head wood screws.
-
423
!$I’ : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 676O- 1972 SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK HEAD WOOD SCREWS

1. Scope - Requirements for slotted countersunk Size No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of
head wood screws. (Screw I , Preferred
Designation) Nom Max Min Lengbcls
2. Dimensions (in mm) (see Note 1)
16 7.01 7.14 6.76 30 -200
Screw No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 30-200
(Screw ,pA-s Preferred
20 8.43 8.56 8.18 30-200
Designation) -Nom Max Min Lengths
24 9.86 9.98 9.60 30-200
(see Note 1)
Note 1 - Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15,20,25,30,35,
0 1.52 1.55 1.47 8-12 40,45,50,55,60,65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100,110,125,150,
1 1.78 1.85 1.70 8-12 175 and 200 mm.
2 2.08 2.16 1.98 8-12 Note 2 - Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal
3 2.39 2.46 2.29 8-12 to 2/3 times the total length of the screw.
4 2.74 2.87 2.64 12-25 Note 3 - Dia of head @fax) shall be 2 times the diameter of
unthreaded shank Qva).
5 3.10 3.23 2.97 12-30
Note 4 - For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
6 3.45 3.58 3.33 12 -40
standard.
7 3.81 3.94 3.68 12-40
Note 5 - For tolerances, see Fig. 1 of the stundard.
8 4.17 4.29 4.04 12-75
9 4.52 4.65 4.39 15 -75 3. Designation - As an example, a slotted coun-
10 4.88 5.00 4.72 15-75 tersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and
12 5.59 5.72 5.38 20-100 made of steel shall be designated as ‘Wood Screw
14 6.30 6.43 6.05 30-100 No. 8x20 IS : 6760 Steel’.
NOW-In regard to the requirements not covered in thes/andurd, refer to IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6760-1972 Specification for slotted countersunk head wood screws.
SUMMAHY OF
IS : 8033-1976 ROUND WASHERS WITH SQUARE HOLE

FOR WOOD FASTENINGS -
1. Scope - Requirements for washers with square 3. Dimensions (in mm)

hole for use in wood fastenings with bolts in dia range Thickness Suitable for
Size (Side External
6 to 24 mm. Bolt Size
of Square) Dia
6.6 22 1 M6
2. Grade - Ordinary grade as specified in 9 28 2 M8
IS : 5369-1975*. 11 34 2 Ml0
14 45 3.15 Ml2
18 58 4 Ml6
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first 22 68 4 M20
revision). 26 92 4 M24
424
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - Dimensional tolerances as well as tolerances for 4. Designation - As an example, a round washer
form and position shall conform to those of ordinary washers of with square hole of nominal size 14 mm shall be
IS : 5369-197S*.
designated as ‘Washer With Square Hole 14
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers Vrsr IS : 8033’.
m+sion).
Note-In regard to the requirements not covered in thestandard, refer to IS : 5369-1975General requirements for plain washers and
lock washers cfirsf revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8033-1976

Specification for round washers with square hole for
wood fastenings.
SUMMAHY OF
IS : 8412-1977 SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK HEAD BOLTS

FOR STEEL STRUCTURES
1. Scope - Requirements of slotted countersunk IS : 1367-1%7*.

head bolts for steel structures in the dia range 10 to 24
mm. 4. Designation - As an example, a slotted coun-
tersunk head bolt of nominal size M16, length 70 mm
2. Dimensions (in mm) with nut and property class 8.8 shall be designated as
‘Slotted Countersunk Head Bolt Ml6 X 70 N
Nominal Nominal Dia Range of Preferred IS : 8412-8.8’.
Size Lengths (see Note 1)
4.1 When the bolts are required without nuts, the letter
Ml0 10 20-160 ‘N ’ appearing between length and number of the
Ml2 12 25 - 160 standard in the designation shall be omitted.
Ml6 16 30 - 160
M20 20 50-160 5. Mechanical Properties - Property classes 4.6
M22 22 55 - 160 or 8.8 of IS : 1367-1%7*.
M24 24 60 - 160
6. General Requirements - Nuts used with slot-
Note 1 - Preferred lengths - 20,2~, 30,3~, 40.45, SO,SS, ted countersunk head bolts shall conform to the
60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, and
160 mm. requirements as specified in IS : 1363-1967t.
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to
Table 1 of the srandard.
Note 3 - For lengths of fully threaded bolts, refer to Table 2 *Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands yirsr
revision).
of the standard.
tspecification for black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (dia 6 to
3. Grade -Black grade (B) as specified in 39 mm) and black hexagon scnws (dia 6 to 24 mm) @rst revision).
Note-In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, refer to IS : 1363-1967 Technical supply conditions for threaded
fasteners (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8412-1977 Specification for slotted countersunk head bolts forsteel
structures.
425
,
SP : 21-1983
I
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8869-1978 WASHERS FOR CORRUGATED SHEET ROOFING

1. Scope - Requirements for washers for corru- Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and shapes of washers of
gated sheet roofing. all types, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of fhe standard.
4. Grade -Ordinary grade specified in

2. Types
IS : 5369-1975*.
a) Bituminous felt washers,
b) Steel washers, and 5. Designation - As an example, a bituminous felt
C) Lead washers. washer, Type A of nominal size 7 shall be designated
as ‘Bituminous Felt Washer A7 - IS : 8869’.
2.1 Bituminous felt washers and lead washers are of
two types namely Type A and Type B, and steel
6. General Requirements
washers are of four types namely Type A, Type B,
Type C and Type D. 6.1 Steel washers shall be galvanized by hot dipping
as specified in IS : 5358-1969t.
6.2 Bituminous felt washers shall be suitably impre-
Nominal Size Thickness Suitable gnated. These washers when heated and maintained at
@ia of Hole) Bolt Size a temperature of 75+1”C for 1 hour shall not get
7 1.6 M6 separated and flow out.
10 1.6 M8
12 1.6 Ml0
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (@sr
Note 1 - The dimensions given in the above table shall be revision).
applicable to all types of washers mentioned in 2 and 2,l. Vpecification for hot-dip galvanized coatings on fasteners.
For detailed in-formation, refer to IS : 8869-1978 Specification for washers for corrugated sheet roofing.
426
SECTION 21
WIRE ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 278-1978 Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing (third revision) 429
IS : 2365-19’77 Steel wire suspension ropes for lifts, elevators and hoists (firer 430
revision)
428
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 278-1978 GALVANIZED STEEL BARBED WIRE FOR FENCING

(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for two types of gal- 4.2 Freedom from Defects
vanized steel barbed wire with two strands of wire.
4.2.1 Line and point wires shall be circular in
section, free from scales and other defects and shall be
2. Types
uniformly galvanized.
TypeA (Iowa type) - Barbs shall have 4 points,
4.2.2 Line wire shall be in continuous lengths and
formed by twisting two point wires, each two
shall not contain any welds other than those in rod
turns, tightly around both line wires making
before it is drawn. The distance between two succes-
altogether four complete turns.
sive splices shall not be less than 15 m.
Type B (Glidden type) - Barbs shall have 4
points, formed by twisting two point wires, Note - For requirements in regard to manufacture, galvaniz-
ing and chromating, refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.
each two turns, tightly around one line wire
making altogether four complete turns.
5. Designation - A galvanized steel barbed wire of
Note - For details, see Fig. 1 of rhe standard.
Type A and of size designation 1 shall be designated as:
3. Sizes (in mti) Steel Barbed Wire, A- 1 IS : 278
Size Nominal Diameter Mass of Distance
6. Tests
Desig- /ran Complete Between
nation Barbed Two 6.1 Tensile Test - Tensile strength of line wire
Wire Wire Wire Barbs shall be 390 to 590 N/mm*. Minimum breaking loads
8/m of completed barbed wind and individual line wires
1 2.50 2.50 136-155 75+ 12 shallbe3.7and3.0kNfor2.50and2.24mmlinewire
2 2.50 2.50 108-120 150+ 12 respectively.
3 2.50 2.00 108-125 75+ 12
6.2 Zinc Coating
4 2.50 2.00 89-103 150+ 12
5 2.24 2.00 97-106 75+ 12 6.2.1 Line wire - Shall satisfy the requirements
6 2.24 2.00 78-85 150+ 12 as for ‘light coated wire’ given in IS : 4826-1979*.
subject to a reduction of not more than 5 percent of the
Note - Number of lays between the two consecutive barbs
shall vary between 2 to 7.
specified values.
6.2.2 Point wire - Shall be tested only for mass
3.1 Tolerances - f0.08 mm on diameter of line of zinc coating. Shall meet the requirements as for
wire and point wire. ‘light coated wire’ given in IS : 4826_1979*subject to
a reduction of not more than 15 percent of the specified
4. Requirements
values.
4.1 Material - Galvanized mild steel wire con-
6.3 Ductility Test - Line wire shall withstand
forming to IS : 280-1978*.
wrapping and unwrapping eight turns round its own
diameter without fracture.
*Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes *Specification for hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel
(rhird revision). wires (first revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire (First revision), IS : 1755-1961 Method
for wrapping test of wire, and IS : 4826-1979 Specification for hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 278-1978 Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
(third revision).
429
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 23651977 STEEL WIRE SUSPENSION ROPES

FOR LIFTS, ELEVATORS AND HOISTS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of steel wire ropes for 2.2 The actual diameter of rope shall be within +4
use with lifts, elevators and hoists having cars or and - 1 percent of the nominal diameter.
platforms carrying passengers or goods and working in
,
guides. Does not apply to ropes used for winding 3. General Requirements - The wire ropes shall
purposes in mines. Following rope constructions and conform to IS : 6594-1977* and also meet the follow-
size ranges are covered: ing requirements.
Construction Tensile Designution Core Size Range

/ * \ ,---A...._
1 230 1 420 1 570 I-i’Dre Steel
6x 19 (12/6/l) X X X x - 6 :?l2
6x 19 (9/9/l) X X X x - 6 to 20
6x 19 (12/6+6 F/l) X X X x - 6 to 20
6 x 19 (9/9/l) X X X x - 8 to 20
8x 19 (12/6+6 F/l) X X X x - 8 to 20
2. Rope Size, Tolerance and Minimum Breaking 3.1 The main core of rope shall be of fibre only.
Load
3.2 If jointing by tucking is required, it shall be in
2.1 The sizes of the rope, designated as ‘nominal case of wires 0.5 mm diameter and smaller.
diameter’shall be 6,7,8,9, 10, 11,12, 13,14,16,18, 3.3 The mass of ropes given in 2.1 are for fully
19 and 20 mm. Size range for different rope construc- greased ropes.
tions is given in 1. Range of breaking load and mass for *Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands Cfirst
different rope constructions is given in following table: revision)
Nominal Approximate Range of Minimum Breaking Load Corresponding
Diameter Mass Range to Tensile De@gnmion of Wires of
mm kg/l00 m / - .
1 230 1 420 1 570
kN kN kN
6 12.5 to 13.7 13.6 to 15 15.7 to 17.3 17.4 to 19.1
7 17.0 to 18.6 18.5 to 20.4 21 to 23 24 to 26
8 22.1 to 24.3 23 to 27 26 to 31 29 to 34
9 28.0 to 30.8 29 to 34 33 to 39 37 to 43
10 34.6 to 38.0 35 to 42 41 to48 45 to 53
11 41.9 to 46.0 43 to 50 49 to 58 55 to 64
12 49.8 to 54.7 51 to 60 59 to 69 65 to 76
13 58.9 to 64.3 60 to 70 69to81 76 to 90
14 68.3 to 74.5 69to81 80 to 94 88 to 104
16 89.2 to 97.3 90 to 106 104 to 123 115 to 136
18 113 to 123 114 to 135 !32 to 155 146 to 172
19 126 to 137 127 to 150 147 to 173 163 to 191
20 139 to 152 141 to 166 163 to 192 180 to 212
Note l-The nominal diameter 19 mm is non-preferred.
Note 2-For exact value of minimum breaking load and approximate mass corresponding to each rope construction,
refer to Tables 1 to 5 of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2365-1977 Specification for steel wire suspension ropes for lifts,
elevators and hoists (first revision).
430
SECTION 22
GLASS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 2553-1971 Safety glass (second revision) . 433

IS : 2835-1977 Flat transparent sheet glass (second revision) 433
IS : 3438-1977 Silvered-glass mirrors for general purposes virst revision) 434
IS : 5437-1%9 Wired and figured glass 435
432
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2553-1971 SAFETY GLASS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling b) Uniformity test.

and te%’ for safety glass meant for use in glazing c) Fragmentation test.
windows and doors of buildings and land transport.
3.4 Specific Requirements of Laminated Safety
2. Types Glass
a) Toughened safety glass (T) a) Thickness - 4 mm to 20 mm.
b) Laminated safety glass (L) comprising of two b) Tolerance on thickness.
or more sheets of glass bonded together with
+ 0.4 mm for glass 4 to less than 7 mm thick.
interlayers of plastics.
f0.5 mm for glass 7 to less than 10 mm
3. Requirements thick.
+0.6 mm for glass 10 mm and above.
3.1 Safety glass shall be made from Special Selected
Quality(SSQ) or ‘AA’QualityofIS : 2835-1977* for c) Light stability test.
wind shields of vehicles and Selected Quality (SQ) or
4 Boil test.
‘A’ Quality of IS : 283S-1977* for other than wind
shields. e) Fracture and adhesion test.
3.2 Thickness shall be measured according to
methodprescribed.inAppendixBofIS : 2835-1977*. 3.5 Optical Requirements - Specified only for
wind screen and apply only to the primary vision area
3.3 Specijc Requirements of Toughened Safety of wind screen.
Glass
a) Thickness - As specified in Table 1 of
a) Optical deviation.
IS : 2835-1977*.
b) Distortion of vision.
*Specification for flat transparent sheet glass (second revision). c) Visual transmission.
-~-
Note-For test requirements and methods, refer to 4.2 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2553-1971 Specification for safety glass (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 28351977 FLAT TRANSPARENT SHEET GLASS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and method of sampling mirrors, safety glass other than wind shields
and test for flat transparent sheet glass for use in etc;
manufacture of photographic plates, projection slides, cl B Quality
___
or Ordinary Quality (OQ): In-
_. ._
silvered glass mirrors, toughened or laminated safety tended for glazing and framing purposes.
glass and for glazing and framing purposes. d) C Quality or Green House Quality (GQ):
Intended for green house glazing, production
2. Classification: of frosted glass, strips for flooring, etc.
a) AA Quality or Special Selected Quality
(SSQ): Intended for use where superior qual- 3. Requirements
ity is required, such as safety glass for wind
3.1 Sheet glass shall be flat, transparent, clear and
shields, high quality mirrors, photographic
free from any cracks.
plates and projection slides.
b) A Quality or Selected Quality (SQ):Intended 3.2 Thickness (in mm) - 1.1, 1.4, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5,
for selected glazing and manufacture of 3.0, 4.0, 4.8, 5.5, 6.3, 8.0, 9.0, lO.Oand 12.0mm
433
SP : 21-1983
(see Table 1 of the standard). Thickness 3 mm to 6.3 mm f2.0 mm

Thickness 8 mm to 12 mm +3.0 mm
Note - For determination of thickness of sheet glass, refer to
Appendix B of rhr standard.
3.4 Distribution ofAllowable Defects - Sheet glass
3.3 Tolerunces on Cut Sizes shall not have defects greater than those specified in
Thickness up to 2.5 mm t1.5 mm Table 1.
._--__
TABLE 1 DISTRIBUTION OF ALLOWABLE DEFECTS IN SHEET GLASS
SL DEFECTS ‘AA’ QUALITY 'A'@ALI.N 'B'@AUTy REMARKS
NO. r----------sI- /Fb
Central Outer Central Outer Central Outer
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Q,
i) Gaseous inclusion, maxi- 1.5 3.0 3.0 6.0 12.0 18.0 Separated by at
mum size, mm least 30.0 cm
ii) Opaque gaseous inclusions, Nil Nil 3.0 6.0 6.0 12.5 Separated by at
maximum size, mm least 61 .O cm
iii) Knots, dirt and stones, Nil Nil 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 Separated by at
maximum size, mm least 61 .O cm
iv) Scratches, mbs and crush Faint Faint Faint Light Light Medium Separated by at
least 61 .O cm
v) Bow, percent, Max -0.25 + ~O.S--3 -1.o+ -
-
vi) Reams, strings and lines Light Light Light Light Medium Heavy
vii) Waviness, mm 12.5 12.5 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 -
viii) Sulphur stains Nil Nil Nil Nil Inconspicuous ones -
allowed
Note l- ‘C’ quality sheet glass may have defect of any size or intensity bur shall no .stones or knots which may cause
breakage.
Note 2--l% methods of tests for defects given at SI No. (iv) to (vi), refer to 5.2 to 5.4 and for defects given at SI No. (vii),
refer to Appendix A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 28351977 Specification for flat transparent sheet glass (second
revision).
SUMMAHY OF ~
IS : 3438-1977 SILVERED-GLASS MIRRORS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling reflecting surface, such as separation of silver from
and test for silvered-glass mirrors used for general glass, sulphide or other spots, haze or other visible
purposes. defects.
2.4 Copper Coating - Amount of copper not less
2. Requirements
than 6.5 mgldm2.
2.1 Shall consist of glass sheet coated with silver on
2.5 A suitable protective coating shall be applied
one surface; the silver shall be protected by a metallic
over the copper coating.
copper film, which in turn shall be covered by a
protective coating. Note - For method of test for silver and copper coatings, refer
to Appendix A of the sranabrd.
2.2 Glass sheet shall comply with requirements for
AA and A qualities of IS : 2835-1977*. Polished plate
or float glass may be used if mutually agreed. 3. Tests
2.3 Silvering - Silver deposit not less than 10 mg/ 3.1 Testfor Waviness - A sketch comprising broad
dm2. Shall be free from defects or blemishes in the straight bands drawn at 45” to horizontal in a rectangle
shall be waved in front of the mirror placed vertically.
*Specification for flat transparent sheet glass (second rekbn). The image of the bands shall be free from distortion.
434
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Salt Spray Test - The silver shall not show pin water. No silver shall be visible through exposed
holes, spots, fog, cloudiness, haze, separation or any metallic copper plating.
other visible defect when subjected to the prescribed
3.3.1 On further treatment of copper plating with
test.
concentrated ammonia, a clear silver film without any
3.3 Testing ofCopper and Silver Plating -Remove pin holes, blemishes or other visual defects shall be
protective coating by suitable removers and flush with exposed.
Note-For methods of tests given in 3.1 and 3.2, refer to 6.1 and 6.2 of the standura’.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3438-1977 Specification for silvered-glass mirrors for general
purposes (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5437-1969 WIRED AND FIGURED GLASS
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling 3.1.1 Wire Mesh Used - Steel wire of 0.46 to
and test for wired glass, wired-figured glass and 0.56 mm diameter completely embedded at least 1 mm
figured glass. from surface.
Note - These glasses are used mainly for glazing partitions,

doors and windows of buildings. Figured glass is suitable for 3.1.2 Pattern ofMesh - Square or diamond with
glazing where decoration and screening, by diffusion of light, are wires welded; orhexagonal with wires twisted.
main considerations.
2. Requirements 3.1.3 Wire mesh shall not contain more than 3

broken wires per square metre._
2.1 Shall not contain any stones with cracks or stones
bigger than 2 mm diameter.
3.2 Figured Glass - Square or rectangular sheets
2.2 In case of tinted glass, coloured patches shall not of the following thickness:
be permitted.
2.3 Flame-Proofness - Wired glass and wired- Thickness Tolerance

figured glass shall satisfy the flameproofness test mm mm
prescribed in Appendix A of the standard. 2 +0.3
3 +0.3
3. Dimensional Details 4 +0.4
3.1 Wired Glass and Wired-Figured Glass - 5 +0.4
Square or rectangular sheets; thickness 6.4 * 0.4 mm. 6 +0.5
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5437-1969 Specification for wired and figured glass.
435
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 110-1%8 Ready mixed paint, brushing,, grey filler for enamels, for use over primers 439
yirst revision)
IS : 345-1952 Wood tiler, transparent, liquid 439
IS : 419-1967 Putty, for use on window frames Cjirst revision) 440
IS : 423-1961 Plastic wood for joiners filler (revised) 441
IS : 424-1965 Plastic asphalt (revised) 441
IS : 3709-1966 Mastic cement for bedding of metal windows 442
438
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1 lo-1968 READY MIXED PAINT, BRUSHING, GREY FILLER

FOR ENAMELS, FOR USE OVER PRIMERS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements, and the methods of 2.6 Shall also comply with requirements given in
sampling and test for ready mixed paint, brushing, Table 1.
grey filler, for enamels, for use over primers. The
material is used as a filler over the primer in the TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT3 FOR READY MIXED PAINT,
BRUSHING, GREY FILLER, FOR ENAMELS,
painting system normally followed for enamels.
FOR USE OVER PRIMBRS
SL &4RACTERISTlC m-m
2. Requirements No.
2.1 Composition shall be such as to meet require- i) Drying time, hard dry Not more than 12 hours
ments of the standard. For obtaining satisfactory ii) C&sistency Smooth and uniform and
flattening properties, use of slate powder along with suitable for bmshing
extenders and pigments as may be necessary is iii) Finish Smooth and matt to
recommended. semi-glossy
2.2 Flattening Properties - Material shall not be iv) Colour G=Y
inferior to approved sample when tested as prescribed v) Residue on sieve, percent 2.0
in Appendix A of the standard. by weight, Max
2.3 Hold Out Pioperty - Shall pass test prescribed vi) FlexibiQty and adhesion No visible damage or de-
in Appendix B of the standard. (atIer48 hours air-drying) tadunent of fitIn
2.4 Water Content - Shall not exceed 0.5 percent. vii) Flash point ICotbelow 30°C
viii) Keeping properties Not less than six months
2.5 Weight in kgper 10 Litres - Shall be within +3
percent of approved sample.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 101-1964 Methods of test for ready mixed paints and enamels (second revbion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 110-1968 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler,
for enamels, for use over primers (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : .345-1952 WOOD FILLER, TRANSPARENT, LIQUID

1. Scope - Requirements and the methods of test 2. Requirements

for the material commercially known as wood filler,
transparent, liquid. The material is used for tilling 2.1 Shall be free from skins, foreign matter and
wood surfaces prior to the application of undercoating undissolved water. The material shall be of a consis-
varnish in the varnishing system normally followed for tency suitable for straight application to wood and shall
finishing woodwork. efficiently fill its pores.
439
SP : 21-1983
2.2 Composition -A varnish vehicle and filling

TABLE 1 REQUIREhtENTS FOR WOOD
material such as whiting, or barytes or silica, or FILLER. TRANSPARENT, LIOUID
_
gypsum or a mixture of these.
SL CHAR.~CTERIS~~ REQUIREMENT
No.
2.3 Setting Time and Finish - When tested aS
i) Flash point, Min 3O.O”C
prescribed in Appendix A of the standard, setting time
of the material shall be not more than one hour; and ii) Volatile matter content, 40.0
finish shall be such that grain of wood shall be clearly percent by weight,
MUX
visible through varnish film.
iii) Keeping properties Not less than 6
months from the
2.4 Material shall also comply with the requirements date of manufacture b
given in Table 1.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 197-1969 Methods of sampling and test for varnishes and lacquers Cfirstrevision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 345-1952 Specification for wood filler, transparent, liquid.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 419-1967 PUTTY, FOR USE ON WINDOW FRAMES

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling cracking. After being moulded in place, it shall convert
and test for putty for use in fixing glass panes on wood itself into a cohesive mass which will not yield to
and metal frames and for filling splits, cracks and holes specified pressure after 72 hours.
in wood or metal.
2.4 The material shall also comply with the require-
ments given in Table 1.
2. Requirements
_
2.1 Form and Condition - Shall be homogeneous -
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PUTTY, FOR USE ON
paste and shall be free from grit and other visible WINDOW FRAMES
impurities. SL C&ARACT~~~STIC REQU~RE~~ENT
2.2 Composition - Shall consist only of whiting, No
i) Residue on sieve, percent by 5.0
linseed oil, raw and suitable varnish medium.
weight, Max
2.3 Consistency - The material, after thorough ii) Water content, percent by 1.0
working in hands, shall have good plastic quality weight, Max
without sliminess or stickiness that would render it iii) Keeping properties Not less than
difficult to handle and apply. It shall work readily and 6 months
smoothly under a palette knife without crumbling or -
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 85-1950 Methods of test for oil pastes for paints; and for method of determination of
setting time, refer to Appendix A of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 419-1967 Specification for putty, for use on window frames (first
revision).
440
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 423-1961 PLASTIC WOOD FOR JOINERS FILLER

(Revised)
(With Amendment No. I)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of test for Note - The nitrocellulose syrup shall consist of nitrocel-
material commerciallv known as elastic wood, for lulose, suitable resins, plasticizers, solvent and diluent.
joiners tilers. The material is usei for filling holes,
2.3 Consktency -It shall be in such a condition
cracks and other irregularities in wood to produce a
that it can be easily worked into a smooth paste suitable
smooth surface capable of taking suitable stain to
for application by a palette knife for filling.
match timber.
2.4 Performance - Twenty-four hours after appli-
2. Requirements cation, it shall be in such a condition that it has not
shrunk unduly, cracked or fallen away from the
2.1 Form and Condition - Shall be homogeneous
wooden surfaces to which it be applied. Shall be
and free from grit and other visible impurities.
capable of being worked by a chisel, plane or saw, as if
it were timber, and of holding nails screws and similar
2.2 Cposition
fixtures.
a) Nitrocellulose syrup, 77 2.5 Keeping Qualities - Six months from the date
percent, Min of manufacture, in original sealed containers.
b) Wood dust passing Remainder
through IS Sieve No. 15 2.6 Marking - Containers shall be marked
(aperture’ 151 microns) ‘HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE’ in red letters and ‘Flash
with a maximum mois- point below 24.4”C’.
ture content of 5 percent
For detailed information, refer to IS : 423-1961 Specification for plastic wood for joiners fillers (revised).
SUMMARk’ OF
IS : 424-1965 PLASTIC ASPHALT

(Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling steel panel and is examined for setting properties after
and test for plastic asphalt used for stopping leaks in 24 hours with finger and by subjecting it to a definite
roofs and for protection of underground tanks. load for a specific time.
2.5 Flexibiliq and Adhesion
2. Requirements
a) Heat test - shall not slip more than 6.5 mm.
2.1 Fomz and Condition - Shall be a homogeneous b) Cold test’- shall remain plas’tic and firmly
paste and fEe from dust, grit and other visible adherent.
impurities. c) Bend test - shall not crack or flake off.
2.2 Composition - Not less than 30 percent by 2.6 The material shall also comply with the follow-
weiiht of bitumen, remainder being asbestos fibres and ing requirements:
volatile thinners. a) Flash point - not below 35°C.
2.3 Consistency - Shall be in such a condition that b) Keeping properties -not less than 6
it can be easily worked into a smooth paste suitable for months.
application by a trowel without drawing or pulling. 2.7 Water Content - Shall not exceed 0.5 percent
2.4 Setting Time - A test film prepared on a mild by weight.
441
SP : 21-1983
Note- For methods of tests for setting time and flexibility and adhesion, refer to the Appendices A and B of fhe s~undurd. For other
tests, refer to IS : 101-1964 Methods of test for ready mixed paints and enamels (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 424-1965 Specification for plastic asphalt (revised).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3709-1966 MASTIC CEMENT FOR BEDDING

OF METAL WINDOWS
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling Note 1 - Up to 10 percent of whiting may be replaced by
and test for mastic cement for bedding of metal asbestos fibrous powder. One to two percent shall be replaced by
windows. The material is intended for application by yellow ochre to distinguish it from putty for fixing glass.
hand or with a putty knife. It is used for bedding, one Note 2 - Oils shail be a mixture of 85 percent raw linseed oil
metal window into another, metal windows into and 15 percent castor oil.
wooden frames, or metal frames into masonry or 2.3 Adhesion -The material shall satisfactorily
concrete. It is expected to be suitable for taking paint adhe= to wood, masonry, concrete and metal frames
without lifting, bleeding or cracking. . of painted or etched galvanized steel or pre-treated
aluminium.
2. Requirements
2.4 Water Content - Not more. than 0.5 percent.
2.1 Shall be in the form of a homogeneous paste,
which after working in the hands, shall have good 2.5 Setting Properties - Spread material to a thick-
plastic quality. Shall work smoothly under a knife ness of 5 to 6 mm on a mild steel plate 300 X 300 mm
without crumbling or cracking and without sticking and approximately 2.5 mm thick. Keep it in vertical
unduly to hand or knife. position under standard atmospheric conditions for 7
days. There shall be no cracks or sagging of the film
2.2 Composition and shall remain plastic.
a) Whiting 80 to 85 percent by weight 2.6 Keeping Properties - Six months from the date
b) Oils 15 to 20 percent by weight of manufacture in original sealed containers.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 85-1950 Methods of test for oil pastes for paints.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3709-1966 Specification for mastic cement for bedding of metal
windows.
442
SECTION 24’
THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 3677-1973 Unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation (First revision) 445
IS : 3690-1974 Unbonded glass wool for thermal insulation (jirsr revision) 446
IS : 4671-1968 Expanded polystyrene for thermal insulation purposes 447
IS : 6598-1972 Cellular concrete for thermal insulation 448
IS : 7509-1974 Thermal insulating cements (Type 750) 449
IS : 7510-1974 Thermal insulating cements (Type 350) 450
IS : 8154-1976 Preformed calcium silicate insulation (for temperatures up to 650°C) 450
IS : 8183-1976 Bonded mineral wool 452
444
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3677-1973 UNBONDED ROCK AND SLAG WOOL

FOR THERMAL INSULATION
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling 3.4 Moisture Absorption - Not more than 2 per-
and test for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal cent.
insulation. Can be used for temperature range 700°C
to -200°C with suitable facing material. 3.5 Incombustibility - Shall be rated as incombus-
tible. Loss in total mass shall not exceed 5 percent.
2. Types
3.6 Thermal conductivity or k-value shall not exceed
Type I - Loose rock and slag wool (shall be the following:
fluffy, light weight material). Mean k-value in mW/cm
Type 2 - Stitched rock and slag wool mats (shall Temwpture ,--+n
be in the form of stitched mats with confining 200 150
media on one or both sides. If confining medium is kg/m3 kg/m3 kg/m3 kg/m3
metallic cage, it shall be attached to the mat by 0.48 0.50
50 0.42 0.46
stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres or by 0.54 0.56
100 0.50 0.52
stitching at not more than 250 mm along width and 0.68
150 0.60 0.62 0.66
100 mm along length with twine or metallic wire
200 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.80
not thicker than 0.7 mm. If confining medium is of
hessian cloth, scrim cloth, kraft paper or glass 3.7 Sulphur Content - Shall not exceed 0.6 percent.
tissue, it shall be stitched to the mat with suitable
twine). 3.8 Width and Thickness - Type 2 material shall be
supplied in widths of 90 + 3 cm or 100 zb 3 cm, and in
thickness of 25, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm.
3. Requirements
Tolerance on thickness is -5 mm.
3.1 Apparent Density - As agreed to between the 3.9 Optional Requirements

purchaser and the supplier. Tolerance ? 15 percent on
declared density. 3.9.1 Moisture content - Not more than 2 per-
cent.
3.2 Apparent density under specified load (in kg/m3) 3.9.2 Resistance to micro-organisms - Shall not
show any mould of bacterial growth.
Load, kgfJcm2 Apparent Density Under Speci$ed
3.9.3 Odour emission test - There shall be no
Load, Max
h apparent difference in odour.
/ \
At Factory At Site 3.9.4 Oil content - Not more than 2 percent.
0.01 95 115 3.9.5 Carbon content - Not more than 0.3 per-
0.02 105 130 cent of total carbon.
0.05 136 165
0.07 150 185 3.9.6 Resistance to vibration - Not more than
0.10 165 200 1 percent by height of settlement.
3.9.7 Resistance to jolting - Not more than
3.3 Shot Content - Shall not exceed the values 3 percent by height of settlement.
given below. Any shot present shall not be more than
5 mm in any dimension. 3.9.8 Heat resistance - Shall not suffer visible
deterioration in the fibrous structures.
500-micron IS sieve 5 percent (by mass) 3.9.9 Fibre diameter - Average not more
250-micron IS sieve 15 percent (by mass) than 7 microns.
445
SP : 21-1983
3.9.10 Alkalinity - pH value of solution shall be 3.9.11 Corrosive attack - Shall not cause corro-
between 7.0 and 10.0. sion of. the surface on which it is applied.
Note-For methods of tests for requirements given in 3.2 and 3.9.10, refer to Appendices A and B of the sfundnrd. For other test
methods, refer to IS : 3144-1965 Methods of test for mineral wool thermal insulation materials and IS : 3346-1966 Method for the
determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3677-1973 Specification for unbonded rock and slag wool for
thermal insulation (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3690-1974 UNBONDED GLASS WOOL

(F&t Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling 3.3 Shot Content - Shall not exceed 10 percent by
and test for unbonded glass wool for thermal insula- mass when sieved through 250-micron IS Sieve. Any
tion. Can be used for temperahire range of - 195°C to shot present shall not be more than 2 mm size.
550°C with a suitable facing material.
3.4 Moisture Absorption - Not more than 0.5 per-
cent.
2. Types
3.5 Incombustibility - Shall be rated as incombus-
tible. Loss in total mass shall not exceed 5 percent.
Type 1 - Loose glass wool (shall be fluffy light
weight material). 3.6 Thermal conductivity or k-vaIue shall not exceed
the following:
Type2 - Stitched glass wool mats (shall be in the
form of stitched mats with a confining media on Mean Temperature k-value
one or both sides. If the confining medium is of CC> (mW/cm”C)
metallic cage, it shall be attached to the mat by 50 0.43
stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres or by 100 0.52
stitching at not more than 250 mm along width at 150 0.64
100 mm along length with twine or metallic wire 200 0.78
not thicker than 0.7 mm. If confining medium is of
hessian cloth, scrim cloth, kraft paper or glass 3.7 Type 2 Material - Width as agreed. Tolerance
tissue, it shall be stitched to the mat with suitable on width: +3 mm. Thickness: 25, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90
twine). and 100 mm. Tolerance on thickness: 5 mm.
3.8 Optional Requirements
3. Requirements
3.8.1 Resistance to micro-organism - Shall not
support any mould or bacterial growth.
3.1 Apparent Density - As agreed to between the
3.8.2 Odour emission test - There shall be no
supplier and the purchaser. Tolerance f 15 percent on
apparent difference in odour.
declared density.
3.8.3 Sulphur content - Not more than 0.1 per-
3.2 Apparent Density Under SpeciJed Load:
cent.
Load Apparent Density, Max
3.8.4 Carbon content - Not more than 0.3 per-
&g/cm21 &g/m3) cent of total carbon.
0.01 130
3.8.5 Resistance to vibration - There shall be no
0.02 145
evidence of settlement.
0.05 180
0.07 210 . 3.8.6 Resistance to jolting - There shall be no
0.10 240 evidence of settlement.
446
SP : 21-1983
3.8.7 Fihre diameter - Not more than 10 mic- 3.8.9 Alkalinity --pH value of solution shall be
rons. between 7.0 and 10.0.
3.8.8 Heat resistance - Shall not suffer visual 3.8.10 Corrosive attack - Shall not cause corro-
deterioration in the fibrous structures. sion on the surface on which it is applied.
Note-For methods of tests for requirements given in 3.2 and 3.8.9, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For other test
methods, refer to IS : 3144-1965 Methods of test for mineral wool thermal insulation materials, and IS : 3346-1966 Method for the
determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3690-1974 Specification for unbonded glass wool for thermal
insulation (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4671-1968 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FOR

THERMAL INSULATION PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling 3.1.2 Thickness - 15,20,25,40,50,60,75 and
and test for expanded polystyrene in the form of rough 100 mm.
shapes, finished boards and blocks and pipe laggings
for thermal insulation. Primarily used in refrigeration 3.1.3 Tolerance:
and building applications in the temperature Finished boards and blocks Tolerance
range -200°C to 80°C.
Length, width and thickness f2mm
2. Types Pipe laggings

Outside diameter f3mm
Type N - Normal
Inside diameter f2mm
Type SE - Self-extinguishing
3.2 Thermal Conductiviry or k-vahe - Shall not
3. Requirements exceed the following values:
Apparent Density k-value at 50°C
3.1 Dimensions
&g/m’> (mW/cm”C)
3.1.1 Size 15.0 0.41
Finished boards: 1X 0.5 m or other agreed sizes 20.0 0.39
Pipe laggings : 1 or 0.5 m in length or other 25.0 0.37
agreed length 30.0 0.35
447
SY : 21-1983
3.3 The material shall also comply with require- 3.4.1 Flammability -The material shall be of
ments given in Table 1. self-extinguishing type.
3.4 Speciai Requirements for Type SE.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE

SL CHARAC~IS~C REQUIREMENTS AT VARIOUS
NOMINAL
No. A~P~ENTDENSITIRS
A
' 15 kg/m3 20 kg/m3 25 kg/m3 30 kg/m3’
i) Compressive strength at 10 percent deformation, in kg/cm2, Min 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4
ii) Gross-breaking stmngtfi in kg/cm*, Min 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.2
iii) Water vapour permeance, in g/m2 24 h, MUX 50 40 30 20
iv) Thermal stability, percent, Mar 1 1 1 1
Note - For methods of test, refer to Appendices A to D of the standard.
Note-For method of test for k-value, refer to IS : 3346-1966 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal
insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) and for method of test for flammability, refer to Appendix E of fhe
standard.
For detailed inform&ion, refer to IS : 4671-1968 Specification for expanded polystyrene for thermal
insulation purposes.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6598-1972 CELLULAR CONCRETE

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling 2.2 Each of these two types shall have three grades,
and test for cellular concrete for thermal insulation. namely:
Grade A - Light weight
Note - Cellular concrete (formed by producing gas or air Grade B - Medium weight
bubbles in a cement or cement-sand slurry) is a versatile Grade C - Heavy weight
constmction material on account of its light weight, high thermal
insulation, resistance to sulphate action, resistance to alternate 3. Materials
cooling and thawing (when high pressure steam cured) and a) Aggregate - Sand, ground quartz, shale fly
resistance to penetration of water. When cast in situ, it can be ash, granulated slag, etc.
applied over flat roofs for thermal insulation.
b) Binders - Portland cement or lime.
c) Glassing agents - Organic foaming agents
2. Types and Grades based on resin soap, glue, surface active
2.1 Two types of material depending on manner of agents, or fine aluminium powder, zinc dust,
manufacture, namely: calcium carbide, calcium hypochlorite, etc.
Type 1 - High pressure steam cured (auto-
4. Requirements
claved) material in the form of precast
blocks. 4.1 Density
Type 2 - Cured under normal conditions (that Grade Average Bulk Density, kg/m3
is, under ambient pressure and tempera- A Up to 320
ture) by water. Either cast in situ or as B 321 to 400
precast blocks. C 401 to 500
448
SP : 21-1983
4.2 Crushing Strength 4.5 Dimensions - For Type 1 and Type 2, length
50 or 60 cm; width 20,25 or 30 cm; and thickness 7 S,
10, 15, 25 or 40 cm.
4.5.1 Tolerance: +3 percent on width and height
A 7.0 2.5
and li- 1 percent on thickness.
0 12.0 4.5
C 20.0 8.0
4.3 Capillaq Absorption -- Shall not exceed 20
percent in case of Type 1 cellular concrete.
4.4 Thermal Conductirit;v

Grade Thermal Conductivity
at 50°C Mean Temp, Max
mW/cm”C
A 0.7
0 0.85
C 1.0
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3346-1966 Method of test for preformed block-type and pipe covering-type thermal
insulation, IS : 5688-1970 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded
hot-plate method) and Appendix A of the sfundard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6598-1972 Specification for cellular concrete for thermal insulation.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7509-1974 THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS (TYPE 750)

--
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR THERMAL
and test for thermal insulating cements for use at INSULATING CEMENTS (TYPE 750)
temperatures up to 750°C (Type 750).
No.
i) Consistency
Note - Typical material% used are: a) Method A, percent 35 to 45
b) vethod B, percent 175 to 235
a) diatomaceous earth (silica). calcium silicate with suitable
ii) Dry covering capacity, m*, 1 cm in 20
proportion of heat-resistant binder and mineral wool
thickness per 100 kg of dry cement,
and/or asbestos fibres; and
Min
b) predominantly mineral wool fibres with a suitable propor- iii) Volume change (shrinkage) upon 25
tion of heat-resistant binder. drying, percent, Max
iv) Compressive strength at 5 percent de- 0.7
2. Requirements - The material (in the form of formation, kgf/cm*, Min
v) Dry adhesion to steel, kgf/cm*, Min 0.35
dry powder) shall conform to the requirements given in vi) Linear shrinkage (length) after heat 3
Table 1. soaking at 75O”C, percent, Max
vii) Thermal conductivity, mW/cm”C
Max:
Mean Temperature, “C
95 0.75
260 0.80
370 0.85
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 5724-1970 Methods of test for thermal insulating cements, and IS : 3346-1966 Method for
the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7.509-1974 Specification for thermal insulating cements (Type 750).
___- .-
449
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 75 lo-1974 THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS (TYPE 350)

_-
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR THERMAL
and test for thermal insulating cements for use at INSULATING CEMENTS (TYPE 350)
temperatures up to 350°C (Type 350).
SL CHARACBR~S~~ ZtEQUlREhENT
No.
i) Consistency:
Note - Typical materials used are: 35 to 45
a) Method A, percent
b) Method B, percent 175 to 230
a) basic hydrated magnesium carbonate with reinforcing ii) Dry covering capacity, m*, 1 cm in 17.5
asbestos tibres; thickness per 100 kg of cement,
Min
b) hydrated magnesium carbonate, calcium silicate with iii) Volume change (shrinkage) upon dry- 25
reinforcing asbestos fibres; ing, percent, Max
iv) Linear shrinkage (length) after 24 h heat 2.0
c) hydrated magnesium carbonate, light mass mineral wool,
soaking at 350°C. percent, Max
with reinforced asbestos tibres: and
V) Compressive strength at 5 percent de- 3.5
formation, kgf/cm*, Min
d) predominantly mineral wool tibres with a suitable propor-
vi) Thermal conductivity, mW/cm”C, Max
tion of heat-resistant binder.
Mean Tenperame, “c:
100 0.92
2. Requirements -The material (in the form of 150 1.00
dry powder) shall conform to the requirements given in 200 1.07
Table 1. 250 1.12
_~
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 5724-1974 Methods of test for thermal insulating cements,and IS : 3346-1966 Method for
the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7510-1974 Specification for thermal insulating cements (Type 350).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8154-1976 PREFORMED CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION

(FOR TEMPERATURES UP TO 65OOC)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling b) wet (after 18 hours immersion in water) under
and test for preformed calcium silicate insulation a load of 170 kN/mZ.
intended for use in surfaces which reach temperatures 2.3 Flexural Strength - The average value not less
up to 650°C. than 240 kN/m*.
Note - This insulation is predominantly composed of reacted 2.4 Heat Resistance - The material shall be
hydrous calcium silicate reinforced with suitable fibres so as to deemed suitable for use under conditions of soaking
meet the specified requirements.
heat for 24 hours at 650°C up to the temperature at
which the following requirements are met:
2. Requirements
a) Linear shrinkage 2 percent, Max
2.1 Bulk Density - Average value 200 to 350 b) Loss in weight 15 percent, Max
kg/m3. Tolerance: f 15 percent on the declared value. c) Compressive Reduction in thick-
2.2 Compressive Strength -Reduction in thick- strength ness under a load of
ness shall not exceed 10 percent when 345 kN/m2, 10 per-
a) dry under a load of 4 15 kN/m2, and cent, Max
450
SP : 21-1983
2.5 Thermal Conductivity 2.9.3 Pipe sections
Mean Temperature Thermal Conductivity Length 500 or 1 000 mm

“C (Average), Max Diameter TO fit standard pipes of
mW/cm”C external dia up to 219 mm
Thickness 20, 25, 40, 50, 60 or 75 _
100 0.65
150 0.75 2.9.4 Curved segments (radiused and hevelled
200 0.80 lags) - Lengths 500 or 1 000 mm and thicknesses 20,
25.40. 50. 60 and 75 _ for curved surface having
2.6 Moisture Content - Shall not exceed 1.5 per- I I
external radius greater than 110 mm.

cent by mass.
2.7 Alkalinity - The i>H of the solution of material 2.10 Dimensional Tolerance
shall be between 7.0 and 10.0.
a) Flat blocks
2.8 Standard Shapes - Flat blocks, bevelled lags, 1) Length and width +3 mm
pipe sections or radiused and bevelled lags. 2) Thickness -1.5 _
+3
2.9 Standard Sizes
b) Pipe sections
2.9.1 Flat blocks
1) Length +3 _
Length 500, 600 or 900 mm -0
150, 300 or 600 mm 2) Inside diameter +5mm
Width
Thickness 25.40,50,60,75 or 100 mm - 1.5 mm
3) Thickness (average) +3
2.9.2 Bevelled lags
L=gth 500, 600 or 900 mm 2.10.1 Uniformity - Local thickness of insula-

Major width 75 or 150 mm tion material at any point shall not vary from the
Thickness 25,40,50,60,75 or 100 mm average thickness by more than +3 mm.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3346-1966 Method for determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation
materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method), IS : 5688-1970 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe-covering type
thermal insulation, IS : 5724-1970 Methods of test for thermal insulating cement,and Appendices A and B of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8154-1976 Specification for preformed calcium silicate insulation
(for temperatures up to 6.5O’C).
~___ ____~ ._~
451
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8183-1976 BONDED MINERAL WOOL

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling 2.7 Thermal Conductivity
and test for bonded mineral wool for thermal insula- Mean Thermal Conductivity
tion. This can be used with a suitable facing material Temperature mW/cm’C
for a temperature range of - 40 to 700°C. “C
, A \
2. Requirements Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
,
2.1 Description - Material shall be mineral wool 50 0.49 0.43 0.43 0.43
made from rock slag or glass processed from a molten 100 Q.69 0.52 0.52 0.52
state into fibrous form and shall be bonded with a 150 0.95 0.64 0.62 0.62
suitable binder. Slabs are normally supplied unfaced 200 - 0.78 0.73 0.68
but may have an applied finish of cloth, foil, wire 250 - 0.93 0.84 0.80
netting, glass tissue, polythene or other material on one 300 - 1.10 0.95 0.90
or both faces as may be specified. 2.8 Sulphur Content - Shall not contain more than
0.6 percent of sulphur (after removal of the facing, if
2.2 Bulk Density
any).
Group Bulk Density Maximum Recommended
2.9 Dimensions - Length: 100, 120, 140 cm or as
kg/m3 Hot Face Temperature, “C
agreed. Widths: 50, 60, 75 and 100 cm. Nominal
1 12-50 up to 250 thickness: 25, 40, 50, 65, 75 mm or as agreed.
2 50-80 up to 400
3 80-120 up to 550 2.9.1 Dimensional tolerances - For width and
length: - % percent or - 3 mm; for nominal thickness
4 120-160 up to 750
in the range of 25 to 75 mm, it shall be -2 mm. Plus
2.2.1 Variation shall not exceed 2 15 percent. tolerance on all dimensions is permitted.
2.3 Recovery after Compression - Recovery after 2.10 Optional Requirements
compression of 75 percent of the original thickness 2.10.1 Resistance to micro-organisms - Shall
shall not be less than 90 percent of the original not show any mould or bacterial growth.
thickness.
2.10.2 Odour emission test - Shall be no appa-
2.4 Shot Content. - Shall not be more than the rent difference in odour of the butter when compared
values given below. Any shot present in the bonded with the blanks.
mineral wool shall not be greater than 5 mm in any
dimension: 2.10.3 Resistance to vibration - Shall show not
more than 1 percent height of settlement.
IS Sieve Shot Content, Percent
by Mass, Max 2.10.4 Resistance to jolting - Shall show not
more than 3 percent height of settlement, or as agreed.
500-micron 5
250-micron 15 2.10.5 Heat resistance - Shall not suffer visible
deterioration of the fibrous structure when heated to the
2.5 Moisture Content and Moisture Absorption -
maximum recommended temperature of use.
Shall not contain more than 2 percent moisture. Shall
not gain in mass by more than 2 percent. 2.10.6 Alkalinity - ThepH of the solution of the
material shall be between 7.0 and 10.0.
2.6 Incombustibility - Shall be rated as incombus-
tible when it passes the prescribed test. LOSS in total 2.10.7 Corrosive attack - Material shall not
mass shall not exceed 5 percent. cause corrosion of the surface on which it is applied.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3144-1965 Methods of test for mineral wool thermal insulation materials, IS : 3346-1966
Methods for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method), and
Appendices A and B of the stnndard.
______I___-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8183-1976 Specification forbonded mineral wool.
452
SECTlON 25
PLASTICS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 2036-1974 Phenolic laminated sheets (first revision) 455

IS : 2046-1%9 Decorative thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets 456
(jirst revision)
IS : 2508-1977 Low density polyethylene films (first revision) 457
IS : 6307- 197 1 Rigid PVC sheets 459 ,
454
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2036-1974 PHENOLIC LAMINATED SHEETS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling 3. Mandatory Requirements
and test for phenolic resin bonded laminated sheets
3.1 Appearance - Surface finish and edge finish
with cellulose paper or woven cotton fabric as filler and
shall be as agreed. Sheets of all grades shall be free
covers eight grades. Covers only sheets of nominal
from detrimental local deformation and splitting. ‘
thickness 0.4 to 50 mm for cellulose paper based
grades and 0.4 to 100 mm for woven cotton fabric 3.2 Flatness (for Sheets of Thickness 3.2 mm and
based grades. Specifies mandatory as well as optional Above) - Shall not exceed:
requirements.
6.35 mm under 1 000 mm straight edge
3.00 mm under 600 mm straight edge
0.70 mm under 300 mm straight edge
2. Types and Grades
3.3 Resistance to Hot Oil - Shall show no sign of
a) Type P - Made from layers of cellulose paper
splitting, blistering, disintegration or warping after the
using thermosetting synthetic resin as bonding
prescribed test.
medium. Graded as Pl , P2, P3, P4 and P5 on
the basis of their electrical properties and resis- Note - For method of test refer to IS : 1998-1%2*.
tance to water absorption, in the increasing
order of such properties. 3.4 Machining Test (for Sheets of Thickness 3.2 mm
a&Above) - Shall be capable of being sawn, milled,
b) Type F - Made from layers of woven cotton drilled and tapped with M 3.5 tap and being shaped in
fabric using thermosetting synthetic resin as shaping machine without showing obvious signs of
bonding medium. Graded as F 1, F2, F3 and F4 splitting, cracking or chipping.
in the increasing order of coarseness of ~10th
and increasing impact strength, but decreasing Note 1 - For tolerance on nominal thickness, refer to Table 1
of the standard.
tensile strength.
Note 2 - Requirements for physical characteristics, such as
tensile strength, cross-breaking strength, electric strength, insula-
Note 1 - The number of threads in warp and weft of the fabric tion resistance and water absorption, refer to Tables 2 and 3 ofthe
filter usually falls in the following range: standard.
Grade No,C$Threads 4. Optional Requirements

(War/>and W# Note 1 -For requirements for physical characteristics, such as
Fl 37 to 39 per cm shear strength, compression strength, impact strength, electric
F2 18 to 39 per cm strength, insulation resistance, power factor and permittivity,
F3 12to20percm refer to Tables 4, 5 and 5A of rhe srandard.
F4 1X to 39 per cm
Note 2 - Method of test and limits for punching test shall be
as agreed.
Note 2 - For details of each grade in regard to construction,
properties and suitability for particular use, refer to 3.2 of he *Methods of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded
standard. laminated sheets.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 20361974 Specification for phenolic laminated sheets (first
revision).
_~
455
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 20461969 DECORATIVE THERMOSETTING SYNTHETIC

RESIN BONDED LAMINATED SHEETS
(First Revision)
1. Scope 3.3.2 Rectangularjnishedpanels - Dimensions

shall be as mutually agreed. Unless otherwise agreed,
1.1 Requirements and the methods of sampling and
the tolerance shall be as follows:
test for aminoplastic faced phenolic laminated sheets
having coloured and/or patterned surfaces incorpo- For lengths and widths up to f0.4 mm
rated during manufacture. The material is intended for and including 320 mm
interior use. The specification applies to sheets in For lengths and widths kO.125 percent
which the only filler is paper and does not cover sheets above 320 mm
with a core of any other material, for example,
3.4 Nominal Thickness - 1.5, 3.0 mm or more as
hardboard. When used by itself, the material covered
mutually agreed. Tolerance shall be as follows:
by this standard is not intended for load bearing
applications. For thickness 1.5 mm f0.25 mm
1.2 The material may be used as wall panels or as For thickness 3.0 mm f0.30 mm
For thickness above 3.0 mm As mutually
veneer for wood or other surfaces. These laminated
sheets require no additional decorative finish. Lami- agreed
nates with metal foil am not covered by this standard.
3.5 Straightness sf Edges of Rectangular Finished
2. Types Panels
Type I - Having only one side bearing the For panels of length 0.4 mm Max
decorative surface, the other side being less than 0.6 m from straight line
roughened or given an appropriate treatment to 0.6 m and above 20.06 L mmMax
promote adhesion to the base; and from, straight line
(L = length of straight line in metres).
Type 2 - Having both sides bearing the de-
corative surface, the two sides may be different 3.6 Squareness of Rectangular Finisheti
in colour or pattern or both. Panels - Out of square by not more than 3 mm per
2.5 m length.
3. Requirements
3.7 Resistance to Dry Heat -There shall be no
3.1 Appearance - Surface and edge finish, colour, blistering or appreciable surface deterioration on loss
pattern, etc , as mutually agreed. of gloss.
3.2 Flatness 3.8 Dimensional Stability - Dimensional change
3.2.1 For 1.5 mm nominal thickness - Height shall be not mom than 0.5 percent in machine direction
above flat surface at the edges of the full manufactured and 0.9 percent in perpendicular direction.
and trimmed width shall not exceed 150 mm. 3.9 Resistance to Immersion in Boiling Water -
3.2.2 For nominal thickness 3 mm and over - Water absorption shall not exceed 10 percent. Increase
The departure at any point of its surface from a light in thickness of sheet shall not exceed 10 percent. There
straight edge shall not exceed the following: shall be no crazing, blistering or delamination.
Length of Straight Edge Max Departure 3.10 Resistance to Staining - Shall not show any
mm mm blistering or discolouration at the final examination.
300 1.0 3.11 Cross-Breaking Strength - Shall not be less
600 3.0 than the following values:
1 000 6.5 a) With decorative face in 850 kgf/cm2
tension
3.3 Nominal Length and Width
b) With decorative face in 1 200 kgf/cm*
3.3.1 Sheets for fabrication - Dimensions and compression
tolerance shall be as mutually agreed. (shall apply only to 1.5 mm thick sheets)
456
SP : 21-1983
3.12 Impact Strength - Not less than 0.035 kgf.m. 3.14 Optional Requirements
3.13 Machining Test -Shall be capable of being 3.14.1 Colour fastness to artificial light - Shall
sawn, milled, drilled and tapped without splitting or not be inferior to standard pattern for light fastness
cracking. rating No. 5.
Note l-For the benefit of users, general information on proper use; application and maintenance of decorative laminated sheets
has been given in Appendix A of fhe standard.
Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices B to J of the srandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 20461969 Specification for decorative thermosetting syn’?hetic resin
bondedJaminated sheets (first revision).
SUMMAKY OF
IS : 2508-1977 LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE FILMS

(First Revision)
1. Scope of normal clarity, low impact strength and slip has not
been tested.
1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and test
for natural (essentially colourless) and black colour
3. Requirements
(carbon black pigment) low density polyethylene tilms
intended for packaging, agricultural operations and 3.1 General
post harvest uses, construction work and allied pur- 3.1.1 Appearance - The film shall be uniform in
poses. colour, texture and finish and free from pinholes and
1.2 This shall cover flexible (non-rigid), unsup- substantially free from undispersed raw materials,
ported flat or tubular films, 12.5 to 250 pm in streaks and particles of foreign matter. Shall have no
thickness and width 250 to 7 500 mm, having a density other visible defects, such as holes, tears or blisters.
between 0.908 and 0.938 g/ml at 27°C. 3.1.2 Film form - Film shall be furnished in the
Note -When the Nm is intended for use for fumigation form of flat sheet or rolls or in the form of flat tubing or
purposes, film of thickness above 175 /*m shall be used. The in any other form as mutually agreed.
actual thickness of the film to be used shall be as agreed between
3.1.3 Odour - Shall be free from any objection-
the purchaser and the supplier.
able odour.
1.3 Coloured film other than black shall be as agreed
3.1.4 Density - Density shall be as given in 1.2.
between the supplier and the purchaser.
3.2 Dimensional Requirements
2. Grades - Film shall be classified according to
clarity, impact strength and slip. Each grade shall be 3.2.1 Tolerance on thickness
designated by a set of 3 numerals: first one for clarity, Nominal thickness Tolerance
second for impact strength and third for slip proper- percent
ty. Numeral 0 shall mean the material has not been
tested for that particular property. For clarity, impact Up to and including 40 pm f25
strength and slip property, numerals 1, 2 and 3 shall Above 40 pm +20
mean the following:
3.2.2 Tolerance on width
Numerals Clarity Impact Slip
Nominal Width Tolerance
Strength Property
cm mm
1 Low Low Low
2 Normal Normal Medium up to 50 *5
3 High High High Above 50 and up to 125 rt8
4 - - Extra high Above 125 and up to 250 f20
Above 250 and up to 300 f40
For example, Grade 210 shall mean that the film is Above 300 +65
457
SP : 21-1983
3.3 Yield Tolerance 3.7.2 Normal impact resistant jlm

One roll + 10 percent Average Thickness Impact Failure
Lots of 250 kg f 10 percent of Film Load, Min
Lots over 250 kg and up to + 5 percent Pm N 0
1 250 kg
Lots over 1 250 kg f 3 percent 20 0.35 (35)
25 0.4D (40)
3.4 Tensile Strength at Break - Not less than 40 0.65 (65)
10.79 MN/m* (110 kgf/cm*) in lengthwise direction 50 0.85 (85)
and 7.36 MN/m* (75 kgf/m*) in crosswise direction 75 1.25 (125)
for all thicknesses of film. 100 1.65 (165)
3.5 Elongation at Break 3.7.3 High impact resistant jilm
Thickness of the Film Elongation at Break, Min a) Up to 100 ,um thickness

I A , Average Thickness Impact Failure
Lengthwise Crosswise of Film Load, Min
percent percent
Pm N (80
From 12.5 pm up tq but 100 350 20 0.9 (90)
not including 75 pm 25 1.05 (105)
75 pm and over 200 400 40 1.40 (140)
50 1.75 (175)
3.6 Clarity - 45” gloss and haze of film shall 75 2.45 (245)
conform to the requirements given below: 100 3.15 (315)
Grade 45” Gloss, Min Haze, Max b) Over 100 pm thickness
Average Thickness Impact Failure
Low clarity film Below 30 Greater than
of Film Load, Min
15 percent
Wn N (80
Normal clarity 30 to 55 10 to 15 percent
film 100 2.00 (200)
High clarity film Greater than 6 to IO percent 150 3.15 (315)
55 200 4.15 (415)
225 4.70 (470)
Note - These two measurements do not always correlate. The
particular measurement concerned with the application of the 250 5.10 (510)
material shall govern in case of an inconsistency. Note - Valuesfor impactfailure load, given in 3.7.1 to 3.7.3
for intermediate thicknesses may be obtained by interpolation.
3.7 Impact Resistance
3.7.1 Low impact resistant jilm 3.8 Slip - Kinetic coefficient of friction for mate-
rial shall be as follows:
Average Thickness Impact Failure a) Low slip film Greater than 0.8
of Film Load, Min b) Medium slip film Greater than 0.5 but not
Pm N (80 greater than 0.8
12.5 0.4 (40) c) High slip film Great& than 0.2 but not
greater than 0.5
20.0 0.6 (60)
d) Extra high slip Not greater than 0.2
25.0 0.8 (80) film
Note-For methods of test, refer to Appendix A of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2508-1977 Specification for low density polyethylene films (first
revision).
458
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF.
IS : 6307-1971 RIGID PVC SHEETS
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling Nominal Tolerance on Thickness, Percent

and test for rigid PVC sheets of 0.10 to 12.5 mm in Thickness , /\ I
thickness, manufactured by calendering, extrusion or mm Emuded Calendered Calendered
calendering followed by lamination. and
Note - The sheet consists of polyvinyl chloride, and/or a Laminated
copolymer of which the major constituent is vinyl chloride, suita- (1) (2) (3) (4)
bly compounded with other ingredients. It is put to a wide range of 0.10 to 0.24 +20 f12 -
uses. General purpose rigid PVC sheets are used in display and -
0.25 to 0.49 f15 +10
advertising; chemical resistance type in chemical plants for tanks.
0.50 to 0.74 +12 +10 -
tank linings, ductings etc; high impact sheets in helmets, aircraft
map cases, parachute boxes, panellings etc; and vacuum forming 0.75 to 1.24 f10 - +20
type for domestic and industial trays, trays for developing photo- 1.25 t9 9.99 f8 - f10
graphs, refrigerator door panels, etc. 10.00 to 12.50 - - f10
The sheets shall be stacked horizontally on clean, firm and level
ground in stacks not exceeding 25 cm in height.
3.2.1 The thickness of plain sheet shall be mea-
2. Types - May be transparent to opaque, colour- sured with a micrometer (gravimetrically up to nomi-
less or coloured, and classified into: nal thickness of 0.24 mm).
+5
Type I - General purpose, 3.3 Length and Width - Tolerance _. _ for
Type 2 - Suitable for applications where
rectangular panels. For other shapes, the tolerances as
chemical resistance is required,
agreed.
Type 3 -. With high impact strength, and
Type 4 - Suitable for deep draw vacuum 3.4 Squareness - Cut sheets shall not deviate more
forming. than 10 mm from a true rectangle of the same
dimensions.
3. Requirements 3.5 Physical Requirements -See Table 1.
3.1 Appearance - Sheet shall be uniform in colour, 3.6 Delamination (Calendered and Laminated
Sheet) - Material shall show no signs of delami-
transparency and finish; reasonably free from detri-
mental scratches, creases, streaks, pinholes, dents, nation.
pimples and inclusions. 3.7 Colour Fastness - Shall be tested if agreed
3.2 Thickness between the purchaser and the supplier.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF RIGID PVC SHEET
No. A
/ 1
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4
9 Softening point, “C, Min 75 15 65 50

ii) Impact strength, number of failures - - No failures
iii) Tensile stress at yield; kg/cmz, Min 450 450 380 380
iv) Dimensional change at 12O”C, percent, Mar:
a) Extruded or calendered 20 20 20 As agreed to
b) Calendered and laminated 5 5 5 15
v) Resistance to concentrated sulphuric acid, percent, original shear - 70 - -
strength, Min
vi) Flammability To pass the test
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to H of the stu&&.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6307-1971 Specification for rigid PVC sheets.
459
SECTION 26
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 694-1977 PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including 463
1 100 volts (second revision)
IS : 1596-1977 Polyethylene insulated cables for working voltages up to and 465
including 1 100 volts (second revision)
IS : 9968 Elastomer insulated cables
IS : 9968 (Part I)-1981 For working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts 466
IS : 9968 (Part II)-1981 For working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and including 11 kV 467
462
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 694-1977 PVC INSULATED CABLES FOR WORKING

VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1100 VOLTS
(Second Revision)
(With Amcndmcnt No. I)
1. Scope - Requirements and tests for the follow- 2.2 Construction

ing types of unarmoured PVC insulated cables with
copper or aluminium conductors and flexible cords 2.2.1 Conductor - Conductors for cables for
with copper conductors for electric power and lighting fixed wiring shall be solid and/or stranded type
(including weatherproof cables and cables for low depending upon nominal cross-sectional area of con-
temperature conditions) for voltages up to and ductors. For cables having nominal area less than
including 1 100 V. 25 mm* shall be circular only and for nominal area
25 mm* and above, these may be circular or shaped.
1.1 Types of cables
a) Cables for fixed wiring: 2.2.2 Insulation -The conductor shall be pro-
1) Single core (unsheathed); vided with PVC insulation applied by extrusion.
2) Single core (sheathed);
3) Circular twin, three and four core 2.2.3 Laying-up of cores
(sheathed);
4) Flat twin with or without FCC (sheathed); 4 Flat twin and three-core cables (without
and ECC) - Two or three cores shall be laid side
5) Flat three core (sheathed). by side.
b) Flexible cords: cables (with ECC) - Two COIES

b) Flat-twin
1) Single core (unsheathed); with a bare ECC (in centre) shall be laid side by
2) Single core (sheathed); side.
3) Parallel twin (unsheathed);
4) Twisted twin (unsheathed); c) Circular twin, three-and four-core cables -
Two,three or four cores shal1 be laid together
5) Circular twin, three and four core
with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices
(sheathed); and
between cores may be filled with unvulcanized
6) Flat twin (sheathed).
rubber, thermoplastic material or any other
1.2 These cables are suitable for use on ac single suitable material. A binder tape of plastic mate-
phase or three phase (earthed or,uneatthed) system for rial or proofed copper may be applied over
rated voltages up to and including 1 100 V. These laid-up cores.
cables may be used on dc system for rated voltages up
to and including 1 500 V. d) Circular twin, three-and four-core flexible
cords - Two, three or four cords shall be
1.3 These cables are suitable for use where the twisted together with a suitable right-hand lay.
combination of ambient temperature and temperature The interstices may be filled with sheathing
rise due to load results in a continuous conductor material, textile material or strengthening
temperature not exceeding 70°C. cords of textile or any other suitable material.
e) Parallel twin (unsheathed) flexible cords -

2. Requirements
Two conductors shall be laid parallel and insu-
lated simultaneously such that the cores can be
2.1 Material separated readily without damage.
2.1.1 Conductor - The conductor shall be com-
posed of plain annealed high conductively copper f) Twisted twin (unsheathed flexible cords -
Two conductors shall be laid parallel and insu-
wines and aluminium wires in case of copper and
lated simultaneously such that the cover can be
aluminium conductors respectively.
separated readily without damage.
2.1.2 Insulation sheath - Shall be composed of
PVC compound. 2.2.4 Sheathing - Shall be applied by extrusion.
463
SP : 21-1983
2.2.5 Thickness of insulation and sheath - c) Wrapping test (for aluminium),

Range of average thickness shall not be less than the d) Conductor resistance test,
nominal values specified in the following table: e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath,
We Range of Nominal Range of Nominal Range of Nominal

Sectional Area of Thickness of Thickness of
Conductor Insulation Sheath
(m2) (=I (mm)
a) Single-core PVC
insulated cables l-630 O.‘l-2.8 -
(unsheathed)
b) Flexible PVC insu- 0.5-4.0 0.6- 0.8 -
lated cords (un-
sheathed)
c) PVC insulated and l-50 0.6- 1.4 0.8-1.8
sheathed cables
d) Flexible PVC insu- 0.5-4.0 0.6- 0.8 0.9- 1 .o
lated and cords
Note l-Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor-l, 1.5, 2.5, 4.6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300, 400, 500
and 630 mm*.
Note Z-For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
---~_
2.3 Cable Code - The following code shall be used f) Physical tests for insulation and sheath,
for designating the cable: g) Test for bleeding and blooming of pigments,
h) Insulation resistance test, and
Constituent Code Letter
j) High voltage test (water immersion test).
Aluminium conductor A
PVC insulation Y 3.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in (a) to (e)
PVC sheath Y and (h) of 3.1.
Earth continuity conductor (ECC)
3.3 Routine Tests
Note - For detailed constructional requirements refer to Sec- a) Conductor resistance test, and
tion III of rlze srandard.
b) High voltage test or Spark test.
3. Tests 3.4 Optional Tests
a) Cold bend test,
3.1 Type Tests
b) Cold impact test, and
a) Annealing test (for copp?r), c) Additional ageing test (for weather proof
b) Tensile test (for aluminium), cables).
Note-For test details, refer to IS : 5831-1970 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 8130-1976
Specification for conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords, and fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 694-1977 Specification for PVC insulated cables for working
voltages up to and including I 100 volts.
-- ---
464
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1596-1977 POLYETHYLENE INSULATED CABLES FOR

WORKING VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS
(Second Revision)’
1, Scope - Requirements and tests for the follow- e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath,
ing types of unarmoured polyethylene (PE) insulated, f) Physical tests for PE insulation and sheath and
PVC or PE sheathed cables with copper or aluminium for PVC sheath
conductors for electric power and lighting (including g) Fire resistance test (for PVC sheathed ca-
weatherproof cables) for voltages up to and including bles),
,
1 100 v. h) Test for bleeding and blooming of pigments,
j) Insulation resistance test,
1.1 Types of Cables k) High voltage test and spark test, and
m) Additional ageing test (for PVC sheathed
4 Single core; weatherproof cables).
b) Circular twin, three and four core;
c) Flat twin with or without ECC (earth con- 3.2 Acceptance Tests
tinuity conductor); and
d) Flat three core.
4 Annealing test (for copper),
b) Tensile test (for aluminium),
Note - For use as weatherpmf cables, the sheath of PE
c>Wrapping test (for aluminium),
sheathed cables shall have a suitably dispersed carbonblack con- 4 Conductor resistance test,
tent, and the PVC sheathed cables shall meet the requirementsOf e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath,
additional ageing test. f ) Insulation resistance test,
High voltage test, and
1.2 The cables covered in the standard are suitable i?; Additional ageing test (for PVC sheathed
for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or weatherproof cables).
unearthed) system for rated voltages up to and includ-
3.3 Routine Tests
ing 1 100 V. These cables may be used on dc systems
for rated voltages up to and including 1 500 V. a) Conductor resistance test, and
b) High voltage test.
1.3 The cables covered by the standard are suitable
for use where the combination of ambient temperature 3.4 Optional Tests
and temperature rise due to load results in continuous aj Cold bend test (for PVC sheathed cables),
conductor temperature not exceeding 70°C. and
b) Cold impact test (for PVC sheathed cables).
2. Size - Nominal cross-sectional area of conduc-
tion shah be 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35 and 4. Identification
50 mm2. Size 1 mm2 shall be for copper conductors
only. 4.1 Cable Code - The following code shall be used
for designating the cable:
3. Tests
Constituent Code Letter
3.1 Type Tests Aluminium conductor A
a) Annealing test (for copper), PA insulation 2Y
b) Tensile test (for aluminium), PVC sheath Y
c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), PE sheath
d) Conductor resistance test, Earth Continuity Conductor
^ . .
Note I -For requirements regarding materials and construction, refer to Ihe standard.
Note 2-For test details, refer to IS : 5831-1970 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 6474-1971
Specification for polyethylene insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 8130-1976 Specification for conductors for insulated
electric cables and flexible cords. and the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1596-1977 Specification for polyethylene insulated cables for
working voltages up to and including I 100 volts. 100 volts (second revision).
465
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY ~OF
IS : 9968 (Part I)-1981 ELASTOMER INSULATED CABLES

PART I FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS
1. Scope - Requirements of elastomer insulated ca- 1 100 V. These cables may be used on dc systems for
bles for fixed wiring, flexible cables and flexible cords rated voltages up to and including 1 500 V.
for electric power and lighting for operation at voltages
1.3 The cables covered in the standard are suitable
up to and including 1 100 volts.
for use where the combination of ambient temperature
1.1 The following types of cables and cords are and temperature rise due to loads results in a conductor
covered in the standard. temperatute not exceeding the values given below:
1.l .l Cables for fixed iviring Type of Insulation Conductor
Temperature;
a) Braided and compounded/varnished,
“C, Max
b) Elastomer sheathed (general purpose), and
c) Elastomer sheathed with earth continuity INonnal
conductor (general purpose). Operation Circuit
1.1.2 Flexible cables a) General purpose rubber 60 200
b) Heat resistance synthetic rubber:
a) Braided and varnished, and 1) Butyl rubber, and 85 220
b) Elastomer sheathed (heavy duty). 2) Ethylene propylene rubber 90 250
1.1.3 Flexible cords c) Silicone rubber 150 350
Note - The short circuit temperatures mentioned above are
a) Braided, based on the intrinsic properties of the insulating materials. It is
b) Elastomer sheathed (general purpose), and essential that the accessories which are used in the above system
c) Unkinkable flexible cords - braided and with mechanical and/or soldered connections are suitable for the
compounded (workshop type). temperature adopted for the cable.
1.2 The cables covered in the standard are suitable 2. Size - The nominal cross-sectional area of vari-
for use on ac single phase or three-phase (earthed or ous types of elastomer insulated cables and cords shall
unearthed) system for rated voltage up to and including be as follows:
SI Cables/Cords Nominal Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor

No. mm*
1. Single-core taped or untaped textile braided and 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50
compounded cables
2. Single-core, circular twin-, three- and four-core 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95,
elastomer sheathed cables 120, 150, 185, 240, 300, 400, 500, 630
3. Flat twin core cables (with and without earth con- 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16
tinuity (conductor) and flat three-core (without
earth continuity conductor) elastomer sheathed
cables
4. Single, twin-, three- and four-core glass fibre 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5;2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50
braided and varnished cables and cords
5. Single-core, circu!ar twin-, three-, four- and five- 6, IO, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185,
core, elastomer sheathed flexible cables 240, 300, 400, 500, 630
6. Single-core circular, twin-, three- and four-core 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4
elastomer sheathed flexible cords
7. Textile braided, single and twisted twin flexible 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5
cords
8. Circular twin- and three-core, textile braided flexi- 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4
ble cords
!A Twin- or three-core unkinkable flexible cords 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4
(workshop type)
466
SP : 21-1983
3. Tests 4. Identification
3.1 Type Tests 4.1 Cable I&n@cation - Cables or COGSshall be

identified throughout the length of cables or cords by
a) Persulphate test (for copper), the,legends shown below, either printed or indented or
b) Annealing test (for copper), embossed on cable:
c) Tensile test (for aluminium),
d) Wrapping test (for aluminium), Type of Cable Insulation Legend
e) Conductor resistance test,
f) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, Butyl rubber HR 85
g) Fz;si;l tests for elastomeric insulation and Ethylene propylene rubber HR90
Silicone rubber HR 150
h) High vbltage test (water immersion test), and
j) Insulation resistance test. Note- No legend is required for general purpose insulation.
3.2 Acceptance Tests
4.2 Cable Code - The following code shall be used
a) Annealing test (for copper), for designating the cable:
b) Tensile test (for aluminium),
c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), Constituent Code Letter
d) Conductor resistance test, Aluminium conductor A
e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, Elastomer insulation (rubber) R
f) High voltage test (water immersion test), and Braiding, compounding or varnishing B
g) Insulation resistance test. R
Elastomer sheath (rubber)
3.3 Routine Tests Earth continuity conductor ECC
a) Conductor resistance test, and Note - When the conductor material is coppir, no code letter
b) High voltage test or spark test. is required for conductor.
Note l-For dimensions, such as thickness of insulation, thickness of sheath for various types of cables and cords, and for
requirements regarding material and construction, refer to the standard.
Note 2-For test details, refer to IS : 6380-1971 Specification for elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 8130-1976
Specification for conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords. and the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 9968 (Part I)-1981 Specification for elastomer insulated cables: \
Part I For working voltages up to and including I 100 volts.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 9968 (Part II)-1981 ELASTOMER INSULATED CABLES

PART II FOR WORKING VOLTAGES FROM 3.3 kV UP TO AND INCLUDING 11 kV
1. Scope - Requirements for heat resisting elas- conductors, heat resisting elastomer insulated (with
tomer insulated cables for fixed installations and conductor and insulation screens as required), unar-
flexible cables, suitable for the following voltage mouEd or wire/strip armoured, with overall sheath of
grades (UoAJ): PVC or I-ID HOFR elastomeric compound.
a) Earthed Systems - 1.913.3, 3.816.6 and 1.2 Flexible cables cover single- and three-core con-
6.35111 kV; and structions with or without grounding conductors,
b) Unearthed Systems - 3.313.3, 6.616.6 and copper conductors, heat resisting elastomer insulated
ll/ll kV. (with conductor and insulation screens as required),
1.1 Cables for fixed installations cover single- and unarmoured or armoured, with overall sheath of HD
three-core constructions with copper or aluminium HOFR elastomeric compound.
467
SP : 21-1983
1.3 The cables covered in the standard are suitable 3.2 Acceptance Tests
for use where the combination of ambient temperature a) Annealing test (for copper),
and temperature-rise due to load results in conductor b) Tensile test (for aluminium),
temperatures not exceeding the following for normal c) Wrapping test (for aluminium),
sustained operation and for short-circuit conditions: d) Conductor resistance test,
e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath,
BUtyl Ethylene
*f) Partial discharge test, and
Rubber Propyltvne
g) High voltage test.
Insulated Rubber
Cables Insulated 3.3 Routine Tests
Cables a) Conductor resistance test,
Maximum conductor tempera- 85°C 90°C *b) Partial discharge test, and
ture for continuous C) High voltage test.
operation 3.4 Optional Tests
Maximum conductor tempera- 220°C 250°C a) Ozone resistance test, and
ture during short circuit b) Electrical test on semi-conducting non-
metallic screen.
2. Size - The sizes of conductor shall be 16, 25, Note - Test marked as (*) are applicable to cables with
35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300,400, 500, conductor and insulation screens.
630, 800 and 1000 mm2.
4. Identification
3. Tests 4.1 Voltage Identijcation - The voltage grade of
cable shall be identified throughout the length of cable
3.1 Type Tests
by means of a tape bearing the voltage grade (for
a) Annealing test (for copper), example, 6.35/11 kV or 6 350/11 000 V) or by
b) Tensile test (for aluminium), voltage grade being printed, embossed or indented on
c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), the outer sheath.
d) Conductor resistance tests,
e) Test for armour wires/strips, 4.2 Cable Identification - Cable shall also be iden-
0 Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, tified throughout the length by the legend shown
g) Physical tests for insulation, below, either printed or indented or embossed on
h) Physical tests for sheath, cable:
Type of Cable Insulation Legend
9 Insulation resistance measuremerit at room
temperature, Butyl rubber HR 85
k) Partial discharge test, EPR HR 90
m) Bending test, followed by partial discharge
4.3 Cable Code - The following code shall be used
test, for designating the cable:
n) Dielectric power factor as ti.mction of voltage,
P) Dielectric power factor as a function of tempera- Constituent Code Letter
ture, Aluminium conductor A
q) Insulation resistance measurement at operating Elastomer insulation (rubber)
temperature, Steel round wire armour &
r) &ii;ngdcycle test, followed by partial discharge Non-magnetic round wire armour Wa
Steel strip armour F
s) High voltage test for four hours.
Non-magnetic strip armour Fa
Double steel strip armour FF
Elastomer outer sheath (rubber) R
Note 1 - Tests (k), (m), (n), (p) and (r) are applicable to
screened cables only. PVC outer sheath R
Note 2 - In three-core cables, each test or measurement shall Note - When conductormaterial is copper, no code letter is
be carried out on all the cores. required for conductor.
Note 1-For requirements regarding materials, and construction, refer to fhe standard.
Note Z-For test details, refer to IS : 5831-1970 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 6380-1974
Specification for elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 8130-1976 Specification for conductors for insulated
electric cables and flexible cords, and fhe sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 9968 (Part II)-1981 Specification for elastomer insulated cables:
.Part II For working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and including 11 kV.
---
468
,
SECTION 27
WlRlNG ACCESSORIES
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 371-1979 Ceiling roses (second revision) 471

IS : 1293-1967 Three-pin plugs and socket-outlets (first revision) 472
IS : 2086-1963 Carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses up to 650 volts 473
(revised
IS :2412-1975 Link clips for electrical wiring Cfirst revision) 475
IS :2509-1973 Rigid non-metallic conduits for electrical installations. (first revision) 476 1
IS :2667-1976 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first revision) 477
IS :3419-1976 Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits (first revision) 478
IS :3480-1966 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring 479
IS :3837-1976 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first revision) 480
IS :38541966 Switches for domestic and similar purposes 481
IS :4160-1967 Interlocking switch socket outlet 482
IS :46151968 Switch socket-outlets (non-interlocking type) 484
IS :4649-1968 Adaptors for flexible steel conduits 485
IS :4949-1968 21 Amp switches for domestic and similar purposes 486
IS :5133 Boxes for enclosure of electrical accessories
IS : 5133 (Part I)-1969 Part I Steel and cast iron boxes 487
IS : 5133 (Part II)-1969 Part II Boxes made of insulating material 488. ,
IS : 6538-1971 Three-pin plugs made of resilient material 489
IS. : 6946-1973 Pliable conduits and flexible conduits (non-metallic) for electrical 490
installations
IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 Conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel conduits 491
470
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 371-1979 CEILING ROSES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for ceiling roses of sur- 3.7 Separating Barrier - Separating barrier form-
face and semi-recessed types, for use with single or ing an integral part of the base shall be provided
multiple pendent lighting fittings and for use in circuits between each terminal set to prevent the possibility of
in which the nominal voltage does not exceed 250 V stray ends of conductor coming in contact with a
and the current does not exceed 5A. conductor or terminal other than to which it is
connected. The barrier shall be not less than 5.0 mm
2. Materials high.
a>Base terminal housing and cover (having integ- 3.8 The clearances and creepage distances between
ral cord grip) and extension flange (where live live parts of opposite polarity and between live parts
parts are supported) - Vitrified ceramic or and the following parts shall not be less than 0.3 mm:
tough non-ignitable moulded insulating a) Metal fixing screws;
material. b) Other metal parts; and
b) Cover (not incorporating cord grip) and exten- c) Flat mounting surfaces.
sion flange (not supporting live parts) -
Materials as in (a) or alternatively suitable 4. Cord Grip - Ceiling roses shall be provided
non-ignitable thermoplastic materials. with means for gripping flexible cord which shall not
cl Terminal and terminal screws - Brass, phos- damage the insulation and/or sheath of the cqrd and
phor bronze and/or suitable equivalent shall be such that the load on the cord is not transmitted
material. to the terminals.
3. Dimensions 5. Construction - In surface type ceiling roses

3.1 The parts of the enclosure made from moulded when installed in the normal manner, the base or
insulating materials shall have a minimum wall pattress, terminal housing and cover in combination
thickness of 1.3 mm, except in those places where shall form an enclosure for the terminals and shall
knock-outs are provided. prevent access to any live metal. All terminals shall be
so located that they are prevented from rotating when
3.2 The outside diameter shall not be less than the terminal scows are turned.
63.5 mm.
3.3 The holes of the mounting screws shall be 6. Tests
50.8 f 0.13 mm centres.
a) Visual examination and inspection,
3.4 The holes of the fixing screws shall be of b) Dimensional check,
minimum 5 mm diameter. c) Insulation resistance (dry),
d) High voltage,
3.5 The means of entry for the permanent wiring
e) Moisture resistance,
shall be capable of accommodating, with their outer
f) Screws and connections,
sheathing, three 1.5 mm2 twin flat cables with earth
g) Mechanical strength,
continuity conductors.
h) Cord grip and strength in service,
3.6 The hole in the cover shall be not less than j) Water absorption, and
7.3 mm diameter. k) Resistance to abnormal heat and fire.
Note-For detailed requirements and methods of tests, refer to 9 of the skmdurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 371-1979 Specification for ceiling roses (second revision).
471
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAKY OF
IS : 1293-1967 THREE-PIN PLUGS AND SOCKET-OUTLETS

(First Revision)
Dimensions Rating
1. Scope - Requirements and tests for three-pin h
(two-pole and earthing-pin) plugs and socket-outlets of / \
5A 15A 30A
surface and flush type (shuttered and non-shuttered)
suitable for ac and dc circuits having voltages up to tiiii) Diameter of earthing-pin 7.06 8.71 9.53
250 V. The standard ratings shall be 5, 15 and ix) Length of slot in earthing 10.5 17 25
30 amperes. pin, Min
x) Length of slot in current- 7.5 10.5 17
2. Requirements carrying pin, Min
2.1 Material 2.3.1 Tolerances
a) Plug base, plug cover, socket-outlet cover and On dimensions given in (ii) and (viii) in 2.3 shall
shutter - Tough non-ignitable insulating be + 0.025
material. -- 0.050;-
b) Socket base - Tough non-ignitable insulating and on dimensions given in (iii) and (vi) shall be
material or vitrified ceramic material. +1.04
c) Pins, terminals, current carrying parts and -o.13mm
earthing pin and earthing contact - Note 1 - Socket contacts shall be self-adjusting for centres
Phosphor-bronze, brass, aluminium ahoy or 0.15 mmgreaterorlessthan dimensionsgiven in<iJand(v) in2.3
other suitable material. Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to
d) Non-current-carrying parts - Mild steel, Table 1 of the standard.
ahrminium alloy or insulating material.
2.4 Clearances and Creepage Distances - Not less
2.2 Earthing-pin shall make and break contact before than 3.0 mm.
and after the associated current carrying pins. Connec-
tion of flexible conductor to earthing pin of plug shall Note - For constructional requirements of 3-pin plugs and
socket-outlet with regard to aspects such as protection against
be visible through an opening in plug.
electricshock, plug cover and base, pins and socket contacts, cord
enay and cord grip, ana terminals and screws, referto 5 and 6 of
2.3 Dimensions (in mm) dre standard.
Dimensions Rating
A \ 3. Tests
’ 5A 15A 30A
3.1 Type Tests
i) Distance c/c of current- 19.1 25.4 36.5
3.1.1 Visual examination
carrying pins
ii) Diameter of current- 5.08 7.06 7.93 3.1.2 Interchangeability
carrying pins
iii) Projection from plug 15.9 20.6 28.6 3.1.3 Effectiveness of contact - Voltage drop
base to the top of cur- shall not exceed 15 millivolts.
rent-carrying pins
3.1.4 Withdrawal pull
vi) Nominal width of slot 0.6 0.8 0.8
in current-carrying 3 to 60 N for 5 A plug
pins 4 to 80 N for 15 A plug
v) Distance c/c of 22.2 28.6 39.7 7 to 100 N for 30 A plug
earthing-pin and cur- 3.1.5 Insulation resistance (dry) - Not less than
rent-carrying pin 100 megohms.
vi) Projection from plug 20.6 28.6 36.5
base to the top of 3.1.6 High voltage
earthing-pin 3.1.7 Moisture resistance - Insulation resis-
vii) Nominal width of slot in 0.8 0.8 0.8 tance shall not be less than 2 megohms after moisture
earthing-pin treatment.
472
SP : 21-1983
3.1.8 Temperature-rise - Shall not exceed 3.1.13 Cord grip

20°C. 3.1.14 Resistance to heat (for moulded insulating
3.1.9 Breaking capacity - After test, voltage material only)
drop shall not exceed 50 millivolts. 3.1.15 Endurance (for shutters only)
3.1.10 Mechanical strength 3.1.16 Resistance to rusting
3.1.11 Water absorption - Shall not exceed 3.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in 3.1.1
0.5 percent for ceramic and 1 percent for moulded to 3.1.10 and 3.1.15.
insulating material.
3.3 Routing Tests - Tests specified in 3.1.1,3.1.2
3.1.12 Screws and connections and 3.1.6.
Note l-For detailed requirements and methods of tests, refer to 10 of the standard.
Note 2-For gauges for plugs and socket-outlets, refer to Appendix B of the standard.
--
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1293-1967 Specification for three-pin plugs and socket-outlets (first
revision).
- ___-.--.__
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2086-1963 CARRIERS AND BASES USED IN REWIRABLE TYPE

ELECTRIC FUSES UP TO 650 VOLTS
(Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements for rewirable type fuse- 3. Physical and Electrical Requirements
bases and fuse-carriers having a current rating up to 3.1 Mechanical Endurance - At the end of pre-
and including 200 A and a voltage rating not exceeding sctibed test, the fuse-base and fuse-carrier shall be
650 V between lines. All types of rewirable type examined for the following:
electric fuses as well as fuse-elements are not covered.
a) The contacts shall not work loose,
Note - It is undesirable to use rewirable fuses of rated currents
higher than 100 A. b) No damage shall be caused to any part of the
2. Ratings fuse-carrier or fuse-base,
2.1 Rated Voltage - Preferred values shall be as c) There shall be no displacement of any of the
follows: component parts, and
For ac systems 240 and 415 V d) The serviceability of the fuse shall not have
For dc systems 11.5, 250 and 500 V been impaired.
2.2 Rated Currents - Preferred values shall be 6, 3.2 Mechanical Strength - Carrier and base shall
16, 32, 63, 100 and 200 A. show neither cracks nor permanent deformation.
473
SP : 21-1983
3.3 Withdrawal Force - Shall be between valves fied, smoothly glazed, except in case of steatite and
given below: shall be free from defects such as dents and
projections.
Rated Current, Withdrawal Force,
A kgf 3.9.2 Temperature cycle - When bases and car-
6 0.5 to 1.5 riers axe subjected to temperature cycle test, the
16 0.5 to 3.5 ceramic material shall withstand series of tests without
32 1.5 to 5.5 breaking, cracking or crazing. Base and carrier shall
63 3.0 to 10.0 also comply with requirements of 3.6 when subjected
100 4.0 to 16.0 to high voltage test.
200 15.0 to 70.0 3.9.3 Water absorption - Material shall not ab- ,
3.4 Temperature-Rise - Shall not exceed 55°C in sorb more than 2 percent of its weight of water when
case of fuse-carrier contacts and 40°C in case of fuse- broken.
base contacts. 3.10 Non-&mmability - Materials shall be incap-
3.5 Insulation Resistance - Not less than 10 meg- able of burning or giving off flammable vapours in
ohms. sufficient quantity to ignite at a pilot flame when heated
for 5 minutes in an oven at 300°C.
3.6 Dielectric Strength - Carrier and base shall
withstand the application of an ac voltage of 2 000 V Note - For constructional requirements of fuse-base and
rms for one minute without puncture of insulation or fuse-carrier with regard to aspects such as material, protection,
handle or grip, screws current-carrying parts and terminals, refer
arching-over.
to 4 of Ihe standard.
3.7 Breaking Capacity - Carrier and base shall be
deemed to have failed the test if one or more of 4. Tests
following occur:
a) Any part of the fuse-carrier or the fuse-base 4.1 Type Tests
‘ignites, a) Test for mechanical endurance
b) The fuse-carrier is ejected, 6 Test for mechanical strength
c) Any part of the fuse except the fuse-element c) Test for withdrawal force
and its covering is damaged to such an extent as d) Test for temperature-rise
to render it unserviceable, 4 Insulation resistance test
d) The insulation resistance reduces to below 0 High voltage test
100 000 ohms. g) Test for breaking capacity
3.8 Water Absorption (for Non-ceramic h) Test for water absorption
Materials) - Materials shall be incapable of taking 8 Test on ceramic material
up water in sufficient quantity to cause appreciable k) Ignition test
swelling, laminating, warping or changing of the
4.2 Routine Test - High voltage test.
material.
4.3 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in (a), (c),
3.9 Requirements of Ceramic Material
(d), (e), (f) and (h) of 4.1 and temperature cycle tests
3.9.1 Material shall be sound, thoroughly vitri- (for ceramic material).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to 7 of the sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 20861963 Specification for carriers and bases used in rewirable type
electric fuses up to 650 volts (revised).
474
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2412-1975 LINK CLIPS FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and tests for link clips 3.1.1 Linking eye - Size 15~6.5 mm and hole
(both joint link clips and link clips with separate 10x2 mm.
linking eyes) for general wiring purposes.
3.2 Joint Link Clips
1
2. Requirements Size (Length) 16 25 32 40 50 63 80
Thickness 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.4 0.4 0.4
2.1 Material - Aluminium sheet or strip in the
Width 8 8 8 8 888
annealed condition.
Distance of 5 10 10 12.5 12.5 20 25
2.2 Construction - Shall be smooth, free from fixing hole
dents or burrs, and shall have comers rounded off Spacing of - - - - 12.5 12.5 12.5
smoothly. fixing holes
2.2.1 One fixing hole for sizes up to 40 mm and Note - For details, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the smuiard.
two for sizes over 40 mm. Size of hole 2.6 mm clear
diameter and tolerance on hole +0.25, -0 mm. 4. Tests
4.1 Type Tests

2.3 Finish - Shall be free from any mark of COTTO-
4.1.1 General examination
sion.
4.1.2 Dimensions
4.1.3 Flexibility - Clips shall be wound round a
3.1 Link Clips with Separate Eyes: mandrel 5 mm dia, and fixed with linking eye. It shall
Size (Length) 25 32 40 50 63 80 then be opened out, flattened by hand and again wound
Thickness 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.40 0.40 0.40 and fixed. At the end of 5 such operations, clip shall
Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 retain its flexibility and shall be fit for use.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2412-1975 Specification for link clips for electrical wiring (first
revision).
415
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2509-1973 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUITS

FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for circular rigid 4.2 Bending Test - Surface shall show no cracks
,
conduits manufactured from unplasticized PVC or after bending.
copolymer material or other suitable non-metallic 4.3 Test for Resistance to Heat - Specimen main-
material and intended for the enclosure and protection tained at a temperature of 60 + 2°C for 240 hours. It
of cables used in the wiring of electrical installations. shall not show any change which would impair its use.
Covers the conduits suitable for temperature between On cooling, it shall be capable of withstanding the
- S”C,and + 60°C. impact test.
2. Dimensions (in mm) 4.4 Test for Mechanical Strength
Nomirralout- 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 4 Rigidity - Deflection shall not be more than
side dia 25 mm.
Outsidedia, 16.3 20.3 25.3.32.3 40.3 50.3 63.3 b) Resistance to impact - There shall be no
MlW cracks.
Inside dia, 13.4 17.2 21.6 28.2 35.8 45 56.8 c) Resistance to crushing - Flattening shall not
Min be more than 1.0 percent of original outside
Ecentricity , 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 diameter.
MaX 4.5 Tests for Electrical Characteristics
Ovality , 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8
Max. a) Dielectric strength -‘No breakdown shall
occur after application of high voltage.
2.1 Tolerance on nominal outside diameter shall be b) Insulation resistance - Not less than 100 meg-
+0.3 mm and -0 mm. ohms.
2.2 Size Designation - By nominal outside dia- 4.6 TestforResistance to Combustion - Specimen
meter. shall not bum to 25 mm mark and shall not show any
flame or afterglow 5 seconds after removing the
2.3 Length - 3 or 4 m or as specified.
burner.
4.7 Testfor Resistance to Chemical Action - There
3. Workmanship - The interior of conduits shall shall be no visible deterioration after 1 week immer-
be free from obstructions. The ends of conduits shall be sion in acid solution (330 ml HCl diluted to 1 litre) or
cleanly cut or formed plane and shall be free from alkaline solution (80 g of sodium hydroxide dissolved
burrs. in water and diluted to 1 litre).
4.8 Copper Test - Shall show no evidence of
4. Tests formation of copper salts.
4.1 Checking of Dimensions - Outside diameter 4.9 Testfor Resistance to Oil - Specimen shall not
ovality; uniformity of wall thickness (eccentricity); show any sign of penetration of oil or of cracking or
inside diameter. splitting .
Note-For methods of tests, refer to 6 of rhe standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 2509-1973 Specificationfor rigid non-metallic conduitsfor electrical
instaltations{first revision).
476
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAHY OF
IS : 2667-1976 FITTINGS FOR RIGID’ STEEL CONDUITS

FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Material, dimensions and other re.-. Note - For profile and other details of IS0 metic threads,
quirements of screwed type fittings (couples, elbows, refer to Appendix A of he standard.
tees, bends and boxes) for use with rigid steel conduits 3. Dimensions (in mm)
for electrical wiring purposes conforming to
3.1 Nominal sizes of outlets of fittings shall corres-
IS : 9537 (Part II)-198 l*. Screw reducers are not co- pond to nominal outside diameter of conduits (16,20,
vered . 25, 32, 40, 50 and 63) covered by IS : 9537 (Part
2. Requirements II)-1981*.
2.1 Material - Steel, cast iron or malleable cast 3.2 Minimum thickness of fittings (other than boxes)
iron. shall be equal to that of corresponding conduit thick-
2.2 Fittings shall be fabricated or cast to the shape. ness with which they are used. For cast fittings, the
The interior and the ends of fittings shall be free from minimum thickness at the root of the thread shall be as
burrs, dents, tins, sharp edges or projections and the follows:
like. 1.5 mm forcast fittings of sizes 16,20 and 25 mm.
2.5mmforcastfittingsofsizes32,40and50mm.
2.3 Couplers shall be screwed inside for entire 3.0 mm for cast fittings of sizes 63 mm.
length.
3.3 Tolerance - +5 percent on nominal dimen-
2.4 Elbow - Atis of elbow shall be quadrant of a sions .
circle (radius = its nominal size) plus a’straight portion
3.4 Couplers
(of length=twice nominal size) at each end.
Nominal size 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
2.5 Normal Bend - Axis shall be quadrant of a Length, Min 30 35 43 43 43 49 49
circle (radius = 2% times nominal size) plus a straight
3.5 Tees - Radius of axis shall be equal to nominal
portion (of length = twice nominal size) at each end.
size and straight length at each end shall be twice the
Half normal bend will be same as normal bend except
nominal size.
that diversion shall be 45” instead of 90”.
3.6 Boxes
2.6 Circular Boxes - Shall be provided with lugs
3.6.1 Circular boxes
(thickness not less than 2.8 mm) for fixing covers; two
lugs for small boxes and four lugs for large boxes. Size of conduit 16 20 25 20 25 32
Internal dia 60 60 60 80 80 80
2.7 Rectangular Boxes - Those used with 16 mm
Internal depth 50 50 50 70 70 70
and 20 mm conduits are recognised as standard; and
Thickness, C.I. 3 3 3 3.5 3.5 3.5
shall be provided with two lugs of thickness not less
Thickness Mall C.I. 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
than 2.8 mm.
Thickness steel 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.5 2.5 2.5
2.8 Coversfor Boxes - Shall be of steel, malleable
3.6.2 Preferred internal dimensions of rectangular
cast iron, or other suitable material. Thickness shall
boxes :
not be less than 1.2 mm for steel covers; and not less
than minimum thickness of box for malleable cast iron. Height
Length 75 100 100 150 150 150
2.9 Protection Against Corrosion - Shall be 37.5
I Breadth 75 75 100 75 100 150
treated both inside and outside, excluding machined 75 100 100 150 150 150
surfaces and screw threads. Examples of protection 50 “B
I 75 75 100 75 100 150
are: 100 150 150 150
a) Medium protection - Stove enamelling; 75 B”
( 100 75 100 150
Air-drying paint; Electrolytic deposits. 100 150
b) Heavy protection - Hot-dip galvanized coat- 100 B”
{ 100 150
ing; Sherardizing. 100
150 “B
2.10 Screw Threads - IS0 metric threads. { 100
*Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel *Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel
conduits. conduits.
477
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - Nominal sizes of elbows, bends (normal and half- 4. Tests

normal) and tees shall be same as given for couplers in 3.4.
a) Tests for visual examination,
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions of boxes, refer to Tables 5 to b) Dimensional check,
7 of rhe standard. c) Test for protective coatings, and
d) Test for resistance to impact.
Note-For methods of tests given in 4(b) and 4(d), refer to Appendices C and D and for method of test given in 4(c), refer t0
IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel conduits.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2667-1976 Specification for fittings for rigid steel conduits for
electrical wiring (first revision). L
i ___~
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3419-1976 FITTINGS FOR RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUITS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for rigid conduit fittings type and slip type coupling), elbows (normal
(couplers, bends, elbows, tees, inspection sleeves and type), tees (normal type and socketed type) and
boxes) manufactured from unplasticized PVC or boxes (spout tipe circular) shall be as given in the
copolymer material or other suitable non-metallic table below:
material for use with non-metallic conduits conform-
ing to IS : 2509-1973*. These conduit fittings suitable Nominal size 16 20 25 32 40 50
for temperature between -5°C and +6O”C; but will Minimum wall thickness 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.7
also be suitable for teinperature below -5”C, subject for couplers, elbows,
to reduction in mechanical strength. Covers plain type tees
fittings only.
Minimum overall length 80 80 80 100 100 120
2. Requirements of couplers (slip type
and clamp type)
2.1 Shall be homogeneous and non-porous.
Minimum overall length 100 100 110 120 130 140
2.2 Inside and outside surfaces shall be smooth, fEe of socketed type
from projections and other defects. couplers
2.3 Elbows - Area of opening of inspections elbow Inside dia of collar 16.420.4 25.4 32.440.4 50.4
shall not be less than 2% times internal cross-sectional for couplers, elbows,
area of corresponding conduit. Minimum thickness of tees, slip type coupl-
cover 1.5 mm. ing bends
2.4 Tees - Area of opening of inspection tees shall Outside dia of bends 16 20 25 32 40 50
not be less than 3 times external cross-sectional area of 13.4 17.2 21.6 28.2 35.8 45
Minimum inside dia,
corresponding conduit. Minimum thickness of cover
normal type bends
1.5 mm.
Minimum inside dia, 13.3 17.2 21.6 28.2 35.8 45
2.5 Cover of Circular Box - Minimum thickness
slip type coupling
1.6 mm.
bends
3. Dimensions (in mm) - Nominal size of outlets Length of socket 35 35 35 45 45 55
of fittings shall correspond to nominal outside diameter (socketed type coupl-
of conduits. Dimensions of fittings namely couplers ers slip type coupling
(slip type, socketed and clamp type), bends (normal bends elbows, tees)
*Specification for rigid non-metallic conduits for electrical instal- Internal dia of spout 60 60 60 - - -
lations @rst revision ). type circular box
478
SP : 21-1983
Thickness of spout type 1.6 1.6. 1.6 - - - 4.1.6 Moisture absorption test - Shall not
circular box exceed 1 percent.
Length of spouts of 18 20 23 - - - 4.1.7 Test for resistance to chemical action -
spout type circular Thete shall be no visible signs of deterioration after
box, Minimum
immersion of sample in acid solution (330 ml HCL sp
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances of fittings, gr 1.6 diluted to 1 litre of water) or alkaline solution
refer to Tables 1 to 9 of the standard. (80 g of sodium hydroxide dissolved in water and
diluted to 1 litre of water for one week.
4. Tests
4.1.8 Copper test - There shall be no visible
4.1 Type Tests evidence of formation of copper salt on sample.
4.1.1 Visual examination 4.1.9 Testfor resistance to oil - Strip shall show
4.1.2 Checking of dimensions no sign of cracking or splitting.
4.1.3 Test for resistance to heat - Specimens 4.1.10 Test for resistance to combustion -
shall not show changes which will impairtheiruse after Burning shall not spread. Flame shall die out in less
they are maintained at a temperature of 60 + 2°C for than 30 seconds after removal of burner.
240 hours. On cooling they shall withstand impact
resistance test. 4.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in 4.1.1,
4.1.2 and 4.1.5.
4.1.4 Test for resistance to impact - Sample
shall show no damage or cracks.
4.3 Routine Tests - Tests specified in 4.1.1
4.1.5 Test for electrical characteristics and 4.1.2.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3419-1976 Specification for fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3480-1966 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUITS

1. Scope - Requirements for flexible steel conduits Nominal internal dia 6.5 10 16 25 40 63 100
for protection of cables in electrical installations. Such Internal dia 6.5 10 16 25 40 63 100
conduits shall not be used as an earth continuity
External dia in nor- 9 13 20 31 46 70 108
conductor.
ma1 position, M&
2. Requirements Tums/metre in nor- 315 235 200 160 100 100 100
ma1 position, Min
2.1 Strip steel used in manufacture shall be of mild
steel, bright, cold-rolled and annealed. Shall be Bending dia, Min 55 63 90 150 225 350450
electro-galvanized or electro-tinned to a minimum ‘Linear breaking 35 60 110 210 330 430 500
thickness of 0.002 5 mm, or otherwise provided with load, Min, kgf
equally effective protective coating. Bending fracture 11.5 18 35 45 70 125 190
2.2 Conduit shall be wound tightly and the strip so load, Min, kgf
overlapped in subsequent helicis that no openings are Tolerance on internal +0.5 and -0 +l.O and -0
seen in normal position. dia
2.3 Internal surfaces shall be free from burrs and
sharp edges.
*Linear breaking load = Load at which coils pull off adjacent
3. Dimensions (in mm) beading.
479
SP : 21-1983
4. Tests flaws and shall return to normal position without

damage to its outer or inner diameter.
4.1 Tests for Dimensions
4.2 Linear Breaking Test - Shall show no indica- 4.4 Bend Fracture Test - Radius of bend shall be
tion of yielding under a load less than that specified in decreased until the yield point is reached under a load,
above table maintained for 3 minutes when undergone not less than that specified in Table given in 3.
the prescribed test.
4.5 Crushing Test - There shall be no permanent
4.3 Test for Flexibility - Shall show no crack or distortion.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 3480-1966 Specification for flexible steel conduits for electrical
wiring.
SUMMAR+ OF
IS : 3837-1976 ACCESSORIES FOR RIGID STEEL CONDUITS

(First Revision)
1. Scope - Material, dimensions and other require- smoothly rounded in order to prevent abrasion of
ments of accessories (other than fittings) used with cables.
rigid steel conduits conforming to IS : 9537 (Part II)-
198 1* . Accessories include clips (ordinary), saddles Note - For constructionaldetails in respect of screw thread,
spacing plates, plug, lock nuts and entry bush, refer to 3 of the
(single and multiple), pipe hooks and crampets, plugs, standard.
lock nuts and bushes (externally screwed hexagonal
and internally screwed circular). 2.4 Shall be protected against corrosion both inside
and outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw
2. Requirements threads. Examples of protection are:
2.1 Saddles shall be ribbed for reinforcement at a) Medium protection - Stove enamelling;
crown. Air-drying paint, Electrolytic deposits, etc.
b) Heavy protection - Hot-dip galvanized coat-
2.2 Plug may be recessed to the thickness of the
ing; Sherardizing, etc.
head, thickness of wall being not less than 3 mm.
2.3 The inside edges of entry bushes shall be 3. Dimensions (in mm)
Size of conduit/bush 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Minimum thickness (ordinary clips, 0.71 0.9 0.9 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 I
single and multiple saddles)
Minimum width (ordinary clips, single 15 20 20 25 25 25 25
and multiple saddles)
Maximum width across flats (plugs) 17 22 41 50
Maximum width across flats (lock nuts) 22 27 Z 4’: 50 65 ::
Maximum width across flats (hexagonal 17 22 30 36 41 55 -
bushes)
Bore (hexagonal bushes) 10 13.5 19 26.2 31 44.4 - .
Circular bushes, external dia 20 24 29
Circular bushes, bore 11.1 14.3 19 ;:.2 Yl.8 Z.4 q
*Specification for conduitsfor electrical wirlng: Part II Rigid steel Note I - Tolerances shall be +5 percent on nominal dimen-
conduits. sions .
480
SP : 21-1983
Sore 2 - The material shall be mild steel for clips, saddles, 4. Tests
plugs and lock nuts. mild steel forgings for pipe hooks and
crampets. and shall be moulded insulating for bushes. a) Visual examination,
b) Dimensional check, and
Sote 3 - For detailed dimensions of accessories. refer to c) Test for protective coating (for medium and
Tables 1 to 8 of r/w srnr~~~~nrtl. heavy protection).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3837-1976Specification for accessories for rigid steel conduits fer
electrical wiring (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3854-1966 SWITCHES FOR-DOMESTIC

AND SIMILAR PURPOSES
1. Scope Tough non-ignitable insulating material.

cl Current-carrying parts - Brass, copper,
1.1 Requirements for manually operated switches, phosphor bronze, aluminium or silver alloy.
such as tumbler switches, push-button switches and
4 Springs - Corrosion-resisting metal.
ceiling switches of the surface, semi-recessed or flush
e) Attachment Fttings, screws and other non-
mounting type for domestic and similar geneial pur-
current-carrying parts - Mild steel,
pose; for wall or ceiling mounting, for Licorporation in aluminium alloy or insulating material.
cords, having a rating up to and including 30 A and
suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltages 4.2 Cord Grip - Switches used with &.xible cords
not exceeding 250 V. shall be provided with cord grips so that cords of
1.2 This does not cover contactors, circuit- conductors connected to the terminals are relieved
breakers, isolating switches, mercury switches, au- from strain.
tomatic temperature response switches, toggle
4.3 Terminals - Shall allow a conductor to be
switches for controlling electronic devices, switches
connected without special preparation such as solder-
including control switches on heating and cooking
ing of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of
appliances, outdoor switches, switches making
eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor
momentary contact, switch fuses or spitter units.
between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure
1.3 This also covers bell push switches of 5A rating and without damage to conductor.
and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated
4.3.1 Dimensions ofpillar type terminals (in mm)
voltage not exceeding 250 V.
Rated current, A 5 15 30
2. Classification - Classified according to type of Nominal thread dia, Min 3.54 6
connections: Dia of holes for conductor, 3.5’ 4.5 7
a) Single-pole one-way switch, Min
b) Double-pole one-way switch, Length of thread in pillar, 2.53 4
c) Single-pole two-way and off switch, Min
d) Single-pole two-way switch, and. ‘Difference between dia 0.6 0.6 1.2
e) Intermediate switch. of hole and nominal dia
of screw, Max
3. Standard Current Ratings - 5, 15 and 30 A.
4.3.2 Dimensions @screw terminals (in mm)
4. Requirements
4.1 Material _ Parts shall be made with the follow- Nominal thread dia, Min 3.5 5 5
ing materials: Length of screw under head, 4 7 8.5
a) Base - Vitrified ceramic material or tough Min
non-ignitable insulating material. Length of thread in nut: 1.5 3 3
b) Cover, switch-plate, dolly, pltsh button - Min
481
SP : 21-1983
Difference between dia 3.5 5 5 5.1.6 Over voltage and overcurrent capacity -
of head and thread 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated
part, Min voltage, 10 times in succession at intervals of
Height of head, Min 2.6 3 3.5 30 seconds.
4.4 Creepage Distance and Clearance - 3 mm, 5.1.7 Endurance - 15 Ooo switch cycles for 5
Min. and 15 amperes and 10 000 for 30 amperes.
Note 1 - For constructional details in respect of enclosures, 5.1.8 Switches for inductive circuits
cord grip, covers and switch plates, mounting of switches,
current-carrying parts, operating cord, prevention against char- 5.1.9 Screws and connections
ring of base, and sealing compound, refer to 6 of rhe stundard.
5.1.10 Mechariical strength ,
Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminal and screws, 5.1.11 Water absorption - Shall not exceed
and actuating mechanism, refer to 7 and 8 of the smndard. 0.5 percent for ceramic material and 1 percent for
5. Tests moulded insulating material.
5.1 Type Tests 5.1.12 Resistance to heat
5.1.1 Visual examination 5.1.13 Tracking (applicable to moulded insulat-

ing materials only) - Tracking index not less than
5.1.2 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage 175.
of 1 500 V rms for one minute under the sp.ecified test
conditions. 5.1.14 Cord grip
5.1.3’ Insulation resistance (dry) - Not less than 5.1.15 Resistance to rusting - Shall show no
100 megohms. sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride
test.
5.1.4 Moisture resistance - Not less than 2 meg-
ohms titer moisture treatment. 5.1.16 Maximum pull - 50 N normal to plane of
base and 75 N at 45” to plane of base.
5.1.5 Contact resistance and temperature
5.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in 5.1.1
rise - Shall be capable of carrying rated current for
to 5.1.6, 5.1.8, 5.1.10 and 5.1.16.
half an hour without temperature rise of any part ex-
ceeding 25°C. 5.3 Routine Tests - Tests specified in 5.1.1
and 5.1.2.
Note-For detailed requirements and methods of tests, refer to 11 of the sfandurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3854-1966 Specification for switches for domestic and similar
purposes.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4160-1967 INTERLOCKING SWITCH SOCKET OUTLET

1. Scope - Requirements for interlocking type b) Cover, cover plates and actuating
switch socket outlets, rating up to 30A, suitable for use member - of tough, non-ignitable insulating
in ac and dc circuits at rated voltages up to 250 V. material.
2. Standard Current Ratings - 5, 15 and 30 A. cl Current carrying parts - of brass, copper,

phosphor bronze, alurninium alloy, or other
suitable material.
3. Recplirements
3.1 Material - Parts manufactured with following 4 Springs - of corrosion resistant metal.
materials: e) Attachment fittings, screws, non-current carry-
a) Base - of vitrified ceramic material or tough ing parts - of mild steel, aluminium alloy or
non-ignitable moulded insulating material. insulating material.
482
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Terminals - Shall allow a conductor to be 4.1.3 Interlocking action

connected without special preparation such as solder- 4.1.4 Insulation resistance (dry) - Shall not be
ing of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of less than 100 megohms.
eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor 4.1.5 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage
between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure of 1 500 V rms for a period of one minute under the
and without damage to conductor. specified test.
3.2.1 Dimensions ofpillar type terminals (in mm) 4.1.6 Moisture resistance - Insulation resis-
Rated current, A 5 15 30 tance shall not be less than 2 megohms.
Nominal thread dia, Min 3.54 6
Dia of hole for conductor, Min 3.5 4.5 7 4.1.7 Contact resistance and temperature-
Length of thread in pillar, Min 2.5 3 4 rise - Shall be capable of carrying rated current for
Difference between dia of hole 0.6 0.6 1.2 half an hour without voltage drop in a switched pole of
and nominal dia of screw; Mar switch socket outlet measured from the terminal of the
switch to the corresponding plug pin exceeding 0.1
3.2.2 Dimensions of screw type terminals (in mm) volt and without temperature rise exceeding 25°C.
4.1.8 Overvoltage and overcurrent cavacitv -
Nominal thread dia, Min 3.5 5 5
7 8.5 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated
Length of screw under head, Min 4
1.5 3 3 voltage 10 times in succession at intervals of 30
Length of thread in nut, Min
seconds.
Nominal difference between dia of 3.5 5 5
head and threaded part, Min 4.1.9 Endurance - 15 000 switch cycles for 5
Height of head, Min 2 3 3.5 and 15 A and 10 000 for 30 A.
3.3 Interlocking Mechanism - Moving member 4.1.10 Test for switch socket outlets for ac induc-
which locks the plug into the socket outlet shall not be tive circuits
more than 2 mm thick and shall not protrude more than
1.5 mm into the earthing pin of the plug. 4.1.11 Screws and connections
3.4 Creepage Distance and Clearance - Not less 4.1.12 Mechanical strength
than 3 mm. 4.1.13 Water absorption - Shall not exceed 0.5
Note 1 - For constructional details in respect of enclosures, percent for ceramic material and 1 percent for moulded
covers andcover plates, mounting of switch socket outlet, current insulating material.
carrying parts, precautions against electrical contact, socket
contacts, prevention against charring of base, sealing and holes, 4.1.14 Resistance to heat
refer to 5 of the standard.
4.1.15 Resistance to rusting - Shall show no
Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminals and screws,
and swtich actuating mechanism, refer to6 and7 of thesmndard. sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride
test.
4. Tests
4.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in 4.1.1
4.1 Type Tests to 4.1.10 and 4.1.12.
4.1.1 Visual examination 4.3 Routine Tests - Tests specified in 4.1.1
4.1.2 Dimensional check to 4.1.5.
Note l-Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for proper selec-
tion of raw materials.
Note 2-For detailed requirements and methods of test, refer to 11 of the stmdard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4160-1967 Specification for interlocking switch socket outlet.
483
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 46151968 SWITCH SOCKET-OUTLETS

(NON-INTERLOCKING TYPE)
1. Scope - Requirements for switch socket-outlets 3.3 Clearances and Creepage Distances - Not less
of the non-interlocking type of the surface and flush than 3 mm.
type (shuttered and non-shuttered) having ratings up to
30 A and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated Note 1 - For &mstmctional details in respect of enclosures,
covers, cover plates, mounting of switch socketautlet, current
voltage not exceeding 250 V.
carrying parts, precautions against electrical contact, earthing,
socket contacts, prevention against charring of base, sealing and
2. Standard Current Ratings - 5, 15 and 30 A. holes, refer to 5 of Phe standard.
3. Requirements Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminals and screws,

and switch actuating mechanism, refer to 6 and7 of the standard.
3.1 Materials - Parts shall be manufactured with

4. Tests
following materials:
a) Base - Vitritied ceramic material or tough 4.1 Type Tests
non-ignitable moulded insulating material.
b) Covers, cover plates and actuating
member - Tough, non-ignitable insulating 4.1.2 Dimensional check
material. 4.1.3 Effectiveness of contact - Voltage drop
c) ‘Current-carrying parts - Brass, copper, between terminals of switch socket outlet and corres-
phosphor bronze, aluminium alloy, etc. ponding plug pin shall not exceed 25 and 60 millivolts
d) Springs - Corrosion resistant material. in unswitched neutral pole and switched pole respec-
tively.
e) Attachmentjttings, screws, non-currentcarry-
ing parts - Mild steel, aluminium alloy or 4.1.4 Withdrawal pull - Between 3 to 60, 4 to
insulating material. 80 and 7 to 100 Newtons for 5, 15 and 30 A rating
respectively,
3.2 Terminals - Shall allow a conductor to be
connected without special preparation such as solder- 4.1.5 Insulation resistance (dry) - Shall not be
ing of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of less than 100 megohms.
eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor 4.1.6 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage
between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure of 1 500 V rms for a period of one minute under
and without damage to the conductor.
specified test conditions.
3.2.1 Dimensions ofpillar type terminals (in mm):
4.1.7 Moisture resistance - Insulation resis-
Rated current, A 5 15 30 tance shall not be less than 2 megohms after moisture
Nominal thread dia, Min 3.5 4 6 treatment.
Dia of hole for conductor, Min 3.5 4.5 7
Length of thread in pillar, Min 2.5 3 4 4.1.8 Contact resistance and temperature-
Difference between dia of hole 0.6 0.6 1.2 rise - Not mote than 25°C.
and nominal dia of screw,
4.1.9 Overvoltage and overcurrent capacity -
MUX
130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated ’
3.2.2 Dimensions of screw type terminals (in mm):
voltage, 10 times in succession at intervals of
30 seconds.
Nominal thread dia, Min 3.5 5 5
Length of screw under the 4 7 8.5 4.1.10 Endurance - 15 000 switch cycles 5 and
head, Min 15 A and 10 000 for 30 A.
Length of thread in nut, Min 1.5 3 3
Nominal difference between 3.5 5 5 4.1.11 Switch socket-outlets for ac inductive
dia of head and thread circuits - 125 percent or rated current at 110 percent
part, Min of rated voltage at 0.3 power factor, 100 times, at a rate
Height of head, Min 2 3 3.5 approximate 7.5 switch cycles per minute.
484
SP : 21-1983
4.1.12 Screws and connections sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride
test.
4.1.13 Mechanical strength
4.1.17Endurance ofshutters - 5 000 operations.
4.1.14 Water absorption 4.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in 4.1.1
to 4.1.11 and 4.1.13.
4.1.15 Resistance to heat
4.3 Routine Tests - Tests specified in4.1.1,4.1.2,
4.1.16 Resistance to rusting - Shall’ show no 4.1.5 and 4.1.6.
Note I-Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for Proper sek-
tion of raw materials. \
Note 2-For detailed requirements and methods of tests, refer to 10 of the standard.
For &tailed information, refer to IS : 4615-1968 Specification for switch socket-outlets (non-inrertockiw
type).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4649-1968 ADAPTORS FOR FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUITS

1. Scope - Requirements for adaptors of clamp 2.5 Dimensions (in mm)
and solid types for flexible steel conduits intended for Nominal internal 6.5 10 16 25 40 63 100
the protection of cables in electrical installations. dia of flexible
Adaptors are used for connecting flexible metallic conduit
conduits to a rigid conduit or its fitting. Flexible steel External dia in 9 13 20 31 46 70 108
conduits shall not be used as earth continuity normal position,
conductor. Ma”X
2. Requirements Turns per metre in 315 235 200 160 100 100 100
normal position,
2.1 Material - Malleable iron. Min
Depth of engage- 10 15 15 25 30 35 45
2.2 Shall be protected against corrosion, both inside
ment between
and outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw and
conduit
threads. adaptor, Min
Examples
Note - Tolerances on internal dia shall be (+0.5 and -0.0)
a) Medium protection Stoved enamel; airdry-
- and(+ 1.0 and-0.0) for nominaidiarange6.5 to 25 and40to 100
ing paint; and electrolytic deposits. respectively.
b) Heavy protection - t-lot-dip galvanized coat- 3. Tests
ing; sherardising.
3.1 Type Tests
2.3 Shall be fitted with external earthing lug with
a) Visual examination,
hole to accommodate not less than 4 mm* earthing
b) Dimensional check, and
wire. The lug shall be tapped and fitted with a headed
c) Test for protective-coating (for medium and
clamping screw. Alternately, a headed earthing screw
heavy protection).
and washer shall be fitted to the solid portion.
3.2 Acceptance Tests
2.4 Workmanship - Shall be free from burrs or
sharp edges and edges of turns of fins shall be a) Visual examination, and
well-formed. b) Dimensional check.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 4649-1968 Specjjication for adaptors for flexible steel conduits.
485
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4949-1968 2-AMP SWITCHES FOR DOMESTIC

AND SIMILAR PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements for manually operated Note 1 - For amspuctional details in respect of enclosures,
2-Amp single pole one-way switches, such as tumbler, cord grip, covers and switch plates, current carrying pans and
prevention against charring of base, refer to 4 of the srundard.
push button, bell push and other types for domestic and
similar purposes, for incorporation in cords, lamp- Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminals and screws,
holders or for mounting on or in appliances or and actuating mechanism, refer to 5 and 6 of the srandard.
accessories where tappings cannot be taken, suitable
for use on ac or dc circuits at rated voltages not 3. Tests
exceeding 250 V. These switches shall not be used for
wall mounting, where tappings can be taken. 3.1 Type Tests
2. Requirements
2.1 Material - Parts shall be manufactured with 3.1.2 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage
following materials: of 1 500 V rms for a period of one minute under the
specified test conditions.
a) Base - Tough, non-ignitable insulating
material or vitrified ceramic material. 3.1.3 Insulation resistance (dry) - Shall not be
b) Cover, switch-plate, dolly, push button - less than 100 megohms.
Tough non-ignitable insulating material. 3.1.4 Moisture resistance - Not less than 2 meg-
C) Current-carrying parts - Brass, copper, ohms after moisture treatment.
phosphor bronze, aluminium or silver alloy.
d) Spring - Corrosion-resistant metal. 3.1.5 Contact resistance and temperature-
e) Attachmentjttings, screws, non-current carry- rise - Voltage drop not exceeding 0.075 V and
ing parrs - Mild steel, aluminium alloy or temperature rise not more than 25°C.
insulating material.
3.1.6 Overvoltage and overcurrent capacig -
2.2 Terminals and Screws 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated
2.2.1 Terminals shall allow conductor to be con- voltage 10 times in sucession at intervals of
nected without special preparation, such as soldering 30 seconds.
of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. 3.1.7 Endurance - 15 000 cycles at a rate not
2.2.2 Dimensions of pillar Qpe terminals exceeding 6 cycles/minute.
Nominal thread dia 3 mm, Min, 3.1.8 Screws and connections

Dia of hole for conductor 3 mm, Min
3.1.9 Mechanical strength
Length of thread in pillar 2 mm, Min
Difference between dia of hole 0.6 mm, MUX 3.1.10 Water absorption - Shall not exceed
and nominal dia of screw 0.5 percent for ceramic material and 1 percent for
moulded insulating material.
2.2.3 Dimensions of screw terminals
Nominal thread dia 3 mm, Min 3.1.11 Resistance to heat
Length of screw under head 3.5 mm, Min
3.1.12 Cord grip
Length of thread in nut or fixed 1.5 mm, Min
pa* 3.1.13 Resistance to rusting - Shall show no
Nominal difference between dia 3.0 mm, Min sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride
of head and threaded part test.
Height of head 1.8 mm, Mitt 3.1.14 Test with ac inductive circuits
2.2.4 Screws for gripping conductor shall be
3.2 Acceptance. Tests - Tests specified in 3.1.1
rounded or chamfered at ends, so as to prevent
to 3.1.6, 3.1.9 and 3.1.14.
damage to conductor.
2.3 Creepage Distances and Clearance - Not less 3.3 Routine Tests -Tests specified in 3.1.1
than 3 mm. and 3.1.2.
486
SP : 21-1983
Note- For detailed requirements and methods of tests, refer to 9 of the s!andurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4949-1968 Specification for 2-Amp switches for domestic and
similar purposes.
SUMMAHY OF
IS : 5133 (PART I)-1969 BOXES FOR ENCLOSURE OF

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
PART I STEEL AND CAST IRON BOXES
1. Scope - Requirements for boxes made of 3. Dimensions (in mm)

steel or cast iron intended to contain one or more
Length, External Width, External Depth, Internal
electrical accessories and to be recessed into a wall or
Max Ma-X
ceiling or similar flat surfaced structure. Such boxes
may also be suitable for surface mounting. 75 75 35, 50
100 100 50, 65
135 75 35, 50
180 100 50, 65
2. Requirements
195 75 50,
2.1 Boxes shall be provided with four fixing lugs 260 100 65,
which shall be threaded M5. 135 135 50, 65
180 180 65, 100
195 135 50, 65
2.2 Knockouts in boxes for receptio? of conduits
260 180 65, 100
shall be nominal conduit size +0.25 mm with a
300 200 100
tolerance of -0.00 f0.50 mm.
3.1 Tolerance (in mm) - On depth, _+1 for depth
2.3 Protection Against Corrosion - Shall be pro- 35 and + 2 for depth 50 and above.
tected both inside and outside excluding machined Note 1 - The minimum thickness of walls and base of boxes
surfaces and screw threads. shall be 1.12 and 3.0 mm for steel and cast iron materials
Examples respectively.
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to
a) Medium protection - Stoved enamel, air Table 1 with Fig. 1 of rhe standard.
drying paint and electrolytic deposit.
4. Tests
b) Heavy protection - Hot-dip galvanized coat- 4.1 Type Tests
ing and sherardizing .
2.4 Holes, not less than 5 mm shall be provided in b) Dimensional check,
the base of the box for securing it to a mounting c) Test for mechanical strength of lugs, and
surface. d) Test for protection against corrosion (for
medium and heavy protection).
2.5 Protective Earthing - Provision shall be made 4.2 Acceptance Test

for an earthing terminal inside the box. The terminal a) Visual examination,
shall be protected against corrosion and shall be b) Dimensional check, and
metallically clean. c) Test for mechanical strength of lugs.
-
Note-For test details, refer to 6 of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5133 (Part I)-1969 Specification for boxes for enclosure of
electrical accessories: Part I Steel and cast iron boxes.
487
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5133 (PART II)-1969 BOXES FORENCLOSURE OF

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
PART II BOXES MADE OF INSULATING MATERIAL
1. Scope - Requirements for boxes made of in- Length, Width, Depth,

sulating material intended to contain one or more External External Internal
electrical accessories and to be recessed into a wall or Ma-X Max
ceiling or similar flat surfaced structure. Such boxes 180 180 65, 100
may also be suitable for surface mounting. 195 135 50, 65
260 180 65, 100
2. Requirements 300 200 100
2.1 Boxes shall be provided with four fixing lugs 3.1 Tolerance (in mm) - On depth, +-1 for depth
threaded M5, and located at the comers. 35 and f2 for depth 50 and above.
2.2 Holes not less than 5 mm shall be provided in the Note - For detaileddimensions and tolerances, refer to Table ”
base of the box for securing it to a mounting surface. 1 with Fig. 1 of the standard.
2.3 Holes for reception of conduits shall be nominal
conduits size +0.25 mm with a tolerance of - 0.00 4. Tests
f 0.50 mm. 4.1 Type Tests
2.4 Thickness of Walls and Base- Not less than 2 4.1.1 Testfor dimensions
mm.
4.1.2 Test for mechanical strength of lugs and
3. Dimensions (in mm) boxes
Length, W&h, Depth, 4.1.3 Testfor water absorption - Water absorp-
External External Internal tion shall not exceed 1 percent for moulded insulating
Mar Max material.
75 75 35, 50 4.1.4 Test for stability at high temperature -
100 100 50, 65 There shall be no appreciable distortion of box after
135 75 35, 50 the prescribed test at a temperature of 55”f3”C for a
180 100 50, 65 period of 48 hours.
195 75 50
260 100 65 4.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in 4.1.1
135 135 50, 65 and 4.1.2.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 5133 (Part II)-1969 Specification for boxes for enclosure of
electrical accessories: Part II Boxes made of insulating materl’al.
488
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6538-1971 THREE-PIN PLUGS MADE OF

RESILIENT MATERIAL
1. Scope - Requirements and tests for three-pin Note - For detaileddimensionsand tolerances, refer to Table
1 of the standard.
(two-pole and earthing-pin) plugs having the base and
cover, or either of these components, constructed of 3.2.3 Terminals and Screws - The design shall
rubber or other suitable resilient material and suitable allow a conductor to be connected without special
for use in ac and dc circuits having voltage up to 250V. preparations, such as soldering, use of cable lugs and
Note - These are intended to be used with socket-outlets formation of eyelets. When pillar type terminals are
conforming to IS : 1293-1967*. used, their dimensions shall be as follows:
2. Standard Ratings - 5 and 15 A. 5A 15 A
Current rating
3. Requirements Nom thread dia, Min 3.5 mm 4.0mm
Dia of hole for conductor, 3.5 mm 4.0mm
3.1 Materials:
Min
a) Plug base and cover - of rubber (hardness Length of thread in pillar, 2.5 mm 3.0mm
<85 IRHD) or tough non-ignitable insulating Min
material. Difference between dia of 0.6 mm 0.6mm
b) Pins, terminals, current-carrying parts - of hole and nominal dia
phosphor-bronze, brass, aluminium alloy, etc. of screw, Max
c) Non-currentcarrying parts - of mild steel, 3.3 Ageing - Plugs shall be resistant to ageing.
aluminium alloy, or insulating material.
3.4 Clearances and Creepage Distances - Not less
3.2 Construction than 3.0 mm.
Note - For consnuctional requirements of three-pin plugs
3.2.1 During insertion of plug into socket-outlet, with regardto aspects such as earthing,plug cover and base, pins,
it shall not be possible to touch a live pin after contact cord entry and cordgrip, current-canying parts, finger grip, plugs
has been established between pins and socket contacts. with integralflexible cord. and terminalsand screws, referto 5 of
Earthing pin shall make and break contact respectively he standard.
before and after the associated current-carrying pins 4. Tests
make and break contact with corresponding contacts. 4.1 Type Tests
3.2.2 Dimensions ofplugs(in mm)- SeeTable 1.
b) Test for interchangeability,
d Test for effectiveness of contact,
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF PLUGS Test for insulation resistance (dry),
4
cURIWNT RATING
A e) High voltage test,
‘5 A 15 A’ 0 Test for moisture resistance,
i) Distance between earthing-pin 22.2 28.6 iz) Temperature-rise test,
and current-carrying pin h) Breaking capacity test,
(centre to centre)
8 Test for mechanical strength,
ii) Distance between current-cany- 19.1 25.4 k) Ageing test,
ing pins (centre to centre) m) Plug pin deflection test,
iii) Dia of earthing-pin 7.06 8.71
n) Test for water absorption,
P) Test for screws and connections (not
iv) Dia of current-carrying pin 5.08 7.06 applicable for moulded-on type plugs),
v) Projection of current-carrying 15.9 20.6
Test for cord grip,
pins from plug face :; Test for resistance to heat, and
s) Test for resistance to rust.
vi) Projection of earthing-pin from 20.6 28.6
plug face 4.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in (a) to (j)
I of 4.1.
*Speciticarion for three-pin plugs and socket-outlets yirst 4.3 Routine Tests - Tests specified in (a), (b) and
revision). (e) of 4.1.
489
SP : 21-1983
Note-For test details, refer to 9 of the standard and IS : 1293-1967 Specification for three-pin plugs and socket-outlets
Cfirsf
revision).
-_-
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6538-1971 Specification for three-pin plugs made of resilient
material.
SUMMARY OF
,
IS : 6946-1973 PLIABLE CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE CONDUITS

(NON-METALLIC) FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
1. Scope - Requirements for pliable conduits and 2.2 Material and Workmanship - Shall be manu-
flexible conduits (non-metallic), plain or with corru- factured from self-extinguishing plastic materials and
gated walls (with or without non-metallic reinforce- shall ensure reliable mechanical protection to the
ment) manufactured from unplasticized PVC or cables and withstand the stresses likely to occur during
copolymer or other suitable non-metallic material, in- transport, storage and installation.
tended for the enclosure and protection of cables used
in wiring of electrical installations, and suitable for 2.3 Mechanical Strength - Shall show no crack or
working temperatures between -5°C and -t6O”C. deformation when bent or compressed, or exposed to
impacts or e.xtreme temperatures, either during or after
Note L- May be used forcircuit voltages not exceeding 650 V.
installation.
2. Requirements 2.4 Resistance to Heat - Shall be resistant to heat.

2.5 Electrical Characteristics - Shall pass tests for
2.1 Dimensions (in mm) - Size designated by
dielectric strength and insulation resistance.
nominal outside diameter.
3. Tests - Shall be made at the prevailing ambient
Nominal Outside Preferred temperature’.
Size Diameter Deliverf
mm mm Coil 3.1 Type Tests
Lengtks, a) Test for checking of dimensions
b) Bending test
16 16+0 5” c) Test for resistance to heat
-0.3 d) Test for resistance to impact
20 20+0 50 e) Test for resistance to crushing
-0.3 f) Test for electrical characteristics
25 25+0 25 g) Test for resistance to combustion
-0.4 h) Test for resistance to chemical action
32 32+0 25 j) Copper test
-0.4 k) Test for resistance to oil
40 40+0 20
-0.4 3.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in (a), (d),
50 50+0 15 (f) and (g) of 3.1.
-0.5
63 63+0 15 3.3 Routine Tests - Test for checking of dimen-
-0.5 sions.
Note-For details of tests, refer to 5 of the standard.

For detailed information, refer to IS : 6946-1973 Specification for pliable conduits and flexible conduits
(non-metallic) for electrical installations.
490
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING

PART II RIGID STEEL CONDUITS
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of test of 4. Dimensions

threaded/threadable plain rigid steel conduits. Nominal Size Tolerance Wall Thickness
of Conduit on Outside of Conduits
2. General Requirements - Conduits shall be so (Outside Diameter
designed and constructed that they ensure reliable Diameter)
mechanical protection to conductors and/or cables mm mm mm
contained therein. Conduit shall withstand stresses
likely to occur during transport, storage, recom- 16 0 1.4 to 1.8
mended practice and usage. -0.3
20 0 1.4 to 1.8
3. Classification -0.3
3.1 According to Resistance against Corrosine or 25 0 1.4 to 1.8
Polluting substances: -0.4
32 0 1.4 to 1.8
-0.4
a) Conduits with low protection,
40 0 1.6 to 2.2
b) Conduits with medium protection, -0.4
c) Conduits with high protection, SO 0 1.6 to 2.2
-0.5
d) Conduits with high protection on the outside 63 0 . 1.6 to 2.2
and low protection inside, -0.6
e) Conduits with medium protection outside and 4.1 Length - Conduits shall be supplied in straight
low protection inside, and lengths of 3 to 5 metres.
f) Conduits with high protection outside and
5. Construction - The inside and outside surfaces
medium protection inside.
of conduits shall be reasonably smooth and free from
burrs, flash and similar defects. The conduits shall be
Note 1 - Normally, protection mentioned at @) and (c) a~
solid drawn or seam joined by welding.
commonly used.
Note 2 - Typical examples of medium protection are stem 6. Mechanical Properties
enamelfing, air drying point and electrolytic deposits.
6.1 Bending Test - After the test, basic material or
Note 3 -Typical examples of high protection are hot-dip
protective coating of conduits shall not show any
galvanized coating and sherardizing.
cracks visible by normal or corrected vision without
magnification. Seams, if any, shall not have opened,
3.2 According to Mechanical Properties:
and section of conduit shah not have distorted unduly.
a) Conduits for very light mechanical stmsses,
b) Conduits for light mechanical stresses, 6.2 Compression Test - The difference between
c) Conduits for medium mechanical stresses, the initial diameter and diameter of flattened samples
d) Conduits for heavy mechanical stresses, and shall not exceed 10 percent of outside diameter
e) Conduits for very heavy mechanical stresses. measured before the test.
Note l-For requirements regarding gauge for checking minimum and maximum outside diameter of conduits, measurement of
thickness and screw threads, refer to the standard.
Note 2-For test details and provisions regarding external influences, refer to the standard and IS : 9537 (Part I);1980 Specification
for conduits for electrical installations: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 Specification for conduits for electrical wiring:
Part II Rigid steel conduits.
491
,
SECTION 28
GENERAL
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
IS : 1911-1967 Schedule of unit weights of building materials (first revision) 495
494
.
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1911-1967 SCHEDULE OF UNIT WEIGHTS OF

BUILDING MATERIALS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Lays down unit weights of materials Gutter, asbestos cement

and parts or components used in buildings construc- Gypsum
tion. The unit weights of other materials that are likely
Iron
to be stored in a building are also specified in the
standard for the purpose of load calculations. Lime
Linoleum
2. Building Materials - Table 1 of the standard Mastic asphalt
gives the unit weights of the following individual
Masonry brick
building materials used in building construction:
Masonry stone
Acoustical materials Metal sheeting, protected
Aggregate, coarse Mortar
Aggregate, fine Pipes
Aggregate, organic Plaster
Asbestos Sheeting
Asbestos cement building pipes Slagwool
Asbestos cement gutters Soil and gravels
Asbestos cement pressure pipes Steel sections
Asbestos cement sheeting Stones
Bitumen Tar, coal
Blocks Terra cotta
Boards Terrazzo
Bricks Tiles
Brick chips and Timber
broken bricks
Water
Brick dust (SUZNZ-ZZ)
Wood-wool building slabs
Cast iron, manhole covers
Cast iron, manhole frames 3. Building Parts and Components - Table 2 of
the standard gives the unit weights of the following
Cast iron pipes building parts or components:
Cement
Ceilings Finishing
Cement concrete, plain
Cement concrete, plain Flooring
Cement concrete, reinforced
Cement concrete, reinforced Roofing
Cement concrete pipes
Damp-proofing Walling
Cement concrete, prestressed
Earth filling
Cement mortar
Cement plaster 4. Store and Miscellaneous Materials - Unit
Cork weights of the following store and miscellaneous
Expanded metal materials intended for dead load calculations and other
general purposes are given in Appendix A of the
Felt, bituminous for water-proofing
standard.
and damp-proofing
Foam slag, foundry pumice Agricultural and Chemicals and allied
Glass food products materials
495
SP : 21-1983
Fuels Metals and alloys Ores
Manures Miscellaneous materials

--
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1911-1967 Schedule of unit weights of building materials (first
revision).
496

SP21

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP21

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP21

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

1 INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION

FIRST PUBLISHED MARCH 1985

UDC 691: 006*3/4

Shri J. D. Chaturvedi Planning Commission, Ministry of Planning, New Delhi

Director Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee

Shri U. R. Kurlekar Ministry of Food and Civil Supplies, New Delhi

Shri V. Rao Aiyagari Department of Science and Technology, New Delhi

CEMENT AND CONCRETE

BLOCKS, PRECAST CONCRETE

ASBESTOS CEMENT PRODUCTS

IS : 383-1970 COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATES FROM NATURAL

IS Sieve Percentage Passing for Single-Sized Aggregate of Nominal Size

Large, 80-40 mm 80 mm 90- 100 80 mm 100 -

3.3 Fine Aggregates - Grading in Zones I to IV

IS : 650-1966 STANDARD SAND FOR TESTING OF CEMENT

IS : 269-1976 ORDINARY AND LOW HEAT PORTLAND CEMENT

TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT

IS : 455-1976 PORTLAND SLAG CEMENT

1. Scope - Manufacture and chemical and physical 2 2.50 cm%

4.1 Fitzetw.~s - Specific surface, not less than

IS : 1489- 1976 PORTLAND-POZZOLANA CEMENT

1. Scope - Manufacture and physical and chemical 4. Physical Requirements

TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PORTLAND-POZZOLANA CEMENT

O LOSS on ignition, percent, MUX 5.0

*Methods of test for pozzolanic materials Cfirsr revision).

IS : 3466-1967 MASONRY CEMENT

1. Scope -Requirements for masonry cement [a 3. Non-staining to Limestone (if Desired by

2. Physical Reqluirements -See Table 1.

TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS

i) Fineness: Residue on 45-micron IS Sieve, MUX, percent (by wet sieving) 15

ii) Setting time (by Vicat apparatus)

a) Initial, Mitt 90 min

b) Final, Mux 24 hours

IS : 6452-1972 HIGH ALUMINA CEMENT FOR STRUCTURAL USE

IS : 6909-1973 SUPERSULPHATED CEMENT

1. Scope - Requirements for composition, manu- 2. Chemical Requirements

a) 72 + 1 hours, not less than 150 kgf/cm2

--______ ----__ _-- __-_

IS : 8041-1978 RAPID HARDENING PORTLAND CEMENT

Note - The term ‘rapid-hardening’ should not be confused

*Specificationfor ordinary and low heat Portland cement (rhi~tl

IS ‘: 8042-1978 WHITE PORTLAND CEMENT

IS : 8043-1978 HYDROPHOBIC PORTLAND CEMENT

IS : 8 112- 1976 HIGH STRENGTH ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT

1. Scope - Manufacture, and chemical and physi- 3. Physical Requirements

*Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement (third

IS : 2185 (PART I)-1979 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Note -- Concrete masomy units are used for both load-hearing

2.1 Hollow (Open or C/n.wd Cavity) Block - A Over 100 to 1.50 25 25 30

3.1 Xomrnal Dimer~sions : c) Grade C

TABLE 2 BLOCK DENSITY AND COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

TYPE GRADE DENSITY OF BLOCK MINIMUM AVERAGE MINIMUM STRENGTH OF

Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of fhe standard.

IS : 3590-1966 LOAD BEARING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE

Note-For methods of test, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard.

IS : 4996-1968 REINFORCED CONCRETE FENCE POSTS

4 Line Posts - Line posts are intermediate

b) Strainer Posts - Posts notched on three 4. Strength Test

--____ ---- _-- __-_